Yaskawa Servo

YASKAWA
Series SGM H/SGDM
USER'S MANUAL
SGMAH/SGMPH/SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH/SGMCS Servomotors SGDM SERVOPACK
YASKAWA
MANUAL NO. SIEPS80000015A
Copyright 2003 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
About this Manual

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following users. Those selecting -II Series servodrives or peripheral devices for -II Series servodrives. Those wanting to know about the ratings and characteristics of -II Series servodrives. Those designing -II Series servodrive systems. Those installing or wiring -II Series servodrives. Those performing trial operation or adjustments of -II Series servodrives. Those maintaining or inspecting -II Series servodrives.
Description of Technical Terms

The terms in this manual are defined as follows: Servomotor or motor = -II Series SGMAH, SGMPH, SGMGH, SGMSH, SGMDH, servomotor. SERVOPACK = -II Series SGDM amplifier. Servodrive = A set including a servomotor and servo amplifier. Servo System = A servo control system that includes the combination of a servodrive with a host computer and peripheral devices. Parameter number = Numbers that the user inputs toward the SERVOPACK.
Indication of Reverse Signals

In this manual, the names of reverse signals (ones that are valid when low) are written with a forward slash (/) before the signal name, as shown in the following example: S-ON=/S-ON P-CON=/P-CON
iii
Quick access to your required information

Read the chapters marked with 9 to get the information required for your purpose.
Chapter Chapter 1 Outline Chapter 2 Selections Chapter 3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings Chapter 4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings Chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices Chapter 6 Wiring Chapter 7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator Chapter 8 Operation Chapter 9 Adjustments Chapter 10 Upgraded Versions Chapter 11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting Chapter 12 Appendix SERVOPACKs, Servomotors, and Peripheral Devices Ratings and Characteristics System Design Panel Configura-tion and Wiring Trial Operation and Servo Adjustment Inspection and Maintenance
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 9
9 9 9 9
9 9
Visual Aids The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference. Indicates important information that should be memorized, including precautions such as alarm displays to avoid damaging the devices. Indicates supplemental information.
IMPORTANT
INFO
EXAMPLE
Indicates application examples.
TERMS
Indicates definitions of difficult terms or terms that have not been previously explained in this manual.
iv
Related Manuals
Refer to the following manuals as required.
Manual Name -II Series SGMH/SGDM Digital Operator Operation Manual -II Series SERVOPACKs Personal Computer Monitoring Software Operation Manual Manual Number TOE-S800-34 Contents Provides detailed information on the operating method of JUSP-OP02A-2 type Digital Operator (option device). Describes the using and the operating methods on software that changes the local personal computer into the monitor equipment for the -II Series servomotor.
SIE-S800-35
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
WARNING
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation. In some situations, the precautions indicated could have serious consequences if not heeded.
PROHIBITED
Indicates prohibited actions that must not be performed. For example, this symbol would be used as follows to indicate that fire is prohibited: .
MANDATORY
Indicates compulsory actions that must be performed. For example, this symbol would be used as follows to indicate that grounding is compulsory: .
The warning symbols for ISO and JIS standards are different, as shown below.
ISO JIS
The ISO symbol is used in this manual. Both of these symbols appear on warning labels on Yaskawa products. Please abide by these warning labels regardless of which symbol is used.
vi
Notes for Safe Operation

Read this manual thoroughly before checking products on delivery, storage and transportation, installation, wiring, operation and inspection, and disposal of the AC servodrive.
WARNING
Never touch any rotating motor parts while the motor is running. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury. Before starting operation with a machine connected, make sure that an emergency stop can be applied at any time. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury. Never touch the inside of the SERVOPACKs. Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock. Do not touch terminals for five minutes after the power is turned OFF. Residual voltage may cause electric shock. Do not touch terminals for five minutes after voltage resistance test. Residual voltage may cause electric shock. Follow the procedures and instructions for trial operation precisely as described in this manual. Malfunctions that occur after the servomotor is connected to the equipment not only damage the equipment, but may also cause an accident resulting in death or injury. The multiturn limit value must be changed only for special applications. Changing it inappropriately or unintentionally can be dangerous. If the Multiturn Limit Disagreement alarm (A.CC) occurs, check the setting of parameter Pn205 in the SERVOPACK to be sure that it is correct. If Fn013 is executed when an incorrect value is set in Pn205, an incorrect value will be set in the encoder. The alarm will disappear even if an incorrect value is set, but incorrect positions will be detected, resulting in a dangerous situation where the machine will move to unexpected positions. Do not remove the front cover, cables, connectors, or optional items while the power is ON. Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock. Do not damage, press, exert excessive force or place heavy objects on the cables. Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock, stopping operation of the product, or burning. Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to ensure safety. A holding brake for a servomotor with brake is not a stopping device for ensuring safety. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury. Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power loss to avoid an unexpected restart. Take appropriate measures to ensure safety against an unexpected restart. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury. Connect the ground terminal to electrical codes (ground resistance: 100 or less). Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
vii
WARNING
Installation, disassembly, or repair must be performed only by authorized personnel. Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock or injury. Do not modify the product. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury or damage to the product.
Checking on Delivery
CAUTION
Always use the servomotor and SERVOPACK in one of the specified combinations. Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or malfunction.
Storage and Transportation
CAUTION
Do not store or install the product in the following places. Locations subject to direct sunlight. Locations subject to temperatures outside the range specified in the storage or installation temperature conditions. Locations subject to humidity outside the range specified in the storage or installation humidity conditions. Locations subject to condensation as the result of extreme changes in temperature. Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases. Locations subject to dust, salts, or iron dust. Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals. Locations subject to shock or vibration. Failure to observe this caution may result in fire, electric shock, or damage to the product. Do not hold the product by the cables or motor shaft while transporting it. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or malfunction. Do not place any load exceeding the limit specified on the packing box. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or malfunction.
viii
Installation
CAUTION
Never use the products in an environment subject to water, corrosive gases, inflammable gases, or combustibles. Failure to observe this caution may result in electric shock or fire. Do not step on or place a heavy object on the product. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury. Do not cover the inlet or outlet parts and prevent any foreign objects from entering the product. Failure to observe this caution may cause internal elements to deteriorate resulting in malfunction or fire. Be sure to install the product in the correct direction. Failure to observe this caution may result in malfunction. Provide the specified clearances between the SERVOPACK and the control panel or with other devices. Failure to observe this caution may result in fire or malfunction. Do not apply any strong impact. Failure to observe this caution may result in malfunction.
ix
Wiring
CAUTION
Do not connect a three-phase power supply to the U, V, or W output terminals. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or fire. Securely connect the power supply terminals and motor output terminals. Failure to observe this caution may result in fire. Do not bundle or run power and signal lines together in the same duct. Keep power and signal lines separated by at least 30 cm (11.81 in). Failure to observe this caution may result in malfunction. Use twisted-pair shielded wires or multi-core twisted pair shielded wires for signal and encoder (PG) feedback lines. The maximum length is 3 m (118.11 in) for reference input lines and is 20 m (787.40 in) for PG feedback lines. Do not touch the power terminals for five minutes after turning power OFF because high voltage may still remain in the SERVOPACK. Make sure the charge indicator is turned OFF first before starting an inspection. Avoid frequently turning power ON and OFF. Do not turn power ON or OFF more than once per minute. Since the SERVOPACK has a capacitor in the power supply, a high charging current flows for 0.2 seconds when power is turned ON. Frequently turning power ON and OFF causes main power devices such as capacitors and fuses to deteriorate, resulting in unexpected problems. Observe the following precautions when wiring main circuit terminal blocks. Remove the terminal block from the SERVOPACK prior to wiring. Insert only one wire per terminal on the terminal block. Make sure that the core wire is not electrically shorted to adjacent core wires. Do not connect the SERVOPACK for 100 V and 200 V directly to a voltage of 400 V. The SERVOPACK will be destroyed. Install the battery at either the host controller or the SERVOPACK of the encoder. It is dangerous to install batteries at both simultaneously, because that sets up a loop circuit between the batteries. Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Failure to observe this caution may result in motor overrun, injury, or malfunction. Always use the specified power supply voltage. An incorrect voltage may result in burning. Take appropriate measures to ensure that the input power supply is supplied within the specified voltage fluctuation range. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in damage to the product. Install external breakers or other safety devices against short-circuiting in external wiring. Failure to observe this caution may result in fire.
CAUTION
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures for each when installing systems in the following locations. Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise. Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields. Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity. Locations close to power supplies including power supply lines. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the product. Do not reverse the polarity of the battery when connecting it. Failure to observe this caution may damage the battery or cause it to explode.
Operation
CAUTION
Conduct trial operation on the servomotor alone with the motor shaft disconnected from machine to avoid any unexpected accidents. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury. Before starting operation with a machine connected, change the settings to match the parameters of the machine. Starting operation without matching the proper settings may cause the machine to run out of control or malfunction. Forward run prohibited (P-OT) and reverse run prohibited (N-OT) signals are not effective during zero point search mode using parameter Fn003. When using the servomotor for a vertical axis, install the safety devices to prevent workpieces to fall off due to occurrence of alarm or overtravel. Set the servomotor so that it will stop in the zero clamp state at occurrence of overtravel. Failure to observe this caution may cause workpieces to fall off due to overtravel. When not using the normal autotuning, set to the correct moment of inertia ratio. Setting to an incorrect moment of inertia ratio may cause vibration. Do not touch the SERVOPACK heatsinks, regenerative resistor, or servomotor while power is ON or soon after the power is turned OFF. Failure to observe this caution may result in burns due to high temperatures. Do not make any extreme adjustments or setting changes of parameters. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury due to unstable operation. When an alarm occurs, remove the cause, reset the alarm after confirming safety, and then resume operation. Failure to observe this caution may result in injury. Do not use the servo brake of the servomotor for ordinary braking. Failure to observe this caution may result in malfunction.
xi
Maintenance and Inspection
CAUTION
When replacing the SERVOPACK, transfer the previous SERVOPACK parameters to the new SERVOPACK before resuming operation. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to the product. Do not attempt to change wiring while the power is ON. Failure to observe this caution may result in electric shock or injury. Do not disassemble the servomotor. Failure to observe this caution may result in electric shock or injury.
Disposal
CAUTION
When disposing of the products, treat them as ordinary industrial waste.
General Precautions
Note the following to ensure safe application.

The drawings presented in this manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards. Always replace the cover or protective guard as specified first, and then operate the products in accordance with the manual. The drawings presented in this manual are typical examples and may not match the product you received. This manual is subject to change due to product improvement, specification modification, and manual improvement. When this manual is revised, the manual code is updated and the new manual is published as a next edition. If the manual must be ordered due to loss or damage, inform your nearest Yaskawa representative or one of the offices listed on the back of this manual. Yaskawa will not take responsibility for the results of unauthorized modifications of this product. Yaskawa shall not be liable for any damages or troubles resulting from unauthorized modification.
xii
CONTENTS
About this Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -iii Related Manuals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - v Safety Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - vi Notes for Safe Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - vii
1 Outline
1.1 Checking Products - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.1.1 Check Items - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 1.1.2 Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 1.1.3 SERVOPACKs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2 Product Part Names - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4

1.2.1 Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4 1.2.2 SERVOPACKs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.3 Examples of Servo System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7

1.3.1 Single-phase, 100 V and 200 V Main Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7 1.3.2 Three-phase, 200 V Main Circuit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8 1.3.3 Connecting to SGMCS Servomotor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.4 Applicable Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10

1.4.1 North American Safety Standards (UL, CSA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 1.4.2 CE Marking- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upgraded Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
2 Selections
2.1 Servomotor Model Designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.1 Model SGMAH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 2.1.2 Model SGMPH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4 2.1.3 Model SGMGH (1500 min-1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6 2.1.4 Model SGMGH (1000 min-1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8 2.1.5 Model SGMSH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10 2.1.6 Model SGMDH (2000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12 2.1.7 Model SGMCS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
2.2 Selecting Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14

2.2.1 Support Tool for the Capacity Selection of the AC Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14 2.2.2 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14
2.3 SERVOPACK Model Designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
xiii
2.4 -II Series SERVOPACKs and Applicable Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16

2.4.1 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16 2.4.2 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
2.5 Selecting Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18

2.5.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18 2.5.2 Cables for SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23 2.5.3 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27
2.6 Selecting Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30

2.6.1 Special Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-32 2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Conductors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 2.6.4 Regenerative Resistors and Brake Power Supply Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-34
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings

3.1 Ratings and Specifications of SGMAH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
3.1.1 SGMAH Servomotors Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-4 3.1.2 SGMAH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-6 3.1.3 SGMAH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-8
3.2 Ratings and Specifications of SGMPH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11

3.2.1 SGMPH Servomotors Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11 3.2.2 SGMPH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 3.2.3 SGMPH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.3 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1500min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17

3.3.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17 3.3.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21 3.3.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23
3.4 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26

3.4.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26 3.4.2 SGMGH servomotors (1000min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29 3.4.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5 Ratings and Specifications of SGMSH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33

3.5.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33 3.5.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6 Ratings and Specifications of SGMDH (2000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39

3.6.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) With Holding Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39
3.7 Ratings and Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41

3.7.1 Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41 3.7.2 Middle-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
xiv
3.8 Mechanical Specifications of SGMAH, SGMPH, SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47
3.8.1 Precautions on Servomotor Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 3.8.2 Mechanical Tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48 3.8.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 3.8.4 Impact Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 3.8.5 Vibration Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 3.8.6 Vibration Class - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.9 Mechanical Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50

3.9.1 Allowable Loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50 3.9.2 Mechanical Tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-51 3.9.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 3.9.4 Impact Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 3.9.5 Vibration Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 3.9.6 Vibration Class - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 3.9.7 Protective Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52
3.10 Terms and Data for Servomotors With Gears- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 3.11 Servomotor Dimensional Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55 3.12 Dimensional Drawings of SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56
3.12.1 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56 3.12.2 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60 3.12.3 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-64 3.12.4 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes- - - - - - - - - 3-71 3.12.5 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-78
3.13 Dimensional Drawings of SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86

3.13.1 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86 3.13.2 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-88 3.13.3 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-90 3.13.4 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes- - - - - - - - - 3-93 3.13.5 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-96
3.14 Dimensional Drawing of Output Shafts With Oil Seals for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100
3.14.1 SGMAH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100 3.14.2 SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100
3.15 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101

3.15.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 3.15.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-103
xv
3.15.3 Servomotors SGMGH (1500 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106 3.15.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-109 3.15.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-115 3.15.6 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-123
3.16 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-127

3.16.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-127 3.16.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-129 3.16.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-132 3.16.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-137 3.16.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-144
3.17 Dimensional Drawings of SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1)- - - - - - - - - - - - 3-148

3.17.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears and Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-148 3.17.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes - - - - 3-150 3.17.3 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes - - - - 3-152 3.17.4 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-154
3.18 Dimensional Drawings of SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-159

3.18.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) Without Gears and With/Without Brakes- - - - - - - - - - - 3-159
3.19 Dimensional Drawings of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161

3.19.1 SGMCS Servomotors 135 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161 3.19.2 SGMCS Servomotors 175 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161 3.19.3 SGMCS Servomotors 230 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-162 3.19.4 SGMCS Servomotors 290 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-162 3.19.5 SGMCS Servomotors 230 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-163 3.19.6 SGMCS Servomotors 290 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-164 3.19.7 Servomotor Connector for All Small-capacity Series Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-165 3.19.8 Servomotor Connector for All Middle-capacity Series Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-166
3.20 Shaft End Specifications for SGMGH, SGMSH and SGMDH Servomotors - 3-167
xvi
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings

4.1 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.1.1 Single-phase 100 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 4.1.2 Single-phase/Three-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 4.1.3 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.2 SERVOPACK Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6 4.3 SERVOPACK Internal Block Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.3.1 Single-phase 200 V, 30 W to 400 W, and 100 V, 30 W to 200 W Models - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8 4.3.2 Three-phase 200 V, 500 W to 1.5 kW Models- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9 4.3.3 Three-phase 200 V, 2.0 kW to 5.0 kW Models - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9 4.3.4 Three-phase 200 V, 6.0 kW to 15 kW Models- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.4 SERVOPACKs Power Supply Capacities and Power Losses - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11 4.5 SERVOPACK Overload Characteristics and Allowable Load Moment of Inertia 4-12
4.5.1 Overload Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12 4.5.2 Starting and Stopping Time- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 4.5.3 Load Moment of Inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4.6 SERVOPACK Dimensional Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 4.7 Dimensional Drawings of Base-mounted SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.7.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W to 100 W (A3BD to 01BD, A3BDA to 01BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W to 200 W (A3AD to 02AD, A3ADA to 02ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17 4.7.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD, 02BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD, 04ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18 4.7.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD to 10AD, 05ADA to 10ADA) - - - - - - - - - - 4-19 4.7.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD, 15ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20 4.7.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD to 30AD, 20ADA to 30ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21 4.7.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-22 4.7.7 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA to 75ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23 4.7.8 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA to 1EADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
4.8 Dimensional Drawings of Rack-mounted SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25

4.8.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W (A3BD-R to 01BD-R, A3BDA-R to 01BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W/200 W (A3AD-R to 02AD-R, A3ADA-R to 02ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25 4.8.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD-R, 02BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD-R, 04ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26 4.8.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD-R to 10AD-R, 05ADA-R to 10ADA-R) - - - 4-27 4.8.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD-R, 15ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-28 4.8.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD-R to 30AD-R, 20ADA-R to 30ADA-R) - - - - - - - - 4-29 4.8.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30
4.9 Dimensional Drawings of Duct-ventilated SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-31

4.9.1 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA-P to 75ADA-P) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-31 4.9.2 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA-P/1EADA-P) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-32
xvii
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices

5.1 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Servomotor Main Circuit Cable - - - 5-3
5.1.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-3 5.1.2 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-3 5.1.3 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-4 5.1.4 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-5 5.1.5 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-6
5.2 Servomotor Main Circuit Wire Size and Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8

5.2.1 Wire Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-8 5.2.2 SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotor Connectors for Standard Environments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-9 5.2.3 SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotor Connector Configurations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12 5.2.4 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13 5.2.5 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-15 5.2.6 SGMSH Servomotor (3000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17 5.2.7 SGMDH Servomotor (2000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18 5.2.8 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-19 5.2.9 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22 5.2.10 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25 5.2.11 SGMDH Servomotors (2000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28 5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29 5.2.13 Connector Dimensional Drawings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38

5.3.1 Cable Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38 5.3.2 Single-phase 100 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39 5.3.3 Single-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39 5.3.4 Three-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39
5.4 Encoder Cables for CN2 Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40

5.4.1 Encoder Cable With Connectors For SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40 5.4.2 Encoder Cable With Connectors for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors- - - - - - - - 5-40 5.4.3 Encoder Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-41 5.4.4 Encoder Cable with a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42 5.4.5 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44 5.4.6 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45 5.4.7 Encoder Cables for SGMCS Servomotors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-46
xviii
5.5 Connectors and Cables for Encoder Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48

5.5.1 Connectors and Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48 5.5.2 Connectors and Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50 5.5.3 Connectors and Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-52
5.6 Flexible Cables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53 5.7 I/O Signal Cables for CN1 Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54
5.7.1 Standard Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54 5.7.2 Connector Type and Cable Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54 5.7.3 Connection Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-56
5.8 Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-57

5.8.1 Cables for Connecting Personal Computers- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-57 5.8.2 Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-58 5.8.3 Cables for Analog Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-59 5.8.4 Connector Terminal Block Converter Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-60 5.8.5 Brake Power Supply Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-61 5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-63 5.8.7 Regenerative Resistor Unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-65 5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-66 5.8.9 Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-68 5.8.10 Noise Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-69 5.8.11 Magnetic Contactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-74 5.8.12 Surge Suppressor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-76 5.8.13 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-78 5.8.14 Variable Resistor for Speed and Torque Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-80 5.8.15 Encoder Signal Converter Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-81
6 Wiring
6.1 Wiring Main Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.1.1 Names and Functions of Main Circuit Terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 6.1.2 Wiring Main Circuit Power Supply Connector (Spring Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.2 Wiring Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7

6.2.1 Connecting an Encoder (CN2) and Output Signals from the SERVOPACK (CN1) - - - - - - - - - 6-7 6.2.2 Encoder Connector (CN2) Terminal Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
6.3 Examples of I/O Signal Connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9

6.3.1 Speed Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9 6.3.2 Position Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10 6.3.3 Torque Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11 6.3.4 I/O Signal Connector (CN1) Terminal Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12 6.3.5 I/O Signal (CN1) Names and Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 6.3.6 Interface Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
xix
6.4 Others - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

6.4.1 Wiring Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19 6.4.3 Installation Conditions of EMC Directives - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22 6.4.4 Installation Conditions of UL Standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 6.4.5 Using More Than One SERVOPACK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25 6.4.6 Extending Encoder Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 6.4.7 Operating Conditions on 400-V Power Supply Voltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29
6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.5.1 Regenerative Power and Regenerative Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31 6.5.2 Connecting External Regenerative Resistors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator

7.1 Functions on Digital Operator/Panel Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 Connecting the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-2 7.1.2 Key Names and Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-3 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-4 7.1.4 Status Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-6
7.2 Operation in Utility Function Mode (Fn) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8

7.2.1 List of Utility Function Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-8 7.2.2 Alarm Traceback Data Display (Fn000)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-9 7.2.3 Zero-point Search Mode (Fn003) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10 7.2.4 Parameter Settings Initialization (Fn005)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11 7.2.5 Alarm Traceback Data Clear (Fn006) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12 7.2.6 Automatic Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13 7.2.7 Manual Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00F) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14 7.2.8 Password Setting (Protects Parameters from Being Changed) (Fn010) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15 7.2.9 Motor Models Display (Fn011) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16 7.2.10 Software Version Display (Fn012) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3 Operation in Parameter Setting Mode (Pn)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18

7.3.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.4 Operation in Monitor Mode (Un) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27

7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27
xx
8 Operation
8.1 Trial Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.1.1 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6 8.1.2 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load from Host Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9 8.1.3 Trial Operation with the Servomotor Connected to the Machine - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15 8.1.4 Servomotor with Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16 8.1.5 Position Control by Host Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16
8.2 Control Mode Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17 8.3 Setting Common Basic Functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18
8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18 8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-19 8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-20 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22 8.3.5 Selecting the Stopping Method After Servo OFF- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25 8.3.6 Instantaneous Power Loss Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-26
8.4 Absolute Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27

8.4.1 Interface Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-28 8.4.2 Selecting an Absolute Encoder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29 8.4.3 Handling Batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29 8.4.4 Replacing Batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-30 8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-30 8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-32 8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-36 8.4.8 Multiturn Limit Setting When Multiturn Limit Disagreement (A.CC) Occurred - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-37
8.5 Operating Using Speed Control with Analog Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38

8.5.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38 8.5.2 Setting Input Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-39 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-40 8.5.4 Soft Start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43 8.5.5 Speed Reference Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43 8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43 8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45 8.5.8 Speed Coincidence Output- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-47
8.6 Operating Using Position Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48

8.6.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48 8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-50 8.6.3 Position Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-53 8.6.4 Smoothing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-57 8.6.5 Positioning Completed Output Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-58 8.6.6 Positioning Near Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-59 8.6.7 Reference Pulse Inhibit Function (INHIBIT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-60
xxi
8.7 Operating Using Torque Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61

8.7.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61 8.7.2 Torque Reference Input- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61 8.7.3 Adjusting the Reference Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-62 8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-64
8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-66
8.8.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-66 8.8.2 Input Signal Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-67 8.8.3 Operating Using an Internally Set Speed- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-67
8.9 Limiting Torque- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69

8.9.1 Internal Torque Limit (Limiting Maximum Output Torque) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69 8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-70 8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-72 8.9.4 Torque Limiting Using an External Torque Limit and Analog Voltage Reference - - - - - - - - - - 8-73 8.9.5 Checking Output Torque Limiting during Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-74
8.10 Control Mode Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-75

8.10.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-75 8.10.2 Switching the Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-75
8.11 Other Output Signals- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77

8.11.1 Servo Alarm Output (ALM) and Alarm Code Output (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77 8.11.2 Warning Output (/WARN)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-78 8.11.3 Running Output Signal (/TGON) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-78 8.11.4 Servo Ready (/S-RDY) Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-79
9 Adjustments
9.1 Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
9.1.1 Servo Gain Adjustment Methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-2 9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-3
9.2 Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5

9.2.1 Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-5 9.2.2 Online Autotuning Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-6 9.2.3 Selecting the Online Autotuning Execution Method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-7 9.2.4 Machine Rigidity Setting for Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-8 9.2.5 Method for Changing the Machine Rigidity Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-9 9.2.6 Saving the Results of Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-10 9.2.7 Procedure for Saving the Results of Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
9.3 Manual Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12

9.3.1 Explanation of Servo Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12 9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13 9.3.3 Position Loop Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13 9.3.4 Speed Loop Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14 9.3.5 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14
xxii
9.4 Servo Gain Adjustment Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15

9.4.1 Feed-forward Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15 9.4.2 Torque Feed-forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-16 9.4.3 Speed Feed-forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17 9.4.4 Proportional Control Operation (Proportional Operation Reference) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18 9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-19 9.4.6 Setting the Speed Bias- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22 9.4.7 Speed Feedback Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22 9.4.8 Speed Feedback Compensation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-23 9.4.9 Switching Gain Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-25 9.4.10 Torque Reference Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-26
9.5 Analog Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28
10 Upgraded Versions
10.1 Upgraded Versions for SGDM SERVOPACK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2 10.2 Upgraded Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.2.1 Additional Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3 10.2.2 Improved Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.3 Additional Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4

10.3.1 SGMCS Direct-drive Motor Supporting Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4 10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 10.3.3 Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Switching Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10 10.3.4 Second Stage Notch Filter and Changeable Q Value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12 10.3.5 Automatic Gain Switching Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.4 Improved Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16

10.4.1 Moment of Inertia Ratio Setting Range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16 10.4.2 Adaptation to Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16 10.4.3 Serial Number and Manufactured Data Reading Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-18
10.5 Additional and Improved Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19

10.5.1 Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 10.5.2 Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-20 10.5.3 Input Signal Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-20 10.5.4 Output Signal Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21 10.5.5 Utility Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21 10.5.6 Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-22
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting

11.1 Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.1 Alarm Display Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2 11.1.2 Warning Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5 11.1.3 Troubleshooting of Alarm and Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6 11.1.4 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-17
xxiii
11.2 Inspection and Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21

11.2.1 Servomotor Inspection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21 11.2.2 SERVOPACK Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21 11.2.3 SERVOPACKs Parts Replacement Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-22
12 Appendix
12.1 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2
12.1.1 Selection Example for Speed Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2 12.1.2 Selection Example for Position Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4 12.1.3 Calculating the Required Capacity of Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-7
12.2 Connection to Host Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14

12.2.1 Example of Connection to MP920 4-axes Analog Module SVA-01 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14 12.2.2 Example of Connection to CP-9200SH Servo Controller Module SVA (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15 12.2.3 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL120/130 Series Motion Module MC20 - - - - - - - 12-16 12.2.4 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL60/70 Series Positioning Module B2813 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-17 12.2.5 Example of Connection to OMRONs Motion Control Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-18 12.2.6 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-19 12.2.7 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC221 (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-20 12.2.8 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC112 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21 12.2.9 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD72 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-22 12.2.10 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD75 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23
12.3 List of Parameters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-24

12.3.1 Utility Functions List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-24 12.3.2 List of Parameters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-25 12.3.3 Monitor Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.4 Parameter Recording Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-44
INDEX
xxiv
1
1
Outline
1.1 Checking Products - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

1.1.1 Check Items - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 1.1.2 Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 1.1.3 SERVOPACKs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2 Product Part Names - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4

1.2.1 Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4 1.2.2 SERVOPACKs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.3 Examples of Servo System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7

1.3.1 Single-phase, 100 V and 200 V Main Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7 1.3.2 Three-phase, 200 V Main Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8 1.3.3 Connecting to SGMCS Servomotor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.4 Applicable Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10

1.4.1 North American Safety Standards (UL, CSA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 1.4.2 CE Marking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upgraded Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1-1
1 Outline 1.1.1 Check Items
1.1 Checking Products

The following procedure is used to check the AC servodrives of - Series products on delivery.
1.1.1 Check Items

Check the following items when - Series products are delivered.
Check Items Are the delivered products the ones that were ordered? Does the servomotor shaft rotate smoothly? Is there any damage? Comments Check the model numbers marked on the nameplates on the servomotor and SERVOPACK. (Refer to the descriptions of model numbers in the following section.) The servomotor shaft is normal if it can be turned smoothly by hand. Servomotors with brakes, however, cannot be turned manually. Check the overall appearance, and check for damage or scratches that may have occurred during shipping.
If any of the above items are faulty or incorrect, contact your Yaskawa representative or the dealer from whom you purchased the products.
1.1.2 Servomotors
SGMAH and SGMPH
AC SERVO MOTOR
PURODUCT SERVICE
Bauart .. gepruft
Servomotor model Ratings Order number Serial number
TYPE SGMAH-10ACA21 1000 W 3.18 N m 3000 min-1 5.7 A 200 V CONT ins F -039 O/N 9W0774 002A
S/N BB2 753000039 DATE 0002
YASKAWA ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN
SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH
Manufacturing date
SGMCS
Nameplate Servomotor model
W
AC SERVO MOTOR
Ratings Order number Serial number
SGMCS-04C3A11 V 200 A 2.1 84 min -1 m 4.0 200 Ins. A
O/N 9271316-1 S/N DD 9964567890012

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN
1-2
1.1 Checking Products
1.1.3 SERVOPACKs
SGDM for 30 W to 5.0 kW SGDM for 6.0 kW to 15.0 kW
SERVOPACK model Applicable power supply Serial number
SERVOPACK
MODEL SGDM-30ADA AC-INPUT AC-OUTPUT VOLTS 200-230 VOLTS 0-230 Hz 60/60 PHASE 3 PHASE 3 AMPS 24.8 AMPS 18.6 KU (MP) 3.0 (4.0)
Applicable motor capacity
S/N
412808-15-1
YASKAWA ELECTRIC
MADE IN JAPAN
1-3
1 Outline 1.2.1 Servomotors
1.2 Product Part Names

1.2.1 Servomotors
(1) SGMAH and SGMPH Without Gears and Brakes
Servomotor connector Servomotor main circuit cable Nameplate Flange Output shaft Encoder (Detecting section) Encoder connector
Encoder cable
(2) SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Without Gears and Brakes

Servomotor connector Encoder connector
Nameplate Flange Encoder (Detecting section) Output shaft
(3) SGMCS Direct-drive Motor

Rotating axis Encoder connector Nameplate Servomotor connector
Nameplate
Frame
Mounting flange Encoder connector Servomotor connector
View A
1-4
1.2 Product Part Names
1.2.2 SERVOPACKs
(1) SGDM for 30 W to 5.0 kW
With the front cover open
Battery holder
Used to house the backup battery for an absolute encoder. Refer to 5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery, 8.4.3 Handing Batteries, and 8.4.4 Battery Replacement Procedure.
CN5 Analog monitor connector

Used to monitor motor speed, torque reference, and other values through a special cable. Refer to 5.8.3 Cables for Analog Monitor or 9.5 Analog Monitor.
CN8 Battery connector

MODE/SET DATA/
CHARGE
POWER
Used to connect to the backup battery for an absolute encoder. Refer to 5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery, 8.4.3 Handing Batteries, and 8.4.4 Battery Replacement Procedure.
Panel display
5-digit, 7-segment LED used to display SERVOPACK status, alarm status, and other values when parameters are input. Refer to 7.1.2 Key Names and Functions.
YASKAWA SERVOPACK YASKAWA
Front cover SERVOPACK model

Refer to 2.1 SERVOPACK Model Designations.
SGDM-
Panel operator Charge indicator

Lights when the main circuit power supply is ON and stays lit as long as the main circuit power supply capacitor remains charged. Therefore, do not touch the SERVOPACK even after the power supply is turned OFF if the indicator is lit.
Panel keys
MODE/SET CHARGE DATA/ POWER
Used to set parameters. Refer to 7.1.2 Key Names and Functions.
Power ON indicator
Lights when the control power supply is ON.
Main circuit power supply terminals

Used for main circuit power supply input. Refer to 6.1 Wiring Main Circuit.
CN3 Connector for personal computer monitoring and digital operator

Used to communicate with a personal computer or to connect a digital operator. Refer to 5.8.1 Cables for Connecting Personal Computer and 5.8.2 Digital Operator.
Control power supply terminals

Used for control power supply input. Refer to 6.1 Wiring Main Circuit.
CN1 I/O signal connector

Used for reference input signals and sequence I/O signals. Refer to 6.3 Examples of I/O Signal Connections.
Regenerative resistor connecting terminals

Used to connect external regenerative resistors. Refer to 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors.
Nameplate (side view)

Indicates the SERVOPACK model and ratings. Refer to 1.1.3 SERVOPACKs.
Servomotor terminals
Connects to the servomotor power line. Refer to 6.1 Wiring Main Circuit.
CN2 Encoder connector

Connects to the encoder in the servomotor. Refer to 6.2 Wiring Encoders.
Ground terminal
Be sure to connect to protect against electrical shock. Refer to 6.1 Wiring Main Circuit.
INFO
Connecting terminal of DC Reactor For connecting a reactor, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
1-5
1 Outline 1.2.2 SERVOPACKs
(2) SGDM for 6.0 kW to 15.0 kW

Power indicator Panel operator
SERVOPACK 200V
Panel display CN8 Battery connector

CN8
SERVOPACK model CN3 Connector for personal computer monitoring and digital operator
SGDMVer.
YASKAWA
POWER
Battery holder
CN3
MODE/SET DATA/
CN5
BATTERY
CN5 Analog monitor connector Panel switch
Charge indicator
CHARGE
! WARNING
Control circuit terminal

L1C L2C
CN1
CN2 CN2 Encoder connector
CN1 I/O signal connector
L1
L2
L3
B1
B2
Nameplate (side view)
Main circuit power supply terminals: L1, L2, L3
Servomotor terminals: U, V, W Ground terminal Regenerative resistor connecting terminals: B1, B2
* Control circuit terminal and regenerative resistor connecting terminals differ the position of the terminal block by the SERVOPACK model. Refer to Chapter Chapter 4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings for details. SERVOPACK Model SGDM-60ADA, 75ADA SGDM-1AADA, 1EADA Reference 4.7.7, 4.9.1 4.7.8, 4.9.2
1-6
1.3 Examples of Servo System Configurations

This section describes examples of basic servo system configuration.
1.3.1 Single-phase, 100 V and 200 V Main Circuit

Power supply Single-phase 100/200 VAC
R T
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Protects the power supply line by shutting the circuit OFF when overcurrent is detected. (Refer to 5.8.9.)
For connecting a DC reactor, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
1
SGDMAD SGDMADA SGDMBD SGDMBDA SERVOPACK
Magnetic contactor
Turns the servo ON and OFF. Install a surge suppressor. (Refer to 5.8.11.)
YASKAWA SERVOPACK 200V
Noise filter
Used to eliminate external noise from the power line. (Refer to 5.8.10.)
SGDM-
Digital operator
(Refer to 5.8.2.)
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
(Refer to 5.8.2.)
Connection cable for digital operator
Personal computer
L1 L2 +1
C N 3
(Refer to 5.8.1.)
C N 1
Connection cable for personal computer
+2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W C N
I/O signal cable
Host controller
Turns the brake power supply ON or OFF. Install a surge protector. (Refer to 5.8.11.)
Magnetic contactor
(Refer to 5.7.)
Brake power Regenerative supply resistor

Used for a servomotor with a brake. (Refer to 5.8.5.)
Connect an external regenerative resistor to terminals B1 and B2 if the regenerative capacity is insufficient. (Refer to 5.8.6.)
Encoder cable
(Refer to 5.4, 5.5.)
(Refer to 5.1, 5.2.)
Servomotor main circuit cable
SGM H Servomotor
1-7
1 Outline 1.3.2 Three-phase, 200 V Main Circuit
1.3.2 Three-phase, 200 V Main Circuit

Power supply Three-phase 200 VAC R S T Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
The main circuit positive-side terminal is only available to use at three-phase 200 VAC, 6 kW SERVOPACK. Do not use 1 or 2. 2 Be sure to disconnect the lead between B2 and B3, before connecting an external regenerative registor to the SERVOPACK. 3 For connecting a DC reactor, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
Noise filter
Magnetic contactor
SGDMAD SGDMADA SERVOPACK

Digital operator
(Refer to 5.8.2.)
YASKAWA 200V SERVOPACK
(Refer to 5.8.2.)
Personal computer
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER

(Refer to 5.8.1.)
L1 L2 L3
C N 3
1 3 Regenerative resistor
B1 B2
1 2 C N 1
I/O signal cable
Host controller
L1C L2C
B3 U V W C N 2
(Refer to 5.7.)
Magnetic contactor
Turns the brake power supply ON and OFF. Install a surge protector. (Refer to 5.8.11.)
Brake power supply

Used for a servomotor with a brake. (Refer to 5.8.5.)
(Refer to 5.1, 5.2.)
(Refer to 5.4, 5.5.)
Encoder cable
SGM H Servomotor
1-8
1.3.3 Connecting to SGMCS Servomotor

Power supply Single-phase or Three-phase 100/200VAC
R T
Note: For connecting a DC reactor, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Noise filter
SGDMADA SERVOPACK
YASKAWA SERVOP ACK
200V
SGDM-
Magnetic contactor
Digital operator
(Refer to 5.8.2.)
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER

(Refer to 5.8.2.)
Personal computer
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
(Refer to 5.8.1.)
I/O signal cable
Host controller
Regenerative resistor
C N
(Refer to 5.7.)
Nameplate Encoder cable Servomotor main circuit cable
SGMCS Servomotor
Servomotor main circuit cable (Refer to 5.1, 5.2.)
View A
Encoder cable (Refer to 5.4, 5.5.)
1-9
1 Outline 1.4.1 North American Safety Standards (UL, CSA)
1.4 Applicable Standards

-II Series servodrives conform to the following overseas standards.
1.4.1 North American Safety Standards (UL, CSA)
C
Model SERVOPACK SGDM SGMAH SGMPH SGMGH SGMSH SGMDH SGMCS
UL
R
US
LISTED
UL1 Standards (UL File No.) UL508C(E147823)
US
Certifications
CSA2 Standards CSA C22.2 No.14
Servomotor
UL1004(E165827)
CSA C22.2 No.100
UL
* 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. * 2. Canadian Standards Association.
1.4.2 CE Marking
Model SERVOPACK SGDM SGMAH SGMPH SGMGH SGMSH SGMDH SGMCS
Low Voltage Directive EN50178 IEC60034-1 IEC60034-5 IEC60034-8 IEC60034-9
EMC Directive EMI EMS
Certifications
Servomotor
EN55011 group 1 class A
EN50082-2 or EN61000-6-2
TV PS
* TV Product Services GmbH Note: For installation conditions, refer to 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control. Because SERVOPACKs and servomotors are built-in type, reconfirmation is required after being installed in the final product.
1-10
1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upgraded Functions
1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upgraded Functions

The added or improved functions differ depending on the SERVOPACK model or software version number: SGDM-D SGDM-DA SGDM-A (Software version No. 32 or later) Refer to the following table for the added or improved functions for each model. This table can also be used in reference to other SERVOPACK models.
1
Reference Section -
Function Item
Description
Applicable capacity range Speed feed forward Torque limit using an external torque limit and analog voltage reference Input signal polarity reversal Output signal polarity reversal Multiturn limit setting Multiturn limit disagreement alarm detection Average movement filter of position reference
30W to 3.0 KW 30W to 15.0 kW In the position control mode, the speed feed forward reference using an analog voltage can be input by the speed reference (VREF) input. To enable the torque limit function using analog voltage reference only when either /P-CL or / N-CL signal is ON. To reverse the Enabled logic polarity of sequence input signal To reverse the Enabled logic polarity of sequence output signal To set the upper limit of multiturn data when using an absolute encoder. To detect the alarm A.CC when the multiturn limit value set in the encoder does not agree with that in the SERVOPACK. To filter the position reference pulse of constant frequency inside the SERVOPACK. Either acceleration/deceleration filter or average movement filter can be selected. Filtering function to suppress vibration according to the machines vibration frequency. A second stage notch filter is added. And the Q value (sharpness of notching) can be changed.
-II Series SERVOPACK SGDMDA with Software D DA Version No. 32 or later Applicable Applicable Applicable N/A Applicable Applicable
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
9.4.3
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
8.9.4
N/A N/A
Applicable Applicable
Applicable Applicable
7.3.2 7.3.3
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
8.4.7
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
8.4.8
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
8.6.4
Notch filter Second stage notch filter and changeable Q value
N/A
Applicable
Applicable
9.4.10
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.3.4
1-11
1 Outline
(Contd) -II Series SERVOPACK SGDMDA with Software D DA Version No. 32 or later N/A N/A Applicable Reference Section
Function Item
Description
Direct-drive motor for SGMCS Single-turn data for absolute encoder
Applicable to the SGMCS directdrive motors
10.3.1
Adapted to single-turn data absolute encoders that are mounted on direct-drive motors as standard The upper limit of diving output Enhanced divid- 16384 [P/R] (equivalent to 16ing output resolu- bit) of feedback pulse is tion increased to 262144 [P/R] (equivalent to 20-bit). Reference pulse The reference pulse multiplicainput multiplication can be selected from 1 to 99. tion switching Automatic gain switching Increase moment of inertia ratio range Read serial number and date of manufacture The switching between Gain Setting 1 and Gain Setting 2 is automatically carried out according to the conditions of position reference and position error. The setting range 0 to 10,000% of moment of inertia ratio is extended to 0 to 20,000%. The serial number and manufacture for the data of SERVOPACK can be read with SigmaWin+ (Ver. 1.00).
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.4.2
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.3.2
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.3.3
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.3.5
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.4.1
N/A
N/A
Applicable
10.4.3
1-12
2
Selections
2
2.1 Servomotor Model Designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

2.1.1 Model SGMAH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 2.1.2 Model SGMPH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4 2.1.3 Model SGMGH (1500 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6 2.1.4 Model SGMGH (1000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8 2.1.5 Model SGMSH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10 2.1.6 Model SGMDH (2000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12 2.1.7 Model SGMCS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
2.2 Selecting Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14

2.2.1 Support Tool for the Capacity Selection of the AC Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14 2.2.2 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14
2.3 SERVOPACK Model Designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15 2.4 -II Series SERVOPACKs and Applicable Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16
2.4.1 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16 2.4.2 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
2.5 Selecting Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18

2.5.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18 2.5.2 Cables for SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23 2.5.3 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27
2.6 Selecting Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30

2.6.1 Special Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Conductors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors - - - - - - - 2.6.4 Regenerative Resistors and Brake Power Supply Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30 2-32 2-33 2-34
2-1
2 Selections 2.1.1 Model SGMAH (3000 min-1)
2.1 Servomotor Model Designations

This section explains how to check the servomotor model and ratings. The alphanumeric codes after SGMH indicate the specifications.
2.1.1 Model SGMAH (3000 min-1)

(1) Without Gears
1st + 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 2nd digits digits digits digits digits digits
SGMAH 02 A A A 2 1
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal

Code Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) Code A3 A5 01 02 03 04 07 08

: Available
3rd digit:Voltage A:200V,B:100V A B
B C D E S
Rated Output
0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.65 0.75

Code
6th digit: Shaft End

Specifications Straight without key Straight with key Straight with key and tap Straight with tap
Option
Remarks
Standard
2 4 6 8
4th digit: Serial Encoder

Code Specifications Remarks Standard Option
5th digit: Design Revision Order

Code Specifications Fixed
1 4 A B
16-bit absolute encoder 1 16-bit absolute encoder 1 with super capacitor
13-bit incremental encoder 2 Standard 16-bit incremental encoder 1 Option
1. The number of encoder pulses: 16384 P/Rev. 2. The number of encoder pulses: 2048 P/Rev.
2-2
(2) With Gears

1st + 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th digits digits digits digits digits digits digits digits
SGMAH 01 A A A H 1 2 B
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) Code Rated Output A3 A5 01 02 03 04 07 08
: Available
3rd digit:Voltage
9th digit: Brake

Code Specifications
A:200V,B:100V A B
1 B C
Without brake With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake
0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.65 0.75

Code

Specifications No shaft Straight without key Straight with key and tap Straight with tap
6th digit: Gear Type Code
0 2 6 8
: Available

8th digit: (Shaft End Code): 0

7th digit: 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: 6th Gear Ratio Code of the Rated Output and Voltage digit; Gear Specifi- A3A A5A 01A 02A 04A 08A Type Code cations A3B A5B 01B 02B Code 1 G (Lowbacklash) 2 7 B C
: Available
1 4 A B
1 2
1/5 1/9 1/33 1/11 1/21
The number of encoder pulses: 16384 P/Rev. The number of encoder pulses: 2048 P/Rev.
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code Specifications Fixed
8th digit: (Shaft End Code): 2, 6, 8

6th 7th digit: 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: digit; Gear Ratio Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Gear Type Code Specifi- A3A A5A 01A 02A 04A 08A Code cations A3B A5B 01B 02B 1 H (Lowbacklash) 2 7 B C
: Available
A
6th digit: Gear Type Code Specifications
8th digit: Shaft End Code 0 2 6 8 2 6
1/5 1/9 1/33 1/11 1/21
G H J
HDS planetary low-backlash gear HDS planetary low-backlash gear
Standard backlash gear
8th digit: (Shaft End Code): 2, 6
7th digit: 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: 6th Gear Ratio Code of the Rated Output and Voltage digit; Gear Specifi- A3A A5A 01A 02A Type Code 04A 08A cations A3B A5B 01B 02B Code J (Standard) 1 3 7 C
: Available
1/5 3/31 1/33 1/21
2-3
2 Selections 2.1.2 Model SGMPH (3000 min-1)
2.1.2 Model SGMPH (3000 min-1)

(1) Without Gears
1st + 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th digits digits digits digits digits digits
SGMPH 02 A A A 2 1
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output 3rd digit: Voltage A:200V,B:100V (kW) Code Rated Output 01 02 04 08 15
: Available
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal

Code 1 B C D E S Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5

Code Specifications Straight without key Straight with key Straight with key and tap Straight with tap
Option
4th digit: Serial Encoder Code Specifications

1
Remarks
Standard
Remarks
1 Standard
2 4 6 8
1 16-bit absolute encoder 4 16-bit absolute encoder

with super capacitor
Option
A B
1 2
13-bit incremental encoder2 Standard 16-bit incremental encoder1

Option
5th digits: Design Revision Order

Code Specifications Fixed IP67 water-proof specifications
The number of encoder pulses: 16384 P/Rev. The number of encoder pulses: 2048 P/Rev.
A E
2-4
(2) With Gears
SGMPH 01 A A A H 1 2 B
1st + 2nd digit:
Rated Output (kW)
3rd digit: Voltage

A:200V,B:100V A B
9th digit: Brake

Code Specifications
Code Rated Output

01 02 04 08 15 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5
1 B C
Without brake With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake 6th digit: Gear TypeCode
G H J

Code
0 2 6 8
: Available
Specifications No shaft
Straight without key Straight with key and tap

1 4 A B
1 2 The
Straight with tap : Available
(1) Rated Output: 0.1 kW
0.75 kW
8th digit (Shaft End Code): 0

1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: 6 digit: 7th digit: Code of the Rated Gear Gear Ratio Output and Voltage Type Specifi- 01A 02A 04A 08A Code Code cations 01B 02B
The number of encoder pulses: 16384 P/Rev. number of encoder pulses: 2048 P/Rev.
5th digit: Design Revision Order

Code Specifications Fixed IP67 water-proof specifications
1/5 1/33 1/11 1/21
A E
(Low- 7 back- B lash) C

: Available
6th digit: Gear Type

Code Specifications
HDS planetary low-backlash gear HDS planetary low-backlash gear
8th digit:
Shaft End Code 0 2 6 8 2 6
8th digit (Shaft End Code): 2, 6, 8

6 digit: 7th digit: Code of the Rated Gear Ratio Output and Voltage Gear Type Specifi- 01A 02A 04A 08A Code Code cations
01B 02B H 1 1/5 1/33 1/11 1/21
1st + 2nd + 3rd digits:
G H J
Standard backlash gear
(2) Rated Output1.5 kW
8th digit (Shaft End Code): 0
1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: 6 digit: 7th digit: Gear Gear Ratio Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Specifi15A Code Code cations
G 1 1/5 1/33 1/11 1/21
(Low- 7 back- B lash) C

: Available
8th digit (Shaft End Code): 2, 6

6 digit: 7th digit: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Gear Gear Ratio Type Code Specifi- 01A 02A 04A 08A 15A cations 01B 02B Code
H 1 1/5 3/31 (Low- 3 back- 7 1/33 lash) C 1/21 : Available
1st + 2nd + 3rd digits:
(Low- 7 back- B lash)
: Available
8th digit (Shaft End Code): 2, 6, 8

1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: 6 digit: 7th digit: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Gear Gear Ratio Type Specifi15A Code Code cations
H 1 1/5 1/33 1/11 1/21
(Low- 7 back- B lash)
: Available
2-5
2 Selections 2.1.3 Model SGMGH (1500 min-1)
2.1.3 Model SGMGH (1500 min-1)

(1) Without Gears
SGMGH 13 A C A 2 1
1st + 2nd digits: 3rd digit: Voltage Rated Output (kW) A:200V Code Rated Output 05 09 13 20 30 44 55 75 1A 1E
: Available
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal Code 1 B C D E S Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal 6th digit: Shaft End Code Specifications Straight without key Taper 1/10, with parallel key Taper 1/10, with woodruff key Option Straight with key and tap
0.45 0.85 1.3 1.8 2.9 4.4 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 2 3 5 6
Remarks
Standard
4th digit: Serial Encoder Code Specifications Remarks Standard
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code Specifications

Standard
2 C
17-bit absolute encoder 17-bit incremental encoder
A C
The number of encoder pulses: 32768 P/Rev.
For high-performance machine tool (4.4 kW or less)
2-6
(2) With Gears

SGMGH 20 A C A L A 4 B
1 B C
9th digit: Brake

Code Specifications

L S T
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW)
3rd digit: Voltage A:200V

A
Code
4 6
Code
05 09 13 20 30 44 55 75 1A 1E
Rated Output
Specifications Straight with key Straight with key and tap
0.45 0.85 1.3 1.8 2.9 4.4 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
: Available
Code
L S T
6th digit: Gear Type Specifications IMT planetary low-backlash gear (Flange type) Standard backlash gear (Foot mounting type) Standard backlash gear (Flange type)
: Available
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code Specifications A Standard C For high-performance machine tool 4th digit: Serial Encoder
Code
2 C
Specifications Remarks 17-bit absolute encoder Standard 17-bit incremental encoder
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Code Code Specifications 13A 05A 09A 20A 30A 44A
L (Lowbacklash)
: Available
1 2 5 7 8
1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Code Code Specifications 13A 55A 75A 05A 09A 20A 30A 44A
S (Standard)
: Available
A B C 7
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Code Code Specifications 13A 55A 05A 09A 20A 30A 44A
T (Standard)
: Available
A B C 7
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
2-7
2 Selections 2.1.4 Model SGMGH (1000 min-1)
2.1.4 Model SGMGH (1000 min-1)

(1) Without Gears
SGMGH 12 A C B 2 1
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) Code Rated Output 03 06 09 12 20 30 40 55
: Available
3rd digit: Voltage A: 200V A

1 B C D E S
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal Code Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal 6th digit: Shaft End Code Specifications Straight without key Taper 1/10, with parallel key Taper 1/10, with woodruff key Option Straight with key and tap
0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.5 2 3

Remarks
Standard
5
Remarks
Code
Specifications
2 C
Standard
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code Specifications

Standard
B D
For high-performance machine tool
2-8
(2) With Gears

SGMGH 20 A C B L B 4 B
1 B C
9th digit: Brake

Code Specifications

1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW)
Code
3rd digit: Voltage

A:200V A
Code
03 06 09 12 20 30 40 55
Rated Output
6 : Available
Specifications Straight with key Straight with key and tap
0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.5
Code
L S T
6th digit: Gear Type Specifications IMT planetary low-backlash gear (Flange type) Standard backlash gear (Foot mounting type) Standard backlash gear (Flange type)
: Available
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code Specifications B Standard D For high-performance machine tool 4th digit: Serial Encoder
Code
2 C
Specifications Remarks 17-bit absolute encoder Standard 17-bit incremental encoder
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Code Code Specifications 03A 06A 09A 12A 20A 30A 40A 55A
1 2 5 (Lowbacklash) 7 8 : Available L
1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type 55A Code Code Specifications 03A 06A 09A 12A 20A 30A 40A
A B (StanC dard) 7 : Available

S
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
6th digit: Gear 7th digit: Gear Ratio 1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage Type Specifications 03A 06A 09A 12A 20A 30A 40A 55A Code Code
A B (StanC dard) 7 : Available

T
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
2-9
2 Selections 2.1.5 Model SGMSH (3000 min-1)
2.1.5 Model SGMSH (3000 min-1)

(1) Without Gears
SGMSH 10 A C A 2 1
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) 3rd digit: Voltage A:200V
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal Code 1 B C D E S Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal 6th digit: Shaft End Code Specifications Straight without key Taper 1/10, with parallel key Straight with key and tap Remarks Standard Option
Code 10 15 20 30 40 50
Rated Output
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
: Available
2 3
Code Specifications Remarks
2 C
Standard
2-10
(2) With Gears

SGMSH 10 A A A L 1 4 B
9th digit: Brake 1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) 3rd digit: Voltage A:200V
Code Specifications
1 B C
Code 10 15 20 30 40 50
Rated Output
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0

Code
Specifications Straight with key

1st + 2nd + 3rd digits: Code of the Rated Output and Voltage
: Available
6th digit: 7th digit: Gear Ratio Gear Type Code Specifications Code
10A 15A 20A 30A 40A 50A 10D 15D 20D 30D
Code
Specifications
Remarks Standard
2 C
(Lowbacklash)
1 2 5 7 8
1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45

6th digit: Gear Type
: Available

Code
Specifications
IMT planetary low-backlash gear (Flange type)
2-11
2 Selections 2.1.6 Model SGMDH (2000 min-1)
2.1.6 Model SGMDH (2000 min-1)

SGMDH servomotors are provided with 90-VDC brakes as standard. (The seventh digit: B) Servomotors with backlash gears are not available for the model SGMDH.
SGMDH 22 A C A 2 B
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output (kW) 3rd digit: Voltage A:200V
7th digit: Brake and Oil Seal Code 1 B C D E S Specifications Without options With 90-VDC brake With 24-VDC brake With oil seal and 90-VDC brake With oil seal and 24-VDC brake With oil seal 6th digit: Shaft End Code Specifications Straight without key Taper 1/10, with parallel key Straight with key and tap Remarks Standard Option
Code Rated Output 22 32 40

: Available
Remarks Standard
2.2 3.2 4.0

Code Specifications Remarks Standard
2 C
2 3 6
2-12
2.1.7 Model SGMCS

SGMCS 02 B 3 A 1 1
SGMCS Direct-drive motor
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Torque (N m)
3rd digit: Motor Outer Diameter (mm) B C D E M N (135) (175) (230) (290) (280) (360)
7th digit: Brake Code 1 Specifications Without brake
Code
Specifications
02 04 05 07 08 10 14 16 17 25 35 45 80 1A 1E 2Z
2.0 4.0 5.0 7.0 8.0 10.0 14.0 16.0 17.0 25.0 35.0 45.0 80.0 110.0 150.0 200.0
6th digit: Flange Code 1 Specifications C face
5th digit: Design Revision Order Code A B Specifications 45 to 200N m 2 to 35N m
4th digit: Encoder Code 3 D Specifications Remarks Standard Option
20-bit absolute encoder (Single-turn data absolute encoder) 20-bit incremental encoder
2-13
2 Selections 2.2.1 Support Tool for the Capacity Selection of the AC Servomotors
2.2 Selecting Servomotors

2.2.1 Support Tool for the Capacity Selection of the AC Servomotors
For easy selection of the capacity of the AC servomotors, a CD-ROM is available as a support tool.
CD-ROM: Programming for the capacity selection on AC servomotor (a) The display examples of the capacity calculation
(b) The display example of the regenerative calculation
(c) The display example of the moment of inertia calculation
2.2.2 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples

Refer to 12.1 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples.
2-14
2.3 SERVOPACK Model Designations
2.3 SERVOPACK Model Designations

Select the SERVOPACK according to the applied servomotor.
1st + 3rd 4th 5th 2nd 6th digits digits digits digits digits
SGDM - 10 A D
1st + 2nd digits: Rated Output of Applicable Servomotor (kW) Code Rated Output Code Rated Output
6th digit: Option Code Specificatioins -P -R Base-mounted Duct-ventilated Rack-mounted

Rated Output of Applicable Servomotor (kW)
A3 A5 01 02 04 05 08 10
0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 1.0
15 20 30 50 60 75 1A 1E
1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11.0 15.0
0.03 to 15.0kW 6.0 to 15.0kW 0.03 to 5.0kW
5th digit: Design Revision Order * Blank or A,

* Refer to 1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upguraded Functions for more information on the specification variances for different design revision order.
4th digit: Model (Fixed)

3rd digit: Power Supply Voltage Code Voltage
Code D
Remarks For torque, speed, and position control
A B
Single/Three-phase 200V Single-phase 100V *
* The SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors of 200W or less can be used with a 100V SERVOPACK.
2-15
2 Selections 2.4.1 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMH Servomotors
2.4 -II Series SERVOPACKs and Applicable Servomotors

2.4.1 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMH Servomotors
-II Series SGMH Servomotor A3(30 W) A5 (50 W) 01 (100 W) 02 (200 W) 04 (400 W) 08 (750 W) 01 (100 W) 02 (200 W) 04A (400 W) 08A (750 W) 15A (1.5 kW) 05A (450 W) 09A (850 W) 13A (1.3 kW) 20A (1.8 kW) 30A (2.9 kW) 44A (4.4 kW) 55A (5.5 kW) 75A (7.5 kW) 1AA (11.0 kW) 1EA (15.0 kW) 03A (300 W) 06A (600 W) 09A (900 W) 12A (1.2 kW) 20A (2.0 kW) 30A (3.0 kW) 40A (4.0 kW) 55A (5.5 kW) 10A (1.0 kW) 15A (1.5 kW) 20A (2.0 kW) 30A (3.0 kW) 40A (4.0 kW) 50A (5.0 kW) 22A (2.2 kW) 32A (3.2 kW) 40A (4.0 kW) -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Single-phase Single-phase Three-phase 100 VAC 200 VAC 200 VAC A3BD, A3BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5BD, A5BDA A5AD, A5ADA 01BD, 01BDA 01AD, 01ADA 02BD, 02BDA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 08AD, 08ADA 01BD, 01BDA 01AD, 01ADA 02BD, 02BDA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 08AD, 08ADA 15AD, 15ADA 05AD, 05ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA 05ADA 08ADA 10ADA 15ADA 20ADA 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 10ADA 15ADA 20ADA 30ADA 50ADA 50ADA 30ADA 50ADA 50ADA
SGMAH (Super High Power Capacity) 3000min-1 8 models
SGMPH (Flat Type) 3000min-1 5 models
SGMGH (High Speed Feed) 1500min-1 10 models
SGMGH (High Speed Feed) 1000min-1 8 models
SGMSH (Super High Power Capacity) 3000min-1 6 models SGMDH (Flat Type) 2000min-1 3 models
Note: 1. =A: 200 V, B: 100 V (Be sure to match the voltage ratio on the servomotor and the SERVOPACK.) 2. Servomotors with low-backlash gears are available.
2-16
2.4 -II Series SERVOPACKs and Applicable Servomotors
2.4.2 SGDM SERVOPACKs and SGMCS Servomotors

The SGMCS SERVOPACK can be combined only with a SGDM SERVOPACK with software version 32 or later. Note that SGMCS SERVOPACK cant be used with the SGDM-D and SGDM SERVOPACK with software version 32 or earlier.
-II Series SGMCS Servomotor 02B 05B 07B 04C 10C 14C 08D 17D 25D 16E 35E 45M 80M 1AM 80N 1EN 2ZN -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Single-phase 200 VAC Three-phase 200 VAC 02ADA 02ADA 02ADA 04ADA 04ADA 04ADA 04ADA 04ADA 04ADA 08ADA 08ADA 10ADA 15ADA 20ADA 15ADA 30ADA 30ADA
SGMCS (Direct-drive series) 150min-1 8 models 200min-1 9 models
2-17
2 Selections 2.5.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
2.5 Selecting Cables

2.5.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 L3 1 2
C N 3
L1C L2 B1 B2 B3 U V W
C N 1
C N 2
CN2
2-18
Name
Length 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
Type JZSP-CMP00-03 JZSP-CMP00-05 JZSP-CMP00-10 JZSP-CMP00-15 JZSP-CMP00-20 JZSP-CMP03-03 JZSP-CMP03-05 JZSP-CMP03-10 JZSP-CMP03-15 JZSP-CMP03-20 JZSP-CMP10-03 JZSP-CMP10-05 JZSP-CMP10-10 JZSP-CMP10-15 JZSP-CMP10-20
Specifications
Reference
Cable with connectors at both ends
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
5.4.1
2
SERVOPACK end Encoder end
Cable with loose wire at encoder end
5.4.3
CN2
Encoder Cable
Flexible type cable with connectors at both ends
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
5.4.5 JZSP-CMP13-03 JZSP-CMP13-05 JZSP-CMP13-10 JZSP-CMP13-15 JZSP-CMP13-20

Flexible type cable with loose wire at encoder end
2-19
Name SERVOPACK end connector kit
Length
Type Soldered JZSP-CMP9-1 Soldered
Specifications
Reference 5.5.1 5.4.3 5.4.5 5.5.1
Encoder end connector kit 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 30 m (98.4 ft) 40 m (131.2 ft) 50 m (164.0 ft)
JZSP-CMP9-2
JZSP-CMP09-05 JZSP-CMP09-10 JZSP-CMP09-15 JZSP-CMP09-20 JZSP-CMP19-30 JZSP-CMP19-40 JZSP-CMP19-50

50 m (164.0 ft) max.
CN2
Encoder Cable (Contd) Cables
20 m (65.6 ft) max.
5.5.1
2-20
Name
Servomotor Model
Length 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft)
Type JZSP-CMM00-03 JZSP-CMM00-05 JZSP-CMM00-10 JZSP-CMM00-15 JZSP-CMM00-20 JZSP-CMM20-03 JZSP-CMM20-05 JZSP-CMM20-10 JZSP-CMM20-15 JZSP-CMM20-20 JZSP-CMM40-03 JZSP-CMM40-05 JZSP-CMM40-10 JZSP-CMM40-15 JZSP-CMM40-20 JZSP-CMM01-03 JZSP-CMM01-05 JZSP-CMM01-10 JZSP-CMM01-15 JZSP-CMM01-20
Specifications
Reference
SGMAH SGMPH 100V: 30 to 200 W 200V: 30 to 750 W
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.1
2
SERVOPACK end Servomotor end
SGMPH-15A 1.5 kW
d
Servomotor Main Circuit Cables and Connectors Without brakes
10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m 400 V SGMAH (16.4 ft) 300 W, 650 W 10 m (32.8 ft) 400 V SGMPH 200 W to 1.5 kW 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
5.1.1
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.5
Flexible type SGMAH SGMPH 100V: 30 to 200 W 200V: 30 to 750 W
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.3
Note: When using the cable for the moving section such as robots, use a flexible type cable. For the safety precautions, see 5.7 I/O Signal Cables for CN1 Connector.
2-21
Name
Servomotor Model
Length 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
Type JZSP-CMM10-03 JZSP-CMM10-05 JZSP-CMM10-10 JZSP-CMM10-15 JZSP-CMM10-20 JZSP-CMM30-03 JZSP-CMM30-05 JZSP-CMM30-10 JZSP-CMM30-15 JZSP-CMM30-20 JZSP-CMM50-03 JZSP-CMM50-05 JZSP-CMM50-10 JZSP-CMM50-15 JZSP-CMM50-20 JZSP-CMM11-03 JZSP-CMM11-05 JZSP-CMM11-10 JZSP-CMM11-15 JZSP-CMM11-20
Specifications
Reference
SGMAH SGMPH 100V: 30 to 200 W 200V: 30 to 750 W
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.2
SGMPH-15A 1.5 kW
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.2
d
Servomotor Main Circuit Cables and Connectors (Contd) With brakes
3m (9.84 ft) 5m 400 V SGMAH (16.4 ft) 300 W, 650 W 10 m (32.8 ft) 400 V SGMPH 200 W to 1.5 kW 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.2
Flexible type SGMAH SGMPH 100 V: 30 to 200 W 200 V: 30 to 750 W
SERVOPACK end
Servomotor end
5.1.4
2-22
Name For standard environment connector kit without brakes
Servomotor Model SGMAH 30 W to 750 W SGMPH 100 W to 750 W SGMPH 1.5 kW SGMAH 30 W to 750 W SGMPH 100 W to 750 W SGMPH 1.5 kW
Length
Type
Specifications
Reference
JZSP-CMM9-1
d
Servomotor Main Circuit Cables and Connectors (Contd)
JZSP-CMM9-3 5.2.2 JZSP-CMM9-2
For standard environment connector kit with brakes
JZSP-CMM9-4
2.5.2 Cables for SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Servomotors

SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 L3 1 2
C N 3
C N 1
C N 2
CN2
2-23
2 Selections 2.5.2 Cables for SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Servomotors
Name
Length 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft)
Type JZSP-CMP03-03 JZSP-CMP03-05
Specifications
Reference
Cable with loose wires at encoder end
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
JZSP-CMP03-10 JZSP-CMP03-15 JZSP-CMP03-20 JZSP-CMP01-03 JZSP-CMP01-05 JZSP-CMP01-10 JZSP-CMP01-15 JZSP-CMP01-20 With an straight plug
5.4.4
CN2
Encoder Cables * Applicable for Cable with connectors at both ends every type and capacity.
15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
5.4.2 JZSP-CMP02-03 JZSP-CMP02-05 JZSP-CMP02-10 JZSP-CMP02-15 JZSP-CMP02-20 MS3106B20-29S* Straight plug L-shaped plug MS3108B20-29S* Cable clamp MS3057-12A* With an L-shaped plug
For standard environment encoder end connector
5.4.4 5.5.2
* Contact DDK Electronics, Inc.
2-24
Name
Length
Type
Specifications Straight plug
Reference
JA06A-20-29S-J1-EB L-shaped plug JA08A-20-29S-J1-EB JL04-2022CKE (09) Cable diameter: 6.5 to 9.5 mm (0.26 to 0.37 in) JL04-2022CKE (12) Cable diameter: 9.5 to 13 mm (0.37 to 0.51 in) Cable clamp
For IP67 specification encoder end connector
5.5.2
CN2
Encoder Cables (Contd) * Applicable for SERVOPACK end every type connector kit and capacity. 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 30m (98.4 ft) 40m (131.2 ft) 50m (164.0 ft)
JL04-2022CKE (14) Cable diameter: 12.9 to 15.9 mm (0.51 to 0.63 in) Soldered JZSP-CMP9-1 5.5.2
JZSP-CMP09-05 JZSP-CMP09-10 JZSP-CMP09-15 JZSP-CMP09-20 JZSP-CMP19-30 JZSP-CMP19-40 JZSP-CMP19-50

50 m (164.0 ft) max.
20 m (65.6 ft) max.
Cables
5.5.2
2-25
2 Selections 2.5.2 Cables for SGMGH/SGMSH/SGMDH Servomotors
Name
Length 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft) 5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
Type JZSP-CMP11-03 JZSP-CMP11-05 JZSP-CMP11-10 JZSP-CMP11-15 JZSP-CMP11-20 JZSP-CMP12-03 JZSP-CMP12-05 JZSP-CMP12-10 JZSP-CMP12-15 JZSP-CMP12-20 JZSP-CMP13-03 JZSP-CMP13-05 JZSP-CMP13-10 JZSP-CMP13-15 JZSP-CMP13-20
Specifications
Reference
With a straight plug

Flexible type cable with connectors at both ends
CN2
Encoder Cables (Contd) * Applicable for every type and capacity.
With an L-shaped plug

L
5.4.6
Flexible type cable with loose wire at encoder end
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
dServomotor
Main Circuit Cables and Connectors Cables and connectors
Cables with connectors are not available. Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices.
2-26
2.5.3 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors

Y ASKAW A SERVOP ACK SGDM 200V
MODE/SET
DATA/
CHARGE POWER
SGDM SERVOPACK
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
C N
SGMCS Servomotor
Encoder cable
View A Encoder cable A
Encoder cable extension from 20 m (65.5 ft) up to 50 m (164.04 ft)

YASKAWA SERVOP ACK 200V
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
SGDM SERVOPACK
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
C N
SGMCS Servomotor
Relay encoder cable extension *

* To be assembled by the customer.
Encoder cable
Relay encoder cable (Encoder end)
View A
2-27
2 Selections 2.5.3 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors
Name
Servomotor Model
Type Length
3m (9.84 ft)
Standard type
JZSP-CMP60-03 JZSP-CMP60-05 JZSP-CMP60-10 JZSP-CMP60-15 JZSP-CMP60-20 JZSP-CMP03-03 JZSP-CMP03-05 JZSP-CMP03-10 JZSP-CMP03-15 JZSP-CMP03-20
Flexible Type*1
JZSP-CSP60-03 JZSP-CSP60-05
Specifications
Reference
Cable with connectors at both ends (Same for incremental and absolute encoder)
5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft) 3m (9.84 ft)
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
JZSP-CSP60-10 JZSP-CSP60-15 JZSP-CSP60-20
5.4.7
JZSP-CMP13-03 JZSP-CMP13-05
CN2
Encoder Cables * Applicable for every type.
Cable with loose wires at encoder end (Same for incremental and absolute encoder)
5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
JZSP-CMP13-10 JZSP-CMP13-15 JZSP-CMP13-20
Solder type SERVOPACK-end Connector kit Encoder-end Connector (Straight plug) Encoder-end Connector (Socket contact)
5m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
JZSP-CMP9-1 JN1DS10SL1*2 JN1-22-22S-PKG100*2

JZSP-CMP09-05 JZSP-CMP09-10 JZSP-CMP09-15 JZSP-CMP09-20 JZSP-CSP39-05 JZSP-CSP39-10 JZSP-CSP39-15 JZSP-CSP39-20
Crimping type
5.5.3
20 m (65.6 ft) max.
Cables
2-28
Name
Servomotor Model
Type Length
3m (9.84 ft)
Standard type
JZSP-CMM60-03 JZSP-CMM60-05 JZSP-CMM60-10 JZSP-CMM60-15 JZSP-CMM60-20
Flexible Type*1
JZSP-CSM60-03 JZSP-CSM60-05
Specifications
Reference
Without Brakes (For smallcapacity series)
5m (16.4 ft) SGMCSB,C,D,E 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
JZSP-CSM60-10 JZSP-CSM60-15 JZSP-CSM60-20
5.1.5
d
Servomotor main circuit cables and connectors
Without Brakes (For middlecapacity series)
SGMCS-M,N
Cables with connectors and cables/connector are not available. Refer to 5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors for details. Solder type
JN1DS04FK1*2
Servomotor-end Connector
5m (16.4 ft) SGMCSB,C,D,E 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
5.1.5 5.2.12
JZSP-CSM90-05 JZSP-CSM90-10 JZSP-CSM90-15 JZSP-CSM90-20
JZSP-CSM80-05 JZSP-CSM80-10 JZSP-CSM80-15 JZSP-CSM80-20
20 m (65.6 ft) max. 5.1.5
Cables
e
Relay Encoder Cables
Encoder-end (Same for incremental and absolute encoder)
0.3 m (0.984 ft) 30m (98.4 ft) 40m (131.2 ft) 50m (164.0 ft)
JZSP-CSP13
SERVOPACK end
Encoder end
f
Wires and Connectors for Relay Encoder Cable Extensions Wires and connectors for relay encoder cable extensions are available for assembly by the customer.
JZSP-CMP19-30 JZSP-CMP19-40
50 m (164.0 ft) max. 6.4.6
JZSP-CMP19-50
* 1. Use flexible cables for movable sections such as robot arms. Refer to 5.6 Flexible Cables. * 2. Contact Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.
2-29
2 Selections 2.6.1 Special Options
2.6 Selecting Peripheral Devices

2.6.1 Special Options
Digital operator
Personal computer
SGDM-
Connection cable for personal computer CN3 I/O signal cable CN1 Host controller
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 L3 1 2
C N 3
C N 1
C N 2
Analog monitor cable

CN5 CN8
Battery for absolute encoder
Name
Length
Type
Specifications Terminal block and 0.5 m (1.64 ft) connection cable
Reference
Connector terminal block converter unit
JUSP-TA50P
5.8.4
CN1
I/O Signal Cables
Cable with loose wires at one end
1m JZSP-CKI01-1 (3.28 ft) 2m JZSP-CKI01-2 (6.56 ft) 3m JZSP-CKI01-3 (9.84 ft)
Loose wires at host controller end 5.7.1
2-30
Name
Length
Type
Specifications With connection cable (1 m (3.28 ft))
Reference
d Digital Operator
JUSP-OP02A-2
e CN3
Connection Cable for Digital Operator
1m JZSP-CMS00-1 (3.28 ft) 1.5m JZSP-CMS00-2 (4.92 ft) 2m JZSP-CMS00-3 (6.56 ft) 2m JZSP-CMS01 (6.56 ft)
Only required when using series Digital Operator JUSP-OP02A-1.

SERVOPACK end Operator end
5.8.2
D-Sub 25-pin (For PC98)

SERVOPACK end Personal computer end
f CN3
Connection Cable for Personal Computer
D-Sub 9-pin (For DOS/V) 2m JZSP-CMS02 (6.56 ft)

5.8.1
Half-pitch 14-pin (For PC 98) 2m JZSP-CMS03 (6.56 ft)

g CN5
Analog Monitor Cable
1m JZSP-CA01 or (3.28 ft) DE9404559
SERVOPACK end
Monitor end
5.8.3
To mount in the SERVOPACK (30 W to 5.0 kW) JZSP-BA01
JZSP-BA01-1
To mount in the SERVOPACK (6.0 kW to 15.0 kW) 5.8.8 To connect to a host controller (provided by a customer) 3.6 V 2000 mAh, manufactured by Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.
CN8
Battery for Absolute Encoder
ER6VC3
* For details, refer to the manuals of each application module.
2-31
2 Selections 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity
2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity

Main Circuit Power Supply SERVOPACK Model Power Supply Capacity per SERVOPACK (kVA) 0.15 0.25 0.40 0.60 0.20 0.25 0.40 0.75 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.3 3.2 4.3 5.9 7.5 12.5 15.5 22.7 30.9 Current Capacity of the Molded-case Circuit Breaker and the Fuse (Arms)*1, *2 Refer to 5.8.9 Control CirMain Circuit cuit Power Power Supply Supply 4 6 4 0.26 Inrush Current Control Circuit Power Supply 30A
Capacity (kW) 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11.0 15.0
SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA
Main Circuit Power Supply
Singlephase 100 V
32A
Singlephase 200 V
0.13
63A
60A
8 4 7 10 13 17 28 32 41 60 81 0.153 63A 67A 0.273 0.33 40A 80A 60A 118A
Threephase 200 V
* 1. Nominal value at the rated load. The specified derating is required to select an appropriate fuse capacity. * 2. Cutoff characteristics (25C): 300% five seconds min. and inrush current of 20ms. * 3. Make sure the current capacity is accurate. For the SERVOPACK with the cooling fan built-in, an inrush current flows; 200 % of the current capacity in the table above for two seconds, when turning ON the control circuit power supply to start the fan working. Note: Do not use a fast-acting fuse. Because the SERVOPACKs power supply is a capacitor input type, a fast-acting fuse may blow when the power is turned ON.
2-32
IMPORTANT
The SGDM SERVOPACK does not include a protective grounding circuit. Install a ground-fault protector to protect the system against overload and short-circuit or protective grounding combined with the molded-case circuit breaker.
2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Conductors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors

Main Circuit Power Supply SERVOPACK Model Capacity (kW) 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 Three-phase 200 V 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11.0 15.0 SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA Recommended Noise Filter (Refer to 5.8.10.) Type FN2070-6/07 FN2070-10/07 Specifications Single-phase 250 VAC, 6 A Single-phase 250 VAC, 10 A Single-phase 250 VAC, 6 A Single-phase 250 VAC, 10 A Three-phase 480 VAC, 7 A Three-phase 480 VAC, 16 A Three-phase 480 VAC, 30 A Three-phase 440 VAC, 50 A Three-phase 440 VAC, 64 A Three-phase 480 VAC, 150 A Magnetic Contactor (Refer to 5.8.11.) Surge Suppressor (Refer to 5.8.12.) DC Reactor (Refer to 5.8.13.) HI-11J (20 A) TU-25C120 X5063 X5062 HI-11J (20 A) TU-25C240 X5071 X5070 X5069 HI-11J (20 A) X5061 HI-15J (35 A) TU-25C240 X5060 HI-20J (35 A) HI-25J (50 A) HI-35J (65 A) HI-50J (75 A) HI-65J (100 A) TU-65C240 X5059 X5068
Single-phase 100 V
Single-phase 200 V
FN2070-6/07
FN2070-10/07 FN258L-7/07
FN258L-16/07
FN258L-30/07 FMAC-0934-5010 FMAC-0953-6410 FS5559-150-35
Note: 1. If some SERVOPACKs are wired at the same time, select the proper magnetic contactors according to the total capacity. 2. The following table shows the manufacturers of each device. Peripheral Device Noise Filter Magnetic Contactor Surge Suppressor DC Reactor Manufacturer FN, FS type: Schaffner Electronic FMAC type: Timonta AG Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.
2-33
2 Selections 2.6.4 Regenerative Resistors and Brake Power Supply Units
2.6.4 Regenerative Resistors and Brake Power Supply Units

SERVOPACK Model Main Circuit Power Supply Capacity (kW) 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11.0 15.0 SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA Regenerative Resistor (Refer to 5.8.6, 5.8.7, and 6.5.) Built-in Resistance Capacity () (W) Externally connected Brake Power Supply Unit (Refer to 5.8.5.) 24 VDC brake (provided by a customer) 3 90 VDC brake LPDE-1H01 for 100 VAC input LPSE-2H01 for 200 VAC input
Single-phase 100 V
Single-phase 200 V
50 30 25 12.5 8 (6.251 (3.13)2
60 70 140 140 280 (880)1 (1760)2
Three-phase 200 V
JUSP-RA04 JUSP-RA05
* 1. For the optional JUSP-RA04 Regenerative Resistor Unit. * 2. For the optional JUSP-RA05 Regenerative Resistor Unit. * 3. Be careful when connecting the power supply for 24 VDC brake to the local power supply. The local power supply cannot apply the overvoltage such as surge to the output side, and the output side may be damaged even if the voltage is applied. Never fail to use the surge suppressor. Note: 1. If the SERVOPACK cannot process the regenerative power, an external regenerative resistor is required. Refer to 5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor, 5.8.7 Regenerative Resistor Unit, and 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors. 2. The following table shows the manufacturers of each device. Peripheral Device External Regenerative Resistor External Regenerative Unit Brake Power Supply Unit Manufacturer Iwaki Wireless Research Institute Yaskawa Electric Corporation Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.
2-34
3
Specifications and Dimensional Drawings
3.1 Ratings and Specifications of SGMAH (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
3.1.1 SGMAH Servomotors Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4 3.1.2 SGMAH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6 3.1.3 SGMAH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8
3.2 Ratings and Specifications of SGMPH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11

3.2.1 SGMPH Servomotors Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11 3.2.2 SGMPH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 3.2.3 SGMPH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.3 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1500min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17

3.3.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17 3.3.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21 3.3.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23
3.4 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26

3.4.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26 3.4.2 SGMGH servomotors (1000min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29 3.4.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5 Ratings and Specifications of SGMSH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33

3.5.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33 3.5.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6 Ratings and Specifications of SGMDH (2000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39

3.6.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) With Holding Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39
3.7 Ratings and Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41

3.7.1 Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41 3.7.2 Middle-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.8 Mechanical Specifications of SGMAH, SGMPH, SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47
3.8.1 Precautions on Servomotor Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 3.8.2 Mechanical Tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48
3-1
3.8.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-49 3.8.4 Impact Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-49 3.8.5 Vibration Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-49 3.8.6 Vibration Class - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-49
3.9 Mechanical Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50

3.9.1 Allowable Loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-50 3.9.2 Mechanical Tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-51 3.9.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52 3.9.4 Impact Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52 3.9.5 Vibration Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52 3.9.6 Vibration Class - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52 3.9.7 Protective Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-52
3.10 Terms and Data for Servomotors With Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 3.11 Servomotor Dimensional Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55 3.12 Dimensional Drawings of SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - 3-56
3.12.1 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-56 3.12.2 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - -3-60 3.12.3 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-64 3.12.4 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes - - - -3-71 3.12.5 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-78
3.13 Dimensional Drawings of SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - 3-86

3.13.1 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-86 3.13.2 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-88 3.13.3 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-90 3.13.4 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-93 3.13.5 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-96
3.14 Dimensional Drawing of Output Shafts With Oil Seals for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100
3.14.1 SGMAH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100 3.14.2 SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100
3.15 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) - - - - - - - 3-101

3.15.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 3.15.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-103 3.15.3 Servomotors SGMGH (1500 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-106 3.15.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-109 3.15.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-115 3.15.6 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-123
3-2
3.16 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) - - - - - - - 3-127

3.16.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-127 3.16.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - 3-129 3.16.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-132 3.16.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-137 3.16.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-144
3.17 Dimensional Drawings of SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - 3-148

3.17.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears and Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - 3-148 3.17.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-150 3.17.3 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-152 3.17.4 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-154
3.18 Dimensional Drawings of SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) - - - - - - - 3-159

3.18.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) Without Gears and With/Without Brakes - - - - - 3-159
3.19 Dimensional Drawings of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161

3.19.1 SGMCS Servomotors 135 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.2 SGMCS Servomotors 175 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.3 SGMCS Servomotors 230 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.4 SGMCS Servomotors 290 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.5 SGMCS Servomotors 230 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.6 SGMCS Servomotors 290 Model - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.7 Servomotor Connector for All Small-capacity Series Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - 3.19.8 Servomotor Connector for All Middle-capacity Series Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161 3-161 3-162 3-162 3-163 3-164 3-165 3-166
3.20 Shaft End Specifications for SGMGH, SGMSH and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-167
3-3
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.1.1 SGMAH Servomotors Without Gears
3.1 Ratings and Specifications of SGMAH (3000 min-1)

3.1.1 SGMAH Servomotors Without Gears
(1) Ratings and Specifications
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100 V, 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive 200 V 01A 02A 0.1 0.318 45.0 0.955 135 0.91 2.8 0.2 0.637 90.2 1.91 270 2.1 6.5 400 V 03D 07D 0.3 0.955 135 3.82 541 1.3 5.1 0.65 2.07 293 7.16 1010 2.2 7.7
Voltage Servomotor Model SGMAHRated Output Rated Torque

1,2 1
A3B 0.03
100 V A5B 01B 0.05 22.5 0.477 67.5 0.95 2.9 0.1 0.318 45.0 0.955 135 2.4 7.2
02B 0.2 90.2 1.91 270 3.0 9.0
A3A 0.03 13.5 0.286 40.5 0.44 1.3
A5A 0.05 22.5 0.477 67.5 0.64 2.0 3000 5000
04A 0.4 1.27 180 3.82 541 2.8 8.5
08A 0.75 2.39 338 7.16 1010 4.4 13.4
kW Nm ozin Nm ozin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms ozin/Arms x10-3 ozins2 3 kW/s rad/s2
3 3 3
0.0955 0.159 13.5 0.286 40.5 0.66 2.0
0.637 0.0955 0.159
Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current

1
Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Rated Speed 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant
0.157 22.2
0.182 25.8
0.146 20.7
0.234 33.1
0.238 33.7
0.268 38.0
0.378 53.5
0.327 46.3
0.498 70.5 0.173 2.45 93.7
0.590 83.6 0.672 9.52 84.8
0.837 119 0.173 2.45 52.9
1.02 144 0.672 9.52 63.8
Rotor Moment of Inertia J Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Angular Acceleration 1
x10-4 kgm2
0.0166 0.0220 0.0364 0.106 0.0166 0.0220 0.0364 0.106 0.235 5.49 0.312 11.5 0.515 27.8 1.50 38.2 0.235 5.49 0.312 11.5 0.515 27.8 1.50 38.2
57500 72300 87400 60100 57500 72300 87400 60100 73600 35500 55300 30800
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 100C (212F). Other values quoted at 20C (68F). All values are typical. * 2. Rated torques are continuous allowable torque values at 40C (104F) with an 250 250 6 (mm) [10 10 0.24 (in.)] aluminum plate (heat sink) attached. * 3. These values are reference values.
3-4
(2) Holding Brake Moment of Inertia

The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake is expressed using the following equation. (The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake) = (rotor moment of inertia) + (brake moment of inertia)
Servomotor Model SGMAHHolding Brake Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgxm2 10-3 ozxinxs2 A3A A5A A3B A5B 0.0085 0.120 01A 01B 02A 02B 04A 03D 08A 07D 0.14 1.98
0.058 0.821
* These values are reference values.
(3) Derating Rate for Servomotor With Oil Seal

For a motor with oil seal, use the following derating rate because of the higher friction torque.
Servomotor Model SGMAHDerating Rate (%) A3A A3B 70 A5A A5B 80 01A 02A 01B 02B 90 04A 08A 03D 07D 95
(4) Torque-motor Speed Characteristics

(a) 100-V Class
5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-A3B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-A5B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-01B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-02B
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Torque (N m) 0 60 20 40 Torque (oz in)
0 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.6 Torque (N m) 0 20 40 60 80 100 Torque (oz in)
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Torque (N m) 0 50 100 150 Torque (oz in)
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Torque (N m) 0 100 200 300 Torque (ozin)
(b) 200-V Class

5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-A3A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMAH-A5A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 B SGMAH-01A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 B SGMAH-02A
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Torque (N m) 0 20 60 40 Torque (oz in) SGMAH-04A
0 0.15 0.3 0.45 0.6 Torque (N m)
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Torque (N m) 50 100 150 Torque (oz in)
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Torque (N m) 0 100 200 300 Torque (ozin)
0 20 40 60 80 100 Torque (oz in) 5000 4000 SGMAH-08A
5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 0 0
Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 Torque (N m) 200 400 600 Torque (oz in)
3-5
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.1.2 SGMAH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears
(c) 400-V Class

SGMAH-03D 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 0 0 B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 0 B SGMAH-07D
A 2 4 6 8 Torque (N m) 400 800 1200 Torque (oz in) B
Continuous Duty Zone Intermittent Duty Zone
(5) Holding Brake Electrical Specifications

Servomotor Capacity W 30 50 100 200 300 400 650 750 30 50 100 200 300 400 650 750 Holding Brake Specifications Coil Holding Resistance Torque (at 20C Nxm (ozxin) (68 F)) 0.096 (13.5) 1350 0.159 (22.5) 1350 0.318 (45.0) 1350 0.637 (90.2) 1095 0.955 (135) 1095 1.27 (180) 1095 2.07 (293) 900 2.39 (338) 900 0.096 (13.5) 96 0.159 (22.5) 96 0.318 (45.0) 96 0.637 (90.2) 83.5 0.955 (135) 83.5 1.27 (180) 83.5 2.07 (293) 75.2 2.39 (338) 75.2 Rated Current A (at 20C (68 F)) 0.067 0.067 0.067 0.082 0.082 0.082 0.1 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.32 0.32
Holding Brake Rated Voltage
Servomotor Model SGMAH-A3 SGMAH-A5 SGMAH-01 SGMAH-02 SGMAH-03 SGMAH-04 SGMAH-07 SGMAH-08 SGMAH-A3 SGMAH-A5 SGMAH-01 SGMAH-02 SGMAH-03 SGMAH-04 SGMAH-07 SGMAH-08
Capacity W 6 6 6 7.4 7.4 7.4 9 9 6 6 6 6.9 6.9 6.9 7.7 7.7
90 VDC
24 VDC
Note: The holding brake is only used to hold the load and cannot be used to stop the servomotor.
3.1.2 SGMAH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100 V, 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 15 to 20 min max. Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism
3-6
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMAHRated Torque/ Efficiency2 Nm/% (ozin/%) 0.238/50 (33.7/50) 0.687/70 (97.3/70) 1.60/80 (227/80) 2.51/80 (355/80) 0.557/70 (78.9/70) 1.15/70 (163/70) 2.67/80 (378/80) 4.20/80 (595/80) 1.27/80 (180/80) 2.63/80 (372/80) 5.34/80 (756/80) 8.40/80 (1190/80) 2.55/80 (361/80) 5.27/80 (746/80) 10.7/80 (1520/80) 16.8/80 (2380/80) 3.82/80 (541/80) 7.89/80 (1120/80) 16.0/80 (2270/80) 25.2/80 (3570/80)
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 1.16 (164) 2.37 (336) 5.48 (776) 8.61 (1220) 1.92 (272) 3.95 (559) 9.07 (1280) 14.3 (2030) 4.32 (612) 8.88 (1260) 18.1 (2560) 28.4 (4020) 8.60 (1220) 17.8 (2520) 36.1 (5110) 56.7 (8030) 17.2 (2440) 35.5 (5030) 72.2 (10200) 113.0 (16000)
Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (x 10-3 ozins2)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Rated Torque Nxm (ozxin)
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed 1 min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
A3AJ1 A3AJ3 30 A3AJC A3AJ7 A5AJ1 A5AJ3 50 A5AJC A5AJ7 01AJ1 01AJ3 100 01AJC 01AJ7 02AJ1 02AJ3 200 02AJC 02AJ7 03DAJ1 03DAJ3 300 03DAJC 03DAJ7 0.955 (135.2) 0.637 (90.2) 3000 0.318 (45.0) 0.159 (22.5) 0.095 (13.45)
1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91
800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121
0.044 (0.623) 0.033 (0.467) 0.023 (0.326) 0.021 (0.297) 0.050 (0.708) 0.040 (0.566) 0.036 (0.510) 0.032 (0.453) 0.099 (1.40) 0.054 (0.765) 0.071 (1.00) 0.057 (0.807) 0.299 (4.23) 0.196 (2.78) 0.211 (2.99) 0.181 (2.56) 0.366 (5.18) 0.353 (5.00) 0.403 (5.71) 0.338 (4.79)
0.028 (0.397) 0.016 (0.227) 0.007 (0.0991) 0.005 (0.0708) 0.028 (0.397) 0.018 (0.255) 0.014 (0.198) 0.010 (0.142) 0.063 (0.892) 0.018 (0.255) 0.035 (0.496) 0.021 (0.297) 0.193 (2.73) 0.090 (1.27) 0.105 (1.49) 0.075 (1.06) 0.193 (2.73) 0.180 (2.55) 0.230 (3.26) 0.165 (2.34)
3-7
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.1.3 SGMAH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMAHRated Torque/ Efficiency2 Nm/% (ozin/%) 5.08/80 (719/80) 10.5/80 (1490/80) 21.3/80 (3020/80) 33.5/80 (4740/80) 8.28/80 (1170) 17.1/80 (2420) 34.8/80 (4930) 54.6/80 (7730) 9.56/80 (1350/80) 19.8/80 (2800/80) 40.2/80 (5690/80) 63.1/80 (8940/80)
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 17.2 (2440) 35.5 (5030) 72.2 (10200) 113.0 (16000) 32.0 (4530) 66.6 (9430) 134 (19000) 212 (30000) 32 (4530) 66.6 (9430) 134 (19000) 213 (30000)
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (x 10-3 ozins2)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed 1 min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
04AAJ1 04AAJ3 400 04AAJC 04AAJ7 07DAJ1 07DAJ3 650 07DAJC 07DAJ7 08AAJ1 08AAJ3 750 08AAJC 08AAJ7 2.39 (338) 3000 2.07 (293.1) 1.27 (179.8)
1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91
800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121
0.366 (5.18) 0.353 (5.00) 0.403 (5.71) 0.338 (4.79) 1.12 (15.9) 1.10 (15.6) 1.15 (16.3) 0.972 (12.8) 1.12 (15.9) 1.10 (15.6) 1.15 (15.3) 0.972 (13.8)
0.193 (2.73) 0.180 (2.55) 0.230 (3.26) 0.165 (2.34) 0.450 (6.37) 0.425 (6.02) 0.475 (6.73) 0.300 (4.25) 0.450 (6.37) 0.425 (6.02) 0.475 (6.73) 0.300 (4.25)
* 1. Maximum motor speed is up to 4000 min-1 at the shaft. * 2. Gear output torque is expressed using the following equation. (Gear output torque) = (servomotor output torque) ( gear1 ratio ) (efficiency)
3.1.3 SGMAH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100V, 200V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 3 min max. Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
3-8
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMAHRated Torque/Efficiency Nm/% (ozin/%) 0.238/50 (33.7/50) 0.599/70 (84.8/70) 1.60/80 (227/80) 2.51/80 (355/80) 0.557/70 (78.9/70) 1.00/70 (142/70) 2.67/80 (378/80) 4.20/80 (595/80) 1.27/80 (180/80) 2.80/80 (396/80) 5.34/80 (756/80) 8.40/80 (1190/80) 2.55/80 (361/80) 5.96/85 (844/85) 11.4/85 (1610/85) 17.9/85 (2540/85) 4.06/85 (575/85) 8.93/85 (1270/85) 17.0/85 (2410/85) 25.2/80 (3570/80)
2
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 1.16 (164) 2.35 (333) 5.48 (776) 8.61 (1220) 1.92 (272) 3.89 (551) 9.12 (1290) 14.3 (2030) 4.34 (615) 9.55 (1350) 18.2 (2580) 28.7 3 (4060) 8.4 (1190) 19.3 (2730) 37.3 (5280) 58.63 (8300) 17.2 (2440) 35 3 (4960) 72.2 (10200) 933 (13200)
Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (x 10-3 ozins2) Rated Speed min-1 Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Motor + Gears
Gears
A3AH1 A3AH2 30 A3AHC A3AH7 A5AH1 A5AH2 50 A5AHC A5AH7 01AH1 01AHB 100 01AHC 01AH7 02AH1 02AHB 200 02AHC 02AH7 03DAH1 03DAHB 300 03DAHC 03DAH7 3000 0.159 (22.5) 0.159 (22.5)
1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
600 333 143 91 600 333 143 91 600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91
800 444 190 121 800 444 190 121 800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121
0.053 (0.751) 0.029 (0.411) 0.025 (0.354) 0.023 (0.326) 0.058 (0.821) 0.055 (0.779) 0.040 (0.566) 0.035 (0.496) 0.114 (1.61) 0.084 (1.19) 0.079 (1.12) 0.069 (0.977) 0.441 (6.25) 0.191 (2.70) 0.216 (3.06) 0.171 (2.42) 0.508 (7.19) 0.368 (5.21) 0.368 (5.21) 0.346 (4.90)
0.318 (45.0)
0.036 (0.510) 0.013 (0.184) 0.008 (0.113) 0.006 (0.0850) 0.036 (0.510) 0.033 (0.467) 0.018 (0.255) 0.013 (0.184) 0.078 (1.10) 0.048 (0.680) 0.043 (0.609) 0.033 (0.467) 0.335 (4.74) 0.085 (1.20) 0.110 (1.56) 0.065 (0.920) 0.335 (4.74) 0.195 (2.76) 0.195 (2.76) 0.173 (2.45)
0.637 (90.2)
0.955 (135.2)
3-9
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.1.3 SGMAH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMAHRated Torque/Efficiency2 Nm/% (ozin/%) 5.4/85 (765/85) 11.9/85 (1690/85) 22.7/85 (3220/85) 33.5/80 (4740/80) 8.80/85 (1250/85) 19.3/85 (2730/85) 36.9/85 (5230/85) 58.1/85 (8230/85) 10.2/85 (1440/85) 22.3/85 (3160/85) 42.7/85 (6050/85) 67/85 (9490/85)
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 17.6 (2490) 39.1 (5540) 72.2 (10200) 1153 (16300) 32 (4530) 56 (7930) 134 (19000) 156 (22100) 33.3 (4720) 713 (10100) 140 (19800) 2063 (29200)
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (x 10-3 ozins2) Rated Speed min-1 Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Motor + Gears
Gears
04AAH1 04AAHB 400 04AAHC 04AAH7 07DAH1 07DAHB 650 07DAHC 07DAH7 08AAH1 08AAHB 750 08AAHC 08AAH7 2.39 (338) 3000 2.07 (293.1)
1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91
800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121
1.27 (179.8)
0.508 (7.19) 0.368 (5.21) 0.368 (5.21) 0.346 (4.90) 1.25 (17.7) 1.20 (17.0) 1.26 (17.8) 0.935 (13.2) 1.25 (17.7) 1.20 (17.0) 1.26 (17.8) 0.935 (13.2)
0.335 (4.74) 0.195 (2.76) 0.195 (2.76) 0.173 (2.45) 0.583 (8.26) 0.528 (7.48) 0.593 (8.40) 0.263 (3.72) 0.583 (8.26) 0.528 (7.48) 0.593 (8.40) 0.263 (3.72)
* 1. Maximum motor speed is up to 4000 min-1 at the shaft. * 2. Gear output torque is expressed using the following equation. (Gear output torque) = (servomotor output torque) ( gear1ratio ) (efficiency) * 3. The instantaneous peak torque values indicated with 3 are limited by the gear, so use the following servomotor instantaneous peak torque. In this case, set torque limit parameters Pn402 and 403 for the SERVOPACK at 250%.
3-10
3.2 Ratings and Specifications of SGMPH (3000min-1)

3.2.1 SGMPH Servomotors Without Gears
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100 V, 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive
Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Voltage Servomotor Model SGMPHRated Output 1 Rated Torque 1,2 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant Rotor Moment of Inertia J Rated Power Rate
1 1
100 V 01B 0.1 0.318 45.0 0.955 135 2.2 7.1 02B 0.2 0.637 90.2 1.91 270 2.7 8.4 01A 0.1 0.318 45.1 0.955 135 0.89 2.8 02A 0.2 0.637 90.2 1.91 270 2.0 6.0
200 V 04A 0.4 1.27 180 3.82 541 2.6 8.0 08A 0.75 2.39 338 7.16 1010 4.1 13.9 3000 5000 15A 1.5 4.77 675 14.3 2030 7.5 23.0 02D 0.2 0.637 90.2 1.91 270 1.4 4.6
400 V 04D 0.4 1.27 180 3.82 541 1.4 4.4 08D 0.75 2.39 338 7.16 1010 2.6 7.8 15D 1.5 4.77 675 14.3 2030 4.5 13.7
kW Nm ozin 3 Nm ozin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms ozin /Arms 3 x10-4 kgm2 x10-3 ozins2 3 kW/s rad/s2
3
Rated Speed 1
0.160 22.7 0.0491 0.695 20.6 64800
0.258 36.5 0.193 2.73 21.0 33000
0.392 55.5 0.0491 0.695 20.6 64800
0.349 49.4 0.193 2.73 21.0 33000
0.535 75.8 0.331 4.69 49.0 38500
0.641 90.8 2.10 29.7 27.1 11400
0.687 97.3 4.02 56.9 56.7 11900
0.481 68.1 0.193 2.73 21.0 33000
0.963 136 0.331 4.69 49.0 38500
0.994 141 2.10 29.7 27.1 11400
1.14 161 4.02 56.9 56.7 11900
Rated Angular Acceleration 1
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 100C (212F). Other values quoted at 20C (66.2F). All values are typical. * 2. Rated torques are continuous allowable torque values at 40C (104F) with an alminum plate (heat sink) attached. Heat sink dimensions: SGMPH-01, 02, and 04: 250 250 6 (mm), [10 10 0.24 (in)] SGMPH-08, and 15: 300 300 12 (mm), [12 12 0.5 (in)] * 3. These values are reference values.
3-11
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.2.1 SGMPH Servomotors Without Gears

The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake is expressed using the following equation. (The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake) = (rotor moment of inertia) + (brake moment inertia)
Servomotor Model SGMPHHolding Brake Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgxm2 10
-3
01A 01B 0.029 0.411
02A 02B 02D 1.54
04A 04D
08A 08D
15A 15D
0.109
0.875 12.4
ozxinxs2
(3) Derating Rate for Servomotor With Oil Seal

For a motor with oil seal, use the following derating rate because of the higher friction torque.
Servomotor Model SGMPHDerating Rate (%) 01A 01B 90 02A 02B 02D 04A 04D 08A 08D 95 15A 15D

(a) 100-V Class
SGMPH-01B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 B 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 B SGMPH-02B
(b) 200-V / 400-V Class

5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed A 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 B SGMPH-01A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 B SGMPH-02A, -02D 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 B SGMPH-04A, -04D 5000 4000 Motor 3000 A speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 0 B SGMPH-08A, -08D
0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 Torque (N m) 0 50 100 150 Torque (oz in) SGMPH-15A, -15D
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Torque (N m) 0 100 200 300 Torque (oz in)
5000 4000
Motor 3000 A speed 2000 -1 (min ) 1000 0 0 0
A : Continuous Duty Zone
B : Intermittent Duty Zone
3-12

Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model SGMPH-01 SGMPH-02 90 VDC SGMPH-04 SGMPH-08 SGMPH-15 SGMPH-01 SGMPH-02 24 VDC SGMPH-04 SGMPH-08 SGMPH-15 Servomotor Capacity W 100 200 400 750 1500 100 200 400 750 1500 Holding Brake Specifications Holding Coil Rated Torque Resistance Current Nm (ozin) (at 20 C) A (at 20 C) 0.318 1000 0.09 (45.1) 0.637 1062 0.085 (90.2) 1.27 1125 0.08 (180) 2.39 1083 0.083 (338) 4.77 832 0.108 (675) 0.318 71 0.34 (45.1) 0.637 75.8 0.32 (90.2) 1.27 75.8 0.32 (180) 2.39 76.8 0.31 (338) 4.77 57.6 0.42 (675)
Capacity W 8.1 7.6 7.2 7.5 10 8.1 7.6 7.6 7.5 10
3.2.2 SGMPH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100V, 200V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 15 min max. Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
3-13
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.2.2 SGMPH Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMPHRated Torque/ Efficiency2 Nm/% (ozin/%) 1.27/80 (180/80) 2.63/80 (372/80) 5.34/80 (756/80) 8.40/80 (1190/80) 2.55/80 (361/80) 5.27/80 (746/80) 10.7/80 (1520/80) 16.8/80 (2380/80) 5.08/80 (719/80) 10.5/80 (1490/80) 21.3/80 (3020/80) 33.5/80 (4740/80) 9.56/80 (1350/80) 19.8/80 (2800/80) 40.2/80 (5690/80) 63.1/80 (8940/80) 19.1/80 (2710/80) 42.5/80 (6020/80) 80.1/80 (11300/80) 126/80 (17800/80) Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 4.32 (612) 8.88 (1257) 18.1 (2560) 28.4 (4020) 8.6 (1220) 17.8 (2520) 36.1 (5110) 56.7 (8030) 17.2 (2440) 35.5 (5030) 72.2 (10200) 113 (16000) 32 (4530) 66.6 (9430) 134 (19000) 213 (30200) 64.4 (9120) 144 (20100) 270 (38200) 425 (60200) 10-4 kgm2 (x 10-3 ozins2) Output W Rated Speed min-1 Rated Torque Nxm (ozxin) Rated Speed min-1 Max. Speed 1 min-1
Gear Ratio
Motor + Gears
Gears
01J1 01J3 100 01JC 01J7 02J1 02J3 200 02JC 02J7 04J1 04J3 400 04JC 04J7 08J1 08J3 750 08JC 08J7 15J1 15J3 1500 15JC 15J7 4.77 (675) 2.39 (338) 3000 1.27 (179.8) 0.637 (90.2) 0.318 (45.0)
1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 290 143 91 600 269 143 91
800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 387 190 121 800 359 190 121
0.112 (15.9) 0.067 (9.49) 0.084 (11.9) 0.070 (9.91) 0.386 (54.7) 0.283 (40.1) 0.298 (42.2) 0.268 (37.9) 0.524 (74.2) 0.511 (72.4) 0.561 (79.4) 0.496 (70.2) 2.55 (361) 2.53 (358) 2.58 (365) 2.40 (340) 4.97 (704) 5.27 (746) 5.33 (755) 4.82 (683)
0.063 (0.892) 0.018 (0.255) 0.035 (0.496) 0.021 (0.297) 0.193 (2.73) 0.090 (1.27) 0.105 (1.49) 0.075 (1.06) 0.193 (2.73) 0.180 (2.55) 0.230 (3.26) 0.165 (2.34) 0.450 (6.37) 0.425 (6.02) 0.475 (6.73) 0.300 (4.25) 0.950 (13.5) 1.250 (17.7) 1.300 (18.4) 0.800 (11.3)
* 1. Maximum motor speed is up to 4000 min-1 at the shaft. * 2. Gear output torque is expressed using the following equation.
3-14
* 3. (Gear output torque) = (servomotor output torque) ( gear1ratio ) (efficiency)
3.2.3 SGMPH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism Thermal Class: B Withstand Voltage: 100V, 200V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, self-cooled, IP55 (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 3 min max. Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
3
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMPHRated Torque/Efficiency Nm/% (ozin/%) 1.27/80 (180/80) 2.80/80 (396/80) 5.34/80 (756/80) 8.40/80 (1190/80) 2.55/80 (361/80) 5.96/85 (844) 11.4/85 (1610/85) 17.9/85 (2540/85) 5.4/85 (765/85) 11.9/85 (1690/85) 22.7/85 (3220/85) 33.5/80 (4744/80)
2
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 4.34 (612) 9.55 (1350) 18.2 (2580) 28.73 (4060) 8.4 (1190) 19.3 (2730) 37.3 (5280) 58.63 (8300) 17.6 (2490) 39.13 (5540) 72.2 (10200) 1153 (16300)
Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 ozins2) Rated Speed min-1 Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Motor + Gears
Gears
01H1 01HB 100 01HC 01H7 02H1 02HB 200 02HC 02H7 04H1 04HB 400 04HC 04H7 3000
1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91
800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121
0.318 (45.0)
0.142 (2.01) 0.097 (1.37) 0.092 (1.30) 0.082 (1.16) 0.553 (7.83) 0.281 (3.98) 0.303 (4.29) 0.258 (3.65) 0.691 (9.79) 0.526 (7.45) 0.526 (7.45) 0.504 (7.13)
0.093 (1.32) 0.048 (0.68) 0.043 (0.61) 0.033 (0.47) 0.360 (5.10) 0.088 (1.25) 0.110 (1.56) 0.065 (0.920) 0.360 (5.10) 0.195 (2.76) 0.195 (2.76) 0.172 (2.44)
0.637 (90.2)
1.27 (179.8)
3-15
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.2.3 SGMPH Servomotors With Low-backlash Gears
Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMPHRated Torque/Efficiency2 Nm/% (ozin/%) 10.2/85 (1440/85) 22.3/85 (3160/85) 42.7/85 (6050/85) 67/85 (9490/85) 20.3/85 (2880/85) 44.6/85 (6320/85) 80.1/80 (11300/80) 126/80 (17800/80)
Gear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque Nm (ozin) 33.3 (4720) 713 (10100) 140 (19800) 2063 (29200) 33.3 (4720) 71 (10100) 270 (38200) 353 3 (50000)
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 ozins2) Rated Speed min-1 Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Motor + Gears
Gears
08H1 08HB 750 08HC 08H7 3000 15H1 15HB 1500 15GC 15G7 4.77 (675)
1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
600 273 143 91 600 273 143 91
800 363 190 121 800 363 190 121
2.87 (40.6) 2.62 (37.1) 2.76 (39.1) 2.56 (36.3) 5.56 (78.7) 6.11 (86.5) 6.00 (85.0) 5.14 (72.8)
0.765 (10.8) 0.523 (7.41) 0.663 (9.39) 0.455 (6.44) 1.54 (21.8) 2.09 (29.6) 1.98 (28.0) 1.12 (15.8)
2.39 (338)
* 1. Maximum motor speed is up to 4000 min-1 at the shaft. * 2. Gear output torque is expressed using the following equation. (Gear output torque) = (servomotor output torque) ( gear1ratio ) (efficiency) * 3. The instantaneous peak torque values indicated with 3 are limited by the gear, so use the following servomotor instantaneous peak torque. In this case, set torque limit parameters Pn402 and 403 for the SERVOPACK at 250%.
3-16
3.3 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1500min-1)

3.3.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) Without Gears
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP67 self-cooled (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive
(a) 200-V Class

Voltage 200 V Servomotor Model SGMGH- 05AA 09AA 13AA 20AA 30AA 44AA 55AA 75AA 1AAA 1EAA Rated Output 1 kW Nm Rated Torque 1 lbin 3 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current
1
0.45 2.84 25 8.92 79 3.8 11
0.85 5.39 48 13.8 122 7.1 17
1.3 8.34 74 23.3 207 10.7 28
1.8 11.5 102 28.7 254 16.7 42
2.9 18.6 165 45.1 404 23.8 56 1500 3000
4.4 28.4 252 71.1 630 32.8 84
5.5 35.0 310 87.6 775 42.1 110
7.5 48.0 425 119 1050 54.7 130
11 70.0 620 175 1550 58.6 140
15 95.4 844 224 1980 78.0 170
Nm lbin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms lbin/Arms

3 3
Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Rated Speed 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant
2000 0.83 7.35 46.0 0.91 8.05 67.5 (76.0) 59.8 (67.3) 120 4210 0.88 7.79 89.0 (97.5) 78.8 (86.3) 137 3930 0.93 8.23 125 (134) 111 (119) 184 3850 1.25 11.1 281 (300) 249 (266) 174 2490 1.32 11.7 315 (353) 279 (312) 289 3030
0.82 7.26 7.24 (9.34) 6.41 (8.28) 11.2 3930
0.83 7.35 13.9 (16.0) 12.3 (14.2) 20.9 3880
0.84 7.43 20.5 (22.6) 18.2 (20.1) 33.8 4060
0.73 6.46 31.7 (40.2) 28.1 (35.6) 41.5 3620
Rotor Moment of Inertia J2 Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Angular Acceleration 1
10-4 kgm2 x10-3 lbins2 kW/s rad/s2
(54.5) 40.7 (48.2) 75.3 4050
Note: Refer to the next page for the notes.
3-17
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.3.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) Without Gears
(b) 400-V Class

Voltage Servomotor Model SGMGHRated kW Output 1 Rated Torque 1 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current 1 Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Rated Speed
1
400 V 05DA 09DA 13DA 20DA 30DA 44DA 55DA 75DA 1ADA 1EDA 0.45 2.84 0.85 5.39 48 13.8 122 3.5 8.5 1.3 8.34 74 23.3 207 5.4 14 1.8 11.5 102 28.7 254 8.4 20 2.9 18.6 165 45.1 400 11.9 28 1500 3000 1.64 14.5 7.24 (9.34) 6.42 (8.28) 11.2 3930 1.65 14.6 13.9 (16.0) 12.3 (14.2) 20.9 3880 1.68 14.9 20.5 (22.6) 18.2 (20.1) 33.8 4060 1.46 12.9 31.7 (40.2) 28.1 (35.6) 41.5 3620 1.66 14.7 46.0 (54.5) 40.7 (48.2) 75.3 4050 1.82 16.1 67.5 (76.0) 59.8 (67.3) 120 4210 1.74 15.4 89.0 (97.5) 78.8 (86.3) 137 3930 2.0 17.7 125 (134) 111 (119) 184 3850 2.56 22.7 281 (300) 249 (266) 174 2490 2000 2.64 23.4 315 (353) 279 (312) 289 3030 4.4 28.4 252 71.1 630 16.5 40.5 5.5 35.0 310 90.7 803 20.8 55 7.5 48.0 425 123 1090 25.4 65 11 70.0 620 175 1550 28.1 70 15 95.4 844 221 1960 37.2 85
Nm lbin Nm lbin 3 Arms Arms min-1

3
25 8.92 79 1.9 5.5
Max. Speed 1 min-1 Nm/Arms Torque lbin/A rms Constant

3
Rotor Moment of Inertia J

2
10-4 kgm2 x10-3 lbins2
Rated Power kW/s Rate 1 Rated Angular rad/s2 Acceleration 1
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 20C (68F). * 2. The values in the parentheses are those for motors with holding brakes. * 3. These values are reference values. Note: These characteristics are values with the following iron plate (heat sink) attached for cooling. SGMGH-05, 09, and 13: 400 400 20 (mm) [15.75 15.75 0.79 (in)] SGMGH-20, 30, 44, 55, and 75: 550 550 30 (mm) [21.65 21.65 1.18 (in)] SGMGH-1A and 1E: 650 650 35 (mm) [25.59 25.59 1.38 (in)]
3-18

Servomotor Model SGMGH10-4 kgxm2 Holding Brake Moment of Inertia J 10-3 lbxinxs2 Servomotor Model SGMGH10-4 kgxm2 Holding Brake Moment of Inertia J 10-3 lbxinxs2 05AA 09AA 13AA 20AA 30AA 44AA 55AA 75AA 05DA 09DA 13DA 20DA 30DA 44DA 55DA 75DA 2.10 1.86 1AAA 1EAA 1ADA 1EDA 18.8 16.7 37.5 33.2 8.50 7.53

3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0 SGMGH-05A A, -05D A 3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0 SGMGH-09A A, -09D A 3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1)1000 0 SGMGH-13A A, -13D A 3000 SGMGH-20A A, -20D A
3
Motor 2000 speed A (min-1) 1000 0
0 0
2 4 6 8 10 Torque (N m) 20 40 60 80 Torque (lb in)
0 0
5 10 15 20 Torque (N m) 50 100 150 Torque (lb in)
10 20 30 Torque (N m)
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 Torque (lb in) SGMGH-55A A, -55D A
3000
SGMGH-30A A, -30D A
3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0
SGMGH-44A A, -44D A
3000
3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0
SGMGH-75A A, -75D A
Motor 2000 speed (min-1)1000 0
10 20 30 40 50 Torque (N m)
0 0
20 40 60 80 100 Torque (N m)
0 0
50 100 150 Torque (N m) 500 1000 Torque (lb in)
0 100 200 300 400 Torque (lb in) SGMGH-1AA A, -1AD A
0 200 400 600 800 Torque (lb in)
3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0
SGMGH-1EA A, -1ED A 3000 Motor 2000 speed A (min-1) 1000 0
B A : Continuous Duty Zone B : Intermittent Duty Zone
0 0
50 100 150 200 250 Torque (N m)
0 500 1000 1500 2000 Torque (lb in)
3-19

Holding Brake Specifications Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model Servomotor Capacity W 450 850 1300 1800 2900 4400 5500 7500 11000 15000 450 850 1300 1800 2900 4400 5500 7500 11000 15000 Capacity W 10.1 10.1 10.1 18.5 18.5 18.5 23.5 23.5 32.0 35.0 9.85 9.85 9.85 18.5 18.5 18.5 23.5 23.5 32.0 35.0 Holding Torque Nm (lbin) 4.41 (39.0) 12.7 (112) 12.7 (112) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 72.6 (643) 72.6 (643) 84.3 (746) 115 (1010) 4.41 (39.0) 12.7 (112) 12.7 (112) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 72.6 (643) 72.6 (643) 84.3 (746) 115 (1010) Coil Resistance (at 20 C (68 F)) 804 804 804 438 438 438 327 327 253 231 58.7 58.7 58.7 31.1 31.1 31.1 22.8 22.8 18.0 16.4 Rated Current A (at 20 C (68 F)) 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.28 0.28 0.36 0.39 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.77 0.77 0.77 1.05 1.05 1.33 1.46
SGMGH-05 SGMGH-09 SGMGH-13 SGMGH-20 SGMGH-30 90 VDC SGMGH-44 SGMGH-55 SGMGH-75 SGMGH-1A SGMGH-1E SGMGH-05 SGMGH-09 SGMGH-13 SGMGH-20 SGMGH-30 24 VDC SGMGH-44 SGMGH-55 SGMGH-75 SGMGH-1A SGMGH-1E
3-20
3.3.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Foot and flange-mounted Type 4095 to 4115: Omni-directional mounting Type 4130 to 4190: Horizontal mounting to shaft Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP44 self-cooled (or the equivalent) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: Roughly 0.6 to 2 at the gear output shaft Gear Rotation Direction: Reverse direction of servomotor Gear Lubricating Method: Type 4095 to 4115: Grease Type 4130 to 4190: Oil
* For oil lubrication, the motor should be mounted horizontal to the shaft. Contact your Yaskawa representative about lubrication for angle mounting.
3
10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2)
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 42.8/80 (379/80) 78.5/80 (695/80) 140/75 (1240/75) 207/80 (1830/80) 66.3/80 (587/80) 122/80 (1080/80) 203/70 (1800/70) 321/80 (2840/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin)
Gear Ratio
Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% (lbin/%) 13.6/80 (120/80) 25.0/80 (221/80) 44.8/70 (398/70) 66.0/80 (584/80) 25.9/80 (229/80) 47.4/80 (420/80) 79.3/70 (702/70) 125/75 (1110/75)
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
05AAA6 05DAA6 05AAB6 05DAB6 05AAC6 05DAC6 05AA76 05DA76 09AAA6 09DAA6 09AAB6 09DAB6 09AAC6 09DAC6 09AA76 09DA76 0.85 5.39 (48) 1500 0.45 2.84 (25)
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
250 136 71 51 250 136 71 51
500 272 142 103 500 272 142 103
9.20 (8.14) 8.84 (7.82) 8.39 (7.43) 8.41 (7.44) 15.7 (13.9) 15.3 (13.5) 15.9 (14.1) 16.1 (14.3)
1.96 (1.73) 1.6 (1.42) 1.15 (1.02) 1.17 (1.04) 1.8 (1.59) 1.4 (1.24) 2.0 (1.77) 2.2 (1.95)
3-21
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.3.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 112/80 (991/80) 192/75 (1700/75) 392/80 (3470/80) 541/80 (4790/80) 138/80 (1220/80) 253/80 (2240/80) 482/80 (4270/80) 666/80 (5900/80) 217/80 (1920/80) 397/80 (3510/80) 758/80 (6710/80) 1050/80 (9290/80) 341/80 (3020/80) 625/80 (5530/80) 1200/80 (10600/80) 1650/80 (14600/80) 420/80 (3720/80) 771/80 (6820/80) 1470/80 (13000/80) 2030/80 (18000/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% (lbin/%) 40.0/80 (354/80) 68.7/80 (608/80) 140/75 (1240/75) 193/80 (1710/80) 55.1/80 (488/80) 101/80 (894/80) 193/75 (1710/75) 266/80 (2350/80) 89.4/80 (791/80) 164/80 (1450/80) 313/80 (2770/80) 432/75 (3820/75) 136/80 (1020/80) 250/80 (2210/80) 477/80 (4220/80) 660/80 (5840/80) 168/80 (1490/80) 308/80 (2730/80) 588/80 (5200/80) 811/80 (7180/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
13AAA6 13DAA6 13AAB6 13DAB6 13AAC6 13DAC6 13AA76 13DA76 20AAA6 20DAA6 20AAB6 20DAB6 20AAC6 20DAC6 20AA76 20DA76 30AAA6 30DAA6 30AAB6 30DAB6 30AAC6 30DAC6 30AA76 30DA76 44AAA6 44AAB6
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1500 2.9 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 28.4 (252) 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 35.0 (310) 1/11 1/21 1/29
250 136 71 51 250 136 71 51 250 136 71 51 250 136 71 51 250 136 71 51
500 272 142 103 500 272 142 103 500 272 142 103 500 272 142 103 500 272 142 103
22.3 (19.7) 23.4 (20.7) 22.5 (19.9) 21.4 (18.9) 38.0 (33.6) 36.5 (32.3) 37.6 (33.3) 37.3 (33.0) 52.3 (46.3) 50.8 (45.0) 51.9 (45.9) 91.9 (81.3) 79.5 (70.4) 75.2 (66.6) 115 (102) 131 (116) 103 (91.2) 98.8 (87.4) 168 (149) 166 (147)
1.8 (1.59) 2.9 (2.57) 2.0 (1.77) 0.9 (0.797) 6.3 (5.58) 4.8 (4.25) 5.9 (5.22) 5.6 (4.96) 6.3 (5.58) 4.8 (4.25) 5.9 (5.22) 45.9 (40.6) 12.0 (10.6) 7.7 (6.82) 47.5 (42.0) 63.5 (56.2) 14.0 (12.4) 9.8 (8.67) 79.0 (69.9) 77.0 (68.2)
1.3
8.34 (74)
1.8
11.5 (102)
18.6 (165)
4.4 44AAC6 44AA76 55AAA6 55AAB6 5.5 55AAC6 55AA76
3-22
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 1040/80 (9200/80) 1990/80 (17600/80) 2750/80 (24400/80) 1550/80 (13700/80) 2950/80 (26100/80) 4070/80 (36000/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% (lbin/%) 422/80 (3740/80) 807/80 (7140/80) 1120/80 (9890/80) 615/80 (5440/80) 1180/80 (10400/80) 1630/80 (14400/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
75AAB6 75AAC6 75AA76 1500 1AAAB6 1AAAC6 1AAA76 11 70 7.5 48.0 (425)
1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29
136 71 51 136 71 51
272 142 103 182 95 69
190 (168) 204 (181) 216 (191) 370 (327) 376 (333) 519 (459)
65.0 (57.5) 79.0 (69.9) 91.0 (80.5) 90.0 (79.7) 95.0 (84.1) 238.0 (211)
Note: 1. For the shaft center allowable radial load, refer to the servomotor dimensional drawing. 2. Output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. Values in the table are at the rated motor speed. 3. 15-kW servomotors do not equipped with gears.
Efficiency Efficiency
Output torque
Output torque
3.3.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange-mounted (Omni-directional mounting) Gear Lubricating Method: Grease Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP44 self-cooled (or the equivalent) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 0.05 (3 min) at the gear output shaft Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
3-23
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.3.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 35.7/80 (316/80) 64.2/80 (568/80) 143/80 (1270/80) 207/80 (1830/80) 321/80 (2840/80) 55.2/80 (489/80) 74.5/60 (659/60) 221/80 (1960/80) 320/80 (2830/80) 497/80 (4400/80) 93.2/80 (825/80) 168/80 (1490/80) 373/80 (3300/80) 541/80 (4790/80) 839/80 (7430/80) 115/80 (1020/80) 207/80 (1830/80) 459/80 (4060/80) 666/80 (5900/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency 2 Nm/% (lbin/%) 11.4/80 (101/80) 20.4/80 (181/80) 45.4/80 (402/80) 65.9/80 (583/80) 102/80 (903/80) 21.6/80 (191/80) 38.8/80 (343/80) 86.2/80 (763/80) 125/80 (1110/80) 194/80 (1720/80) 33.4/80 (296/80) 60.0/80 (531/80) 133/80 (1180/80) 193/80 (1710/80) 300/80 (2660/80) 46.0/80 (407/80) 82.8/80 (733/80) 184/80 (1630/80) 267/80 (2360/80) Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
05AAL14 05DAL14 05AAL24 05DAL24 05AAL54 05DAL54 05AAL74 05DAL74 05AAL84 05DAL84 09AAL14 09DAL14 09AAL24 09DAL24 09AAL54 09DAL54 09AAL74 09DAL74 09AAL84 09DAL84 13AAL14 13DAL14 13AAL24 13DAL24 13AAL54 13DAL54 13AAL74 13DAL74 13AAL84 13DAL84 20AAL14 20DAL14 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 1.8 11.5 (102) 8.34 (74) 5.39 (48) 2.84 (25)
1/5 1/9 0.45 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 0.85 1/20 1/29 1500 1/45 1/5 1/9 1.3 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29
300 167 75 51 33 300 167 75 51 33 300 167 75 51 33 300 167 75 51
600 334 150 102 66 600 334 150 102 66 600 334 150 102 66 600 334 150 102
8.50 (7.52) 8.18 (7.24) 11.9 (10.5) 10.0 (8.85) 9.05 (8.01) 15.2 (13.5) 14.8 (13.1) 18.6 (16.5) 16.7 (14.8) 18.4 (16.3) 27.7 (24.5) 25.3 (22.4) 27.4 (24.3) 30.9 (27.3) 27.2 (24.1) 41.9 (37.1) 39.5 (35.0) 51.9 (45.9) 45.1 (39.9)
1.26 (1.12) 0.94 (0.832) 4.66 (4.12) 2.76 (2.44) 1.81 (1.60) 1.30 (1.15) 0.90 (0.797) 4.70 (4.16) 2.80 (2.48) 4.50 (3.98) 7.20 (6.37) 4.80 (4.25) 6.90 (6.11) 10.4 (9.21) 6.70 (5.93) 10.2 (9.03) 7.80 (6.90) 20.2 (17.9) 13.4 (11.9)
3-24
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 182/80 (1610/80) 328/80 (2900/80) 730/80 (6460/80) 284/80 (2510/80) 512/80 (4530/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency 2 Nm/% (lbin/%) 74.4/80 (659/80) 134/80 (1190/80) 298/80 (2640/80) 114/80 (1010/80) 204/80 (1810/80) Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24 30AAL54 30DAL54 44AAL14 4.4 44AAL24 18.6 (165) 1500
1/5 2.9 1/9 1/20 28.4 (251) 1/5 1/9
300 167 75 300 167
600 334 150 600 334
66.4 (58.8) 58.5 (51.8) 66.2 (58.6) 87.9 (77.8) 80.0 (70.8)
20.4 (18.1) 12.5 (11.1) 20.2 (17.9) 20.4 (18.1) 12.5 (11.1)
Note: For the shaft center allowable radial load, refer to the servomotor dimensional drawing. * 1. The maximum input motor speed of the gears is 4000 min-1. * 2. Output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. Values in the table are at the rated motor speed.
Output torque
Output torque
3-25

3.4.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000min-1) Without Gears
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP67 self-cooled (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive
Voltage Servomotor Model SGMGHRated Output 1 Rated Torque 1 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant
1
200 V 03AB 0.3 2.84 25 7.17 63 3.0 7.3 06AB 0.6 5.68 50 14.1 125 5.7 13.9 09AB 0.9 8.62 76 19.3 171 7.6 16.6 12AB 1.2 11.5 102 28.0 248 11.6 28 1000 2000 1.03 9.12 7.24 (9.34) 6.41 (8.28) 11.2 3930 1.06 9.38 13.9 (16.0) 12.3 (14.2) 23.2 4080 1.21 10.7 20.5 (22.6) 18.2 (20.1) 36.3 4210 1.03 9.12 31.7 (40.2) 28.1 (35.6) 41.5 3620 1.07 9.47 46.0 (54.5) 40.7 (48.2) 79.4 4150 1.19 10.5 67.5 (76.0) 59.8 (67.3) 120 4210 1.34 11.9 89.0 (97.5) 78.8 (86.3) 164 4290 1.26 11.2 125 (134) 111 (119) 221 4200 20AB 2.0 19.1 169 44.0 390 18.5 42 30AB 3.0 28.4 252 63.7 564 24.8 56 40AB 4.0 38.2 338 107 947 30 84 55AB 5.5 52.6 466 136.9 1210 43.2 110
kW Nm lbin 3 Nm lbin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms lbin/Arms 3 x10-4 kgm2 x10-3 lbins2 3 kW/s2 rad/s2
3
Rated Speed 1
Rotor Moment of Inertia J2 Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Anglar Acceleration 1
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 20C (68F). * 2. The values in the parentheses are those for motors with holding brakes. * 3. These values are reference values. Note: These characteristics are values with the following iron plate (heat sinks) attached for cooling. SGMGH-03, 06, and 09: 400 400 20 (mm) [15.75 15.75 0.79 (in)] SGMGH-12, 20, 30, 40 and 55: 550 550 30 (mm) [21.65 21.65 1.18 (in)]
3-26

Servomotor Model SGMGHHolding Brake Moment of Inertia J 10-4 kgxm2 10-3 lbxinxs2 03AB 06AB 09AB 12AB 20AB 30AB 40AB 55AB 2.10 1.86 8.50 7.52
* These values are referece values.

2000 Motor speed (min-1) 500 0 0 2 4 6 Torque (N m) 8 1500 1000 A B SGMGH-03A B 2000 Motor speed (min-1) 1500 1000 500 0 0 A B SGMGH-06A B 2000 Motor speed (min-1) 1500 1000 500 0 0 5 10 15 20 Torque (N m) A B SGMGH-09A B 2000 Motor speed (min-1) 1500 1000 500 0 0 10 20 30 Torque (N m) A B SGMGH-12A B
5 10 15 Torque (N m)
0
2000 1500 Motor speed 1000 (min-1) 500 0 0
20 40 60 Torque (lb in)

SGMGH-20A B 2000 1500 A B Motor speed 1000 (min-1) 500 20 40 60 Torque (N m) 0
50 100 Torque (lb in)

SGMGH-30A B
0
2000 1500
50 100 150 Torque (lb in)

SGMGH-40A B
0
2000 1500

SGMGH-55A B
Motor 1000 speed (min-1) 500
Motor 1000 speed (min-1) 500
0 0
20 40 60 80 Torque (N m) 200 400 600
50 100 150 Torque (N m)
50 100 150 Torque (N m)
A : Continuous Duty Zone
Torque (lb in) B : Intermittent Duty Zone
3-27

Holding Brake Specifications Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model Servomotor Capacity W 300 600 900 1200 2000 3000 4000 5500 300 600 900 1200 2000 3000 4000 5500 Capacity W 10.1 10.1 10.1 18.5 18.5 18.5 23.5 23.5 9.85 9.85 9.85 18.5 18.5 18.5 23.5 23.5 Holding Torque Nm (lbin) 4.41 (39.0) 12.7 (112) 12.7 (112) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 72.6 (643) 72.6 (643) 4.41 (39.0) 12.7 (112) 12.7 (112) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 43.1 (381) 72.6 (643) 72.6 (643) Coil Resistance (at 20 C (68 F)) 804 804 804 438 438 438 327 327 58.7 58.7 58.7 31.1 31.1 31.1 22.8 22.8 Rated Current A (at 20 C (68 F)) 0.11 0.11 0.11 0.21 0.21 0.21 0.28 0.28 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.77 0.77 0.77 1.05 1.05
SGMGH-03 SGMGH-06 SGMGH-09 SGMGH-12 90 VDC SGMGH-20 SGMGH-30 SGMGH-40 SGMGH-55 SGMGH-03 SGMGH-06 SGMGH-09 SGMGH-12 24 VDC SGMGH-20 SGMGH-30 SGMGH-40 SGMGH-55
3-28
3.4.2 SGMGH servomotors (1000min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Mounting: Foot and flange-mounted Type 4095 to 4115: Omni-directional mounting Type 4130 to 4190: Horizontal mounting to shaft Gear Lubricating Method: Type 4095 to 4115: Grease Type 4130 to 4190: Oil Excitaton: Permanent magnet Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP44 self-cooled (or the equivalent) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: Roughly 0.6 to 2 at gear output shaft Gear Rotation Direction: Reverse direction of servomotor Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism
* For oil lubrication, the motor should be mounted horizontal to the shaft. Contact your Yaskawa representative about lubrication for angle mounting.
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 34.4/80 (304/80) 63.1/80 (558/80) 106/70 (938/70) 167/80 (1480/80) 67.7/80 (599/80) 125/80 (1110/80) 208/70 (1840/70) 307/75 (2720/75) 92.7/80 (820/80) 170/80 (1510/80) 304/75 (2690/75) 448/80 (3970/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% ( lbin/%) 13.6/80 (120/80) 25.0/80 (221/80) 41.8/70 (370/70) 65.9/80 (583/80) 27.2/80 (241/80) 50.0/80 (443/80) 83.5/70 (739/70) 123/75 (1090/75) 41.4/80 (366/80) 75.9/80 (672/80) 136/75 (1200/75) 200/80 (1770/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
03ABA6 03ABB6 0.3 03ABC6 03AB76 06ABA6 06ABB6 0.6 06ABC6 06AB76 09ABA6 09ABB6 0.9 09ABC6 09AB76 8.62 (76) 1000 5.68 (50) 2.84 (25)
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29
166 90 47 34 166 90 47 34 166 90 47 34
333 181 95 68 333 181 95 68 333 181 95 68
9.20 (8.14) 8.84 (7.82) 8.39 (7.43) 8.41 (7.44) 15.7 (13.9) 15.3 (13.5) 15.9 (14.1) 16.1 (14.3) 22.3 (19.7) 21.9 (19.4) 22.5 (19.9) 22.8 (20.2)
1.96 (1.73) 1.6 (1.42) 1.15 (1.02) 1.17 (1.59) 1.8 (1.59) 1.4 (1.24) 2.0 (1.77) 2.2 (1.95) 1.8 (1.59) 1.4 (1.24) 2.0 (1.77) 2.3 (2.04)
3-29
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.4.2 SGMGH servomotors (1000min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 126/80 (1120/80) 247/80 (2190/80) 441/75 (3900/75) 651/80 (5760/80) 212/80 (1880/80) 387/80 (3430/80) 739/80 (6540/80) 958/75 (8480/75) 306/80 (2710/80) 561/80 (4970/80) 1070/80 (9450/80) 1480/80 (13000/80) 453/70 (4010/70) 830/70 (7350/70) 1590/70 (14000/70) 2190/70 (19300/70) 1210/80 (10700/80) 2300/80 (20400/80) 3180/80 (28100/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% ( lbin/%) 55.0/80 (487/80) 101/80 (894/80) 180/75 (1590/75) 266/80 (2350/80) 91.7/80 (812/80) 169/80 (1500/80) 321/80 (2840/80) 416/75 (3680/75) 136/80 (1200/80) 250/80 (2210/80) 477/80 (4220/80) 660/80 (5840/80) 183/80 (1620/80) 336/80 (2970/80) 641/80 (5670/80) 886/80 (7840/80) 462/80 (4090/80) 883/80 (7820/80) 1220/80 (10800/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
12ABA6 12ABB6 1.2 12ABC6 12AB76 20ABA6 20ABB6 2.0 20ABC6 20AB76 30ABA6 30ABB6 3.0 30ABC6 30AB76 40ABA6 40ABB6 4.0 40ABC6 40AB76 55ABB6 55ABC6 55AB76 5.5 52.6 (466) 38.2 (338) 1000 28.4 (251) 19.1 (169) 11.5 (102)
1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29
166 90 47 34 166 90 47 34 166 90 47 34 166 90 47 34 90 47 34
333 181 95 68 333 181 95 68 333 181 95 68 333 181 95 68 181 95 68
38.0 (33.6) 36.5 (32.3) 37.6 (33.3) 37.3 (33.0) 52.3 (46.3) 50.8 (45.0) 51.9 (45.9) 91.9 (81.3) 79.5 (70.4) 75.2 (66.6) 115 (102) 131 (116) 103 (91.2) 98.8 (87.4) 168 (149) 166 (147) 190 (168) 204 (181) 216 (191)
6.3 (5.58) 4.8 (4.25) 5.9 (5.22) 5.6 (4.96) 6.3 (5.58) 4.8 (4.25) 5.9 (5.22) 45.9 (40.6) 12.0 (10.6) 7.7 (6.82) 47.5 (42.0) 63.5 (56.2) 14.0 (12.4) 9.8 (8.67) 79.0 (69.9) 77.0 (68.2) 65.0 (57.5) 79.0 (69.9) 91.0 (80.5)
Note: Output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. Values in the table are at the rated motor speed.
3-30
Efficiency
Efficiency
Output torque
Output torque
3.4.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method (can be mounted in any direction) Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP44 self-cooled (or the equivalent) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Gear Lubricating Method: Grease Backlash: 0.05 (3 min) at the gear output shaft Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 28.7/80 (254/80) 51.6/80 (457/80) 115/80 (1020/80) 166/80 (1470/80) 258/80 (2280/80) 56.4/80 (499/80) 82.5/80 (730/80) 226/80 (2000/80) 327/80 (2890/80) 508/80 (4500/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% (lbin/%) 11.4/80 (101/80) 20.4/80 (181/80) 45.4/80 (402/80) 65.9/80 (583/80) 102/80 (903/80) 22.7/80 (201/80) 40.9/80 (362/80) 90.9/80 (805/80) 132/80 (1170/80) 204/80 (1810/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
03ABL14 03ABL24 03ABL54 03ABL74 03ABL84 1000 06ABL14 06ABL24 06ABL54 06ABL74 06ABL84 0.6 5.68 (50) 0.3 2.84 (25)
1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45
200 111 50 34 22 200 111 50 34 22
400 222 100 68 44 400 222 100 68 44
8.50 (7.52) 8.18 (7.24) 8.64 (7.65) 10.0 (8.85) 9.05 (8.01) 15.2 (13.5) 14.8 (13.1) 18.6 (16.5) 16.7 (14.8) 18.4 (16.3)
1.26 (1.12) 0.96 (0.85) 1.40 (1.24) 2.76 (2.44) 1.81 (1.60) 1.30 (1.15) 0.90 (0.797) 4.70 (4.16) 2.80 (2.48) 4.50 (3.98)
3-31
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.4.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMGHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 77.2/80 (683/80) 139/80 (1230/80) 309/80 (2740/80) 448/80 (3970/80) 695/80 (6150/80) 112/80 (991/80) 202/80 (1790/80) 448/80 (3970/80) 650/80 (5750/80) 1010/80 (8920/80) 176/80 (1560/80) 317/80 (2810/80) 704/80 (6230/80) 255/80 (2260/80) 459/80 (4060/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3 lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/ Efficiency Nm/% (lbin/%) 34.5/80 (305/80) 62.1/80 (550/80) 138/80 (1220/80) 200/80 (1770/80) 310/80 (2740/80) 46/80 (407/80) 82.8/80 (733/80) 184/80 (1630/80) 267/80 (2360/80) 414/80 (3660/80) 76.4/80 (676/80) 138/80 (1220/80) 306/80 (2710/80) 114/80 (1010/80) 204/80 (1810/80)
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Max. Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
09ABL14 09ABL24 09ABL54 09ABL74 09ABL84 12ABL14 12ABL24 12ABL54 12ABL74 12ABL84 20ABL14 20ABL24 20ABL54 30ABL14 3.0 30ABL24 28.4 (251) 2.0 19.1 (169) 1.2 1000 11.5 (102) 0.9 8.62 (76)
1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/5 1/9
200 111 50 34 22 200 111 50 34 22 200 111 50 200 111
400 222 100 68 44 400 222 100 68 44 400 222 100 400 222
23.9 (21.2) 25.3 (22.4) 27.4 (24.3) 30.9 (27.3) 27.2 (24.1) 41.9 (37.1) 39.5 (35.0) 51.9 (45.9) 45.1 (39.9) 41.4 (36.6) 56.2 (49.7) 53.8 (47.6) 66.2 (58.6) 87.9 (77.8) 80.0 (70.8)
3.40 (3.01) 4.80 (4.25) 6.90 (6.11) 10.4 (9.21) 6.70 (5.93) 10.2 (9.03) 7.80 (6.90) 20.2 (17.9) 13.4 (11.9) 9.70 (8.59) 10.2 (9.03) 7.80 (6.90) 20.2 (17.9) 20.4 (18.1) 12.5 (11.1)
Note: Output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. Values in the table are at the rated motor speed.
Output torque
Output torque
3-32
3.5 Ratings and Specifications of SGMSH (3000min-1)

3.5.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 200 V Servomotors: 1500 VAC for one minute 400 V Servomotors: 1800 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP67 self-cooled (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive
(a) 200-V Class

Voltage Servomotor Model SGMSHRated Output 1 Rated Torque 1 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current Rated Speed Max. Speed
1 1
200 V 10AA kW Nm lbin Nm Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms lbin/Arms

3 3
15AA 1.5 4.9 43 14.7 130 9.7 28
20AA 2.0 6.36 56.4 19.1 169 12.7 42
30AA 3.0 9.8 87 29.4 260 18.8 56
40AA 4.0 12.6 112 37.8 336 25.4 77
50AA 5.0 15.8 140 47.6 422 28.6 84
1.0 3.18 28.2 9.54 84.4 5.7 17
lbin 3
Instantaneous Max. Current

1 1
3000 5000 0.636 5.63 1.74 (2.07) 1.54 (1.83) 57.9 18250 0.561 4.97 2.47 (2.80) 2.19 (2.48) 97.2 19840 0.544 4.81 3.19 (3.52) 2.82 (3.11) 127 19970 0.573 5.07 7.00 (9.10) 6.20 (8.06) 137 14000 0.53 4.69 9.60 (11.7) 8.50 (10.4) 166 13160 0.60 5.31 12.3 (14.4) 10.9 (12.8) 202 12780
Torque Constant
x10-4 kgm2 Rotor Moment of Inertia J 2 x10-3 lbins2 3 kW/s

1
Rated Power Rate
Rated Angular Acceleration
rad/s2
Note: Refer to the next page for the notes.
3-33
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.5.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears
(b) 400-V Class

Voltage Servomotor Model SGMSHRated Output 1 Rated Torque 1 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current 1 Rated Speed 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant kW Nm lbin 3 Nm lbin Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms lbin/Arms 3 x10-4 kgm2 Rotor Moment of Inertia J 2 x10-3 lbins2 3 kW/s rad/s2 1.27 11.2 1.74 (2.07) 1.54 (1.83) 57.9 18250 1.15 10.2 2.47 (2.80) 2.19 (2.48) 97.2 19840 1.12 9.9 3.19 (3.52) 2.83 (3.11) 127 19970
3
400 V 10DA 1.0 3.18 28.2 9.54 84.4 2.8 8.5 15DA 1.5 4.9 43 14.7 130 4.7 14 20DA 2.0 6.36 56.4 19.1 169 6.2 19.5 3000 5000 1.19 10.5 7.0 (9.10) 6.20 (8.06) 137 14000 1.07 9.5 9.60 (11.7) 8.50 (10.4) 166 13160 1.24 11.0 12.3 (14.4) 10.9 (12.8) 202 12780 30DA 3.0 9.8 87 29.4 260 8.9 28 40DA 4.0 12.6 112 37.8 336 12.5 38 50DA 5.0 15.8 140 47.6 422 13.8 42
Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Arms
Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Angular Acceleration 1
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 20C (68F). * 2. The values in the parentheses are those for motors with holding brakes. * 3. These values are reference values. Note: These characteristics are values with the following aluminum plates (heat sinks) attached for cooling. SGMSH-10, 15, and 20: 300 300 12 (mm) [11.81 11.81 0.47 (in)] SGMSH-30, 40, and 50: 400 400 20 (mm) [15.75 15.75 0.79 (in)]

The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake is expressed using the followtin equation. (The moment of inertia of the servomotor with holding brake) = (rotor moment of inertia) + (brake moment of inertia) Servomotor SGMSHBrake Moment of Inertia kgm2 10-4 lbins2x10-3 10AA 10DA 15AA 15DA 0.325 0.288 20AA 20DA 30AA 30DA 40AA 40DA 2.10 1.86 50AA 50DA
3-34

5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 0 A B SGMSH-10A A, -10D A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 10 80 0 0 0 A B SGMSH-15A A, -15D A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 15 0 0 0 A B SGMSH-20A A, -20D A 5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0 0 0 A B SGMSH-30A A, -30D A
2 4 6 8 Torque (N m) 20
5 10 Torque (N m)
5 10 15 20 Torque (N m)
10 20 30 Torque (N m)
Torque (lb in)
40
60
Torque (lb in)
50
100
Torque (lb in)
50
100
150
Torque (lb in)
100
200
5000 4000 Motor 3000 speed 2000 (min-1) 1000 0
SGMSH-40A A, -40D A
5000 4000
SGMSH-50A A, -50D A
3000 Motor speed 2000 (min-1) 1000
B A : Continuous Duty Zone B : Intermittent Duty Zone
10 20 30 Torque (N m)
40
10 20 30 40 50 Torque (N m)
100 200 300 Torque (lb in)
100 200 300 400 Torque (lb in)

Holding Brake Specifications Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model Servomotor Capacity W 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 Capacity W 7.0 7.0 7.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 Holding Torque Nm (lbin) 7.84 (69.4) 7.84 (69.4) 7.84 (69.4) 20.0 (177) 20.0 (177) 20.0 (177) Coil Resistance (at 20 C (68 F)) 1150 1150 1150 804 804 804 Rated Current A (at 20 C (68 F)) 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.11 0.11 0.11
SGMSH-10 SGMSH-15 SGMSH-20 90 VDC SGMSH-30 SGMSH-40 SGMSH-50
3-35
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.5.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
(Contd) Holding Brake Specifications Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model Servomotor Capacity W 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 Capacity W 7.0 7.0 7.0 9.85 9.85 9.85 Holding Torque Nm (lbin) 7.84 (69.4) 7.84 (69.4) 7.84 (69.4) 20.0 (177) 20.0 (177) 20.0 (177) Coil Resistance (at 20 C (68 F)) 82 82 82 58.7 58.7 58.7 Rated Current A (at 20 C (68 F)) 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.41 0.41 0.41
SGMSH-10 SGMSH-15 SGMSH-20 24 VDC SGMSH-30 SGMSH-40 SGMSH-50
3.5.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) With Low-backlash Gears

Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method (can be mounted in any direction) Gear Lubricating Method: Grease Gear Mechanism: Planetary gear mechanism Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP44 self-cooled (or the equivalent) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Backlash: 0.05 (3 min) at the gear output shaft Gear Rotation Direction: Same direction as servomotor Max. Input Motor Speed for Gears: 4000 min-1
Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMSHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 38.2/80 (338/80) 68.7/80 (608/80) 153/80 (1350/80) 221/80 (1960/80) 343/80 (3040/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/Efficiency 2 Nm/% (lbin/%) 12.7/80 (112/80) 22.9/80 (203/80) 50.9/80 (451/80) 73.8/80 (653/80) 115/80 (1020/80) Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
10AAL14 10DAL14 10AAL24 10DAL24 10AAL54 10DAL54 10AAL74 10DAL74 10AAL84 10DAL84 3.18 (28.2)
1/5 1/9 1.0 3000 1/20 1/29 1/45
600 333 150 103 66
800 444 200 138 89
5.18 (4.58) 4.85 (4.29) 8.53 (7.55) 6.62 (5.86) 5.66 (5.01)
3.44 (3.04) 3.11 (2.75) 6.79 (6.01) 4.88 (4.32) 3.92 (3.47)
3-36
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMSHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 58.8/80 (520/80) 106/80 (938/80) 235/80 (2080/80) 341/80 (3020/80) 529/80 (4680/80) 76.4/80 (676/80) 138/80 (1220/80) 306/80 (2710/80) 443/80 (3920/80) 688/80 (6090/80) 118/80 (1040/80) 212/80 (1880/80) 470/80 (4160/80) 682/80 (6040/80) 1060/80 (9360/80) 151/80 (1340/80) 272/80 (2410/80) 605/80 (5360/80) 877/80 (7760/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/Efficiency 2 Nm/% (lbin/%) 19.6/80 (173/80) 35.3/80 (312/80) 78.4/80 (694/80) 114/80 (1010/80) 176/80 (1560/80) 25.6/80 (227/80) 46/80 (407/80) 102/80 (903/80) 148/80 (1310/80) 230/80 (2036/80) 39.2/80 (347/80) 70.5/80 (624/80) 157/80 (1390/80) 227/80 (2010/80) 353/80 (3120/80) 50.4/80 (446/80) 90.7/80 (803/80) 202/80 (1790/80) 292/80 (2580/80) Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
15AAL14 15DAL14 15AAL24 15DAL24 15AAL54 15DAL54 15AAL74 15DAL74 15AAL84 15DAL84 20AAL14 20DAL14 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 20AAL84 20DAL84 30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24 30AAL54 30DAL54 30AAL74 30DAL74 30AAL84 30DAL84 40AAL14 40AAL24
1/5 1/9 1.5 4.9 (43) 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 2.0 6.36 (56.4) 1/20 1/29 3000 1/45 1/5 1/9 3.0 9.8 (87) 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 12.6 (112) 1/9 1/20 1/29
600 333 150 103 66 600 333 150 103 66 600 333 150 103 66 600 333 150 103
800 444 200 138 89 800 444 200 138 89 800 444 200 138 89 800 444 200 138
5.91 (5.23) 7.24 (6.41) 9.26 (8.20) 7.35 (6.51) 9.05 (8.01) 6.63 (5.87) 7.96 (7.05) 9.98 (8.83) 13.5 (11.9) 9.77 (8.65) 17.2 (15.2) 14.8 (13.1) 27.2 (24.1) 20.4 (18.1) 16.7 (14.8) 19.8 (17.5) 22.1 (19.6) 29.8 (26.4) 23.0 (20.4)
3.44 (3.04) 4.77 (4.22) 6.79 (6.01) 4.88 (4.32) 6.58 (5.82) 3.44 (3.04) 4.77 (4.22) 6.79 (6.01) 10.3 (9.12) 6.58 (5.82) 10.2 (9.03) 7.80 (6.90) 20.2 (17.9) 13.4 (11.9) 9.70 (8.59) 10.2 (9.03) 12.5 (11.1) 20.2 (17.9) 13.4 (11.9)
4.0 40AAL54 40AAL74
3-37
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.5.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
(Contd) Moment of Inertia J Servomotor Servomotor Model SGMSHGear Output Instantaneous Peak Torque/ Effective Nm/% (lbin/%) 190/80 (1680/80) 343/80 (3040/80) 762/80 (6740/80) 10-4 kgm2 (10-3lbins2) Rated Torque Nxm (lbxin) Rated Torque/Efficiency 2 Nm/% (lbin/%) 63.2/80 (559/80) 114/80 (1010/80) 253/80 (2240/80) Max. Speed 1 min-1
Output W
Rated Speed min-1
Gear Ratio
Rated Speed min-1
Motor + Gears
Gears
50AAL14 50AAL24 50AAL54 5.0 3000 15.8 (140)
1/5 1/9 1/20
600 333 150
800 444 200
32.7 (28.9) 24.8 (22.0) 32.5 (28.8)
20.4 (18.1) 12.5 (11.1) 20.2 (17.9)
Note: For the shaft center allowable radial load, refer to the servomotor dimensional drawing. * 1. The maximum input motor speed of the gears is 4000 min-1. * 2. Output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. Values in the table are at the rated motor speed.
Output torque
Output torque
3-38
3.6 Ratings and Specifications of SGMDH (2000min-1)
3.6 Ratings and Specifications of SGMDH (2000min-1)

3.6.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) With Holding Brakes
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Voltage Servomotor Model SGMDHRated Output 1 Rated Torque 1 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Rated Speed 1 Max. Speed 1 Torque Constant Rotor Moment of Inertia J (Including Holding Brake Moment of Inertia) Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Angular Acceleration 1
1
Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP67 self-cooled (except for the shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive Holding Brake: 90 VDC, static friction torque 29.4 Nm 200 V
22AAB 2.2 10.5 92.9 36.7 325 15.7 54
32AAB 3.2 15.3 135 53.5 474 20.9 73 2000 3000
40AAB 4.0 19.1 169 66.9 592 23.2 77
kW Nm lbin 2 Nm lbin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nm/Arms lbin/Arms 2 x10-4 kgm2 x10-3 lbins2 2 kW/s rad/s2
2
0.72 6.4 56.6 50.1 19.5 1850
0.78 6.9 74.2 65.7 31.5 2060
0.92 8.1 91.8 81.3 39.7 2080
* 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM/SGDH SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 20C (68F). * 2. These values reference values. Note: These characteristics are values with the following iron plates (heat sinks) attached for cooling. 650 650 35 (mm) [25.59 25.59 1.38 (in)]
3-39
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.6.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) With Holding Brakes

3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0 SGMDH-22A A B 3000 Motor 2000 speed (min-1) 1000 0 SGMDH-32A A B 3000 SGMDH-40A A B
A : Continuous Duty Zone B B : Intermittent Duty Zone
0 0
10 20 30 Torque (N m) 100 200 300 Torque (lb in)
40
20 40 Torque (N m) 200 400 Torque (lb in)
60
0 0

Holding Brake Specifications Holding Brake Rated Voltage Servomotor Model Servomotor Capacity W 2200 3200 4000 2200 3200 4000 Capacity W 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 Holding Torque Nm (lbin) 29.4 (260) 29.4 (260) 29.4 (260) 29.4 (260) 29.4 (260) 29.4 (260) Coil Resistance (at 20 C (68 F)) 505 505 505 36.0 36.0 36.0 Rated Current A (at 20 C (68 F)) 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.67 0.67 0.67
SGMDH-22 90VDC SGMDH-32 SGMDH-40 SGMDH-22 24VDC SGMDH-32 SGMDH-40
3-40
3.7 Ratings and Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors

3.7.1 Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors
Time Rating: Continuous Vibration Class: 15 m or below Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Excitation: Permanent magnet Mounting: Flange method Voltage Servomotor Model SGMCSRated Output
1
Thermal Class: A Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP42 self-cooled (except for shaft opening) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Drive Method: Direct drive
Ratings and Specifications for Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors 02BB W Nxm ozxin Nxm ozxin Nxm ozxin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nxm/Arms ozxin/Arms kgxm210-4 ozxinxs 10 KW/s rad/s2 second second SGDM2 -2
05BB 105 5.00 708 15.0 2120 5.03 712 1.8 5.1 200 500 3.12 442 51.0 72.2 4.90 980 15 1.3 02
200 V 07BB 04CB 147 7.00 991 21.0 2970 7.06 999 1.4 4.1 200 500 5.51 780 77.0 109 6.36 910 84 4.00 566 12.0 1700 4.09 579 2.1 6.0 200 500 2.16 306 77.0 109 2.08 520
10CB 209 10.0 1420 30.0 4250 10.1 1430 2.0 5.8 200 400 5.56 787 140 198 7.14 710 15 1.3 04
14CB 293 14.0 1980 42.0 5950 14.2 2010 2.0 5.9 200 300 7.60 1080 220 311 8.91 640
42 2.00 283 6.00 850 2.03 287 1.8 5.1 200 500 1.28 181 25.0 35.4 1.60 800
Rated Torque1, 2 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Stole torque 1 Rated Current1 Instantaneous Max. Current 1 Rated Speed1 Max. Speed1 Torque Constant Rotor Moment of Inertia Rated Power Rate1 Acceleration1
Rated Angular Absolute Accuracy Repeatability Applicable SERVOPACK
3-41
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.7.1 Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors
Ratings and Specifications for SGMCS Servomotor without Gears (contd) Voltage Servomotor Model SGMCSRated Output
1
08DB W Nxm ozxin Nxm ozxin Nxm ozxin Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nxm/Arms ozxin/Arms kgxm210-4 ozxinxs210-2 KW/s rad/s2 second second SGDM168 8.00 1130 24.0 3400 8.23 1160 2.0 5.9 200 500 4.46 632 285 479 2.25 280
17DB 356 17.0 2410 51.0 7220 17.4 2460 2.3 6.6 200 350 8.28 1170 510 879 5.67 330 15 1.3 04
200 V 25DB 393 25.0 3540 75.0 10600 25.4 3590 2.7 7.9 150 250 10.3 1460 750 1290 8.33 330
16EB 335 16.0 2270 48.0 6800 16.5 2330 3.3 9.4 200 500 5.58 790 930 1530 2.75 170
35EB 550 35.0 4960 105 14900 35.6 5040 3.5 10.0 150 250 11.1 1570 1430 2110 8.57 240
Rated Torque 1, 2 Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 Stole torque 1 Rated Current 1 Instantaneous Max. Current Rated Speed
1 1
Max. Speed Torque Constant Rotor Moment of Inertia Rated Power Rate 1 Rated Angular Acceleration 1 Absolute Accuracy Repeatability Applicable SERVOPACK
15 1.3 08
Note: 1. SGMCS servomotor with holding brake is not available. 2. For the bearings used in SGMCS servomotors, loss varies according to the bearing temperature. At low temperatures, the amount of heat loss will be large. * 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 100C (212F). Other values quoted at 20C (66.2F). * 2. Rated torques are continuous allowable torque values at 40C (104F) with a iron heat sink attached. Servomotor Model SGMCSHeat Sink Units: mm (in)
B
350 350 12
(13.78) (13.78) (0.47)
C
450 450 12
(17.71) (17.71) (0.47)
D
550 550 12
(21.65) (21.65) (0.47)
E
650 650 12
(25.59) (25.59) (0.47)
3-42

SGMCS-02B
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 0 1.5 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 Torque (N m) 400 800 Torque (oz in) A B Motor speed (min-1) 500 400 300 200 100 0 0 0 3 9 12 6 Torque (N m) 800 1600 Torque (oz in) 15 A B
SGMCS-05B
SGMCS-07B
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 0 5 10 15 20 Torque (N m) 2000 Torque (oz in) 25 A B Motor speed (min-1) 500 400 300 200 100 0 0 0 3 A
SGMCS-04C
9 12 6 Torque (N m) 1500 Torque (oz in)
15
SGMCS-10C
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 6 12 18 24 Torque (N m) 30 A B A : Continuous Duty Zone B : Intermittent Duty Zone
2000 4000 Torque (oz in)
3-43
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.7.1 Small-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors
SGMCS-14C
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 10 20 30 40 Torque(N m) 50 A B 500 Motor speed 400 (min-1) 300 200 100 0 0 0 6 A
SGMCS-08D
12 18 24 Torque(N m)
30
SGMCS-17D
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 0 12 24 36 48 Torque(N m) 60 A B 500 400 Motor speed (min-1) 300 200 100 0 0 0 A
SGMCS-25D
15
30
45 60 Torque(N m)
75
SGMCS-16E
500 Motor speed (min-1) 400 300 200 100 0 0 9 18 27 36 Torque(N m) 45 A B 500 Motor speed 400 (min-1) 300 200 100 0 0 0 A
SGMCS-35E
20
40
80 100 60 Torque(N m)
6000 12000 Torque (oz in) A: Continuous Duty Zone B: Intermittent Duty Zone
3-44
3.7.2 Middle-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors

Time Rating: Continuous Thermal Class: F Withstand Voltage: 1500 VAC for one minute Vibration Class: 15 m or below Enclosure: Totally enclosed, IP42 self-cooled Insulation Resistance: 500 VDC, 10 M min. (except for shaft opening) Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Ambient Humidity: 20% to 80% (no condensation) Excitation: Permanent magnet Drive Method: Direct drive Mounting: Flange method Ratings and Specifications for Middle-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors Voltage Servomotor Model SGMCSRated Output1 W Nxm ozxin Nxm Instantaneous Peak Torque 1 ozxin Rated Torque1, 2 Stole torque 1 Rated
1
45MA 707 45 6370 135 19100 45 5.80 17 150 300 8.39 1190 388 549 52.2 1160 10
80MA 1260 80 11300 240 34000 80 9.74 28 150 300 8.91 1260 627 888 102 1280 15
200 V 1AMA 80NA 1730 110 15600 330 46700 110 13.4 42 150 300 8.45 1200 865 1220 140 1270 20 1260 80 11300 240 34000 80 9.35 28 150 300 9.08 1290 1360 1930 47.1 588 15
1ENA 2360 150 21200 450 63700 150 17.4 56 150 250 9.05 1280 2470 3500 91.1 607 30
2ZNA 3140 200 28300 600 85000 200 18.9 56 150 250 11.5 1630 3060 4330 131 654 30
Nxm Arms Arms min-1 min-1 Nxm/Arms ozxin/Arms kgxm210-4 ozxinxs210-2 KW/s rad/s2 SGDM-
Current1
Instantaneous Max. Current Rated Speed1 Max. Speed1 Torque Constant Rotor Moment of Inertia Rated Power Rate
1
Rated Angular Applicable SERVOPACK
Acceleration1
Note: 1. SGMCS servomotor with holding brake is not available. 2. For the bearings used in SGMCS servomotors, loss varies according to the bearing temperature. At low temperatures, the amount of heat loss will be large. * 1. These items and torque-motor speed characteristics quoted in combination with an SGDM SERVOPACK are at an armature winding temperature of 20C (66.2F). * 2. Rated torques are continuous allowable torque values at 40C (104F) with a iron heat sink attached. Servomotor Model SGMCSHeat Sink Units: mm (in) 45M,80M,1AM,80N,1EN, and 2ZN 75075045
3-45
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.7.2 Middle-capacity Series SGMCS Servomotors
(2) Torque-Motor Speed Characteristics

300
SGMCS-45M
300
SGMCS-80M
Motor speed (min-1)
200
Motor speed (min-1) A B
200
100
100
0 0
50 100 Torque(N m) 10000 Torque (oz in)
150 20000
0 0
300 40000
300
SGMCS-1AM
300
SGMCS-80N
Motor speed (min-1)
200
Motor speed 200 (min-1) A 100 A
100
0 0
100
400 50000
0 0
300 40000
300
SGMCS-1EN
300
SGMCS-2ZN
Motor speed 200 (min-1) 100
Motor speed 200 (min-1) A B 100 A B
0 0
100
200 300 400 Torque(N m) 25000 50000 Torque (oz in)
500
0 0
200
400 600 Torque(N m)
800
50000 100000 Torque (oz in) A: Continuous Duty Zone B: Intermittent Duty Zone
3-46
3.8 Mechanical Specifications of SGMAH, SGMPH, SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
3.8.1 Precautions on Servomotor Installation
Servomotors can be installed either horizontally or vertically. The service life of the servomotor will be shortened or unexpected problems will occur if the servomotor is installed incorrectly or in an inappropriate location. Always observe the following installation instructions.
CAUTION
Do not connect the servomotor directly to a commercial power line. This will damage the servomotor. The servomotor cannot operate without the proper SERVOPACK.
Do not connect
3
Storage Temperature and Humidity Store the servomotor within the following temperature range if it is stored with the power cable disconnected. Ambient temperature during storage: -20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) Ambient humidity during storage: 80%RH or less (with no condensation) Servomotors are designed for indoor use. Install the servomotor in environments that satisfy the following conditions. Free of corrosive or explosive gases. Well-ventilated and free of dust and moisture. Ambient temperature of 0 to 40C (32 to 104 F) Relative humidity of 20 to 80% with no condensation. Facilitates inspection and cleaning Align the shaft of the servomotor with the shaft of the equipAlignment Accuracy ment, and then couple the shafts. Install the servomotor so Measure this distance at four that alignment accuracy falls within the range described on different positions on the circumference. The difference the left. between the maximum and minimum measurements must be Vibration may occur and damage the bearings and encoders if 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) or less. the shafts are not correctly aligned. (Turn together with coupling.)
Installation Site
Alignment
Orientation
Servomotors can be installed either horizontally or vertically.
3-47
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.8.2 Mechanical Tolerance
Flange Through shaft section:

This refers to the gap where the shaft protrudes from the end of the motor.
Handling Oil and Water
If the servomotor is used in a location that is subject to water drops, make sure of the servomotor protective specifications (except for through shaft section). If the servomotor is used in a location that is subject to water or oil mist, use a servomotor with an oil seal to seal the through shaft section.
Cable Stress
Connectors
Precautions on Using Servomotor With Oil Seal The oil surface must be under the oil seal lip. Use an oil seal in favorably lubricated condition. When using a servomotor with its shaft pointed upward, be sure that oil will not stay in the oil seal lips. Make sure there are no bends or tension on the power lines. Especially be careful to wire signal line cables so that they are not subject to stress because the core wires are very thin at only 0.2 to 0.3 mm (0.0079 to 0.012 in). Observe the following precautions: Make sure there is no foreign matters such as dust and metal chips in the connector before connecting. When the connectors are connected to the motor, be sure to connect the end of servomotor main circuit cables before connecting the encoder cables end. If the encoder cables end is connected first, the encoder may be damaged because of the voltage differences between FGs. Make sure of the pin arrangement. Do not apply shock to resin connectors. Otherwise, they may be damaged. When handling a servomotor with its cables connected, hold the servomotor or the connectors. Otherwirse, the cables will be damaged. When bending cables are used, wiring must be performed so that excessive stress will not be applied to the connector section. Failure to observe this caution may damage the connector.
Shaft
IMPORTANT
1. Before starting installation, thoroughly remove the anticorrosive paint that coats the end of the motor shaft.
Anticorrosive paint is coated here.
2. Vibration from improper alignment of shafts will damage the bearings. 3. Do not allow direct impact to be applied to the shafts when installing the coupling as the encoder mounted on the opposite end of the shaft may be damaged.
3.8.2 Mechanical Tolerance

The following table shows tolerances for the servomotors output shaft and installation area. For more details on tolerances, refer to the dimensional drawing of the individual servomotor.
Tolerance T. I. R. (Total Indicator Reading) Perpendicularity between the flange face and output shaft: 0.04 mm (0.00157 in) Mating concentricity of the flange O.D.: 0.04 (0.00157 in) 30 W to 5.0 kW: 0.02 mm (0.000787 in) Run-out at the end of the shaft 5.5 kW to 15.0 kW: 0.04 mm (0.00157 in) Reference Diagram
A B C
3-48
3.8.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation

Positive rotation of the servomotor is counterclockwise when viewed from the load. (Same as for servomotors with gears.)
Positive direction
3.8.4 Impact Resistance

Mount the servomotor with the axis horizontal. The servomotor will withstand the following vertical impacts: Impact acceleration: 490 m/s2 Impact occurrences: 2
Vertical
3.8.5 Vibration Resistance

Mount the servomotor with the axis horizontal. The servomotor will withstand the following vibration acceleration in three directions: Vertical, side to side, and front to back.
Vibration Acceleration at Flange 49 m/s2 24.5 m/s2
Side to side Vertical Front to back
Servomotor Model SGMAH, SGMPH SGMGH, SGMSH, SGMDH
Horizontal shaft
Impact applied to the servomotor
3.8.6 Vibration Class

The vibration class 1for the servomotors at rated motor speed is 15 m or below.
TERMS
Vibration Class A vibration class of 15 m or below indicates a total vibration amplitude of 15 m maximum on the servomotor during rated rotation.
3-49
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.9.1 Allowable Loads
3.9 Mechanical Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors

3.9.1 Allowable Loads
The loads applied while a servomotor is running are roughly classified in the following patterns. Design the machine so that the thrust load and moment load will not exceed the values in the table.
F Where F is external force, Thrust load: Fa = F + Load mass Moment load: M=0
L F
Where F is external force, Thrust load: Fa = F + Load mass Moment load: M = F L
F L A Where F is external force, Thrust load: Fa = Load mass Moment load: M = F (L + A) See the table below for the dimension A of each servomotor model.
Servomotor Model SGMCSDimensions A Units: mm (in) (N) Allowable Thrust Load Fa (lb) Allowable Moment Load M (Nm) (ozin)
02B
05B 0 (0) 1500 337
07B
04C
10C 0 (0) 3300 741
14C
08D
17D 0 (0) 4000 899
25D
16E
35E
0 (0) 11000 2470 135 250 320
40 5660
50 7080
64 9060
70 9910
75
90
93
103
10600 12700 13100 14500 19100 35400 45300
Servomotor Model SGMCSDimensions A Units: mm (in) (N) Allowable Thrust Load Fa (lb) Allowable Moment Load M (Nm) (ozin)
45M
80M 33 (1.30) 9000 2020 180 25400
1AM
80N
1EN 37.5 (1.48) 16000 3590 350 49500
2ZN
Note: For small-capacity series SGMCS Servomotors (02B to 35E), set dimensions A to 0 (zero).
3-50
3.9 Mechanical Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors
3.9.2 Mechanical Tolerance

The following table shows tolerances for the servomotors output shaft and installation area. See the dimensional drawing of the individual servomotor for more details on tolerances.
Mechanical Tolerance Tolerance T. I. R. (Total Indicator Reading) Units: mm (in) Servomotor Model SGMCS02B 05B 07B 04C 10C 14C 08D 17D 25D 0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.08 (0.0031) 0.08 (0.0031) Fig.1 16E 35E
cRun-out of the surface of the shaft dRun-out at the end of the shaft ePerpendicularity between the
flange face and output shaft
0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) Fig.1
0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.07 (0.0028) 0.07 (0.0028) Fig.1
0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.08 (0.0031) 0.08 (0.0031) Fig.1
fCoaxiality of output axis and

mounting fauet
gRight angle between flange face

and output shaft
hReference figure
Tolerance T. I. R. (Total Indicator Reading) Units: mm (in)
Servomotor Model SGMCS45M 80M 1AM 80N 1EN 2ZN 0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.08 (0.0031) 0.08 (0.0031) Fig.2 0.02 (0.00079) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.08 (0.0031) 0.08 (0.0031) Fig.2
cRun-out of the surface of the shaft dRun-out at the end of the shaft ePerpendicularity between the
flange face and output shaft
fCoaxiality of output axis and

mounting fauet
gRight angle between flange face

and output shaft
hReference figure
A Drive end
AB A Drive end
B AB
Opposite drive end A B
Opposite drive end
Fig.1
Fig.2
3-51
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.9.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation
3.9.3 Direction of Servomotor Rotation

Positive rotation of the servomotor is counterclockwise when viewed from the load.
3.9.4 Impact Resistance

Mount the servomotor with the axis horizontal. The servomotor will withstand the following vertical impacts:
Vertical
Impact Acceleration: 490 m/s2 Number of Impacts: 2

Impact applied to the servomotor
3.9.5 Vibration Resistance

Mount the servomotor with the axis horizontal. The servomotor will withstand the following vibration acceleration in three directions: Vertical, side to side, and front to back.
Motor Type Small-capacity Series Middle-capacity Series Vibration Acceleration at Flange 49 m/s2 24.5 m/s2
side to side Horizontal shaft Vertical Front to back
Vibration applied to the servomotor
3.9.6 Vibration Class

The vibration class at rated motor speed is as follows: Vibration Class: 15 m or below
3.9.7 Protective Specification

Motor Type Protective Specification Small-capacity Series IP42 * Middle-capacity Series IP44
* Excluding the shaft opening.
3-52
3.10 Terms and Data for Servomotors With Gears
3.10 Terms and Data for Servomotors With Gears

(1) Terms for Servomotors With Standard Backlash Gears and Low-backlash Gears
Terminology for Servomotors with Gears Typical Value Standard Low-backBacklash lash Gears Gears 3000 4000 3000 4000
Item Rated Input Motor Speed (min-1) Max. Allowable Input Motor Speed (min-1) Rated Torque (Nxm) Lost Motion (arc-min) Torsion Rigidity (arc-min) Angular Transmission Error Accuracy (arc-min)
Measurement Method/Definition
The rated output torque of the motor is the gear input torque. The rated torque is this value multiplied by the inverse of the gear ratio and efficiency. Angular difference in the screw with a 5% rated torque load. (Maximum value at any four positions during output.) Highest torsion angle value on one side with a rated torque load Difference in absolute accuracy for one rotation under load and no-load conditions during output.
20 max. 27 max. 15 max.
3 max. 10 max. 6 max.
* See the following graph for lost motion and torsion rigidity.
Torsion rigidity Torsion rigidity + Torque 5% Rated torque Rated torque Rated torque
Lost motion
Torsion rigidity
- Torque
(2) Noise Data

The following noise data for a servomotor with a gear is for reference only and may slightly vary with the capacity and gear ratio of the servomotor.
Measurement Conditions: Scale A: 50 cm (19.7 in) Ground Noise: 28 dB
100
Initial Noise Level (dB) 50
1000
2000 Input speed (min-1 )
3000
4000
3-53
(3) Efficiency
The output torque and motor speed produce the following trends in efficiency. The values in the tables, Ratings and Specifications of SGMH Servomotors with Gears, are at the rated motor torque and rated motor speed (3000 min-1).
Efficiency
Efficiency
Output torque
Motor speed
3-54
3.11 Servomotor Dimensional Drawings
3.11 Servomotor Dimensional Drawings

Dimensional drawings for the SGMH servomotors are broadly grouped using the following categories: With or without gears or brakes.
Series Motor Capacity 100 VAC: 0.03 / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.2 kW 200 VAC: 0.03 / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.4 / 0.75 kW 400 VAC: 0.3 / 0.65 kW 100 VAC 0.1 / 0.2kW 200 VAC 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.4 / 0.75 / 1.5 kW 400 VAC: 0.2 / 0.4 / 0.75 / 1.5 kW 200 VAC: 0.45 / 0.85 / 1.3 / 1.8 / 2.9 / 4.4 / 5.5 / 7.5 / 11.0 / 15.0 kW 400 VAC: 0.45 / 0.85 / 1.3 / 1.8 / 2.9 / 4.4 / 5.5 / 7.5 / 11.0 / 15.0 kW Groups of Servomotor Dimensional Drawings Without gears and brakes With brakes With standard backlash gears With standard backlash gears and brakes With low-backlash gears Without gears and brakes With brakes With standard backlash gears With standard backlash gears and brakes With low-backlash gears Without gears and brakes 200-V specifications with brakes 400-V specifications with brakes Foot-mounted type with standard backlash gears Flange-type with standard backlash gears Flange-type with low-backlash gears Without gears and brakes With brakes Foot-mounted type with standard backlash gears Flange-type with standard backlash gears Flange-type with low-backlash gears Without gears and brakes 200-V specifications with brakes 400-V specifications with brakes Flange-type with low-backlash gears Without gears and brakes With brakes 135 model 175 model 230 model 290 model 280 model 360 model Reference 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.3 3.12.4 3.12.5 3.13.1 3.13.2 3.13.3 3.13.4 3.13.5 3.15.1 3.15.2 3.15.3 3.15.4 3.15.5 3.15.6 3.16.1 3.16.2 3.16.3 3.16.4 3.16.5 3.17.1 3.17.2 3.17.3 3.17.4 3.18.1 3.18.1 3.19.1 3.19.2 3.19.3 3.19.4 3.19.5 3.19.6
SGMAH (3000 min-1)
SGMPH (3000 min-1)
SGMGH (1500 min-1)
SGMGH (1000 min-1)
200 VAC: 0.3 / 0.6 / 0.9 / 1.2 / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / 5.5 kW
SGMSH (3000 min-1) SGMDH (2000 min-1)
200 VAC: 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / 5.0 kW 400 VAC: 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 / 3.0 / 4.0 / 5.0 kW 200 VAC: 2.2 / 3.2 / 4.0 kW 200 VAC (small-capacity): 2 / 5 / 7 / 4 / 10 / 14 / 8 / 17 / 25 / 16 / 35 Nxm 200 VAC (middle-capacity): 45 / 80 / 110 / 150 / 200 Nxm
SGMCS
Note: Servomotors SGMDH (2000min-1) and SGMCS (direct-drive series) do not have any models provided with gears.
3-55
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.1 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears
3.12 Dimensional Drawings of SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1)

3.12.1 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears
(1) 30 W, 50 W, 100 W
Encoder cable, 6 (0.24) UL20276 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug
Motor plug
Shaft End U
W
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) 0.04 (0.0016) A L LL LM 22 (0.87) 20 (0.79)

15.2 (0.60)
9.6 (0.38)
25 (0.98) 2.5 (0.10) Sh6 14

(0.55)
0.04 (0.0016) A
40 ( 1.57) 21.5 (0.85)

11(0.43)
5 (0.20)
2-4.3 (0.17)
4 (0.16)
30h7
30
0 0.021
Serial encoder
1.181
0 0.00083
0.02 (0.0008)
1 .81 ) Tap Depth (See the following table.)
6(
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3A21 A3A41 A3A61 A5A21 A5A41 A5A61 01A21 01A41 01A61 L LL LM Tap Depth No tap M2.5 5L No tap M2.5 5L No tap M3 6L U W No key 1.2 2 2 (0.047) (0.079) (0.079) No key 1.2 2 2 (0.047) (0.079) (0.079) No key 1.8 (0.071) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) T Approx. Mass kg (lb) 0.3 (0.66) 0.4 (0.88) 0.5 (1.1) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 68 (15) 68 (15) 78 (18) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 54 (12) 54 (12) 54 (12)
94.5
(3.72)
69.5
(2.74)
36.5
(1.44)
102.0
(4.02)
77.0
(3.03)
44.0
(1.73)
119.5
(4.70)
94.5
(3.72)
61.5
(2.42)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-A3, A5, and 01: L-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in), LL-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in) 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-56
Dimensional Tolerances
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 6
0 0.236 0 0.008 0.0003
Model SGMAHA3A21 A3A41 A3A61 A5A21 A5A41 A5A61 01A21 01A41 01A61
0 0.236 0 0.008 0.0003
0 0.315 0 0.009 0.0004
(2) 200 W, 400 W, 750 W

Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 (0.28) 35 (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End U W
Motor plug
300 (11.81) 30 (21.18) L LL LM LG

QK
T (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) Sh6

11
9.5 (0.37)
26.5 (1.04) 13 20 (0.79)

(0.51)
LR LE
LC 21.5 (0.85)
A Serial encoder 0.02 (0.0008)
LBh7
4-LZ
Tap Depth (See the following table.)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02A21 02A41 02A61 04AA21 04AA41 04AA61 08AA21 08AA41 08AA61 L 126.5
(4.98)
LL 96.5
(3.80)
LM 63
(2.48)
LR 30
(1.18)
LE 3
(0.12)
LG 6
(0.24)
LA 70
(2.76)
LC 60
(2.36)
LZ 5.5
(0.22)
154.5 124.5
(6.08) (4.90)
91
(3.58)
30
(1.18)
3
(0.12)
6
(0.24)
70
(2.76)
60
(2.36)
5.5
(0.22)
185
(7.28)
145
(5.71)
111.5
(4.39)
40
(1.57)
3
(0.12)
8
(0.31)
90
(3.54)
80
(3.15)
7 (0.28)
3-57
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.1 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears
Model SGMAH02A21 02A41 02A61 04AA21 04AA41 04AA61 08AA21 08AA41 08AA61
Tap Depth No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M58L
QK
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.1 (2.4) 1.7 (3.7) 3.4 (7.50)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 245 (55) 245 (55) 392 (88)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 74 (17) 74 (17) 147 (33)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 30
(1.18)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-02 and 04: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in). SGMAH-08: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm. 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
Units: mm (in) Flange Face Dimensions LB 50
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
Shaft-end Dimensions S 14
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
14
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
50
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
16
0 0.6299 0 0.011 0.00043
70
0 2.756 0 0.030 0.00012
3-58
(3) 300 W, 650 W

Encoder cable 6 ( 0.24) UL20276 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 ( 0.28) 35 (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End U W 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) L LL LM LH 17 (0.67) 13 (0.51) Sh6 LG
QK
Motor plug
(0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A ( 0.0016)
26.5 (1.04) 9.5 (0.37)
LR 3 (0.12)
LC 21 (0.83)
14 (0.55)
LBh7
A Serial encoder 0.02 (0.0008)
3
4-LZ
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03DA21 03DA41 03DA61 07DA21 07DA41 07DA61 L LL LM 91

(3.58)
LR 30
(1.18)
LG 6
(0.24)
LC 60
(2.36)
LA 70
(2.76)
LZ 5.5
(0.22)
LH 7
(0.28)
154.5 124.5
(6.08) (4.90)
185
(7.28)
145
(5.71)
111.5
(4.39)
40
(1.57)
8
(0.31)
80
(3.15)
90
(3.54)
7
(0.28)
8
(0.31)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03DA21 03DA41 03DA61 07DA21 07DA41 07DA61 Tap Depth No tap M58L No tap M58L QK U W T Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.7 (3.75) 3.4 (7.50) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 245 (55) 392 (88) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 74 (17) 147 (33)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 30
(1.18)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-03: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in). SGMAH-07: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm. 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-59
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.2 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
Model SGMAH03DA21 03DA41 03DA61 07DA21 07DA41 07DA61
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
16
0 0.6299 0 0.011 0.00043
70
0 2.756 0 0.030 0.00012
3.12.2 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes
(1) 30 W, 50 W, 100 W
Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18)
Encoder plug
Motor cable 7 (0.28)
(35) (1.38)
Shaft End
Motor plug
U W
9.6 ( 0.37 )
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) 0.04 A (0.0016) L LL 25 (0.98) 22 (0.87) LM 2.5 (0.098) 20 (0.79) 5 (0.20) 15.2 14
(0.55)
11 (0.43)
0.04 A (0.0016) Sh6 2-4.3 (0.17)
40 ( 1.57) 21.5 (0.85)

4 (0.16)
(0.60)
Serial encoder
30h7 -0.021 (1.19 Holding brake (de-energization operation) Power supply: 90 VDC or 24 VDC A 0.02 (0.0008)
0 -0.0008
( 1. 77 ) Tap Depth (See the following table.)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3A2 A3A4 A3A6 A5A2 A5A4 A5A6 01A2 01A4 01A6 L LL LM TapDepth No tap M2.55L No tap M2.55L No tap M36L U W No key 1.2
(0.047)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 0.6 (1.32) 0.7 (1.54) 0.8 (1.76)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 54 (12) 54 (12) 54 (12)
126.0 101.0 36.5

(4.96) (3.98) (1.44)
2
(0.079)
2
(0.079)
133.5 108.5 44.0

(5.26) (4.27) (1.73)
No key 1.2
(0.047)
2
(0.079)
2
(0.079)
160.0 135.0 61.5

(6.30) (5.31) (2.42)
No key 1.8
(0.071)
3
(0.12)
3
(0.12)
3-60
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-A3, A5, and 01: L-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in), LL-dimension +12 mm (0.17 in). 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S 6
0 0.236 0 0.008 0.0003
Model SGMAHA3A2 A3A4 A3A6 A5A2 A5A4 A5A6 01A2 01A4 01A6
0 0.235 0 0.008 0.0003
0 0.315 0 0.009 0.0004
(2) 200 W, 400 W, 750 W

300 (11.81) 30 (1.18)
Encoder plug Shaft End U Motor plug W T
Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38)
300 (11.81)30 (1.18) L LL LR 26.5 (1.04) 13 (0.51) 9.5 (0.37) 27 20 (1.06) (0.79) LM LG 3 (0.12) QK
Y
(0.0016) 0.04 A
LC
11 (0.43)
0.04 A (0.0016) Sh6
21.5 (0.85)
A
Serial encoder
Holding brake (de-energizing operation) Power supply: 90 VDC or 24 VDC A 0.02 (0.0008)
LBh7
4-LZ
3-61
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.2 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02A2 02A4 02A6 04AA2 04AA4 04AA6 08AA2 08AA4 08AA6 L 166 (6.54) 194 (7.64) 229.5 (9.04) LL 136 (5.35) 164 (6.46) 189.5 (7.46) LM 62.5 (2.46) 90.5 (3.56) 111 (4.37) LR 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57) LG 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) LC 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 80 (3.15) LA 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) LZ 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28)
Tap Depth No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M58L
QK
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.6 (3.53) 2.2 (4.85) 4.3 (9.48)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 74 (17) 74 (17) 147 (33)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 30
(1.18)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-02 and 04: L-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in) SGMAH-08: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
14
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
50
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
16
0 0.6299 0 0.001 0.00043
70
0 2.756 0 0.030 0.00012
3-62
(3) 300 W, 650 W

300 (11.81) 30 (1.15)

Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38)
Encoder plug Shaft End U W
Motor plug
300 (11.81) 30 (1.15) L LL LM LH LG QK

Y
(0.0016) 0.04 A
26.5 (1.04) 9.5 (0.37) 13 (0.51)
LR 3
0.04 A (0.0016) Sh6
14 (0.55)
LC 21 (0.83)
17 (0.67)
LBh7
Serial encoder
A Holding brake (de-energization operation) 0.02 Power supply: 90 VDC or 24 VDC (0.0008)
4-LZ
Units: mm (in) Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03DA2 03DA4 03DA6 07DA2 07DA4 07DA6 L 194 (7.64) 229.5 (9.04) LL 164 (6.46) 189.5 (7.46) LM 90.5 (3.56) 111 (4.37) LR 30 (1.18) 40 (1.57) LG 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) LC 60 (2.36) 80 (3.15) LA 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) LZ 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) LH 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31
TapDepth No tap M58L No tap M58L
QK
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 2.2 (4.85) 4.3 (9.48)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 245 (55) 392 (88)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 74 (17) 147 (33)
No key 20
(0.79)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
No key 30
(1.18)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-03: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in) SGMAH-07: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-63
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.3 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears
0 1.9685 0 0.025 0.00098
0 0.5512 0 0.011 0.00043
16
0 0.6299 0 0.011 0.00043
70
0 2.756 0 0.030 0.00012
3.12.3 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears

(1) 30 W, 50 W, 100 W
Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38) Motor plug Encoder plug Shaft End W U T LC
300 (11.81)30 (1.18) L LL LM LG 20 (0.79) 4 15.2 (0.60) (0.16) 11 0.06 A (0.0024) LR 0.04 L1 L2 A (0.0016) L3 Q QK 0.05 A (0.0020)
9.5 (0.37)
22
(0.87)
LD LBh7
Sh7
L
4-LZ
Serial encoder
Rotating section (Hatching section)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3AJ11 A3AJ31 A3AJC1 A3AJ71 A5AJ11 A5AJ31 A5AJC1 A5AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 L 156.5 (6.16) 156.5 (6.16) 171.5 (6.75) 171.5 (6.75) 164 (6.46) 174 (6.85) 191 (7.52) 191 (7.52) LL 101.5 (4.00) 101.5 (4.00) 116.5 (4.59) 116.5 (4.59) 109 (4.29) 114 (4.49) 131 (5.16) 131 (5.16) LM 68.5 (2.70) 68.5 (2.70) 83.5 (3.29) 83.5 (3.29) 76.0 (2.99) 77.0 (3.03) 94.0 (3.70) 94.0 (3.70) LR 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) LG 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) B 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) LD 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) LB 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) L1 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) L2 27 (1.06) 27 (1.06) 27 (1.06) 27 (1.06) 27 (1.06) L3 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) Q 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) QK 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) S 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55)
60 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63)
3-64
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMAH01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 L 191.5 (7.54) 191.5 (7.54) 227 (8.94) 227 (8.94) LL 131.5 (5.18) 131.5 (5.18) 153 (6.02) 153 (6.02) LM LR LG B LD LB L1 L2 L3 Q QK S
57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 98.5 60 9 (3.88) (2.36) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 98.5 60 9 (3.88) (2.36) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) 19.5 36 120 74 10 69 83 85 36 38 (4.72) (2.91) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) 19.5 36 120 74 10 69 83 85 36 38 (4.72) (2.91) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) Approx. Mass kg (lb) 0.9 (2.0) 0.9 (2.0) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.2 (2.7) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 2.4 (5.3) 2.4 (5.3) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 145 (33)
25 16 (0.98) (0.63) 25 16 (0.98) (0.63) 32 20 (1.26) (0.79) 32 20 (1.26) (0.79) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf)
Model SGMAHA3AJ11 A3AJ31 A3AJC1 A3AJ71 A5AJ11 A5AJ31 A5AJC1 A5AJ71 01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71
Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
TapDepth M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M510L M510L
LC 60
(2.36)
LA 70
(2.76)
LZ 5.5
(0.22)
U 3
(0.12)
W 5
(0.20)
T 5
(0.20)
60
(2.36)
70
(2.76)
5.5
(0.22)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
3
125 (28)
60
(2.36)
70
(2.76)
5.5
(0.22)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
60
(2.36)
70
(2.76)
5.5
(0.22)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
185 (42) 145 (33) 215 (49) 230 (52) 245 (56) 175 (40) 215 (49) 455 (103) 480 (109)
60
(2.36)
70
(2.76)
5.5
(0.22)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
6.6
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
125 (28)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
6.6
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
6.6
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
145 (33)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
6.6
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
70
(2.76)
80
(3.15)
6.6
(0.26)
3
(0.12)
5
(0.20)
5
(0.20)
145 (33)
90
(3.54)
105
(4.13)
9
(0.35)
3.5
(0.14)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
90
(3.54)
105
(4.13)
9
(0.35)
3.5
(0.14)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
235 (53)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-A3, A5, and 01: L-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in), LL-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in) 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-65
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 14 14 14 14 14 16 16 16 16 16 20 20
0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008
Model SGMAHA3AJ11 A3AJ31 A3AJC1 A3AJ71 A5AJ11 A5AJ31 A5AJC1 A5AJ71 01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71
Flange Face Dimensions LB 56 56 56 56 56 65 65 65 65 65 85 85

0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014
3-66
(2) 200 W, 400 W, 750 W

Encoder cable 7 (0.28) UL20276 300 (11.81)30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End W Motor plug A L LL LM LG LE 0.06 A (0.0024) LR L1 L2 L3 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020) LC U B LD LBh7 T
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18)
9.5 (0.37)
13 (0.51) 20
(0.79)
11 (0.43)
26.5 (1.04)
Q QK Sh7
L
4-LZ
Serial encoder
Rotating section Hatching section
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11 04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 L 212
(8.35)
LL 138
(5.43)
LM 104.5
(4.11)
LR 74
(2.91)
LE 4
(0.16)
LG 10
(0.39)
B 69
(2.72)
LD 83
(3.27)
LB 85
(3.35)
L1 36
(1.42)
L2 38
(1.50)
L3 19.5
(0.77)
Q 36
(1.42)
QK 32
(1.26)
S 20
(0.79)
212
(8.35) (9.82) (9.82)
138
(5.43) (6.52) (6.52)
104.5
(4.11)
74
(2.91)
4
(0.16)
10
(0.39)
69
(2.72)
83
(3.27)
85
(3.35)
36
(1.42)
38
(1.50)
19.5
(0.77)
36
(1.42)
32
(1.26)
20
(0.79)
249.5 165.5 249.5 165.5 240

(9.45) (10.10) (12.03) (12.03)
132
(5.20)
84
(3.31)
4
(0.16)
12
(0.47)
82
(3.23)
98
(3.86)
100
(3.94)
40
(1.57)
44
(1.73)
23
(0.91)
42
(1.65)
36
(1.42)
25
(0.98)
132
(5.20)
84
(3.31)
4
(0.16)
12
(0.47)
82
(3.23)
98
(3.86)
100
(3.94)
40
(1.57)
44
(1.73)
23
(0.91)
42
(1.65)
36
(1.42)
25
(0.98)
166
(6.54) (6.79) (7.89) (7.89)
133
(5.24)
74
(2.91)
4
(0.16)
10
(0.39)
69
(2.72)
83
(3.27)
85
(3.35)
36
(1.42)
38
(1.50)
19.5
(0.77)
36
(1.42)
32
(1.26)
20
(0.79)
256.5 172.5 305.5 200.5 305.5 200.5 277

(10.91)
139
(5.47)
84
(3.31)
4
(0.16)
12
(0.47)
82
(3.23)
98
(3.86)
100
(3.94)
40
(1.57)
44
(1.73)
23
(0.91)
42
(1.65)
36
(1.42)
25
(0.98)
167
(6.57)
105
(4.13)
5
(0.20)
13
(0.51)
93
(3.66)
112
(4.41)
115
(4.53)
45
(1.77)
60
(2.36)
26.5
(1.04)
58
(2.28)
50
(1.97)
32
(1.26)
167
(6.57)
105
(4.13)
5
(0.20)
13
(0.51)
93
(3.66)
112
(4.41)
115
(4.53)
45
(1.77)
60
(2.36)
26.5
(1.04)
58
(2.28)
50
(1.97)
32
(1.26)
193
(7.60)
159.5
(6.28)
84
(3.31)
4
(0.16)
12
(0.47)
82
(3.23)
98
(3.86)
100
(3.94)
40
(1.57)
44
(1.73)
23
(0.91)
42
(1.65)
36
(1.42)
25
(0.98)
301
(11.85)
196
(7.72)
162.5
(6.40)
105
(4.13)
5
(0.20)
13
(0.51)
93
(3.66)
112
(4.41)
115
(4.53)
45
(1.77)
60
(2.36)
26.5
(1.04)
58
(2.28)
50
(1.97)
32
(1.26)
330
(12.99)
223
(8.78)
189.5
(7.46)
107
(4.21)
10
(0.39)
15
(0.59)
107
(4.21)
134
(5.28)
140
(5.51)
44
(1.73)
63
(2.48)
42
(1.65)
60
(2.36)
45
(1.77)
40
(1.57)
330
(12.99)
223
(8.78)
189.5
(7.46)
107
(4.21)
10
(0.39)
15
(0.59)
107
(4.21)
134
(5.28)
140
(5.51)
44
(1.73)
63
(2.48)
42
(1.65)
60
(2.36)
45
(1.77)
40
(1.57)
3-67
Model SGMAH02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11 04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71
Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
LC
LA
LZ
T 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
3.5 6 (0.14) (0.24) 3.5 6 (0.14) (0.24) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 3.5 6 (0.14) (0.24) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 5 12 (0.20) (0.47) 5 12 (0.20) (0.47)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 2.8 (6.2) 2.8 (6.2) 4.2 (9.3) 4.2 (9.3) 3.4 (7.5) 4.3 (9.5) 6.4 (14.1) 6.4 (14.1) 6.0 (13.2) 7.5 (16.5) 12.4 (27.3) 12.4 (27.3)
Allowable Allowable Radial Load Thrust Load N (lbf) N (lbf) 275 (62) 235 (53) 360 (82) 585 (133) 290 (66) 635 (144) 275 235 (62) (53) 460 290 (104) (66) 655 (149) 310 (70) 755 (171) 355 290 (80) (66) 525 310 (119) (70) 1070 (243) 490 (111) 1210 (273)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-02 and 04: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in) SGMAH-08: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 20 20 25 25 20
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008
Model SGMAH02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11
Flange Face Dimensions LB 85 85

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014
3-68
Model SGMAH04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71
Flange Face Dimensions LB 100 115 115 100 115 140 140
0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 25 32 32 25 32 40 40

0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
(3) 300 W, 650 W

Encoder cable 7 (0.28) UL20276 300 (11.81) 30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 ( 0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End W Motor plug (0.0024) 0.06 A L1 L3 LR L2 Q QK A 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 A ( 0.0020) LC U T
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18)
9.5 (0.37)
17 (0.67)
26.5 (1.04) LH
13 (0.51)
L LL LM LG LE
B LD LBh7
Sh7 4-LZ Serial encoder Rotating section (Hatching section)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03AJ11 03AJ31 03AJC1 03AJ71 07AJ11 07AJ31 07AJC1 07AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 L 240
(9.45) (10.10) (12.03) (12.03)
LL 166
(6.54) (6.79) (7.89) (7.89)
LM 133
(5.24)
LR 74 84 105 105 84 105 107 107
LE 4 4 5 5 4 5 10 10
LG 10 12 13 13 12 13 15 15
B 69 82 93 93 82 93 107 107
LD 83 98 112 112 98 112 134 134
LB 85 100 115 115 100 115 140 140
L1 36 40 45 45 40 45 44 44
L2 38 44 60 60 44 60 63 63
L3 19.5 23 26.5
(1.04)
Q 36 42 58 58 42 58 60 60
QK 32 36 50 50 36 50 45
(1.77)
S 20 25 32 32 25 32 40
(1.57)
(2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26)
256.5 172.5 305.5 200.5 305.5 200.5 277

(10.91)
139
(5.47)
167
(6.57)
167
(6.57)
26.5
(1.04)
193
(7.60)
159.5
(6.28)
23 26.5
(1.04)
(3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26)
301
(11.85)
196
(7.72)
162.5
(6.40)
330
(12.99)
223
(8.78)
189.5
(7.46)
42 42
(4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36)
330
(12.99)
223
(8.78)
189.5
(7.46)
45
(1.77)
40
(1.57)
3-69
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03AJ11 03AJ31 03AJC1 03AJ71 07AJ11 07AJ31 07AJC1 07AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ LH TapDepth M510L M612L 7 M816L M816L M612L M816L 8 M1020L M1020L
T 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 3.4 (7.5) 4.3 (9.5) 6.4 (14.1) 6.4 (14.1) 6.0 (13.2) 7.5 (16.5) 12.4 (27.3) 12.4 (27.3)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
3.5 6 (0.14) (0.24) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 4 8 (0.16) (0.31) 5 10 (0.20) (0.39) 5 12 (0.20) (0.47) 5 12 (0.20) (0.47)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 275 (62) 460 (104) 655 (149) 755 (171) 355 (80) 525 (119) 1070 (243) 1210 (273)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 235 (53) 290 (66) 310 (70) 290 (66) 310 (70) 490 (111)
INFO
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 20 25 32 32 25 32 40 40
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
Model SGMAH03DAJ11 03DAJ31 03DAJC1 03DAJ71 07DAJ11 07AJ31 07AJC1 07AJ71
Flange Face Dimensions LB 85

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140
3-70
3.12.4 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes
(1) 30 W, 50 W, 100 W
Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300 (11.81)30(1.18) Encoder plug Shaft End Motor plug 300(11.81) 30(1.18) L LL LM LG 4 U (0.0024) 0.06 A LR L1 L3 L2 Q QK 0.04 A (0.0016) 9.5 (0.37) 11 (0.43) 22 (0.87) 20 (0.79) 15.2 (0.60) 0.05 A (0.0020) W T LC
Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38)
Sh7
B LD LBh7
3
L
4-LZ
Serial encoder
Holding brake (de-energizing operation) Power supply: 90 VDC or 24 VDC
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3AJ1 A3AJ3 A3AJC A3AJ7 A5AJ1 A5AJ3 A5AJC A5AJ7 01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 L
188.5 (7.42) 188.5 (7.42) 203.5 (8.01) 203.5 (8.01) 196 (7.72) 206 (8.11) 223 (8.78) 223 (8.78) 232 (9.13) 232 (9.13) 268 (10.6) 268 (10.6)
LL
133.5 (5.26) 133.5 (5.26) 148.5 (5.85) 148.5 (5.85) 141 (5.55) 146 (5.75) 163 (6.42) 163 (6.42) 172 (6.77) 172 (6.77) 194 (7.64) 194 (7.64)
LM
68.5 (2.70) 68.5 (2.70) 83.5 (3.29) 83.5 (3.29) 76.0 (2.99) 77.0 (3.03) 94.0 (3.70) 94.0 (3.70) 98.5 (3.88) 98.5 (3.88) 120 (4.72) 120 (4.72)
LR
55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 74 (2.91) 74 (2.91)
LG
8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)
B
47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 47 (1.85) 57 (2.24) 57 (2.24) 57 (2.24) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72)
LD
55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 55.5 (2.19) 63 (2.48) 63 (2.48) 63 (2.48) 63 (2.48) 63 (2.48) 83 (3.27) 83 (3.27)
LB
56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 85 (3.35) 85 (3.35)
L1
L2
L3
QK
28 17 27 25 20 14 (1.10) (1.06) (0.67) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 28 17 27 25 20 14 (1.10) (1.06) (0.67) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 28 17 27 25 20 14 (1.10) (1.06) (0.67) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 28 17 27 25 20 14 (1.10) (1.06) (0.67) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 28 17 27 25 20 14 (1.10) (1.06) (0.67) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 14.5 30 30 28 25 16 (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 14.5 30 30 28 25 16 (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 14.5 30 30 28 25 16 (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 14.5 30 30 28 25 16 (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 14.5 30 30 28 25 16 (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 36 38 19.5 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 36 38 19.5 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79)
3-71
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.4 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes
Model SGMAHA3AJ1 A3AJ3 A3AJC A3AJ7 A5AJ1 A5AJ3 A5AJC A5AJ7 01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7
Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
LC 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54)
LA
LZ
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.2 (2.7) 1.2 (2.7) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 1.5 (3.3) 1.6 (3.5) 1.6 (3.5) 1.6 (3.5) 1.6 (3.5) 2.7 (6.0) 2.7 (6.0)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 145 (33)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf)
70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 80 6.6 (3.15) (0.26) 80 6.6 (3.15) (0.26) 80 6.6 (3.15) (0.26) 80 6.6 (3.15) (0.26) 80 6.6 (3.15) (0.26) 105 9 (4.13) (0.35) 105 9 (4.13) (0.35)
3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24)
125 (28) 185 (42) 145 (33) 215 (49) 230 (52) 245 (56) 175 (40) 215 (49) 455 (103) 480 (109)
125 (28)
145 (33)
145 (33)
235 (53)
INFO
1. The dimensionss for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-03, A5, and 01: L-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in), LL-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in) 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 14 14 14 14 14 16
0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007
Model SGMAHA3AJ1 A3AJ3 A3AJC A3AJ7 A5AJ1 A5AJ3
Flange Face Dimensions LB 56 56 56 56 56 65

0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012
3-72
Model SGMAHA5AJC A5AJ7 01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7

0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 16 16 16 16 20 20

0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0007 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008
(2) 200 W, 400 W, 750 W

Encoder cable 6(0.24) UL20276 300(11.81) 30(1.18) Motor cable 7(0.28) (35) (1.38)
300(11.81)30(1.18)
Encoder plug
Shaft End W U T
Motor plug (0.0024) 0.06 A L1 L3 LR L2 Q QK 0.04 A(0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020) LC

L
A
9.5(0.37)
26.5 (1.04)
11 (0.43)
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06) 20 (0.79)
L LL LM LG LE
Sh7
B LD LBh7
Serial encoder
4-LZ
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7 08AJ1 08AJ3 08AJC Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 L
251.5 (9.90 251.5 (9.90 289 (11.38) 289 (11.38) 297.5 (11.71) 296 (11.65) 345 (13.58) 345 (13.58) 321.5 (12.66) 345.5 (13.60) 374.5 (14.74)
LL
177.5 (6.99) 177.5 (6.99) 205 (8.07) 205 (8.07) 223.5 (8.80) 212 (8.35) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 237.5 (9.35) 240.5 (9.47) 267.5 (10.53)
LM
104.5 (4.11) 104.5 (4.11) 132 (5.20) 132 (5.20) 150.5 (5.93 139 (5.47) 167 (6.57) 167 (6.57) 158.5 (6.24) 162.5 (6.40) 189.5 (7.46)
LR
74 (2.91) 74 (2.91) 84 (3.31) 84 (3.31) 74 (2.91) 84 (3.31) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 84 (3.31) 105 (4.13) 107 (4.21)
LE
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 10 (0.39)
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
S
20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 25 (0.98) 32 (1.26) 40 (1.57)
10 69 (0.39) (2.72) 10 69 (0.39) (2.72) 82 12 (0.47) (3.23) 82 12 (0.47) (3.23) 10 69 (0.39) (2.72) 82 12 (0.47) (3.23) 93 13 (0.51) (3.66) 93 13 (0.51) (3.66) 82 12 (0.47) (3.23) 93 13 (0.51) (3.66) 134 15 (0.59) (5.28)
83 85 36 38 19.5 36 32 (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) 83 85 36 36 19.5 36 32 (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.42) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) 98 100 40 44 19.5 42 36 (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.77) (1.65) (1.42) 98 100 40 44 19.5 42 36 (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.77) (1.65) (1.42) 83 85 36 (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) 38 (1.50 19.5 36 32 (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) 23 (0.91 42 36 (1.65) (1.42)
98 100 40 44 (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73)
60 26.5 112 115 45 58 50 (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) 26.5 112 115 45 80 58 50 (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (3.15) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) 98 100 40 44 (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) 23 (0.91 42 36 (1.65) (1.42)
26.5 112 115 45 60 58 50 (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77)
3-73
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMAH08AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/33 L

374.5 (14.74)
LL
267.5 (10.53)
LM
189.5 (7.46)
LR
107 (4.21)
LE
10 (0.39)
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
S
40 (1.57)
134 15 (0.59) (5.28)
134 140 44 63 42 60 45 (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7 08AJ1 08AJ3 08AJC 08AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ TapDepth M510L M510L M612L M612L M510L M612L M816L M816L M612L M816L M1020L M1020L U W T Approx. Mass kg (lb) 3.3 (7.3) 3.3 (7.3) 4.7 (10.4) 4.7 (10.4) 3.9 (8.6) 4.8 (10.6) 6.9 (15.2) 6.9 (15.2) 6.9 (15.2) 8.4 (18.5) 13.3 (29.3) 13.3 (29.3) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 275 (62) 360 (82) 585 (132) 635 (133) 275 (62) 460 (104) 655 (149) 755 (171) 355 (80) 525 (119) 1070 (243) 1210 (273) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 235 (53)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31)
290 (66) 235 (53) 290 (66) 310 (70) 290 (66) 310 (70) 490 (111)
INFO
1. The dimensionss for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-02 and 04: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in) SGMAH-08: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-74
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
Model SGMAH02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7 08AJ1 08AJ3 08AJC 08AJ7

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140
3-75
(3) 300 W, 650 W

Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300(11.81)30(1.18) Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End W U 0.04 A (0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020) LC
L
A
Motor plug
26.5 (1.04) 9.5(0.37)

17(0.67) 13 (0.51) LH 11(0.43)
(0.0024) 300(11.81)30(1.81) 0.06 A L LL LR LM L2 L1 Q L3 LG QK LE
Sh7
B LD LBh7
Serial encoder
4-LZ
Model SGMAH03AJ1 03AJ3 03AJC 03AJ7 07AJ1 07AJ3 07AJC 07AJ7
Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
L
297.5 (11.71) 296 (11.65) 345 (13.58) 345 (13.58) 321.5 (12.66) 345.5 (13.60) 374.5 (14.74) 374.5 (14.74)
LL
223.5 (8.80) 212 (8.35) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 237.5 (9.35) 240.5 (9.47) 267.5 (10.53) 267.5 (10.53)
LM
150.5 (5.93 139 (5.47) 167 (6.57) 167 (6.57) 158.5 (6.24) 162.5 (6.40) 189.5 (7.46) 189.5 (7.46)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
38 (1.50
L3
Units: mm (in) Q QK S
74 4 10 69 83 85 36 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42)
19.5 36 32 20 (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 23 (0.91 42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98)
82 84 4 12 98 100 40 44 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73)
93 60 26.5 105 5 13 112 115 45 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 93 26.5 105 5 13 112 115 45 80 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (3.15) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 82 84 4 12 98 100 40 44 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) 23 (0.91 42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98)
93 26.5 105 5 13 112 115 45 60 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 134 107 10 15 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (5.28) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 134 107 10 15 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (5.28) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03AJ1 03AJ3 03AJC 03AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ LH TapDepth M510L 7 (0.28) M612L M816L M816L
Approx. Mass kg (lb)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43)
3.5 6 6 3.9 (8.60) (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 4.8 (10.6) (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 6.9 (15.2) (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 10 8 6.9 (15.2) (0.20) (0.39) (0.31)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 275 (62) 460 (104) 655 (149) 755 (171)
3-76
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMAH07AJ1 07AJ3 07AJC 07AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ LH TapDepth M612L 8 (0.31) M816L M1020L M1020L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 6.9 (15.2) 8.4 (18.5) 13.3 (29.3) 13.3 (29.3)
105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 355 (80) 525 (119) 1070 (243) 1210 (273)
INFO
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
Model SGMAH03AJ1 03AJ3 03AJC 03AJ7 07AJ1 07AJ3 07AJC 07AJ7

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140
3-77
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.12.5 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
3.12.5 SGMAH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears

(1) 30 W, 50 W, 100 W
Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300(11.81)30(1.18) Encoder plug
Motor cable 7(0.28)
(35) (1.38) Motor plug
Shaft End W U T LC
300(11.81)30(1.18) L LL LM 22 (0.87) 9.5(0.37) 20 (0.79) 15.2 (0.60) LG 0.06 A (0.0024) LR L1 L3 LE L2 Q QK 0.04 A (0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020)
11(0.43)
LBh7
B LD
Sh7
L
4-LZ
Serial encoder Rotating section (Hatching section)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3AH11 A3AH21 A3AHC1 A3AH71 A5AH11 A5AH21 A5AHC1 A5AH71 01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 L
152.5 (6.00) 152.5 (6.00) 167.5 (6.59) 167.5 (6.59) 160 (6.30) 166 (6.54) 183 (7.20) 183 (7.20) 183.5 (7.22) 200.5 (7.89) 223.5 (8.80) 223.5 (8.80)
LL
97.5 (3.84) 97.5 (3.84) 112.5 (4.43) 112.5 (4.43) 105 (4.13) 106 (4.17) 123 (4.84) 123 (4.84) 123.5 (4.86) 140.5 (5.53) 149.5 (5.89) 149.5 (5.89)
LM
64.5 (2.54) 64.5 (2.54) 79.5 (3.13) 79.5 (3.13) 72.0 (2.83) 73.0 (2.87) 90.0 (3.54) 90.0 (3.54) 90.5 (3.56) 107.5 (4.23) 116.5 (4.59) 116.5 (4.59)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
55 6 8 40 55.5 56 28 27 20 25 20 14 (2.17) (0.24) (0.31) (1.57) (2.19) (2.20) (1.10) (1.06) (0.79) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 55 6 8 40 55.5 56 28 27 20 25 20 14 (2.17) (0.24) (0.31) (1.57) (2.19) (2.20) (1.10) (1.06) (0.79) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 55 6 8 40 55.5 56 28 27 20 25 20 14 (2.17) (0.24) (0.31) (1.57) (2.19) (2.20) (1.10) (1.06) (0.79) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 55 6 8 40 55.5 56 28 27 20 25 20 14 (2.17) (0.24) (0.31) (1.57) (2.19) (2.20) (1.10) (1.06) (0.79) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 55 6 8 40 55.5 56 28 27 20 25 20 14 (2.17) (0.24) (0.31) (1.57) (2.19) (2.20) (1.10) (1.06) (0.79) (0.98) (0.79) (0.55) 60 8 9 50 64.5 65 30 30 22 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.97) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.87) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 30 22 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.87) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 30 22 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.87) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 30 21 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.83) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 30 21 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.83) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 38 26 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 38 26 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79)
3-78
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAHA3AH11 A3AH21 A3AHC1 A3AH71 A5AH11 A5AH21 A5AHC1 A5AH71 01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/9 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ TapDepth M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M48L M510L M510L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.0 (2.2) 1.1 (2.4) 1.4 (3.1) 1.3 (2.9) 1.3 (2.9) 1.2 (2.7) 1.4 (3.1) 2.7 (6.0) 2.7 (6.0)
60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 70 80 6.6 (2.76) (3.15) (0.26) 70 80 6.6 (2.76) (3.15) (0.26) 70 80 6.6 (2.76) (3.15) (0.26) 70 80 6.6 (2.76) (3.15) (0.26) 70 80 6.6 (2.76) (3.15) (0.26) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35)
3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3 5 5 (0.12) (0.20) (0.20) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf)
176 (40)
127 (29)
137 (31) 206 (47) 235 (53) 167 (38) 216 (49) 392 (89) 431 (98)
127 (29)
3
147 (33)
147 (33)
235 (53)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-03, A5, and 01: L-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in), LL-dimension +12 mm (0.47 in) 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-79
0 0.55 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.55 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.00071 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.00083 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.00083
Model SGMAHA3AH11 A3AH21 A3AHC1 A3AH71 A5AH11 A5AH21 A5AHC1 A5AH71 01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71
Flange Face Dimensions LB 56 56 56 56 56 65 65 65 65 65 85 85

0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.20 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014
3-80
(2) 200 W, 400 W, 750 W

Encoder cable 7 (0.28) UL20276 300(11.81)30(1.18) Motor cable (35)(1.38) 7( 0.28) 30030 L LL LM 11(0.43) LG LE Encoder plug Shaft End W Motor plug (0.0024) 0.06 A L1 L3 LR L2 Q QK A 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020) LC U B LD LBh7 T
26.5 (1.04) 9.5(0.37)

20 13 (0.51) (0.79)
Sh7
L
4-LZ
Serial encoder
3
S
20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 20 (0.79) 25 (0.98) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 25 (0.98) 32 (1.26) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 04AHB1 04AHC1 04AH71 08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 L
208.5 (8.21) 225.5 (8.88) 243.5 (9.59) 243.5 (9.59) 236.5(9 .31) 271.5(1 0.69) 300.5 (11.83) 300.5 (11.83) 271 (10.67) 321 (12.64) 365 (14.37) 365 (14.37)
LL
134.5 (5.30) 151.5 (5.97) 159.5 (6.28) 159.5 (6.28) 162.5( 6.40) 187.5( 7.38) 195.5 (7.70) 195.5 (7.70) 187 (7.36) 216 (8.50) 223 (8.78) 223 (8.78)
LM
101 (3.98) 118 (4.65) 126 (4.96) 126 (4.96) 129 (5.08) 154 (6.06) 162 (6.38) 162 (6.38) 153.5 (6.04) 182.5 (7.19) 189.5 (7.46) 189.5 (7.46)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
74 7.5 10 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) 74 7.5 10 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) 84 12 12 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) 84 12 12 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) 74 7.5 10 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) 84 12 12 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) 105 14 13 (4.13) (0.55) (0.51) 105 12.5 13 (4.13) (0.49) (0.51) 84 12 12 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) 105 14 13 (4.13) (0.55) (0.51) 142 10 15 (5.59) (0.39) (0.59) 142 10 15 (5.59) (0.39) (0.59)
59 84 85 36 38 26 36 32 (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) 59 84 85 36 38 26 36 32 (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) 59 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) 59 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) 59 84 85 36 38 26 36 32 (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) 59 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) 59 112 115 45 60 33 58 50 (2.32) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) 84 114 115 45 60 33 58 50 (3.31) (4.49) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) 59 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) 59 112 115 45 60 33 58 50 (2.32) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) 84 134 140 57 85 40 82 70 (3.31) (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) (3.35) (1.57) (3.23) (2.76) 84 134 140 57 85 40 82 70 (3.31) (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) (3.35) (1.57) (3.23) (2.76)
3-81
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 04AHB1 04AHC1 04AH71 08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ TapDepth M510L M510L M612L M612L M510L M612L M816L M816L M612L M816L M1020L M1020L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 3.0 (6.6) 3.5 (7.7) 3.7 (8.2) 3.8 (8.4) 3.6 (7.9) 4.3 (9.5) 4.7 (10.4) 7.1 (15.7) 5.8 (12.8) 6.6 (14.6) 9.9 (21.8) 9.9 (21.8)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 245 (56) 323 (73) 549 (124) 608 (138) 245 (56) 441 (100) 568 (129) 657 (149) 343 (78) 451 (102) 813 (184) 921 (209)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 235 (53)
294 (67) 235 (53) 294 (67) 314 (71) 294 (67) 314 (71) 490 (111)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMAH4) are as shown below. SGMAH-02 and 04: L-dimension + 8.2 mm (0.32 in), LL-dimension +8.2 mm (0.32 in) SGMAH-08: L-dimension + 0 mm, LL-dimension +0 mm 2. The working point of the SGMAH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-82
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
Model SGMAH02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 04AHB1 04AHC1 04AH71 08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140
3-83
(3) 300 W, 650 W

Encoder cable 7 (0.28) UL20276 300 (11.81)30 (1.18) Motor cable 7 ( 0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug Shaft End W Motor plug (0.0024) 0.06 A L1 L3 LR L2 Q QK A 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 A ( 0.0020) LC U B LD LBh7 T
300 (11.81) 30 (1.18)
9.5 (0.37)
17 (0.67)
26.5 (1.04) LH
13 (0.51)
L LL LM LG LE
Sh7 4-LZ Serial encoder Rotating section (Hatching section)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03AH11 03AHB1 03AHC1 03AH71 07AH11 07AHB1 07AHC1 07AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 L
236.5 (9.31) 271.5 (10.69) 300.5 (11.83) 300.5 (11.83) 271 (10.67) 321 (12.64) 365 (14.37) 365 (14.37)
LL
162.5 (6.40) 187.5 (7.38) 195.5 (7.70) 195.5 (7.70) 187 (7.36) 216 (8.50) 223 (8.78) 223 (8.78)
LM
129 (5.08) 154 (6.06) 162 (6.38) 162 (6.38) 153.5 (6.04) 182.5 (7.19) 189.5 (7.46) 189.5 (7.46)
LR
74 (2.91) 84 (3.31) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 84 (3.31) 105 (4.13) 142 (5.59) 142 (5.59)
LE
7.5 (0.30) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 12.5 (0.49) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)
LG
10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 12 (0.47) 13 (0.51) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59)
B
59 (2.32) 59 (2.32) 59 (2.32) 84 (3.31) 59 (2.32) 59 (2.32) 84 (3.31) 84 (3.31)
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
84 85 36 38 26 36 32 20 (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (1.02) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 25 (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 112 115 45 60 33 58 50 32 (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 114 115 45 60 33 58 50 32 (4.49) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 96 100 40 44 29 42 36 25 (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (1.14) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 112 115 45 60 33 58 50 32 (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.30) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 134 140 57 85 40 82 70 40 (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) (3.35) (1.57) (3.23) (2.76) (1.57) 134 140 57 85 40 82 70 40 (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) (3.35) (1.57) (3.23) (2.76) (1.57)
INFO
3-84
Units: mm (in) Model SGMAH03AH11 03AHB1 03AHC1 03AH71 07AH11 07AHB1 07AHC1 07AH71 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 LC LA LZ LH TapDepth M510L 7 (0.28) M612L M816L M816L M612L 8 (0.31) M816L M1020L M1020L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 3.6 (7.9) 4.3 (9.5) 4.7 (10.4) 7.1 (15.7) 5.8 (12.8) 6.6 (14.6) 9.9 (21.8) 9.9 (21.8)
90 105 9 (3.54) (4.13) (0.35) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 105 120 9 (4.13) (4.72) (0.35) 120 135 11 (4.72) (5.31) (0.43) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55) 145 165 14 (5.71) (6.50) (0.55)
3.5 6 6 (0.14) (0.24) (0.24) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 4 8 7 (0.16) (0.31) (0.28) 5 10 8 (0.20) (0.39) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31) 5 12 8 (0.20) (0.47) (0.31)
0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0008 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0008 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0010
Model SGMAH03AH11 03AHB1 03AHC1 03AH71 07AH11 07AHB1 07AHC1 07AH71

0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140
3-85
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.1 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
3.13 Dimensional Drawings of SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1)

3.13.1 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
Encoder cable 5 (0.20) UL20276 300(11.81)30(1.18) (35) (1.38) Motor cable 7 (0.28) 300(11.81) 30(1.18) 0.04 A (0.0016) LR LE LG 0.04 A (0.0016) Encoder plug Shaft End U W T Motor plug
18(0.71)
9.5(0.37)
13 (0.51)
LH
21(0.83)
38(1.50)
LBh7
Serial encoder
Sh6
QK
LA
28(1.10)
LA
LF
L LL LM
Dimensions of SGMPH-01 to 04 LC
Dimensions of SGMPH-08 and 15 LC
A 0.02 (0.0008) 4-L 4-L Tap Depth (See the following table.) Tap Depth (See the following table.)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH0121 0141 0161 0221 0241 0261 0421 0441 0461 0821 0841 0861 1521 1541 1561 154.5 114.5 94.7 40 3.5 10 12.8 19 110 10.5 (6.08) (4.51) (3.73) (1.57) (0.14) (0.39) (0.50) (0.75) (4.33) (0.41) L LL LM LR LE LG LF S LB LH TapDepth No tap M36L No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M610L
87 62 42.5 25 3 6 12.5 8 50 10.55 (3.43) (2.44) (1.67) (0.98) (0.12) (0.24) (0.49) (0.31) (1.97) (0.42) 97 67 48.1 30 3 8 11.9 14 70 8.25 (3.82) (2.64) (1.89) (1.18) (0.12) (0.31) (0.47) (0.55) (2.76) (0.32) 117 87 68.1 30 3 8 11.9 14 70 8.25 (4.61) (3.43) (2.68) (1.18) (0.12) (0.31) (0.47) (0.55) (2.76) (0.32) 126.5 86.5 66.7 40 3.5 10 12.8 16 110 10.5 (4.98) (3.41) (2.63) (1.57) (0.14) (0.39) (0.50) (0.63) (4.33) (0.41)
INFO
1. The dimensions for L and LL of a servomotor incorporating an encoder with super-capacitor (model: SGMPH-4) are as shown below. SGMPH-01, 02, and 04: L-dimension + 6.4 mm (0.25 in), LL-dimension +6.4 mm (0.25 in) SGMPH-08 and 15: L-dimension + 6.0 mm (0.24 in), LL-dimension +6.0 mm (0.24 in) 2. The working point of the SGMPH servomotor radial load is at the position of minus 5 mm from the shaft end.
3-86
Model SGMPH0121 0141 0161 0221 0241 0261 0421 0441 0461 0821 0841 0861 1521 1541 1561
LC
LA
LZ
QK
U No key
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 0.7 (1.5) 1.4 (3.1) 2.1 (4.6) 4.2 (9.3) 6.6 (14.6)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Allowable Radial Load Thrust Load N (lbf) N (lbf) 78 (18) 245 (55) 245 (55) 392 (88) 490 (110) 49 (11) 68 (15) 68 (15) 147 (33) 147 (33)
60 70 5.5 (2.36) (2.76) (0.22) 80 90 7 (3.15) (3.54) (0.28) 80 90 7 (3.15) (3.54) (0.28) 120 145 10 (4.72) (5.71) (0.39)
14 1.8 3 3 (0.55) (0.071) (0.12) (0.12) No key 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24)
No key
No key
120 145 10 (4.72) (5.71) (0.39)
No key
0 1.97 0.0015 0.025 0.0025
Model SGMPH0121 0141 0161 0221 0241 0261 0421 0441 0461 0821 0841 0861 1521 1541 1561
0 0.315 0.0001 0.009 0.0003
14
0 0.0001 0.551+ 0.011 0.0002
70
0 2.756 0.0001 0.030 0.0013
14
0 0.0001 0.551+ 0.011 0.0002
70
0 2.756 0.0001 0.030 0.0013
16
0 0.63 0.0001 0.011 0.0005
110
0 0.0007 4.33+ 0.035 0.0007
19
0 0.75 0.0020 0.013 0.0024
110
0 0.0007 4.33+ 0.035 0.0007
3-87
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.2 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Brakes
3.13.2 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Brakes

Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 300(11.81)30(1.18) Encoder plug Shaft End W Motor plug U
Motor cable 7 (0.28)
(35) (1.38)
300(11.81)30(1.18) Dimensions of SGMPH-01 to 04 18(0.71) 0.04 A (0.0016) LR LE 0.04 A (0.0016) Sh6 LC 21(0.83) Dimensions of SGMPH-08 and -15 LC 38(1.50) 28(1.10)
LA
L LL LF 9.5(0.37)
13(0.51)LH
LM LG
LA
QK
Serial encoder
LBh7 A 0.02 (0.0008)
4-L
4-L Tap Depth (See the following table.)
Model SGMPH012 014 016 022 024 026 042 044 046 082 084 086 152 154 156
LL
LM
LR
LE
LG
LF
LB
LH
Units: mm (in) Tap Depth No tap M36L No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M58L No tap M610L
116 91 42.5 25 3 6 12.5 8 50 10.55 (4.57) (3.58) (1.67) (0.98) (0.12) (0.24) (0.49) (0.31) (1.97) (0.42) 128.5 98.5 48.1 30 3 8 11.9 14 70 8.25 (5.06) (3.88) (1.89) (1.18) (0.12) (0.31) (0.47) (0.55) (2.76) (0.32) 148.5 118.5 68.1 30 3 8 11.9 14 70 8.25 (5.85) (4.67) (2.68) (1.18) (0.12) (0.31) (0.47) (0.55) (2.76) (0.32) 160 120 66.7 40 3.5 10 12.8 16 110 10.5 (6.30) (4.72) (2.63) (1.57) (0.14) (0.39) (0.50) (0.63) (4.33) (0.41) 188 148 94.7 40 3.5 10 12.8 19 110 10.5 (7.40) (5.83) (3.73) (1.57) (0.14) (0.39) (0.50) (0.75) (4.33) (0.41)
INFO
3-88
Model SGMPH012
LC
LA
LZ
QK
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 0.9 (2.0) 1.9 (4.2) 2.6 (5.7) 5.7 (12.6) 8.1 (17.8)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Allowable Radial Load Thrust Load N (lbf) N (lbf) 78 (18) 245 (55) 245 (55) 392 (88) 490 (110) 49 (11) 68 (15) 68 (15) 147 (33) 147 (33)
60 014 (2.36) 016 022 80 024 (3.15) 026 042 80 044 (3.15) 046 082 120 084 (4.72) 086 152 120 154 (4.72) 156
70 5.5 (2.76) (0.22) 90 7 (3.54) (0.28) 90 7 (3.54) (0.28) 145 10 (5.71) (0.39) 145 10 (5.71) (0.39)
No key 14 1.8 3 3 (0.55) (0.071) (0.12) (0.12) No key 16 (0.63) 16 (0.63) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24)
No key
No key
No key
0 1.97 0.0015 0.025 0.0025
Model SGMPH012 014 016 022 024 026 042 044 046 082 084 086 152 154 156
0 0.315 0.0001 0.009 0.0003
14
0 0.0001 0.551+ 0.011 0.0002
70
0 2.756 0.0001 0.030 0.0013
14
0 0.0001 0.551+ 0.011 0.0002
70
0 2.756 0.0001 0.030 0.0013
16
0 0.63 0.0001 0.011 0.0005
110
0 0.0007 4.33+ 0.035 0.0007
19
0 0.75 0.0020 0.013 0.0024
110
0 0.0007 4.33+ 0.035 0.0007
3-89
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.3 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears
3.13.3 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears

300(11.81)30(1.18) Encoder cable 6 (0.24) UL20276 (35) (1.38) Motor cable 7 (0.28) 300(11.81) (0.0024) 30(1.18) 0.06 A L LL LR 0.04 LM L1 L2 A (0.0016) L3 LG LE Q QK Sh6 Encoder plug Motor plug Shaft End W U 0.05 A (0.0020) LC B LD LBh7 T
13 (0.51) LF 9.5(0.37) LH
Serial encoder
L
4-LZ
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71 02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11 04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71 15AJ11 15AJ31 15AJC1 15AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 L
177 (6.97) 177 (6.97) 196 (7.72) 196 (7.72) 200.5 (7.89) 200.5 (7.89) 221 (8.70) 221 (8.70) 220.5 (8.68) 241 (9.49) 269 (10.59) 269 (10.59) 240.5 (9.47) 268.5 (10.57) 281.5 (11.08) 281.5 (11.08) 296.5 (11.67) 309.5 (12.19) 325.5 (12.81) 325.5 (12.81)
LL
117 (4.61) 117 (4.61) 122 (4.80) 122 (4.80) 126.5 (4.98) 126.5 (4.98) 137 (5.39) 137 (5.39) 146.5 (5.77) 157 (6.18) 164 (6.46) 164 (6.46) 156.5 (6.16) 163.5 (6.44) 174.5 (6.87) 174.5 (6.87) 191.5 (7.54) 202.5 (7.97) 209 (8.23) 209 (8.23)
LM
97.5 (3.84) 97.5 (3.84) 102 (4.02) 102 (4.02) 107.6 (4.24) 107.6 (4.24) 118.1 (4.65) 118.1 (4.65) 127.6 (5.02) 138.1 (5.44) 145.1 (5.71) 145.1 (5.71) 136.7 (5.38) 143.7 (5.66) 154.7 (6.09) 154.7 (6.09) 171.7 (6.76) 182.7 (7.19) 188.7 (7.43) 188.7 (7.43)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
60 4 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.16) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 60 4 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (2.36) (0.16) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 38 19.5 74 4 10 69 83 85 36 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 38 19.5 74 4 10 69 83 85 36 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 38 19.5 74 4 10 69 83 85 36 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 38 19.5 74 4 10 69 83 85 36 36 32 20 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 44 84 4 12 82 98 100 40 23 42 36 25 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 44 84 4 12 82 98 100 40 23 42 36 25 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 74 4 10 (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) 69 (2.72 38 19.5 83 85 36 36 32 20 (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79)
44 84 4 12 82 98 100 40 23 42 36 25 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 26.5 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 26.5 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 44 84 4 12 82 98 100 40 23 42 36 25 (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 26.5 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 26.5 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 58 50 32 (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 117 17 16 135 163 165 53 64 51 60 45 45 (4.61) (0.67) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.09) (2.52) (2.01) (2.36) (1.77) (1.77) 117 17 16 135 163 165 53 64 51 60 45 45 (4.61) (0.67) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.09) (2.52) (2.01) (2.36) (1.77) (1.77)
3-90
INFO
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71 02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11 04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71 15AJ11 15AJ31 15AJC1 15AJ71 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 LC LA LF LZ LH TapDepth M4 8L M4 8L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M6 12L M6 12L M5 10L M6 12L M8 16L M8 16L M6 12L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M10 20L U W T Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.6 (3.5) 1.6 (3.5) 2.6 (5.7) 2.6 (5.7) 3.1 (6.8) 3.1 (6.8) 4.7 (10.4) 4.7 (10.4) 4.1 (9.0) 5.1 (11.2) 6.9 (15.2) 6.9 (15.2) 7.5 (16.5) 9.0 (19.8) 14.2 (31.3) 14.2 (31.3) 11.4 (25.1) 16.6 (36.6) 21.6 (47.6) 21.6 (47.6) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 175 (39) 215 (48) 455 (102) 480 (108) 275 (62) 360 (81) 585 (132) 635 (143) 275 (62) 460 (104) 655 (147) 755 (170) 355 (80) 525 (118) 1070 (241) 1210 (271) 400 (90) 860 (194) 1690 (380) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 145 (33)
70 70 90 90 90 90
80 80
12.5 6.6 10.55 12.5 6.6 10.55 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 11 11 9 11 10.55 10.55 8.25 8.25 8.25 8.25 8.25 8.25 8.25 8.25 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
3 3 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 4 3.5 4 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 5.5 5.5
5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 6 8 10 10 8 10 12 12 10 12 14 14
5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 6 7 8 8 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9
105 12.5 105 12.5 105 11.9 105 11.9
235 (53)
235 (53)
105 120 11.9 105 120 11.9 90 105 11.9
290 (65) 235 (53) 290 (65) 310 (70) 290 (65) 310 (70) 490 (110) 310 (70) 490 (110) 880 (198)
105 120 11.9 120 135 11.9 120 135 11.9 105 120 12.8 120 135 12.8
145 165 12.8 14 145 165 12.8 14 120 135 12.8 11
145 165 12.8 14 170 190 12.8 14 170 190 12.8 14
3-91
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.3 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 16 16 20 20 20 20 25 25 20 25 32 32 25 32 40 40 32 40 45 45
0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006
Model SGMPH01AJ11 01AJ31 01AJC1 01AJ71 02AJ11 02AJ31 02AJC1 02AJ71 04AJ11 04AJ31 04AJC1 04AJ71 08AJ11 08AJ31 08AJC1 08AJ71 15AJ11 15AJ31 15AJC1 15AJ71

0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016
100 115 115 100 115 140 140 115 140 165 165
3-92
3.13.4 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes
Encoder cable 6 (0.24) 300(11.81)30(1.18) UL20276 Motor cable 7(0.28) (35) (1.38) Encoder plug
Motor plug
Shaft End W U T LC
300(11.81)30(1.18)
0.06 A (0.0024)
LF 9.5(0.37)
13 (0.51)LH
L LL LM LG Z
LR L1 L2 L3 LE
Q QK
0.04 A (0.0016) 0.05 A (0.0020)
B LD LBh7
3
Units: mm (in)
Sh6 Serial encoder Holding brake (de-energizing operation) Power supply: 90 VDC or 24 VDC
4-LZ Rotating section (Hatching section)
Model SGMPH01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7 02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7
Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33
L
206 (8.11) 206 (8.11) 224.5 (8.84) 224.5 (8.84) 232 (9.13) 232 (9.13) 252.5 (9.94) 252.5 (9.94) 252 (9.92) 272.5 (10.73) 300.5 (11.83) 300.5 (11.83)
LL
146 (5.75) 146 (5.75) 150.5 (5.93) 150.5 (5.93) 158 (6.22) 158 (6.22) 168.5 (6.63) 168.5 (6.63) 178 (7.01) 188.5 (7.42) 195.5 (7.70) 195.5 (7.70)
LM
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
92.5 60 4 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (3.64) (2.36) (0.16) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 92.5 60 4 9 57 63 65 30 30 14.5 28 25 16 (3.64) (2.36) (0.16) (0.35) (2.24) (2.48) (2.56) (1.18) (1.18) (0.57) (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 69 38 102 74 4 10 83 85 36 19.5 36 32 20 (4.02) (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 69 38 102 74 4 10 83 85 36 19.5 36 32 20 (4.02) (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 69 38 107.6 74 4 10 83 85 36 19.5 36 32 20 (4.24) (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 18 (0.71) 82 23 118.1 84 4 12 98 100 40 44 42 36 25 (4.65) (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 82 23 118.1 84 4 12 98 100 40 44 42 36 25 (4.65) (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 69 38 127.6 74 4 10 83 85 36 19.5 36 32 20 (5.02) (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 82 23 138.1 84 4 12 98 100 40 44 42 36 25 (5.44) (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 245.1 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 26.5 58 50 32 (9.65) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 245.1 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 26.5 58 50 32 (9.65) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 69 38 107.6 74 4 10 83 85 36 19.5 36 32 20 (4.24) (2.91) (0.16) (0.39) (2.72) (3.27) (3.35) (1.42) (1.50) (0.77) (1.42) (1.26) (0.79)
3-93
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.4 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Brakes
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMPH08AJ1 08AJ3 08AJC 08AJ7 15AJ1 15AJ3 15AJC 15AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5
1/11
L
274 (10.79) 302 (11.89) 315 (12.40) 315 (12.40) 330 (12.99) 343 (13.50) 359 (14.13) 359 (14.13)
LL
190 (7.48) 197 (7.76) 208 (8.19) 208 (8.19) 225 (8.86) 236 (9.29) 242 (9.53) 242 (9.53)
LM
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
L3
QK
44 136.7 84 4 12 82 98 100 40 23 42 36 25 (5.38) (3.31) (0.16) (0.47) (3.23) (3.86) (3.94) (1.57) (1.73) (0.91) (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 143.7 105 5 13 93 112 115 45 60 26.5 58 50 32 (5.66) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 154.7 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (6.09) (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 154.7 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (6.09) (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 28 (1.10) 93 171.7 105 5 13 112 115 45 60 26.5 58 50 32 (6.76) (4.13) (0.20) (0.51) (3.66) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) (2.36) (1.04) (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 182.7 107 10 15 107 134 140 44 63 42 60 45 40 (7.19) (4.21) (0.39) (0.59) (4.21) (5.28) (5.51) (1.73) (2.48) (1.65) (2.36) (1.77) (1.57) 188.7 117 17 16 135 163 165 53 64 51 60 45 45 (7.43) (4.61) (0.67) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.09) (2.52) (2.01) (2.36) (1.77) (1.77) 188.7 117 17 16 135 163 165 53 64 51 60 45 45 (7.43) (4.61) (0.67) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.09) (2.52) (2.01) (2.36) (1.77) (1.77)
1/21 1/33
INFO
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7 02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 LC LA LF LZ LH TapDepth M4 8L M4 8L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M6 12L M6 12L M5 10L M6 12L M8 16L M8 16L U W T Approx. Mass kg (lb) 1.8 (4.0) 1.8 (4.0) 2.8 (6.2) 2.8 (6.2) 3.4 (7.5) 3.4 (7.5) 5.2 (11.5) 5.2 (11.5) 4.6 (10.1) 5.6 (12.3) 7.4 (16.3) 7.4 (16.3) Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 175 (40) 215 (49) 455 (103) 480 (109) 275 (62) 360 (82) 585 (133) 635 (144) 275 (62) 460 (104) 655 (149) 755 (171) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 145 (33)
70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 90 (3.54) 105 (4.13) 120 (4.72) 120 (4.72)
80 12.5 (3.15) (0.49) 80 12.5 (3.15) (0.49) 105 12.5 (4.13) (0.49) 105 12.5 (4.13) (0.49) 105 11.9 (4.13) (0.47) 105 11.9 (4.13) (0.47) 120 11.9 (4.72) (0.47) 120 11.9 (4.72) (0.47) 105 11.9 (4.13) (0.47) 120 11.9 (4.72) (0.47) 120 11.9 (4.72) (0.47) 105 11.9 (4.13) (0.47)
6.6 (0.26) 6.6 (0.26) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43)
10.55 (0.42) 10.55 (0.42) 10.55 (0.42) 10.55 (0.42) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32) 8.25 (0.32)
3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 3.5 (0.14) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
235 (53)
235 (53)
290 (66) 235 (53) 290 (66) 310 (70)
3-94
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMPH08AJ1 08AJ3 08AJC 08AJ7 15AJ1 15AJ3 15AJC 15AJ7 Gear Ratio 1/5 3/31 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 LC LA LF LZ LH TapDepth M6 12L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M10 20L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 9.0 (19.8) 10.5 (23.1) 15.7 (34.6) 15.7 (34.6) 12.9 (28.4) 18.1 (39.9) 23.1 (50.9) 23.1 (50.9)
105 (4.13) 120 (4.72) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 120 (4.72) 145 (5.71) 170 (6.69) 170 (6.69)
120 12.8 (4.72) (0.50) 135 12.8 (5.31) (0.50) 135 12.8 (5.31) (0.50) 120 12.8 (4.72) (0.50) 135 12.8 (5.31) (0.50) 165 12.8 (6.50) (0.50) 190 12.8 (7.48) (0.50) 190 12.8 (7.48) (0.50)
9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55)
10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41)
4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22)
8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55)
7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 355 (80) 525 (119) 1070 (243) 1210 (273) 400 (91) 860 (195) 1690 (383)
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 16 16 20 20 20 20 25 25 20 25 32 32 25 32
0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006
Model SGMPH01AJ1 01AJ3 01AJC 01AJ7 02AJ1 02AJ3 02AJC 02AJ7 04AJ1 04AJ3 04AJC 04AJ7 08AJ1 08AJ3

0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014
100 115 115 100 115
3-95
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.5 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
Model SGMPH08AJC 08AJ7 15AJ1 15AJ3 15AJC 15AJ7

0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions S 40 40 32 40 45 45

0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006
3.13.5 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears

Encoder cable 6 (0.24) 300(11.81)30(1.18) UL20276 Motor cable 7 (0.28) (35) (1.38) 300(11.81)30(1.18) 0.06 A (0.0024) LR L2 L1 L3 LE Q QK Sh6 0.04 A (0.0016) Encoder plug
Motor plug
Shaft End W U T LC
LF 9.5 (0.37)
LH 13(0.51)
L LL LM LG Z
0.05 A (0.0020)
L
B LD LBh7
Serial encoder
4-LZ
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71 02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 L
168 (6.61) 168 (6.61) 191 (7.52) 191 (7.52) 197 (7.76) 197 (7.76) 215 (8.46) 215 (8.46) 217 (8.54)
LL
108 (4.25) 108 (4.25) 117 (4.61) 117 (4.61) 123 (4.84) 123 (4.84) 131 (5.16) 131 (5.16) 143 (5.63)
LM
88.5 (3.48) 88.5 (3.48) 97.5 (3.84) 97.5 (3.84) 104.1 (4.10) 104.1 (4.10) 112.1 (4.41) 112.1 (4.41) 124.1 (4.89)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 44 (1.73) 44 (1.73) 38 (1.50)
L3
21 (0.83) 21 (0.83) 26 (1.02) 26 (1.02) 26 (1.02) 26 (1.02) 29 (1.14) 29 (1.14) 26 (1.02)
QK
60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) 60 8 9 40 64.5 65 30 (2.36) (0.31) (0.35) (1.57) (2.54) (2.56) (1.18) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42) 84 12 12 59 96 100 40 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) 84 12 12 59 96 100 40 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) 74 7.5 10 59 84 85 36 (2.91) (0.30) (0.39) (2.32) (3.31) (3.35) (1.42)
28 25 16 (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 28 25 16 (1.10) (0.98) (0.63) 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 36 32 20 (1.42) (1.26) (0.79) 18 (0.71)
3-96
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMPH04AHB1 04AHC1 04AH71 08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71 15AH11 15AHB1 15AGC1 15AG71 Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 L
235 (9.25) 263 (10.35) 264 (10.39) 234.5 (9.23) 263.5 (10.37) 316.5 (12.46) 316.5 (12.46) 328.5 (12.93) 344.5 (13.56) 364.5 (14.35) 364.5 (14.35)
LL
151 (5.94) 158 (6.22) 159 (6.26) 150.5 (5.93) 158.5 (6.24) 174.5 (6.87) 174.5 (6.87) 186.5 (7.34) 202.5 (7.97) 208.5 (8.21) 208.5 (8.21)
LM
132.1 (5.20) 139.1 (5.48) 140.1 (5.52) 130.7 (5.15) 138.7 (5.46) 154.7 (6.09) 154.7 (6.09) 166.7 (6.56) 182.7 (7.19) 188.7 (7.43) 188.7 (7.43)
LR
LE
LG
LD
LB
L1
L2
44 (1.73) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 44 (1.73) 60 (2.36) 85 (3.35) 85 (3.35) 60 (2.36) 85 (3.35) 86 (3.39) 86 (3.39)
L3
29 (1.14) 33 (1.30) 33 (1.30) 29 (1.14) 33 (1.30) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 33 (1.30) 40 (1.57) 51 (2.01) 51 (2.01)
QK
84 12 12 59 96 100 40 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) 105 14 13 59 112 115 45 (4.13) (0.55) (0.51) (2.32) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) 105 12.5 13 84 114 115 45 (4.13) (0.49) (0.51) (3.31) (4.49) (4.53) (1.77) 84 12 12 59 96 100 40 (3.31) (0.47) (0.47) (2.32) (3.78) (3.94) (1.57) 105 14 13 59 112 115 45 (4.13) (0.55) (0.51) (2.32) (4.41) (4.53) (1.77) 142 10 15 84 134 140 57 (5.59) (0.39) (0.59) (3.31) (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) 142 10 15 84 134 140 57 (5.59) (0.39) (0.59) (3.31) (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) 142 12.5 13 84 114 115 45 (5.59) (0.49) (0.51) (3.31) (4.49) (4.53) (1.77) 142 10 15 84 134 140 57 (5.59) (0.39) (0.59) (3.31) (5.28) (5.51) (2.24) 156 16 16 135 163 165 70 (6.14) (0.63) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.76) 156 16 16 135 163 165 70 (6.14) (0.63) (0.63) (5.31) (6.42) (6.50) (2.76)
42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 58 50 32 (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 58 50 32 (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 42 36 25 (1.65) (1.42) (0.98) 58 50 32 (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 82 70 40 (3.23) (2.76) (1.57) 82 70 40 (3.23) (2.76) (1.57) 58 50 32 (2.28) (1.97) (1.26) 82 70 40 (3.23) (2.76) (1.57) 82 70 45 (3.23) (2.76) (1.77) 82 70 45 (3.23) (2.76) (1.77) 28 (1.10) 18 (0.71)
INFO
Units: mm (in) Model SGMPH01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71 02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 04AHB1 Gear Ratio 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 LC LA LZ LF LH TapDepth M4 8L M4 8L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M5 10L M6 12L M6 12L M5 10L M6 12L U W T Allowable Approx. Radia Mass Load kg (lb) N (lbf) 1.5 167 (3.3) (38) 1.5 216 (3.3) (49) 3.0 392 (6.6) (89) 3.0 431 (6.6) (98) 3.5 245 (7.7) (56) 3.8 323 (8.4) (73) 4.1 549 (9.0) (124) 4.1 608 (9.0) (138) 4.2 245 (9.3) (56) 441 4.8 (10.6) (100) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 147 (33)
70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 90 (3.54) 105 (4.13)
80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 120 (4.72) 120 (4.72) 105 (4.13) 120 (4.72)
6.6 (0.26) 6.6 (0.26) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47)
10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33)
3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 3.5 (0.14) 4 (0.16)
5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 5 5 (0.20) (0.20) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24) 8 7 (0.31) (0.28) 8 7 (0.31) (0.28) 6 6 (0.24) (0.24) 8 7 (0.31) (0.28)
235 (53)
235 (53)
294 (67) 235 (53) 294 (67)
3-97
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.13.5 SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears
Model SGMPH04AHC1 04AH71 08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71 15AH11 15AHB1 15AGC1 15AG71
Gear Ratio 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33 1/5 1/11 1/21 1/33
LC
LA
LZ
LF
LH
TapDepth M8 16L M8 16L M6 12L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M8 16L M10 20L M10 20L M10 20L
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 5.2 (11.5) 7.7 (16.6) 6.9 (15.2) 8.0 (17.6) 11.0 (24.3) 11.0 (24.3) 9.2 (20.3) 11.3 (24.9) 23.6 (52.0) 23.6 (52.0)
120 (4.72) 120 (4.72) 105 (4.13) 120 (4.72) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 120 (4.72) 145 (5.71) 170 (6.69) 170 (6.69)
135 (5.31) 135 (5.31) 120 (4.72) 135 (5.31) 165 (6.50) 165 (6.50) 135 (5.31) 165 (6.50) 190 (7.48) 190 (7.48)
11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55)
11.9 (0.47) 11.9 (0.47) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50) 12.8 (0.50)
8.5 (0.33) 8.5 (0.33) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41) 10.5 (0.41)
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22)
10 8 (0.39) (0.31) 10 8 (0.39) (0.31) 8 7 (0.31) (0.28) 10 8 (0.39) (0.31) 12 8 (0.47) (0.31) 12 8 (0.47) (0.31) 10 8 (0.39) (0.31) 12 8 (0.47) (0.31) 14 9 (0.55) (0.35) 14 9 (0.55) (0.35)
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Allowable Allowable Radia Thrust Load Load N (lbf) N (lbf) 568 (129) 314 (71) 657 (149) 343 294 (78) (67) 451 314 (102) (71) 813 (184) 490 (111) 921 (209) 353 314 (80) (71) 647 490 (147) (111) 1250 (283) 882 (200)
0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.63 0 0.018 0.0004 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.79 0 0.021 0.0005 0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006
Model SGMPH01AH11 01AHB1 01AHC1 01AH71 02AH11 02AHB1 02AHC1 02AH71 04AH11 04AHB1 04AHC1 04AH71

0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 2.56 0 0.030 0.0012 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014
100 100 85
0 3.35 0 0.035 0.0014 0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014
100 115 115
3-98
Model SGMPH08AH11 08AHB1 08AHC1 08AH71 15AH11 15AHB1 15AGC1 15AG71
Flange Face Dimensions LB 100 115 140 140 115 140 165 165
0 3.94 0 0.035 0.0014 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 4.53 0 0.035 0.0014 0 5.51 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016 0 6.50 0 0.040 0.0016
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions S 25 32 40 40 32 40 45 45

0 0.98 0 0.021 0.0005 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.26 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.57 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006 0 1.77 0 0.025 0.0006
3-99
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.14.1 SGMAH Servomotors
3.14 Dimensional Drawing of Output Shafts With Oil Seals for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
For the SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors with oil seals, the external dimensions of output shafts differ as shown below.
3.14.1 SGMAH Servomotors

Model Capacity Dimensions of Output Shaft mm (in) LO DO QK LB SGMAH-A3, A5, 01 30 W, 50 W, 100 W 7.5 (0.30) 28 (1.10) 14 (0.55) SGMAH-02, 03, 04 200 to 400 W 10 (0.39) 48 (1.89) 14 (0.55)
0 50 -0.025 (1.9685-0.00098 ) 0
SGMAH-07, 08 650 W, 750 W 11 (0.43) 66 (2.60) 25 (0.98)
30 -0.021 (1.181 -0.00083)
70 -0.030 (2.756-0.00012)
LO
DO Oil Seal
3.14.2 SGMPH Servomotors

Model Capacity Dimensions of Output Shaft mm (in) LO DO QK LB SGMPH-01 100 W 7 (0.28) 39 (1.54) 14 (0.55)
-0.0015
SGMPH-02, 04 200 W, 400 W 10 (0.39) 49 (1.93) 16 (0.63)
SGMPH-08 750 W 10.5 (0.41) 77 (3.03) 22 (0.87)
LB
Dimensional Drawing
QK
SGMPH-15 1500 W 10.5 (0.41) 77 (3.03) 22 (0.87)
-0.0001 +0.0007 +0.0007 0 0 0 0 50 -0.025 (1.97 -0.0025 ) 70 -0.030 (2.756 -0.0013 ) 110 -0.035 (4.33 -0.0007 ) 110 -0.035 (4.33 -0.0007 )
LO
QK
DO Oil Seal
Dimensional Drawing
3-100
LB
3.15 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1)

3.15.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
Models with oil seals are of the same configuration.
L LT LL LM LG 100( 3.94) KL1 88 (3.46) LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.06 A * 0.04 A (0.0016) L * For 1A A to 1E A only Shaft End LE S LC SGMGH-05
LA
A to 13 LR
SGMGH-20 LR LE LF2 LF1
A to 1E
LE LB LF1 IE S1 S LJ1 (0.0008) 0.02 0.04 * (0.0016) * For 55 A to 1E
KB1 KB2
4-LZ Mounting holes
S1
S LJ2 LJ1
A only
Note: For the specifications of the other shaft ends, refer to 3.20 Shaft End Specifications for SGMGH, SGMSH and SGMDH Servomotors.
Shaft-end Dimensions Model SGMGH05AA21 05DA21 09AA21 09DA21 13AA21 13DA21 20AA21 20DA21 30AA21 30DA21 44AA21 44DA21 55AA21 55DA21
373 260 (14.7) (10.2) 213 (8.39) 113 47 174 (4.45) (1.85) (6.85) 238 123 150 (9.37) (4.84) (5.91) 305 226 (12.0) (8.90) 179 (7.05) 79 47 149 (3.11) (1.85) (5.87) 204 (8.03) 271 192 (10.7) (7.56) 145 (5.71) 79 47 115 (3.11) (1.85) (4.53) 170 (6.69) 245 166 (9.65) (6.54) 119 (4.69) 79 47 89 (3.11) (1.85) (3.50) 144 (5.67) 243 185 (9.57) (7.28) 139 (5.47) 58 46 112 (2.28) (1.81) (4.41) 164 (6.46) 219 161 (8.62) (6.34) 115 (4.53) 58 46 88 (2.28) (1.81) (3.46) 140 (5.51) 196 138 (7.72) (5.43) 92 (3.62) 58 46 65 (2.28) (1.81) (2.56) 117 (4.61)
R 1
LL
LM
LR
LT
KB1 KB2
IE
KL1
S
19 0
S1 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)
Allowable Approx. Radial Mass Load N kg (lb) (lbf) 5.5 (12.1) 7.6 (16.8) 9.6 (21.2) 14 (30.9) 18 (39.7) 23 (50.7) 30 (66.1) 490 (110) 490 (110) 686 (154) 1180 (265) 1470 (331) 1470 (331) 1760 (397)
R 1
Units: mm (in) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 98 (22) 98 (22) 343 (77) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110) 588 (132)
109 (4.29)
0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.87 0 0.0005 35 22 0 19 0
40 (1.57)
109 (4.29)
40 (1.57)
109 (4.29)
40 (1.57)
+ 0.01
0 0 0
140 (5.51)
1.38 35
+ 0.0004 + 0.01
76 (2.99)
140 (5.51)
0.0004 1.38+ 0 35
76 (2.99)
+ 0.01
0 0
140 (5.51)
1.38 42
+ 0.0004
76 (2.99)
0 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006
110 (4.33)
3-101
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions Model SGMGH75AA21 75DA21 1AAA21 1ADA21 1EAA21 1EDA21
573 457 (22.6) (18.0) 409 (16.1) 116 48 343 (4.57) (1.89) (13.5) 435 150 168 (17.1) (5.91) (6.61) 454 338 (17.9) (13.3) 291 (11.5) 116 47 251 (4.57) (1.85) (9.88) 316 142 168 (12.4) (5.59) (6.61) 447 334 (17.6) (13.1) 287 (11.3) 113 47 248 (4.45) (1.85) (9.76) 312 123 150 (12.3) (4.84) (5.91)
LL
LM
LR
LT
KB1 KB2
IE
KL1
S
42 0
S1 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 40 (88.2) 57.5 (126) 86 (189)
0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 42 55
110 (4.33)
110 (4.33)
0.030 + + 65 0.011 110 2.17+ 0.001 (2.56) (4.33) + 0.0004
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH05AA21 05DA21 09AA21 09DA21 13AA21 13DA21 20AA21 20DA21 30AA21 30DA21 44AA21 44DA21 55AA21 55DA21 75AA21 75DA21 1AAA21 LA 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
110
LB
0 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018 200 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 110 0 110 0
LC
Flange Face Dimensions LE LF1 LF2 LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
LZ 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24)
12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16) 18 270 62 (0.71) (10.6) (2.44) 13.5 (0.53)
235 1ADA21 (9.25)
3-102
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGH1EAA21 LA

200
LB
0 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018
LC
Flange Face Dimensions LE LF1 LF2 LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
LZ 13.5 (0.53)
235 1EDA21 (9.25)
220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16)
20 270 85 (0.79) (10.6) (3.35)
Cable Specifications for Detector Connectors (17-bit Encoder)

L K J M A B C T NP D S R E H G F
Cable Specifications for Servomotor Connectors

D A
Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
A B C D
Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame ground)
With an Absolute Encoder A B DATA+ C D DATA E F 0V G H +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A B L DATA+ C M N D DATA P E R F 0V S G T H +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
3.15.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes
(1) 500 W to 4.4 kW
L LL LT LM LE LG 100( 3.94) KL1 88(3.46) S LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.06 A * LC * For 1A A to 1E A only Shaft End SGMGH-05 LR A to -13 A SGMGH-20 LR LE LF2 LJ1 S1 S LF1 LJ2 LJ1 A to 44 A
0.04 A (0.0016) LB
LA
LF1
H
LE
S1
A KB1 KB2
(0.0008) 0.02 0.04 (0.0016) * For 55 A to 1E *
4-LZ Mounting holes
A only

F E D G C A B
A B C D
E Brake terminal F Brake terminal G
S
R 1
R 1
3-103
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions Model SGMGHL LL LM LR LT KB 1 KB KL1 2

19
S
0
S1
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 7.5 (16.5) 9.6 (21.2) 12 (26.5) 19 (41.9) 23.5 (51.8) 28.5 (62.8)
Allowable Allowable Radial Thrust Load N Load N (lbf) (lbf) 490 (110) 490 (110) 686 (154) 1180 (265) 1470 (331) 1470 (331) 98 (22) 98 (22) 343 (77) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110)
05AA2
234 176 130 58 46 56 154 120 (9.21) (6.93) (5.12) (2.28) (1.81) (2.20) (6.06) (4.72)
0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.87 0 0.0005 35 22 0 19 0
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
09AA2
257 199 153 58 46 79 177 120 (10.1) (7.83) (6.02) (2.28) (1.81) (3.11) (6.97) (4.72)
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
13AA2
281 223 177 58 46 103 201 120 (11.1) (8.78) (6.97) (2.28) (1.81) (4.06) (7.91) (4.72)
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
+ 0.01
0 0 0 45 (1.77) 76 (2.99)
20AA2
296 217 169 79 48 79 195 146 (11.7) (8.54) (6.65) (3.11) (1.89) (3.11) (7.68) (5.75)
1.38 35
+ 0.0004
45 (1.77)
76 (2.99)
+ 0.01
30AA2
322 243 195 79 48 105 221 146 (12.7) (9.57) (7.68) (3.11) (1.89) (4.13) (8.70) (5.75)
0.0004 1.38+ 0 35
+ 0.01
0 0 0.0004 + 45 (1.77) 76 (2.99)
44AA2
356 277 229 79 48 139 255 146 (14.0) (10.9) (9.02) (3.11) (1.89) (5.47) (10.0) (5.75)
1.38
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH05AA2 LA 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
110
LB
0 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 110 0
LC 130 (5.12) 130 (5.12) 130 (5.12) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09)
Flange Face Dimensions LE LF1 LF2 LG 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 3.2 (0.13) 3.2 (0.13) 3.2 (0.13) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71)
LH 165 (6.50) 165 (6.50) 165 (6.50) 230 (9.06) 230 (9.06) 230 (9.06)
LJ1 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99)
LJ2
LZ 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 13.5 (0.53) 13.5 (0.53) 13.5 (0.53)
09AA2
13AA2
20AA2
0.5 (0.02) 0.5 (0.02) 0.5 (0.02)
62 (2.44) 62 (2.44) 62 (2.44)
30AA2
44AA2
3-104
(2) 5.5kW to 15kW

L LL LT LM LE LG 100( 3.94) KL1 KL3 88 S LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.06 A * LC LE LF2 S1 LF1 S LJ2 LJ1
R 1
* For 1A
A to 1E
A only Shaft End LR
0.04 A (0.0016)LH LB
LA
A KB1 KB3 KB2 0.04 (0.0016)
4-13.5 Mounting holes
IE
110

D A
Cable Specifications for Brake Connectors

A C B
A B C D
A Brake terminal B Brake terminal C
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHL LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 KB3 IE KL1 KL3 Shaft-end Dimensions S S1
0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 55 42 0 42 0 42 0
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 35 (77.2) 45.5 (100) 65 (143) 100 (220)
424 311 263 113 48 174 289 231 123 150 123 55AA2 (16.7) (12.2) (10.4) (4.45) (1.89) (6.85) (11.4) (9.09) (4.84) (5.91) (4.84) 498 385 337 113 48 248 363 305 123 150 123 75AA2 (19.6) (15.2) (13.3) (4.45) (1.89) (9.76) (14.3) (12.0) (4.84) (5.91) (4.84) 499 383 340 116 43 258 362 315 142 168 142 1AAA2 (19.6) (15.1) (13.4) (4.57) (1.69) (10.2) (14.3) (12.4) (5.59) (6.61) (5.59) 635 519 471 116 48 343 497 415 150 168 142 1EAA2 (25.0) (20.4) (18.5) (4.57) (1.89) (13.5) (19.6) (16.3) (5.91) (6.61) (5.59)
45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 65 (2.56)
2.17 0.0004 +
+ 0.030 + 0.011 + 0.0012
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHFlange Face Dimensions LA LB

0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 114.3 0
LC
LE
LF1
LF2
LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
200 55AA2 (7.87)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44)
3-105
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.3 Servomotors SGMGH (1500 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes

0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018 200 0 200 0 114.3 0
LC
LE
LF1
LF2
LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
200 75AA2 (7.87) 235 1AAA2 (9.25) 235 1EAA2 (9.25)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44 220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16) 220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16) 18 270 62 (0.71) (10.6) (2.44) 20 270 85 (0.79) (10.6) (3.35)
3.15.3 Servomotors SGMGH (1500 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes
500W to 15kW
Model with oil seals are of the same configuration.
Shaft End L LL LT LM LG LR LE * For 1AD A to 1ED A (0.0016) (0.0024) 0.04 A 0.06 A * 0.04 A (0.0008) LH LC LF1 S1 S LJ1 IE SGMGH-05 LE LF2 S1 A to 13 LR A SGMGH-20 LR LE LF1 S LJ2 LJ1
R 1
A to 1E
100( 3.94) KL1 KL3 88(3.46)
S LB
L
KB1 KB3 KB2 A (0.0008) 0.04 * * For 55
R 1
4-LZ Mounting holes A only
A to 1E
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHShaft-end Dimensions L LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 KB3 IE KL1 KL3
19
S
0 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.87 0 0.0005 35 22 0 19 0
S1
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 7.5 (16.5) 9.6 (21.2) 12 (26.5) 19 (41.9)
05DA2
234 (9.21)
176 (6.93)
130 (5.12)
58 (2.28)
46 (1.81)
65 (2.56)
154 (6.06)
109 (4.29)
109 (4.29)
98 (3.86)
30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 45 76 (1.77) (2.99)
09DA2
257 (10.1)
199 (7.83)
153 (6.02)
58 (2.28)
46 (1.81)
88 (3.46)
177 (6.97)
132 (5.20)
109 (4.29)
98 (3.86)
13DA2
281 (11.1)
223 (8.78)
177 (6.97)
58 (2.28)
46 (1.81)
112 (4.41)
201 (7.91)
156 (6.14)
109 (4.29)
98 (3.86)
+ 0.01
0
20DA2
296 (11.7)
217 (8.54)
169 (6.95)
79 (3.11)
48 (1.89)
89 (3.50)
195 (7.68)
137 (5.39)
140 (5.51)
123 (4.84)
0.0004 1.38+ 0
3-106
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGHShaft-end Dimensions L LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 KB3 IE KL1 KL3
35
S
+ 0.01
0
S1 45
Q 76
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 23.5 (51.8) 28.5 (62.8) 35 (77.2) 45.5 (100) 65 (143) 100 (221)
30DA2
322 (12.7)
243 (9.57)
195 (7.68)
79 (3.11)
48 (1.89)
115 (4.53)
221 (8.70)
163 (6.42)
140 (5.51)
123 (4.84)
1.38 35
+ 0.0004 (1.77) (2.99)

0 0
+ 0.01
44DA2
356 (14.0)
277 (10.9)
229 (9.02)
79 (3.11)
48 (1.89)
149 (5.87)
255 (10.0)
197 (7.76)
140 (5.51)
123 (4.84)
0.0004 1.38+ 0 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 55 42 0 42 0 42 0
45 76 (1.77) (2.99) 45 110 (1.77) (4.33) 45 110 (1.77) (4.33) 45 110 (1.77) (4.33)
55DA2
424 (16.7)
311 (12.2)
263 (10.4)
113 (4.45)
48 (1.89)
174 (6.85)
289 (11.4)
231 (9.09)
123 (4.84)
150 (5.91)
123 (4.84)
75DA2
498 (19.6)
385 (15.2)
337 (13.3)
113 (4.45)
48 (1.89)
248 (9.76)
363 (14.3)
305 (12.0)
123 (4.84)
150 (5.91)
123 (4.84)
1ADA2
499 (19.6)
383 (15.1)
340 (13.4)
116 (4.57)
43 (1.69)
258 (10.2)
362 (14.3)
315 (12.4)
142 (5.59)
168 (6.61)
142 (5.59)
1EDA2
635 (25.0)
519 (20.4)
471 (18.5)
116 (4.57)
48 (1.89)
343 (13.5)
497 (19.6)
415 (16.3)
150 (5.91)
168 (6.61)
142 (5.59)
+ 0.030 65 110 + 0.011 + 0.0012 (2.56) (4.33) 2.17 + 0.0004

0 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 110 0 110 0
LC
LE
LF1
LF2
LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
LZ 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 490 (110) 490 (110) 686 (154) 1180 (264) 1470 (331) 1470 (331) 1760 (397)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 98 (22) 98 (22) 343 (77) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110) 588 (132)
145 05DA2 (5.71) 145 (5.71)
130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24)
12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77)
09DA2
145 13DA2 (5.71) 200 20DA2 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53)
30DA2
200 44DA2 (7.87) 200 55DA2 (7.87)
3-107
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.3 Servomotors SGMGH (1500 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears and With Brakes
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGHFlange Face Dimensions LA LB

0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018 0 200 0.046 7.87 0 0.0018 200 0 114.3 0
LC
LE
LF1
LF2
LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
LZ
200 75DA2 (7.87) 235 1ADA2 (9.25) 235 1EDA2 (9.25)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16) 220 4 4 (8.66) (0.16) (0.16) 18 270 62 (0.71) (10.6) (2.44) 20 270 85 (0.79) (10.6) (3.35) 13.5 (0.53) 13.5 (0.53)

Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A With an Incremental Encoder A K B L DATA+ C M D N DATA P E R F 0V S G T H +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
K L M N P R S T -
BATTBATT+

D A

A C B
A Phase U B Phase V C Phase W FG D (Frame ground)
3-108
3.15.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type)
(1) Grease Lubricating Type
L KB2 KB1 KL1 88(3.46) LT LL LM R B Q Sh6 QK
T Shaft End Tap Depth (See the following table.)
F N
XC XR 4-Z Mounting holes
E M
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHGear Model Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B C Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2050 (461) 2520 (567) 4940 (1110) 5360 (1210) 3240 (729) 3840 (864) 6190 (1390) 6870 (1550) 3240 (729) 4970 (1120) 6190 (1390) 4050 (911) 4970 (1120) 4050 (911)
05AASA6 CNHX05DASA6 4095 05AASB6 CNHX05DASB6 4095 05AASC6 CNHX05DASC6 4105 05AAS76 CNHX05DAS76 4105 09AASA6 CNHX09DASA6 4105 09AASB6 CNHX09DASB6 4105 09AASC6 CNHX09DASC6 4115 09AAS76 CNHX09DAS76 4115 13AASA6 CNHX13DASA6 4105 13AASB6 CNHX13DASB6 4115 13AASC6 CNHX13DASC6 4115 20AASA6 CNHX20DASA6 4115 20AASB6 CNHX20DASB6 4115 30DASA6 30AASA6 CNHX4115
380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 209 152 100 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 209 152 100 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 256 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 209 152 100 (10.0 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 8) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72)
3-109
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type)
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGHGear Model Gear Ratio 1/11 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B
30AASB6 CNHX30DASB6 4115
503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72)
0 -0.5
Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 4970 (1120)
* The tolerances for all models are
.
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) XC Z Q QK S T U W Tap Depth M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M10 22 M10 22 M8 19 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 Approx. Mass kg (lb) 20.5 (45.2) 20.5 (45.2) 22.5 (49.6) 22.5 (49.6) 24.6 (54.2) 24.6 (54.2) 34.6 (76.3) 34.6 (76.3) 26.6 (58.6) 36.6 (80.7) 36.6 (80.7) 43 (94.8) 43 (94.8) 47 (104) 47 (104)
Model SGMGH05AASA6 05DASA6 05AASB6 05DASB6 05AASC6 05DASC6 05AAS76 05DAS76 09AASA6 09DASA6 09AASB6 09DASB6 09AASC6 09DASC6 09AAS76 09DAS76 13AASA6 13DASA6 13AASB6 13DASB6 13AASC6 13DASC6 20AASA6 20DASA6 20AASB6 20DASB6 30AASA6 30DASA6 30AASB6 30DASB6
Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11
Foot-mounted Dimensions mm (in) E F G K M N XR
75 90 12 40 180 130 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.12) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 130 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.12) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (110) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39)
3-110
Model SGMGH05AASA6 05DASA6 05AASB6 05DASB6 05AASC6 05DASC6 05AAS76 05DAS76 09AASA6 09DASA6 09AASB6 09DASB6 09AASC6 09DASC6 09AAS76 09DAS76 13AASA6 13DASA6 13AASB6 13DASB6 13AASC6 13DASC6 20AASA6 20DASA6 20AASB6 20DASB6 30AASA6 30DASA6 30AASB6 30DASB6 Lubrication Grease lubricating type (frame numbers: 4095 to 4115) Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease. Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 28 28
0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005
28 28 28 28 38 38 28 38 38 38 38 38 38
0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
INFO
3-111
(2) Oil Lubricating Type

L LT KB2 KB1 LL LM R Hydraulic plug Q QK B Shaft End Sh6 T Oil supply plug C A Tap Depth (See the following table.)
KL1 88(3.46)
F N
XC XR 4Z Mounting holes
K E M E
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH13AAS76 13DAS76 20AASC6 Gear Model CHHX4135 Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B C Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 9900 (2230) 8940 (2010) 9900 (2230) 11590 (2610) 16290 (3670) 5870 (1320) 7190 (1620) 14640 (3290) 19020 (4280) 5870 (1320) 9500 (2140) 17180 (3870) 19020 (4280) 11740 (2640) 17180 (3870) 25600 (5760)
532 185 139 46 73 21 109 347 300 246 150 (20.9) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.7) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 536 166 119 47 77 22 140 370 300 246 150 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 536 166 119 47 77 22 140 370 300 246 150 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 582 192 145 47 77 22 140 390 300 246 150 (22.9) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (15.4) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 687 192 145 47 77 22 140 495 319 318 160 (27.0) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (19.5) (12.6) (12.5) (6.30) 596 226 179 47 77 22 140 370 300 246 150 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 596 226 179 47 77 22 140 370 300 246 150 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 721 226 179 47 77 22 140 495 319 318 160 (28.4) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (19.5) (12.6) (12.5) (6.30) 785 226 179 47 77 22 140 559 382 363 200 (30.9) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (22.0) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 664 260 213 47 86 22 150 404 300 246 150 (26.1) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (15.9) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 684 260 213 47 86 22 150 424 300 246 150 (26.9) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (16.7) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 853 260 213 47 86 22 150 593 382 363 200 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 853 260 213 47 86 22 150 593 382 363 200 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 863 334 287 47 86 22 150 529 319 318 160 (34.0) (13.1) (11.3) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (20.8) (12.6) (12.6) (6.30) 927 334 287 47 86 22 150 593 382 363 200 (36.5) (13.1) (11.3) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 977 334 287 47 86 22 150 643 417 392 220 (38.5) (13.1) (11.3) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (25.3) (16.4) (15.4) (8.66)
CHHX20DASC6 4130 20AAS76 CHHX4135 20DAS76 30AASC6 30DASC6 30AAS76 30DAS76 44AASA6 44AASB6 44AASC6 44AAS76 55AASA6 55AASB6 55AASC6 55AAS76 75AASB6 75AASC6 75AAS76 CHHX4145 CHHJ4160 CHHX4130 CHHX4135 CHHJ4160 CHHJ4170 CHHX4135 CHHX4145 CHHJ4170 CHHJ4175 CHHJ4160 CHHJ4175 CHHJ4180
3-112
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGH1AAASB6 1AAASC6 1AAAS76 Gear Model CHHJ4170 CHHJ4185 CHHJ4190 Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/29 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B
934 338 291 47 87 21 168 596 382 363 200 (36.8) (13.3) (11.5) (1.85) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (23.5) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 984 338 291 47 87 21 168 646 417 393 220 (38.7) (13.3) (11.5) (1.85) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (25.4) (16.4) (15.5) (8.66) 1077 338 291 47 87 21 168 739 477 454 250 (42.4) (13.3) (11.5) (1.85) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (29.1) (18.8) (17.9) (9.84)
0 -0.5
Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 13800 (3110) 23010 (5180) 35810 (8060)
.
Units: mm (in)
Model SGMGH13AAS76 13DAS76 20AASC6 20DASC6 20AAS76 20DAS76 30AASC6 30DASC6 30AAS76 30DAS76 44AASA6 44AASB6 44AASC6 44AAS76 55AASA6 55AASB6 55AASC6 55AAS76 75AASB6 75AASC6 75AAS76
Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29
Foot-mounted Dimensions mm (in) E F G K M N XR XC Z Q QK
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S T U W Tap Depth M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M12 24 M10 18 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 57.6 (127) 67 (148) 67 (148) 72 (159) 126 (278) 76 (168) 76 (168) 131 (289) 176 (388) 88 (194) 89 (196) 191 (421) 191 (421) 155 (342) 201 (443) 245 (540)
145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 95 120 18 90 80 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (3.74) (4.72) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 95 120 18 90 80 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (3.74) (4.72) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 210 320 30 85 470 380 115 145 22 110 100 80 14 9 22 (8.27) (12.6) (1.18) (3.35) (18.5) (15.0) (4.53) (5.71) (0.87) (4.33) (3.94) (3.15) (0.55) (0.35) (0.87)
3-113
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGH1AAASB6 1AAASC6 1AAAS76 Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/29 Foot-mounted Dimensions mm (in) E F G K M N XR XC Z Q QK Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S T U W Tap Depth M12 24 M12 24 M20 34 Approx. Mass kg (lb) 230.5 (508) 276.5 (610) 357.5 (788)
190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 210 320 30 85 470 380 115 145 22 110 100 80 14 9 22 (8.27) (12.6) (1.18) (3.35) (18.5) (15.0) (4.53) (5.71) (0.87) (4.33) (3.94) (3.15) (0.55) (0.35) (0.87) 240 380 35 90 530 440 140 170 26 135 125 95 14 9 25 (9.45) (15.0) (1.38) (3.54) (20.9) (17.3) (5.51) (6.69) (1.02) (5.31) (4.92) (3.74) (0.55) (0.35) (0.98)
Model SGMGH13AAS76 13DAS76 20AASC6 20DASC6 20AAS76 20DAS76 30AASC6 30DASC6 30AAS76 30DAS76 44AASA6 44AASB6 44AASC6 44AAS76 55AASA6 55AASB6 55AASC6 55AAS76 75AASB6 75AASC6 75AAS76 1AAASB6 1AAASC6 1AAAS76 Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 50 50 50 50 60 50 50 60 70 50 50 70 70 60 70 80 70 80
0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.74 0 0.022 0.009
95
3-114
INFO
Lubrication Oil lubricating type (frame numbers: 4130 to 4190) Servomotors of this type have been shipped with oil removed. Be sure to supply oil until the red line at the upper side of the oil guage. Lubrication oil recommended is industrial-use extreme-pressure gear oil of SP-system, JIS K 2219 industrial-use gear oil or equivalent. Refer to the following table. Ambient Temperature COSMO Oil Co., Ltd. 0 to 35 C (32 to 95 F) COSMO Gear SE 100, 150 Manufacturer Nippon Oil Co., Ltd. BON-NOCK M 100, 150 Tonen General Sekiyu K. K. GENERAL SP Gear Roll 100, 150
The following shows approximate oil amount to be supplied. Units: liter Frame No. Horizontal type 4130 4135 0.7 4145 0.7 4155 0.7 4160 4165 1.4 4170 4175 1.9 4180 4185 2.5 4190 4.0
3.15.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
L LT LL LM R Sh6 LG LR LE Q Shaft End
KL1 88(3.46)
LBf8
QK
A L
A L
KB1 KB2
N-11 Mounting holes
4 Mounting holes
6 Mounting holes
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH05AATA6 05DATA6 05AATB6 05DATB6 05AATC6 05DATC6 05AAT76 05DAT76 09AATA6 09DATA6 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2050 (461) 2520 (567) 4940 (1110) 5360 (1210) 3240 (729)
CNVX-4095 CNVX-4095 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105
380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) 380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1)
3-115
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGH09AATB6 09DATB6 09AATC6 09DATC6 09AAT76 09DAT76 13AATA6 13DATA6 13AATB6 13DATB6 13AATC6 13DATC6 20AATA6 20DATA6 20AATB6 20DATB6 30AATA6 30DATA6 30AATB6 30DATB6 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 3840 (864) 6190 (1400) 6870 (1550) 3240 (729) 4970 (1120) 6190 (1390) 4050 (911) 4970 (1120) 4050 (911) 4970 (1120)
CNVX-4105 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115
417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2)
Model SGMGH05AATA6 05DATA6 05AATB6 05DATB6 05AATC6 05DATC6 05AAT76 05DAT76 09AATA6 09DATA6 09AATB6 09DATB6 09AATC6 09DATC6 09AAT76 09DAT76 13AATA6 13DATA6
Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA

134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 134 (5.28) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 134 (5.28)
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) Q

35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 35 (1.38)
LB
110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 110 (4.33)
LC
160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 160 (6.30)
LE
3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 3 (0.12)
LG
9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 9 (0.35)
LR
48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 48 (1.89)
N
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 4 (0.16)
QK
32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 32 (1.26)
S
28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 28 (1.10)
T
7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 7 (0.28)
U
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16)
W
8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31)
Tap Depth M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M10 22 M10 22 M8 19
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 18.5 (40.8) 18.5 (40.8) 20.5 (45.2) 20.5 (45.2) 22.6 (49.8) 22.6 (49.8) 33.6 (74.1) 33.6 (74.1) 24.6 (54.2)
3-116
(Contd) Model SGMGH13AATB6 13DATB6 13AATC6 13DATC6 20AATA6 20DATA6 20AATB6 20DATB6 30AATA6 30DATA6 30AATB6 30DATB6 Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11 Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA
180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09) 180 (7.09)
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) Q

55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17)
LB
140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51)
LC
210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27)
LE
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16)
LG
13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51)
LR
69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72)
N
6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24)
QK
50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)
S
38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50)
T
8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
U
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
W
10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39)
Tap Depth M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 35.6 (78.5) 35.6 (78.5) 42 (92.6) 42 (92.6) 46 (101) 46 (101)
Model SGMGH05AATA6 05DATA6 05AATB6 05DATB6 05AATC6 05DATC6 05AAT76 05DAT76 09AATA6 09DATA6 09AATB6 09DATB6 09AATC6 09DATC6 09AAT76 09DAT76 13AATA6 13DATA6 13AATB6 13DATB6 13AATC6 13DATC6 20AATA6 20DATA6 20AATB6 20DATB6 Flange Face Dimensions LB 110 0.036 4.33 0.0014
0.090 0.0035
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 28 28 28 28 28 28 38 38 28 38 38 38 38

0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.0042
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.0042
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.090 0.0035
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.0042 0.0017 140 0.043 5.51 0.106 0.0042 0.0017 140 0.043 5.51 0.106 0.0042 0.0017 140 0.043 5.51 0.106 0.0042
3-117
Model SGMGH30AATA6 30DATA6 30AATB6 30DATB6 Lubrication
Flange Face Dimensions LB 140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.0042
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions S 38 38

0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.0042
INFO
Grease lubricating type (frame numbers: 4095 to 4115) Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease.
(2) Small Oil Lubricating Type

L LL LT LM 15 R S (50h6)
30 2
4 Q QK
Hydrant LB (200f8)
(
Oil scavenging plug
9.
06
LR
209 (8.23)
Shaft End 9(0.35) Tap Depth 14(0.55)
KL1 88(3.46)
4 .2 10 ( 60 2
5.5(0.22)
KB1 KB2
6-11 Mounting holes
Oil scavenging plug
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH13AAT76 13DAT76 20AATC6 20DATC6 20AAT76 20DAT76 30AATC6 30DATC6 44AATA6 44AATB6 55AATA6 55AATB6 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 9900 (2230) 8940 (2010) 9900 (2230) 11590 (2610) 5870 (1320) 7190 (1620) 5870 (1320) 9500 (2140)
CHVX-4135 CHVX-4130 CHVX-4135 CHVX-4145 CHVX-4130 CHVX-4135 CHVX-4135 CHVX-4145
532 185 139 46 73 21 109 347 (20.9) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.7) 536 166 119 47 77 22 140 370 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 536 166 119 47 77 22 140 370 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 582 192 145 47 77 22 140 390 (22.9) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (15.4) 596 226 179 47 77 22 140 370 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 596 226 179 47 77 22 140 370 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 664 260 213 47 86 22 150 404 (26.1) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (15.9) 684 260 213 47 86 22 150 424 (26.9) (10.2) (8.39) (1.85) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (16.7)
3-118
Model SGMGH13AAT76 13DAT76 20AATC6 20DATC6 20AAT76 20DAT76 30AATC6 30DATC6 44AATA6 44AATB6 55AATA6 55AATB6
Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LR 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 96 (3.78) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 96 (3.78) Q
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) QK 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 80 (3.15) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 56 (2.2) 80 (3.15) TapDepth M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 56.6 (125) 66 (146) 66 (146) 71 (157) 75 (165) 75 (165) 87 (192) 88 (194)
70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 90 (3.54)
Model SGMGH13AAT76 13DAT76 20AATC6 20DATC6 20AAT76 20DAT76 30AATC6 30DATC6 44AATA6 44AATB6 55AATA6 55AATB6 Flange Face Dimensions LB 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020
0.122 0.0048

0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020

0.122 0.0048
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020

0.122 0.0048
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020

0.122 0.137 0.122 0.122 0.122 0.0048 0.0054 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020
0.0020 200 0.050 7.87
3-119
INFO
(3) Large Oil Lubricating Type

L 47 LL LM R LR LG LE Sh6 QK Q Hydrant
A
Oil scavenging plug T
Shaft End Tap Depth (See the following table.) U
KL1 88(3.46)
LBf8
KB1 KB2
N-LZ Mounting holes
Oil scavenging plug
W
L C
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH30AAT76 30DAT76 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/11 L LL LM KB1 KB2 KL1 R A Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 16300 (3670) 14600 (3290) 19000 (4280) 17200 (3870) 19000 (4280) 11700 (2640)
CHVJ-4160
687 192 145 77 22 140 495 228 (27.1) (7.56) (5.71) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (19.5) (8.98) 721 226 179 77 22 140 495 228 (28.4) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (19.5) (8.98) 785 226 179 77 22 140 559 243 (30.9) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (22.0) (9.57) 260 213 86 22 150 593 243 853 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 853 260 213 86 22 150 593 243 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 863 334 287 86 22 150 529 228 (34.0) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (20.8) (8.98)
44AATC6 CHVJ-4160 44AAT76 CHVJ-4170
55AATC6 CHVJ-4170 55AAT76 75AATB6 CHVJ-4175 CHVJ-4160
3-120
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGHGear Model Gear Ratio 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 L LL LM KB1 KB2 KL1 R A Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 17200 (3870) 25600 (5760) 13800 (3110) 23000 (5180) 35800 (8060)
75AATC6 CHVJ-4175 75AAT76 CHVJ-4180
927 334 287 86 22 150 593 243 (36.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 977 334 287 86 22 150 643 258 (38.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (0.87) (5.91) (25.3) (10.2) 934 338 291 87 21 168 596 243 (36.8) (13.3) (11.5) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (23.5) (9.57) 984 338 291 87 21 168 646 258 (38.7) (13.3) (11.5) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (25.4) (10.2) 1077 338 291 87 21 168 739 285 (42.4) (13.3) (11.5) (3.43) (0.83) (6.61) (29.1) (11.2) Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) N LZ Q QK S T U W
1AAATB6 CHVJ-4170 1AAATC6 CHVJ-4185 1AAAT76 CHVJ-4190
Model SGMGH30AAT76 30DAT76 44AATC6 44AAT76 55AATC6 55AAT76 75AATB6 75AATC6 75AAT76 1AAATB6 1AAATC 6 1AAAT76
Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB LC LE LG LR
Tap Depth M10 18 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24 M12 24 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24 M12 24 M12 24 M20 34
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 121 (267) 126 (278) 176 (388) 191 (421) 191 (421) 150 (331) 201 (443) 232 (511) 230.5 (508) 263.5 (580.9) 342.5 (755)
310 270 340 4 20 89 6 11 90 80 60 11 7 18 (12.2) (10.6) (13.4) (0.16) (0.79) (3.50) (0.24) (0.43) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 310 270 340 4 20 89 6 11 90 80 60 11 7 18 (12.2) (10.6) (13.4) (0.16) (0.79) (3.50) (0.24) (0.43) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 360 316 400 5 22 94 8 14 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (14.2) (12.4) (15.7) (0.20) (0.87) (3.70) (0.31) (0.55) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 360 316 400 5 22 94 8 14 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (14.2) (12.4) (15.7) (0.20) (0.87) (3.70) (0.31) (0.55) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 360 316 400 5 22 94 8 14 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (14.2) (12.4) (15.7) (0.20) (0.87) (3.70) (0.31) (0.55) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 310 270 340 4 20 89 6 11 90 80 60 11 7 18 (12.2) (10.6) (13.4) (0.16) (0.79) (3.50) (0.24) (0.43) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 360 316 400 5 22 94 8 14 90 80 70 12 (14.2) (12.4) (15.7) (0.20) (0.87) (3.70) (0.31) (0.55) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) 7.5 (0.3) 20 (0.79)
390 345 430 5 22 110 8 18 110 100 80 14 9 22 (15.4) (13.6) (16.9) (0.20) (0.87) (4.33) (0.31) (0.71) (4.33) (3.94) (3.15) (0.55) (0.35) (0.87) 360 316 400 5 22 94 8 14 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (14.2) (12.4) (15.7) (0.20) (0.87) (3.70) (0.31) (0.55) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 390 345 430 5 22 110 8 18 110 100 80 14 9 22 (15.4) (13.6) (16.9) (0.20) (0.87) (4.33) (0.31) (0.71) (4.33) (3.94) (3.15) (0.55) (0.35) (0.87) 450 400 490 6 30 145 12 18 135 125 95 14 9 25 (17.7) (15.7) (19.3) (0.24) (1.18) (5.71) (0.47) (0.71) (5.31) (4.92) (3.74) (0.55) (0.35) (0.98)
3-121
Model SGMGH30AAT76 30DAT76 44AATC6 44AAT76 55AATC6 55AAT76 75AATB6 75AATC6 75AAT76 1AAATB6 1AAATC6 1AAAT76 Flange Face Dimensions LB 270 0.056 10.6 0.0022
0.137 0.137 0.151 0.151 0.151 0.137 0.151 0.151 0.151 0.151 0.151 0.0054 0.0054 0.0059 0.0059 0.0059 0.0054 0.0059 0.0059 0.0059 0.0059 0.0059
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 60 60 70 70 70 60 70 80 70 80 95

0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.74 0 0.022 0.0009
270 0.056 10.6 0.0022

0.0024 316 0.062 12.4
316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 270 0.056 10.6 0.0020
0.0024 316 0.062 12.4
345 0.062 13.6 0.0024 316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 345 0.062 13.6 0.0024 400 0.062 15.7 0.0024
INFO
3-122
3.15.6 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
(1) Grease Lubricating Type for Small
L LL 46(1.81) LM R Sh6 12(0.47) 100(3.94) 3(0.12) 140( 5.51)
0) 6.3 0( 6 1 185 ) .28 ( 7
Applied Specifications of Shaft-end Tap

Q Shaft End 8(0.31) 10(0.39) Frame No. 5(0.20) S d-tapL
130h7
Q 47(1.85) 109(4.29) 88(3.46)
Dia.S
Length Q d L mm
ANFJ-L20 35 (1.38) 55 (2.17) M8 16 ANFJ-L30 50 (1.97) 75 (2.95) M10 20 ANFJ-L40 60 (2.36) 90 (3.54) M12 24
1 (0.04) 73(2.87) 4-12 Mounting holes
21(0.83)
Detailed Dimensions of IMT Gears

Sh6 45(1.77) 91(3.58) 94(3.70) LBh7 140( 5.51) Sh6 70(2.76) 130(5.12) 135(5.31) LBh7
3
ANFJ-L30
184(7.24) 190(7.48) 245(9.65) 190(7.48)
ANFJ-L20
132(5.20) 126(4.96) 132(5.20)
(Motor)
(Motor)
R3 44 (1.73) A
17(0.67) 12(0.47) 3(0.12) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 6 (0.24) 18 (0.71) 47 (1.85)
55(2.17) 2(0.08) 20(0.79) 20(0.79) Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 130 (5.12) 35 (1.38)
52 (2.05) A
R3
75 (2.95) 2 (0.08) 25 (0.98) 33 (1.30) Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 190 (7.48) 52 (1.97)
23 (0.91) 15 (0.59) 5 (0.20) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 11 (0.43) 38 (1.50) 52 (2.05)
1/20, 1/29 39 (1.54)
1/20, 1/29 46 (1.81)
240(9.45)
234(9.21) 240(9.45) 310(12.2)
(Motor)
60 (2.36)
R3
A 90(3.54) 2(0.08) 25(0.98) 38(1.50) Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 240 (9.45) 60 (2.36)
27(1.06) 18(0.71) 5(0.20) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 16 (0.63) 48 (1.89) 58 (2.28)
1/20, 1/29 55 (2.17)
90(3.54) 182(7.17) 186(7.32) LBh7
ANFJ-L40
Sh6
3-123
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.6 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
Flange Face Dimensions LB 130 190 240
0 5.12 0 0.040 0.0016 0 7.48 0 0.046 0.0018 0 9.45 0 0.046 0.0018
IMT Gear ANFJ-L20 ANFJ-L30 ANFJ-L40
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 35 50 60

0 1.38 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH05AAL14 05DAL14 05AAL24 05DAL24 09AAL14 09DAL14 09AAL24 09DAL24 Lubrication Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease. ANFJ-L20 1/5 1/9 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 L LL LM R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 833 (187) 980 (221) 833 (187) 980 (221) Approx. Mass kg (lb) 14 (30.9) 14 (30.9) 16 (35.3) 16 (35.3)
394 138 92 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (10.1) 406 138 92 268 (16.0) (5.43) (3.62) (10.6) 417 161 115 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (10.1) 429 161 115 268 (16.9) (6.34) (4.53) (10.6)
INFO
(2) Large Grease Lubricating Type

L LL LT LM R LG LR 5 Q Sh6 QK KL1 88(3.46)
L
LBh7
Shaft End T
L
KB1 KB2 1 6-LZ
3-124
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH05AAL54 05DAL54 05AAL74 05DAL74 05AAL84 05DAL84 09AAL54 09DAL54 09AAL74 09DAL74 09AAL84 09DAL84 13AAL14 13DAL14 13AAL24 13DAL24 13AAL54 13DAL54 13AAL74 13DAL74 13AAL84 13DAL84 20AAL14 20DAL14 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24 30AAL54 30DAL54 44AAL14 44AAL24 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L30 1/45 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L40 1/45 1/5 ANFJ-L30 1/9 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L40 1/45 1/5 ANFJ-L30 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/5 ANFJ-L40 1/9 1/20 1/5 1/9 L LB LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2650 (596) 2940 (662) 3430 (772) 2650 (596) 2940 (662) 8040 (1810) 1670 (376) 1960 (441) 2650 (596) 6860 (1540) 8040 (1810) 1670 (376) 1960 (441) 6080 (1370) 6860 (1540) 3820 (860) 4700 (1060) 6080 (1370) 3820 (860) 4700 (1060)
491 190 138 92 140 46 73 21 109 353 (19.3) (7.48) (5.43) (3.62) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 491 190 138 92 140 46 73 21 109 353 (19.3) (7.48) (5.43) (3.62) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 363 501 190 138 92 140 46 73 21 109 (19.7) (7.48) (5.43) (3.62) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (14.3) 514 190 161 115 140 46 73 21 109 353 (20.2) (7.48) (6.34) (4.53) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 514 190 161 115 140 46 73 21 109 353 (20.2) (7.48) (6.34) (4.53) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 565 240 161 115 160 46 73 21 109 404 (22.2) (9.45) (6.34) (4.53) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.9) 507 190 185 139 140 46 73 21 109 322 (20.0) (7.48) (7.28) (5.47) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (12.7) 534 190 185 139 140 46 73 21 109 349 (21.0) (7.48) (7.28) (5.47) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.7) 538 190 185 139 140 46 73 21 109 353 (21.2) (7.48) (7.28) (5.47) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 579 240 185 139 160 46 73 21 109 394 (22.8) (9.45) (7.28) (5.47) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.5) 589 240 185 139 160 46 73 21 109 404 (23.2) (9.45) (7.28) (5.47) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.9) 509 190 166 119 140 47 77 22 140 343 (20.0) (7.48) (6.54) (4.69) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (13.5) 536 190 166 119 140 47 77 22 140 370 (21.1) (7.48) (6.54) (4.69) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 581 240 166 119 160 47 77 22 140 415 (22.9) (9.45) (6.54) (4.69) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 581 240 166 119 160 47 77 22 140 415 (22.9) (9.45) (6.54) (4.69) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 575 240 192 145 160 47 77 22 140 383 (22.6) (9.45) (7.56) (5.71) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (15.1) 607 240 192 145 160 47 77 22 140 415 (23.9) (9.45) (7.56) (5.71) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 607 240 192 145 160 47 77 22 140 415 (23.9) (9.45) (7.56) (5.71) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 609 240 226 179 160 47 77 22 140 383 (24.0) (9.45) (8.90) (7.05) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (15.1) 641 240 226 179 160 47 77 22 140 415 (25.2) (9.45) (8.90) (7.05) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3)
3-125
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.15.6 SGMGH Servomotors (1500min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
Model SGMGH05AAL54 05DAL54 05AAL74 05DAL74 05AAL84 05DAL84 09AAL54 09DAL54 09AAL74 09DAL74 09AAL84 09DAL84 13AAL14 13DAL14 13AAL24 13DAL24 13AAL54 13DAL54 13AAL74 13DAL74 13AAL84 13DAL84 20AAL14 20DAL14 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24 30AAL54 30DAL54 44AAL14 44AAL24
Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/5 1/9
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB LC LG LZ
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) QK S T U
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 31 (68.3) 31 (68.3) 31 (68.3) 33 (72.8) 33 (72.8) 53 (117) 28 (61.7) 35 (77.2) 35 (77.2) 55 (121) 55 (121) 32 (70.5) 39 (86.0) 39 (86.0) 39 (86.0) 53 (117) 63 (139) 63 (139) 58 (128) 68 (150)
220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 18 14 280 240 310 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71)
INFO
Lubrication Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease.
3-126

3.16.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
L LL LT LM LG S 100( 3.94) KL1 88(3.46) LR LE (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) LB LC Shaft End SGMGH-03A B to 09A B LR LE LF1 S1 S
L
SGMGH-12A B to 55A B LR LE LF2 LJ1 S1 LF1 S LJ2 LJ1

1
LA
KB1 KB2
(0.0008) 0.02 0.04 (0.0016) For 40A B (For 55A B only)
IE
4-LZ Mounting holes
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHShaft-end Dimensions L LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 IE KL1

19
S
0 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0 0.013 0.87 0 0.0005 22 35 19 0
S1
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 5.5 (12.1) 7.6 (16.8) 9.6 (21.2) 14 (30.9) 18 (39.7) 23 (50.7) 30 (66.1) 40 (88.2)
196 138 92 58 46 65 117 03AB21 (7.72) (5.43) (3.62) (2.28) (1.81) (2.56) (4.61) 219 161 115 58 46 88 140 06AB21 (8.62) (6.34) (4.53) (2.28) (1.81) (3.46) (5.51) 243 185 139 58 46 112 164 09AB21 (9.57) (7.28) (5.47) (2.28) (1.81) (4.41) (6.46) 245 166 119 79 47 89 145 12AB21 (9.65) (6.54) (4.69) (3.11) (1.85) (3.50) (5.71) 271 192 145 79 47 115 170 20AB21 (10.7) (7.56) (5.71) (3.11) (1.85) (4.53) (6.69) 305 226 179 79 47 149 204 (12.0) (8.90) (7.05) (3.11) (1.85) (5.87) (8.03)
109 (4.29) 109 (4.29) 109 (4.29) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51)
30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 30 40 (1.18) (1.57) 45 76 (1.77) (2.99) 45 76
+ 0.01
0
0.0004 1.38+ 0 35
+ 0.01
0
1.38 35
+ 0.0004 (1.77) (2.99)

0 0
+ 0.01
30AB21
45
76
1.38 42
+ 0.0004 (1.77) (2.99)

0 0
373 260 213 113 47 174 238 123 150 40AB21 (14.7) (10.2) (8.39) (4.45) (1.85) (6.85) (9.37) (4.84) (5.91) 447 334 287 113 47 248 312 123 150 55AB21 (17.6) (13.1) (11.3) (4.45) (1.85) (9.76) (12.3) (4.84) (5.91)
0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 0.016 1.65 0 0.0006 42 0
45 110 (1.77) (4.33) 45 110 (1.77) (4.33)
3-127
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.1 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and Brakes
Model SGMGH-
LA 145 (5.71)
LB
0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 110 0 110 0 110 0
LC
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LE LF1 LF2 LG
LH
LJ1
LJ2
LZ 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 98 (22) 98 (22) 343 (77) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110) 588 (132) 588 (132)
03AB21
130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24)
45 12 165 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77)
145 06AB21 (5.71) 145 09AB21 (5.71) 200 (7.87)
12AB21
62 13.5 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53)
200 20AB21 (7.87) 200 30AB21 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
40AB21
200 55AB21 (7.87)


D A
Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (Purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
A B C D
With an Absolute Encoder A B C D E F G H J DATA+ DATA 0V +5VDC FG (Frame ground) K L M N P R S T BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A B C D E F G H J DATA+ DATA 0V +5VDC FG (Frame ground) K L M N P R S T
3-128
3.16.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes
(1) 300W to 3.0kW
L LL 48(1.89) LM LE LG 100( 3.94) KL1 88(3.46) S LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) LC Shaft End SGMGH-03A B to 09A B SGMGH-12A B to 30A B LR LR LE LF2 S LJ1 S1 LF1 S LJ2 LJ1
R 1
LA
LF1 LB
L
LE
A KB1 KB2
4-LZ Mounting holes 0.02 (0.0008)
S1
R 1
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHShaft-end Dimensions L LL LM LR KB1 KB2 KL1

19
S
0 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.75 0 0.0005 0.013 0.87 0 0.0005 35 22 0 19 0
S1 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77) 45 (1.77)
Q 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 7.5 (16.5) 9.6 (21.2) 12 (26.5) 19 (41.9) 23.5 (51.8) 28.5 (62.8)
03AB2
234 (9.21) 257 (10.1) 281 (11.1) 296 (11.7) 322 (12.7) 356 (14.0)
176 (6.93) 199 (7.83) 223 (8.78) 217 (8.54) 243 (9.57) 277 (10.9)
130 (5.12) 153 (6.02) 177 (6.97) 169 (6.65) 195 (7.68) 229 (9.02)
58 (2.28) 58 (2.28) 58 (2.28) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11)
56 (2.20) 79 (3.11) 103 (4.06) 79 (3.11) 105 (4.13) 139 (5.47)
154 (6.06) 177 (6.97) 201 (7.91) 195 (7.68) 221 (8.70) 255 (10.0)
120 (4.72) 120 (4.72) 120 (4.72) 146 (5.75) 146 (5.75) 146 (5.75)
06AB2
09AB2
+ 0.01
0
12AB2
0.0004 1.38+ 0 35
+ 0.01
0 0 0
20AB2
1.38 35
+ 0.0004 + 0.01
30AB2
0.0004 1.38+ 0
Model SGMGH-
LA 145 (5.71)
LB
0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0
LC
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LE LF1 LF2 LG -
LH
LJ1
LJ2 -
LZ 9 (0.35)
03AB2
130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24)
12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77)
3-129
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.2 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) Without Gears and With Brakes
(Contd) Model SGMGHFlange Face Dimensions mm (in) LE LF1 LF2 LG Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 490 (110) 686 (154) 1180 (265) 1470 (331) 1470 (331) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 98 (22) 343 (77) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110)
LA 145 (5.71)
LB
0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 0.025 4.50 0 0.0010 114.3 0 114.3 0 114.3 0 110 0 110 0
LC
LH
LJ1
LJ2 -
LZ 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35)
06AB2
130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) 130 6 6 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24)
12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77) 12 165 45 (0.47) (6.50) (1.77)
145 09AB2 (5.71) 200 12AB2 (7.87) 200 20AB2 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53) 180 3.2 3 0.5 18 230 76 62 13.5 (7.09) (0.13) (0.12) (0.02) (0.71) (9.06) (2.99) (2.44) (0.53)
30AB2


A G C B
Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (Purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
F E D
A B C D
E Brake terminal F Brake terminal G
K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A K L B DATA+ M C N D DATA E P F R 0V G S H T +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
3-130
(2) 4.0 kW to 5.5 kW

L LL 48(1.89) LM 18(0.71) 113(4.45)
0 0 42 -0.016 (1.65 -0.0006 )
3.2(0.13)
(0.0016) 0.04 A
0 -0.0010
Shaft End 180( 7.09)

0 20 .87) (7 0.5 (0.02)
100( 3.94) 150(5.91) 123(4.84) 88(3.46)
0.04 A 23 0 (0.0016)(9.0 6)
113(4.45) 3.2(0.13)
0 (1.65 -0.0006 ) 42 -0.016 62(2.44) 76(2.99)
(4.50
3(0.12)
123 (4.84)
KB1 KB3 KB2
114.3
4-13.5 Mounting holes 0.04 (0.0016)
45(1.77)
0 -0.025
110(4.33)
Model SGMGH40AB2
LL
LM
KB1
KB2
KB3
424 311 263 174 289 231 (16.7) (12.2) (10.4) (6.85) (11.4) (9.09)
498 385 337 248 363 305 55AB2 (19.6) (15.2) (13.3) (9.76) (14.3) (12.0)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 35 (77.2) 45.5 (100)
Units: mm (in) Allowable Thrust Load N (lbf) 588 (132)
R 1

L K J M A B C N T P D S R E H G F
Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (Purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cable clamp: MS3057-12A With an Incremental Encoder A K B L DATA+ C M D N DATA E P F R 0V G S T H +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+

D A

A C B
A B C D
3-131
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type)
3.16.3 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Foot-mounted Type)
L LL LT KB2 KB1 KL1 88(3.46) Q QK Sh6 A Shaft End Tap Depth C T W LM R B
F N
XC XR
4-Z Mounting holes
E M
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH03ABSA6 03ABSB6 03ABSC6 03ABS76 06ABSA6 06ABSB6 06ABSC6 06ABS76 09ABSA6 09ABSB6 09ABSC6 09ABS76 12ABSA6 12ABSB6 20ABSA6 Gear Model CNHX4095 CNHX4095 CNHX4105 CNHX4105 CNHX4105 CNHX4105 CNHX4115 CNHX4115 CNHX4105 CNHX4105 CNHX4115 CNHX4115 CNHX4115 CNHX4115 CNHX4115 Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/6 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B C Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2360 (531) 2890 (650) 5390 (1210) 5390 (1210) 3720 (837) 4550 (1020) 7070 (1590) 7860 (1770) 3720 (837) 4550 (1020) 7070 (1590) 7860 (1770) 4660 (1050) 5700 (1280) 4660 (1050)
380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 209 152 100 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 209 152 100 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 209 152 100 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) (8.23) (5.98) (3.94) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 257 204 120 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) (10.1) (8.03) (4.72) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72)
3-132
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMGH20ABSB6 Gear Model CNHX4115 Gear Ratio 1/11 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R A B C Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 5700 (1280)
503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 260 204 120 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) (10.2) (8.03) (4.72)
0 -0.5
.
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) XC Z Q QK S T U W Tap Depth M819 M819 M819 M819 M819 M819 M1022 M1022 M819 M819 M1022 M1022 M1022 M1022 M1022 M1022 Approx. Mass kg (lb) 20.5 (45.2) 20.5 (45.2) 22.5 (49.6) 22.5 (49.6) 24.6 (54.2) 24.6 (54.2) 34.6 (76.3) 34.6 (76.3) 26.6 (58.6) 26.6 (58.6) 36.6 (80.7) 36.6 (80.7) 43 (94.8) 43 (94.8) 47 (104) 47 (104)
Model SGMGH03ABSA6 03ABSB6 03ABSC6 03ABS76 06ABSA6 06ABSB6 06ABSC6 06ABS76 09ABSA6 09ABSB6 09ABSC6 09ABS76 12ABSA6 12ABSB6 20ABSA6 20ABSB6
Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11
Foot-mounted Dimensions mm (in) E F G K M N XR
75 90 12 40 180 130 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.12) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 130 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.12) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 75 90 12 40 180 135 45 60 11 35 32 28 7 4 8 (2.95) (3.54) (0.47) (1.57) (7.09) (5.31) (1.77) (2.36) (0.43) (1.38) (1.26) (1.10) (0.28) (0.16) (0.31) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39) 95 115 15 55 230 155 62 82 14 55 50 38 8 5 10 (3.74) (4.53) (0.59) (2.17) (9.06) (6.10) (2.44) (3.23) (0.55) (2.17) (1.97) (1.50) (0.31) (0.20) (0.39)
3-133
Model SGMGH03ABSA6 03ABSB6 03ABSC6 03ABS76 06ABSA6 06ABSB6 06ABSC6 06ABS76 09ABSA6 09ABSB6 09ABSC6 09ABS76 12ABSA6 12ABSB6 20ABSA6 20ABSB6 Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 28 28 28 28 28 28 38 38 28 28 38 38 38 38 38 38
0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
INFO
(2) Oil Lubricating Type

LL 47(1.85) LM 22(0.87) KB1 KL1 88(3.46) L R Oil supply plug Sh6 Q QK B
Hydrant Shaft End Oil supply plug Tap Depth T W
F N
XC XR
4-Z Mounting holes
3-134
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGHGear Model Gear Ratio 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 L LL LM KB1 KL1 R A B C Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 10200 (2290) 11300 (2550) 13000 (2930) 18500 (4170) 6740 (1520) 8240 (1850) 16700 (3770) 21800 (4900) 6740 (1520) 10700 (2420) 19600 (4400) 21800 (4900) 13500 (3030) 19600 (4400) 29200 (6570)
12ABSC6 CHHX-4130 12ABS76 CHHX-4135
536 166 119 77 140 370 300 246 150 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (3.03) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 536 166 119 77 140 370 300 246 150 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (3.03) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 582 192 145 77 140 390 300 246 150 (22.9) (7.56) (5.71) (3.03) (5.51) (15.4) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 687 192 145 77 140 495 319 318 160 (27.0) (7.56) (5.71) (3.03) (5.51) (19.5) (12.6) (12.5) (6.30) 596 226 179 77 140 370 300 246 150 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 596 226 179 77 140 370 300 246 150 (23.5) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (14.6) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 721 226 179 77 140 495 319 318 160 (28.4) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (19.5) (12.6) (12.5) (6.30) 785 226 179 77 140 559 382 363 200 (30.9) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (22.0) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 664 260 213 86 150 404 300 246 150 (26.1) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (15.9) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 684 260 213 86 150 424 300 246 150 (26.9) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (16.7) (11.8) (9.69) (5.91) 853 260 213 86 150 593 382 363 200 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 853 260 213 86 150 593 382 363 200 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 863 334 287 86 150 529 319 318 160 (34.0) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (20.8) (12.6) (12.5) (6.30) 927 334 287 86 150 593 382 363 200 (36.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (15.0) (14.3) (7.87) 977 334 287 86 150 643 417 393 220 (38.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (25.3) (16.4) (15.5) (8.66)
20ABSC6 CHHX-4145 20ABS76 CHHJ-4160
30ABSA6 CHHX-4130 30ABSB6 CHHX-4135 30ABSC6 CHHJ-4160 30ABS76 CHHJ-4170
40ABSA6 CHHX-4135 40ABSB6 CHHX-4145 40ABSC6 CHHJ-4170 40ABS76 55ABSB6 CHHJ-4175 CHHJ-4160
55ABSC6 CHHJ-4175 55ABS76 CHHJ-4185
Model SGMGH12ABSC6 12ABS76 20ABSC6 20ABS76 30ABSA6
Gear Ratio 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/6
Dimensions with Feet mm (in) E F G K M N XR XC Z Q QK
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S T U W Tap Depth M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18 M10 18
Approx . Mass kg (lb) 67 (148) 67 (148) 72 (159) 126 (278) 76 (168)
145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 95 120 18 90 80 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (3.74) (4.72) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55)
3-135
(Contd) Model SGMGH30ABSB6 30ABSC6 30ABS76 40ABSA6 40ABSB6 40ABSC6 40ABS76 55ABSB6 55ABSC6 55ABS76 Gear Ratio 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 Dimensions with Feet mm (in) E F G K M N XR XC Z Q QK Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S T U W Tap Depth M10 18 M10 18 M12 24 M10 18 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24 M10 18 M12 24 M12 24 Approx . Mass kg (lb) 76 (168) 131 (289) 176 (388) 88 (194) 89 (196) 191 (421) 191 (421) 155 (342) 201 (443) 245 (540)
145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 145 145 22 65 330 195 75 100 18 70 56 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (2.95) (3.94) (0.71) (2.76) (2.20) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 145 145 22 65 330 195 95 120 18 90 80 50 9 5.5 14 (5.71) (5.71) (0.87) (2.56) (13.0) (7.68) (3.74) (4.72) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 185 150 25 75 410 238 95 139 18 90 80 60 11 7 18 (7.28) (5.91) (0.98) (2.95) (16.1) (9.37) (3.74) (5.47) (0.71) (3.54) (3.15) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 190 275 30 80 430 335 95 125 22 90 80 70 12 7.5 20 (7.48) (10.8) (1.18) (3.15) (16.9) (13.2) (3.74) (4.92) (0.87) (3.54) (3.15) (2.76) (0.47) (0.30) (0.79) 210 320 30 85 470 380 115 145 22 110 100 80 14 9 22 (8.27) (12.6) (1.18) (3.35) (18.5) (15.0) (4.53) (5.71) (0.87) (4.33) (3.94) (3.15) (0.55) (0.35) (0.87)
Model SGMGH12ABSC6 12ABS76 20ABSC6 20ABS76 30ABSA6 30ABSB6 30ABSC6 30ABS76 40ABSA6 40ABSB6 40ABSC6 40ABS76 Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 50 50 50 60 50 50 60 70 50 50 70 70
0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007
3-136
Model SGMGH55ABSB6 55ABSC6 55ABS76
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions S 60 70 80

0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007
INFO
3.16.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
LT LL LM L R LR LG LE Q LBf8 QK KL1 88(3.46) 4 Mounting holes 6 Mounting holes Shaft End
LA LA
T W
Tap Depth (See the following table.) U
Sh6
L C
N-11 Mounting holes
L C
KB1 KB2
N-11 Mounting holes
3-137
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.4 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Standard Backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH03ABTA6 03ABTB6 03ABTC6 03ABT76 06ABTA6 06ABTB6 06ABTC6 06ABT76 09ABTA6 09ABTB6 09ABTC6 09ABT76 12ABTA6 12ABTB6 20ABTA6 20ABTB6 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/21 1/29 1/6 1/11 1/6 1/11 L LL LM LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2360 (531) 2890 (650) 5390 (1210) 5390 (1210) 3720 (837) 4550 (1020) 7070 (1590) 7860 (1770) 3720 (837) 4550 (1020) 7070 (1590) 7860 (1770) 4660 (1050) 5700 (1280) 4660 (1050) 5700 (1280)
CNVX-4095 CNVX-4095 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4105 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115 CNVX-4115
380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) 380 138 92 46 73 21 109 242 (15.0) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (9.53) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 394 138 92 46 73 21 109 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 417 161 115 46 73 21 109 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 449 161 115 46 73 21 109 288 (17.7) (6.34) (4.53) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 441 185 139 46 73 21 109 256 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (10.1) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 473 185 139 46 73 21 109 288 (18.6) (7.28) (5.47) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (11.3) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 477 166 119 47 77 22 140 311 (18.8) (6.54) (4.69) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2) 503 192 145 47 77 22 140 311 (19.8) (7.56) (5.71) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (12.2)
Model SGMGH03ABTA6
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) LC 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) LE 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) LG 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) LR 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) N 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) Q 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) QK 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26)
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) T 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) U 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) W 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) Tap Depth M8 19 M8 19 M8 19 M8 19
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 18.5 (40.8) 18.5 (40.8) 20.5 (45.2) 20.5 (45.2)
134 (5.28) 134 03ABTB6 (5.28) 134 03ABTC6 (5.28) 134 03ABT76 (5.28)
3-138
(Contd) Model SGMGH06ABTA6 Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) LC 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 160 (6.30) 160 (6.30) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) LE 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) LG 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) 13 (0.51) LR 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 48 (1.89) 48 (1.89) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) 69 (2.72) N 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) Q 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 35 (1.38) 35 (1.38) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) 55 (2.17) QK 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 32 (1.26) 32 (1.26) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) S 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 28 (1.10) 28 (1.10) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) 38 (1.50) T 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) U 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) W 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) 10 (0.39) Tap Depth M8 19 M8 19 M10 22 M10 22 M8 19 M8 19 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 M10 22 Approx. Mass kg (lb) 22.6 (49.8) 22.6 (49.8) 33.6 (74.1) 33.6 (74.1) 24.6 (54.2) 24.6 (54.2) 35.6 (78.5) 35.6 (78.5) 42 (92.6) 42 (92.6) 46 (101) 46 (101)
134 (5.28) 134 06ABTB6 (5.28) 180 06ABTC6 (7.09) 180 06ABT76 (7.09) 134 09ABTA6 (5.28) 134 09ABTB6 (5.28) 180 09ABTC6 (7.09) 180 09ABT76 (7.09) 180 12ABTA6 (7.09) 180 12ABTB6 (7.09) 180 20ABTA6 (7.09) 180 20ABTB6 (7.09)
Model SGMGH03ABTA6 03ABTB6 03ABTC6 03ABT76 06ABTA6 06ABTB6 06ABTC6 06ABT76 09ABTA6 09ABTB6 09ABTC6 Flange Face Dimensions LB 110 0.036 4.33 0.0014
0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.090 0.106 0.106 0.090 0.090 0.106 0.0035 0.0035 0.0035 0.0035 0.0035 0.0035 0.0042 0.0042 0.0035 0.0035 0.0042
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 28 28 28 28 28 28 38 38 28 28 38

0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.10 0 0.013 0.0005 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014 110 0.036 4.33 0.0014

0.0014 110 0.036 4.33
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014 110 0.036 4.33 0.0014 140 0.043 5.51 0.0017
0.0017 140 0.043 5.51
110 0.036 4.33 0.0014 110 0.036 4.33 0.0014 140 0.043 5.51 0.0017
3-139
Model SGMGH09ABT76 12ABTA6 12ABTB6 20ABTA6 20ABTB6 Lubrication
Flange Face Dimensions LB 140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.106 0.106 0.106 0.106 0.106 0.0042 0.0042 0.0042 0.0042 0.0042
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Shaft-end Dimensions S 38 38 38 38 38

0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.50 0 0.016 0.0006
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017

0.0017 140 0.043 5.51
140 0.043 5.51 0.0017 140 0.043 5.51 0.0017
INFO
Grease lubricating type (frame numbers: 4095 to 4115) Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease.
(2) Small Oil Lubricating Type

L LL 47(1.85) LM 15 (0.59) Q QK KL1 88(3.46) R S (50h6)
Hydrant LB (200f8)
2 3
0(
9 .
06
LR
209(8.23)
Shaft End Tap Depth 9(0.35) (See the following table.) 5.5(0.22)
KB1 22(0.87)
4 (0.16) 6-11 Mounting holes
Oil scavenging plug
14(0.55)
Oil scavenging plug

) 60 24 2 10. (
Units: mm (in) Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N 10200 (2290) 11300 (2550) 13000 (2930) 6740 (1520) 8240 (1850) 6740 (1520) 10700 (2420) Flange Face Dimensions LR 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 96 (3.78) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 76 (2.99) 96 (3.78) Shaft-end Dimensions Approx. Mass kg (lb) Tap Q QK Depth 70 56 66 M1018 (2.76) (2.20) (146) 70 56 M1018 (2.76) (2.20) 90 80 M1018 (3.54) (3.15) 70 56 M1018 (2.76) (2.20) 70 56 M1018 (2.76) (2.20) 70 56 M1018 (2.76) (2.20) 90 80 M1018 (3.54) (3.15) 66 (146) 71 (157) 75 (165) 75 (165) 87 (192) 88 (194)
Model SGMGH-
Gear Gear Model Ratio
LL
LM
KB1 KL1
12ABTC6 12ABT76 20ABTC6 30ABTA6 30ABTB6 40ABTA6 40ABTB6
CHVX1/21 4130 CHVX1/29 4135 CNVX1/21 4145 CHVX4130 1/6
536 (21.1) 536 (21.1) 582 (22.9) 596 (23.5) 596 (23.5) 664 (26.1) 684 (26.9)
166 (6.54) 166 (6.54) 192 (7.56) 226 (8.90) 226 (8.90) 260 (10.2) 260 (10.2)
119 (4.69) 119 (4.69) 145 (5.71) 179 (7.05) 179 (7.05) 213 (8.39) 213 (8.39)
77 (3.03) 77 (3.03) 77 (3.03) 77 (3.03) 77 (3.03) 86 (3.39) 86 (3.39)
140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 150 (5.91) 150 (5.91)
370 (14.6) 370 (14.6) 390 (15.4) 370 (14.6) 370 (14.6) 404 (15.9) 424 (16.7)
CHVX1/11 4135 CHVX4135 1/6
CHVX1/11 4145
3-140
Model SGMGH12ABTC6 12ABT76 20ABTC6 30ABTA6 30ABTB6 40ABTA6 40ABTB6 Flange Face Dimensions LB 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020
0.122 0.122 0.122 0.122 0.122 0.122 0.122 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048 0.0048 0.0020 200 0.050 7.87
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions S 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020 200 0.050 7.87 0.0020
0.0020 200 0.050 7.87
200 0.050 7.87 0.0020
INFO
(3) Large Oil Lubricating Type

L LL 47(1.85) LM R LG LR Hydrant QK Q KL1 88(3.46)
A
Oil scavenging plug
A
L
22.5
L
LBf8
Shaft End Tap Depth* T W U
Sh6
KB1 22(0.87)
N-LZ Mounting holes LE
Oil scavenging plug N-LZ Mounting holes 8 Mounting holes
L C
6 Mounting holes
* See the following table.
3-141
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH20ABT76 30ABTC6 30ABT76 40ABTC6 40ABT76 55ABTB6 55ABTC6 55ABT76 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29 L LL LM KB1 KL1 R A Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 18500 (4170) 16700 (3770) 21800 (4900) 19600 (4400) 21800 (4890) 13500 (3030) 19600 (4400) 29200 (6570)
CHVJ-4160 CHVJ-4160 CHVJ-4170 CHVJ-4170 CHVJ-4175 CHVJ-4160 CHVJ-4175 CHVJ-4185
687 192 145 77 140 495 228 (27.0) (7.56) (5.71) (3.03) (5.51) (19.5) (8.98) 721 226 179 77 140 495 228 (28.4) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (19.5) (8.98) 785 226 179 77 140 559 243 (30.9) (8.90) (7.05) (3.03) (5.51) (22.0) (9.57) 853 260 213 86 150 593 243 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 853 260 213 86 150 593 243 (33.6) (10.2) (8.39) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 863 334 287 86 150 529 228 (34.0) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (20.8) (8.98) 927 334 287 86 150 593 243 (36.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (23.3) (9.57) 977 334 287 86 150 643 258 (38.5) (13.1) (11.3) (3.39) (5.91) (25.3) (10.2)
Model SGMGH20ABT76 30ABTC6 30ABT76 40ABTC6 40ABT76 55ABTB6 55ABTC6 55ABT76
Gear Ratio 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/21 1/29 1/11 1/21 1/29
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA

310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 360 (14.2) 360 (14.2) 360 (14.2) 310 (12.2) 360 (14.2) 390 (15.4)
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) N

6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 6 (0.24) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31)
LB
270 (10.6) 270 (10.6) 316 (12.4) 316 (12.4) 316 (12.4) 270 (10.6) 316 (12.4) 345 (13.6)
LC
340 (13.4) 340 (13.4) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 340 (13.4) 400 (15.7) 430 (16.9)
LE
4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
LG
20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87) 20 (0.79) 22 (0.87) 22 (0.87)
LR
89 (3.50) 89 (3.50) 94 (3.70) 94 (3.70) 94 (3.70) 89 (3.50) 94 (3.70) 110 (4.33)
LZ
11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71)
Q
90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 110 (4.33)
QK
80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 100 (3.94)
S
60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 80 (3.15)
T
11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 11 (0.43) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55)
U
7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30) 7 (0.28) 7.5 (0.30) 9 (0.35)
W
18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 20 (0.79) 18 (0.71) 20 (0.79) 22 (0.87)
Tap Depth M1018 M1018 M1224 M1224 M1224 M1018 M1224 M1224
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 121 (267) 126 (278) 176 (388) 191 (421) 191 (421) 150 (331) 201 (443) 232 (511)
3-142
Model SGMGH20ABT76 30ABTC6 30ABT76 40ABTC6 40ABT76 55ABTB6 55ABTC6 55ABT76 Flange Face Dimensions LB 270 0.056 10.6 0.0022
0.137 0.137 0.151 0.151 0.151 0.137 0.151 0.151 0.0054 0.0054 0.0059 0.0059 0.0059 0.0054 0.0059 0.0059 0.0022 270 0.056 10.6

0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007 0 2.76 0 0.019 0.0007 3.15 0 0.019 0.0007 0
316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 316 0.062 12.4 0.0024
0.0022 270 0.056 10.6
316 0.062 12.4 0.0024 345 0.062 13.6 0.0024
INFO
3-143
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
3.16.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
(1) Small Grease Lubricating Type
L LL 46(1.81) LM R 100(3.94) 55 (2.17) 47(1.85) 130h7 109(4.29) 88(3.46) 35h6 140( 5.51)
Applied Specifications for Shaft-end Tap

) .30 ( 6 0 6 1 185 ) .28 ( 7
Q Shaft End 8(0.31) 10(0.39) S d-tapL
Frame No. Dia.S 5(0.20)
Length Q d L mm
R1 3(0.12) 73(2.87) 4-12 Mounting holes
21(0.83)

45(1.77) 91(3.58) 94(3.70) LBh7 140( 5.51)
(Motor)
(Motor)
R3 44 (1.73) A
17(0.67) 12(0.47) 3(0.12) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45
55(2.17) 2(0.08) 20(0.79) 20(0.79) A 6 (0.24) 18 (0.71) 47 (1.85) 90(3.54) 182(7.17) 186(7.32) LBh7
52 (2.05) A
R3
75(2.95) 2(0.078) 25(0.98) 33(1.30) A 11 (0.43) 38 (1.50) 46 (1.81) 52 (2.05)
Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 130 (5.12) 35 (1.38)
23(0.91) 15 (0.59) 5(0.20) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/20, 1/29 1/45
Flange LB Shaft End S 190 (7.48) 50 (1.97)
1/20, 1/29 39 (1.54)
ANFJ-L40
234(9.21) 240(9.45) 310(12.2)
240(9.45)
(Motor)
R3 60 (2.36) A
27(1.06) 18(0.71) 5(0.20) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 16 (0.63) 48 (1.89) 58 (2.28)
90(3.54) 2(0.08) 25(0.98) 38(1.50)
Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 60 (2.36)
240 (9.45)
1/20, 1/29 55 (2.17)
3-144
Sh6
70(2.76) 130(5.12) 135(5.31) LBh7 Units: mm (in)
ANFJ-L20
126(4.96) 132(5.20) 132(5.20)
ANFJ-L30
184(7.24) 190(7.48) 245(9.65) 190(7.48)
Sh6
Sh6
0 5.12 0 0.040 0.0016 0 7.48 0 0.046 0.0018 0 9.45 0 0.046 0.0018

0 1.38 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH03ABL14 03ABL24 03ABL54 ANFJ-L20 06ABL14 06ABL24 09ABL14 1/5 1/9 1/5 Gear Type Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/20 L LL LM R Approx. Mass kg (lb) 14 (30.9) 14 (30.9) 16 (35.3) 16 (35.3) 16 (35.3) 18 (39.7) Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 833 (187) 980 (221) 1270 (286) 833 (187) 980 (221) 833 (187)
394 138 92 256 (15.5) (5.43) (3.62) (10.1) 406 138 92 268 (16.0) (5.43) (3.62) (10.6) 425 138 92 287 (16.7) (5.43) (3.62) (11.3) 417 161 115 256 (16.4) (6.34) (4.53) (10.1) 429 161 115 268 (16.9) (6.34) (4.53) (10.6) 441 185 139 256 (17.4) (7.28) (5.47) (10.1)
INFO

L LL LT LM R Sh6 LG LR Q QK KL1 88(3.46) LBh7 Shaft End T
R1 KB1 KB2 5 (0.20) 6-LZ Mounting holes
Applied Specifications of Shaft-end Tap

Q S Frame No. ANFJ-L20 ANFJ-L30 ANFJ-L40 Dia.S Length Q d L mm 35 50 60 55 75 90 M8 16 M10 20 M12 24 d-tapL
3-145
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.16.5 SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
Units: mm (in) Model SGMGH03ABL74 03ABL84 ANFJ-L30 06ABL54 06ABL74 06ABL84 09ABL24 ANFJ-L30 09ABL54 09ABL74 ANFJ-L40 09ABL84 12ABL14 ANFJ-L30 12ABL24 12ABL54 12ABL74 12ABL84 20ABL14 ANFJ-L30 20ABL24 20ABL54 30ABL14 30ABL24 ANFJ-L40 1/9 1/20 1/5 1/9 ANFJ-L40 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/45 1/5 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L40 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/9 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/29 1/45 L LL LM LR LT KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2940 (662) 3430 (772) 2650 (596) 2940 (662) 8040 (1810) 1960 (441) 2650 (596) 6860 (1540) 8040 (1810) 1670 (376) 1960 (441) 6080 (1370) 6860 (1540) 8040 (1810) 1670 (376) 1960 (441) 6080 (1370) 3820 (860) 4700 (1060)
491 138 92 140 46 73 21 109 353 (19.3) (5.43) (3.62) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 501 138 92 140 46 73 21 109 363 (19.7) (5.43) (3.62) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (14.3) 514 161 115 140 46 73 21 109 353 (20.2) (6.34) (4.53) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 514 161 115 140 46 73 21 109 353 (20.2) (6.34) (4.53) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 565 161 115 160 46 73 21 109 404 (22.2) (6.34) (4.53) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.9) 534 185 139 140 46 73 21 109 349 (21.0) (7.28) (5.47) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.7) 538 185 139 140 46 73 21 109 353 (21.2) (7.28) (5.47) (5.51) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (13.9) 579 185 139 160 46 73 21 109 394 (22.8) (7.28) (5.47) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.5) 589 185 139 160 46 73 21 109 404 (23.2) (7.28) (5.47) (6.30) (1.81) (2.87) (0.83) (4.29) (15.9) 509 166 119 140 47 77 22 140 343 (20.0) (6.54) (4.69) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (13.5) 536 166 119 140 47 77 22 140 370 (21.1) (6.54) (4.69) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 581 166 119 160 47 77 22 140 415 (22.9) (6.54) (4.69) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 581 166 119 160 47 77 22 140 415 (22.9) (6.54) (4.69) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 591 166 119 160 47 77 22 140 425 (23.3) (6.54) (4.69) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.7) 535 192 145 140 47 77 22 140 343 (21.1) (7.56) (5.71) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (13.5) 562 192 145 140 47 77 22 140 370 (22.1) (7.56) (5.71) (5.51) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (14.6) 607 192 145 160 47 77 22 140 415 (23.9) (7.56) (5.71) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3) 609 226 179 160 47 77 22 140 383 (24.0) (8.90) (7.05) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (15.1) 641 226 179 160 47 77 22 140 415 (25.2) (8.90) (7.05) (6.30) (1.85) (3.03) (0.87) (5.51) (16.3)
Model SGMGH03ABL74 03ABL84
Gear Ratio 1/29 1/45
Flange Face Dimensions Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) mm (in) LA LB LC LG LZ Q QK S T U W 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 31 (68.3) 31 (68.3)
3-146
(Contd) Model SGMGH06ABL54 06ABL74 06ABL84 09ABL24 09ABL54 09ABL74 09ABL84 12ABL14 12ABL24 12ABL54 12ABL74 12ABL84 20ABL14 20ABL24 20ABL54 30ABL14 30ABL24 Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/5 1/9 Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB LC LG LZ Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) QK S T U Approx. Mass kg (lb) 33 (72.8) 33 (72.8) 53 (117) 35 (77.2) 35 (77.2) 55 (121) 55 (121) 32 (70.5) 39 (86.0) 59 (130) 59 (130) 59 (130) 36 (79.4) 43 (94.8) 63 (139) 58 (128) 68 (150)
220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 (8.66) 280 (11.0) 220 (8.66) 220 (8.66) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 220 (8.66) 220 (8.66) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 220 (8.66) 220 (8.66) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 190 (7.48) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 190 (7.48) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 190 (7.48) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 245 (9.65) 310 (12.2) 245 (9.65) 245 (9.65) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 245 (9.65) 245 (9.65) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 245 (9.65) 245 (9.65) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 75 (2.95) 90 (3.54) 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 65 (2.56) 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 5.5 (0.22) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71)
INFO
3-147
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.17.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears and Without Brakes
3.17 Dimensional Drawings of SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1)

3.17.1 SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1) Without Gears and Without Brakes
L LL LM LG 100( 3.94) KL1 88(3.46) LE S LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) LB Shaft End LC LE
LA
46(1.81)
LR
LF 45 (1.77)
LH
0.02 (0.0008) 4-LZ Mounting holes
30(1.18)
A KB1 KB2
Units: mm (in) Models SGMSH10AA21 10DA21 15AA21 15DA21 20AA21 20DA21 30AA21 30DA21 40AA21 40DA21 50AA21 50DA21 L 194 (7.64) LL 149 (5.87) LM 103 (4.06) LR 45 (1.77) KB1 76 (2.99) KB2 128 (5.04) KL1 96 (3.78) Shaft-end Dimensions S Q
0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 28 0 28 0 28 0 24 0 24 0 24 0
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 4.6 (10.1)
40 (1.57)
220 (8.66)
175 (6.89)
129 (5.08)
45 (1.77)
102 (4.02)
154 (6.06)
96 (3.78)
40 (1.57)
5.8 (12.8)
243 (9.57)
198 (7.80)
152 (5.98)
45 (1.77)
125 (4.92)
177 (6.97)
96 (3.78)
40 (1.57)
7.0 (15.4)
262 (10.3)
199 (7.83)
153 (6.02)
63 (2.48)
124 (4.88)
178 (7.01)
114 (4.49)
55 (2.17)
11 (24.3)
299 (11.8)
236 (9.29)
190 (7.48)
63 (2.48)
161 (6.34)
215 (8.46)
114 (4.49)
55 (2.17)
14 (30.9)
339 (13.3)
276 (10.9)
230 (9.06)
63 (2.48)
201 (7.91)
255 (10.0)
114 (4.49)
55 (2.17)
17 (37.5)
3-148
S
R 1
Model SGMSH10AA21 10DA21 15AA21 15DA21 20AA21 20DA21 30AA21 30DA21 40AA21 40DA21 50AA21 50DA21
LA 115 (4.53)
95
LB
0
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LC LE LF LG
LH
LZ
0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0 110 0 110 0
100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28)
115 (4.53)
95
100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28)
686 (154)
196 (44)
115 (4.53)
95
100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28)
686 (154)
196 (44)
145 (5.71)
130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.35)
980 (221)
392 (88)
145 (5.71)
130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.35)
1180 (265)
392 (88)
145 (5.71)
130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.28)
1180 (265)
392 (88)


D A
Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (Purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cale clamp: MS3057-12A
A B C D
With an Absolute Encoder A B DATA+ C D DATA E F 0V G H +5VDC J FG(Frame ground)
K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A K B L DATA+ C M D N DATA P E R F 0V G S T H +5VDC J FG(Frame ground)
3-149
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.17.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes
3.17.2 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 200-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes
L LL LM LG 100( 3.94) KL1 88(3.46) LE S LR (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) LB Shaft End LC LE
LA
46(1.81)
LR
LF 45 (1.77)
30
LH
(0.0008) 0.02 KB1 KB2 A 4-LZ Mounting holes
Model SGMSH-
LL
LM
LR
KB1
KB2
KL1
Units: mm (in) Shaft-end Dimensions Approx. Mass S Q kg (lb)

0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 28 0 28 0 28 0 24 0 24 0 24 0
238 193 147 45 67 171 102 10AA2B (9.37) (7.60) (5.79) (1.77) (2.64) (6.73) (4.02) 264 219 173 45 93 197 102 15AA2B (10.4) (8.62) (6.81) (1.77) (3.66) (7.76) (4.02) 287 242 20AA2B (11.3) (9.53) 196 (7.72) 45 116 220 102 (1.77) (4.57) (8.66) (4.02)
40
(1.57)
6.0 (13.2) 7.5 (16.5) 8.5 (18.7) 14 (30.9) 17 (37.5) 20 (44.1)
40
(1.57)
40
(1.57)
300 237 191 63 114 216 119 30AA2B (11.8) (9.33) (7.52) (2.48) (4.49) (8.50) (4.69) 337 274 228 63 151 253 119 40AA2B (13.3) (10.8) (8.98) (2.48) (5.94) (9.96) (4.69) 377 314 268 63 191 293 119 50AA2B (14.8) (12.4) (10.6) (2.48) (7.52) (11.5) (4.69)
55
(2.17)
55
(2.17)
55
(2.17)
3-150
S
R 1
Units: mm (in) Model SGMSHFlange Face Dimensions mm (in) LB LC LE LF LG

0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0 110 0 110 0
LA 115
(4.53)
LH 130
(5.12)
LZ 7
(0.28)
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 686 (154) 686 (154) 686 (154) 980 (221) 1180 (265) 1180 (265)
95
10AA2B
100
(3.94)
3
(0.12)
3
(0.12)
10
(0.39)
15AA2B
115
(4.53)
95
100
(3.94)
3
(0.12)
3
(0.12)
10
(0.39)
130
(5.12)
7
(0.28)
20AA2B
115
(4.53)
95
100
(3.94)
3
(0.12)
3
(0.12)
10
(0.39)
130
(5.12)
7
(0.28)
30AA2B
145
(5.71)
130
(5.12)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
165
(6.50)
9
(0.35)
40AA2B
145
(5.71)
130
(5.12)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
165
(6.50)
9
(0.35)
50AA2B
145
(5.71)
130
(5.12)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
165
(6.50)
9
(0.35)


A B C D Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame ground) E Brake terminal F Brake terminal G
F E D G
A B C
K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A K L B DATA+ C M D N DATA E P F R 0V G S H T +5VDC J FG(Frame ground)
3-151
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.17.3 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes
3.17.3 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) 400-V Specifications Without Gears With Brakes
L LL LM LR LG LE S (0.0016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.0016) LB
100 ( 3.94)
46 (1.81)
LC
LA
Shaft End LR LE
LF 45(1.77)
KL1 88 (3.46) KL3
A KB1 KB3 KB2
0.02
4-LZ Mounting holes
Units: mm (in) Model SGMSHShaft-end Dimensions L LL LM LR KB1 KB2 KB3 KL1 KL3
24
S
R 1
LH
30(1.18)
S
0 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 0.94 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 0.013 1.10 0 0.0005 28 0 28 0 28 0 24 0 24 0
Q 40 (1.57)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 6.0 (13.2)
10DA2
238 193 147 45 76 171 120 96 85 (9.37) (7.60) (5.79) (1.77) (2.99) (6.73) (4.72) (3.78) (3.35)
15DA2
264 219 173 45 102 197 146 96 85 (10.4) (8.62) (6.81) (1.77) (4.02) (7.76) (5.75) (3.78) (3.35)
40 (1.57)
7.5 (16.5)
287 20DA2 (11.3)
242 (9.53)
196 45 125 220 169 96 85 (7.72) (1.77) (4.92) (8.66) (6.65) (3.78) (3.35)
40 (1.57)
8.5 (18.7)
300 30DA2 (11.8)
237 191 63 124 216 170 114 98 (9.33) (7.52) (2.48) (4.88) (8.50) (6.69) (4.49) (3.86)
55 (2.17)
14 (30.9)
337 274 228 63 161 253 207 114 98 40DA2 (13.3) (10.8) (8.98) (2.48) (6.34) (9.96) (8.15) (4.49) (3.86)
55 (2.17)
17 (37.5)
377 314 268 63 201 50DA2 (14.8) (12.4) (10.6) (2.48) (7.91)
293 247 114 98 (11.5) (9.72) (4.49) (3.86)
55 (2.17)
20 (44.1)
3-152
Model SGMSH-
LA 115 (4.53)
95
LB
0
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LC LE LF LG
LH
LZ
Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 686 (154) 686 (154) 686 (154) 980 (221) 1180 (265) 1180 (265)
10DA2
0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 3.74 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 0.035 4.33 0 0.0014 110 0 110 0 110 0
100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28) 100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28) 100 3 3 10 130 7 (3.94) (0.12) (0.12) (0.39) (5.12) (0.28) 130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.35) 130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.35) 130 6 6 12 165 9 (5.12) (0.24) (0.24) (0.47) (6.50) (0.35)
115 15DA2 (4.53) 115 20DA2 (4.53) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71)
95
95
30DA2
40DA2
145 50DA2 (5.71)

Receptacle: MS3102A20-29P Applicable plug (Purchased by the customer) Plug: MS3108B20-29S Cale clamp: MS3057-12A With an Incremental Encoder A K B L DATA+ C M D N DATA E P F R 0V G S H T +5VDC J FG(Frame ground)
With an Absolute Encoder A B DATA+ C D DATA E F 0V G H +5VDC J FG(Frame ground)
K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+

D A

A C B
A B C D
3-153
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.17.4 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
3.17.4 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) With Low-backlash Gears and Without Brakes (Flange-mounted Type)
(1) Small Grease Lubricating Type
L 46 (1.81) LL LM R 12(0.47) 3(0.12) 100(3.94) Sh6 140( 5.51) Q
Applied Specifications for Shaft-end Tap

0) 6.3 0( 6 1 185 28) (7.
Q Shaft End 8 S d-tapL
47(1.85) 130h7 96(3.78) 88(3.46)
Frame No. Dia.S 10 5
Length Q d L mm
R1
73(2.87) 21(0.83)
4-12 Mounting holes

45(1.77) 91(3.58) 94(3.70) LBh7 140( 5.51) 70(2.76) 130(5.12) 135(5.31) LBh7
ANFJ-L20
132(5.20) 126(4.96) 132(5.20)
ANFJ-L30
184(7.24) 190(7.48) 245(9.65) 190(7.48)
Sh6
(Motor)
(Motor)
R3 44 (1.73) A
17(0.67) 12(0.47) 3(0.12) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 6 (0.24) 18 (0.71) 47 (1.85)
55 (2.17) 2(0.08) 20(0.79) 20(0.79) Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 130 (5.12) 35 (1.38)
52 (2.05) A
R3
75(2.95) 2(0.08) 25(0.98) 33(1.30)
23(0.91) 15(0.59) 5(0.20) Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45 A 11 (0.43) 38 (1.50) 52 (2.05)
Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S 50 (1.97)
190 (7.48)
1/20, 1/29 39 (1.54)
1/20, 1/29 46 (1.81)
234(9.21) 240(9.45) 310(12.2)
240(9.45)
(Motor)
60 (2.36)
R3
A 90(3.54)
27(1.06) 18(0.71)
Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/45
2(0.08) 25(0.98) 38(1.50) 5(0.20) Units: mm (in) Flange LB Shaft End S A 240 (9.45) 60 (2.36)
16 (0.63) 48 (1.89) 58 (2.28)
1/20, 1/29 55 (2.17)
3-154
90(3.54) 182(7.17) 186(7.32) LBh7
ANFJ-L40
Sh6
Sh6
0 5.12 0 0.040 0.0016 0 7.48 0 0.046 0.0018 0 9.45 0 0.046 0.0018

0 1.38 0 0.016 0.0006 0 1.97 0 0.016 0.0006 0 2.36 0 0.019 0.0007
Units: mm (in) Model SGMSH10AAL14 10DAL14 10AAL24 10DAL24 15AAL14 15DAL14 20AAL14 20DAL14 Lubrication Since grease has been filled prior to shipment, the servomotors can be used without replenishing grease. Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 ANFJ-L20 1/5 1/5 L LL LM R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 833 (187) 980 (221) 833 (187) 833 (187) Approx. Mass kg (lb) 13 (28.7) 13 (28.7) 14 (30.9) 15 (33.1)
403 149 103 254 (15.9) (5.87) (4.06) (10.0) 415 149 103 266 (16.3) (5.87) (4.06) (10.5) 429 175 129 254 (16.9) (6.89) (5.08) (10.0) 198 152 254 452 (17.8) (7.80) (5.98) (10.0)
INFO

L LL 46(1.81) LM R Q QK 88(3.46) LBh7 Sh6 LG LR
Shaft End T
KL1
L
KB1 KB2 1(0.04) 5(0.20) 6-LZ Mounting holes
3-155
Units: mm (in) Model SGMSH10AAL54 10DAL54 10AAL74 10DAL74 10AAL84 10DAL84 15AAL24 15DAL24 15AAL54 15DAL54 15AAL74 15DAL74 15AAL84 15DAL84 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 20AAL84 20DAL84 30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24 30AAL54 30DAL54 30AAL74 30DAL74 30AAL84 30DAL84 ANFJ-L30 1/9 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L40 1/45 1/9 ANFJ-L30 1/20 1/29 ANFJ-L40 1/45 1/5 ANFJ-L30 1/9 1/20 ANFJ-L40 1/29 1/45 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 1/45 L LL LM LR KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 2650 (596) 2940 (662) 3430 (772) 1960 (441) 2650 (596) 2940 (662) 8040 (1810) 1960 (441) 2650 (596) 6860 (1540) 8040 (1810) 1670 (376) 1960 (441) 6080 (1370) 6860 (1540) 8040 (1810)
496 149 103 140 73 21 96 347 (19.5) (5.87) (4.06) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.7) 496 149 103 140 73 21 96 347 (19.5) (5.87) (4.06) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.7) 506 149 103 140 73 21 96 357 (19.9) (5.87) (4.06) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (14.1) 518 175 129 140 73 21 96 343 (20.4) (6.89) (5.08) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.5) 522 175 129 140 73 21 96 347 (20.6) (6.89) (5.08) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.7) 522 175 129 140 73 21 96 347 (20.6) (6.89) (5.08) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.7) 573 175 129 160 73 21 96 398 (22.6) (6.89) (5.08) (6.30) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (15.7) 541 198 152 140 73 21 96 343 (21.3) (7.80) (5.98) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.5) 545 198 152 140 73 21 96 347 (21.5) (7.80) (5.98) (5.51) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (13.7) 586 198 152 160 73 21 96 388 (23.1) (7.80) (5.98) (6.30) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (15.3) 596 198 152 160 73 21 96 398 (23.5) (7.80) (5.98) (6.30) (2.87) (0.83) (3.78) (15.7) 540 199 153 140 77 22 114 341 (21.3) (7.83) (6.02) (5.51) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (13.4) 567 199 153 140 77 22 114 368 (22.3) (7.83) (6.02) (5.51) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (14.5) 612 199 153 160 77 22 114 413 (24.1) (7.83) (6.02) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 612 199 153 160 77 22 114 413 (24.1) (7.83) (6.02) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 622 199 153 160 77 22 114 423 (24.5) (7.83) (6.02) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.7)
3-156
Units: mm (in) (Contd) Model SGMSH40AAL14 40AAL24 40AAL54 40AAL74 ANFJ-L40 50AAL14 50AAL24 50AAL54 1/5 1/9 1/20 Gear Model Gear Ratio 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 L LL LM LR KB1 KB2 KL1 R Shaft Center Allowable Radial Load N (lbf) 1670 (376) 4700 (1060) 6080 (1370) 6860 (1540) 3820 (860) 4700 (1060) 6080 (1370)
ANFJ-L30
577 236 190 140 77 22 114 341 (22.7) (9.29) (7.48) (5.51) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (13.4) 649 236 190 160 77 22 114 413 (25.6) (9.29) (7.48) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 649 236 190 160 77 22 114 413 (25.6) (9.29) (7.48) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 649 236 190 160 77 22 114 413 (25.6) (9.29) (7.48) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 657 276 230 160 77 22 114 381 (25.9) (10.9) (9.06) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (15.0) 689 276 230 160 77 22 114 413 (27.1) (10.9) (9.06) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3) 689 276 230 160 77 22 114 413 (27.1) (10.9) (9.06) (6.30) (3.03) (0.87) (4.49) (16.3)
Model SGMSH10AAL54 10DAL54 10AAL74 10DAL74 10AAL84 10DAL84 15AAL24 15DAL24 15AAL54 15DAL54 15AAL74 15DAL74 15AAL84 15DAL84 20AAL24 20DAL24 20AAL54 20DAL54 20AAL74 20DAL74 20AAL84 20DAL84 30AAL14 30DAL14 30AAL24 30DAL24
Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9
Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB LC LG LZ Q
Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) QK S T U
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 30 (66.1) 30 (66.1) 30 (66.1) 31 (68.3) 31 (68.3) 31 (68.3) 51 (112) 32 (70.5) 32 (70.5) 52 (115) 52 (115) 29 (63.9) 36 (79.4)
220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55) 220 190 245 15 12 75 65 50 9 5.5 14 (8.66) (7.48) (9.65) (0.59) (0.47) (2.95) (2.56) (1.97) (0.35) (0.22) (0.55)
3-157
(Contd) Model SGMSH30AAL54 30DAL54 30AAL74 30DAL74 30AAL84 30DAL84 40AAL14 40AAL24 40AAL54 40AAL74 50AAL14 50AAL24 50AAL54 Gear Ratio 1/20 1/29 1/45 1/5 1/9 1/20 1/29 1/5 1/9 1/20 Flange Face Dimensions mm (in) LA LB LC LG LZ Q Shaft-end Dimensions mm (in) QK S T U Approx. Mass kg (lb) 56 (123) 56 (123) 56 (123) 32 (70.5) 59 (130) 59 (130) 59 (130) 52 (115) 62 (137) 62 (137)
280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 280 240 310 18 14 90 78 60 11 7 18 (11.0) (9.45) (12.2) (0.71) (0.55) (3.54) (3.07) (2.36) (0.43) (0.28) (0.71) 220 (8.66) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 280 (11.0) 190 (7.48) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 245 (9.65) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 310 (12.2) 15 (0.59) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 14 (0.55) 75 (2.95) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 65 (2.56) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 78 (3.07) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 9 (0.35) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 5.5 (0.22) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71) 18 (0.71)
INFO
3-158
3.18 Dimensional Drawings of SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1)
3.18 Dimensional Drawings of SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1)

These Servomotors are not provided with gears.
3.18.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) Without Gears and With/Without Brakes

L LL 43 (1.69) LM 4(0.16) 18(0.71) LR
0 0 28 -0.013 (1.10 -0.0005 )
(0.016) 0.04 A 0.04 A (0.016) (7.87-0.0018 )

0 200-0.046
Shaft End LR 4 (0.16)

35 2 25) . ( 9
0 -0.0005 ) 0 28 -0.013 (1.10
220( 8.66)
4 (0.16) 45 (1.77)
100( 4.29) 161(6.34) 88 (3.46)
27 (10 0 .63)
4-13.5 Mounting holes
62 (2.44)
50 (1.97) KB1 KB2 A 0.02 (0.0008)
Model SGMDH22AA21 32AA21 40AA21
LL
LM
LR
KB1
KB2
Approx. Mass kg (lb) Without Brakes With Brakes 15.5 (34.2) 18.5 (40.8) 21 (46.3) 20.5 (45.2) 23.5 (51.8) 26 (57.3)
R 1
Units: mm (in) Allowable Allowable Radial Load Thrust Load N (lbf) N (lbf) 1180 (265) 1180 (265) 1180 (265) 490 (110) 490 (110) 490 (110)
242 187 144 55 70 165 (9.53) (7.36) (5.67) (2.17) (2.76) (6.50) 254 199 156 55 82 177 (10.0) (7.83) (6.14) (2.17) (3.23) (6.97) 274 209 166 65 92 187 (10.8) (8.23) (6.54) (2.56) (3.62) (7.36)
* 1. The detector is a 17-bit encoder (absolute/incremental). * 2. For Servomotors with brakes, B is appended to the end of each model name.
3-159
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.18.1 SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) Without Gears and With/Without Brakes

K L M N P R S T
BATTBATT+
With an Incremental Encoder A K B L DATA+ C M D N DATA E P F R 0V G S H T +5VDC J FG (Frame ground)
Cable Specifications for Brake Connectors Wihtout brakes

A B C D E F G Phase U Phase V Phase W FG(Frame ground)
With brakes
A B C D E F G Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame ground) Brake terminal Brake terminal
F E D
A G B C
F E D
A G B C
3-160
3.19 Dimensional Drawings of SGMCS Servomotors

3.19.1 SGMCS Servomotors 135 Model
6 M4 screw, depth 8 (0.31)
0.07 (0.002) B 0.07 (0.002) A
4 (0.16)
L LL
135 (5.31)
R26
120h7
1
23
9 (0.35)
(0.039)
.4
100h7
90 (3.54
20 (0.79) 70(2.76)
Nonrotating section
9 (3. 0 54 )
B 4 0.02 (0.001) (0.16) Rotating section (shown with hatching)

30 ) 1 5.12 (
90 Servomotor-end connector Nameplate
Model SGMCS02BB11 05BB11 07BB11

0.07 (0.002) B 0.07 (0.002) A
5 (0.20) L LL B 0.02 (0.001) 5 (0.20) Rotating section (shown with hatching)
35 (1.38)
R3
6.5
160h7
25
.4
23
.4
9 (0.35)
1 (0.039)
60 Servomotor-end Encoder-end connector Nameplate connector
Nameplate
3.7 A (0.15) 0.04 (0.001)

0 130h7: 130 -0.040 (5.118 +0.0001 -0.0015 ) 0 160h7: 160 -0.040 (6.299 +0.0002 -0.0014 )
130h7
130 (5.12)
100(3.94)
175 (6.89)
Nonrotating section
Reference length Units: mm (in)
Model SGMCS04CB11 10CB11 14CB11
L 69 (2.72) 90 (3.54) 130 (5.12)
LL 59 (2.32) 80 (3.15) 120 (4.72)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 7.2 (15.87) 10.2 (22.49) 14.2 (13.31)
1 (4. 20 72 )
25 .4
Encoder-end connector
Nameplate
2.7 (0.11)
0.04 (0.001)
Reference length 0 0 100h7: 100 -0.035 (3.937 -0.0014 ) Units: mm (in)

0 120h7: 120 -0.035 (4.724 +0.0004 -0.0010 )
L 59 (2.32) 88 (3.46) 128 (5.04)
LL 51 (2.01) 80 (3.15) 120 (4.72)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 5.0 (11.02) 6.2 (13.67) 8.6 (18.96)

68 ) 1 6.61 (
3-161
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.19.3 SGMCS Servomotors 230 Model

0.08 (0.003) 0.08 (0.003) A B
5 (0.20)
L LL
B
5 (0.20)
0.02 (0.001)

1 6 (6 0 2 .3 0 ) (8 20 .6 6)
Rotating section (shown with hatching)
230 (9.06)
R5
25
.4
23
.4
200h7
160 (6.30 )
Nonrotating section
9 (0.35)
(0.039)
60 Encoder-end Servomotor-end connector connector Nameplate
Nameplate
A 3 0.04 (0.001) (0.12)

0 0 170h7: 170 -0.040 (6.693 -0.0017 ) Reference length 0 0 200h7: 200 -0.046 (7.874 -0.0018 )
60 (2.36) 140 (5.51) 170h7 1
Units: mm (in)
Model SGMCS08DB11 17DB11 25DB11
L 74 (2.91) 110 (4.33) 160 (6.30)
LL 64 (2.52) 100 (3.94) 150 (5.91)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 14.0 (30.86) 22.0 (48.50) 29.7 (65.48)

2 (7. 00 87 ) (1 280 1. 0)
Reference length Units: mm (in) 0.08 (0.003) B 6 0.08 (0.003) A (0.24) L LL
6 (0.24)
0.02 (0.001) Rotating section (shown with hatching)
R6
Nonrotating section
25
.4
23
.4
9 (0.35)
60 Servomotor-end connector Nameplate
Encoder-end connector
Nameplate
Model SGMCS16EB11 35EB11
L 88 (3.46) 112 (4.41)
LL 76 (2.99) 100 (3.94)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 26.0 (57.32) 34.0 (74.96)
3-162
75 (2.95) 180(7.09) 220h7

1 (0.039)
200 (7.87 )
290 (11.41) 260h7
A 4 0.04 (0.001) (0.16)

0 220h7: 220 -0.046 (8.661 +0.0004 -0.0014 ) 0 260h7: 260 -0.052 (10.236 +0.0002 -0.0018 )

LL 6 (0.24) KB2 KB1 15 (0.59) (within 280h7)
(11.020.019)
15 (0.59) 0.08 (0.003) A B
12M6 screw, depth 15 (0.59) 41 (1.61)

30
0.08 A B (0.003) 182 (7.17)
2800.5
1.5 (0.059)
147 (5.79)
250 (9.84)
115 (4.53)
140 (5.51)
75.2 (2.96)
280h7
110h7
75H6
Rotating Section (shown with hatching) 15 (0.59) (within 75H6)
Rotating Section
(1 64 0. 39 )
(Rotating Section)
5 (0.20)
A
2
8 8 .46) (3
0.04 (0.001)
3
B 0.04 (0.001)
Rotating Section (shown with hatching)
12M6 screw, depth 18 (0.71)

0 280h7: 280 -0.052 (11.023 -0.0014 ) +0.0006
75H6: 75 +0.019 (2.953 +0.0005 ) -0.0002

0
110h7: 110 -0.035 (4.33 -0.0007)
+0.0007
Model SGMCS45MA11 80MA11 1AMA11
LL 141 (5.55) 191 (7.52) 241 (9.48)
KB1 87.5 (3.44) 137.5 (5.41) 187.5 (7.38)
KB2 122 (4.80) 172 (6.77) 222 (8.74)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 38 (83.77) 45 (99.20) 51 (112.4)
3-163
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.19.6 SGMCS Servomotors 290 Model

LL 6 (0.24) KB2 KB1 15 (0.59) (within 360h7)
(14.170.019)
15 (0.59) 0.08 (0.003) A B
12M8 screw, depth 15 (0.59) 41 (1.61)
30
0.08 (0.003) A B
(1 344 3. 54 )
325 (12.7) 166 (6.54) 186 (7.32)
1.5 (0.059)
(Rotating Section)
0.04 (0.001)
118.2 (4.65)
190 (7.48)
160h7
118H6
360h7
Rotating Section (shown with hatching) 15 (0.59) (within 118H6)
Rotating Section
0.04 (0.001) 12M8 screw, depth 20 (0.79)

0 +0.0002 360h7: 360 -0.057 (14.173 -0.0020 )
Rotating Section (shown with hatching)
118H6: 118 +0.022 (4.646 +0.0005 -0.0003 ) 0 160h7: 160 -0.040 (6.299 -0.0014 )
0 +0.0002
Model SGMCS80NA11 1ENA11 2ZNA11
LL 151 (5.94) 201 (7.91) 251 (9.88)
KB1 98 (3.86) 148 (5.82) 198 (7.79)
KB2 132 (5.19) 182 (7.16) 232 (9.13)
Approx. Mass kg (lb) 50 (110.2) 68 (149.9) 86 (189.5)
3-164
222 (8.74)
3600.5
5 (0.20)
5 13 1) (5.3
3.19.7 Servomotor Connector for All Small-capacity Series Servomotors

Servomotor-end Connector Cable Specifications
1 3 Model: JN1AS04MK2 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Applicable plug: JN1DS04FK1 (Provided by the customer.)
2 1 2 3 4
Encoder-end Connector Cable Specifications

1 4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 PS PS PG5V FG (Frame ground) PG0V 3 7 Model: JN1AS10ML1 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Applicable plug: JN1DS10SL1 (Provided by the customer.)
3-165
3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 3.19.8 Servomotor Connector for All Middle-capacity Series Servomotors
3.19.8 Servomotor Connector for All Middle-capacity Series Servomotors

Servomotor-end Connector Cable Specifications
Model: CE05-2A18-10PD Manufacturer: DDK Ltd. Applicable plug and cable Plug: CE05-6A18-10SD-B-BSS Cable clamp: CE3057-10A-(D265) (Provided by the customer.)
A D
B C
A B C D
Encoder-end Connector Cable Specifications

1 4 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 PS PS PG5V FG (Frame ground) PG0V 3 7 Model: JN1AS10ML1 Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Applicable plug: JN1DS10SL1 (Provided by the customer.)
3-166
3.20 Shaft End Specifications for SGMGH, SGMSH and SGMDH Servomotors
SGM H Symbol 2 3 Straight, without key Taper 1/10, with parallel key (Key slot is JISB1301-1976 high precision. SGMGH series is interchangeable with USAGED series.) Taper 1/10, woodruff key (Set only for SGMGH-05 and 09. Woodruff key is JISB1302.) Straight, with key and tap for one location (Key slot is JISB1301-1976 high precision.Key slot tolerance is JISB1301. Both key and tap are included.) Specifications Remarks Standard Semistandard Semistandard Semistandard
Symbol
Specifications
LR
Shaft End
Straight, without key
R1
S LR Q
LW
QA X P T W
QK
Taper 1/10 With parallel key
Y V Y S Taper 1/10
U Section Y-Y P T W V U Section Y-Y
LW
LR Q Q/2
Q
QA X
Taper 1/10, With woodruff key
Y Taper 1/10
3-167
Symbol
Specifications
LR Q QK
Shaft End
Straight, With key and tap
P S
W T
R 1
Units: mm (in)
Symbol Specifications
SGMSH03B 06B 10 15 20 30 40 50 05A 09A

LR Q
Model SGMGH09B 13A

12B 20B 30B 40B 55B
SGMDH 1E 22 32 40 65 (2.56) 60 (2.36)

32 0 0.016
20A 30A 44A 55A 75A 1AA
45 (1.77) 40 (1.57)
0 24 0.013 0.945 0.0001 0.0006
63 (2.48) 55 (2.17)
0 28 0.013 0.0004 1.102+ 0.0001
58 (2.28) 40 (1.57)
0 19 0.013 0.748 0 0.0005 0 22 0.013 0.0001 0.866+ 0.0004
79 (3.11) 76 (2.99)
35
113 (4.45)
0 42 0.016 0.0005 1.653 + 0.0001
116 (4.57) 110 (4.33)

55
55 (2.17) 50 (1.97)
2 Straight
S
+ 0.01
0
+ 0.030
0.011
0 28 0.013
0.0003 1.378+ 0
0.0005 2.166+ 0.0011
0.0004 0.0008 + 1.102+ 1.259 0.0001 0.0002 +
LR LW Q QA QK Taper 1/10, key X S V P W T U LR LW Q QA QK Taper 1/10, woodruff key
70 (2.76) 80 (3.15) 20 (0.79) 36 (1.42) 42 (1.65) 14 (0.55) 18 (0.71) 32 (1.26) 36 (1.42) 12.5 (0.49) 16 (0.63) 24 (0.94) 28 (1.10) 24 (0.94) 30 (1.18) M12, P1.25 M16, P1.5 8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 7.1 (0.28)
58 (2.28) 18 (0.71) 28 (1.10) 12 (0.47) 25 (0.98)1 10.3 (0.41) 16 (0.63) 19 (0.75) 21 (0.83) M10, P1.25 5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)2 5.8 (0.23)
102 (4.02) 58 (2.28) 22 (0.87) 50 (1.97) 19.2 (0.76) 32 (1.26) 37 (1.46) M20, P1.5 7 (0.28) 7 (0.28) 10.55 (0.42)
132 (5.20) 22 (0.87) 82 (3.23) 28 (1.10) 70 (2.76) 23 (0.91) 42 (1.65) 44 (1.73) M24, P2.0 10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) 13.95 (0.55) 26 (1.02) 55 (2.17) 60 (2.36) M36, P3.0 14 (0.55) 9 (0.35) 19.95 (0.79)
3 parallel
8.95 (0.35) 4.3 (0.17)3 58 (2.28) 18 (0.71) 28 (1.10) 12 (0.47) 16 (0.63) 10.3 (0.41) 16 (0.63) 21 (0.83) M10, P1.25 5 (0.20) 2 (0.08) 4.5 (0.18)
X S V P W T U
3-168
Units: mm (in) (Contd)

Symbol Specifications
SGMSH03B 06B 10 15 20 30 40 50 05A 09A

LR Q QK
Model SGMGH09B 13A

12B 20B 30B 40B 55B
SGMDH 1E 22 32 40 65 (2.56) 60 (2.36) 50 (1.97)

32 0 0.016
20A 30A 44A 55A 75A 1AA
45 (1.77) 40 (1.57) 32 (1.26)

24 0 0.013
63 (2.48) 55 (2.17) 50 (1.97)

28 0 0.013 19
58 (2.28) 40 (1.57) 25 (0.98)

0 0.013 22 0 0.013
79 (3.11) 76 (2.99) 60 (2.36)

35
113 (4.45)
116 (4.57) 110 (4.33) 90 (3.54)
55 (2.17) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77)
+ 0.01
0
42
0 0.016
55
+ 0.030
0.011
28
0 0.013
Straight, with key and tap
0.945 0.0001 0.0006
0.0004 1.102+ 0.0001
0.748 0 0.0005
0.0001 0.866+ 0.0004
0.0003 1.378+ 0
0.0005 1.653 + 0.0001
0.0005 2.166+ 0.0011
0.0004 0.0008 + 1.102+ 1.259 0.0001 0.0002 +
W T U P
8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 4 (0.16) M8 screw, depth: 16
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20) 3 (0.12)
6 (0.24) 6 (0.24) 3.5 (0.14)
10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 8 (0.31) 5 (0.20) M12 screw, depth: 25 M16 screw, depth: 32
M5 screw, depth: 12
16 (0.63) 10 (0.39) 6 (0.24) M20 screw, depth: 40
8 (0.31) 7 (0.28) 4 (0.16) M8 screw, depth: 16
10 (0.39) 8 (0.31) 5 (0.20) M12 screw, depth: 25
* 1. If the SGMGH-05A and 09A are not specified as the mounting interchangeable type, the value of the QK will be 16 (0.629). * 2. If the SGMGH-05A and 09A are not specified as the mounting interchangeable type, the value of the T will be 2 (0.078). * 3. If the SGMGH-05A and 09A are not specified as the mounting interchangeable type, the value of the U will be 4.5 (0.177).
3-169
4
SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings
4.1 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

4.1.1 Single-phase 100 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 4.1.2 Single-phase/Three-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 4.1.3 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.2 SERVOPACK Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6 4.3 SERVOPACK Internal Block Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.3.1 Single-phase 200 V, 30 W to 400 W, and 100 V, 30 W to 200 W Models - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8 4.3.2 Three-phase 200 V, 500 W to 1.5 kW Models - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9 4.3.3 Three-phase 200 V, 2.0 kW to 5.0 kW Models - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9 4.3.4 Three-phase 200 V, 6.0 kW to 15 kW Models - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.4 SERVOPACKs Power Supply Capacities and Power Losses - - - - - - - - - 4-11 4.5 SERVOPACK Overload Characteristics and Allowable Load Moment of Inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
4.5.1 Overload Characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12 4.5.2 Starting and Stopping Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 4.5.3 Load Moment of Inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13
4.6 SERVOPACK Dimensional Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
4-1
4.7 Dimensional Drawings of Base-mounted SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - 4-17

4.7.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W to 100 W (A3BD to 01BD, A3BDA to 01BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W to 200 W (A3AD to 02AD, A3ADA to 02ADA) - - - - - - - - - -4-17 4.7.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD, 02BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD, 04ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-18 4.7.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD to 10AD, 05ADA to 10ADA) - - - - - -4-19 4.7.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD, 15ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-20 4.7.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD to 30AD, 20ADA to 30ADA) - - - - - - - - - - -4-21 4.7.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-22 4.7.7 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA to 75ADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-23 4.7.8 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA to 1EADA) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-24
4.8 Dimensional Drawings of Rack-mounted SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - 4-25

4.8.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W (A3BD-R to 01BD-R, A3BDA-R to 01BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W/200 W (A3AD-R to 02AD-R, A3ADA-R to 02ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-25 4.8.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD-R, 02BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD-R, 04ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-26 4.8.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD-R to 10AD-R, 05ADA-R to 10ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-27 4.8.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD-R, 15ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-28 4.8.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD-R to 30AD-R, 20ADA-R to 30ADA-R) - - - -4-29 4.8.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA-R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-30
4.9 Dimensional Drawings of Duct-ventilated SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - 4-31

4.9.1 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA-P to 75ADA-P) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-31 4.9.2 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA-P/1EADA-P) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-32
4-2
4.1 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications
CAUTION
Take appropriate measures to ensure that the input power supply is supplied within the specified voltage range. An incorrect input power supply may result in damage to the SERVOPACK. If the voltage exceeds these values, use a step-down transformer so that the voltage will be within the specified range.
4.1.1 Single-phase 100 V

The value of the input power supply voltage is maximum 127 Vrms.
SERVOPACK Model SGDMMax. Applicable Servomotor Capacity (kW) Continuous Output Current (Arms) Max. Output Current (Arms) Input Power Supply Main Circuit Control Circuit A3B 0.03 0.66 2.0 A5B 0.05 0.95 2.9 01B 0.1 2.4 7.2 02B 0.2 3.0 9.0
Configuration Regenerative Processing
Single-phase 100 to115 VAC +10 to -15%, 50/60 Hz Single-phase 100 to115 VAC +10 to -15%, 50/60 Hz Base-mounted (Rack mounting available as an option) External regenerative resistor
4.1.2 Single-phase/Three-phase 200 V

The value of the input power supply voltage is maximum 253 Vrms.
SERVOPACK Model SGDMMax. Applicable Servomotor Capacity (kW) Continuous Output Current (Arms) Max. Output Current (Arms) Input Power Supply A3A A5A 01A 02A 04A 05A 08A 10A 15A 20A 30A 50A 60A 75A 1AA 1EA 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11 15
0.44 0.64 0.91 1.3 2.0 2.8
2.1 6.5
2.8 8.5
3.8 11.0
5.7 13.9
7.6 17
11.6 28
18.5 24.8 32.9 46.9 54.7 58.6 78.0 42 56 84 110 130 140 170
Main Single-phase/Three-phase 200 to 230 VAC +10 to -15%, 50/60 Hz Circuit Control Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC +10 to -15%, 50/60 Hz Circuit Base-mounted (Rack mounting available as an option) External regenerative resistor Built-in Base-mounted (Ductventilated available as an option) External regenerative resistor
Configuration Regenerative Processing
4-3
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.1.3 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications
4.1.3 SERVOPACK Ratings and Specifications

Control Method Basic Specifications Feedback Conditions Ambient/Storage Temperature 1 Ambient/Storage Humidity Vibration/Shock Resistance Speed Control Range Speed Regulation 2 Load Regulation Voltage Regulation Temperature Regulation Single or three-phase full-wave rectification IGBT-PWM (sine-wave driven) Serial encoder: 13, 16 or 17-bit (incremental/absolute) The 13-bit encoder is incremental only. 0 to +55 C (32 to 131 F)/-20 to +85 C (-4 to 185 F) 90% RH or less (with no condensation) 4.9 m/s2/19.6 m/s2 1:5000 (The lowest speed of the speed control range is the speed at which the servomotor will not stop with a rated torque load.) 0 to 100% load: 0.01% or less (at rated speed) Rated voltage 10%: 0% (at rated speed) 25 25 C (77 F): 0.1% or less (at rated speed) 400 Hz (at JL = JM) 2%
Performance
Frequency Characteristics Torque Control Tolerance (Repeatability) Soft Start Time Setting Speed Reference Input
Speed and Torque Control Modes
Input Torque Signals Reference Input Contact Speed Reference Bias Setting Performance Position Control Modes Input Signals
0 to 10 s (Can be set individually for acceleration and deceleration.) 6 VDC (Variable setting range: 2 to 10 VDC) at rated torque (servoReference Voltage 3 motor forward rotation with positive reference), input voltage: maximum 12 V Input Impedance About 14 k Circuit Time Constant About 47 s 3 VDC (Variable setting range: 1 to 10 VDC) at rated torque (positive Reference Voltage 3 torque reference with positive reference), input voltage: maximum 12 V Input Impedance About 14 k Circuit Time Constant About 47 s Rotation Direction With P control signal Selection With forward/reverse current limit signal (speed 1 to 3 selection), servoSpeed Selection motor stops or another control method is used when both are OFF. 0 to 450 min-1 (setting resolution: 1 min-1) 0 to 100% (setting resolution: 1%) 0 to 250 reference units (setting resolution: 1 reference unit) Sign + pulse train, 90 phase difference 2-phase pulse (phase A + phase B), or CCW + CW pulse train Line driver (+5 V level), open collector (+5 V or +12 V level) Maximum 500/200 kpps (line driver/open collector) Clear signal (input pulse form identical to reference pulse) +12 V (1k resistor built in)
Feed Forward Compensation Positioning Completed Width Setting Reference Pulse Type
Form Frequency Control Signal Built-in Open Collector Power Supply 4
4-4
Form Position Output Frequency Dividing Ratio Signal allocation can be modified. Fixed Output Sequence Output Dynamic Brake Overtravel Stop Electronic Gear Protection LED Display Signal allocation can be modified.
Phase-A, -B, -C line driver Phase-S line driver (only with an absolute encoder) Any Servo ON, P control (or Control mode switching, forward/reverse motor rotation by internal speed setting, zero clamping, reference pulse prohibited), forward run prohibited (P-OT), reverse run prohibited (N-OT), alarm reset, forward current limit, and reverse current limit (or internal speed selection) Servo alarm, 3-bit alarm codes Positioning completed (speed coincidence), during servomotor rotation, servo ready, during current limiting, during speed limiting, brake released, warning, selecting three of the NEAR signals. Operated at main power OFF, servo alarm, servo OFF or overtravel. Dynamic brake stop at P-OT or N-OT, deceleration to a stop, or coast to a stop 0.01 B/A 100 Overcurrent, overvoltage, low voltage, overload, regeneration error, main circuit detection section error, heat sink overheated, no power supply, overflow, overspeed, encoder error, overrun, CPU error, parameter error. Charge, Power, five 7-segment LEDs (built-in Digital Operator functions) Analog monitor connector built in for monitoring speed, torque and other reference signals. Speed: 1 V/1000 min-1 Torque: 1 V/100% of rated torque Position error pulses: 0.05 V/1 reference units or 0.05 V/100 reference units Digital Operator (hand-held model), RS-422A port such as for a personal computer (RS-232C ports under certain conditions) Up to N = 14 for RS-422A ports Set with parameters. Status display, parameter setting, monitor display, alarm trace-back display, JOG and autotuning operations, speed, torque reference signal and other drawing functions. Reverse rotation connection, zero-point search, automatic servomotor ID, DC reactor connection terminal for harmonic suppressions. 5
I/O Signals
Sequence Input
Internal Functions
CN5 Analog Monitoring
Connected Devices Communications 1:N Communications Axis Address Setting Functions Others
* 1. Use the SERVOPACK within the ambient temperature range. When enclosed in a control panel, internal temperatures must not exceed the ambient temperature range. * 2. Speed regulation is defined as follows:
Speed reguration = No-load motor speed Total load motor speed 100% Rated motor speed
The motor speed may change due to voltage variations or amplifier drift and changes in processing resistance due to temperature variation. The ratio of speed changes to the rated speed represent speed regulation due to voltage and temperature variations. * 3. Forward is clockwise viewed from the non-load side of the servomotor. (Counterclockwise viewed from the load and shaft end) * 4. The built-in open collector power supply is not electrically insulated from the control circuit in the SERVOPACK. * 5. The DC reactor connection terminals for power supplies designed for minimum harmonics are not included in SERVOPACKs with capacities of 6 kW or more.
4-5
4.2 SERVOPACK Installation

The SGDM SERVOPACKs can be mounted on a base, rack or duct-ventilated. Incorrect installation will cause problems. Always observe the following installation instructions.
WARNING
After voltage resistance test, wait at least five minutes before servicing the product. (Refer to Voltage Resistance Test on the following page.) Failure to observe this warning may result in electric shock. Connect the main circuit wires, control wires, and main circuit cables of the motor correctly. Incorrect wiring will result in failure of the SERVOPACK. Store the SERVOPACK within the following temperature range if it is stored with the power cable disconnected. Temperature: -20 to 85 C (-4 to 185 F) Humidity: 90%RH or less (with no condensation) Installation category (Overvoltage category) : Operating Conditions Pollution degree : 2 Protection class : 1X Altitude : Maximum 1000 m Installation in a Control Panel Design the control panel size, unit layout, and cooling method so the temperature around the SERVOPACK does not exceed 55 C (131 F). Installation Near a Heating Unit Minimize the heat radiating from the heating unit as well as any temperature rise caused by natural convection so the temperature around the SERVOPACK does not exceed 55 C (131 F). Installation Near a Source of Vibration Install a vibration isolator on the SERVOPACK to avoid subjecting it to vibration. Installation at a Site Exposed to Corrosive Gas Corrosive gas does not have an immediate effect on the SERVOPACK but will eventually cause the electronic components and contactor-related devices to malfunction. Take appropriate action to avoid corrosive gas. Other Situations Do not install the SERVOPACK in hot, humid locations or locations subject to excessive dust or iron powder in the air.
Storage
Installation Site
* Conforming to the following standards. UL508C CSA C22.2 No.14 EN50178 EN55011 group 1 class A EN61000-6-2
4-6
4.2 SERVOPACK Installation
Install the SERVOPACK perpendicular to the wall as shown in the figure. The SERVOPACK must be oriented this way because it is designed to be cooled by natural convection or a cooling fan. Secure the SERVOPACK using two to four mounting holes. The number of holes depends on the capacity.
Orientation
Wall
Ventilation
Follow the procedure below to install multiple SERVOPACKs side by side in a control panel.
Cooling fan Cooling fan 50 mm (1.97 in) min.
4
30 mm (1.18 in) min. 10 mm (0.39 in) min. 50 mm (1.97 in) min.
Installation
SERVOPACK Orientation Install the SERVOPACK perpendicular to the wall so the front panel containing connectors faces outward. Cooling As shown in the figure above, allow sufficient space around each SERVOPACK for cooling by cooling fans or natural convection. Side-by-side Installation When installing SERVOPACKs side by side as shown in the figure above, allow at least 10 mm (0.39 in) between and at least 50 mm (1.97 in) above and below each SERVOPACK. Install cooling fans above the SERVOPACKs to avoid excessive temperature rise and to maintain even temperature inside the control panel. Environmental Conditions in the Control Panel Ambient Temperature:0 to 55C (32 to 131 F) Humidity: 90% RH or less Vibration: 4.9 m/s2 Condensation and Freezing: None Ambient Temperature for Long-term Reliability: 45 C (113 F) or less Conduct voltage resistance tests under the following conditions. Voltage: 1500 Vrms AC for one minute Braking current: 30 mA or more Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Voltage applied points For SGDM-AD, -ADA SERVOPACKs : Between the ground terminals and the point where the terminals L1, L2, (L3), L1C, L2C, U, V, W are connected. For SGDM-BD, -BDA SERVOPACKs : Between the ground terminals and the point where the terminals L1, L2, (L3), L1C, L2C, U, V, W are connected.
Voltage Resistance Test
4-7
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.3.1 Single-phase 200 V, 30 W to 400 W, and 100 V, 30 W to 200 W Models
4.3 SERVOPACK Internal Block Diagrams

4.3.1 Single-phase 200 V, 30 W to 400 W, and 100 V, 30 W to 200 W Models
+10% Single-phase 200 to 230 V -15% (50/60 Hz) +10% Single-phase 100 to 115 V -15%
1 2 PM1-1
RY1
B1
B2
THS1
Noise filter
FU1 1KM L1 XX1 T N1
Relay drive
P2
CHARGE
PM1-2 R7 U V R8
D2 D3 D4
Servomotor
U V W M
D1
C1
+ TR1 N2
Voltage sensor Gate drive Gate drive overcurrent protector
L2
Voltage sensor
CN2
Interface
Current sensor
PG
L1C L2C
~ ~
+ -
+ -
DC / DC converter
5 V +15 V +5 V 12 V
CN8
For battery connection
ASIC (PWM control, etc.)
CN1
PG output Reference pulse input
Power Power OFF ON

1KM 1KM
Open during servo alarm (1RY)

1RY
+5 V
0V
Surge suppressor
Panel operator
Analog voltage converter
POWER
CPU (Position/speed calculation, etc.)
A/D
Speed/torque reference input Sequence I/O
I/O
CN5
CN3
Analog monitor output for supervision
Digital operator or personal computer
The supply voltage for 100V, 30 to 200W is 100 to 115V +10% -15% (50/60 Hz).
4-8
4.3 SERVOPACK Internal Block Diagrams
4.3.2 Three-phase 200 V, 500 W to 1.5 kW Models

+10% Single/Three-phase 200 to 230 V -15% (50/60 Hz)
1 RY1 2 FU1 R2
B1 B2 B3
FAN1
D2 D3 D4
12V
Noise filter
1KM L1 L2 L3 XX1 XX2 XX3 S T R
P
CHARGE
P U V W U V W
Servomotor
+ C1 -
N
Relay drive Voltage sensor Gate drive
N
Gate drive overcurrent protector
THS1
Voltage sensor
CN2
Interface
When 0.5 kW to 1.0 kW models are used.
PG
L1C L2C
~ ~
+ -
+ -
5 V
Current sensor
DC / DC converter
+15 V +5 V 12 V
CN8
CN1

0V
Power Power Open during OFF ON servo alarm (1RY)

1KM 1KM 1KM
+5 V
Surge suppressor
Panel operator
POWER
A/D
I/O
CN5
CN3
4.3.3 Three-phase 200 V, 2.0 kW to 5.0 kW Models

Three-phase 200 to 230 V -15% (50/60 Hz)
1 2 FU1 P 1KM L1 L2 L3 XX1 XX2 XX3
CHARGE
+10%
B1 B2 B3 FAN1 P 12 V U V W N N DB
Gate drive overcurrent protector
Noise filter
R S T
Servomotor
U V W M
C1 RY1
+ -
Relay drive Voltage sensor
Voltage sensor
Gate drive
~~~ + CN2 PG
Interface
Gate drive
L1C L2C
~ ~
+ -
+ -
DC / DC converter
5 V +15 V +5 V 12 V
Current sensor
CN8
CN1

0V
Power Power Open during OFF ON servo alarm (1RY)

1KM 1KM 1KM 1RY
+5 V A/D
Surge suppressor
Panel operator
POWER
I/O
CN5
CN3
4-9
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.3.4 Three-phase 200 V, 6.0 kW to 15 kW Models
4.3.4 Three-phase 200 V, 6.0 kW to 15 kW Models

Three-phase 200 to 230 V -15% (50/60 Hz)
RY1 DB1 P FU1 R3 D1 1KM L1 L2 L3 BA2
C7 C6 C5
+10%
Regenerative resistor (Option)

B1 B2 PM1/PM2/PM3 12 V CT1 R S T N C9
Voltage sensor isolator
+
THS1
FAN1
Noise filter
BA1 BA3
Servomotor
U V W SCR1 M
C1
CHARGE
C10
U V
CT2
TR1
Relay drive
Voltage sensor isolator
Base drive overcurrent protector isolator
R2
Gate drive isolator Current sensor
CN2 PG
L1C L2C
5 V
DC / DC converter
12 V PG5 V
CN8 CN1
For battery connection PG output Reference pulse input
Power Power OFF ON
Open during servo alarm (1RY)
+5 V
1KM 1KM 1KM 1RY 0V
Panel operator
Analog voltage converter CN5
POWER
A/D
I/O
CN3
4-10
4.4 SERVOPACKs Power Supply Capacities and Power Losses
4.4 SERVOPACKs Power Supply Capacities and Power Losses

The following table shows SERVOPACKs power supply capacities and power losses at the rated output.
Table 4.1 SERVOPACK Power Losses at Rated Output Main Circuit Power Supply Maximum Applicable Servomotor Capacity kW 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.45 0.75 1.0 1.5 Three-phase 200 V 2.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 7.5 11 15 SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA Output Current (Effective Value) A 0.66 0.95 2.4 3.0 0.44 0.64 0.91 2.1 2.8 3.8 5.7 7.6 11.6 18.5 24.8 32.9 46.9 54.7 58.6 78.0 Main Circuit Power Loss W 3.5 5.2 12 16.4 3.1 4.6 6.7 13.3 20 27 41 55 92 120 155 240 290 330 360 490 Regenerative Resistor Power Loss W Control Circuit Power Loss W 13 Total Power Loss W 16.5 18.2 25 29.4 16.1 17.6 19.7 26.3 33 54 68 82 121 163 198 311 27 3 30 317 357 390 520
Single-phase 100 V
Single-phase 200 V
13
12 2 14 2 28 2 56 2 15
* 1. SERVOPACKs with a capacity of 30 to 400W do not have built-in regenerative resistors. If the regenerative energy exceeds the specified value, connect an external regenerative resistor. Refer to 12.1.3 Calculating the Required Capacity of Regenerative Resistors. * 2. Regenerative resistor power losses are allowable losses. Take the following action if this value is exceeded. Remove the lead from the internal regenerative resistor in the SERVOPACK. Install an external regenerative resistor (optional). * 3. An external regenerative resistor must be connected to SERVOPACKs with a capacity of 6.0 kW or higher. The following regenerative resistor units are provided for this purpose. For the SGDM-60ADA: JUSP-RA04 (allowable loss: 180W) For the SGDM-75ADA to 1EADA: JUSP-RA05 (allowable loss: 350W) Note: Refer to 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors, 5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor and 5.8.7 Regenerative Resistor Unit for details.
4-11
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.5.1 Overload Characteristics
4.5 SERVOPACK Overload Characteristics and Allowable Load Moment of Inertia

4.5.1 Overload Characteristics
SERVOPACKs have a built-in overload protective function that protects the SERVOPACKs and servomotors from overload. Allowable power for the SERVOPACKs is limited by the overload protective function as shown in the figure below. The overload detection level is set under hot start1 conditions at a servomotor ambient temperature of 40C (104F).
10000
1000
B Operating time (s) 100 A 10 5
1 Rated torque Approx. Rated torque + Maximum torque 2 Motor torque Maximum torque
Note: The overload protection characteristics of A and B in the figure are applicable when the SERVOPACK is combined with one of the following servomotors. A: SGMAH or SGMPH servomotor with a capacity of maximum 400 W. B: SGMAH or SGMPH servomotors with a capacity more than 400 W and SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH servomotors.
TERMS
Hot Start A hot start indicates that both the SERVOPACK and the servomotor have run long enough at the rated load to be thermally saturated.
4-12
4.5.2 Starting and Stopping Time

The motor starting time (tr) and stopping time (tf) under a constant load are calculated using the following formulas. Motor viscous torque and friction torque are ignored.
Starting time: tr = 2 NM (JM + JL) [s] 60 (TPM TL) 2 NM (JM + JL) [s] 60 (TPM TL)
Stopping time: tf =
NM : JM: JL: TPM: TL:
Motor speed (min-1) Motor rotor moment of inertia (kgxm2) Load converted to shaft moment of inertia (kgxm2) Instantaneous peak motor torque when combined with a SERVOPACK (Nxm) Load torque (Nxm)
Calculate the torque from the motor current using servomotor torque constant motor current (effective value). The following figure shows the motor torque and motor speed timing chart.
TPM
Motor torque (current amplitude)
TL
Motor speed
NM
TPM
tr
tf
Time
Time
4.5.3 Load Moment of Inertia

The larger the load moment of inertia, the worse the movement response of the load. The size of the load moment of inertia (JL) allowable when using a servomotor depends on motor capacity and is limited to within 5 to 30 times the moment of inertia of each servomotor (JM). This value is provided strictly as a guideline and results may vary depending on servomotor drive conditions. An overvoltage alarm is likely to occur during deceleration if the load moment of inertia exceeds the allowable load moment of inertia. SERVOPACKs with a built-in regenerative resistor may generate a regeneration overload alarm. Take one of the following steps if this occurs. Reduce the torque limit. Reduce the deceleration rate. Reduce the maximum motor speed. Install an externally mounted regenerative resistor if the alarm cannot be cleared. Contact your Yaskawa Application Engineering Department.
Regenerative resistors are not built into 200 V SERVOPACKs for 30 W to 400 W or 100 V SERVOPACKs for 30 W to 200 W. The following figures show the tentative relationship between the load moment of inertia and motor speed using an example with a load moment of inertia 10 to 30 times the rotor moment of inertia at the motor shaft. External regenerative resistors are required when this condition is exceeded or if the allowable loss capacity (W) of the built-in regenerative resistor is exceeded due to regenerative drive conditions when a regenerative resistor is already built in.
4-13
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.5.3 Load Moment of Inertia
(1) Allowable Load Moment of Inertia and Motor Speed for SGMAH 200 V Servomotors
The following relationships between the motor speed and load moment of inertia are for an AC input power voltage of 200 Vrms. The relationship will change according to changes in power voltage.
SGMAH-A3 (30 W) 0.66
(9.35)
SGMAH-A5 (50 W)
SGMAH-01 (100 W)
0.50
(7.08)
Load moment of inertia (10-4 kg m2)
(10-3 oz in s2)
Load moment of inertia -4 2 (10 kg m )
(10-3 oz in s2)
1.09 Load moment (15.4) of inertia -4 2 (10 kg m )

(10-3 oz in s2)
3000 5000
3000 5000
3000 5000
Motor speed (min-1)
Motor speed (min-1)
Motor speed (min-1)
SGMAH-02 (200 W) 3.18

(45.0)
SGMAH-04 (400 W) 5.19 2600 min-1 3000 min-1
3300 min-1
(73.5)
Load moment of inertia (10-4 kg m2)
(10-3 oz in s2) 1.21 (17.1)
Load moment 3.81 (54.0) of inertia (10-4 kg m2) (10-3 oz in s2) 1.12
(15.9)
3000 5000
3000 5000
Motor speed (min-1)
Motor speed (min-1)
(2) Allowable Load Moment of Inertia and Motor Speed for SGMPH 200 V Servomotors
The following relationships between the motor speed and load moment of inertia are for an AC input power voltage of 200 Vrms. The relationship will change according to changes in power voltage.
SGMPH-01 (100 W) 3.74
(53.0)
SGMPH-02 (200 W)
SGMPH-04 (400 W) 3.31

(46.9)
1.47
(20.8)
Load moment of inertia -4 2 (10 kg m )

(10-3 oz in s2)
Load moment 1.10 of inertia -4 2 (10 kg m ) (15.6)

(10-3 oz in s2)
Load moment of inertia -4 2 (10 kg m ) 0.89
(10-3 oz in s2) (12.6)
0 3000 5000 Motor speed (min-1)
3000 5000 Motor speed (min-1)
0 3000 5000 Motor speed (min-1)
(3) Allowable Load Moment of Inertia at the Motor Shaft

The rotor moment of inertia ratio is the value for a servomotor without a gear and a brake.
Servomotor Model SGMAH Capacity Range 30 W to 200 W 400 W, 750 W 100 W SGMPH 200 W 400 W 750 W, 1.5 kW Allowable Load Moment of Inertia (Rotor Moment of Inertia Ratio) 30
20 25 15 7 5
4-14
Servomotor Model SGMGH (1500 min-1) SGMGH (1000 min-1) SGMSH SGMDH
Capacity Range 450 W to 15 kW 300 W to 5.5 kW 1.0 kW to 5.0 kW 2.2 kW to 4.0 kW
Allowable Load Moment of Inertia (Rotor Moment of Inertia Ratio)
5 5 5 5
(4) Overhanging Loads

A servomotor may not be operated with an overhanging load, which tends to continuously rotate the motor. Fig. 4.1 shows a typical example of such a load. DO NOT use the servomotor with the Vertical Axis Motor Drive without Counterweight
Servomotor
DO NOT use the servomotor with the Feeding Motor Drive
Tension
Servomotor Servomotor rotated repeatedly at a constant speed to maintain the tension. Servomotor
Fig 4.1 Examples of Overhanging Loads Never operate servomotors with an overhanging load. Doing so will cause the SERVOPACKs regenerative brake to be applied continuously and the regenerative energy of the load may exceed the allowable range causing damage to the SERVOPACK. The regenerative brake capacity of the SGDM SERVOPACKs is rated for short-term operation approximately equivalent to the time it takes to decelerate to a stop.
IMPORTANT
4-15
4.6 SERVOPACK Dimensional Drawings

SERVOPACK dimensional drawings are grouped according to the mounting method and the capacity.
(1) Base-mounted Type

Supply Voltage 100 V 200 V 100 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V SERVOPACK Capacity Model SGDM-D/DA 30 W / 50 W / 100 W A3B / A5B / 01B 30 W / 50 W / 100 W / 200 W A3A / A5A / 01A / 02A 200 W 02B 400 W 04A 500 W / 800 W / 1.0 kW 05A / 08A / 10A 1.5 kW 15A 2.0 kW / 3.0 kW 20A / 30A 5.0 kW 50A 6.0 kW / 7.5 kW 60A / 75A 11.0 kW / 15.0 kW 1AA / 1EA Reference 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.8 4.7.8
Single-phase
Three-phase
(2) Rack-mounted Type

Supply Voltage 100 V 200 V 100 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V SERVOPACK Capacity Model SGDM-D/DA-R 30 W / 50 W / 100 W A3B / A5B / 01B 30 W / 50 W / 100 W / 200 W A3A / A5A / 01A / 02A 200 W 02B 400 W 04A 500 W / 800 W / 1.0 kW 05A / 08A / 10A 1.5 kW 15A 2.0 kW / 3.0 kW 20A / 30A 5.0 kW 50A Reference 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6
Single-phase
Three-phase
(3) Duct-ventilated Type

Supply Voltage Three-phase 200 V 200 V Capacity 6.0 kW / 7.5 kW 11.0 kW / 15.0 kW SERVOPACK Model SGDM-D/DA-P 60A / 75A 1AA / 1EA Reference 4.9.1 4.9.2
4-16
4.7 Dimensional Drawings of Base-mounted SERVOPACK Model

4.7.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W to 100 W (A3BD to 01BD, A3BDA to 01BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W to 200 W (A3AD to 02AD, A3ADA to 02ADA)
5.5 (0.22) Mounting Hole Diagram 2M4 screw holes
SGDM-
160 (6.30)
Terminal block
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
CN3
CN1 6 (0.24) CN2 10 (0.39) 55 (2.17) 75 (2.95) * Nameplate 130 (5.12)
5 (0.20) *
160 (6.30) 149.50.5 (5.890.02) (Mounting pitch) 5 (0.20)

55 (2.17)
Ground terminal 6 2M4 screws (0.24)
* Reference length
Units: mm (in) Approx. mass: 0.8 kg (1.76 lb) 17 (0.67)
External Terminal Connector

Main circuit power supply L1 L2 Control power supply L1C L2C
Single-phase 100/200 VAC 50/60 Hz
SERVOPACK Connector Connector SERVOPACK Manufacturer Symbol Connector Model CN1 10250-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd. CN2 53460-0611 Molex Japan Co., Ltd. CN3 10214-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.
4-17
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.7.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD, 02BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD, 04ADA)
4.7.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD, 02BDA) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD, 04ADA)
5.5 (0.22) CN3 CN1 CN2
5* (0.20)
5.5 (0.22)
Mounting Hole Diagram 2M4 screw holes
25 (0.20) holes
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
YASKAWA
SGDM-
160 (6.30) 149.5 (5.89)
Terminal block
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
10 (0.39)
6 (0.24)
Nameplate 75 (2.95)* 130 (5.12)
5 (0.20)*
6 (0.24)
160 (6.30) 149.50.5 (5.890.02) (Mounting pitch) 12 (0.47) 75 (2.95)

* Reference length
Ground terminal 2M4 screws 12 (0.47)
5 (0.20) 63 (2.48) * 75 (2.95)

4-18
4.7.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD to 10AD, 05ADA to 10ADA)
96.2 (3.79) Terminal block 160 (6.30) 5 (0.20) hole
YASKAWA SERVOPACK200V
YASKAWA
94.4 (3.72)
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
CN3 CN1
5 (0.20)
CN2
Ground terminal 2M4 screws
Cooling fan
5.5 (0.22)
Mounting Hole Diagram
15 (0.59)
10 (0.39)
Nameplate 75 (2.95)* 180 (7.09)
160 (6.30) 149.50.5 (5.870.02) (Mounting pitch)
35 55 (2.17) (1.38) 90 (3.54)
8 (0.31)
2M4 screw holes
4
17 (0.67)
5 (0.20)*
27 (1.06) 90 (3.54)
* Reference length
Units: mm (in) Approx. mass: 1.7 kg (3.75 lb)

Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3 Control power supply L1C L2C
Three-phase 200 VAC 50/60 Hz
Single-phase 200 VAC 50/60 Hz
4-19
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.7.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD, 15ADA)
4.7.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD, 15ADA)

5.5 (0.22) 25 (0.20) holes Heat sink
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
YASKAWA
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
160 (6.30)
CN3 CN1 CN2
Nameplate 75 (2.95)* 180 (7.09)
5 (0.20)*
5 (0.20)
Terminal block
160 (6.30) 149.50.5 (5.890.02) (Mounting pitch)

1000.5 (3.940.02)
110 (4.33)
(0.20)* (Mounting pitch) 4 (0.16) 110 (4.33)
5* (0.20)
* Reference length
Cooling fan

4-20
4.7.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD to 30AD, 20ADA to 30ADA)

6 (0.24)
6 (0.24)
26 (0.24) holes Heat sink

YASKAWA SERVOPACK
Mounting Hole Diagram 4M5 tap
YASKAWA
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
CN3
CN3 250 (9.84) CN1 CN2
238.50.5 (9.390.02)
250 (9.84) 238.5 (9.39)
CN1
CN2
14-pin terminal M4 mounting screw
5.5* (0.22)
5.5 (0.22)*
(Mounting pitch)
Ground terminal 2M4 screws 5
6 (0.24)
Nameplate 180 (7.09)
(0.20)*
110 (4.33)
100 (3.94) 5 (0.20)* 75 (2.95)*
4 (0.16)
(3.940.02) 5 (0.20)* (Mounting pitch) 110 (4.33)
1000.5
5 (0.20)*
Nameplate
4
* Reference length
(100) 40 (1.57)* Cooling fan

Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3 Three-phase 200 VAC 50/60 Hz Control power supply L1C L2C Single-phase 200 VAC 50/60 Hz
4-21
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.7.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA)
4.7.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA)

6 (0.24) Heat sink 6 (0.24) 6-pin terminal M5 screw
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
Mounting Hole Diagram 4M5 screw taps
SGDM-50ADA
Ver.
4-pin terminal M4 screw CN3 CN1 CN2 250 (9.84)
L1 L2
L3
+1
250 (9.84) 238.5 (9.39)
+2 -
L1C L2C B1 B2 B3 U V W
238.50.5 (9.390.02) (Mounting pitch)
5* (0.20)
5 (0.20)*
75 (2.95)*
230 (9.06)
1.6 (0.06)
5.5 (0.22)*
5.7 (0.22) 125 (4.92) 135 (5.31)
Nameplate
5* (0.20)
Ground terminal M5 screw
3-pin terminal M5 screw
1250.5 (4.920.02) (Mounting pitch)
5.5 (0.22)
5 (0.20)*
* Reference length
(100)
83 (3.27)*

4-22
4.7.7 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA to 75ADA)

7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30)
Cooling fan 10 (0.39)
SERVOPARK 200V
SGDMVer.
CN8
POWER MODE/SET DATA/ BATTERY
YASKAWA
335 (13.19) Max. 350 (13.78)
282.6 (11.13) 100.5 (3.96)
21 (0.83) Control circuit terminal
Nameplate
CHARGE
WARNING
CN1 CN2
66 (2.60) 51 46 (2.01) 12.5 (0.49) (1.81)
L1 L2 L3 + B1 B2 U V W
125 (4.92)
19 (0.75)
30.5 171 (6.73) (1.20) 25 (0.98) 180 (7.09)
28.3 (1.11)* 25 (0.98)*
Max. 230 (9.06)

Main circuit terminal M6 Ground terminal M8
27 87.5 (3.44) 107 (4.21) (1.06) Max. 235 (9.25) Ground terminal
7.5 (0.30)*
41 123.5 (4.86) (1.61) (65.6)
7.5 (0.30)
9 (0.35)
25 (0.98)
Main circuit terminal
335 (13.19)
CN3 110 (4.33) CN5 Control circuit terminal M4 !
25 (0.98)
180 (7.09)
25 (0.98)*
A View A
145 (5.71)
90 (3.54)
* Reference length

External regenerative resistor B1 B2
Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3
Control power supply L1C L2C
4-23
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.7.8 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA to 1EADA)
4.7.8 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA to 1EADA)

7.5 (0.30)
7.5 (0.30)
Cooling fan
10 (0.39)
SERVOPACK 200V
SGDM- 1AADA Ver.
YASKAWA
CN3
POWER MODE/SET
CN8
DATA/
BATTERY
140 (5.51)
Regenerative resistor terminal M6 320 (12.60)

CHARGE
CN1 CN2
B1 B2
L1C L2C
Nameplate
160 (6.30)
L1 L2 L3 +1 -
46 (1.81)
U V W
26.5 (1.04)
(1.34)
30 200 (7.87) (1.18) 260 (10.24)
30 (1.18)*
7.5 (0.30)*
34 27 (1.06)
7.5* (0.30)
45 151 (5.94) (1.77)
7 (0.28)
34 (1.34)
17 (0.67) 125 (4.92) 126 (4.96) 285 (11.22)
435 (17.13)
Control circuit terminal M4
435 (17.13) 450 (17.72)
CN5
Main circuit Ground terminal M8 terminal M8 A View A
Main circuit terminal M8
Ground terminal M8
30 (1.18)
200 (7.87)
30 (1.18)*
145 (5.71) 224 (8.82) 257 (10.12) 271 (10.67)
* Reference length
Units: mm (in) Approx. mass: 26 kg (57.32 lb)
External Terminal Connector SERVOPACK Connector Connector SERVOPACK Manufacturer Symbol Connector Model CN1 10250-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd. CN2 53460-0611 Molex Japan Co., Ltd. CN3 10214-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.
Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3
External regenerative resistor B1 B2
4-24
4.8 Dimensional Drawings of Rack-mounted SERVOPACK Model

4.8.1 Single-phase 100 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W (A3BD-R to 01BD-R, A3BDA-R to 01BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 30 W/50 W/100 W/200 W (A3AD-R to 02AD-R, A3ADA-R to 02ADA-R)
17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30)

7.5 (0.30)
24.5 (0.96) 1.5 (0.06) 42 (1.65) 22.5 (0.89)* 32.5 (1.28)* 2 22.5 (0.89) (0.08) 5 (0.20) hole
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
2M4 screw holes

10 (0.39)
YASKAWA
SGDM-
MODE/SET
DATA/
195 (7.68) 160 (6.30) 180 (7.09)
CHANGE
POWER C N 3
Terminal block
CN3
L1 L2 +1 +2
L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 1
CN1 CN2
6 (0.24)
1800.5 (7.090.02) (Mounting pitch) 160 (6.30) Min.166 (6.54)
C N 2
7.5 (0.30)*
17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30)
5 (0.20) 6 (0.24) 10 (0.39)
Nameplate 75 (2.95) 130 (5.12)
10 (0.39)
32.5 (1.28)* 22.5 (0.89) 55 (2.17)
55 (2.17)

* Reference length

4-25
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.8.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD-R, 02BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD-R, 04ADA-R)
4.8.2 Single-phase 100 V: 200 W (02BD-R, 02BDA-R) Single-phase 200 V: 400 W (04AD-R, 04ADA-R)
17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30) 42 (1.65) 11.5 (0.45)* 24.5 (0.96) 32.5 (1.28)* 5 (0.20) hole
7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30)*
SGDM-
195 (7.68) 160 (6.30) 180 (7.09)
Terminal block
MODE/SET
DATA/
CHANGE
POWER C N 3
L1 L2 +1 +2
CN3 CN1 CN2

6 (0.24)
L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 1
C N 2
17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30)*
10 (0.39)*
1800.5 (7.090.02) (Mounting pitch) 160 (6.30) Min.166 (6.54)

42.5 (1.67)
10 (0.39)
21.5 (0.85) 42.5 (1.67)
2 (0.08)
6 (0.24)
5 (0.20)
Nameplate 75* (2.95) 130 (5.12)
10 (0.39)
32.5* (1.28)
75 (2.95)
75 (2.95)

* Reference length
External Terminal Connector SERVOPACK Connector Connector SERVOPACK Manufacturer Symbol Connector Model CN1 10250-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd. CN2 53460-0611 Molex Japan Co., Ltd. CN3 10214-52A2JL Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.
Main circuit power supply L1 L2
4-26
4.8.3 Three-phase 200 V: 500 W/750 W/1.0 kW (05AD-R to 10AD-R, 05ADA-R to 10ADA-R)
17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30) 42 (1.65) 25.5 (1.00) 46.5 43.5
(1.83)
(1.71)
YASKAWA SERVOPACK200V YASKAWA
96.2 (3.79)
22.5 (0.89)* 24.5 5 ( 0.20) hole (0.96) 2 (0.08) Terminal block
SGDM-
94.4 (3.72) 195 (7.68) 160 (6.30) 180 (7.09) 6 (0.24)
MODE/SET
DATA/
CHANGE L1 L2 L3 +1 +2
POWER C N 3
CN3 CN1 CN2
C N 1
L1C L2C B1 B2 B3 U V W C N 2
17.5 (0.69)
7.5 (0.30)
Cooling fan
5 (0.20)
Nameplate
1800.5 (7.090.02) 7.5 (0.30) (Mounting pitch) 10 160 (6.30) (0.39) Min.168 (6.61)
15 Ground (0.59) terminal 2M4 screws
35 (1.38)
10 (0.39) 55 (2.17)
75* (2.95)
180 (7.09)
90 (3.54)
2M4 screw holes
17 (0.67)
* Reference length
7.5 (0.30)*
10 (0.39)*
46.5 (1.83)
43.5 (1.71)*
90 (3.54)

4-27
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.8.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD-R, 15ADA-R)
4.8.4 Three-phase 200 V: 1.5 kW (15AD-R, 15ADA-R)

17.5 (0.69) 7.5 (0.30) 6 (0.24)
Heat sink

4M4 screw
2 5 (0.20) Flange
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
YASKAWA
195 (7.68) 17.5 (0.69)
CN3
CN1 CN2 Terminal block 75 (2.95)*
5 (0.20)
72 (2.83) 110 (4.33)
Flange
24.5 (0.96) 180 (7.09)
7.5 (0.30)* 6 (0.24)
Nameplate
180 0.5 (7.09 0.02) (Mounting pitch)

48 500.5 (1.89)* (1.970.02)
SGDM-
12 (0.47)*
(Mounting pitch)
D1
* Reference length
Cooling fan

4-28
4.8.5 Three-phase 200 V: 2.0 kW/3.0 kW (20AD-R to 30AD-R, 20ADA-R to 30ADA-R)

7.5 (0.30)* 17.5 (0.69)*
7.5 (0.30)*
Heat sink Flange

SGDM-
MODE/SET
DATA/
CHANGE
POWER
CN2
Y
14-pin terminal
6 (0.24)
(Mounting pitch)
CN1
2700.5 (10.630.02)
CN3
285 (11.22) 270 (10.63) 250 (9.84)
6 (.024)
7.5 (0.30)* 17.5 (0.69)*
15* 0.59
6 (0.24) 50 (1.97) 15 (0.59)* 80 (3.15) 110 (4.33) Ground terminal 2M4 screws
7.5 (0.30)*

Y Y
M4 mounting screw
Nameplate
24.5 (0.96) 75 (2.95)*
155.5 (6.12) 180 (7.09)
30 (1.18)*
500.5 (1.970.02)
4
30 (1.18)*
(Mounting pitch)
* Reference length
(100) 40 (1.57)*
Cooling fan
4-29
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.8.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA-R)
4.8.6 Three-phase 200 V: 5.0 kW (50ADA-R)

7.5 (0.30)* 17.5 (0.69)* 7.5 (0.30)* 2700.5 (10.630.02) 7.5 (0.30)*
Heat sink
6-pin terminal M5 screw
Flange
SGDM-50ADA-R
Ve r.
L1 L2
MODE/SET DATA/
CN3
POWER
CHANGE
L3 +1
285 (11.22) 270 (10.63) 250 (9.84)
+2
L1C L2C B1 B2 B3 U V W
CN2
5-pin terminal M4 screw 3-pin terminal M5 screw Nameplate 24.5 (0.96) 230 (9.06)
7.5 (0.30)*
17.5 (0.69)*
6 (0.24) 35 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97)* (1.38) 135 (5.31)
6 (0.24) (Mounting pitch) 50 35* 500.5 (1.38) (1.970.02) (1.97)*
CN1
75 (2.95)*
6 (0.24)
Ground terminal M5 screw
(Mounting pitch)
* Reference length
(100)
83 (3.27)*

4-30
4.9 Dimensional Drawings of Duct-ventilated SERVOPACK Model
4.9 Dimensional Drawings of Duct-ventilated SERVOPACK Model

4.9.1 Three-phase 200 V: 6.0 kW/7.5 kW (60ADA-P to 75ADA-P)
21.9 (0.86)* 7.5 (0.30)

34 4M6 taps (1.34) 82 (3.23)
7 (0.28)
SERVOPACK 200V
SGDMVer.
Cooling fan 10 (0.39)
CN8
POWER
YASKAWA
335 (13.19) Max.350 (13.78)
CN3 110 (4.33) 282.6 (11.13)
26 (0.24) holes
BATTERY
MODE/SET
DATA/
CN5
CHARGE

L1C L2C
WARNING
Control 21 circuit (0.83) terminal
CN1 CN2
Nameplate
312.2 (12.29)
Punched hole
125 (4.92)
100.5 (3.96)
51 (2.01)
L1 L2
66 (2.60) 46 12.5 (0.49) (1.81)

L3 + B1 B2 U V W
Main circuit terminal
25 (0.98)
316 (12.44) 335 (13.19)
2.5 (0.10)* 11.5 (0.45)* 7.5 (0.30)*
30.5 (1.20) 12.5 (0.49)
205 (8.07) Max.230 (9.06)

28.3 (1.11)* 12.5 (0.49) Ground terminal M8
87.5 27 (3.44)
15.9 (0.63)*
(1.06)
Ground terminal
107 (4.21) Max.235 (9.25)
7 (0.28)
5.5 (0.22)*
205 (8.07) 219 (8.62)
7 (0.28)
5.5 (0.22)*
A View A 145 (5.71)
90 (3.54)
* Reference length
7.9 (0.31)*
217.3 (8.56)*
4.8 (0.19)*

Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3 Control power supply L1C L2C External regenerative resistor B1 B2
4-31
7.5 (0.30)*
65.6* 41 123.5 (4.86) (1.61) (2.58) 19 (0.75) 171 (6.73)
7.5 (0.30)
9 (0.35)
7.5 (0.30)
4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings 4.9.2 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA-P/1EADA-P)
4.9.2 Three-phase 200 V: 11.0 kW/15.0 kW (1AADA-P/1EADA-P)

18.5 (0.73) 7.5 (0.30)*

Externals
Cooling fan
10 (0.39)
SERVOPACK 200V
SGDMVer.
YASKAWA
CN3
POWER MODE/SET
CN8
DATA/
BATTERY
413 (16.26)
140 (5.51) 320 (12.60) 26.5 (1.04)
CHARGE

CN1 CN2
E 160 (6.30)
L1 L2 L3 +1 P1 B r t
Regenerative resistor/ control circuit terminal Main circuit terminal
Punched hole
Nameplate
7.5 (0.30)*
46 (1.81)
11 (0.43)*
12.5 (0.49)
235 (9.25) 260 (10.24)
12.5 (0.49)*
Ground terminal M8
Ground terminal
8 (0.31)
8* (0.31)
View A
99 (3.90) 132 (5.20) 146 (5.75)
20 (0.79)
* Reference length

Main circuit power supply L1 L2 L3 Control power supply L1C L2C External regenerative resistor B1 B2
4-32
7.5 (0.30)*
34 27(1.06) (1.34) 151
7 (0.28)
18.5 (0.73)
45 (5.94) (1.77)
126 17 (0.67) 34 (4.96) 122 (4.80) (1.34) 282 (11.10)
4.5 (0.18)
235 (9.25) 244 (9.61)
4.5 (0.18)*
415 (16.34) 435 (17.13)
435 (17.13) 450 (17.72)
CN5 Regenerative Resistor terminal M6
9 (0.35) 7.5 (0.30)
5
Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices
5.1 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Servomotor Main Circuit Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
5.1.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.1.2 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.1.3 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes - - - - - - - - - - 5.1.4 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.1.5 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6
5.2 Servomotor Main Circuit Wire Size and Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8

5.2.1 Wire Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8 5.2.2 SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotor Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - - 5-9 5.2.3 SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotor Connector Configurations - - - - - - - - - - 5-12 5.2.4 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - 5-13 5.2.5 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - 5-15 5.2.6 SGMSH Servomotor (3000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - 5-17 5.2.7 SGMDH Servomotor (2000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments - - - - - - - - 5-18 5.2.8 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-19 5.2.9 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22 5.2.10 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25 5.2.11 SGMDH Servomotors (2000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28 5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29 5.2.13 Connector Dimensional Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38

5.3.1 Cable Types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.3.2 Single-phase 100 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.3.3 Single-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5.3.4 Three-phase 200 V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38 5-39 5-39 5-39
5-1
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices
5.4 Encoder Cables for CN2 Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40

5.4.1 Encoder Cable With Connectors For SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - -5-40 5.4.2 Encoder Cable With Connectors for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - -5-40 5.4.3 Encoder Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-41 5.4.4 Encoder Cable with a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-42 5.4.5 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-44 5.4.6 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - -5-45 5.4.7 Encoder Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-46
5.5 Connectors and Cables for Encoder Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48

5.5.1 Connectors and Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-48 5.5.2 Connectors and Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors - - - - - - - - -5-50 5.5.3 Connectors and Cables for SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-52
5.6 Flexible Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53 5.7 I/O Signal Cables for CN1 Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54
5.7.1 Standard Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-54 5.7.2 Connector Type and Cable Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-54 5.7.3 Connection Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-56
5.8 Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-57

5.8.1 Cables for Connecting Personal Computers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-57 5.8.2 Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-58 5.8.3 Cables for Analog Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-59 5.8.4 Connector Terminal Block Converter Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-60 5.8.5 Brake Power Supply Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-61 5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-63 5.8.7 Regenerative Resistor Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-65 5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-66 5.8.9 Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-68 5.8.10 Noise Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-69 5.8.11 Magnetic Contactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-74 5.8.12 Surge Suppressor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-76 5.8.13 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-78 5.8.14 Variable Resistor for Speed and Torque Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-80 5.8.15 Encoder Signal Converter Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-81
5-2
5.1 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Servomotor Main Circuit Cable

Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotor main circuit cables. When assembling the servomotor main circuit cable, refer to 5.2 Servomotor Main Circuit Wire Size and Connectors.
5.1.1 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes

SERVOPACK end 50 (1.97) L 35 (1.38) Finished dimension 8.2 (0.32) Servomotor end Units: mm (in)
M4 crimped terminal
Wire markers
Cap: 350780-1 (4-pin) Socket: 350536-6 (Chained)
Units: m (ft) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM00-03 SGMAH 200 V: 30 to 750 W 100 V: 30 to 200 W SGMPH 200 V: 100 to 750 W 100 V: 100 W and 200 W JZSP-CMM00-05 JZSP-CMM00-10 JZSP-CMM00-15 JZSP-CMM00-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM20-03 JZSP-CMM20-05 SGMPH 200 V: 1.5 kW JZSP-CMM20-10 JZSP-CMM20-15 JZSP-CMM20-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62)
5.1.2 Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes

SERVOPACK end 50 (1.97) Servomotor end L 35 (1.38) Finished dimension 7.3 (0.29) Units: mm (in)
M4 crimped terminals Wire markers
5-3
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.1.3 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes
Units: m (ft) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM10-03 SGMAH 200 V: 30 to 750 W 100 V: 30 to 200 W SGMPH 200 V: 100 to 750 W 100 V: 100 and 200 W JZSP-CMM10-05 JZSP-CMM10-10 JZSP-CMM10-15 JZSP-CMM10-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM30-03 JZSP-CMM30-05 SGMPH 200 V: 1.5 kW JZSP-CMM30-10 JZSP-CMM30-15 JZSP-CMM30-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62)
5.1.3 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes
SERVOPACK end (10) (0.39) 50 (1.97) 8.5 (0.33) Finished dimension 6.5 (0.26) Servomotor end L 35 (1.38) Units: mm (in)
Heat-shrinkable tube M4 crimped terminal Wire markers Cap: 350780-1 (4-pin) Socket: 350536-6 (Chained)
Units: m (ft) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM01-03 SGMAH 200 V: 30 to 750 W 100 V: 30 to 200 W SGMPH 200 V: 100 to 750 W 100 V: 100 W and 200 W JZSP-CMM01-05 JZSP-CMM01-10 JZSP-CMM01-15 JZSP-CMM01-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62)
5-4
5.1.4 Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes
SERVOPACK end 50 (1.97) (10) (0.39) 8.5 (0.33) Servomotor end L 35 (1.38) Finished dimension 7.0 (0.28) Units: mm (in)
Heat-shrinkable tube M4 crimped terminals Wire markers
Units: m (ft) Applicable Servomotor Models Cable Type JZSP-CMM11-03 SGMAH 200 V: 30 to 750 W 100 V: 30 to 200 W SGMPH 200 V: 100 to 750 W 100 V: 100 W and 200 W JZSP-CMM11-05 JZSP-CMM11-10 JZSP-CMM11-15 JZSP-CMM11-20 Cable Length (L) 3 (9.84) 5 (16.40) 10 (32.81) 15 (49.21) 20 (65.62)
5-5
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.1.5 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors
5.1.5 Cables for SGMCS Servomotors

Yaskawa provides cables only for SGMCS-B, C, D, and E servomotors. Cables for SGMCS-M, and N servomotors must be provided by the customer. Refer to 5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors.
(1) Cable Specifications

(a) Cable Type
Standard Type JZSP-CMM60-03 JZSP-CMM60-05 JZSP-CMM60-10 JZSP-CMM60-15 JZSP-CMM60-20 Flexible Type JZSP-CSM60-03 JZSP-CSM60-05 JZSP-CSM60-10 JZSP-CSM60-15 JZSP-CSM60-20 Length (L) 3 m (9.84 ft) 5 m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
M4 crimped terminals
Dimensional Drawing
SERVOPACK end
50 mm (1.97 in)
Servomotor end L
(b) Wiring Specifications

SERVOPACK end Lead Color Signal Red White Blue
Green/(yellow) Phase U Phase V Phase W
Servomotor end Signal Pin No.

Phase U Phase V Phase W
1 2 3 4
FG
FG
(2) Servomotor-end Connector Specifications

Items Manufacturer Plug Applicable Cable Outer Diameter Dimensional Drawings in mm (in) Description Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. JN1DS04FK1(Soldered) 5.7 mm (0.22 in) to 7.3 mm (0.29 in)
51.5 (2.03) max. No.1 No.2
15.5 (0.61)
18.8 (0.74)
19 (0.75)
No.3
Ground
Note: The mating connector type on servomotor: JN1AS04MK3
5-6
(3) Cable Specifications for SGMCS Servomotors

Items Cable Type Designation * Specifications Standard Cable JZSP-CSM90- (20m (65.6 ft) max.) UL2517 (Max. operating temperature: 105 C (221 F)) AWG20 6C For power line: AWG20 (0.52 mm2 (0.205 in2)) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.53 mm (0.06 in) Flexible Cable JZSP-CSM80- (20m (65.6 ft) max.) UL2517 (Max. operating temperature: 105 C (221 F)) AWG22 6C For power line: AWG22 (0.33 mm2 (0.013 in2)) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.37 mm (0.054 in)
Finished Dimension Internal Configuration and Lead Color
For brake line: AWG20 0.52 mm2 For brake line: AWG22 (0.33 mm2 2 (0.205 in )) (0.013 in2)) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.53 mm (0.06 in) 1.37 mm (0.054 in) 7 0.3 mm ( 0.2760.012 in)
Black Green/ (Yellow) Black
Blue White
Red
5
5m (16.4 ft), 10m (32.8 ft), 15m (49.2 ft), 20m (65.6 ft) Yaskawa Standard Specifications (Standard Length) * Specify the cable length in of cable type designation Example: JZSP-CSM90-15 (15 m (49.2 ft))
5-7
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.1 Wire Size
5.2 Servomotor Main Circuit Wire Size and Connectors
SGDM-
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 L3 1 2
C N 3
L1 L2 L3 1 2
C N 3
C N 1
L1C L2 B1 B2 B3
C N 1
C N 2
U V W
C N 2
UVW
Encoder cable
UVW
Encoder cable
5.2.1 Wire Size

(1) 100 V and 200 V SGMAH Servomotors
Rated Output Three-phase 100 V Three-phase 200 V 30 W to 750 W AWG20
(2) 100 V and 200 V SGMPH Servomotors

Rated Output Three-phase 100 V Three-phase 200 V 100 W AWG22 200 to 400 W AWG20 750 W 1.5 kW AWG16 (HIV 1.25)
(3) 200 V SGMGH Servomotors for 1500 min-1

Rated Output Three-phase 200 V 450 W 850 W 1.3 kW 1.8 kW 2.9 kW 4.4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11.0 kW 15.0 kW HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV5.5 HIV8 HIV14 HIV22
5-8
(4) 200 V SGMGH Servomotors for 1000 min-1

Rated Output Three-phase 200 V 300 W 600 W 900 W 1.2 kW 2.0 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV5.5 HIV8 HIV14
(5) 200 V SGMSH Servomotors

Rated Output Three-phase 200 V 1.0 kW 1.5 kW 2.0 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.0 kW HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV5.5 HIV8
(6) 200 V SGMDH Servomotors

Rated Output Three-phase 200 V 2.2 kW 3.2 kW 4.0 kW HIV5.5 HIV8
(7) 200 V SGMCS Servomotors

Servomotor model Rated output Wire size Servomotor model Rated output Three-phase 200 V 02B 42 W 05B 105 W 07B 147 W 04C 84 W 10C 209 W 14C 08D 17D 356 W 25D 393 W 16E 335 W 35E 550 W
293 W 168 W AWG20 2ZN
45M 707 W
80M
1AM
80N
1EN
1.26 kW 1.73 kW 1.26 kW 2.36 kW 3.14 kW HIV3.5 HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV5.5
HIV2.0
5.2.2 SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotor Connectors for Standard Environments

The SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors do not conform to the IECs IP67 classification (IP67 Protective Construction Standard) and the European Safety Standards.
(1) 30 to 750 W SGMAH Servomotor Connector Kit

Applicable Servomotor Models Without brakes 100 V: 30 to 200 W 200 V: 30 to 750 W With brakes Type JZSP-CMM9-1 JZSP-CMM9-2
(2) 100 W to 1.5 kW SGMPH Servomotor Connector Kit

Applicable Servomotor Models 100 V: 100 W and 200 W Without brakes 200 V: 100 to 750 W With brakes Without brakes 200 V: 1.5 kW With brakes Type JZSP-CMM9-1 JZSP-CMM9-2 JZSP-CMM9-3 JZSP-CMM9-4
5-9
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.2 SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotor Connectors for Standard Environments
(3) 30 to 750 W SGMAH and 100 to 750 W SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes
(a) Connector Type: JZSP-CMM9-1
Units: mm (in) Connector on servomotor Servomotor main circuit connector 27.7 (1.09) 4
Cap Socket
1 27.4 (1.08) 14.7 (0.58)
Type 350780-1 350570-3 or 350689-3 Soldered type
7.6 (0.30)
(b) Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG Lead Color Red White Blue Green/Yellow
(4) 30 to 750 W SGMAH and 100 to 750 W SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes
Units: mm (in) Connector on servomotor Servomotor main circuit connector 3
1 14 (0.55)
Cap Socket
6 27.4 (1.08)
20.3 (0.80) 28.4 (1.12)
Type 350781-1 350570-3 or 350689-3 Soldered type

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG Brake terminal Brake terminal Lead Color Red White Blue Green/Yellow Black Black Remarks No polarity
5-10
(5) 1.5 kW SGMPH Servomotors Without Brakes

Units: mm (in) Connector on servomotor Servomotor main circuit connector 27.7 (1.09) 4
Cap Socket
1 27.4 (1.08) 14.7 (0.58)
Type 350780-1 350536-6 or 350550-6 (No. 1 to 4) Soldered type
7.6 (0.30)

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG Lead Color Red White Blue Green/Yellow
(6) 1.5 kW SGMPH Servomotors With Brakes

Units: mm (in) Connector on servomotor Servomotor main circuit connector 3
5
Cap Type 350781-1 350536-6 or 350550-6 (No. 1 to 4) 350570-3 or 350689-3 (No. 5 and 6) Soldered type
1 14 (0.55)
Socket
6 27.4 (1.08)
20.3 (0.80) 28.4 (1.12)

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG Brake terminal Brake terminal Lead Color Red White Blue Green/Yellow Black Black Remarks No polarity
5-11
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.3 SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotor Connector Configurations
5.2.3 SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotor Connector Configurations

The SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH servomotor connector configurations are shown below. The connectors conforming to IP67 and the European Safety Standards are not available for SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors.
Select and prepare the proper plug and cable clamp. 1 Configurations of Standard Environment Connectors
Encoder
SGM H servomotor Standard straight plug
Connector on servomotor Standard L-shaped plug
Non-waterproof cable clamp
Cable
2 Configurations of Connectors Conforming to IP67 and the European Safety Standards
Encoder
SGM H servomotor Plug Conduit
Cable
Waterproof straight plug Connector on servomotor Waterproof cable clamp Waterproof L-shaped plug Cable
Connector Manufacturers
Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.
Connector Plug Cable clamp Conduit Type Manufacturer Japan Aviation Electronics JL (JA) Industry, Ltd. CE DDK Electronics, Inc. Nippon Flex Co., Ltd.
5-12
5.2.4 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments

(1) Without Holding Brakes
The specifications are same for both three-phase 200 V and 400 V servomotors.
Capacity (kW) 0.45 0.85 1.3 1.8 2.9 4.4 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
Connector on Servomotor MS3102A18-10P
Plug Straight MS3106B18-10S L-shaped MS3108B18-10S
Cable Clamp MS3057-10A
MS3102A22-22P
MS3106B22-22S
MS3108B22-22S
MS3057-12A
MS3102A32-17P
MS3106B32-17S
MS3108B32-17S
MS3057-20A
(2) With Holding Brakes

The 5.5 to 15.0 kW servomotors require (a) servomotor-end connector and (b) brake power supply connector.
(a) Servomotor-end Connectors
Capacity (kW) 0.45 0.85 1.3 1.8 2.9 4.4 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
MS3102A24-10P
MS3106B24-10S
MS3108B24-10S
MS3057-16A
MS3102A32-17P
MS3106B32-17S
MS3108B32-17S
MS3057-20A
5-13
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.4 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments
(b) Brake Power Supply Connectors

5.5 to 15.0 kW Servomotors
Capacity (kW) Connector on Three-phase Servomotor 200 V 5.5 7.5 MS3102A10SL-3P 11.0 15.0
Plug Straight L-shaped Cable Clamp
MS3106A10SL-3S
MS3108A10SL-3L
MS3057-4A
(3) SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) Main Circuit Connector Pin Arrangement
(a) Without Holding Brakes
0.45 to 15.0 kW Servomotor Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No. Signal Phase U A
B
D C
B C D
Phase V Phase W FG (Frame Ground)
Servomotor-end connector
(b) With Holding Brakes

1 0.45 to 4.4 kW Servomotor Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
F E D G C A B
Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W
Pin No. E* F* G
Signal Brake terminal Brake terminal
A B C D
FG (Frame Ground) * No polarity
2 5.5 to 15.0 kW Brake Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
A C B
A* B* C
Servomotor-end connector Brake-end connector Servomotor
* No polarity
Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No. Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame Ground) A
D C
A B
B C D
5-14
5.2.5 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments

Capacity (kW) 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.5
MS3102A22-22P MS3102A32-17P
MS3106B22-22S MS3106B32-17S
MS3108B22-22S MS3108B32-17S
MS3057-12A MS3057-20A

4.0 kW and 5.5 kW servomotors require (a) servomotor-end connector and (b) brake power supply connector.
5
Capacity (kW) 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.5 Connector on Servomotor MS3102A20-15P Plug Straight MS3106B20-15S L-shaped MS3108B20-15S Cable Clamp MS3057-12A
MS3102A24-10P MS3102A32-17P
MS3106B24-10S MS3106B32-17S
MS3108B24-10S MS3108B32-17S
MS3057-16A MS3057-20A
Capacity (kW) 4.0 5.5
Connector on Servomotor MS3102A10SL-3P
Plug Straight MS3106A10SL-3S L-shaped MS3108A10SL-3S
5-15
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.5 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments
(3) SGMGH (1000 min-1) Servomotor Main Circuit Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No.
D C A B
Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame Ground)
A B C D

Pin No.
F E G C A B
Pin No. E* F* G
A B C D
2 4.0 kW and 5.5 kW Brake Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
A C B
A* B* C
Servomotor-end connector Brake-end connector
* No polarity
Servomotor Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
D C A B
A B C D
5-16
5.2.6 SGMSH Servomotor (3000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments

Capacity (kW) 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
MS3102A22-22P
MS3106B22-22S
MS3108B22-22S
MS3057-12A

Capacity (kW) 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
5
MS3102A24-10P
MS3106B24-10S
MS3108B24-10S
MS3057-16A
5-17
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.7 SGMDH Servomotor (2000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments
(3) SGMSH Servomotor (3000 min-1) Main Circuit Connector Pin Arrangement
Pin No. A
D C A B
B C D

Pin No.
F E D G C A B
Pin No. E* F* G
A B C D
5.2.7 SGMDH Servomotor (2000 min-1) Connectors for Standard Environments

(1) With and Without Holding Brakes
Capacity (kW) 2.2 3.2 4.0
(2) Servomotor Main Circuit Connector Pin Arrangement

Without Brakes
Pin No.
D C A B
With Brakes
E D F G C A B
Pin No. A B C D
Pin No. E* F* G
Signal Brake terminal
A B C D
Brake terminal
FG * No polarity (Frame Ground)
5-18
5.2.8 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(1) 0.45 to 4.4 kW Servomotors Without Holding Brakes
Select a cable clamp in accordance with the applied cable diameter.
INFO
The straight plug type JA06A-22-22S-J1-EB and L-shaped plug type JA08A-22-22S-J1-EB conform to the IP67 Protective Construction Standard only.
Capacity (kW)
Connector on Servomotor
Plug Straight L-shaped Cable Clamp CE3057-10A-1
0.45 0.85 1.3
CE05-2A1810PD-B
CE05-6A18-10SDB-BSS
CE05-8A18-10SDB-BAS
CE3057-10A-2 CE3057-10A-3 JL04-2022CK(09)
1.8 2.9 4.4
JL04HV-2E2222PE-B
JL04V-6A22-22SE-EB or JA06A-22-22S-J1-EB
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14)
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 10.5 (0.41) to 14.1 (0.56) 8.5 (0.33) to 11.0 (0.43) 6.5 (0.26) to 8.7 (0.34) 6.5 (0.26) to 9.5 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) to 13.0 (0.51) 12.9 (0.51) to 15.9 (0.63)
(2) 5.5 to 15.0 kW Servomotors Without Holding Brakes

Select a conduit in accordance with the applied cable diameter.
Capacity (kW)
Conduit Plug Straight L-shaped
ACS-16RL-MS32F ACA-16RL-MS32F ACS-20RL-MS32F ACA-20RL-MS32F 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 ACS-24RL-MS32F ACA-24RL-MS32F JL04V-2E32-17PE-B JL04V-6A32-17SE ACS-28RL-MS32F ACA-28RL-MS32F ACS-32RL-MS32F ACA-32RL-MS32F ACS-36RL-MS32F ACA-36RL-MS32F
5-19
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.8 SGMGH Servomotor (1500 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(3) 0.45 to 4.4 kW Servomotors With Holding Brakes

INFO
The straight plug type JA06A-24-10S-J1-EB and L-shaped plug type JA08A-24-10S-J1-EB conform to IP67 Protective Construction Standard only.
Capacity (kW)
Plug Straight L-shaped Cable Clamp JL04-2022CK(09)
0.45 0.85 1.3
JL04V-2E20-15PE-B
JL04V-6A20-15SE-EB
JL04V-8A2015SE-EB
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14) JL04-2428CK(11)
1.8 2.9 4.4
JL04V-2E24-10PE-B
JL04V-8A2410SE-EB or JA08A-24-10S-J1-EB
JL04-2428CK(14) JL04-2428CK(17) JL04-2428CK(20)
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 6.5 (0.26) to 9.5 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) to 13.0 (0.51) 12.9 (0.51) to 15.9 (0.63) 9.0 (0.35) to 12.0 (0.47) 12.0 (0.47) to 15.0 (0.59) 15.0 (0.59) to 18.0 (0.71) 18.0 (0.71) to 20.0 (0.79)

The servomotor end connector (a) and brake power supply connector (b) are required. Select a conduit in accordance with the applied cable diameter.
(a) Servomotor-end Connector
Capacity (kW)
ACS-16RL-MS32F ACA-16RL-MS32F ACS-20RL-MS32F ACA-20RL-MS32F 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 ACS-24RL-MS32F ACA-24RL-MS32F JL04V-2E32-17PE-B JL04V-6A32-17SE ACS-28RL-MS32F ACA-28RL-MS32F ACS-32RL-MS32F ACA-32RL-MS32F ACS-36RL-MS32F ACA-36RL-MS32F
5-20
Capacity (kW) 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
Plug Straight L-shaped Cable Clamp
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 3.6 (0.14) to 5.6 (0.22)
CE05-2A10SL- CE05-6A10SL-3SC- CE05-8A10SL-3SC3PC-B B-BSS B-BAS
CE3057-4A-1

(a) Servomotors Without Holding Brakes
Pin No. Signal Phase U A
B
D C
B C D
Phase V Phase W FG (Frame Ground)
(b) Servomotors With Holding Brakes

Pin No.
F E D G C A B
Pin No. E* F* G
A B C D
2 5.5 to 15.0 kW Brake Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
A C B
A* B* C
Servomotor-end connector Brake-end connector Servomotor
* No polarity
Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No. Signal Phase U Phase V Phase W FG (Frame Ground) A
D C
A B
B C D
5-21
5.2.9 SGMGH Servomotor (1000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(1) Servomotors Without Holding Brakes
(a) For 0.3 to 3.0 kW Servomotors
INFO
Capacity (kW)
0.3 0.6 0.9
CE05-2A18-10PD-B
CE05-6A18-10SDB-BSS
CE05-8A18-10SDB-BAS
CE3057-10A-2 CE3057-10A-3 JL04-2022CK(09)
1.2 2.0 3.0
JL04HV-2E22-22PE-B
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14)
(b) For 4.0 kW and 5.5 kW Servomotors

Select a conduit in accordance with the applied cable diameter.
Capacity (kW)
Conduit Plug Straight ACS-16RL-MS32F ACS-20RL-MS32F L-shaped ACA-16RL-MS32F ACA-20RL-MS32F ACA-24RL-MS32F ACA-28RL-MS32F ACA-32RL-MS32F ACA-36RL-MS32F
4.0 5.5
ACS-24RL-MS32F JL04V-2E32-17PE-B JL04V-6A32-17SE ACS-28RL-MS32F ACS-32RL-MS32F ACS-36RL-MS32F
5-22

INFO
Capacity (kW)
0.3 0.6 0.9
JL04V-2E20-15PE-B
JL04V-6A20-15SE-EB
JL04V-8A20-15SE-EB
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14) JL04-2428CK(11)
1.2 2.0 3.0
JL04V-2E24-10PE-B
JL04-2428CK(14) JL04-2428CK(17) JL04-2428CK(20)
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 6.5 (0.26) to 9.5 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) to 13.0 (0.51) 12.9 (0.51) to 15.9 (0.63) 9.0 (0.35) to 12.0 (0.47) 12.0 (0.47) to 15.0 (0.59) 15.0 (0.59) to 18.0 (0.71) 18.0 (0.71) to 20.0 (0.79)
(3) 4.0 kW and 5.5 kW Servomotors With Holding Brakes

The servomotor end connector (a) and brake power supply connector (b) are required. Select a conduit in accordance with the applied cable diameter.
(a) Servomotor-end Connector
Capacity (kW)
ACS-16RL-MS32F ACA-16RL-MS32F ACS-20RL-MS32F ACA-20RL-MS32F 4.0 5.5 JL04V-6A3217SE ACS-24RL-MS32F ACA-24RL-MS32F ACS-28RL-MS32F ACA-28RL-MS32F ACS-32RL-MS32F ACA-32RL-MS32F ACS-36RL-MS32F ACA-36RL-MS32F
JL04V-2E32-17PE-B
5-23
(b) Brake Power Supply Connector
Capacity (kW) 4.0 5.5
Connector on Servomotor CE05-2A10SL-3PC-B
Plug Straight CE05-6A10SL-3SCB-BSS L-shaped CE05-8A10SL-3SCB-BAS Cable Clamp CE3057-4A-1
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 3.6 (0.14) to 5.6 (0.22)

(a) Servomotors Without Holding Brakes
Pin No.
D C A B
A B C D
(b) Servomotors With Holding Brakes

Pin No.
F E G C A B
Pin No. E* F* G
A B C D
2 4.0 kW and 5.5 kW Brake Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
A C B
A* B* C
Servomotor-end connector Brake-end connector
* No polarity
Servomotor Connector Pin Arrangement

Pin No.
D C A B
A B C D
5-24
5.2.10 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(1) Servomotors Without Holding Brakes
INFO
Capacity (kW)
1.0 1.5 2.0
CE05-2A1810PD-B
CE05-6A18-10SDB-BSS
CE05-8A18-10SDB-BAS
CE3057-10A-2 CE3057-10A-3 JL04-2022CK(09)
3.0 4.0 5.0
JL04HV-2E22-22PE-B
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14)
5-25
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.10 SGMSH Servomotors (3000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(2) Servomotors With Holding Brakes

INFO
Capacity (kW)
1.0 1.5 2.0
JL04V-2E20-15PE-B
JL04V-6A20-15SE-EB
JL04V-8A20-15SE-EB
JL04-2022CK(12) JL04-2022CK(14) JL04-2428CK(11)
3.0 4.0 5.0
JL04V-2E24-10PE-B
JL04-2428CK(14) JL04-2428CK(17) JL04-2428CK(20)
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 6.5 (0.26) to 9.5 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) to 13.0 (0.51) 12.9 (0.51) to 15.9 0.63) 9.0 (0.35) to 12.0 (0.47) 12.0 (0.47) to 15.0 (0.59) 15.0 (0.59) to 18.0 (0.71) 18.0 (0.71) to 20.0 (0.79)
5-26

(a) Without Brakes
Pin No. A
D C A B
B C D
(b) With Brakes

Pin No.
F E D G C A B
Pin No. E* F* G
A B C D
5-27
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.11 SGMDH Servomotors (2000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
5.2.11 SGMDH Servomotors (2000 min-1) Connectors Conforming to IP67 and European Safety Standards
(1) Servomotors With and Without Holding Brakes
INFO
Capacity (kW)
2.2 3.2 4.0
JL04V-2E24-10PE-B
JL04-2428CK(14) JL04-2428CK(17) JL04-2428CK(20)
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 9.0 (0.35) to 12.0 (0.47) 12.0 (0.47) to 15.0 (0.59) 15.0 (0.59) to 18.0 (0.71) 18.0 (0.71) to 20.0 (0.79)
(2) SGMDH (2000 min-1) Servomotor Main Circuit Connector Pin Arrangement
Without Brakes
Pin No.
D C A B
With Brakes
E D F G C A B
Pin No. A B C D
Pin No. E* F* G
Signal Brake terminal
A B C D
Brake terminal
FG * No polarity (Frame Ground)
5-28
5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors

(1) For SGMCS-B, C, D, and E Connectors
(a) Servomotor Main Circuit Connectors
Items Manufacturer Plug Applicable Cable Outer Diameter Dimensional Drawings in mm (in) Description Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. JN1DS04FK1(Soldered) 5.7 mm (0.22 in) to 7.3 mm (0.29 in)
51.5 (2.03) max. No.1 No.2
15.5 (0.61)
18.8 (0.74)
19 (0.75)
No.3
Ground
Note: The mating connector type on servomotor: JN1AS04MK3

SERVOPACK end Lead Color Signal Red White Blue
Green/(yellow) Phase U Phase V Phase W
Servomotor end Signal Pin No.

Phase U Phase V Phase W
1 2 3 4
FG
FG
(2) For SGMCS-M and N Connectors

(a) Connector Configuration Diagram
SGMCS Servomotor Standard straight plug Non-waterproof cable clamp Servomotor-end connector Cable
Standard L-shaped plug
Servomotor end Receptacle MS3102A18-10P
Cable end (Not provided by Yaskawa) L-shaped plug Straight plug Cable clamp MS3108B18-10S MS3106B18-10S MS3057-10A
5-29
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.12 Connectors for SGMCS Servomotors
(b) MS3108B: L-shaped Plug Shell Dimensional Drawings

@
Units: mm ( in)
J A Q L
Model
Shell Size
Joint Screw A 1 1/8 18UNEF
Length of Joint Portion J0.12 18.26 (0.719)
Overall Length L max. 68.27 (2.69)
Outer Diameter of Joint Nut

+0 Q-0.38
R 0.5 20.5 (0.81)
U 0.5 30.2 (1.19)
W U
Cable Clamp Set Screw V 120UNEF
Effective Screw Length W max. 9.53 (0.38)
MS3108B
18
34.13 (1.34)
(c) MS3106B: Straight Plug Shell Dimensional Drawings

Units: mm (in)
L J A Q Y W
Model
Shell Size
Joint Screw A 1 1/8 18UNEF
Length of Joint Portion J0.12 18.26 (0.719)
Overall Length L max. 52.37 (2.06)
Outer Diameter of Joint Nut

+0 Q-0.38
Cable Clamp Set Screw V 1-20UNEF
Effective Screw Length W max 9.53 (0.38)
Maximum Width Y max. 42 (1.65)
MS3106B
V
18
34.13 (1.34)
(d) MS3057A-A Cable Clamp with Rubber Bushing Dimensional Drawings

A C 1.6 V Q G J (Inner bushing diameter) E (Inner cable clamp diameter)
H (Slide range)
Units: mm (in)
Cable Clamp Type Applicable Connector Shell Size 18 Overall Length A0.7 23.8 (0.94) Effective Screw Length C 10.3 (0.41) E 15.9 (0.63) G0.7 31.7 (1.25) H 3.2 (0.13) J 14.3 (0.56) Set Screw V 1-20UNEF Outer Diameter Q0.7 30.1 (1.19) Attached Bushing
MS3057-10A
AN3420-10
5-30
5.2.13 Connector Dimensional Drawings

(1) Connectors Conforming to European Safety Standards (TV Certified), Manufactured by DDK Electronics, Inc.
Plug (Waterproof when inserted only)
Conduit Manufacturers
Nippon Flex Co., Ltd. DAIWA DENGYO CO., Ltd. NEOFLEX Co., Ltd. SANKEI Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Cable
Receptacle (Waterproof) Box mounting type
Straight plug Cable clamp (Waterproof when inserted only) Cable L-shaped plug
Note: Possible to connect with an MS connector.
(a) CE05 Series Products

For more information, contact the manufacturer of the conduit being used.
Receptacle Plug Type Plug Straight plug L-shaped plug Plug Straight plug L-shaped plug Model CE05-6A10SL-3SC-B CE05-6A10SL-3SC-B-BSS CE05-8A10SL-3SC-B-BAS CE05-6A18-10SD-B CE05-6A18-10SD-B-BSS CE05-8A18-10SD-B-BAS Waterproof Cable Clamp Applicable with conduit CE3057-4A-1 (D265) Applicable with conduit CE3057-10A- (D265) Dimensional Drawings (d) (b) and (e) (c) and (e) (d) (b) and (e) (c) and (e)
CE05-2A10SL-3PC-B
CE05-2A18-10PD-B
5-31
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.2.13 Connector Dimensional Drawings
(b) Straight Plugs

Positioning key A L 7.85 (0.31) min. V
Units: mm (in) Model Joint Screw A 5/8-24UNEF-2B 1 1/8-18UNEF-2B Outer Diameter of Nut Q +0 -0.38 (-0.015) 22.22 (0.87) 34.13 (1.34) C0.8 (0.03) 18.6 (0.73) 32.1 (1.26) Max. Overall Length L 40 (1.57) 57 (2.24) Cable Clamp Mounting Screw V 5/8-24UNEF-2A 1-20UNEF-2A
CE05-6A10SL-3SC-BSS CE05-6A18-10SD-B-BSS
Note: The plug CE05-6A-P-B-BSS is pin inserting type. The mating receptacle is socket inserting type.
(c) L-shaped Plugs

Positioning key A L
R W
V
V screw
(S)
Units: mm (in) Joint Screw A Outer Diameter of Nut Q +0 -0.38 (-0.015) 22.22 (0.87) 34.13 (1.34)
Max. Overall Length L 47.8 (1.88) 69.5 (2.74) Cable Clamp Mounting Screw V R0.7 U0.7 (S)1 (0.03) (0.03) (0.04) 7.9 (0.31) 13.2 (0.52) 21.0 (0.83) 30.2 (1.19) 28.9 (1.14) 43.4 (1.71) Effective Screw Length W 7.5 (0.30) 7.5 (0.30)
Model
CE05-8A10SL-3SC-B-BAS 5/8-24UNEF-2B CE05-8A18-10SD-B-BAS 1 1/8-18UNEF-2B
5/8-24UNEF-2A 1-20UNEF-2A
Note: The plug CE05-8A-P-B-BAS is pin inserting type. The mating receptacle is socket inserting type.
5-32
(d) Plug
Positioning key A screw (J) Gasket
V screw H
Units: mm (in) Model Joint Screw A

5/8-24UNEF-2B 1 1/8-18UNEF-2B
Outer Diameter of Nut Q +0 -0.38 (-0.015) 22.22 (0.87) 34.13 (1.34)
Overall Length L1 (0.04)

23.3 (0.92) 33.7 (1.33)
Conduit Mounting Screw V

9/16-24UNEF-2A 1-20UNEF-2A
E0.5 B (0.02) 7.5 (0.30) 11.74 (0.46)
+0.05 (+0.002) -0.25 (-0.010)
H0.1 (0.004) 5.6 (0.22) 6.4 (0.25)
(J)
13.2 (0.52) 19.0 (0.75)
CE05-6A10SL-3SC-B CE05-6A18-10SD-B
12.5 (0.49) 23.5 (0.93)
Note: 1. The plug CE05-6A-P-B is pin inserting type. The mating receptacle is socket inserting type. 2. Consult the conduit manufacturer if a conduit is required.
5-33
(e) CE3057-A-(D265) Waterproof Cable Clamp With Rubber Bushing

(D) A C 1.6 (0.06) V screw
E (Cable clamp inner diameter) (Bushing inner diameter) H (Movable range on one side)
Units: mm (in) Model Applicable Shell Size 10SL Overall Length A0.7 (0.03) 20.6 (0.811) Outer Diameter Q0.7 (0.03) 20.6 (0.811) Effective Screw Length C 10.3 (0.406) (D) (41.3) (1.63) E 7.9 (0.311) F 5.6 (0.220) 14.1 (0.555) 11 (0.433) 8.7 (0.34) G0.7 (0.03) 22.2 (0.87) H 1.6 (0.063)
CE3057-4A-1(D265) CE3057-10A-1(D265) CE3057-10A-2(D265) CE3057-10A-3(D265)
18
23.8 (0.937)
30.1 (1.19)
10.3 (0.406)
(41.3) (1.63)
15.9 (0.626)
31.7 (1.25)
3.2 (0.13)
Model
CE3057-4A-1(D265) CE3057-10A-1(D265) CE3057-10A-2(D265) 1-20UNEF-2B CE3057-10A-3(D265)
Cable Clamp Mounting Screw V 5/8-24UNEF-2B
Attached Bushing Model CE3420-4-1 CE3420-10-1 CE3420-10-2 CE3420-10-3
Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) (For reference) 3.6 (0.14) to 5.6 (0.22) 10.5 (0.41) to 14.1 (0.56) 8.5 (0.33) to 11 (0.43) 6.5 (0.26) to 8.7 (0.34)
Note: The cable clamp CE3057-6A for the shell size 14 is not available. Use together with a conduit.
5-34
(2) Connectors Conforming to European Safety Standards (TV Certified), Manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.
Plug (Waterproof when inserted only) Conduit Manufacturers
Nippon Flex Co., Ltd. DAIWA DENGYO Co., Ltd.
Cable
Receptacle (Waterproof) Box mounting type
NEOFLEX Co., Ltd. SANKEI Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Straight plug Cable Clamp (Waterproof when inserted only) Cable L-shaped plug
Note: Possible to connect with an MS connector
(a) JL04V Series Products

For more information, contact the manufacturer of the conduit being used.
Receptacle Plug Type Plug Straight plug L-shaped plug Plug Straight plug L-shaped plug Plug Straight plug L-shaped plug Plug Model JL04V-6A20-15SE JL04V-6A20-15SE-EB JL04V-8A20-15SE-EB JL04V-6A22-22SE JL04V-6A22-22SE-EB JL04V-8A22-22SE-EB JL04V-6A24-10SE Waterproof Cable Clamp Applicable with conduit JL04-2022CK(14) or applicable with conduit Applicable with conduit JL04-2022CK(14) or applicable with conduit Dimensional Drawings (d) (b) and (e) (c) and (e) (d) (b) and (e) (c) and (e) (d) (b) and (e) (c) and (e) (d)
JL04V-2E20-15PE-B
JL04HV-2E22-22PE-B
JL04HV-2E24-10PE-B JL04V-2E32-17PE-B
JL04-2028CK(14) or applicable JL04V-6A24-10SE-EB with conduit JL04V-8A24-10SE-EB JL04V-6A32-17SE Applicable with conduit
5-35
(b) Straight Plugs
Positioning key
BQ
F (Wrench width)
BG BB
(Effective screw length) V screw L

Units: mm (in) Model JL04V-6A20-15SE-EB JL04V-6A22-22SE-EB Outer Diameter of Nut Q0.8 (0.03) 37.3 (1.47) 40.5 (1.59) B0.2 (0.01) 29.72 (1.17) 30.05 (1.18) L0.8 (0.03) 58.5 (2.30) 67.63 (2.66) F0.5 (0.02) 33 (1.30) 35 (1.38) G0.5 (0.02) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67) Cable Clamp Mounting Screw V 1-3/16-18UNEF-2A 1-3/16-18UNEF-2A
Note: For the conduit grounding, contact manufacturer of the conduit being used.
(c) L-shaped Plugs

Positioning key F (Wrench width)
V screw 100.5 (0.390.02) (Effective screw length)
B L G
Units: mm (in) Outer Diameter of Nut Q +0 -0.38 (-0.015) JL04V-8A20-15SE-EB JL04V-8A22-22SE-EB 37.3 (1.47) 40.5 (1.59) B0.8 (0.03) 60.5 (2.38) 60.23 (2.37) L0.8 (0.03) 74.2 (2.92) 73.93 (2.91) D0.8 (0.03) F0.5 (0.02) G0.5 (0.02) Cable Clamp Mounting Screw V
Model
32 (1.26) 33 (1.30) 17 (0.67) 1-3/16-18UNEF-2A 32 (1.26) 35 (1.38) 17 (0.67) 1-3/16-18UNEF-2A
5-36
(d) Plugs
Positioning key L
BQ
V screw
BB
Conduit mounting dimensions E

Units: mm (in) Outer Diameter of Nut Q0.8 (0.03) 37.3 (1.47) 40.5 (1.59) 56.3 (2.22) B0.2 (0.01) 27.0 (1.06) 29.7 (1.17) 45.4 (1.79) L0.4 (0.02) 31.5 (1.24) 31.2 (1.23) 35.8 (1.41) Conduit Mounting Screw V 1-1/8-18UNEF-2A 1-1/4-18UNEF-2A 1-7/8-16UN-2A
Model
E max.
JL04V-6A20-15SE JL04V-6A22-22SE JL04V-6A32-17SE
8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 10 (0.39)
(e) Waterproof Cable Clamps With Rubber Bushings
V screw
BQ
5
BE (Cable clamp inner diameter) F (Clamp range)
Bushing
Units: mm (in) Model JL04-2022CK(14) Applicable Shell Size

(0.03)
A0.8 37.3 (1.47) 42.9 (1.69)
Q0.8
(0.03)
(0.03)
C0.8 24.3 (0.96) 26.2 (1.03)
(0.03)
D0.8 53.8 (2.12) 56.2 (2.21)
E0.8
(0.03)
20 (0.79) and 22 (0.87) 24 (0.94) and JL04-2428CK(17) 28 (1.10)
34.9 (1.37) 42.1 (1.66)
15.9 (0.63) 18 (0.71)
Applicable Cable Range (0.03) in mm (in) 4 12.9 (0.51) to 1-3/16-18UNEF-2B (0.16) 15.9 (0.63) 4.8 15 (0.59) to 1-7/16-18UNEF-2B (0.19) 18 (0.71) F0.8 Mounting Screw V
5-37
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.3.1 Cable Types
5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size

IMPORTANT
1. Wire sizes were selected for three cables per bundle at 40 C (104 F) ambient temperature with the rated current. 2. Use cable with a minimum withstand voltage of 600 V for main circuits. 3. If cables are bundled in PVC or metal ducts, consider the reduction ratio of the allowable current. 4. Use heat-resistant cables under high ambient or panel temperatures where normal vinyl cables will rapidly deteriorate. 5. Use cables within the allowable moment of inertia. 6. Do not use cables under continuous regenerative state.
5.3.1 Cable Types

Cable Types Symbol PVC IV HIV Name Normal vinyl cable 600-V vinyl cable Temperature-resistant vinyl cable Allowable Conductor Temperature C (F) 60 (140) 75 (167)
The following table shows the wire size and allowable current for three cables. Use a cable whose specifications meet or are less than the values in the table.
600-V Heat-resistant Vinyl Cables (HIV)

Nominal Cross Section Diameter mm2 (in2) 0.5 (0.00078) Configuration Number of wires/mm2 (in2) Conductive Resistance /km 39.5 26.0 24.4 15.6 9.53 5.41 3.47 2.41 1.35 0.85 Allowable Current at Ambient Temperature A 30C (86F) 6.6 8.8 9.0 12.0 23 33 43 55 79 91 40C (104F) 5.6 7.0 7.7 11.0 20 29 38 49 70 81 50C (122F) 4.5 5.5 6.0 8.5 16 24 31 40 57 66
AWG Size
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4
19/0.18 (0.00028) 30/0.18 0.75 (0.00116) (0.00028) 37/0.18 0.9 (0.00140) (0.00028) 50/0.18 1.25 (0.00193) (0.00028) 2.0 (0.00310) 7/0.6 (0.00093) 3.5 (0.00543) 7/0.8 (0.00124) 5.5 (0.00853) 7/1.0 (0.00155) 8.0 (0.0124) 7/1.2 (0.00186) 14.0 (0.0217) 7/1.6 (0.00248) 22.0 (0.0341) 7/2.0 (0.00310)
Note: The values in the table are only for reference.
5-38
5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size

External Terminal Name Main circuit power supply input terminals Servomotor connection terminals Control power supply input terminals External regenerative resistor connection terminals Ground terminal Terminal Symbol L1, L2 U, V, W L1C, L2C B1, B2 SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD A5BD 01BD 02BD A3BDA A5BDA 01BDA 02BDA HIV1.25 HIV2.0 HIV1.25 HIV1.25 HIV1.25 HIV2.0 or more

External Terminal Name Main circuit power supply input terminals Servomotor connection terminals Control power supply input terminals External regenerative resistor connection terminals Ground terminal Terminal Symbol L1, L2 U, V, W L1C, L2C B1, B2 SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3AD A5AD 01AD 02AD 04AD A3ADA A5ADA 01ADA 02ADA 04ADA HIV1.25 HIV2.0 HIV1.25 HIV1.25 HIV1.25 HIV2.0 or more
5.3.4 Three-phase 200 V

External Terminal Name Main circuit power supply input terminals Servomotor connection terminals Control power supply input terminals External regenerative resistor connection terminals Ground terminal Terminal Symbol L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L1C, L2C B1, B2 Terminal Symbol L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L1C, L2C B1, B2 SERVOPACK Model SGDMA5AD 08AD 10AD 15AD 20AD 30AD A5ADA A8ADA 10ADA 15ADA 20ADA 30ADA HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV2.0 HIV3.5 HIV5.5 HIV1.25 HIV1.25 HIV2.0 or more SERVOPACK Model SGDM50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA HIV5.5 HIV8 HIV14 HIV22 HIV8 HIV14 HIV22 HIV1.25 HIV5.5 HIV8.0 HIV2.0 or more HIV22 HIV2.0 HIV3.5
External Terminal Name Main circuit power supply input terminals Servomotor connection terminals Control power supply input terminals External regenerative resistor connection terminals Ground terminal
5-39
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.4.1 Encoder Cable With Connectors For SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
5.4 Encoder Cables for CN2 Connector

When assembling the encoder cable, refer to 5.5 Connectors and Cables for Encoder Signals. Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. for IP67 applicable cables, flexible cables and connectors.
5.4.1 Encoder Cable With Connectors For SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
Cable Type JZSP-CMP00-03 JZSP-CMP00-05 JZSP-CMP00-10 JZSP-CMP00-15 JZSP-CMP00-20 Cable Length (L) 3 m (9.84 ft) 5 m (16.40 ft) 10 m (32.81 ft) 15 m (49.21 ft) 20 m (65.62 ft) Dimensional Drawing
SERVOPACK end L Finished dimension 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Encoder end
Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
Soldered socket connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
5.4.2 Encoder Cable With Connectors for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
(1) Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Straight Plug
SERVOPACK end Encoder end Finished dimension 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) MS3106B20 29S (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057 12A Cable clamp
(2) Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder L-shaped Plug

SERVOPACK end
L
Encoder end
Finished dimension 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) MS3108B20 29S (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057 12A Cable clamp
5-40
5.4.3 Encoder Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
(1) Cable Type
SERVOPACK end L Finished dimension 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Encoder end 60 mm (2.36 in)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
Wire markers
(2) Encoder-end Connector Kit

Type JZSP-CMP9-2 Manufacturer Molex Japan Co., Ltd.
Socket (Soldered)
(3) Encoder Plug Connector Pin Arrangement

16-bit Serial Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 BAT(+) BAT() PS /PS 4 5 6 Orange White/ Orange Light blue White/ Light blue 13-bit Serial Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 4 5 6 PS /PS Light blue White/ Light blue
Plug: JZSP-CMP9-1 (SERVOPACK end) Socket: JZSP-CMP9-2 (Encoder end)
5-41
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.4.4 Encoder Cable with a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
5.4.4 Encoder Cable with a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
(1) Cable Type
SERVOPACK end L Finished dimension 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) Encoder end 60 mm (2.36 in)
C D G H S T
Wire markers
(2) Encoder-end Connector

Plug
Cable clamp
Cable
Plug
Cable clamp
Cable
MS3102A20-29P
Plug (Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Type Model Straight MS3106B20-29S L-shaped MS3108B20-29S
Cable Clamp (Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057-12A
5-42

K M A N B T P C D J S R E H G F L
17-bit Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Lead Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Color Color A K B L Light PS M C blue White/ /PS Light D N blue E P F R White/ PG0V Black BAT() G S Orange PG5V Red BAT(+) Orange H T J FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire
17-bit Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Lead Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Color Color A K B L Light PS M C blue White/ /PS Light D N blue E P F R G H J PG0V PG5V FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire Black Red S T
5-43
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.4.5 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
5.4.5 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors

(1) Flexible Cable With Connectors
SERVOPACK end L Finished dimension 6.8 mm (0.27 in) Encoder end
Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co. Ltd.)
Soldered socket connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
(2) Flexible Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads
(a) Cable Type
SERVOPACK end
60 mm (2.36 in) 20 mm 1 (0.79 in)
2 3 4 5 6
Encoder end
Finished dimension 6.8 mm (0.27 in)
Heat-shrinkable tube Wire markers Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
(b) Encoder-end Connector Kit

Socket (Soldered)
Type JZSP-CMP9-2
Manufacturer Molex Japan Co., Ltd.
(c) Encoder Plug Connector Pin Arrangement

16-bit Serial Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 BAT(+) Orange White/ 4 BAT() Orange 5 PS Light blue White/ 6 /PS Light blue 13-bit Serial Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 4 5 6 PS /PS Light blue White/ Light blue
5-44
5.4.6 Encoder Flexible Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
(1) Flexible Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Straight Plug
SERVOPACK end Encoder end Finished dimension 6.8 mm (0.27 in) Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) MS3106B20 29S (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057 12A Cable clamp
(2) Flexible Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder L-shaped Plug
SERVOPACK end
L
Encoder end
Finished dimension 6.8 mm (0.27 in) Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.) MS3108B20-29S (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057-12A Cable clamp
(3) Flexible Cable With a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads
(a) Cable Type
SERVOPACK end
L
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
Encoder end
60 mm (2.36 in) 20 mm (0.79 in)
Finished dimension 6.8 mm (0.27 in)

Heat-shrinkable tube Wire markers Crimped connector (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
(b) Encoder-end Connector

Plug Cable clamp Cable Plug Cable clamp Cable
MS3102A20-29P
Plug (Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Type Model Straight MS3106B20-29S L-shaped MS3108B20-29S
Cable Clamp (Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) MS3057-12A
5-45
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.4.7 Encoder Cables for SGMCS Servomotors
(c) Encoder Plug Connector Pin Arrangement

M A N B T P C K R D S J E H G F L
17-bit Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Lead Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Color Color A K B L Light PS C M blue White/ /PS Light D N blue E P F R White/ PG0V Black BAT() G S Orange PG5V Red BAT(+) Orange H T J FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire
17-bit Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Lead Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Color Color A K B L Light PS C M blue White/ /PS Light D N blue E P F R G H J PG0V PG5V FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire Black Red S T
5.4.7 Encoder Cables for SGMCS Servomotors

If you use cables with loose leads or manufacture the cables, connect the shield wire of the encoder cable to the connector frame ground.
(1) Cable with Connectors

(a) Cable Type
Standard Type JZSP-CMP60-03 JZSP-CMP60-05 JZSP-CMP60-10 JZSP-CMP60-15 JZSP-CMP60-20 Flexible Type JZSP-CSP60-03 JZSP-CSP60-05 JZSP-CSP60-10 JZSP-CSP60-15 JZSP-CSP60-20 Length (L) 3 m (9.84 ft) 5 m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
Plug connector (crimped) (Molex Japan Co.) Straight plug (caulking) (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.)
Dimensional Drawing
SERVOPACK end L Encoder end

SERVOPACK end Pin No. Signal PG5V 1 PG0V 2 5 PS 6 /PS Shell FG Servomotor end Pin No. Lead Color 4 Red Black 9 1 Light blue Light blue/white 2 7 FG Shield
Shield wire
5-46
(2) Cable with a SERVOPACK Connector and Encoder Loose Leads

(a) Cable Type
Standard Type JZSP-CMP03-03 JZSP-CMP03-05 JZSP-CMP03-10 JZSP-CMP03-15 JZSP-CMP03-20 Flexible Type JZSP-CMP13-03 JZSP-CMP13-05 JZSP-CMP13-10 JZSP-CMP13-15 JZSP-CMP13-20 Length (L) 3 m (9.84 ft) 5 m (16.4 ft) 10 m (32.8 ft) 15 m (49.2 ft) 20 m (65.6 ft)
Plug connector (crimped) (Molex Japan Co.) Wire markers SERVOPACK end L
Dimensional Drawing
Encoder end 60mm (2.36 in)
1 2 3 4 5 6

SERVOPACK end
Pin No. Signal
Encoder (Servomotor) end

Lead Color Light blue/white Light blue White/orange Orange Black Red Marker
6 5 4 3 2 1 Shell
/PS PS BAT(-) BAT(+) PG0V PG5V FG
6 5 4 3 2 1
Shield wire Note: The signals BAT(+) and BAT(-) are used when using an absolute encoder.
5-47
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.5.1 Connectors and Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors
5.5 Connectors and Cables for Encoder Signals

The IP67 applicable cables, flexible cables and connectors are options. Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.
5.5.1 Connectors and Cables for SGMAH and SGMPH Servomotors

(1) Cable Type
Cables for Maximum 20 m (65.62 ft) Wiring Distance Cable Type Cable Length 5 m (16.40 ft) JZSP-CMP09-05 10 m (32.81 ft) JZSP-CMP09-10 15 m (49.21 ft) JZSP-CMP09-15 20 m (65.62 ft) JZSP-CMP09-20
Cables for Maximum 50 m (164.04 ft) Wiring Distance Cable Type Cable Length 30 m (98.43 ft) JZSP-CMP19-30 40 m (131.23 ft) JZSP-CMP19-40 50 m (164.04 ft) JZSP-CMP19-50
(2) SERVOPACK-end Connector for CN2

Model Manufacturer Units: mm (in) Dimensional Drawing
11 (0.43) 18.4 (0.72 ) Plug connector (Soldered)
JZSP-CMP9-1
Molex Japan Co., Ltd.
33 (1.3) 37.4 (1.47)

Model Manufacturer Units: mm (in) Dimensional Drawing
Socket (Soldered) 12 (0.47) 43.5 (1.71) 18.8 (0.74)
JZSP-CMP9-2
Molex Japan Co., Ltd.
5-48
(4) Encoder Cable Specifications

Cable Type Cable Length Basic Specifications Finished Dimensions JZSP-CMP09- 20 m (65.62 ft) max. T/20276-SB AWG222C+AWG242P 6.5 mm (0.26 in) JZSP-CMP19- 50 m (164.04 ft) max. T/20276-SB AWG162C+AWG262P 6.8 mm (0.27 in)
Light blue
Internal Configuration and Lead Colors
Light blue/ White
Black Black
Orange
Orange/ White
Red Orange
Orange/ White
Light blue Light blue/ White
Red
Yaskawa Standard Specifications (Standard Length)
5 m (16.40 ft), 10 m (32.81 ft), 15 m (49.21 ft), 20 m (65.62 ft)
30 m (98.43 ft), 40 m (131.23 ft), 50 m (164.04 ft)

16-bit Serial Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 BAT(+) Orange White/ 4 BAT() Orange 5 PS Light blue White/ 6 /PS Light blue 13-bit Serial Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Pin No. Signal Color 1 PG5V Red 2 PG0V Black 3 4 5 6 PS /PS Light blue White/ Light blue
5-49
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.5.2 Connectors and Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
5.5.2 Connectors and Cables for SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH Servomotors
(1) Cable Type
Cables for Maximum 20 m (65.62 ft) Wiring Distance Cable Type Cable Length 5 m (16.40 ft) JZSP-CMP09-05 JZSP-CMP09-10 JZSP-CMP09-15 JZSP-CMP09-20 10 m (32.81 ft) 15 m (49.21 ft) 20 m (65.62 ft)
Cables for Maximum 50 m (164.04 ft) Wiring Distance Cable Type Cable Length 30 m (98.43 ft) JZSP-CMP19-30 JZSP-CMP19-40 JZSP-CMP19-50 40 m (131.23 ft) 50 m (164.04 ft)
(2) SERVOPACK-end Connector for CN2

Model JZSP-CMP9-1 Manufacturer Molex Japan Co., Ltd. Dimensional Drawing
Plug connector (Soldered)

(a) Connector for the Standard Environments
Encoder-end Connector Type Straight Plug L-shaped Plug Cable Clamp MS3106B20-29S MS3108B20-29S MS3057-12A
(b) IP67 Applicable Connector
Encoder-end Connector Type Connector on Servomotor Straight Plug L-shaped Plug Cable Clamp JL04-2022CKE(09) * 97F3102E20-29P JA06A-20-29S -J1-EB * JA08A-20-29S -J1-EB * JL04-2022CKE(12) * JL04-2022CKE(14) * * Manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Applicable Cable Range in mm (in) 6.5 (0.26) to 9.5 (0.37) 9.5 (0.37) to 13 (0.51) 12.9 (0.51) to 15.9 (0.63)
5-50
(4) Encoder Cable Specifications

Cable Type Cable Length Basic Specifications Finished Dimension JZSP-CMP09- 20 m (65.62 ft) max. T/20276-SB AWG22 2C+AWG24 2P 6.5 mm (0.26 in) JZSP-CMP19- 50m (164.04 ft) max. T/20276-SB AWG16 2C+AWG26 2P 6.8 mm (0.27 in)
Light blue
Internal Configuration and Lead Colors
Red
Light blue/ White
Black
Black
Orange Orange/ White Light blue Light blue/ White
Orange
Orange/ White
Red
5 m (16.40 ft), 10 m (32.81 ft), 15 m (49.21 ft), 20 m (65.62 ft)
30 m (98.43 ft), 40 m (131.23 ft), 50 m (164.04 ft)

M A N B T P C K R D S J E H G F L
17-bit Absolute Encoder Connection Specifications Lead Lead Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Color Color A K B L Light PS C M blue White/ /PS Light D N blue E P F R White/ PG0V Black BAT() G S Orange PG5V Red BAT(+) Orange H T J FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire
17-bit Incremental Encoder Connection Specifications Pin No. A B C D E F G H J Signal PS /PS PG0V PG5V FG (Frame Ground) Shield wire Lead Color Light blue White/ Light blue Black Red Pin No. K L M N P R S T Signal Lead Color
5-51
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.5.3 Connectors and Cables for SGMCS Servomotors
5.5.3 Connectors and Cables for SGMCS Servomotors

(1) Encoder Cable Connector Specifications
Items Manufacturer Connector Type SERVOPACK end Molex Japan Co., Ltd. 55100-0600 (Soldered type) or 55102-0600 (Caulking type) 55100-0600 (Soldered) when using a connector kit Servomotor end Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Straight plug JN1DS10SL1 (Caulking type) Socket plug JN1-22-22S-PKG100 Applicable cable outer diameter in mm (in): 5.7 (0.22) to 7.3 (0.29) Applicable wire size: AWG21 to 25 Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 0.8 to 1.5 mm (0.031 to 0.059) Caulking tool (Hand Tool) model: CT150-2-JN
51.5 mm (2.03 in) max. 18.8
3 7 1 4
19 (0.75)
Appearance
10 (0.39)
36 (1.42)
10
Arranged Model
Order them from Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd. Note: The mating connector type on servomotor: JN1AS10FL1
JZSP-CMP9-1
(2) Cable Specifications for SGMCS Servomotors

Items Cable Type * Cable Length Specifications Standard Cable JZSP-CMP09- Flexible Cable JZSP-CSP39-
20 m (65.6 ft) max. UL20276 (Max. operating temperature: UL20276 (Max. operating temperature: 80C (176 F)) 80C (176 F)) AWG22 2C + AWG24 2P AWG22 2C + AWG24 2P AWG22 (0.33 mm2 (0.013 in2)) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.15 mm (0.045 in) AWG24 (0.20 mm2 (0.008 in2)) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.09 mm (0.043 in) 6.5 mm (0.26 in) AWG22 (0.33 mm2 (0.013 in2) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.35 mm (0.053 in) AWG24 (0.20 mm2 (0.008 in2) Outer diameter of insulating sheath: 1.21 mm (0.048 in) 6.8 (0.27 in)
Finished Dimensions Internal Configuration and Lead Colors
Blue Blue/ White Orange Orange/ White
Black/ Light blue Red/ Light blue Black Orange Black/ Pink Red/ Pink Green
Red
Cable length: 5 m (16.4 ft), 10 m (32.8 ft), 15 m (49.2 ft), 20 m (65.6 ft)
* Specify the cable length in of cable type designation. Example: JZSP-CMP09-05 (5 m (16.4 ft))
5-52
5.6 Flexible Cables
5.6 Flexible Cables

(1) Life of Flexible Cable
The flexible cable supports 10,000,000 or more operations of bending life with the recommended bending radius R = 90 mm (3.54 in) under the following test conditions.
Conditions
1. Repeat moving one end of the cable forward and backward for 320 mm (12.60 in) with using the test equipment shown in the following. 2. Connect the lead wires in parallel, and count the number of cable return motion times until a lead wire is disconnected. Note that one reciprocating is counted as one test.
Shifting distance 320 mm (12.60 in)
Shifting end Bending radius R=90 mm (3.54 in)
Fixed end
Note: 1. The life of flexible cable differs largely depending on the amount of mechanical shocks, mounting to the cable, and fixing methods. The life of flexible cable is limited under the specified conditions. 2. The life of flexible cable indicates the number of bending times in which lead wires are electrically conducted and by which no cracks and damages that affects the performance of cable sheathing are caused. Disconnecting the shield wire is not taken into account.
(2) Wiring Precautions

Even if the recommended bending radius R is respected in the mechanical design, incorrect wiring may cause the early disconnection. Observe the following precautions when wiring.
(a) Cable twisting

Straighten the flexible cables wiring. Twisted cables causes the early disconnection. Check the indication on the cable surface to make sure that the cable is not twisted.
(b) Fixing method

Do not fix the moving points of the flexible cable, or stress on the fixed points may cause early disconnection. Fix the cable at the minimum number of points.
(c) Cable length

If the cable length is too long, it may cause the cables sagging. Besides the cable length is too short, it may cause the excessive tension on the fixed points that will cause the early disconnection. Use a flexible cable with the optimum length.
(d) Interference between cables

Avoid interference between cables. Interference limits the motion of flexible cable, which causes early disconnection. Keep enough distance between cables, or provide a partition when wiring.
5-53
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.7.1 Standard Cables
5.7 I/O Signal Cables for CN1 Connector

5.7.1 Standard Cables
For the connection diagram, refer to 5.7.3 Connection Diagram.
(1) Cable Types

Cable Type JZSP-CKI01-1 JZSP-CKI01-2 JZSP-CKI01-3 Cable Length (L) 1 m (3.28 ft) 2 m (6.56 ft) 3 m (9.84 ft)
(2) Dimensional Drawing

SERVOPACK end
Connector: 10150-6000EL(50P) Shell: 10350-52A0-008 Sleeve F2 (black) Cable (black) SSRFPVV-SB AWG#28 25P 2.8 (0.11) UL20276 VW-1SC wire markers
+0.39 100 +10 ) 0 (3.94 0
Units: mm (in)
* Manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Ltd.
5.7.2 Connector Type and Cable Size

Use the following connector and wire when assembling the cable. The CN1 connector includes a set of case and a connector.
Connector Type JZSP-CKI9 Case Type 10350-52A0-008 Qty 1 set Type 10150-3000VE* Connector Qty 1
* Manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Ltd.
(1) Dimensional Drawing of Case

14.0 (0.55) Units: mm (in) 18.0 (0.71) 46.5 (1.83) 39.0 (1.54) 5.7 (0.22) 23.8 (0.94) 17.0 (0.67)
41.1 (1.62)
52.4 (2.06) 12.7 (0.50)
5-54
5.7 I/O Signal Cables for CN1 Connector
(2) Dimensional Drawing of Connector

Units: mm (in) 2.3 (0.09) 2.54 (0.10) 1.27 (0.05)
5.1 (0.20)
41.1 (1.62) Pin No. 1 9.1 (0.36)

7.5 (0.30)
Pin No. 2
Pin No. 26
1.27 (0.05) 30.48 (1.20) 36.7 (1.44)
15
12.7 (0.50)
(2.9) (0.11) (6.6) (0.26)
19.3 (0.76)
(3) Cable Size

Item Cable Applicable Wires Finished Dimension Specifications Use twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire. AWG24, 26, 28, 30 16 mm (0.63 in) or less
5-55
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.7.3 Connection Diagram
5.7.3 Connection Diagram

SERVOPACK end Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Case Signal SG SG SEN V-REF SG PULS /PULS T-REF SG SIGN /SIGN /CLR CLR PCO /PCO BAT(+) BAT(-) /V-CMP+ /V-CMP/TGON+ /TGON/S-RDY+ /S-RDYALM+ ALMPAO /PAO PBO /PBO ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 /S-ON /P-CON P-OT N-OT /ALM-RST /P-CL /N-CL +24V-IN Lead Color Orange Orange Gray Gray White White Yellow Yellow Pink Pink Orange Orange Gray Gray White White Yellow Yellow Pink Pink Orange Orange Gray Gray White White Yellow Yellow Pink Pink Orange Orange Gray Gray White White Yellow Yellow Pink Pink Orange Orange Gray Gray White White Yellow Yellow Pink Pink Marking Color Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Dots 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Host controller end

Lead Marker No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 represents twisted-pair wires.
Shield
5-56
5.8 Peripheral Devices

5.8.1 Cables for Connecting Personal Computers
(1) For 25-pin Connector Cable for NEC PC-98 Series PC
(a) Cable Type: JZSP-CMS01 (b) Dimensional Drawing
Units: mm (in)
Personal computer end SERVOPACK end Half-pitch connector D-sub connector (25-pin) Plug: 10114-3000VE 17JE-23250-02 D8A Shell: 10314-52A0-008 (Daiich Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) (Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) 39 (1.54) 38 (1.50) 200050 (78.741.97) Personal computer end Signal RXD TXD 0V RTS CTS FG Pin No. 2 3 5 7 8 Case SERVOPACK end Pin No. Signal 2 /TXD 4 /RXD 14 0V Case FG
47 (1.85)
14
8 Cable type: AWG26 3C UL2464 2 M2.6 screws 2 M2.6 screws 14
1 7
25
13
Shield wire
(2) D-sub, 9-pin Connector Cable for IBM PC Compatible

Units: mm (in) Personal computer end SERVOPACK end Half-pitch connector Plug: 10114-3000VE D-sub connector (9-pin) Shell: 10314-52A0-008 17JE 13090 02 D8A (Daiichi Denshi Kogyo Co., Ltd.) (Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) 200050 (78.741.97) 39 (1.54) 38 (1.50)
29.5 (1.16)
5
Personal computer end Signal RXD TXD 0V RTS CTS FG Pin No. 2 3 5 7 8 Case SERVOPACK end Pin No. Signal 2 /TXD /RXD 4 14 0V Case FG
6 9
1 5
32 (1.26)
1 7
Cable type: AWG26 3C UL2464 2 M2.6 screws 2 M2.6 screws
14
Shield wire
5-57
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.2 Digital Operator
(3) 14-pin Half-pitch Connector Cable for NEC PC-98 Series PC

Units: mm (in) Personal computer end Half-pitch connector Plug: 10114 3000VE Shell: 10314 52F0 008 (Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) 39 (1.54) 29.5 (1.16)
SERVOPACK end Half-pitch connector Plug: 10114 3000VE Shell: 10314 52A0 008 (Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) 39 (1.54)
29.5 (1.16)
Personal computer end Signal RXD TXD RTS CTS GND FG FG Pin No. 1 9 10 4 14 12 Case
SERVOPACK end Pin No. Signal 2 TXD 4 RXD 14 GND Case FG
200050 (78.741.97) 5 (0.20)
8 14
1 7
1 7
Label Cable: AWG26 3C UL2464 2 M2.6 screws
14
Shield wire
5.8.2 Digital Operator

(1) Model JUSP-OP02A-2 with a 1m (3.28 ft)-connection Cable
YASKAWA
SERVOPACK
CN3 Digital Operator Connect to CN3

Units: mm (in) 63 (2.48) 2 (0.08) 4.5 (0.18) 50 (1.97) mounting holes 18.5 (0.73) 7 (0.28)
125 (4.92)
YASKAWA
26 (1.02)
39 (1.54)
29.5 (1.16)
5-58
(8) (0.31)
135 (5.31)
(3) Other Types of the Applicable Connection Cables: JZSP-CMS00-

The following cables are applicable for longer distance connection.
Units: mm (in) Digital Operator end 30 (1.18) 17.3 (0.68) 2 10 1 9 SERVOPACK end 39 (1.54) 29.5 (1.16) 8 11 1 7
Cable Type
L
JZSP-CMS00-1 JZSP-CMS00-2 JZSP-CMS00-3
Cable Length (L) 1 m (3.28 ft) 1.5 m (4.92 ft) 2 m (6.56 ft)
5.8.3 Cables for Analog Monitor

(1) Cable Type: JZSP-CA01 (DE9404559)
Connect the specified cables to CN5 connector for monitoring the analog monitor signals. For details, refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor.
With the front cover open Cable for Analog Monitor
CN5
20.2 (0.80)
MODE/SET
DATA/
CHARGE
POWER
INFO
Specify the cable type either JZSP-CA01 or DE9404559 when ordering the cable for analog monitor.

Socket: DF11-4DS-2C Connector: DF11-2428SCF
+0.79 1000 +20 -0 mm (39.37 -0
Black Black 3 1 4 2 White Red Viewed from the cable
in)
* Manufactured by Hirose Electric Corporation.
(3) Specifications
Pin No. 1 2 3 and 4 Cable Color Red White Signal Analog Monitor 2 Analog Monitor 1 Monitoring Item Motor speed: 1V/1000 min-1 Torque reference: 1V/100% rated torque
Black (2 cables) GND (0 V)
Note: The above monitoring items are the factory settings. The monitoring items can be changed by setting the parameter Pn003. Refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor.
5-59
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.4 Connector Terminal Block Converter Unit
5.8.4 Connector Terminal Block Converter Unit

(1) Model: JUSP-TA50P
The connection between the connector terminal block converter and the SERVOPACK is shown below.
YASKAWA
SERVOPACK CN1
-0 mm (19.69 Attached cable length: 500 +50 +1.97 0 in)
Connector terminal block converter unit model: JUSP-TA50P

1 1 1 19 33 16 32 50 49 2 50
(2) Dimensional Drawings of Terminal Block

Units: mm (in)
7 (0.28)
29.5 (1.16)
29.5 (1.16)
15.5 (0.61)
2M3 tapped holes 247.5 (9.74) 3.5 (0.14)
Terminal block (50P) M3.5 screw

1 19 33
Connector plug (50P) 7 (0.28) MR-50RMD2

16 32 50 49 50
15.5 (0.61)
1 1 2
23.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14) 247.5 (9.74)
3.5 (0.14) 3.5 (0.14)
43.5 (1.71)
(62) (2.44)
2 (0.08)
With terminal block cover removed
Can be fixed on DIN rail
(3) Dimensional Drawing of Cable

Units: mm (in)
SERVOPACK end connector (50P) 10150-6000EL(Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) Shell 10350-52AO-008 (Sumitomo 3M Ltd.) Cable (black) AWG#28 25P UL20276 VW-1SC Connector terminal block converter unit end connector (50P) MRP-50F01 (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Case MP-50L (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
500
+50 0
(19.69 +1.97 ) 0
5-60
20.5 (0.81)
45 (1.77)
45 (1.77)
5.8.5 Brake Power Supply Unit

(1) Model: LPSE-2H01, LPDE-1H01
Manufactured by Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. 200 V input: LPSE-2H01 100 V input: LPDE-1H01
(2) Specifications
Rated output voltage: 90 VDC Maximum output current: 1.0 ADC Lead wire length: 500 mm (19.69 in) each Maximum ambient temperature: 60C (140 F) Lead wires: Color coded. Refer to the table below.
AC Input End 100 V 200 V Blue/White Yellow/White Brake End Red/Blue

50 (1.97) 30 (1.18)
Nameplate
Lead wire
11 (0.43)
Units: mm (in)
(4) Internal Circuits

The brake power supply circuit can be opened and closed either on AC or DC side. However, if the wiring distance on DC side is too long, the brake circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of switching noises. When switching the circuit on AC side, install a surge suppressor model CR50500BL for the brake power supply near the brake coil to reduce the influence of switching noises. When switching the circuit on DC side, the influence of the switching noise is minimal, even without installing a surge suppressor. However, the surge voltage at switching may damage the brake coil. Install a surge suppressor near the brake coil to prevent the damage to the brake coil in addition to the built-in surge suppressor.
(a) Internal Circuit for 200 VAC Brake Power Supply Model: LPSE-2H01
Yellow AC side 180 to 230 V White
Surge suppressor Diode Surge suppressor
20 (0.79)
2 Mounting holes 3 (0.12) (Spot facing 5.5 (0.22) and 4 (0.16) long
25 (0.98)
Red DC (Brake) side No polarity Black
5-61
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.5 Brake Power Supply Unit
(b) Internal Circuit for 100 VAC Brake Power Supply Model: LPDE-1H01
Blue AC side 90 to 120 V White
Surge suppressor
Diode bridge
Red
Surge DC (Brake) side suppressor No polarity
Black
Noise Filter for Brake Power Supply Use the following noise filter at the brake power input for 400 W or less servomotors with holding brakes. Model: FN2070-6/07 (Manufactured by Schaffner Electronic.) Refer to 5.8.10 Noise Filter for the dimensional drawing.
5-62
5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor

Regenerative resistors for SERVOPACKs are internally or externally mounted as shown in the table below. Regenerative resistors can be externally mounted on all SERVOPACKs. Connect an external regenerative resistor to the SERVOPACK if regenerative energy exceeds the capacity of the SERVOPACK. If a regenerative resistor is to be mounted externally, the jumper between B2 and B3 for the internal regenerative resistor must be removed. Refer to 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors for the selection. No built-in regenerative resistor is provided to 6 kW or more SERVOPACKs. Be sure to prepare the externally mounted regenerative resistor. The following table shows examples of regenerative resistors.
Applicable SERVOPACK SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA Specifications for a Regenerative Resistor Mounted in a SERVOPACK Resistance () Single-phase 100 V Capacity (W) Min. Allowable Resistance ()
40
Single-phase 200 V
40
50 30 25 12.5 8 (6.25) 1 (3.13)2
60 70 140 140 280 (880) 1 (1760) 2
40 20 12 12 8 5.8 2.9
Three-phase 200 V
* 1. The values in parentheses are for the optional JUSP-RA04 Regenerative Resistor Unit. * 2. The values in parentheses are for the optional JUSP-RA05 Regenerative Resistor Unit.
5-63
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.6 External Regenerative Resistor
The external regenerative resistor must be purchased by customers. Refer to the table below for selecting an external regenerative resistor. Refer to 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors for the connection.
(1) References for External Regenerative Resistor

Regenerative Resistor Model RH120 RH150 RH220 RH300C RH500 Specifications 70 W, 1 to 100 90 W, 1 to 100 120 W, 1 to 100 200 W, 1 to 10 k 300 W, 1 to 30 Iwaki Wireless Research Institute. Manufacturer
(2) Model Designation
RH120 N
Model
10 J
Resistance Tolerance
Code Specifications
N: Noninductive winding
Resistance
K J H
10% 5% 3%
(3) Specifications
Resistance Tolerance Temperature Resistance Characteristics Withstand Voltage Insulation Resistance Short-time Overload Life Heat Resistance Operating Temperature K: 10%, J: 5%, H: 3% 400 PPM / C (less than 20) , 260 PPM / C (20 or more) 2000 VAC/min. R: (0.1% + 0.05) 500 VDC, 20 M or more When 10 times of rated power is applied for five seconds, R: (2% + 0.05) 1000 hours of repeating the operation ON for 90 minutes and OFF for 30 minutes, R: (5% + 0.05) Not ignite after having applied 10 times of rated electric power for one minute -25 to 150C (-13 to 302 F)
5-64
(4) Dimensional Drawings

RH120/150/220
Units: mm (in) 3.5 (0.14) G
RH220B
Units: mm (in)
30 (1.18) 3.0 (0.12)
4.5 (0.18)
B A
138 (5.43)
F E
170 (6.69) 154 (6.06)
4.5 (0.18) Lead wire length L: 300 (11.81) Model RH120 RH150 RH220
Rated Power Resistance Dimensions
60 (2.36) 54 (2.13) 40 (1.57)
70 W 90 W 120 W
1 to 100 1 to 100 1 to 100
RH120 RH150 RH220
(7.17) (5.91) (6.77) (0.63) (1.65) (0.87) (0.79)
A B C D E F G 182 150 172 16 42 22 20
4 4.5 (0.18) Lead wire length L: 500 (19.69) Rated power: 120 W Resistance: 1 to100
212 180 202 16 44 24 30 230 200 220 15 60 24 20
(8.35) (7.09) (7.95) (0.63) (1.73) (0.94) (1.18) (9.06) (7.87) (8.66) (0.59) (2.36) (0.94) (0.79)
RH300C
Units: mm (in)
37 (1.46) 32 (1.26)
RH500
Units: mm (in) 250 (9.84) 234 (9.21)
3 (0.12)
80 (3.15) 40 (1.57) 4.5 (0.18)
312 (12.28) 270 (10.63) 62 (2.44) 47 (1.85) 33 (1.30) 5.3 (0.21)
218 (8.58)
24.5 (0.18)
4.7 (0.19)
300 (11.81)
Lead wire length L: 300 (11.81) Rated power: 200 W Resistance: 1 to 10 k
Lead wire length L: 450 (17.72) Rated power: 300 W Resistance: 1 to 30
5.8.7 Regenerative Resistor Unit

(1) Models
The SERVOPACKs with a capacity of 6.0 kW or more do not have a built-in regenerative resistor. The following regenerative resistor unit is required according to the SERVOPACK model.
SERVOPACK Model SGDM-60ADA SGDM-75ADA to -1EADA Regenerative Resistor Unit Model JUSP-RA04 JUSP-RA05 Specifications 6.25 , 880 W 3.13 , 1760 W Allowable Power Loss 180 W 350 W
60 (2.36)
2 - M3
5-65
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery

46 (0.24) Mounting holes Protective cover
M2 M1 W
D Ground terminal (M4 screw)
External terminals (M5 screws) Cement resistor 30 (1.18)
Units: mm (in) Model JUSP-RA04 JUSP-RA05 W 220 (8.66) 300 (11.81) H 350 (13.78) 350 (13.78) D 92 (3.62) 95 (3.74) M1 180 (7.09) 250 (9.84) M2 335 (13.19) 335 (13.19) Approx. Mass kg (lb) 4 (8.82) 7 (15.43)
5.8.8 Absolute Encoder Battery

When using an absolute encoder, a backup battery is required to prevent the position data from being lost at power OFF. Install one of the following absolute encoder batteries. There are two types of battery: Battery to be mounted on the SERVOPACK and battery to be connected to the host controller.
PROHIBITED
Install the absolute encoder battery on either the SERVOPACK or the host controller. Installing the batteries both on the SERVOPACK and host controller configures a loop in the circuit between two batteries, which damages the circuit.
(1) Battery Mounted on SERVOPACK

(a) Model
SERVOPACK Capacity 30 W to 5.0 kW 6.0 to 15.0 kW Battery Model JZSP-BA01 JZSP-BA01-1
5-66
(b) Dimensional Drawing JZSP-BA01

Lithium battery ER3V 3.6 V 1000 mAh Manufactured by Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd. Units: mm (in) 2 Black
17 (0.67)
14.5 (0.57)
Connector Red 26 (1.02) 203 (0.790.12)
JZSP-BA01-1
Lithium battery ER3V 3.6 V 1000 mAh Manufactured by Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd. Units: mm (in) 2 Black
14.5 (0.57)
17 (0.67)
Red 26 (1.02) 505 (1.970.20)
Connector
(2) Battery Connected to the Host Controller

When connecting the battery to the host controller, select the battery in accordance with the specifications of the host controller. Use the battery ER6 VC3 or the equivalent: 3.6 V 2000 mAh manufactured by Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.
5-67
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.9 Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
5.8.9 Molded-case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

If selecting a molded-case circuit breaker, observe the following precautions.
(1) Precautions
IMPORTANT
Circuit Breakers Select a breaker for inverters. High-frequency current leaks from the servomotor armature because of switching operations inside the SERVOPACK.
(a) Maximum Input Current

The instantaneous maximum output of SERVOPACK is approximately 3 times of the rated output for maximum 3 seconds. Accordingly, select a circuit breaker whose operating time is 5 seconds or more at 300% of SERVOPACK rated current. The general-purpose and low-speed acting molded-case circuit breakers are applicable. The power supply capacity per SERVOPACK when using a servomotor is described in 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity. Select a circuit breaker with the capacity larger than the effective load current (when using multiple SERVOPACKs) calculated from the total power supply capacity. The power consumption of other controllers must be considered when selecting a circuit breaker.
(b) Inrush Current

Refer to 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity for SERVOPACK inrush current. The allowable inrush current for a low-speed acting circuit breaker is approximately 10 times of the rated current for 0.02 seconds. When turning ON multiple SERVOPACKs simultaneously, select a molded-case circuit breaker with the allowable current for 20 ms larger than the total inrush current shown in 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity.
5-68
5.8.10 Noise Filter

The noise filters model FN and FS manufactured by Schaffner Electronic and FMAC manufacture by Timonta AG are recommended. Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. Select one of the following noise filters according to SERVOPACK capacity. For more details, refer to 2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Contactors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors. Refer to 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples for the connection method.
(1) Single-phase, 100/200 V

Model FN2070 -6/07 FN2070 -10/07 FN2070-16/07 FN350-30/33
Side view C K
S L
Side view C
Top view
M N
Dimensional Drawings
Top view A F D
Q P
A F D
B K
Top view
J N
Side view
B
Contact Terminal P/N/E 140 +5 -0 (5.51+0.20 -0 )
R Q B
5
D J A
5-69
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.10 Noise Filter
Model Symbol A B C D F External Dimensions in mm (in) J K L M N P Q R S Specifications Singlephase 100 V Singlephase 200 V
FN2070 -6/07 113.5 1 (4.47 0.04)
FN2070 FN2070-16/07 -10/07 Dimensions 156 1 (6.14 119 0.5 (4.69 0.02) 0.04) 85.5 1 (3.37 0.04) 57.6 1 (2.27 0.04) 98.5 1 (3.88 0.04) 109 0.3 (4.29 0.01) 40 0.2 (1.57 0.008) 8.6 0.5 (0.34 0.02) 4.4 0.1 (0.17 0.004) 7.4 0.1 (0.29 0.004) 1.2 0.1 (0.05 0.004) 66 0.3 (2.60 0.01) 51 0.2 (2.01 0.008) 250 VAC, 16 A
FN350-30/33 Dimensions 105 0.5 (4.13 0.02) 99.5 0.5 (3.92 0.02) 57 1 (2.24 0.04) 84.5 1 (3.33 0.04) 79 0.5 (3.11 0.02) 95 0.2 (3.74 0.008) 51 0.1 (2.01 0.004) 19 0.5 (0.75 0.02) 4.4 0.1 (0.17 0.004) 6 0.1 (0.24 0.004) 250 VAC, 30 A
A B C D E J K L M N P Q R S
57.5 1 (2.26 0.04) 45.4 1.2 (1.79 0.05) 94 1 130.5 1 (5.14 (3.70 0.04) 0.04) 103 0.3 (4.06 143 0.3 (5.63 0.01) 0.01) 25 0.2 (0.98 0.008) 8.4 0.5 (0.33 0.02) 32.4 0.5 (1.28 0.02) 4.4 0.1 (0.17 5.3 0.1 (0.21 0.004) 0.004) 6 0.1 (0.24 0.004) 0.9 0.1 (0.04 0.004) 38 0.5 (1.50 0.02) 250 VAC, 250 VAC, 6A 10 A A3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 02BD, 02BDA 01BD, 01BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 04AD, 04ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA
Applicable SERVOPACK SGDM-
Schaffner Electronic
Manufacturer
5-70
(2) Three-phase, 200 V

Select one of the following noise filters according to SERVOPACK capacity. For more details, refer to 2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Contactors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors. Refer to 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples for the connection method.
(a) FN Series
Model FN258L-7/07 FN258L-16/07 FN258L-30/07
Side view P
Front and side views
C B
E A
Symbol A B C D E External Dimensions F in mm (in) G H J L O P Specifications Applicable ThreeSERVOPACK phase SGDM200 V Manufacturer
O J
255 1 (10.04 0.04) 126 0.8 (4.96 0.03) 50 0.6 (1.97 0.02) 225 0.8 (8.86 0.03) 240 0.5 (9.45 0.02) 25 0.3 (0.98 0.01)
Dimensions 305 1 (12.01 0.04) 142 0.8 (5.59 0.03) 55 0.6 (2.17 0.02)
335 1 (13.19 0.04) 150 1 (5.91 0.04) 60 0.6 (2.36 0.02) 305 1 (12.01 0.04) 320 0.5 (12.60 0.02) 35 0.3 (1.38 0.01) 400 10 (15.75 0.39)
275 0.8 (10.83 0.03) 290 0.5 (11.42 0.02) 30 0.3 (1.18 0.01) 6.5 0.2 (0.26 0.008) 300 10 (11.81 0.39) 1 0.1 (0.04 0.004) 9 1 (0.35 0.04) M5 AWG16 AWG14 480 VAC, 7 A 480 VAC, 16 A 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 05AD, 05ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA Schaffner Electronic
AWG10 480 VAC, 30 A 30AD, 30ADA
5-71
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.10 Noise Filter
(b) FMAC Series

Model FMAC-0934-5010
A B
FMAC-0953-6410
H (J)
LOAD
LINE
(K)
E F
(L)
Symbol A B C D External Dimensions in mm (in) E F G H I J K L
Dimensions 251 (9.88) 201 (7.91) 151 (5.94)

+ + 135 0 5.31 0 1 0.04
308 (12.13) 231 (9.09) 151 (5.94)

+ + 135 0 5.31 0 1 0.04
Specifications Applicable ThreeSERVOPACK phase SGDM200 V Manufacturer
6.50.3 (0.260.01) 1150.3 (4.530.01) M6 66 (2.60) 121 (4.76) (10) (0.39) (41) (1.61) (17) (0.67) 440 VAC, 50 A 50ADA 60ADA Timonta AG
6.50.3 (0.260.01) 1150.3 (4.530.01) M6 66 (2.60) 121 (4.76) (13) (0.51) (45) (1.77) (34) (1.34) 440 VAC, 64 A 75ADA
5-72
(c) FS Series
Model FS5559-35-33 FS5559-80-34
A
FS5559-150-35
B H
J
C D
SCHAFFNER
Symbol A B C D E External Dimensions F in mm (in) G H I J K L Specifications Applicable ThreeSERVOPACK phase SGDM200 V Manufacturer
330 (12.99) 85 (3.35) 370 (14.57) 348 (13.70) 110 (4.33) 80 (3.15) 30 (1.18) 25 (0.98) 1.5 (0.06) 6.5 (0.26) 25 (0.98) M6 480 V, 35 A -
Dimensions 420 (16.54) 95 (3.74) 460 (18.11) 438 (17.24) 180 (7.09) 140 (5.51) 50 (1.97) 25 (0.98) 1.5 (0.06) 6.5 (0.26) 25 (0.98) M8 480 V, 80 A Schaffner Electronic
440 (17.32) 150 (5.91) 480 (18.90) 458 (18.03) 200 (7.87) 170 (6.69) 50 (1.97) 35 (1.38) 1.5 (0.06) 6.5 (0.26) 25 (0.98) M10 480 V, 150 A 1AADA 1EADA
5-73
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.11 Magnetic Contactor
5.8.11 Magnetic Contactor

(1) Model: HI-J
The magnetic contactor is manufactured by Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. A magnetic contactor is required to make the AC power supply to SERVOPACK ON/OFF sequence externally. Be sure to attach a surge suppressor to the excitation coil of the magnetic contactor. Refer to 5.8.12 Surge Suppressor for details of the surge suppressor. For selecting a magnetic contactor, refer to 2.6.3 Noise Filters, Magnetic Contactors, Surge Suppressors and DC Reactors.
(2) For Single-phase 100/200 V and Three-phase 200 V SERVOPACKs

(a) Model: HI-11J
Dimensions in mm (in) Approx. mass: 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)
44 (1.73) 10.1 (0.40) 8.2 (0.32) a b 76 (2.99) 61 (2.40) 34.5 (1.36) 4.5 (0.18)
Mounting Hole Dimensions in mm (in)
Terminal Symbols
15.5 (0.61)
M3.5 Coil terminal

13 (0.51)
5 (0.20)
43 (1.69)
Auxiliary contact
Structure
1NO
48 (1.89)
74.5 (2.93) 78.5 (3.09)
41 (1.61)
35(1.38)
52 (2.05)
1NC
4 (0.16)
8.2 (0.32)
10.4 (0.41)
M3.5 Auxiliary contact terminal M3.5 Main contact terminal
9 (0.35)
2 M4 Mounting holes
(b) Model: HI-15J and HI-20J

45.5 (1.79) 8.2 (0.32) 15.3 (0.60)
a b
3 (0.12)

HI-15J
Auxiliary contact
Terminal Symbols
4.5 (0.18)
5 (0.20)
M3.5 Coil terminal
91 (3.58) 65 (2.56) 39 (1.54)
5.2 (0.20)
Structure
35 (1.38)
9.6 (0.38)
1NO1NC
1 (0.04)
50 (1.97)
51 (2.01)
85 (3.35)
35 (1.38)
29 (1.14)
70 (2.76) 75 (2.95)
2 (0.08)
HI-20J
Auxiliary contact Structure
4 (0.16)
9.6 (0.38) 8.2 (0.32)
M3.5 Auxiliary contact terminal M3.5 Main contact terminal
9 (0.35) 54 (2.13) 76 (2.99)
2 M4 Mounting holes
1NO1NC
11.3 10.8 (0.44) (0.43)
5-74
(c) Model: HI-25J and HI-35J

58 (2.28) 8.2 (0.32) 23.4 (0.92) a b 7 (0.28) 10.5 (0.41)

4 (0.16)
Terminal Symbols
M3.5 Coil terminal
111 (4.37) 79 (3.11) 45 (1.77) 4.5 (0.18)
50 (1.97)
Auxiliary contact
T
Structure
58.4 (2.30)
50 (1.97)
92 (3.62)
35 (1.38)
70 (2.76)
75 (2.95)
5 (0.20)
29 (1.14)
6 (0.24)
1NO1NC
8 (0.31)
12.2 (0.48) 14.8 13.1 (0.58) (0.52)
8.2 (0.32)
M3.5 Auxiliary contact terminal M5 Main contact terminal
9 (0.35) 72 (2.83) 94 (3.70)
2 M4 Mounting holes
(d) Model: HI-50J and HI-65J

75 (2.95) 30 (1.18) 8.2 (0.32) 121 (4.76) 86.5 (3.41) 49.5 (1.95) 7 (0.28) 5 (0.20)

2 M4 Mounting holes
6 (0.24) 65 (2.56)
Terminal Symbols
5
Auxiliary contact Structure
10.3 (0.41)
M3.5 Coil terminal
A
R S T 7 (0.28) 5 (0.20)
6 (0.24)
B
100 (3.94) 95 (3.74)
75 (2.95)
29 (1.14) 50 (1.97) 111 (4.37) 114 (4.49)
75 (2.95)
1NO1NC
8 (0.31)
14 (0.55) 15.5 20 (0.79) (0.61)
8.2 (0.32) M3.5 Auxiliary contact terminal
3 (0.12)
B
75.5 (2.97) 98 (3.86)
Main contact terminal HI-50J: M5 HI-65J: M6
2 M4 Mounting holes
5-75
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.12 Surge Suppressor
5.8.12 Surge Suppressor

(1) Surge Suppressor for Magnetic Contactor
(a) Model: TU-25, TU-65 (b) Specifications

Surge Absorption Method CR CR Varistor CR CR Varistor Rated Insulation Voltage 150 VAC 300 VAC 500 VAC 150 VAC 300 VAC 500 VAC HI-25J HI-35J HI-50J HI-65J HI-11J HI-15J HI-20J Applicable Voltage Range for Operation Magnetic Coil Applicable Magnetic Contactor
Model
50 V
AC 50/60Hz 110 V 127 V 240 V 380 V 440 V
TU-25C120 TU-25C240 TU-25V440 TU-65C120 TU-65C240 TU-65V440 Note:
: Applicable voltage range
5-76
(c) Dimensional Drawings Model TU-25

Units: mm (in) Approx. mass: 0.02 kg (0.04 lb) 6.2 M3.5 Connection terminals (0.24) 4.7 (0.19) CR
Internal Connection Diagram
Operation indicator (LED)
34 (1.34) 22 (0.87)
Varistor
26 (1.02)
22 (0.87)
Model TU-65
Units: mm (in) Approx. mass: 0.035 kg (0.077 lb) M3.5 Connection terminals 6.2 (0.24) 4.7 (0.19) CR
Internal Connection Diagram
Operation indicator (LED)
44 (1.73)
32 (1.26)
Varistor 3 (0.12) 21 (0.83)
37 (1.46)
(2) Surge Suppressor for Brake Power Supply

When using a servomotor with holding brake, install a surge suppressor near the brake coil to prevent the power supply noises. The surge suppressor handled by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. is recommended.
(a) Model: CR50500BL (b) Specifications

Power supply: 250 VAC Capacitance: 0.5 F 20% Resistance: 50 (1/2 W) 30%
5-77
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.13 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression
5.8.13 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression

(1) Specifications
DC reactor for harmonic suppression is handled by Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. If necessary for harmonic suppression, connect a DC reactor to the SERVOPACK. Note that no terminal for connecting a DC reactor is provided to the 6.0 kW or more SERVOPACKs. Refer to the table below for selecting a DC reactor according to the SERVOPACK capacity. For the connection method, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
Applicable SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA DC Reactor Specifications DC Reactor Model X5063 X5062 X5071 X5070 X5069 X5061 Inductance (mH) 10.0 4.7 40.0 20.0 10.0 2.0 Rated Current (A) 1.8 3.5 0.85 1.65 3.3 4.8
Single-phase 100 V
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 200 V
X5060 X5059 X5068
1.5 1.0 0.47
8.8 14.0 26.8
5-78

Units: mm (in) B
I
1 2 C D
4H Notch
E F
DC Reactor Model X5059 X5060 X5061 X5062 X5063 X5068 X5069 X5070 X5071
Dimensions in mm (in) A 50 (1.97) 40 (1.57) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57) 35 (1.38) 50 (1.97) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 35 (1.38) B 74 (2.91) 59 (2.32) 52 (2.05) 59 (2.32) 52 (2.05) 74 (2.91) 59 (2.32) 59 (2.32) 52 (2.05) C 125 (4.92) 105 (4.13) 80 (3.15) 100 (3.94) 90 (3.54) 125 (4.92) 105 (4.13) 100 (3.94) 80 (3.15) D 140 (5.51) 125 (4.92) 95 (3.74) 120 (4.72) 105 (4.13) 155 (6.1) 125 (4.92) 120 (4.72) 95 (3.74) E 35 (1.38) 45 (1.77) 35 (1.38) 40 (1.57) 35 (1.38) 53 (2.09) 45 (1.77) 35 (1.38) 30 (1.18) F 45 (1.77) 60 (2.36) 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77) 66 (2.6) 60 (2.36) 45 (1.77) 40 (1.57) G 60 (2.36) 65 (2.56) 50 (1.97) 55 (2.17) 50 (1.97) 75 (2.95) 65 (2.56) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77) H 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) 4 (0.16) I 5.3 (0.21) 4.3 (0.17) 4.3 (0.17) 4.3 (0.17) 4.3 (0.17) 6.4 (0.25) 4.3 (0.17) 4.3 (0.17) 4.3 (0.17)
Approx. Mass in kg (lb) 1.1 (2.43) 1.0 (2.20) 0.5 (1.10) 0.9 (1.98) 0.6 (1.32) 1.9 (4.19) 1.0 (2.20) 0.8 (1.76) 0.5 (1.10)
5-79
5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices 5.8.14 Variable Resistor for Speed and Torque Setting
5.8.14 Variable Resistor for Speed and Torque Setting

(1) Model: 25HP-10B
The multiturn type winding variable resistors with dial MD10-30B4 are manufactured by Sakae Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Contact Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd.

Units: mm (in) 25 HP Helicolumn Panel 11.51 (0.450.04) (Panel driling diagram)
251 (0.980.04)
21 (0.83) max.
311 (1.220.04)
2.5 (0.10) hole
7.5 (0.30) hole
14.51 (0.570.04) 241 MD multi-dial (0.940.04)
10 (0.39)
37.51 (1.480.04)
4.5 (0.18)
(3) Example of Connection to an External Power Supply

1.8 k (1/2 W) min. 3 25HP-10B 2 k 2 12V 1 5 (9) 6 (10) SERVOPACK CN1 V-REF (T-REF) SG
5-80
5.8.15 Encoder Signal Converter Unit

The encoder signal converter unit (the trade name Receiver Unit) converts encoder signal output from the line driver to open-collector or voltage-pulse output. A socket model 11PFA is required to use a Receiver Unit.
(1) Model: LRX-01 / A

(2) Specifications
Specifications Power Supply Receiver Unit LRX-01/A1 LRX-01/A2 LRX-01/A3 LRX-01/A4 12 VDC 10 %, 100 mA 5 VDC 5 %, 100 mA Balanced line driver input (RS-422)
Input Circuit
Input Signals
Voltage pulse output Output Signals

RS-422
Output Circuit
Open collector output
Voltage pulse output
Output Circuit
Output Circuit
Open collector output
Output Circuit
YASKAW A
Input Signal Level Output Signal Level Ambient Temperature IC Used Response Frequency
Differential voltage 0.3 V, built-in terminator 100 H: 10 V min. (1 mA) L: 0.5 V max. (30 mA) L: 0.5 V min. (30 mA) Withstand voltage: 50 V H: 3 V min. (1 mA) L: 0.5 V max. (30 mA) L: 0.5 V min. (30 mA) Withstand voltage: 50 V
0 (32 F) to + 60 C (140 F) Receiver IC: AM26LS32C or the equivalent 100 kHz

The socket is optional.
Units: mm (in) Receiver unit and socket
129 (5.08) 100 (3.94) 29 (1.14)
Socket Type 11PFA

11-M3.5 7 SEMS screws 7.8 (0.31) 2 4.5 ( 0.18) hole 5 (0.20)
4 (0.16)
81 (3.19) max.
50 (1.97)
Receiver unit
Socket
40 0.2 (1.57 0.0079) 51 (2.01) max. 33.5 (1.32) max.
18 (4.65 max.)
4 (0.16)
80 (3.15)
35.4 (1.39)
35.4 (1.39)
5-81
6
Wiring
6.1 Wiring Main Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2

6.1.1 Names and Functions of Main Circuit Terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 6.1.2 Wiring Main Circuit Power Supply Connector (Spring Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.2 Wiring Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7

6.2.1 Connecting an Encoder (CN2) and Output Signals from the SERVOPACK (CN1) - - - - 6-7 6.2.2 Encoder Connector (CN2) Terminal Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8
6.3 Examples of I/O Signal Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9

6.3.1 Speed Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9 6.3.2 Position Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10 6.3.3 Torque Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-11 6.3.4 I/O Signal Connector (CN1) Terminal Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12 6.3.5 I/O Signal (CN1) Names and Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 6.3.6 Interface Circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15
6.4 Others - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

6.4.1 Wiring Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.3 Installation Conditions of EMC Directives - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.4 Installation Conditions of UL Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.5 Using More Than One SERVOPACK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.6 Extending Encoder Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.7 Operating Conditions on 400-V Power Supply Voltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18 6-19 6-22 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-28 6-29
6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

6.5.1 Regenerative Power and Regenerative Resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31 6.5.2 Connecting External Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
6-1
6 Wiring 6.1.1 Names and Functions of Main Circuit Terminals
6.1 Wiring Main Circuit

This section describes typical examples of main circuit wiring, functions of main circuit terminals, and the power ON sequence.
CAUTION
Do not bundle or run power and signal lines together in the same duct. Keep power and signal lines separated by at least 300 mm (11.81 in). Failure to observe this caution may result in malfunction. Use twisted-pair shielded wires or multi-core twisted pair shielded wires for signal and encoder (PG) feedback lines. The maximum length is 3 m (118.11 in) for reference input lines and is 20 m (787.40 in) for PG feedback lines. Do not touch the power terminals for five minutes after turning power OFF because high voltage may still remain in the SERVOPACK. Make sure the charge indicator is turned OFF first before starting an inspection. Avoid frequently turning power ON and OFF. Do not turn the power ON or OFF more than once per minute. Since the SERVOPACK has a capacitor in the power supply, a high charging current flows for 0.2 seconds when the power is turned ON. Frequently turning the power ON and OFF causes main power devices such as capacitors and fuses to deteriorate, resulting in unexpected problems.
6.1.1 Names and Functions of Main Circuit Terminals

Terminal Symbol Name Main Circuit Voltage (V) 100 Main circuit power supply input terminal Servomotor connection terminals Control circuit power supply input terminal Ground terminals 200 200 100 200 Maximum Applicable Servomotor Capacity (kW) 0.03 to 0.2 0.03 to 0.4 0.5 to 7.5 0.03 to 0.2 0.03 to 7.5 Functions
L1L2 L1L2L3 UVW L1CL2C
Single-phase 100 to 115 VAC+10%, -15% (50/60 Hz) Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC+10%,-15% (50/60 Hz) Three-phase 200 to 230 VAC+10%, -15% (50/60 H) Connects to the servomotor. Single-phase 100 to115 VAC+10%, -15% (50/60 Hz) Single-phase 200 to 230 VAC+10%, -15% (50/60 Hz) Connects to the power supply ground terminals and servomotor ground terminal.
6-2
Terminal Symbol
Name
Main Circuit Voltage (V) 100
B1B2
200 External regenerative resistor connection terminal
B1B2B3
200
B1B2
200 100
1 2
DC reactor for harmonic suppression terminal Main circuit plus terminal Main circuit minus terminal
Maximum Applicable Servomotor Functions Capacity (kW) 0.03 to 0.2 Normally not connected. Connect an external regenerative resistor (provided 0.03 to 0.4 by customer) between B1 and B2 if the regenerative capacity is insufficient. Normally short B2 and B3 (for an internal regenerative resistor). Remove the wire between B2 and B3 and connect an 0.5 to 5.0 external regenerative resistor (provided by customer) between B1 and B2 if the capacity of the internal regenerative resistor is insufficient. Connect an external regenerative resistor (provided 6.0 to 15.0 by customer) between B1 and B2. Refer to 6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors for details. 0.03 to 0.2 Normally short 1 and 2. 0.03 to 5.0 6.0 or more 6.0 or more If a countermeasure against power supply harmonic waves is needed, connect a DC reactor between 1 and 2. These terminals do not exist. Normally not connected. Note: This terminal is on the SERVOPACK with a capacity of 6.0 kW or higher only. Normally not connected.
200 200 200
* If using the main circuit power supply and the control power supply with DC power supply input, refer to 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples (3) DC Power Supply Input for more information on wiring.
6-3
6 Wiring 6.1.2 Wiring Main Circuit Power Supply Connector (Spring Type)
6.1.2 Wiring Main Circuit Power Supply Connector (Spring Type)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions when wiring main circuit connector.
Remove the connector from the SERVOPACK prior to wiring. Insert only one wire per terminal on the connector. Make sure that the core wire is not electrically shorted to adjacent core wires.
SERVOPACKs with a capacity below 1.5 kW have a removable connector for the main circuit power supply or the control power supply terminal. Use the following procedure when connecting the SERVOPACK to the connector.
(1) Wire Size

Wire can be used simply by stripping back the outer coating. The following is applicable wire sizes. Single wire: 0.5 (0.02 in) to 1.6 (0.06 in) mm Braided wire: AWG28 to AWG12
(2) Connection Procedure

1. Strip the end of the wire.
8 to 9 mm (0.31 to 0.35 inches)
2. Open the wire terminal on the power supply connector housing (plug) with the tool using the procedure shown in Fig. A or B. Insert the connection hook end of the provided tool into the slot as shown in Fig. A. Use a standard flat-blade screwdriver (blade width of 3.0 to 3.5 mm (0.12 to 0.14 in)) or type 549320000 manufactured by Molex Japan Co., Ltd. Put the blade into the slot, as shown in Fig. B, and press down firmly to open the wire terminal. Either the procedure shown in Fig. A or B can be used to open the wire insert opening.
Fig. A
Fig. B
3. Insert the wire core into the opening and then close the opening by releasing the lever connection or removing the screwdriver.
6-4
6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples

(1) Single-phase, 100/200 V
R T
1QF FIL
SERVOPACK SGDMAD/ADA SGDMBD/BDA U V W
L1C L2C 1KM L1
PG +24V
1Ry
(For servo alarm display)
Main circuit Main circuit power supply power supply OFF ON 1Ry
1PL 1KM 1SUP
L2 CN1 B1 B2 ALM+ 31 +1 +2 ALM 32
1Ry 1D
024V
1KM
1QF Molded-case circuit breaker FIL : Noise filter 1KM : Magnetic contactor
1Ry : Relay 1PL : Indicator lamp 1SUP : Surge suppressor 1D : Flywheel diode
(2) Three-phase, 200 V

R S T
1QF
FIL
SERVOPACK SGDMAD/ADA U V W
L1C L2C
1KM
1Ry alarm display)

Main circuit Main circuit power supply power supply ON OFF 1Ry 1PL 1KM
(For servo
L1 L2 L3 B2 B3 +1 +2
PG
ALM+ ALM
CN1 31 32
1Ry 1D
+24V
024V
1KM 1SUP 1QF : Molded-case circuit breaker FIL : Noise filter 1KM : Magnetic contactor
Relay 1Ry 1PL : Indicator lamp 1SUP : Surge suppressor 1D : Flywheel diode
6-5
6 Wiring 6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wiring Examples
IMPORTANT
Designing a Power ON Sequence Note the following points when designing the power ON sequence. Design the power ON sequence so that main circuit power supply is turned OFF when a servo alarm signal is output. See the previous circuit figure. The SERVOPACK will output (1Ry is OFF) a servo alarm signal for two seconds or less when control power is turned ON. This is required in order to initialize the SERVOPACK.
Power supply Servo alarm (ALM) output signal 2.0 s max.
Select the power supply specifications for the parts in accordance with the input power supply. Harmonic Suppression If another device requires for harmonic suppression, connect the DC reactor to the DC main circuit side on the SERVOPACK. For connecting examples, refer to 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
(3) DC Power Supply Input
WARNING
SGDM SERVOPACK is applicable for both AC and DC power supply input. However, if the DC power supply input supplies a voltage without setting 1 (for DC power supply input) in the parameter Pn001.2, the SERVOPACKs internal elements will burn and may cause fire or malfunction. When using the SERVOPACK with DC power supply input, confirm the following setting of parameters.
When using the SGDM SERVOPACK with DC power supply input, use the following power supply and set the parameter Pn001.2 for 1. Also, read carefully to the following Important section.
IMPORTANT
1. Servomotor returns the regenerative energy to the power supply when regenerating. SERVOPACK does not regenerate with DC power supply input specifications, so regenerate the energy on the power supply side. 2. Take appropriate measures to ensure that a high charging current stays inside the SERVOPACK when power is OFF.
(a) Main Circuit and Control Power Supply Input

The following shows the connection for the main power supply and the control power supply.
Terminal Symbol 1 or Name Main circuit plus terminal Main circuit minus terminal L1CL2C Control power supply input terminal Functions 270 V to 320 VDC 130 to 155 VDC for SGDM-BD/SGDM-BDA SERVOPACK with 100 V input 0V 270 to 320 VDC, without polarity 130 to 155 VDC for SGDM-BD/SGDM-BDA SERVOPACK with 100 V input
6-6
6.2 Wiring Encoders
(b) Setting Parameters

Parameter n.0 Pn001 n.1 Meaning Not applicable for DC power supply input: Input the AC power supply for the terminal L1, L2 or L3. Applicable for DC power supply input: Input the DC power supply between the .
terminal and the terminal 1, or the terminal and the terminal When changing the parameters, turn the power ON again for the necessity of the effective setting.
6.2 Wiring Encoders

The connection cables between encoder and SERVOPACK and wiring pin numbers differ depending on servomotor model. Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices for details.
6.2.1 Connecting an Encoder (CN2) and Output Signals from the SERVOPACK (CN1)
(1) Incremental Encoders
SERVOPACK Phase A Phase B
1 C (5) D (6) 2 Light blue
PS
White/Light blue /PS
Host controller
CN1
33 34 35 36 19 20 PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO
2
R R R
Line receiver
Incremental encoder
CN2
5 6
Phase C
2 1 6 7 10 9
3 Phase
A
Phase B C
11 Phase
PG
H (1) G (2) Red Black PG 5V PG 0V
Output line-driver SN75ALS194 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent.
8 16 0 V C +5 V
Choke coil
1 2
PG5V PG0V
6
+5 V 0V
CN1
0V
Connector shell
0.33 mm2 (0.001 in 2 ) (Shell) Shield wire
SG
+ Smoothing capacitor
Connector shell
R (terminator): 220 to 470 C (Decoupling Capacitor)
0.1 F
1 The pin numbers for the connector wiring differ depending on the servomotors. C, D, H, G : pin number for the SGMGH, SGMSH, SGMDH servomotors. 1, 2, 5, 6 : pin number for the SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors. 2 : represents twisted-pair wires.
6-7
6 Wiring 6.2.2 Encoder Connector (CN2) Terminal Layout
(2) Absolute Encoders

SERVOPACK
Phase A
Host controller
CN1
33 34 35 36 19 20 48 49
2 PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO

R R R
Line receiver
Absolute encoder 1
Light blue
Phase B
C (5) PS D (6) White/Light blue /PS
CN2
5 6
Phase C Phase S
2 1 6 7 10 9 8
3 5
Phase A Phase B C
11 Phase 16
PG
H (1) Red G (2) Black
Output line-driver SN75ALS194 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent.

PG5V PG0V
0 V C +5 V
Choke coil
1 PG5 V 2 PG0 V 0V
CN1
4 2 1
SEN SG SG
+5 V
+ Smoothing capacitor
+5 V 0V
0.33 mm2 (0.001in2) T (3) Orange BAT + S (4) White/Orange BAT -
CN1
3 4
Connector shell
21 22
BAT + BAT -
+ 3 - Battery
(Shell)
Shield wire
Connector shell
Applicable line receiver: SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486. R (terminator): 220 to 470 C (Decoupling Capacitor) 0.1 F
1 The pin numbers for the connector wiring differ depending on the servomotors. C,D,H,G,S,T : pin number for the SGMGH, SGMSH, SGMDH servomotors. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 : pin number for the SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors 2 : represents twisted-pair wires.
3 When using an absolute encoder, install a battery on the host controller side to supply power.
6.2.2 Encoder Connector (CN2) Terminal Layout

1 3 PG5V BAT (+) PG power supply +5 V Battery (+) (For an absolute encoder) PG serial signal input 2 4 6 PG 0 V BAT (-) /PS PG power supply 0V Battery (-) (For an absolute encoder) PG serial signal input
5 PS SHELL Shield
6-8
6.3 Examples of I/O Signal Connections

6.3.1 Speed Control Mode
SERVOPACK
Speed reference (2 to 10V /rated motor speed) External torque 4. limit/Torque feed forward (1 to 10 V /rated torque) Backup battery 3. (2.8 to 4.5 V) 1. V-REF SG T-REF SG 5 6 9 10 LPF 2. 2. LPF A/D 37 38 39 ALO1 Alarm code output Max. operating voltage: ALO2 30 VDC Max. operating current: ALO3 20 mA DC
BAT (+) BAT (-)
21 22
33 34 35 36 19 20 6. 3.3 k 1 48 49
PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO SG PG dividing ratio output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486 Amount of phase-S rotation Serial data output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486
SEN signal input 3.
+5 V 0V 5. +24 V
SEN SG
4 2
+24VIN /S-ON /P-CON P-OT N-OT
47
Servo ON (Servo ON when ON) P control (P control when ON) Forward run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Reverse run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Alarm reset (Reset when ON) Forward current limit (Limit when ON) Reverse current limit (Limit when ON)
40 (SI0) 41 (SI1) 42 (SI2) 43 (SI3)
(SO1) 25 26 (SO2) 27 28 (SO3) 29
/V-CMP+ /V-CMP/TGON+
Speed coincidence detection (ON when speed coincides.)
Running output (ON when the motor speed /TGON- exceeds the settings.) /S-RDY+ /S-RDYALM+ ALM-
/ALM-RST
44 (SI4) 45 (SI5) 46 (SI6)
30 31 32
Servo ready output (ON when ready)
/P-CL /N-CL
Servo alarm output (OFF for an alarm)
Photocoupler output Max. operating voltage: 30 VDC Max. operating current: FG Connect shield to 50 mA DC connector shell. Connector shell
* 1.
represents twisted-pair wires.
* 2. The time constant for the primary filter is 47 s. * 3. Connect a backup battery when using an absolute encoder. When connecting a battery to the host controller, however, do not connect a backup battery. * 4. Enabled by the parameter setting. * 5. Customers must purchase a 24 VDC power supply with double-shielded enclosure. * 6. Enabled when using the absolute encoder. Note: The functions allocated to the input signals SI0 to SI6 and the output signals SO1 to SO3 can be changed by using the parameters. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation and 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
6-9
6 Wiring 6.3.2 Position Control Mode
6.3.2 Position Control Mode

SERVOPACK
PULS CW 1. PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN Position reference CLR CLR /CLR 7 8 11 12 15 14 +12 V PL1 Open- collector reference power supply PL2 PL3 BAT + BAT SEN SG 3 13 18 21 22 4. +5 V SEN signal input 2. 0V 3. +24 V Servo ON (Servo ON when ON) P control (P control when ON) Forward run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Reverse run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Alarm reset (Reset when ON) Forward current limit (Limit when ON) Reverse current limit (Limit when ON) 4 2 3.3 k 35 36 19 20 48 49 PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO 1 k 33 34 PAO /PAO PG dividing ratio output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486 150 150 37 38 39 ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 Alarm code output Max. operating voltage: 30 VDC Max. operating current: 20 mA DC 150
Phase A
Phase B
SIGN CCW
Backup battery 2. 2.8 to 4.5 V
+24VIN /S-ON /P-CON
47
SG
Amount of phase-S rotation Serial data output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486
40 (SI0) (SO1) 25 41 (SI1) 42 (SI2) 43 (SI3) (SO3) 29 /S-RDY+ Servo ready output /S-RDY- (ON when ready) ALM+ ALMServo alarm output (OFF for an alarm) 26 (SO2) 27 28 /COIN+ Positioning completed (ON when positioning /COIN- completes.) /TGON+ /TGON-
P-OT
TGON output (ON at levels above the setting.)
N-OT
/ALM-RST
44 (SI4) 45 (SI5) 46 (SI6)
30 31 32
/P-CL
/N-CL
Connector shell FG Connect shield to connector shell.
Photocoupler output Max. operating voltage: 30 VDC Max. operating current: 50 mA DC
* 1.
: represents twisted-pair wires.
* 2. Connect a backup battery when using an absolute encoder. When connecting a battery to the host controller, however, do not connect a backup battery. * 3. Customers must purchase a 24 VDC power supply with double-shielded enclosure. * 4. Enabled when using the absolute encoder. Note: The functions allocated to the input signals SI0 to SI6 and the output signals SO1 to SO3 can be changed by using the parameters. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation and 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
6-10
6.3.3 Torque Control Mode

SERVOPACK
External speed limit (2 to 10 V /rated motor speed) Torque reference (1 to 10 V /rated torque)
4. 1.
V-REF SG T-REF SG
5 6 9 10
2.
LPF A/D
2.
37 38 39
ALO1 ALO2 ALO3
LPF
Alarm code output Max. operating voltage: 30 VDC Max. operating current: 20 mA DC
Backup battery 2.8 to 4.5 V
3.
BAT + BAT -
21 22
33 34 35 36 19 20 6. 48 49 1 (SO1) 25 26 (SO2) 27 28
PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO SG /VLT+ /VLTPG dividing ratio output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486 Amount of phase-S rotation Serial data output Applicable line receiver SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486 Speed limit output (ON when the motor's running speed is limited.)4.
+5 V SEN signal input 3. 0V
SEN SG
4 2
+24 V Servo ON (Servo ON when ON) P control (P control when ON) Forward run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Reverse run prohibited (Prohibited when OFF) Alarm reset (Reset when ON) Forward current limit (Limit when ON) Reverse current limit (Limit when ON)
5.
+24VIN /S-ON /P-CON P-OT
47
3.3 k
40 (SI0) 41 (SI1) 42 (SI2) 43 (SI3)
/TGON+ TGON output (ON at levels above the setting.) /TGON/S-RDY+
N-OT
(SO3) 29 /ALM-RST 44 (SI4) 45 (SI5) 46 (SI6) Connector shell 30 31 32 /N-CL
Servo ready output /S-RDY- (ON when ready) ALM+ ALM-
/P-CL
Servo alarm output (OFF for an alarm)
FG Connect shield to connector shell.
Photocoupler output Max. operating voltage: 30 VDC Max. operating current: 50 mA DC
* 1.
* 2. The time constant for the primary filter is 47 s. * 3. Connect a backup battery when using an absolute encoder. When connecting a battery to the host controller, however, do not connect a backup battery. * 4. Enabled by the parameter setting. * 5. Customers must purchase a 24 VDC power supply with double-shielded enclosure. * 6. Enabled when using the absolute encoder. Note: The functions allocated to the input signals SI0 to SI6 and the output signals SO1 to SO3 can be changed by using the parameters. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation and 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
6-11
6 Wiring 6.3.4 I/O Signal Connector (CN1) Terminal Layout
6.3.4 I/O Signal Connector (CN1) Terminal Layout

The following diagram shows the terminal layout and the signals that are preset before shipping.
Pin Number 2 4 Signal Name SG Function 1 GND 3 SEN SEN signal input 5 SG GND 7 /PULS 10 SG 12 GND 11 /SIGN Reference sign input 13 /CLR Clear input 15 Open-collector reference power supply PG dividing pulse output Phase C Battery (-) 23 25 /V-CMP+
(/COIN+)
SG
GND Open-collector reference power supply Speed reference input 31 ALM+ Reference pulse input 33 PAO Torque reference input 35 PBO Reference sign input Open-collector reference power supply Clear input 41 /P-CON P control input 37 ALO1 27 /TGON+ Running signal output
26
/V-CMP(/COIN-) /TGON-
Speed coincidence detection output Running signal output Servo ready output Servo alarm output PG dividing pulse output Phase A PG dividing pulse output Phase B Alarm code output Servo ON input Forward run prohibit input Alarm reset input Reverse external torque limit input Phase-S signal output
PL1
28 29 /S-RDY+ Servo ready output 30 Servo alarm output PG dividing pulse output Phase A PG dividing pulse output Phase B Alarm code output 38 39 ALO3 Alarm code output 40 32
V-REF
/S-RDY-
PULS
ALM-
Reference pulse input 9 T-REF
34
/PAO
SIGN
36
/PBO
14
PL2
ALO2
16
CLR
/S-ON
17
PG dividing pulse output Phase C Battery (+) 47 +24V IN /PSO 43 N-OT Reverse run prohibit input Forward external torque limit input External input power supply
42
P-OT /ALMRST
18 20
PL3
19
PCO
44
/PCO 22
45 21 BAT (+)
/P-CL
46
/N-CL
BAT (-)
24
Speed coincidence detection output 49 Phase-S signal output
48
PSO
50
Note: 1. Do not use unused terminals for relays. 2. Connect the shield of the I/O signal cable to the connector shell. Connect to the FG (frame ground) at the SERVOPACK-end connector. 3. The functions allocated to the following input and output signals can be changed by using the parameters. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation and 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation. Input signals: /S-ON, /P-CON, P-OT, N-OT, /ALM-RST, /P-CL, and /N-CL Output signals: /TGON, /S-RDY, and /V-CMP (/COIN) The above output signals can be changed to /CLT, /VLT, /BK, /WARN, and /NEAR.
6-12
6.3.5 I/O Signal (CN1) Names and Functions

(1) Input Signals
Signal Name /S-ON Pin No. 40 Function Servo ON: Turns ON the servomotor when the gate block in the inverter is released. Function selected by parameter. Proportional control Switches the speed control loop from PI (proportional/ reference integral) to P (proportional) control when ON. With the internal set speed selected: Switch the rotation Direction reference direction. /P-CON 41 Control mode switching
Position speed Position torque Torque speed Enables control mode switching.
Reference 8.3.1 9.4.4 8.8.2
8.10.1 8.10.2
Zero-clamp reference Reference pulse block Common P-OT N-OT 42 43
Speed control with zero-clamp function: Reference speed is zero when ON. Position control with reference pulse stop: Stops reference pulse input when ON.
8.5.6 8.6.7
/P-CL /N-CL
45 46
Forward run prohibited Overtravel prohibited: Stops servomotor when movable part travels beyond the allowable range of motion. Reverse run prohibited Function selected by parameter. Forward external torque limit ON Current limit function enabled when ON. Reverse external torque limit ON Internal speed With the internal set speed selected: Switches the switching internal speed settings. Alarm reset: Releases the servo alarm state. Control power supply input for sequence signals: Users must provide the +24 V power supply. Allowable voltage fluctuation range: 11 to 25 V Initial data request signal when using an absolute encoder. Connecting pin for the absolute encoder backup battery. Do not connect when a battery is connected to the host controller. Speed reference speed input: 2 to 10 V/rated motor speed (Input gain can be modified using a parameter.) Torque reference input: 1 to 10 V/rated motor torque (Input gain can be modified using a parameter.) Input mode is set from the following pulses. Reference pulse input Sign + pulse string for only line driver CCW/CW pulse Two-phase pulse (90 phase differential) Positional error pulse clear input: Clears the positional error pulse during position control. +12 V pull-up power is supplied when PULS, SIGN, and CLR reference signals are open-collector outputs (+12 V power supply is built into the SERVOPACK).
8.3.3 8.9.2
8.8 8.11.1 6.3.6 8.4.1 8.4.1 6.2 8.5.2 8.7.2
/ALM-RST +24VIN SEN BAT (+) BAT (-) Speed Torque V-REF T-REF PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN Position CLR /CLR PL1 PL2 PL3
44 47 4 (2) 21 22 5 (6) 9 (10) 7 8 11 12 15 14 3 13 18
8.6.1
8.6.1 6.3.6
6-13
6 Wiring 6.3.5 I/O Signal (CN1) Names and Functions
Note: 1. Pin numbers in parentheses () indicate signal grounds. 2. The functions allocated to /S-ON, /P-CON. P-OT, N-OT, /ALM-RST, /P-CL, and /N-CL input signals can be changed by using the parameters. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. 3. The voltage input range for speed and torque references is a maximum of 12 V.
(2) Output Signals

Signal Name ALM+ ALM/TGON+ /TGON/S-RDY+ /S-RDYPAO /PAO Common PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 FG Speed /V-CMP+ /V-CMP/COIN+ /COIN/CLT /VLT /BK /WARN /NEAR Pin No. 31 32 27 28 29 30 33 (1) 34 35 36 19 20 48 49 37 38 39 (1) Shell 25 26 25 26 Function Servo alarm: Turns OFF when an error is detected. Detection during servomotor rotation: Detects when the servomotor is rotating at a speed higher than the motor speed setting. Detection speed can be set by using the parameters. Servo ready: ON if there is no servo alarm when the control/main circuit power supply is turned ON. Phase-A signal Phase-B signal Phase-C signal Phase-S signal Converted two-phase pulse (phases A and B) encoder output signal and zero-point pulse (phase C) signal: RS-422 or the equivalent (Proper line receiver is SN75175 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent corresponding to MC3486.) With an absolute encoder: Outputs serial data corresponding to the number of revolutions (RS-422 or the equivalent) 8.11.1 8.5.8 Reference 8.11.1 8.11.3 8.11.4
6.2 6.3.1 8.4.6 8.5.7
Alarm code output: Outputs 3-bit alarm codes. Open-collector: 30 V and 20 mA rating maximum Connected to frame ground if the shield wire of the I/O signal cable is connected to the connector shell. Speed coincidence (output in Speed Control Mode): Detects whether the motor speed is within the setting range and if it matches the reference speed value. Positioning completed (output in Position Control Mode): Turns ON when the number of positional error pulses reaches the value set. The setting is the number of positional error pulses set in reference units (input pulse units defined by the electronic gear). Reserved terminals The functions allocated to /TGON, /S-RDY, and /V-CMP (/COIN) can be changed by using the parameters. /CLT, /VLT, /BK, /WARN, and /NEAR signals can also be changed.
Position
8.6.5 8.3.4 8.6.6 8.7.4 8.9.5 8.11.2
Reserved
16 17 23 24 50
Terminals not used Do not connect relays to these terminals.
Note: 1. Pin numbers in parentheses () indicate signal grounds. 2. The functions allocated to /TGON, /S-RDY, and /V-CMP (/COIN) can be changed by using the parameters. /CLT, /VLT, /BK, /WARN, and /NEAR signals can also be changed. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
6-14
6.3.6 Interface Circuit

This section shows examples of SERVOPACK I/O signal connection to the host controller.
(1) Interface for Reference Input Circuits (a) Analog Input Circuit
CN1 connector terminals, 5-6: Speed reference input and 9-10: Torque reference input are explained below. Analog signals are either speed or torque reference signals at the impedance below. Reference speed input: About 14 k Reference torque input: About 14 k The maximum allowable voltages for input signals is 12 V.
Analog Voltage Input Circuit
SERVOPACK 1.8 k (1/2 W)min. 12 V
3
Analog Voltage Input Circuit (D/A)

Host controller SERVOPACK V-REF or T-REF SG About 14 k 0V
25HP-10B 2 k 1
V-REF or T-REF About 14 k SG 0V
D/A
(b) Position Reference Input Circuit

CN1 connector terminals, 7-8: Reference pulse input, 11-12: Reference code input and 15-14: Clear input are explained below. An output circuit for the reference pulse and position error pulse clear signal at the host controller can be either line-driver or open-collector outputs. The following shows by type.
Line-driver Output Circuit
Host controller SERVOPACK
150
Applicable line driver SN75174 manufactured by Texas Instruments or the equivalent
6
4.7 k
2.8 V (H level) - (L level) 3.7 V
Open-collector Output, Example 1: Power Supply Provided by User

Host controller
Vcc R1 i 150 4.7 k VF Tr1 VF = 1.5 to 1.8 V Use the examples below to set pull-up resistor R1 so the input current, i, falls between 7 mA and 15 mA. Application Examples R1 = 2.2 k with a Vcc of 24 V 5% R1 = 1 k with a Vcc of 12 V 5% R1 = 180 with a Vcc of 5 V 5%
Open-collector Output, Example 2: Using 12-V Power Supply Built into SERVOPACK
SERVOPACK Host controller SERVOPACK

PL1, PL2, PL3 terminals 1.0 k 150 About 9 mA +12 V
1.5 V max. when ON
0V
6-15
6 Wiring 6.3.6 Interface Circuit
(2) Sequence Input Circuit Interface

CN1 connector terminals 40 to 47 is explained below. The sequence input circuit interface connects through a relay or open-collector transistor circuit. Select a lowcurrent relay otherwise a faulty contact will result.
Relay Circuit Example
SERVOPACK
Open-collector Circuit Example

SERVOPACK
24 VDC
+24VIN 3.3 k /S-ON, etc.
24 VDC
+24VIN 3.3 k /S-ON, etc.
Note: The 24 VDC external power supply capacity must be 50 mA minimum.
INFO
For SEN input signal circuit, refer to 8.4 Absolute Encoders.
(3) Sink Circuit and Source Circuit

The SERVOPACKs I/O circuit uses a bidirectional photocoupler. Select either the sink circuit or the source circuit according to the specifications required for each machine.
Sink Circuit Source Circuit
24 V
+
24 V SERVOPACK input
+
SERVOPACK input
(4) Output Circuit Interface

There are three types of SERVOPACK output circuits:
(a) Line Driver Output Circuit

CN1 connector terminals, 33-34: phase-A signal, 35-36: phase-B signal and 19-20: phase-C signal are explained below. Encoder serial data converted to two-phase (phases A and B) pulse output signals (PAO, /PAO, PBO, /PBO), zero-point pulse signals (PCO, /PCO), and the amount of phase-S rotation signal are output via line-driver output circuits. Normally, the SERVOPACK uses this output circuit in speed control to comprise the position control system at the host controller. Connect the line-driver output circuit through a line receiver circuit at the host controller.
6-16
(b) Open-collector Output Circuit

CN1 connector terminals 37 to 39: Alarm code output are explained below. Alarm code signals (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3) are output from open-collector transistor output circuits. Connect an open-collector output circuit through a photocoupler, relay circuit, or line receiver circuit.
Photocoupler Circuit Example
SERVOPACK
5 to 12 VDC Photocoupler

SERVOPACK
5 to 24 VDC Relay
0V
0V
0V
Line Receiver Circuit Example

SERVOPACK
5 to 12 VDC
0V
0V
Note: The maximum allowable voltage and current capacities for open-collector output circuits are as follows: Voltage: 30 VDC Current: 20 mA DC
(c) Photocoupler Output Circuit

Photocoupler output circuits are used for servo alarm (ALM), servo ready (/S-RDY), and other sequence output signal circuits. Connect a photocoupler output circuit through a relay circuit or line receiver circuit.
SERVOPACK
5 to 24 VDC Relay
Line Receiver Circuit Example

SERVOPACK
5 to 12 VDC
0V
0V
Note: The maximum allowable voltage and current capacities for photocoupler output circuits are as follows: Voltage: 30 VDC Current: 50 mA DC
6-17
6 Wiring 6.4.1 Wiring Precautions
6.4 Others
6.4.1 Wiring Precautions
To ensure safe and stable operation, always observe the following wiring precautions.
IMPORTANT
1. For wiring for reference inputs and encoders, use the specified cables. Refer to Chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices for details. Use cables as short as possible. 2. For a ground wire, use as thick a cable as possible (2.0 mm2 (0.003 in2) or thicker). At least class-3 ground (100 max.) is recommended. Ground to one point only. If the servomotor is insulated from the machine, ground the servomotor directly. 3. Do not bend or apply tension to cables. The conductor of a signal cable is very thin (0.2 to 0.3 mm (0.0079 to 0.012 in)), so handle the cables carefully. 4. Use a noise filter to prevent noise interference. (For details, refer to 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control.) If the equipment is to be used near private houses or may receive noise interference, install a noise filter on the input side of the power supply line. Because the SERVOPACK is designed as an industrial device, it provides no mechanism to prevent noise interference. 5. To prevent malfunction due to noise, take the following actions: Position the input reference device and noise filter as close to the SERVOPACK as possible. Always install a surge suppressor in the relay, solenoid and magnetic contactor coils. The distance between a power line (such as a power supply line or servomotor cable) and a signal line must be at least 300 mm (11.81 in). Do not put the power and signal lines in the same duct or bundle them together. Do not share the power supply with an electric welder or electrical discharge machine. When the SERVOPACK is placed near a high-frequency generator, install a noise filter on the input side of the power supply line. 6. Use a molded-case circuit breaker (QF) or fuse to protect the power supply line from high voltage. The SERVOPACK connects directly to a commercial power supply without a transformer, so always use a QF or fuse to protect the SERVOPACK from accidental high voltage. 7. The SERVOPACKs do not have built-in ground protection circuits. To configure a safer system, install an earth leakage breaker for protection against overloads and short-circuiting, or install an earth leakage breaker combined with a wiring circuit breaker for ground protection.
6-18
6.4 Others
6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control

(1) Wiring Example
The SERVOPACK uses high-speed switching elements in the main circuit. It may receive switching noise from these high-speed switching elements if the processing of wiring or grounding around the SERVOPACK is not appropriate. To prevent this, always wire and ground the SERVOPACK correctly. The SGDM SERVOPACK has a built-in microprocessor (CPU), so protect it from external noise as much as possible by installing a noise filter in the appropriate place. The following is an example of wiring for noise control.
Noise filter 3 200 VAC 3.5 mm 2 (0.005 in ) min. 1
2
SERVOPACK L1 U V W Servomotor
(FG)
2LF
L2 L3 L1C L2C CN1
CN2
PG
Operation relay sequence Signal generation circuit (provided by customer)

3 1LF 2 AVR
(Ground)
2.0 mm2 (0.003 in2 ) min .
(Casing)
(Casing)
2 mm (0.003 in ) min. 2 (Casing) 3.5mm 2 (0.005 in ) min.1 (Casing) (Ground plate)
3.5mm 2 (0.005 in 2) min.
Wires of 3.5 mm 2 1 (0.005 in 2 ) or more
Ground: Ground to an independent ground (at least class-3 grounding (100 max).)
1 For ground wires connected to the casing, use a thick wire with a thickness of 2 at least 3.5 mm2 (0.005 in ) (preferably, plain stitch cooper wire) 2 : represents twisted-pair wires. 3 When using a noise filter, follow the precautions in 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control (3) Using Noise Filter.
(2) Correct Grounding (a) Grounding the Motor Frame

Always connect servomotor frame terminal FG to the SERVOPACK ground terminal ground the ground terminal . . Also be sure to
If the servomotor is grounded via the machine, a switching noise current will flow from the SERVOPACK power unit through servomotor stray capacitance. The above grounding is required to prevent the adverse effects of switching noise.
(b) Noise on the Reference Input Line

If the reference input line receives noise, ground the 0 V line (SG) of the reference input line. If the main circuit wiring for the motor is accommodated in a metal conduit, ground the conduit and its junction box. For all grounding, ground at one point only.
6-19
6 Wiring 6.4.2 Wiring for Noise Control
(3) Using Noise Filters

Use an inhibit type noise filter to prevent noise from the power supply line. The following table lists recommended noise filters for each SERVOPACK model. Install a noise filter on the power supply line for peripheral equipment as necessary.
Voltage Single-phase 100 V Single-phase 200 V SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD to -01BD A3BDA to -01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD to -02AD A3ADA to -02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD to -20AD 08ADA to -20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA, 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA, 1EADA Model FN2070-6/07 FN2070-10/07 FN2070-6/07 FN2070-10/07 FN258L-7/07 FN258L-16/07 FN258L-30/07 Recommended Noise Filters Specifications VAC Single-phase 250 VAC, 6A VAC Single-phase 250 VAC, 10A VAC Single-phase 250 VAC, 6A VAC Single-phase 250 VAC, 10A VAC Three-phase 480 VAC, 7A VAC Three-phase 480 VAC, 16A VAC Three-phase 480 VAC, 30A SCHAFFNER Manufacturer
Three-phase 200 V
FMAC-0934-5010 VAC Three-phase 440 VAC, 50A TIMONTA FMAC-0953-6410 VAC Three-phase 440 VAC, 64A FS5559-150-35 VAC Three-phase 480 VAC, 150A SCHAFFNER
IMPORTANT
Noise Filter for Brake Power Supplies If the SERVOPACK has the holding brake less than 400 W, use the following model for the brake power supply input. Noise filter model: FN2070-6/07 (Manufactured by SCHAFFNER) Precautions when using noise filter Always observe the following installation and wiring instructions. Incorrect use of a noise filter halves its benefits. 1. Do not put the input and output lines in the same duct or bundle them together.
Incorrect Correct
Noise filter
Noise filter
Box
Box
Noise filter
Noise filter
Box
Box
Separate these circuits
6-20
6.4 Others
2. Separate the noise filter ground wire from the output lines. Do not accommodate the noise filter ground wire, output lines, and other signal lines in the same duct or bundle them together.
Incorrect
Correct
Noise filter
Noise filter The ground wire can be close to input lines.
Box
Box
3. Connect the noise filter ground wire directly to the ground plate. Do not connect the noise filter ground wire to other ground wires.
Incorrect
Noise filter
SERVOPACK SERVOPACK
Correct
Noise filter
SERVOPACK SERVOPACK
6
Shielded ground wire Box
Thick and short
Box
4. When grounding a noise filter inside a unit: If a noise filter is located inside a unit, connect the noise filter ground wire and the ground wires from other devices inside the unit to the ground plate for the unit first, then ground these wires.
Unit Noise filter
SERVOPACK
SERVOPACK
Ground
Box
6-21
6 Wiring 6.4.3 Installation Conditions of EMC Directives
6.4.3 Installation Conditions of EMC Directives

To adapt a combination of a SGMH servomotor and a SGDM SERVOPACK to EMC Directives (EN55011 group 1 class A and EN61000-6-2), the following conditions must be satisfied.
(1) EMC Installation Conditions

This section describes the installation conditions that satisfy EMC guidelines for each model of the SGDM SERVOPACK. The conditions required for the standard type (base mounted) of SERVOPACK are described. Refer to this section for other SERVOPACK models such as the rack mounted types as well. This section describes the EMC installation conditions satisfied in test conditions prepared by Yaskawa. The actual EMC level may differ depending on the actual systems configuration, wiring, and other conditions.
(a) Single-phase 100 V/200 V

SGDM-A3BD to -02BD, SGDM-A3BDA to 02BDA (Single-phase 100 VAC, 30 to 200 W) SGDM-A3AD to -04AD, SGDM-A3ADA to 04ADA (Single-phase 200 VAC, 30 to 400 W)
Ground Plate / Shield Box Noise filter Brake power supply
SERVOPACK Power Supply Single-phase 100 VAC or 200 VAC Clamp Noise filter
L1, L2 L1C, L2C
Core
Core
U, V, W
Clamp
Brake Servomotor
Clamp
Core
Core
CN2
Encoder
Approx. 2 m (6.56 ft)
PE
CN1
Core
Approx. 5 m (16.4 ft)
PE
Core Host controller
Symbol
Cable Name I/O Signals cable Servomotor cable Encoder cable AC Line cable
Specifications Shield cable Shield cable Shield cable Shield cable
c d e f
6-22
6.4 Others
(b) Three-phase 200 V

SGDM-05AD (SGDM-05ADA) to -1EADA (Three-phase 200 VAC, 500 W to 15.0 kW)
Ground Plate / Shield Box Brake power supply
SERVOPACK Clamp Power Supply Three-phase 200 VAC Clamp Noise filter Core
U, V, W L1, L2, L3 L1C, L2C
Core
Brake
Servomotor Clamp Core
Core
CN2
Encoder
PE
CN1
Approx. 2 m (6.56 ft) Core Approx. 5 m (16.4 ft)
PE
Core Host controller
Symbol
Cable Name I/O Signals cable Servomotor cable Encoder cable AC Line cable
Specifications Shield cable Shield cable Shield cable Shield cable
c d e f
(2) Cable Core and Cable Clamp

(a) Attaching the Ferrite Core
The diagram shows two turns in the cable. The table shows the cable and the position where the ferrite core is attached.
Cable
Ferrite core
Cable Name I/O signals cable Motor cable Encoder cable
Mounting Position of the Core Near the host controller and the SERVOPACK. Near the SERVOPACK and the servomotor. Near the SERVOPACK and the servomotor.
(b) Recommended Ferrite-core

Cable Name I/O signals cable Encoder cable 400 W or less Motor cable 500 W or more Ferrite Core Model ESD-SR-25 PC40T96 20 70 Manufacturer Tokin. Corp. TDK
6-23
6 Wiring 6.4.4 Installation Conditions of UL Standards
(c) Fixing the Cable

Fix and ground the cable shield using a piece of conductive metal. Example of Cable Clamp
Cable Host controller side Ground plate Cable clamp
Shield (cable sheath stripped) Fix and ground the cable shield using a piece of conductive metal. Remove paint on mounting surface.
(d) Shield Box

A shield box, which is a closed metallic enclosure, should be used for shielding magnetic interference. The structure of the box should allow the main body, door, and cooling unit to be attached to the ground. The box opening should be as small as possible.
6.4.4 Installation Conditions of UL Standards

To adapt the following SERVOPACKs to UL Standards, use a corresponding terminal kit for cables to connect the terminals described in the table below.
SERVOPACK Model SGDM-50ADA (-R) SGDM-60ADA (-P) SGDM-75ADA (-P) SGDM-1AADA (-P) SGDM-1EADA (-P) Connection Terminals L1, L2, L3 (Main circuit power supply input) U, V, W (Motor Output) Terminal Kit Model JZSP-CKT75 JZSP-CKT75 JZSP-CKT75 JZSP-CKT75 JZSP-CKT1E
IMPORTANT
Main Circuit Wiring 1. SGDM SERVOPACKs are suitable under the following conditions. With 200 V class: Less than 5000 Arms, 240 V maximum. With 400 V class: Less than 5000 Arms, 480 V maximum. 2. SERVOPACKs must be used with UL-listed fuses or circuit breakers, in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Use 75C heat-resistant copper wires or an equivalent.
6-24
6.4 Others
6.4.5 Using More Than One SERVOPACK

The following diagram is an example of the wiring when more than one SERVOPACK is used. Connect the alarm output (ALM) terminals for the three SERVOPACKs in series to enable alarm detection relay 1RY to operate. When the alarm occurs, the ALM output signal transistor is turned OFF. Multiple servos can share a single molded-case circuit breaker (QF) or noise filter. Always select a QF or noise filter that has enough capacity for the total power capacity (load conditions) of those servos. For details, refer to 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity.
Power supply R S T
QF
Power OFF
Power ON
1RY 1KM
1KM
Noise filter
1KM
SUP
L1 L2 L3 L1C L2C +24V 1RY
Servomotor SERVOPACK M
CN1 31 ALM+ 32 ALM -
L1 L2 L3 L1C L2C
CN1 31 ALM+ 32 ALM -
L1 L2 L3 L1C L2C
CN1 31 ALM+ 32 ALM 0V
Note: Wire the system, so that the phase-S power supply will be the ground phase.
6-25
6 Wiring 6.4.6 Extending Encoder Cables
6.4.6 Extending Encoder Cables

Standard encoder cables have a maximum length of 20 m. If a longer cable is required, prepare an extension cable as described below. The maximum allowable cable length is 50 m.
(1) Specifications for User-modified Cables

Application Cable type Cable length JZSP-CMP19- 50 m (164.0 ft) max. UL20276 (Max. operating temperature: 80C (176F)) AWG16 2C + AWG26 2P Basic Specifications AWG16 (1.31 mm2) (0.00203 in sq) Insulation covered dimensions: 2.0 (0.08 in) AWG26 (0.13 mm2) (0.000201 in sq) Insulation covered dimensions: 0.91 mm (0.04 in) 6.8 mm (0.27 in) Fixed Type
Finished Dimensions
Black
Internal Configuration and Lead Color
Orange Orange/ White Light blue Light blue/ White
Red
Yaskawa Standards Specifications (Standard Length)
Cable length: 30 m (98.4 ft), 40 m (131.2 ft), 50 m (164.0 ft)
* Specify the cable length in of cable type designation. (Example) JZSP-CMP19-30 (30 m (98.4 ft))
6-26
6.4 Others
(2) Connectors and Connector kits for User-modified Encoder Cables

Name SGMAH SGMPH SERVOPACK end SGMGH connector kit SGMSH SGMDH SGMAH SGMPH Type Specifications Reference
JZSP-CMP9-1
5.5.1
JZSP-CMP9-2 L-shaped plug MS3108B20-29S1 Straight plug MS3106B20-29S1 Cable clamp
5.4.3 5.4.5 5.5.1 5.4.4 5.5.2
For standard environment
5.4.4 5.5.2
Servomotor end connector kit
MS3057-12A1 SGMGH SGMSH SGMDH Straight plug JA06A-20-29S-J1-EB

2
5.4.4 5.5.2
5.5.2 L-shaped plug
JA08A-20-29S-J1-EB2 For IP67 specification JL04-2022CKE (09)2 Cable diameter 6.5 to 9.5 JL04-2022CKE (12)2 Cable diameter 9.5 to 13 JL04-2022CKE (14)2 Cable diameter 12.9 to 15.9 50 m (164.0 ft) max. Cables JZSP-CMP19-
5.5.2
6
Cable clamp 5.5.2
5.5.1
Maximum length: 50 m (1.97 in)
* 1. Contact DDK Electronics, Inc. * 2. Contact Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Ltd.
6-27
6 Wiring 6.4.7 Operating Conditions on 400-V Power Supply Voltage
6.4.7 Operating Conditions on 400-V Power Supply Voltage
CAUTION
Do not connect the SERVOPACK for 100 V and 200 V directly to a voltage of 400 V. The SERVOPACK will be destroyed. Control the AC power supply ON and OFF sequence at the primary side of voltage conversion transfer. Voltage conversion transfer inductance will cause a surge voltage if the power is turned ON and OFF at the secondary, damaging the SERVOPACK.
There are four types of SGDM SERVOPACKs, for the power supply voltages: Single-phase 100 VAC, singlephase 200 VAC, and three-phase 200 VAC. When using the SERVOPACK for 100 V or 200 V with the threephase 400-VAC class (380 to 480 V), prepare the following voltage conversion transformers (single-phase or three-phase)
Primary Voltage 380 to 480 VAC 380 to 480 VAC Secondary Voltage 200 VAC 100 VAC
When selecting a voltage conversion transformer, refer to the capacities shown in the following table.
Voltage SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA 1AADA 1EADA Voltage Capacity per SERVOPACK * (kVA) 0.15 0.25 0.40 0.60 0.20 0.25 0.40 0.75 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.3 3.2 4.3 5.9 7.5 12.5 15.5 22.7 30.9 Current Capacity of Circuit Breaker or Fuse (Arms) 4 6 4
Single-phase 100 V
Single-phase 200 V
8 4 7 10 13 17 28 32 41 60 81
Three-phase 200 V
* This is the net value at the rated load.
6-28
6.4 Others
Voltage conversion transformer Single-phase R

1KM
SERVOPACK
100 or 200 VAC

L1 L2
S
1KM
T
Magnetic contactor for power supply ON and OFF
Single-phase Power Supply Connection Example
6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression

(1) Reactor Types
The SERVOPACK has the DC reactor connection terminals for power supply harmonic suppression. However, SERVOPACKs with capacities of 6 kW or more do not have these terminals. The type of DC reactor to be connected differs depending on the SERVOPACK capacity. Refer to the following table.
Applicable SERVOPACK Model SGDMSingle-phase 100 V A3BD, A3BDA A5BD, A5BDA 01BD, 01BDA 02BD, 02BDA A3AD, A3ADA A5AD, A5ADA 01AD, 01ADA 02AD, 02ADA 04AD, 04ADA 05AD, 05ADA 08AD, 08ADA 10AD, 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA DC Reactor Model X5063 X5062 X5071 X5070 X5069 X5061 Reactor Specifications Inductance (mH) Rated Current (A) 10.0 4.7 40.0 20.0 10.0 2.0 1.8 3.5 0.85 1.65 3.3 4.8
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 200 V
X5060 X5059 X5068
1.5 1.0 0.47
8.8 14.0 26.8
Note: Select a proper DC reactor for the input current to the SERVOPACK. Refer to 2.6.2 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Capacity for input current to each SERVOPACK. For the kind of reactor, refer to 5.8.13 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression.
6-29
6 Wiring 6.4.8 DC Reactor for Harmonic Suppression
(2) Connecting a Reactor

Connect a DC reactor as shown in the following diagram. The DC reactor is connected in series to the rectifier circuits output side.
DC Reactor
Three-phase input DC reactor SERVOPACK
1 2
Note: 1. The SERVOPACK 1 and 2 terminals for the DC reactor are short-circuited before shipment. Remove the lead wire between these two terminals and connect the DC reactor with SERVOPACK. 2. DC reactor is an option (Provided by customer).
6-30
6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors

6.5.1 Regenerative Power and Regenerative Resistance
The rotational energy of driven machine such as servomotor is returned to the SERVOPACK. This is called regenerative power. The regenerative power is absorbed by charging the smoothing capacitor, but when the power exceeds the capacitors chargeable energy, the regenerative power is further consumed by the regenerative resistor. The servomotor is driven in regeneration state in the following circumstances: While decelerating to a stop during acceleration and deceleration operation. Continuous falling operation on the vertical axis. During continuous operation with the servomotor rotated from the load side (negative load). The SERVOPACKs with a capacity of the single-phase 200 V with 30 to 400 W or 100 V with 30 to 200 W do not have built-in regenerative resistors. If the operation exceeds the rotating speed specifications shown in the 4.5.3 Load Moment of Inertia, connect an external regenerative resistor.
6.5.2 Connecting External Regenerative Resistors

(1) Necessity of External Regenerative Resistors
SERVOPACK Capacity Necessity of External Regenerative Resistors Not Required Explanation No built-in regenerative resistor is provided, however, normally an external regenerative resistor is not required. Install external regenerative resistors when the smoothing capacitor in SERVOPACK cannot process all the regenerative power. A built-in regenerative resistor is provided as standard. Install external regenerative resistors when the built-in regenerative resistor cannot process all the regenerative power. No built-in regenerative resistor is provided, so the external regenerative resistor is required. If the external regenerative resistor is not connected with the SERVOPACK, the alarm30 is detected as a regeneration error alarm.
400 W or less
500 W to 5.0 kW
Not Required
6.0 to 15.0 kW
Required
6-31
6 Wiring 6.5.2 Connecting External Regenerative Resistors
(2) Specifications of Built-in Regenerative Resistor

If the amount of regenerative energy exceeds the processing capacity of the SERVOPACK, then install an external regenerative resistor. The following table shows the specifications of the SERVOPACKs built-in resistor and the amount of regenerative power (average values) that it can process.
Applicable SERVOPACKs SGDMSingle-phase 100 V Single-phase 200 V A3BD to -02BD, A3BDA to -02BDA A3AD to -04AD, A3ADA to -04ADA 05AD to -10AD, 05ADA to -10ADA 15AD, 15ADA 20AD, 20ADA 30AD, 30ADA 50ADA 60ADA 75ADA to -1EADA Specifications of Build-in Resistor Resistance () 50 30 25 12.5 8 (6.25) 2 (3.13)
3
Capacity (W) 60 70 140 140 280 (880) 2 (1760)

3
Regenerative Power Processed by Built-in Resistor 1 (W) 12 14 28 28 56 (180) 2 (350)

3
Minimum Allowable Resistance () 40 40 40 20 12 12 8 5.8 2.9
Three-phase 200 V
* 1. The average regenerative power that can be handled is 20% of the rated capacity of the regenerative resistor built into the SERVOPACK. * 2. The values in parentheses are for the optional JUSP-RA04 Regenerative Resistor Unit. * 3. The values in parentheses are for the optional JUSP-RA05 Regenerative Resistor Unit.
6-32
(3) Precautions on Selecting External Regenerative Resistors

A built-in regenerative resistor is provided for 500 W to 5.0 kW SGDM SERVOPACKs as standard. When installing an external regenerative resistor with the SERVOPACK, make sure that the resistance is the same as that of the SERVOPACKs built-in resistor. If combining multiple small-capacity regenerative resistors to increase the regenerative resistor capacity (W), select resistors so that the resistance value including error is at least as high as the minimum allowable resistance shown in the following table. Connecting a regenerative resistor with the resistance smaller than the minimum allowable resistance may increase the current flow in the regeneration circuit, resulting in damage to the circuit.
(4) Parameter Setting

Regenerative Resistor Capacity
Speed Position Torque
Pn600
Setting Range Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to SERVOPACK 10 W 0 Immediately capacity Be sure to set this parameter when installing an external regenerative resistor with the SERVOPACK. With the factory setting of 0, the SERVOPACKs built-in resistor is used. Set the regenerative resistor capacity within tolerance value. When the set value is improper, alarm A.32 is not detected correctly. Also, do not set other than 0 without connecting the regenerative resistor because alarm A.30 or A.33 may be detected. The set value differs depending on the cooling method of external regenerative resistor: For natural air cooling method: Set the value maximum 20% of the actually installed regenerative resistor capacity (W). For forced air cooling method: Set the value maximum 50% of the actually installed regenerative resistor capacity (W).
For example, set 20 W (100 W 20% ) for the 100 W external regenerative resistor with natural cooling method: Pn600 = 2 (units: 10 W) 1. When resistors for power are used at the rated load ratio, the resistor temperature increases to between 200 C (392 F ) and 300 C (572 F ) . The resistors must be used at or below the rated values. Check with the manufacturer for the resistors load characteristics. Use the regenerative resistors at no more than 20% of the rated load ratio with natural convection cooling, and no more than 50% of the rated load ratio with forced air cooling. 2. For safetys sake, use the resistors with thermoswitches.
IMPORTANT
6-33
6 Wiring 6.5.2 Connecting External Regenerative Resistors
(5) Connecting Regenerative Resistors

IMPORTANT
Do not touch the regenerative resistors because they reach high temperatures. Use heat-resistant, non-flammable wiring and make sure that the wiring does not touch the resistors. Refer to 5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size for connecting wire size when connecting an external regenerative resistor.
(a) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 400W or Less

Enlarged View
L1C
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
Connect an external regenerative resistor between B1 and B2 terminals. Note: The user must provide the regenerative resistor.
L2C B1 B2 U V W
MODE/SET
SGDM-
DATA/ CHARGE POWER
(b) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 0.5 to 5.0 kW

Enlarged View
Disconnect the wiring between the SERVOPACKs B2 and B3 terminals and connect an external regenerative resistor between the B1 and B2 terminals. The user must provide the regenerative resistor. Note: Be sure to remove the lead wire between the B2 and B3 terminals.
L1C
YASKAWA SERVOPACK200V
L2C B1 B2 B3 U V
YASKAWA
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
6-34
(c) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 6.0 kW or More

No built-in regenerative resistor is provided, so the external regenerative resistor is required. The special regenerative resistor units are as follow:
Main Circuit Power Supply Three-phase 200 V Applicable SERVOPACK Model SGDM60ADA 75ADA to 1EADA Applicable Regenerative Resistor Unit JUSP-RA04 JUSP-RA05 Resistance () 6.25 3.13
Specifications 25 220 W 4 (parallel connection) 25 220 W 8 (parallel connection)
The following diagram shows the connection method between the SERVOPACK and the regenerative resistor unit.
Regenerative Resistor Unit JUSP-RA SERVOPACK
SERVOPARK 200V
SGDMVer.
YASKAWA
POWER
MODE/SET
DATA/
BATTERY
CHARGE
WARNING
L1
L2
L3
B1
B2
Note: Connect a regenerative resistor unit between B1 and B2 terminals. The regenerative resistor unit is provided by the customer.
6-35
7
Digital Operator/Panel Operator
7.1 Functions on Digital Operator/Panel Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 Connecting the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.1.2 Key Names and Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7.1.4 Status Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6
7.2 Operation in Utility Function Mode (Fn) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8

7.2.1 List of Utility Function Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8 7.2.2 Alarm Traceback Data Display (Fn000) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9 7.2.3 Zero-point Search Mode (Fn003) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10 7.2.4 Parameter Settings Initialization (Fn005) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11 7.2.5 Alarm Traceback Data Clear (Fn006) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12 7.2.6 Automatic Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00E) - - - - - - - - - 7-13 7.2.7 Manual Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00F) - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14 7.2.8 Password Setting (Protects Parameters from Being Changed) (Fn010) - - - - - - - - - - 7-15 7.2.9 Motor Models Display (Fn011) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16 7.2.10 Software Version Display (Fn012) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.3 Operation in Parameter Setting Mode (Pn) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18

7.3.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.4 Operation in Monitor Mode (Un) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27

7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27
7-1
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.1.1 Connecting the Digital Operator
7.1 Functions on Digital Operator/Panel Operator

This section describes the basic operations of the digital operator (hereinafter called the digital operator) and the panel operator (hereinafter called the panel operator) for setting the operating conditions. Set parameters and JOG operation, and display status using these operators. For the operation of the digital operator (Model: JUSPOP02A-2), refer to -II Series SGMH/SGDM Digital Operator Operation Manual (TOE-S800-34).
7.1.1 Connecting the Digital Operator

Two types of digital operators are available. One is a built-in operator that has a panel indicator and switches located on the front panel of the SERVOPACK. This type of digital operator is also called a panel operator. The other one is a hand-held operator (JUSP-OP02A-2 digital operator), which can be connected to the SERVOPACK with connector CN3 of the SERVOPACK. There is no need to turn OFF the SERVOPACK to connect this hand-held operator to the SERVOPACK. Refer to the following illustrations to connect the digital operator to the SERVOPACK.
Digital Operator JUSP-OP02A-2
Panel Operator
SGDM-
.
ALARM RESET
. .
.
MODE/SET DATA/
DIGITAL SERVOPACK OPERATOR JUSP-OP02A

DSPL SET DATA ENTER
JOG SVON
YASKAWA
CN3
A dedicated cable is used to connect the digital operator to the SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK
IMPORTANT
If the digital operator is connected to the SERVOPACK, the panel operator does not display anything.
7-2
7.1.2 Key Names and Functions

Key names and functions for the digital operator and the panel operator are explained below. Set parameters and JOG operation, and display status using the panel operator.
Key Digital Operator
ALARM RESET
Panel Operator
+
Press simultaneously
Function To reset the servo alarm. Note 1. The servo alarm can be reset by /ALM-RST (CN1-44) input signal. 2. The servo alarm need not be reset if the control power supply is turned OFF. To select a basic mode, such as the status display mode, utility function mode, parameter setting mode, or monitor mode. Can be also used to set the data. To display parameter setting and set value.
Digital Operator
(RESET Key)
DSPL SET
SERVOPACK ALARM RESET JOG SVON DIGITAL OPERATOR JUSP-OP02A DSPL SET DATA ENTER
(DSPL/SET Key)
MODE/SET (MODE/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
YASKAWA
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT Key)
(UP Key)
(UP Key)
Press the UP Key to increase the set value. For JOG operation, this key is used as Forward Run Start Key. Press the DOWN Key to decrease the set value. For JOG operation, this key is used as Reserve Run Start Key. Press the RIGHT Key to shift to the next digit on the right.
SERVOPACK
(DOWN Key)
(DOWN Key)
(RIGHT Key)
(LEFT Key)
Panel Operator
JOG SVON
Press the LEFT or DATA/SHIFT Key to shift to the next digit on the left. Press the SVON or MODE/SET Key to perform servo ON/OFF in the JOG operation with the operator.
(SVON Key)
IMPORTANT
When an alarm occurs, remove the cause, and then reset the alarm. Refer to 11.1 Troubleshooting.
7-3
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation
7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation

The basic modes include: Status display mode, Utility Function Mode, Parameter Setting Mode, and Monitor Mode. Select a basic mode to display the operation status, set parameters and operation references. The basic mode is selected in the following order.
(1) Using the Digital Operator

Turn ON the power Press DSPL/SET Key. A basic mode is selected in the following order.
Status Display Mode (Refer to 7.1.4) Press

DSPL SET
. Press
DATA ENTER
Fn
: Utility Function Mode (Refer to 7.2)
Repeat
Press
DSPL SET
. Press
DATA ENTER
Pn
: Parameter Setting Mode (Refer to 7.3)
Press
DSPL SET
. Press
DATA ENTER
Pn
: Monitor Mode (Refer to 7.4)
Press
DSPL SET
Press DSPL/SET Key and UP or DOWN Key to select the desired parameter number. Then, press DATA/ENTER Key to display the contents of selected parameter number in the selected mode. (Refer to each operation instruction described later.)
7-4
(2) Using the Panel Operator

Turn ON the power
Press DSPL/SET Key. A basic mode is selected in the following order.
Status Display Mode (Refer to 7.1.4)

Press .
MODE/SET
Press Repeat Press .

MODE/SET
for more than one second.
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT)
Fn
: Utility Function Mode (Refer to 7.2)
Press Press .
Pn
: Parameter Setting Mode (Refer to 7.3)
MODE/SET
Press Press .
MODE/SET
Un
: Monitor Mode (Refer to 7.4)
Press DSPL/SET Key and UP or DOWN Key to select the desired parameter number. Then, press DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the contents of selected parameter number in the selected mode. (Refer to each operation instruction described later.)
7-5
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.1.4 Status Display
7.1.4 Status Display

Bit data Code
(1) Bit Data and Meanings

Item Speed or Torque Control Mode Bit Data Meaning Control Power ON Baseblock Lit when SERVOPACK control power is ON. Lit for baseblock. Not lit when servo is ON. Lit when the difference between the motor speed and reference speed is the same as or less than the value set in Pn503. (Factory setting is 10 min-1.) Always lit in torque control mode. Bit Data Control Power ON Baseblock Position Control Mode Meaning Lit when SERVOPACK control power supply is ON. Lit for baseblock. Not lit when servo is ON. Lit if error between position reference and actual motor position is below preset value. Not lit if error between position reference and actual motor position exceeds preset value. Preset value: Set in Pn500 (Factory setting is 7 pulses.) Lit if motor speed exceeds preset value. Not lit if motor speed is below preset value. Preset value: Set in Pn502 (Factory setting is 20 min-1.)
c d
Speed Coincidence (/V-CMP)
Positioning Completion (/COIN)
Rotation Detection (/TGON)
Lit if motor speed exceeds preset value. Rotation Not lit if motor speed is below preset value. Detection Preset value: Set in Pn502 (Factory setting (/TGON) is 20 min-1.) Lit if input speed reference exceeds preset value. Not lit if input speed reference is below preset value. Preset value: Set in Pn502 (Factory setting is 20 min-1.) Lit if input torque reference exceeds preset value. Not lit if input torque reference is below preset value. Preset value: 10% of rated torque Lit when main circuit power supply is ON and normal. Not lit when main circuit power supply power is OFF.
Speed Reference Input
Reference Pulse Input
Lit if reference pulse is input. Not lit if no reference pulse is input.
Torque Reference Input
Error Counter Clear Signal Input
Lit when error counter clear signal is input. Not lit when error counter clear signal is not input. Lit when main circuit power supply is ON and normal. Not lit when main circuit power supply power is OFF.
Power Ready
Power Ready
7-6
(2) Codes and Meanings

Code Baseblock Servo OFF (motor power OFF) Run Servo ON (motor power ON) Forward Run Prohibited CN1-42 (P-OT) is OFF. Reverse Run Prohibited CN1-43 (N-OT) is OFF. Alarm Status Displays the alarm number. Meaning
7-7
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.2.1 List of Utility Function Modes
7.2 Operation in Utility Function Mode (Fn)

7.2.1 List of Utility Function Modes
This section describes how to apply the basic operations using the panel operator to run and adjust the motor. The following table shows the parameters in the utility function mode.
Parameter No. Fn000 Fn001 Fn002 Fn003 Fn004 Fn005 Fn006 Fn007 Fn008 Fn009 Fn00A Fn00B Fn00C Fn00D Fn00E Fn00F Fn010 Fn011 Fn012 Fn013 Function Alarm traceback data display Rigidity setting during online autotuning JOG mode operation Zero-point search mode Fixed parameter Parameter setting initialization Alarm traceback data clear Writing to EEPROM moment of inertia ratio data obtained from online autotuning Absolute encoder multiturn reset and encoder alarm reset Automatic tuning of analog (speed, torque) reference offset Manual adjustment of speed reference offset Manual adjustment of torque reference offset Manual zero-adjustment of analog monitor output Manual gain-adjustment of analog monitor output Automatic offset-adjustment of motor current detection signal Manual offset-adjustment of motor current detection signal Password setting (protects parameters from being changed) Motor models display Software version display Multiturn limit setting change when a Multiturn Limit Disagreement Alarm (A.CC) occurs Remarks Reference Section 7.2.2 9.2.4 8.1.1 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 9.2.7 8.4.5 8.5.3 8.7.3 8.5.3 8.7.3 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10 8.4.8
{ { { { { { { { { { { { { { {

Note: When the parameters marked with { in remarks column or in Pn are set for Password Setting (Fn010), the indication shown below appears and such parameters cannot be changed.
Blinks for one second
7-8
7.2.2 Alarm Traceback Data Display (Fn000)

The alarm traceback display can display up to 10 previously occurred alarms. The alarm data is displayed on Fn000, which is stocked in the alarm traceback data. The data can be cleared using an utility function mode Alarm Traceback Data Clear. For details, refer to 7.2.5 Alarm Traceback Data Clear (Fn006). The alarm traceback data is not cleared on alarm reset or when the SERVOPACK power is turned OFF. This does not adversely affect operation.
Alarm Sequence Number Alarm Code The higher the number, See the alarm the older the alarm data is. table.
The following alarm are operator-related alarms which are not recorded in the traceback data.
Display Description Digital operator transmission error 1
Digital operator transmission error 2
Refer to 11.1 Troubleshooting for alarm number and contents.

INFO
1. Alarm traceback data will not be updated when the same alarm occurs repetitively. 2. The display A.-- means no alarm occurs.
Follow the procedure below to confirm alarms which have been generated.
Step Display after Operation Digital Operator Panel Operator Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select Alarm Traceback Data Display (Fn000). If a number other than Fn000 is displayed, press UP Key or DOWN Key to set Fn000. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The latest alarm data is displayed. Press the UP Key to display the data for a previous alarm. (To display one newer alarm data, press DOWN Key.) Note: The higher the digit on the far left, the older the alarm data is. Press the UP Key to display value in order. Note: A.-- means no alarm occurs. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display will return to Fn000.
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA (DATA/SHIFT Key)

(Press at least 1 s.)
3
(UP Key) (UP Key)
4
(UP Key) (UP Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-9
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.2.3 Zero-point Search Mode (Fn003)
7.2.3 Zero-point Search Mode (Fn003)
CAUTION
Forward run prohibited (P-OT) and reverse run prohibited (N-OT) signals are disabled during zero-point search mode operations using Fn003.
The zero-point search mode is designed to perform positioning to the zero-point pulse (phase-C) position of the encoder and to clamp at the position. This mode is used when the motor shaft needs to be aligned to the machine. Execute the zero-point search without connecting the motor shaft with the machine.
For aligning the motor shaft with the machine
The speed for executing the zero-point search is 60 min-1. The following conditions must be met to perform the zero-point search operation. If the Servo-ON input signal (/S-ON) is ON, turn it OFF. Release the Servo-ON signal mask if the parameter Pn 50A.1 is set to 7, and the servo has been set to always be ON. Follow the procedure below to execute the zero-point search.
Step 1 Display after Operation Digital Operator
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select the Fn003. Note: The enabled digit blinks.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left. Press the SVON or MODE/SET Key. The servo turns ON. When the parameter is set to Pn000.0 = 0 (default), pressing the UP Key will rotate the motor in the forward direction. Pressing the DOWN Key will rotate the motor in the reverse direction. When the parameter is set to Pn000.0 = 1, the rotation direction of the motor is reversed. When the motor zero-point search is completed, the display blinks. At this moment, the motor is servo-locked at the zero-point pulse position.
JOG SVON
(SVON Key)
Display blinks.
7-10
Step
Display after Operation
Digital Operator
DATA ENTER
Panel Operator
Description Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. Fn003 display appears again. The motor will be servo OFF status.
(DATA/ENTER Key)

INFO
Forward run prohibited (P-OT) and reverse run prohibited (N-OT) signals cannot be input during the zero-point search operation.
7.2.4 Parameter Settings Initialization (Fn005)

This function is used when returning to the factory settings after changing parameter settings. Pressing the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key during servo ON does not initialize the parameter settings. After initialization, turn OFF the power supply and then turn ON again.
IMPORTANT
Initialize the parameter settings with the servo OFF.
Step
Digital Operator
DSPL
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn005. Note: The enabled digit blinks.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. Then, the parameters will be initialized. During initialization, the display shown on the left blinks. When the initialization of parameter setting completes, the display shown on the left blinks for about one second. The display changes from donE to the display shown on the left. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode display Fn005.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
End of initialization After about one second

DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-11
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.2.5 Alarm Traceback Data Clear (Fn006)
7.2.5 Alarm Traceback Data Clear (Fn006)

This function clears the alarm traceback data, which stores the alarms generated in the SERVOPACK. After having cleared data, A.-- (No alarm) is set to all the alarm traceback data.
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn006. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to clear the alarm traceback data. The display shown on the left blinks for about one second when the data is cleared. The display changes from donE to the display shown on the left. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode display Fn006.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
After about one second
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-12
7.2.6 Automatic Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00E)

Automatic motor current detection offset adjustment has performed at Yaskawa before shipping. Basically, the user need not perform this adjustment. Perform this adjustment only if highly accurate adjustment is required for reducing torque ripple caused by current offset. Automatic adjustment is possible only with power supplied to the main circuit power supply and with the servo OFF.
IMPORTANT
Execute the automatic offset adjustment if the torque ripple is too big when compared with that of other SERVOPACKs.
Step
Digital Operator
DSPL
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn00E. Note: The enabled digit blinks.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The offset will be automatically adjusted. When the adjustment completes, the display shown on the left blinks for about one second. The display changes from donE to the display shown on the left. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode display Fn00E.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-13
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.2.7 Manual Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00F)
7.2.7 Manual Offset-adjustment of Motor Current Detection Signal (Fn00F)

The adjusting range of the motor current detection offset is -512 to +511. To adjust the offset, perform the automatic adjustment (Fn00E) first. And if the torque ripple is still big after the automatic adjustment, perform the manual adjustment.
IMPORTANT
If this function, particularly manual adjustment, is executed carelessly, it may worsen the characteristics. When performing manual adjustments, run the motor at a speed of approximately 100 min-1, and adjust the operator until the torque monitor ripple is minimized. (Refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor.) Adjust the phase-U and phase-V offsets alternately several times until these offsets are well balanced.
Step 1
Digital Operator
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn00F. Note: The enabled digit blinks.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left (phase U). Press the LEFT or RIGHT or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second to display the phase-U offset amount. Press the UP or DOWN Key to adjust the offset. Carefully adjust the offset while monitoring the torque reference monitor signal.


Press the LEFT or RIGHT or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second. The display shown on the left appears. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The display shown on the left appears (phase V). Press the LEFT or RIGHT or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second to display the phase-V offset amount. Press the UP or DOWN Key to adjust the offset. Carefully adjust the offset while monitoring the torque reference monitor signal.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)

10

Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second. The display shown on the left appears. When the offset adjustment completes, press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display returns to the utility function mode display Fn00F.
11
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-14
7.2.8 Password Setting (Protects Parameters from Being Changed) (Fn010)

The write prohibited setting is used for preventing accidental changes of the parameter. All the parameters Pn and some of Fn become write prohibited by setting values. Refer to 7.2.1 List of Utility Function Modes for details. Setting values are as follows: 0000: Write permitted (Releases write prohibited mode.) 0001: Write prohibited (Parameters become write prohibited from the next power ON.)
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn010. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second, and the display will be as shown on the left. Press the UP or DOWN Key to set a value: 0000: Write permitted, 0001: Write prohibited Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to register the value. When the value is registered, the display shown on the left blinks for about one second. Note: If a value other than 0000 and 0001 is set, Error blinks for about one second, and the previous setting is displayed. The display changes from donE to P.000. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode display Fn010.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-15
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.2.9 Motor Models Display (Fn011)
7.2.9 Motor Models Display (Fn011)

This mode is used for motor maintenance, set the parameter Fn011 to select the motor model check mode. If the SERVOPACK has been custom-made, you can also check the specification codes of SERVOPACKs.
Step 1 Display after Operation Digital Operator Panel Operator
DSPL SET
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn011. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the servomotor model and voltage code.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Data
00 01 02
Motor Voltage Model

100VAC, 140VDC 200VAC, 280VDC Reserved
Data
00 01 02 03 04 05
Motor Type Model

SGMAH SGMPH SGMSH SGMGH- A(1500 min-1) SGMGH- B(1000 min-1) SGMDH
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to display the servomotor capacity.

DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Motor capacity in units of 10 W The above example indicates 100 W.
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key, and the encoder type and resolution code will be displayed.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Encoder Type Data Type 00 Incremental 01 02

Multi-turn data absolute encoder Single-turn data absolute encoder
Encoder Resolution
Data Resolution 13 13-bit 16 16-bit 17-bit 17 20 20-bit
DSPL
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to display the SERVOPACKs code for custom orders. Note: The display y.0000 means standard model.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Code for custom orders
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode display Fn011.
7-16
7.2.10 Software Version Display (Fn012)

Set the Fn012 to select the software-version check mode to check the SERVOPACK and encoder software version numbers.
Step 1 Display after Operation Digital Operator Panel Operator
DSPL SET
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn012. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the SERVOPACK software version number. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to display the encoder software version number. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the utility function mode Fn012.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-17
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.3.1 Setting Parameters
7.3 Operation in Parameter Setting Mode (Pn)

Functions can be selected or adjusted by setting parameters. There are two types of parameters. One type requires value setting and the other requires function selection. These two types use different setting methods. With value setting, a parameter is set to a value within the specified range of the parameter. With function selection, the functions allocated to each digit of the seven-segment LED panel indicator (five digits) can be selected.
7.3.1 Setting Parameters

(1) Value Setting Parameters
(a) Types of Value Setting Parameters
Refer to 12.3.2 List of Parameters.
(b) Example of Changing Value Setting Parameter

The parameter settings can be used for changing parameter data. Before changing the data, check the permitted range of the parameter.
EXAMPLE
The example below shows how to change parameter Pn100 (speed loop gain) from 40 to 100.
Step
Digital Operator
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the parameter setting mode. If a parameter other than Pn100 is displayed, press the UP or DOWN Key to select Pn100. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The current data of Pn100 is displayed. Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the digit to be set. Press the UP or DOWN Key to change the data. Keep pressing UP or DOWN Key until 00100 is displayed.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display of Pn100. The data for the speed loop gain (Pn100) is changed from 40 to 100.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-18
(c) Parameter Indications

In this manual, the parameter is explained with using the following format.
Applicable control mode for the parameter Speed : Speed control, internal set speed control
Positoin : Position control The number of the The name of the parameter parameter Torque : Torque control
Pn406
Emergency Stop Torque

Setting Range 0 to 800 Setting Unit 1%
Speed Factory Setting 800
Position
Torque
Setting Validation Immediately
This section shows the range of the parameter settings. The maximum value can be set even if the parameter is combined with the other sepecified motor.
This section shows the minimum setting unit (the setting value).
This section shows the SERVOPACK's parameter with factory setting.
This section shows if the setting is validated "immediately" or "after restart" when changing the parameter.
The following alarm shows the setting value of the parameter. Decimal display in five digits
7-19
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.3.1 Setting Parameters
(2) Function Selection Parameters (a) Types of Function Selection Parameters

Refer to 12.3.2 List of Parameters.
IMPORTANT
If the parameters with After restart in Setting Validation column in the table are changed, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supply and ON again to validate new setting. Pn10B.1 and Pn110.0 require the power to be reset as mentioned above. Pn10B.0, Pn110.1, and Pn110.2 are enabled with the off-line, so the power does not have to be reset.
Category
Parameter No. Pn000 Pn001 Pn002 Pn003 Pn10B Pn110 Pn200 Pn207 Pn408 Pn50A Pn50B Pn50C Pn50D Pn50E Pn50F Pn510 Pn512
Name Function Selection Basic Switches Function Selection Application Switches Function Selection Application Switches Function Selection Application Switches Gain Application Switches Online Autotuning Switches Position Control References Selection Switches Position Control Function Switches Torque Function Switches Input Signal Selections Input Signal Selections Input Signal Selections Input Signal Selections Output Signal Selections Output Signal Selections Output Signal Selections Output Signal Reversal Setting
Function Selection Parameter
Factory Setting 0000 0000 0000 0002 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 2100 6543 8888 8888 3211 0000 0000 0000
Servo Gain Related Parameter Position Control Related Parameter Torque Control Related Parameter Sequence Related Parameter (Input Signal Selection) Sequence Related Parameter (Output Signal Selection)
Setting Validation After restart After restart After restart Immediately After restart/ Immediately After restart/ Immediately After restart After restart Immediately After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart
7-20
(b) Example of Changing Function Selection

The procedure to change the setting of control method selection (Pn000.1) of the function selection basic switches (Pn000) from speed control to position control is shown below.
Step Display after Operation Digital Operator
DSPL
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the parameter setting mode. If a parameter other than Pn000 is displayed, press the UP or DOWN Key to select the Pn100. Note: The enable digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The current data of Pn000 is displayed. Press the LEFT or RIGHT or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the first digit of current data. Press the UP Key once to change to n.0010. (Set the control method to position control.) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display Pn000. The control method is changed to position control.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

(UP Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

6 7
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

To enable the change in the setting of function selection basic switches (Pn000), turn OFF the power and ON again.
(c) Parameter Indications

Each digit of the function selection parameters is defined as the hexadecimal display. The parameter display example shows how parameters are displayed in digits for set values.
1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit For the hexadecimal display only
Pn000.0 or n.xxx: Pn000.1 or n.xxx: Pn000.2 or n.xxx: Pn000.3 or n.xxx:
Indicates the value for the 1st digit of parameter Pn000. Indicates the value for the 2nd digit of parameter Pn000. Indicates the value for the 3rd digit of parameter Pn000. Indicates the value for the 4th digit of parameter Pn000.
7-21
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation
For details on each digit of the parameter, see 12.3.2 List of Parameters.
Parameter Meaning Input the forward run prohibited signal (P-OT) from CN1-42 (Factory setting). Forward run prohibited signal (P-OT) is disabled (Forward rotation allowed).
Pn50A
n.2 n.8
The number of the parameter
This blank shows the setting value of the function selection, as well as the state condition on the panel operator and the digital operator (JUSP-OP02A-2).
This section explains the details of the function selection.
7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation

Each input signal is allocated to a pin of the input connector CN1 by setting the parameter. The following table shows detailed allocation.
(1) Factory Setting (Pn50A.0 = 0)

The factory setting for the input signal allocation is as follows. means factory setting.
Pn50A: Pn50B:
7-22
(2) Changing the Allocation (Pn50A.0 = 1)

Set the parameter in accordance with the relation between the signal to be used and the input connector pin. After having changed the parameter, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the parameters. means factory setting.
Signal Name Parameter Setting Allocation Servo ON Pn50A.1 = n.xxx Proportional Operation Reference Pn50A.2 = n.xxx Forward Run Prohibited Pn50A.3 = n.xxx Reverse Run Prohibited Pn50B.0 = n.xxx Alarm Reset Pn50B.1 = n.xxx Forward External Torque Limit Pn50B.2 = n.xxx Reserve External Torque Limit Pn50B.3 = n.xxx Internal Set Speed Selection Pn50C.0 = n.xxx Internal Set Speed Selection Pn50C.1 = n.xxx Internal Set Speed Selection Pn50C.2 = n.xxx Control Method Selection Pn50C.3 = n.xxx Zero Clamp Pn50D.0 = n.xxx Reference Pulse Inhibit Pn50D.1 = n.xxx Gain Changeover Pn50D.2 = n.xxx Validity Level L H L H H L H L L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H L H CN1 Input Pin Allocation Connection Not Required (SERVOPACK judges the connection) Always Always ON OFF 7 7 8 8
Input Signal 40 /S-ON S-ON /P-CON P-CON P-OT /P-OT N-OT /N-OT /ARM-RST ARM-RST /P-CL P-CL /N-CL N-CL /SPD-D SPD-D /SPD-A SPD-A /SPD-B SPD-B /C-SEL C-SEL /ZCLAMP ZCLAMP /INHIBIT INHIBIT /G-SEL G-SEL 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 41 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A
42 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B
43 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C 3 C
44 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D 4 D
45 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E 5 E
46 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F 6 F
7 7
8 8 8
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
IMPORTANT
1. When using Servo ON, Forward Run Prohibited, and Reverse Run Prohibited signals with the setting Polarity Reversal, the machine may not move to the specified safe direction at occurrence of failure such as signal line disconnection. If such setting is absolutely necessary, confirm the operation and observe safety precautions. 2. When two or more signals are allocated to the same input circuit, the input signal level will be applied to all the allocated signal.
7-23
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation
(3) Allocating Input Signals

EXAMPLE
The procedure to replace Servo ON (/S-ON) signal allocated to CN1-40 and Forward External Torque Limit (/ P-CL) allocated to CN1-45 is shown below.
Before Pn50A: Pn50B:

Step Display after Operation
After
Digital Operator
DSPL
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the value setting parameter mode. If a parameter other than Pn50A is displayed, press the UP or DOWN Key to set Pn50A. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the current data of Pn50A. (/S-ON is allocated to CN1-40.) Press the UP Key to set to 1. (Sequence input signals can be freely set.) Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the second digit from the right. Press the UP key to set to 5. (Changes the allocation of /S-ON from CN1-40 to CN145.) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved. At the moment, the CN1-45 operates with OR logic for /S-ON and /P-CL. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display Pn50A. Press the UP Key to set Pn50B. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the current data of Pn50B. (/P-CL is allocated to CN1-45.) Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the third digit from the right. Press the DOWN Key to set to 0. (Changes the allocation of /P-CL from CN1-45 to CN140.) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

3
(UP Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7
(UP Key) (UP Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

10
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

11 12
Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display DATA/ Pn50B. /S-ON is allocation to CN1-45, and /P-CL is (DATA/ENTER Key) (DATA/SHIFT Key) allocated to CN1-40. Turn the power OFF and ON again to enable the change of input signal selections (Pn50A and Pn50B).
DATA ENTER
7-24
7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation

Functions can be allocated to the following sequence output signals. After having changed the parameter, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the parameters. means factory setting.
CN1 Pin No. Parameter Setting Allocation Positioning Completion (/COIN) Pn50E.0 = n.xxx Speed Coincidence Detection (/V-CMP) Pn50E.1 = n.xxx Rotation Detection (/TGON) Pn50E.2 = n.xxx Servo Ready (/S-RDY) Pn50E.3 = n.xxx Torque Limit Detection (/CLT) Pn50F.0 = n.xxx Speed Limit Detection (/VLT) Pn50F.1 = n.xxx Brake (/BK) Pn50F.2 = n.xxx Warning (/WARN) Pn50F.3 = n.xxx Near (/NEAR) Pn510.0 = n.xxx 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 25/(26) Pn512=n.xxx 0 Invalid L 1 H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L Invalid L H L H L H L H H H H H H Factory Setting H H L: Valid output signal: Low level H: Valid output signal: High level Invalid: Do not use the output signal. H 27/(28) Pn512=n.xxx 0 1 29/(30) Pn512=n.xxx 0 1 Remark
Pn50E: Pn50F: Pn510: Pn512:

Note: The output signals for Positioning Completion Signal and Speed Coincidence Detection Signal differ depending on the control method.
IMPORTANT
1. When two or more signals are allocated to the same output circuit, a signal is output with OR logic. 2. The signals not detected are considered as Invalid. For example, Positioning Completion (/COIN) Signal in speed control mode is Invalid.
7-25
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation
Allocating Output Signals

EXAMPLE
The procedure to replace Rotation Detection (/TGON) signal allocated to CN1-27 (28) with factory setting to Invalid and allocate Brake Interlock (/BK) signal to CN1-27 (28) is shown below.
Before Pn50E:
Step Display after Operation
After
Digital Operator
DSPL
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the value setting parameter mode. If a parameter other than Pn50E is displayed, press the UP or DOWN Key to select Pn50E. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the current data of Pn50E. (/TGON is allocated to CN1-27 (28).) Press the LEFT Key or RIGHT or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the third digit from the right. Press the DOWN Key to set 0. (Sets /TGON Invalid.) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display Pn50E. Press the UP Key to set Pn50F. Note: The enabled digit blinks. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the current data of Pn50F. (/BK is set to Invalid.) Press the LEFT or RIHGT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the third digit from the right. Press the UP Key to set 2. (Allocates /BK to CN1-27 (28).) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The value blinks and is saved.
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

6
(UP Key) (UP Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

10 11
Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display Pn50F. / DATA TGON is set as Invalid and /BK is allocated to CN1-27 (DATA/SHIFT Key) (DATA/ENTER Key) (Press at least 1 s.) (28). Turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the changes of output signal selection (Pn50E and Pn50F).
DATA ENTER
7-26
7.4 Operation in Monitor Mode (Un)

The monitor mode can be used for monitoring the reference values, I/O signal status, and SERVOPACK internal status. The monitor mode can be selected during motor operation.
7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes

(1) Contents of Monitor Mode Display
Parameter No. Un000 Un001 Un002 Un003 Un004 Un005 Un006 Un007 Un008 Un009 Un00A Un00B Un00C Un00D Actual motor speed Input speed reference (Valid only in speed control mode) Internal torque reference ( in percentage to the rated torque) Rotation angle 1 (32-bit decimal code) Rotation angle 2 (Angle from the zero-point (electrical angle)) Input signal monitor *1 Output signal monitor *1 Input reference pulse speed (valid only in position control mode) Error counter value (amount of position error) (valid only in position control mode) Accumulated load rate (value for the rated torque as 100%. Displays effective torque in 10-s cycle.) Regenerative load rate (value for the processable regenerative power as 100%. Displays regenerative power consumption in 10-s cycle.) Power consumed by DB resistance (Value for the processable power when dynamic brake is applied as 100%. Displays power consumed by DB resistance in 10-s cycle.) Input reference pulse counter (32-bit hexadecimal code) (valid only in position control mode) *2 Feedback pulse counter (Data as four times of the encoder pulse number: 32-bit hexadecimal code) *2 * 1. Refer to (2) Contents of Monitor Mode Display. * 2. Refer to (4) Contents of Monitor Mode Display. Content of Display Unit min-1 min-1 % Number of pulses from the zero-point deg min-1 reference unit % % %
7-27
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes
(2) Sequence I/O Signal Monitor Display

The following section describes the monitor display for sequence I/O signals.
(a) Input Signal Monitor Display

The status of input signal allocated to each input terminal is displayed: When the input is in OFF (open) status, the top segment (LED) is lit. when the input is in ON (short-circuited) status, the bottom segment (LED) is lit.
Top: OFF (H level) Bottom: ON (L level) 87 6 54 3 2 1 Number
Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation for the relation between input terminals and signals.
Display LED Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Terminal Name CN1-40 CN1-41 CN1-42 CN1-43 CN1-44 CN1-45 CN1-46 CN1-4 Factory Setting /S-ON /P-CON P-OT N-OT /ALM-RST /P-CL /N-CL SEN
EXAMPLE
When /S-ON signal is ON (Servo ON at L level)

The bottom segment of number 1 is lit.
87 6 5 4 3 2 1
When /S-ON signal is OFF

The top segment of number 1 is lit.
87 6 5 4 3 2 1
When P-OT signal operates (Operates at H level)

87 6 5 4 3 2 1
7-28
(b) Output Signal Monitor Display

The status of output signal allocated to each output terminal is displayed: When the output is in OFF (open) status, the top segment (LED) is lit. When the output is in ON (short-circuited) status, the bottom segment is lit.
Top: OFF (H level) Bottom: ON (L level) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Number
Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for the relation between output terminals and signals.
Display LED Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Output Terminal Name CN1-31, -32 CN1-25, -26 CN1-27, -28 CN1-29, -30 CN1-37 CN1-38 CN1-39 Factory Setting ALM /COIN or /V-CMP /TGON /S-RDY AL01 AL02 AL03
Seven segments in the top and bottom rows of an LED turn ON and OFF in different combinations to indicate various output signals. These segments ON for L level and OFF for H level.
EXAMPLE
When ALM signal operates (alarm at H level.)

765 4 321
(3) Operation in Monitor Mode

The example below shows how to display the contents of monitor number Un000 when the servomotor rotates at 1500 min-1.
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the monitor mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select the monitor number to be displayed. The display shows the example of the data of Un000.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the data of Un000. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display of monitor number.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

7-29
7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator 7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes
(4) Monitor Display of Reference Pulse Counter and Feedback Pulse Counter
The monitor display of reference pulse counter and feedback pulse counter is expressed in 32-bit hexadecimal.
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the monitor mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Un00C or Un00D. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/ SHIFT Key for more than one second to display the data of the selected monitor number.
(DSPL/SET Key)
3
The upper 16-bit data
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

4
The lower 16-bit data
Press the UP or DOWN Key to display the lower 16-bit data. Press both UP and DOWN Keys simultaneously while the display on the left appears to clear the 32bit counter data. (The display shown on the left is of the lower 16-bit data.) Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/ SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the display of monitor number.
+
(Press simultaneouly) Press simultaneously
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)

When the control power supply is turned ON, reference pulse and feedback pulse will be 0. The counter value increases by forward references, and decreases by reverse references. Displays the pulse number from 0 to 4294967295 in sequence. If one pulse is decreased from 0, the digital operator and the panel operator display 4294967295 and then decrease from this pulse number. Also, if one pulse in increased from 4294967295, the digital operator and the panel operator display 0 and increase from this pulse number. The feedback pulse will be 65536 pulse/rev, when using the 16-bit encoder. The feedback pulse will be 131071 pulse/rev, when using the 17-bit encoder.
7-30
8
Operation
8.1 Trial Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4

8.1.1 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6 8.1.2 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load from Host Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9 8.1.3 Trial Operation with the Servomotor Connected to the Machine - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15 8.1.4 Servomotor with Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16 8.1.5 Position Control by Host Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16
8.2 Control Mode Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17 8.3 Setting Common Basic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18
8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.5 Selecting the Stopping Method After Servo OFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.3.6 Instantaneous Power Loss Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-22 8-25 8-26
8.4 Absolute Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27

8.4.1 Interface Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.2 Selecting an Absolute Encoder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.3 Handling Batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.4 Replacing Batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.4.8 Multiturn Limit Setting When Multiturn Limit Disagreement (A.CC) Occurred - - - - - - 8-28 8-29 8-29 8-30 8-30 8-32 8-36 8-37
8.5 Operating Using Speed Control with Analog Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38

8.5.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.2 Setting Input Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.4 Soft Start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.5 Speed Reference Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8.5.8 Speed Coincidence Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38 8-39 8-40 8-43 8-43 8-43 8-45 8-47
8-1
8 Operation
8.6 Operating Using Position Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48

8.6.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-48 8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-50 8.6.3 Position Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-53 8.6.4 Smoothing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-57 8.6.5 Positioning Completed Output Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-58 8.6.6 Positioning Near Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-59 8.6.7 Reference Pulse Inhibit Function (INHIBIT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-60
8.7 Operating Using Torque Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61

8.7.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-61 8.7.2 Torque Reference Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-61 8.7.3 Adjusting the Reference Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-62 8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-64
8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed - - - - - - - - - 8-66
8.8.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-66 8.8.2 Input Signal Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-67 8.8.3 Operating Using an Internally Set Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-67
8.9 Limiting Torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69

8.9.1 Internal Torque Limit (Limiting Maximum Output Torque) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-69 8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-70 8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-72 8.9.4 Torque Limiting Using an External Torque Limit and Analog Voltage Reference - - - - -8-73 8.9.5 Checking Output Torque Limiting during Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-74
8.10 Control Mode Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-75

8.10.1 Setting Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-75 8.10.2 Switching the Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-75
8.11 Other Output Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77

8.11.1 Servo Alarm Output (ALM) and Alarm Code Output (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3) - - - - - - - -8-77 8.11.2 Warning Output (/WARN) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-78 8.11.3 Running Output Signal (/TGON) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-78 8.11.4 Servo Ready (/S-RDY) Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-79
8-2
8-3
8 Operation
8.1 Trial Operation

Make sure that all wiring has been completed prior to trial operation. Perform the following three types of trial operation in order. Instructions are given for speed control mode (standard setting) and position control mode. Unless otherwise specified, the standard parameters for speed control mode (factory setting) are used.
(1)Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load (Refer to 8.1.1.)

SGDM-
To power supply
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
CN1
C N 1
C N 2
Secure the motor flange to the machine, but do not connect the motor shaft to the load shaft.
Purpose The servomotor is operated without connecting the shaft to the machine in order to confirm that the following wiring is correct. Power supply circuit wiring Motor wiring Encoder wiring Motors rotation direction and motor speed
(2)Trial Operation for Servomotor with Host Reference (Refer to 8.1.2.)

SGDM-
To power supply
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
CN1 To host controller

Secure the motor flange to the machine, but do not connect the motor shaft to the load shaft.
Purpose The servomotor is operated without connecting the shaft to the machine in order to confirm that the following wiring is correct. I/O signal wiring between the SERVOPACK and the host controller. Motors rotation direction, motor speed, and number of rotations Check the operation of the brake, overtravel, and other protective functions.
(3)Trial Operation for the Servomotor and Machine Combined (Refer to 8.1.3.)
SGDM-
To power supply
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
CN1 To host controller

Secure the motor flange to the machine, and use a coupling to connect the motor shaft to the load shaft.
Purpose The servomotor is connected to the machine and trial operation is performed. The SERVOPACK is adjusted to match the machine characteristics. The servomotors rotation direction, motor speed, and machine travel distance. Set the necessary parameters.
8-4
8.1 Trial Operation
Step 1
Item Installation and mounting
Description Install the servomotor and SERVOPACK according to the installation conditions. (Do not connect the servomotor to the machine because the servomotor will be operated first under a no-load condition for checking.) Connect the power supply circuit (L1 and L2 or L1, L2 and L3), servomotor wiring (U, V, W), I/O signal wiring (CN1), and encoder wiring (CN2). During (1) Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load, however, disconnect the CN1 connector. Turn ON the power. Check the panel operator to make sure that the SERVOPACK is running normally. If using a servomotor equipped with an absolute encoder, perform the setup for the absolute encoder. (Refer to 8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008).)
Reference
Wiring and connections
Turn ON the power.
Execute jog mode operation. Connect input signals.
Execute jog mode operation with the servomotor alone under a no-load condition.
Jog Operation
Connect the input signals (CN1) necessary for trial operation.
Check input signals.
Use the internal monitor function to check the input signals. Turn ON the power, and check the emergency stop, brake, overtravel, and other protective functions for correct operation.
Input the servo ON signal.
Input the servo ON signal, and turn ON the servomotor.
Host Reference
Input reference.
Input the reference for the control mode being used, and check the servomotor for correct operation. Turn OFF the power, and then connect the servomotor to the machine. If using a servomotor with an absolute encoder, set up the absolute encoder and make the initial settings for the host controller to match the machines zero position.
Host Reference
Check protective operation.
10
Set necessary parameters.
Using the same procedure as you did to input a reference in step 8, operate the servomotor from the host controller and set the parameter so that the machines travel direction, travel distance, and travel speed all correspond to the reference.
Host Reference
11
Operation
The servomotor can now be operated. Adjust the servo gain if necessary. Refer to 9.1 Autotuning. If a problem occurs, refer to Chapter 11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting.
Host Reference
8-5
8 Operation 8.1.1 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load
8.1.1 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load
CAUTION
Release the coupling between the servomotor and the machine, and secure only the servomotor without a load. To prevent accidents, initially perform the trial operation for servomotor under no-load conditions (with all couplings and belts disconnected).
In this section, confirm the cable connections of the main circuit power supply, motor and encoder except the connection to host controller. Incorrect wiring is generally the reason why servomotors fail to operate properly during the trial operation. Confirm the wiring, and then conduct the trial operation for servomotor without load. The operation and the display are the same both for the panel operator and optional digital operator (JUSPOP02A-2).
Step Description Secure the servomotor.
Secure the mounting plate of the servomotor to the equipment. Do not connect anything to the shaft (no-load conditions).
Check Method and Remarks Follow 3.8.1 Precautions on Servomotor Installation and secure the servomotor mounting plate to the machine in order to prevent the servomotor from moving during operation. Do not connect the servomotor shaft to the machine. The servomotor may tip over during rotation.
Check the power supply circuit, servomotor, and encoder wiring.

SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
With the CN1 connector not connected, check the power supply circuit and servomotor wiring. Do not use the CN1 I/O signals here. Refer to 6.1 Wiring Main Circuit for wiring example of main circuit. Refer to 2.5 Selecting Cables for motor and encoder cables.
Power supply
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
C N 2
Encoder cable
Turn ON power. Normal Display
3
Alternate display
Example of Alarm Display
If the power is correctly supplied, the panel operator display on the front panel of the SERVOPACK will appear as shown on the left. The display on the left indicates that Forward Run Prohibited (POT) and Reverse Run Prohibited (N-OT). For details, refer to 7.1.4 Status Display. If an alarm display appears, the power supply circuit, servomotor wiring, or encoder wiring is incorrect. If an alarm is displayed, turn OFF the power, find the problem, and correct it. Refer to 11.1 Troubleshooting.
Release the brake before driving the servomotor when a servomotor with brake is used. 4
Refer to 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes and 8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008). Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008) operation can be omitted when setting the Pn002 to n.1 (Uses absolute encoder as an incremental encoder) only during trial operation.
8-6
8.1 Trial Operation
Step
Description Operate with the panel operator.

SGDM-
Panel Operator
Check Method and Remarks Use the panel operator to operate the servomotor with utility function Fn002 (Jog Mode Operation). Check that the servomotor rotates in the forward direction by UP key, and reverse direction by DOWN key. The operation is completed when the operation is performed as described below and the alarm display does not appear. Complete the Fn002 (Jog Mode Operation) and turn OFF the power. For operation method of the digital operator and panel operator, refer to 7.1 Functions on Digital Operator/Panel Operator. The servomotor speed can be changed using the Pn304 (JOG Speed). The factory setting for jog speed is 500 min-1.
Panel Operator
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
200V
SGDM-
SERVOPACK
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1
Power supply
L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
C N 2
JOG Mode Operation (Fn002)

DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select Fn002. Note: The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display shown at the right will appear, and the servomotor will enter JOG operation mode. The servomotor can be operated with the panel operator in this condition. Press the SVON or MODE/SET Key. This will turn ON the power to the servomotor. Press the UP Key (forward) or DOWN Key (reverse). The servomotor will operate as long as the key is pressed.
(DSPL/SET Key)
3
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT Key) (Press at least 1 s.)
JOG SVON
(SVON Key)
Forward running Reverse running
6
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
7
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. This will turn OFF the power to the servomotor. The power will remain OFF even if the SVON or DATA/SHIFT Key is pressed for more than one second. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the Fn002 display of the utility function mode.
8-7
8 Operation 8.1.1 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load
INFO
The servomotors rotation direction depends on the setting of parameter Pn000.0 (Direction Selection). The example above describes operation with Pn000.0 in the factory setting.
Pn304
JOG Speed Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit

-1
Speed
Position
Torque
1 min Sets the utility function Fn002 (Jog Mode Operation) to the reference value of motor speed.
Factory Setting 500
The motor can be operated using only the digital operator without reference from the host controller. The following conditions are required to perform jog mode operation. 1. The servo on (/S-ON) input signal is OFF (H level). Refer to 8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal. 2. Pn50A is not set to n.7 (Sets signal ON) with the external input signal allocation. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. Pay attention that the Forward Run Prohibited (P-OT) and Reverse Run Prohibited (N-OT) signals are invalid during jog mode operation. For the jog mode operation procedures, refer to pages 8-6 and 8-7.
8-8
8.1 Trial Operation
8.1.2 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load from Host Reference
Check that the servomotor move reference or I/O signals are correctly set from the host controller to the SERVOPACK. Also check that the wiring and polarity between the host controller and SERVOPACK, and the SERVOPACK operation settings are correct. This is final check before connecting the servomotor to the machine.
(1) Servo ON Command from the Host

The following circuits are required: External input signal circuit or equivalent.
Speed Control (Standard Setting) [Pn000=n.0]
CN1 47 40 42 43 5
Position Control [Pn000=n.1]
+24V /S-ON P-OT N-OT V-REF 0V
+24V /S-ON P-OT N-OT PULS SIGN 0V
CN1 47 40 42 43 7 11
Change the SEN signal (CN1-4) to the H level when an absolute encoder is used.
8-9
8 Operation 8.1.2 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load from Host Reference
Step
Description Configure an input signal circuit necessary for servo ON. Connect the I/O signal connectors (CN1) in the circuit on the previous page or equivalent to input the signal necessary for servo ON. Then turn OFF the power and connect the CN1 to the SERVOPACK.
Check Method and Remarks Satisfy the following conditions: 1. Servo ON (/S-ON) input signal can be input. 2. Forward Run Prohibited (P-OT) and Reverse Run Prohibited (N-OT) input signals are turned ON (L level). (Forward run and reverse run are prohibited.) 3. Reference input (0V reference or 0 pulse) is not input. To omit the external wiring, the input terminal function can be set to Always ON or Always OFF using the input signal allocation function of parameter. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. When the absolute encoder is used, Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008) operation and the SEN signal wiring can be omitted when setting the Pn002 to n.1 (Uses absolute encoder as an incremental encoder) only during trial operation. The input signal setting is not correct if the display is not the same as on the left. Check the input signal using the Un005 (input signal monitor) from the panel operator.
SGDM-
1
CN1
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
C N 1
C N 2
Turn ON the power and make sure that the panel operator display is as shown below.
Un005 =
Check input signal wiring in monitor mode using the digital operator or panel operator. Refer to 7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes. Turn ON and OFF each signal line to see if the LED monitor bit display on the digital operator changes as shown below. 2
Input signal LED display P-OT N-OT /P-CON /S-ON Top lights when input signal is OFF (high level). Bottom lights when input signal is ON (low level). /ALM-RST /P-CL /N-CL SEN
Un005 =
Input the /S-ON signal, then make sure that the display of the panel operator is as shown below. 3
If an absolute encoder is being used, the servo will not turn ON when the servo ON signal (/S-ON) is input unless the SEN signal is also ON. When the SEN signal is checked in monitor mode, the top of the LED will light because the SEN signal is high when ON. If an alarm display appears, correct it according to 11.1 Troubleshooting. If there is noise in the reference voltage during speed control, the horizontal line () at the far left edge of the panel operator display may blink. Also the servomotor may turn very slowly. Refer to 6.4 Others and take a preventive measure.
8-10
8.1 Trial Operation
(2) Operating Procedure in Speed Control Mode (Pn000 = n.0)

The following circuit is required: External input signal circuit or equivalent.
SERVOPACK CN1 47 40 42 43 5 6
+24V /S-ON P-OT N-OT
+
VE
0V
V-REF
VE: Max. voltage (12 V)
Step 1
Description Check the power and input signal circuits again, and check that the speed reference input (voltage between the V-REF and SG) is 0 V. Turn ON the servo ON (/S-ON) input signal.
Check Method and Remarks Refer to the above figure for input signal circuit.
3 4 5 6
Generally increase the speed reference input voltage between V-REF and SG from 0 V. Check the speed reference input to the SERVOPACK (Un000 [min-1]). Check the Un000 (motor speed [min-1]. Check that the Un001 and Un000 values in steps 4 and 5 are equal. Check the speed reference input gain and motor rotation direction.
If the servomotor rotates at extremely slow speed, refer to 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset, and use the reference voltage offset to keep the servomotor from moving. The factory setting is 6 V/rated rotation speed. Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Change the speed reference input voltage and check that Un001 and Un000 values are equal for multiple speed references. Refer to the following equation to change the Pn300 (speed reference input gain). Un001=(voltage between V-REF) [V] Pn300 [300 min-1/6V] To change the motor rotation direction without changing polarity for speed reference input gain, refer to 8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction. Perform the operation from step 2 again after the motor rotation direction is changed.
When the speed reference input is set to 0 V and servo OFF status enters, the trial operation for servomotor without load is completed.
8-11
INFO
When Position Control is configured at the Host

Analog speed reference Host SERVOPACK
M
Trial operation for servomotor without load
Position control
Speed control
When the SERVOPACK conducts speed control and position control is conducted at the host controller, perform the operations below, following the operations in (2) Operating Procedure in Speed Control Mode (Pn000 = n.0) on the previous page. Step 9 Description Check the input signal circuit again, and check that the speed reference input (voltage between the VREF and SG) is 0 V. Turn ON the servo ON (/S-ON) input signal. Check Method and Remarks Refer to the above figure for input signal circuit.
10
If the servomotor rotates at extremely slow speed, refer to 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset, and use the reference voltage offset to keep the servomotor from moving. Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Un003 (rotation angle 1)[pulse]: The number of pulses from the zero point.
11
Send the command for the number of motor rotation easy to check (for example, one motor revolution) from the host controller in advance, and check the sent number of rotation and actual number of rotation by visual inspection and the Un003 (rotation angle1)[pulse]. If the sent number of rotation and actual number of rotation in step 11 are not equal, correctly set the Pn201 (PG divided ratio) outputting the encoder pulse from the SERVOPACK. When the speed reference input is set to 0 V and servo OFF status enters, the trial operation for position control with the host controller is completed.
12
Refer to 8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output for how to set. PG divider (Pn201 [P/Rev]): The number of encoder pulses per revolution
13
8-12
8.1 Trial Operation
(3) Operating Procedure in Position Control Mode (Pn000 = n.1)

The following circuit is required: External input signal circuit or equivalent.
SERVOPACK +24V /S-ON P-OT N-OT CLR PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN Pulse reference CN1 47 40 42 43 15 7 8 11 12
Reference pulse according to parameter Pn200.0 setting
Step 1 2 3 4
Description Match the reference pulse form with the pulse output form from the host controller. Set the reference unit and electronic gear ration so that it coincides with the host controller setting. Turn ON the power and the servo ON (/S-ON) input signal. Send the pulse reference for the number of motor rotation easy to check (for example, one motor revolution) and with slow speed from the host controller in advance. Check the number of reference pulses input to the SERVOPACK by the changed amount before and after the Un00C (input reference pulse counter) [pulse] was executed. Check the actual number of motor rotation [pulse] by the changed amount before and after the Un003 (rotation angle 1) [pulse] was executed. Check that steps 5 and 6 satisfy the following equation: Un003=Un00C (Pn202/Pn203) Check that the motor rotation direction is the same as the reference. Input the pulse reference with the large number of motor rotation from the host controller to obtain the constant speed. Check the reference pulse speed input to the SERVOPACK using the Un007 (input reference pulse speed) [min-1].
Check Method and Remarks Set the reference pulse with Pn200=n.. Refer to 8.6.1 (2) Setting a Reference Pulse Form. Set the electronic gear ratio with Pn202/Pn203. Refer to 8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear. Set the motor speed of several 100 min-1 for the reference pulse speed because such speed is safe.
Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Un00C (input reference pulse counter) [pulse] Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Un003 (rotation angle 1) [pulse]
Check the input pulse polarity and input reference pulse form. Refer to 8.6.1 (2) Setting a Reference Pulse Form. Set the motor speed of several 100 min-1 for the reference pulse speed because such speed is safe. Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed.
10
Un007 (input reference pulse speed) [min-1] The number of input reference pulses (Un00C) can be obtained from the following equation.
Un007(input reference pulse speed) input reference pulse pulses/S 60 Reference input ppm Pn202 Pn203 1 213(8192) Encoder pulse
Electronic gear ratio
* The encoder pulse differs depending on the model of the servomotor used.
8-13
Step 11
Description Check the motor speed using the Un000 (motor speed) [min-1]. Check that the Un007 and Un000 values in steps 9 and 10 are equal. Check the motor rotation direction.
Check Method and Remarks Refer to 7.1.3 Basic Mode Selection and Operation for how it is displayed. Un000 (motor speed) [min-1] To change the motor rotation direction without changing input reference pulse form, refer to 8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction. Perform the operation from step 9 again after the motor rotation direction is changed.
12 13
14
When the pulse reference input is stopped and servo OFF status enters, the trial operation for servomotor without load and using position control with the host controller is completed.
8-14
8.1 Trial Operation
8.1.3 Trial Operation with the Servomotor Connected to the Machine
WARNING
Follow the procedure below for trial operation precisely as given. Malfunctions that occur after the servomotor is connected to the machine not only damage the machine, but may also cause an accident resulting death or injury.
Follow the procedures below to perform the trial operation. 1. Set the necessary parameters according to the machine configuration. 2. Match the direction of rotation and speed to equipment specifications.
YASKAWA SERVOP ACK 200V
SGDM-
To power supply
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
L1 L2 +1 +2 L1C L2C B1 B2 U V W
C N 3
CN1
To host controller
Secure the motor flange to the machine, and install it on the load shaft.
Step 1
Description Turn ON the power and make the settings for mechanical configuration related to protective function such as overtravel and brake.
Set the necessary parameters for control mode used.
3 4
Connect the servomotor to the machine with coupling, etc., while the power is turned OFF. Check that the SERVOPACK is servo OFF status and then turn ON the power to the machine (host controller). Check again that the protective function in step 1 operates normally. Perform trial operation with the servomotor connected to the machine, following each section in 8.1.2 Trial Operation for Servomotor without Load from Host Reference. Check the settings of parameters for control mode used set in step 2 again.
Check Method and Remarks Refer to 8.3 Setting Common Basic Functions. When a servomotor with brake is used, take advance measures to prevent vibration due to gravity acting on the machine or external forces before checking the brake operation. Check that both servomotor and brake operations are correct. For details, refer to 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes. Refer to 8.5 Operating Using Speed Control with Analog Reference, 8.6 Operating Using Position Control, and 8.7 Operating Using Torque Control for control mode used. Refer to 3.8.1 Precautions on Servomotor Installation. Refer to 8.3 Setting Common Basic Functions. For steps 4 to 8, take advance measures for emergency stop so that the servomotor can stop safely when an error occurs during operation. Check that the trial operation is completed with as the trial operation for servomotor without load. Also check the settings for machine such as reference unit. Check that the servomotor rotates matching the machine operating specifications.
8-15
8 Operation 8.1.4 Servomotor with Brakes
Step 7
Description Adjust the servo gain and improve the servomotor response characteristics, if necessary.
Write the parameters set for maintenance in 12.4 Parameter Recording Table. Then the trial operation with the servomotor connected to the machine is completed.
Check Method and Remarks Refer to 9.1 Autotuning. The servomotor will not be broken in completely during the trial operation. Therefore, let the system run for a sufficient amount of additional time to ensure that it is properly broken in.
8.1.4 Servomotor with Brakes

Holding brake operation of the servomotor with brake can be controlled with the brake interlock output (/BK) signal of the SERVOPACK. When checking the brake operation, take advance measures to prevent vibration due to gravity acting on the machine or external forces. Check the servomotor operation and holding brake operation with the servomotor separated from the machine. If both operations are correct, connect the servomotor and perform trial operation. For wiring on a servomotor with brakes and parameter settings, refer to 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes.
8.1.5 Position Control by Host Controller

As described above, be sure to separate the servomotor and machine before performing trial operation of the servomotor without a load. Refer to the following table, and check the servomotor operation and specifications in advance.
Analog speed reference Host controller Position control SERVOPACK
M
Trial operation for servomotor without load.
Speed control
Reference from the Host Controller JOG Operation (Constant Reference Speed Input from Host Controller)
Check Item Motor Speed
Check Method Check motor speed as follows: Use the motor speed monitor (Un000) on the panel operator. Run the servomotor at low speed. Input a reference speed of 60 min-1 for example to check to see if the servomotor makes one revolution per second. Input a reference equivalent to one motor rotation and visually check to see if the shaft makes one revolution. Check to see if the servomotor stops when P-OT and N-OT signals are input during continuous servomotor operation.
Review Items Check the parameter setting at Pn300 to see if reference speed gain is correct.
Reference Section 8.5.1
Simple Positioning Overtravel (P-OT and N-OT Used)
No. of motor rotation
Whether the servomotor stops rotating when P-OT and N-OT signals are input
Check the parameter setting at Pn201 to see if the number of PG dividing pulses is correct. Review P-OT and N-OT wiring if the servomotor does not stop.
8.5.7
8.3.3
8-16
8.2 Control Mode Selection

The control modes supported by the SGDM SERVOPACK are described below.
Parameter Pn000 Control Mode Reference Section 8.5
n.0 Speed Control (Analog voltage speed reference) (Factory Controls servomotor speed by means of an analog voltage speed reference. Use in the following instances. setting)
To control speed For position control using the encoder feedback division output from the SERVOPACK to form a position loop in the host controller.
n.1 Position Control (Pulse train position reference)

Controls the position of the servomotor by means of a pulse train position reference. Controls the position with the number of input pulses, and controls the speed with the input pulse frequency. Use when positioning is required. Torque Control (Analog voltage speed reference) Controls the servomotors output torque by means of an analog voltage torque reference. Use to output the required amount of torque for operations such as pressing. Speed Control (Contact input speed control) Uses the three input signals /P-CON (/SPD-D), /P-CL (/SPD-A), and /N-CL (/ SPD-B) to control the speed as set in advance in the SERVOPACK. Three operating speeds can be set in the SERVOPACK. (In this case, an analog reference is not necessary.)
8.6
n.2
8.7
n.3
8.8
n.4 These are switching modes for using the four control methods described above in combination. Select the control method switching mode that best suits the x application. x x n.B
8.10
8-17
8 Operation 8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal
8.3 Setting Common Basic Functions

8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal
This sets the servo ON signal (/S-ON) that determines whether the servomotor power is ON or OFF.
(1) Servo ON signal (/S-ON)

Type Input Name /S-ON Connector Pin Number CN1-40 (Factory setting) Setting ON (low level) OFF (high level) Meaning Servomotor power ON. Servomotor can be operated. Servomotor power OFF. Servomotor cannot be operated.
IMPORTANT Always input the servo ON signal before inputting the input reference to start or stop the servomotor. Do not input the input reference first and then use the /S-ON signal to start or stop. Doing so will degrade internal elements and lead to malfunction. Note: A parameter can be used to re-allocate the input connector number for the /S-ON signal. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
(2) Enabling/Disabling the Servo ON Signal

A parameter can be always used to set a parameter servo ON condition. This eliminates the need to wire /S-ON, but care must be taken because the SERVOPACK can operate as soon as the power is turned ON.
Parameter Pn50A
n.0 n.7 Constantly enables the /S-ON signal.
Meaning Inputs the /S-ON signal from the input terminal CN1-40. (Factory setting)
After changing these parameters, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supplies and then turn them ON again to enable the new settings. When the parameter is set to constantly enable the signal, resetting an alarm can only be done by turning the power OFF and ON. (Alarm reset is disabled.)
8-18
8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction

The rotation direction of the servomotor can be switched without changing the reference pulse to the SERVOPACK or the reference voltage polarity. This causes the travel direction (+, -) of the shaft reverse. The output signal polarity such as encoder pulse output and analog monitor signal from the SERVOPACK does not change. The standard setting for forward rotation is counterclockwise as viewed from the drive end.
Parameter Pn000 Name Forward Reference Reference Reverse Reference
Analog monitor Analog monitor torque reference
n.0 Standard setting

(CCW = Forward) (Factory setting)
Forward (CCW)
Rotation speed
Reverse (CW) Encoder pulse division output
Encoder pulse division output
PAO PBO
Phase B advanced
Analog monitor
PAO PBO
Phase A advanced
n.1 Reverse Rotation

Mode (CW = Reverse)
Analog monitor
Reverse (CW) Encoder pulse division output
Forward (CCW) Encoder pulse division output
PAO PBO
Phase B advanced
PAO PBO
Phase A advanced
The direction of P-OT and N-OT change. For Pn000 = n.0 (standard setting), counterclockwise is P-OT. For Pn000 = n.1 (Reverse Rotation Mode), clockwise is P-OT.
8-19
8 Operation 8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function
8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function

The overtravel limit function forces movable machine parts to stop if they exceed the allowable range of motion and turn ON a limit switch.
(1) Connecting the Overtravel Signal

To use the overtravel function, connect the following overtravel limit switch input signal terminals.
Type Input Name P-OT Connector Pin Number CN1-42 (Factory setting) Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Forward rotation allowed. Normal operation status. OFF (high Forward rotation prohibited. Forward overtravel. level) Input N-OT CN1-43 ON (low level) Reverse rotation allowed. Normal operation status. (Factory setting) OFF (high Reverse rotation prohibited. Reverse overtravel. level) Connect limit switches as shown below to prevent damage to Motor forward rotation direction the devices during linear motion. SERVOPACK Rotation in the opposite direction is possible during overtravel. Servomotor For example, reverse rotation is possible during forward CN1 Limit Limit P-OT 42 switch switch overtravel.
N-OT 43
IMPORTANT When the servomotor stops due to overtravel during position control, the position error pulses are held. A clear signal (/CLR) input is required to clear the error pulses.
CAUTION
When using the servomotor on a vertical axis, the workpiece may fall in the overtravel condition. To prevent this, always set the zero clamp after stopping with Pn001 = n.1. Refer to (3) Selecting the Motor Stop Method When Overtravel is Used in this section.
(2) Enabling/Disabling the Overtravel Signal

A parameter can be set to disable the overtravel signal. If the parameter is set, there is no need to wire the overtravel input signal.
Parameter Pn50A Pn50B
n.2 n.8 Disables the Forward Run Prohibited (P-OT) signal. (Allows constant forward rotation.) n.3 Inputs the Reverse Run Prohibited (N-OT) signal from CN1-43. (Factory setting) n.8 Disables the Reverse Run Prohibited (N-OT) signal. (Allows constant reverse rotation.)
Meaning Inputs the Forward Run Prohibited (P-OT) signal from CN1-42. (Factory setting)
Applicable control methods: Speed control, position control, and torque control After changing these parameters, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supplies and then turn them ON again to enable the new settings. * A parameter can be used to re-allocate input connector number for the P-OT and N-OT signals. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-20
(3) Selecting the Motor Stop Method When Overtravel is Used

This is used to set the stop method when an overtravel (P-OT, N-OT) signal is input while the motor is operating.
Parameter Pn001 Stop Mode Stop by dynamic brake Coast to a stop Mode After Stopping Coast Meaning Rapidly stops the servomotor by dynamic braking (DB), then places it into Coast (power OFF) Mode.
Stops the servomotor in the same way as when the servo is OFF (coasts to a stop), then places it into Coast (power OFF) Mode. Decelerates the servomotor with emergency stop n.1 Decelerate to stop Zero Clamp torque (Pn406), then places it into Zero Clamp (Servolock) Mode. Coast Decelerates the servomotor with emergency stop n.2 torque (Pn406), then places it into Coast (power OFF) Mode. During torque control, stops by dynamic braking (DB) or coasts to a stop regardless of the Pn001.1 setting (the stopping method by Pn001.0). After it is stopped, the servomotor enters Coast Mode. After changing these parameters, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supplies and then turn them ON again to enable the new settings. Even during Coast Mode, the servomotor can be rotated in the opposite direction in which overtravel occurred. TERMS Stop by dynamic brake: Stops by using the dynamic brake (with short-circuiting by a circuit of SERVOPACK). Coast to a stop: Stops naturally, with no brake, by using the friction resistance of the motor in operation. Decelerate to stop: Stops by using deceleration (braking) torque. Zero Clamp Mode: A mode forms a position loop by using the position reference zero. * For details on stopping methods when the servo turns OFF or when an alarm occurs, refer to 8.3.5 Selecting the Stopping Method After Servo OFF.
n.00 n.01 n.02
(4) Setting the Stop Torque for Overtravel

Pn406 Emergency Stop Torque
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 800 1% 800 Immediately This sets the stop torque for when the overtravel signal (P-OT, N-OT) is input. The setting unit is a percentage of the rated torque (i.e., the rated torque is 100%). The value large enough to be the motor maximum torque, 800% is set as the factory setting for emergency stop torque. However, the actual output emergency stop torque is determined by motor ratings.
8-21
8 Operation 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes
8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes

The holding brake is used when a SERVOPACK controls a vertical axis. In other words, a servomotor with brake prevents the movable part from shifting due to gravity when the SERVOPACK power goes OFF. (Refer to 8.1.4 Servomotor with Brakes.)
Vertical Shaft Servomotor Holding brake Shaft with External Force Applied External force Servomotor
Prevents the servomotor from shifting when the power is OFF. Prevents the servomotor from shifting due to external force.
IMPORTANT
1. The brake built into the servomotor with brakes is a deenergization brake, which is used only to hold and cannot be used for braking. Use the holding brake only to hold a stopped motor. Brake torque is at least 120% of the rated motor torque. 2. When operating using only a speed loop, turn OFF the servo and set the input reference to 0 V when the brake is applied. 3. When forming a position loop, do not use a mechanical brake while the servomotor is stopped because the servomotor enters servolock status.
(1) Wiring Example

Use the SERVOPACK contact output signal /BK and the brake power supply to form a brake ON/OFF circuit. The following diagram shows a standard wiring example.
SERVOPACK
R S T
Power supply L1 L2 L3 L1C L2C BK-RY +24V (/BK-) 2
Surge suppressor CR50500BL (manufactured by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.)
Servomotor with brake
U V W
(/BK+)
CN1 1
CN2
PG BK
BK-RY
Blue or Brake power supply yellow Red DC Black White AC
BK-R Y: Brake control relay Brake power supply Input voltage 200-V models: LPSE-2H01 Input voltage 100-V models: LPDE-1H01 1 and 2 are the output terminals allocated with Pn50F.2.
8-22
(2) Brake Interlock Output

Type Output Name /BK Connector Pin Number Must be allocated Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Releases the brake. OFF (high level) Applies the brake. This output signal controls the brake and is used only for a servomotor with a brake. This output signal is not used with the factory settings. The output signal must be allocated (with Pn50F). It does not need to be connected for servomotors without a brake. IMPORTANT The /BK signal is not output during overtravel, or when there is no power to the servomotor.
(3) Allocating Brake Signals (/BK)

The brake signal (/BK) is not used with the factory settings. The output signal must be allocated.
Parameter Pn50F Connector Pin Number + Terminal - Terminal CN1-25 CN1-27 CN1-29 CN1-26 CN1-28 CN1-30 Meaning The /BK signal is not used. (Factory setting) The /BK signal is output from output terminal CN1-25, 26. The /BK signal is output from output terminal CN1-27, 28. The /BK signal is output from output terminal CN1-29, 30.
n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3
IMPORTANT When set to the factory setting, the brake signal is invalid. When multiple signals are allocated to the same output terminal, the signals are output with OR logic. To output the /BK signal alone, disable the other output signals or set them to output terminals other than the one allocated to the /BK signal. For the allocation of SERVOPACK output signals other than /BK signal, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
(4) Setting the Brake ON Timing after the Servomotor Stops

With the factory setting, the /BK signal is output at the same time as the servo is turned OFF. The servo OFF timing can be changed with a parameter.
Pn506 Delay Time from Brake Reference Until Servo OFF
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 50 10 ms 0 Immediately (0 to 500 ms) When using the servomotor to control a vertical axis, the /S-ON machine movable part may shift slightly depending on the brake Servo OFF Servo ON (CN1-40) ON timing due to gravity or an external force. By using this parameter to delay turning the servo OFF, this slight shift can be Brake released Brake held /BK output eliminated. This parameter changes the brake ON timing while the servomoNo power to motor Power to motor Power to motor tor is stopped. For details on brake operation while the servomotor is operating, Pn506 refer to (5) Setting the Brake ON Timing When Servomotor Running in this section. IMPORTANT The servomotor will turn OFF immediately when an alarm occurs, regardless of the setting of this parameter. The machine movable part may shift due to gravity or external force during the time until the brake operates.
8-23
8 Operation 8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes
(5) Setting the Brake ON Timing When Servomotor Running

The following parameters can be used to change the /BK signal output conditions when a stop reference is output during servomotor operation due to the servo OFF or an alarm occurring.
Pn507 Brake Reference Output Speed Level Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit
-1
Speed
Position
Torque
Factory Setting 100

Speed

Position Torque
Pn508
1 min Timing for Brake Reference Output during Motor Operation
Setting Range Setting Unit 10 to 100 10 ms (100 to 1000 ms) /BK Signal Output Conditions When Servo/S-ON input motor Running Or alarm or The /BK signal goes to high level (brake ON) power OFF when either of the following conditions is satisfied: When the motor speed falls below the level set Motor speed in Pn507 after the servo OFF. When the time set in Pn508 is exceeded after the servo OFF.
/BK output
Factory Setting 50 (500 ms)

Servo ON Servo OFF
Pn507
(Motor stopped by applying DB or by coasting.) Pn001.0
Brake released
Brake held
Pn508
IMPORTANT The servomotor will be limited to its maximum speed even if the value set in Pn507 is higher than the maximum speed. Allocate the running output signal (/TGON) and the brake signal (/BK) to different terminals. If the brake signal (/BK) and running output signal (/TGON) are allocated to the same output terminal, the /TGON signal will go to low level at the speed at which the movable part drops on the vertical axis, which means that the /BK signal will not go to high level even if the conditions of this parameter are met. (This is because signals are output with OR logic when multiple signals are allocated to the same output terminal.) For output signal allocations, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-24
8.3.5 Selecting the Stopping Method After Servo OFF

The stopping method when the power to the SERVOPACK turns OFF can be selected.
Parameter Pn001 Stop Mode Mode After Stopping Dynamic Brake Stop by dynamic brake Meaning Stops the servomotor by dynamic braking (DB), then holds it in Dynamic Brake Mode. (Factory setting) Stops the servomotor by dynamic braking (DB), then places it into Coast (power OFF) Mode. Stops the servomotor by coasting, then places it into Coast (power OFF) Mode.
n.0 n.1
Coast Coast
n.2 Coast to a stop
These parameters are valid under the following conditions: When the /S-ON input signal is OFF (Servo OFF). When an alarm occurs. When the main circuit power supply (L1, L2, or L3) is OFF; Some motors, depending on the model, are stopped by dynamic braking (DB). Refer to the following section labelled, IMPORTANT. Similar to the Coast Mode, the n.0 setting (which stops the servomotor by dynamic braking and then holds it in Dynamic Brake Mode) does not generate any braking force when the servomotor stops or when it rotates at very low speed. TERMS Stop by dynamic brake: Stops by using the dynamic brake (with short-circuiting by a circuit of SERVOPACK). Coast to a stop: Stops naturally, with no brake, by using the friction resistance of the motor in operation. IMPORTANT The SERVOPACK is forced to stop by dynamic braking, regardless of the settings of this parameter, when the main circuit power supply (L1, L2, L3) or control power supply (L1C, L2C) turns OFF. SGDM-A3BD to -02BD, SGDM-A3BDA to 02BDA (30 to 200 W for 100 V) SGDM-A3AD to -15AD, SGDM-A3ADA to 15ADA (30 to 1.5 kW for 200 V) If the servomotor must be stopped by coasting rather than by dynamic braking when the main circuit power supply (L1, L2, L3) or the control power supply (L1C, L2C) turns OFF, arrange the sequence externally so the servomotor wiring (U, V, W) will be interrupted. The dynamic brake (DB)1 is an emergency stop function. If the servomotor is frequently started and stopped by turning the power ON/OFF or using the servo ON signal (/S-ON), the DB circuit will also be repeatedly operated, degrading the SERVOPACKs internal elements. Use the speed input reference and position reference to control the starting and stopping of the servomotor.
IMPORTANT
TERMS
Dynamic brake (DB) A common method for quickly stopping a servomotor. The servomotor is stopped by short-circuiting the servomotor circuit. This circuit is built into the SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK
Servomotor
8-25
8 Operation 8.3.6 Instantaneous Power Loss Settings
8.3.6 Instantaneous Power Loss Settings

Determines whether to continue operation or turn the servo OFF when the power supply voltage to the SERVOPACK main circuit is instantaneously interrupted.
Pn509 Instantaneous Power Cut Hold Time
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 20 to 1000 1 ms 20 Immediately In power loss detection, the status of the main circuit power supply is detected and OFF status is ignored so servomotor operation will continue if the servomotor turns back ON within the time set in parameter Pn509. In the following instances, however, the parameter setting will be invalid. If an insufficient voltage alarm (A.41) occurs during a power loss with a large servomotor load. When control is lost (equivalent to normal power OFF operation) with loss of the control power supply.
Instantaneous power interruption Power supply voltage
OFF time t Operation continued
Pn509 > t
Servo ON
IMPORTANT The maximum setting for the hold time during a power loss is 1,000 ms, but the hold time for the SERVOPACK Servo ON Servo OFF Pn509 < t control power supply is about 100 ms. The hold time for the main circuit power supply depends on the SERVOPACK output. To continue SERVOPACK operation for a power loss that is longer than this, provide an uninterruptible power supply.
8-26
8.4 Absolute Encoders
WARNING
The output range of multiturn data for the -II series absolute detection system differs from that for conventional systems (15-bit encoder and 12-bit encoder). When an infinite length positioning system of the conventional type is to be configured with the -II series, be sure to make the following system modification.
If a motor with an absolute encoder is used, a system to detect the absolute position can be made in the host controller. Consequently, operation can be performed without zero point return operation immediately after the power is turned ON. SGMH-1 servomotor: With 16-bit absolute encoder SGMH-2 servomotor: With 17-bit absolute encoder
Absolute position detected continuously
zero point return operation
Absolute encoder
Absolute Encoder Type Series SGD SGDA SGDB - Series SGDM SGDH SGDP
Resolution
12-bit 15-bit
Output Range of Multiturn Data -99999 to + 99999
Action when Limit Is Exceeded
16-bit 17-bit
-32768 to + 32767
When the upper limit (+99999) is exceeded in the forward direction, the multiturn data is 0. When the lower limit (-99999) is exceeded in the reverse direction, the multiturn data is 0. When the upper limit (+32767) is exceeded in the forward direction, the multiturn data is -32768.* When the lower limit (-32767) is exceeded in the reverse direction, the multiturn data is +32768.*
* The action differs when the Multiturn Limit Setting (Pn205) is changed. Refer to 8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting.
8-27
8 Operation 8.4.1 Interface Circuits
8.4.1 Interface Circuits

The following diagram shows the standard connections for a an absolute encoder mounted to a servomotor. The connection cables and wiring pin numbers depend on the servomotor. For details, refer to chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices.
Host controller +5V 7406 Battery
Serial interface circuit Up/down counter Clear Serial interface circuit UP DOWN
1 SEN SG BAT(+) BAT(-)
0V
CN1 4 2 21 22 33 34 35 36 19 20 48 49 1
SERVOPACK CN2 1 PG5V 2 PG0V 3 BAT (+) 4 5 6

Connector shell
Encoder
2
+ Line driver
BAT ( - ) PS /PS PG
Edge detection
PA PB PC PS 0V
R R R R
PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO PSO /PSO
Shield (shell)
SG
Applicable line driver: Texas Instruments's SN75175 or KM3486 Terminating resistance R: 220 to 470
Represents twisted-pair wires.
2 For wiring pin numbers, refer to chapter 5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices
SEN Signal Connection

Type Input Name SEN Connector Pin Number CN1-4 Setting Meaning
OFF (low level) Input when power is turned ON ON (high level) Input at absolute data request This input signal is required to output absolute data SERVOPACK Host controller from the SERVOPACK. CN1 +5V Let at least three seconds elapse after turning ON the 4 100 SEN power before changing the SEN signal to high level. High level: About 1 mA When the SEN signal changes from low level to high 0.1 7406 or equivalent 2 4.7 k level, the multiturn data and initial incremental pulses SG 0V 0V are output. Until these operations have been completed, the servomotor cannot be turned ON regardless of the status of We recommend a PNP transistor. Signal levels the servo ON signal (/S-ON). The panel operator dis High: 4.0 V min. Low: 0.8 V max. play will also remain b.b. Refer to 8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence. IMPORTANT Maintain the high level for at least 1.3 seconds when the SEN SEN signal signal is turned OFF and then ON, as shown in the figure on the right.
OFF ON (high level) 1.3 s min. 15 ms min. OFF ON
8-28
8.4.2 Selecting an Absolute Encoder

An absolute encoder can also be used as an incremental encoder.
Parameter Pn002 Meaning
n.0 Use the absolute encoder as an absolute encoder. (Factory setting) n.1 Use the absolute encoder as an incremental encoder.
The SEN signal and back-up battery are not required when using the absolute encoder as an incremental encoder. After changing these parameters, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supplies and then turn them ON again to enable the new settings.
8.4.3 Handling Batteries

In order for the absolute encoder to retain position data when the power is turned OFF, the data must be backed up by a battery.
PROHIBITED
Install the battery at either the host controller or the SERVOPACK. It is dangerous to install batteries at both simultaneously, because that sets up a loop circuit between the batteries. Battery Installation Location Host controller SERVOPACK 30 W to 5.0 kW 6.0 to 15.0 kW Yaskawa Model* Manufacturer Model ER6VC3 ER3V Specifications Manufacturer
JZSP-BA01 JZSP-BA01-1
Lithium battery 3.6 V 2000mAh Lithium battery 3.6 V 1000mAh
Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd. Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.
* For Yaskawa model, a connector is included with a battery.
(1) Battery Provided for SERVOPACK

Install the battery with the following model due to the SERVOPACK capacity.
Battery connector (CN8)
SERVOPACK 200V
SGDMVer.
YASKAWA
POWER
8
DATA/
MODE/SET
BATTERY
Battery mounting location For 30 W to 5.0 kW SERVOPACK Battery model: JZSP-BA01 For 6.0 to 15.0 kW SERVOPACK Battery model: JZSP-BA01-1
(2) Installing the Battery at the Host Controller

Prepare the battery according to the specifications of the host controller. Use the battery with the model number ER6VC3 (3.6 V, 2000 mAh made by Toshiba Battery Co., Ltd.) or equivalent
8-29
8 Operation 8.4.4 Replacing Batteries
8.4.4 Replacing Batteries

The SERVOPACK will generate an absolute encoder battery alarm (A.83) when the battery voltage drops below about 2.7 V. This alarm is output, however, only when the SERVOPACK power is turned ON. If the voltage drops while the SERVOPACK power is ON, the SERVOPACK will not generate the alarm. This alarm can be changed to an absolute encoder battery warning (A.93) by setting the parameter.
Battery Replacement Procedure

1. Replace the battery with only the SERVOPACK control power supply turned ON. 2. After replacing the battery, turn OFF the SERVOPACK power to cancel the absolute encoder battery alarm (A.83). 3. Turn ON the SERVOPACK power back again. If it operates without any problems, the battery replacement has been completed.
IMPORTANT
If the SERVOPACK control power supply is turned OFF and the battery is disconnected (which includes disconnecting the encoder cable), the absolute encoder data will be deleted. The absolute encoder must be setup again. Refer to 8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008).
8.4.5 Absolute Encoder Setup (Fn008)

Setting up (initializing) the absolute encoder is necessary in the following cases. When starting the machine for the first time When an encoder backup error alarm (A.81) is generated When an encoder checksum error alarm (A.82) is generated To set the absolute encoder multiturn data to 0
Use a built-in type digital operator in the SERVOPACK or a digital operator for setup.
IMPORTANT
1. Encoder setup operation is only possible when the servo is OFF. 2. If the following absolute encoder alarms are displayed, cancel the alarm by using the same method as the setup (initializing). They cannot be canceled with the SERVOPACK alarm reset input signal (/ALMRST). Encoder backup error alarm (A.81) Encoder checksum error alarm (A.82) Any other alarms that monitor the inside of the encoder should be canceled by turning OFF the power.
8-30
Step 1 2
Digital Operator Alarm generated

DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select parameter Fn008. Note: The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display will be as shown at the left. Continue pressing the UP Key until PGCL5 is displayed. Note: If there is a mistake in the key operation, nO_OP will blink for about one second. The panel operator or digital operator will return to the utility function mode. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. This will clear the multiturn data of the absolute encoder. When completed, donE will blink for about one second. After donE is displayed, PGCL5 will be displayed again.
4
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
About one second later
8
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the Fn008 display of the utility function mode.
Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to make the setting valid.
8-31
8 Operation 8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence
8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence

The sequence in which the SERVOPACK receives outputs from the absolute encoder and transmits them to host controller is shown below.
(1) Outline of Absolute Signals

The serial data, pulses, etc., of the absolute encoder that are output from the SERVOPACK are output from the PAO, PBO, and PCO signals as shown below.
SERVOPACK
PG
PS
Conversion from serial data into pulse Data conversion
Dividing circuit (Pn201)
PAO PBO PCO PSO
Signal Name PAO
Status At initial status At normal status At initial status At normal status Always Always
PBO PCO PSO
Meaning Serial data Initial incremental pulse Incremental pulse Initial incremental pulse Incremental pulse Zero point pulse Rotation count serial data
(2) Absolute Encoder Transmission Sequence and Contents

1. Set the SEN signal at high level. 2. After 100 ms, set the system to serial data reception-waiting-state. Clear the incremental pulse up/down counter to zero. 3. Receive eight bytes of serial data. 4. The system enters a normal incremental operation state about 400 ms after the last serial data is received.
SEN signal PAO PBO PSO Undefined Undefined Undefined Initial incremental pulse
10ms 60ms min. max. 90ms typ.
Rotation count serial data Incremental pulse (Phase A) (Phase A) Initial increIncremental pulse
mental pulse Initial incremental pulse
(Phase B) (Phase B) Rotation count serial data
50ms
260 ms max.
1 to 3 ms 400 ms max.
Approx.15ms
Serial data: Indicates how many turns the motor shaft has made from the reference position (position specified at setup). Initial incremental pulse: Outputs pulses at the same pulse rate as when the motor shaft rotates from the origin to the current position at about 1250 min-1 (for 17 bits when the dividing pulse is at the factory setting).
8-32
Reference position (setup) Coordinate value Value M -1 0 0 +1 MR PE PS PM +1 +2
Current position +2 +3 PO +3
Final absolute data PM is calculated by following formula.

PE PE = M R + PO PM = PE - PS Use the following for reverse rotation mode (Pn000.0 = 1). PE = -M R + PO PM = PE - PS M PO PS PM R Current value read by encoder Multiturn data (rotation count data) Number of initial incremental pulses Number of initial incremental pulses read at setup (This is saved and controlled by the host controller.) Current value required for the users system Number of pulses per encoder revolution (pulse count after dividing, value of Pn201)
(3) Detailed Signal Specifications

(a) PAO Serial Data Specifications
The number of revolutions is output in five digits.
Data Transfer Method Baud rate Start bits Stop bits Parity Character code Data format
"P" "+" or "- "
Start-stop Synchronization (ASYNC) 9600 bps 1 bit 1 bit Even ASCII 7-bit code 8 characters, as shown below.
"0" to "9" "CR"
0 00 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
Data Start bit
Stop bit Even parity
Note: 1. Data is P+00000 (CR) or P-00000 (CR) when the number of revolutions is zero. 2. The revolution range is +32767 to -32768. When this range is exceeded, the data changes from +32767 to -32678 or from -32678 to +32767. When changing multiturn limit, the range changes. For details, refer to 8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting.
8-33
8 Operation 8.4.6 Absolute Encoder Reception Sequence
(b) PSO Serial Data Specifications

The number of revolutions is always output in five digits and seven digits (absolute position within one revolution).
Data Transfer Method Baud rate Start bits Stop bits Parity Character code Data format
No. of revolutions: 0 to 9 + or "P"
Start-stop Synchronization (ASYNC) 9600 bps 1 bit 1 bit Even ASCII 7-bit code 13 characters, as shown below.
Absolute position within one revolution: 0 to 9 CR
0 00 0 0 10 1 0 1 Data Start bit Stop bit Even parity
Note: 1. The absolute position data within one revolution is the value before divided. 2. The absolute position data increases during forward rotation. (The reverse rotation mode is invalid.)
(c) Incremental Pulses and Zero-Point Pulses

Just as with normal incremental pulses, initial incremental pulses which provide absolute data are first divided by the frequency divider inside the SERVOPACK and then output. For details, refer to 8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output.
Forward rotation
Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase A Phase B
Reverse rotation
Phase C
8-34
(4) Transferring Alarm Contents

When an absolute encoder is used, SEN signals can be utilized to transfer the alarm detection contents from PAO outputs to the host controller as serial data. For alarm list, refer to 11.1.1 Alarm Display Table.
SEN Signal
H
Error detection
Panel Operator (Digital Operator) Display
or
Overspeed
PAO Serial Data

Incremental pulse ALM81 CR Serial Data
8-35
8 Operation 8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting
8.4.7 Multiturn Limit Setting
WARNING
The multiturn limit value must be changed only for special applications. Changing it inappropriately or unintentionally can be dangerous. If the Multiturn Limit Disagreement alarm (A.CC) occurs, check the setting of parameter Pn205 to be sure that it is correct. If Fn013 is executed when an incorrect value is set in Pn205, an incorrect value will be set in the encoder. The alarm will disappear even if an incorrect value is set, but incorrect positions will be detected, resulting a dangerous situation where the machine will move to unexpected positions and machine break and personal accident will occur.
The parameter for the multiturn limit setting sets the upper limit for the multiturn data from the encoder into Pn002 = n0 when using an absolute encoder. When the rotation amount exceeds this setting, the encoder rotation amount returns to 0.
Pn205 Multiturn Limit Setting
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 65535 1 rev 65535 After restart This parameter is valid when Pn002 = n0 (when the absolute encoder is used). The range of the multiturn data will vary when this parameter is set to anything other than the factory setting. Factory Setting (=65535)
+32767 Forward
Reverse direction
Without Factory Setting (65535)

Pn205 setting value
Forward direction Reverse direction
direction
Multiturn 0 data -32768 No. of revolutions
Multiturn data 0 No. of revolutions Position detection (Revolution counter) Detection amount
When Set to Anything Other than the Factory Setting (65535) When the motor rotates in the reverse direction with the multiturn data at 0, the multiturn data will change to the setting of Pn205. When the motor rotates in the forward direction with the multiturn data at the Pn205 setting, the multiturn data will change to 0. Set the Pn205 to (the desired multiturn data -1).
Position
(Absolute encoder)
Travel distance/motor = 1 revolution
Encoder Multiturn Limit Disagreement

If the Pn205 value is changed from the factory setting and the power is turned OFF then ON, an alarm will be displayed.
Alarm Display A.CC Alarm Name Multiturn Limit Disagreement Alarm Code Outputs ALO1 ON (L) ALO2 OFF (H) ALO3 ON (L) Meaning Different multiturn limits have been set in the encoder and SERVOPACK.
8-36
8.4.8 Multiturn Limit Setting When Multiturn Limit Disagreement (A.CC) Occurred
Perform the following operation using the digital operator or panel operator. This operation can only be done when the A.CC alarm is generated.
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the LEFT/RIGHT or UP/DOWN Key or the UP or DOWN Key to set the parameter Fn013. *The digit that can be set will blink.
(DSPL/SET Key)
3
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display on the left will appear.
4
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
5 About one second later 6

DATA ENTER
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The multiturn limit setting in the absolute encoder will be changed. When the setting is completed, donE will blink for about one second. After donE is displayed, PGSEt will be displayed again.
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Turn OFF the power, and then turn it ON again to make the setting valid.
8-37
8 Operation 8.5.1 Setting Parameters
8.5 Operating Using Speed Control with Analog Reference

Parameter Pn000 Description Control mode selection: Speed control (analog reference) (factory setting)
n.0
Pn300
Speed Reference Input Gain
Speed
Position
Torque
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 1.50 to 3000 0.01 V/Rated 600 Immediately (150 to 30.00 V/Rated speed) speed (6 V/ Rated speed) Sets the analog voltage level for the speed reference (V-REF) necessary to operate the Reference servomotor at the rated speed.
Speed (min -1)
EXAMPLE Pn300=600: 6-V input is equivalent to the rated speed of the servomotor (factory setting). Pn300=1000: 10-V input is equivalent to the rated speed of the servomotor. Pn300=200: 2-V input is equivalent to the rated speed of the servomotor.
Set this slope.
Reference Voltage (V)
8-38
8.5.2 Setting Input Signals

(1) Speed Reference Input
Input the speed reference to the SERVOPACK using the analog voltage reference to control the servomotor speed in proportion to the input voltage.
Signal Connector Pin Name Name Number Input V-REF CN1-5 Speed Reference Input SG CN1-6 Signal Ground for Speed Reference Input The above inputs are used for speed control (analog voltage reference). (Pn000.1 = 0, 4, 7, 9, or A) Pn300 is used to set the speed reference input gain. Refer to 8.5.1 Setting Parameters. Input Specifications Input range: 2 VDC to 10 VDC/rated speed Maximum allowable input voltage: 12 VDC Setting Example Pn300 = 600: Rated speed at 6 V Rated motor speed Actual examples are shown below.
Factory setting
-12 -8 -4 4 8 12
Type
Speed Reference Input +6 V +1 V -3 V
Input voltage (V) Rated motor speed
Rotation Direction Forward Forward Reverse
Motor Speed Rated motor speed (1/6) rated motor speed (1/2) rated motor speed
SGMAH Servomotor 3000 min -1 500 min -1 1500 min-1
The slope is set in Pn300.
Parameter Pn300 can be used to change the voltage input range. Input Circuit Example Always use twisted-pair wire to control noise. Recommended variable resistor: Model 25HP10B manufactured by Sakae Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
1.8 k 1/2 W min. +12 V SERVOPACK CN1 V-REF 5 SG 6 Feedback pulse input terminals PAO /PAO PBO /PBO 33 34 35 36
Connect V-REF and SG to the speed reference output terminals on the host controller when using a host controller, such as a programmable controller, for position control.
Host controller Speed reference output terminals V-REF SG SERVOPACK CN1 5 6
2 k
(2) Proportional Control Reference (/P-CON)

Type Input Signal Name /P-CON Connector Pin Number CN1-41 Setting Description
ON (low level) Operates the SERVOPACK with proportional control. OFF (high level) Operates the SERVOPACK with proportional integral control. /P-CON signal selects either the PI (proportional integral) or P (proportional) Speed Control Mode. Switching to P control reduces servomotor rotation and minute vibrations due to speed reference input drift. Input reference: At 0 V, the servomotor rotation due to drift will be reduced, but servomotor rigidity (holding force) drops when the servomotor is stopped. Note: A parameter can be used to reallocate the input connector number for the /P-CON signal. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-39
8 Operation 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset
8.5.3 Adjusting Offset

When using the speed control, the servomotor may rotate slowly even if 0 V is specified as the analog voltage reference. This happens if the host controller or external circuit has a slight offset (in the units of mV) in the reference voltage. Adjustments can be done manually or automatically by using the panel operator or digital operator. Refer to 7.2 Operation in Utility Function Mode (Fn). The automatic adjustment of the analog (speed, torque) reference offset (Fn009) automatically measures the amount of the offset and adjusts the reference voltage. The SERVOPACK automatically adjusts the offset when the host controller or external circuit has the offset in the reference voltage.
Reference voltage Offset Speed reference Automatic offset adjustment Reference voltage Offset automatically adjusted in SERVOPACK. Speed reference
After completion of the automatic adjustment, the amount of offset is stored in the SERVOPACK. The amount of offset can be checked in the speed reference offset manual adjustment mode (Fn00A). Refer to 8.5.3 (2) Manual Adjustment of the Speed Reference Offset.
8-40
(1) Automatic Adjustment of the Speed Reference Offset

The automatic adjustment of reference offset (Fn009) cannot be used when a position loop has been formed with a host controller and the error pulse is changed to zero at the servomotor stop due to servolock. Use the speed reference offset manual adjustment (Fn00A) described in the next section for a position loop. The zero-clamp speed control function can be used to force the motor to stop while the zero speed reference is given. Refer to 8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function.
IMPORTANT
The speed reference offset must be automatically adjusted with the servo OFF.
Adjust the speed reference offset automatically in the following procedure.

Step 1
Host controller
Digital Operator
SERVOPACK 0-V speed reference Servo OFF
Panel Operator
Servomotor
Description Turn OFF the SERVOPACK, and input the 0-V reference voltage from the host controller or external circuit.
Slow rotation (Servo ON)
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the LEFT/RIGHT or UP/DOWN Key, or UP or DOWN Key to select parameter Fn009. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. rEF_o will be displayed.
4
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The reference offset will be automatically adjusted. When completed, donE will blink for about one second. After donE is displayed, rEF_o will be displayed again.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
8-41
8 Operation 8.5.3 Adjusting Offset
(2) Manual Adjustment of the Speed Reference Offset

Use the speed reference offset manual adjustment (Fn00A) in the following situations: If a loop is formed with the host controller and the position error pulse is to be zero when servolock is stopped. To deliberately set the offset to some value. To check the offset data set in the speed reference offset automatic adjustment mode. This function operates in the same way as the reference offset automatic adjustment mode (Fn009), except that the amount of offset is directly input during the adjustment. The offset setting range and setting units are as follows:
Speed Reference Offset adjustment range Offset Adjustment Range: 15000 (Speed Reference: 750 mV) Analog Input Voltage Offset Setting Unit Speed Reference: 1 = 0.05 mV
Offset setting unit
Adjust the speed reference offset manually in the following procedure.

DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the UP or DOWN Key to select parameter Fn00A. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display will be as shown at the left. The manual adjustment mode for the speed reference offset will be entered. Turn ON the servo ON (/S-ON) signal. The display will be as shown at the left. Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second to display the speed reference offset amount.
(DSPL/SET Key)
3
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
4 Servo ON 5
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT Key) (Less than 1 s.)
6 7
MODE/SET (MODE/SET Key) (Less than 1 s.)
Press the UP or DOWN Key to adjust the amount of offset. Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or MODE/SET Key for less than one second. The display will appear momentarily as shown at the left, and donE will blink and the offset will be set. After the setting is completed, the display will return to the display as shown at the left. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the Fn00A display of the utility function mode.
8
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
8-42
8.5.4 Soft Start

The soft start function converts the stepwise speed reference inside the SERVOPACK to a consistent rate of acceleration and deceleration.
Pn305 Soft Start Acceleration Time Setting Range 0 to 10000 Pn306 Soft Start Deceleration Time Setting Unit 1 ms
Speed
Factory Setting 0
Speed
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 10000 1 ms 0 Immediately The soft start function enables smooth speed control when inputting a stepwise speed reference or when selecting internally set speeds. Set both Pn305 and Pn306 to 0 for normal speed control. Set these parameters as follows: Pn305: The time interval from the time the motor starts until the motor maximum speed is reached. Pn306: The time interval from the time the motor is operating at the motor maximum speed until it stops.
Maximum speed of Servomotor Before soft start After soft start
Pn305
Pn306
8.5.5 Speed Reference Filter

Pn307 Speed Reference Filter Time Constant
Speed
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 65535 0.01 ms 40 Immediately (0 to 655.35 ms) (0.40 ms) This smoothens the speed reference by applying a 1st-order delay filter to the analog speed reference (V-REF) input. A value that is too large, however, will slow down response.
8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function (1) Zero Clamp Function
The zero clamp function is used for systems where the host controller does not form a position loop for the speed reference input. When the zero clamp signal (/ZCLAMP) is ON, a position loop is formed inside the SERVOPACK as soon as the input voltage of the speed reference (V-REF) drops below the motor speed level in the zero clamp level (Pn501). The servomotor ignores the speed reference and then quickly stops and locks the servomotor. The servomotor is clamped within 1 pulse of when the zero clamp function is turned ON, and will still return to the zero clamp position even if it is forcibly rotated by external force.
When the /ZCLAMP signal is turned ON, a speed reference below the Pn501 setting is detected. Host controller
YASKAWA SERVOPACK
Speed reference V-REF
YASKAWA
SGDM-
MODE/SET CHARGE
DATA/ POWER
Stops precisely! Zero clamp /P-CON (/ZCLAMP)
8-43
8 Operation 8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function
(2) Parameter Setting

Parameter Pn000 Meaning Control mode selection: Speed control (analog voltage reference) Zero clamp
n.A
Zero Clamp Conditions Zero clamp is performed with Pn000 = n.A when the following two conditions are satisfied: /P-CON (/ZCLAMP) is ON (low level). Speed reference (V-REF) drops below the setting of Pn501.
SERVOPACK CN1 5 41
Speed Preset value for zero clamping Pn501
V-REF speed reference
Speed reference
V-REF /P-CON (/ZCLAMP)
Zero clamp
Time /P-CON (/ZCLAMP) input Zero clamp is performed. ON Open (OFF) OFF ON Closed (ON) OFF ON
Pn501
Zero Clamp Level Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit 1 min-1
Speed
Factory Setting 10
Sets the motor speed at which the zero clamp is performed if zero clamp speed control (Pn000 = n.A) is selected. Even if this value is set higher than the maximum speed of the servomotor, the maximum speed will be used.
(3) Input Signal Setting

Type Input Signal Name /P-CON /ZCLAMP Connector Pin Number CN1-41 Must be allocated Setting ON (low level) OFF (high level) ON (low level) OFF (high level) Meaning Zero clamp function ON (enabled) Zero clamp function OFF (disabled) Zero clamp function ON (enabled) Zero clamp function OFF (disabled)
This is the input signal for the zero clamp operation. Either /P-CON or /ZCLAMP can be used to switch the zero clamp. To use the /ZCLAMP signal, an input signal must be allocated. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation for more details. IMPORTANT When the /ZCLAMP signal is allocated, the zero clamp operation will be used even for speed control Pn000 = n.0.
8-44
8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output

Encoder feedback pulses processed inside the SERVOPACK can be output externally.
Type Output Output Output Signal Name PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO Connector Pin Number CN1-33 CN1-34 CN1-35 CN1-36 CN1-19 CN1-20 Name Encoder output phase A Encoder output phase /A Encoder output phase B Encoder output phase /B Encoder output phase C (zero-point pulse) Encoder output phase /C (zero-point pulse)
These outputs explained here.
SERVOPACK (Servomotor) Encoder Serial data PG CN2 * CN1 Phase A (PAO) Phase B (PBO) Phase C (PCO)
Host controller
Frequency dividing circuit
* The pulse width of the zero-point pulse (phase C) is changed according to the setting of the dividing ratio (Pn201). This pulse width should be the same as that for phase A. Output Phase Form
Forward rotation (phase B leads by 90) Reverse rotation (phase A leads by 90
90 Phase A Phase B Phase C Phase A Phase B Phase C
90
The following signals are added when using an absolute encoder.

Type Input Signal Name SEN SG BAT (+) BAT (-) SG Connector Pin Number CN1-4 CN1-2 CN1-21 CN1-22 CN1-1 Name SEN Signal Input Signal Ground Battery (+) Battery (-) Signal Ground
Output
* SG (CN1-1, 2): Connect to 0 V on the host controller.
Dividing
TERMS
The dividing means that the divider converts data into the pulse density based on the pulse data of the encoder installed on the servomotor, and outputs it. The setting unit is the number of pulses/revolution.
8-45
8 Operation 8.5.7 Encoder Signal Output
IMPORTANT
If using the SERVOPACKs phase-C pulse output for a zero point return, rotate the servomotor twice or more before starting a zero point return. If the configuration prevents the servomotor from rotating the servomotor or more, perform a zero point return at a motor speed of 600 min-1 or below. If the motor speed is faster than 600 min-1, the phase-C pulse output may not be output correctly.
Pulse Dividing Ratio Setting

Pn201 PG Dividing Ratio (For 16-bit or less)
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 16 to 16384 1 P/Rev 16384 After restart Set the number of pulses for PG output signals (PAO, /PAO, PBO, /PBO) externally from the SERVOPACK. Feedback pulses from the encoder per revolution are divided inside the SERVOPACK by the number set in Pn201 before being output. (Set according to the system specifications of the machine or host controller.) The setting range varies with the number of encoder pulses for the servomotor used.
Motor Model Encoder Specifications A B 1 C 1 Resolution No. of Pulses (Bit) (P/R) 13 16 17 2048 16384 32768 Setting Range 16 to 2048 16 to 16384
Output Example Pn201=16 (when 16 pulses are output per revolution)

Preset value: 16 PAO PBO 1 revolution
Note: Refer to 10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution for the encoder resolution 17-bit or more.
8-46
8.5.8 Speed Coincidence Output

The speed coincidence (/V-CMP) output signal is output when the actual motor speed during speed control is the same as the speed reference input. The host controller uses the signal as an interlock.
Type Output Signal Name /V-CMP Connector Pin Number CN1-25, 26 (Factory setting) Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Speed coincides. OFF (high level) Speed does not coincide. This output signal can be allocated to another output terminal with parameter Pn50E. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for details.
Pn503
Speed Coincidence Signal Output Width Setting Range 0 to 100 Setting Unit 1 min-1
Speed
Factory Setting 10
Motor speed
The /V-CMP signal is output when the difference between the speed reference and actual motor speed is the same as the pn503 setting or less. EXAMPLE The /V-CMP signal turns ON at 1900 to 2100 min eter is set to 100 and the reference speed is 2000 min-1.
-1 if the Pn503 param-
Pn503
Reference speed /V-CMP is output in this range.
/V-CMP is a speed control output signal. When the factory setting is used and the output terminal allocation is not performed with the Pn50E, this signal is automatically used as the positioning completed signal /COIN for position control, and it is always OFF (high level) for torque control.
8-47
8.6 Operating Using Position Control

Set the following parameters for position control using pulse trains.
(1) Control Mode Selection

Parameter Pn000
n.1
Meaning Control mode selection: Position control (pulse train reference)
(2) Setting a Reference Pulse Form

Type Input Signal Name PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN Connector Pin Number CN1-7 CN1-8 CN1-11 CN1-12 Name Reference Pulse Input Reference Pulse Input Reference Code Input Reference Code Input
Set the input form for the SERVOPACK using parameter Pn200.0 according to the host controller specifications.
Parameter Reference Pulse Form Sign + pulse train (Positive logic) (Factory setting) CW pulse + CCW pulse (Positive logic) Two-phase pulse train with 90 phase differential (Positive logic) Sign + pulse train (Negative logic) CW pulse + CCW pulse (Negative logic) Two-phase pulse train with 90 phase differential (Negative logic) Input Pulse Multiplier Forward Rotation Reference Reverse Rotation Reference
PULS (CN1-7) H SIGN (CN1-1 1) L
Pn200
n.0
PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-1 1)
n.1
L
90
n.2 n.3 n.4 n.5
1 2 4
PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-11) PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-1 1)
90 PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-11) PULS (CN1-7) L SIGN (CN1-1 1) PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-1 1) 90 PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-11) PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-11)
n.6
n.7 n.8 n.9
1 2 4
90
The input pulse multiplier can be set for the 2-phase pulse train with 90 phase differential reference pulse form.
Forward rotation PULS (CN1-7) SIGN (CN1-11) 1 Internal processing 2 4
Reverse rotation
Motor movement reference pulses
8-48
(3) Clear Signal Form Selection

Type Input Signal Name CLR /CLR Connector Pin Number CN1-15 CN1-14 Name Clear Input Clear Input
The internal processing of the SERVOPACK for the clear signal can be set to either of four types by parameter Pn200.1. Select according to the specifications of the machine or host controller.
Parameter Pn200
n.0
Description Clears at high level. Position error pulses do not accumulate while the signal is at high level. (Factory setting) Clears at the rising edge.
Timing
CLR (CN1-15) Clears at high level
n.1
CLR (CN1-15)
High
Clears here just once.
n.2
Clears at low level. Position error pulses do not accumulate while the signal is at low level. Clears at the falling edge.
CLR (CN1-15)
Clears at low level
n.3
CLR (CN1-15)
Low
Clears here just once.
The following are executed when the clear operation is enabled. The SERVOPACK error counter is set to 0. Position loop operation is disabled. Holding the clear status may cause the servo clamp to stop functioning and the servomotor to rotate slowly due to drift in the speed loop. When the clear signal (CLR) is not wired, the signal is always at low level (does not clear).
(4) Clear Operation Selection

This parameter determines when the error pulse should be cleared according to the condition of the SERVOPACK, in addition to the clearing operation of the clear signal (/CLR). Either of three clearing modes can be selected with Pn200.2
Parameter Pn200
n.0 n.1 n.2
Description Clear the error pulse at the /CLR signal input during the baseblock. (Factory setting) During the baseblock means when the SVON signal or the main circuit power supply is OFF, or an alarm occurs. Do not clear the error pulse. Clear only with the /CLR signal. Clear the error pulse when an alarm occurs or the /CLR signal is input.
8-49
8 Operation 8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear
8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear

(1) Number of Encoder Pulses
SGM HMotor Model Encoder Specifications Encoder Type A B C 1 2 Incremental encoder Absolute encoder
(Servomotor serial number)

No. of Encoder Pulses 13 bits 16 bits 17 bits 16 bits 17 bits 2048 16384 32768 16384 32768
Note: For details on reading servomotor model numbers, refer to 2.1 Servomotor Model Designations. The number of bits representing the resolution of the applicable encoder is not the same as the number of encoder signal pulses (phases A and B). The number of bits representing the resolution is equal to the number of encoder pulses 4 (multiplier).
INFO
(2) Electronic Gear

The electronic gear enables the workpiece travel distance per input reference pulse from the host controller to be set to any value. One reference pulse from the host controller, i.e., the minimum position data unit, is called a reference unit.
When the Electronic Gear Is Not Used Workpiece

No. of encoder pulses: 2048 Ball screw pitch: 6 mm (0.24 in)
When the Electronic Gear Is Used

Workpiece Reference unit: : 1 m No. of encoder pulses: 2048
Ball screw pitch: 6 mm (0.24 in)
To move a workpiece 10 mm (0.39 in): 1 revolution is 6 mm. Therefore, 10 6 = 1.6666 revolutions 2048 4 pulses is 1 revolution. Therefore, 1.6666 2048 4 = 13653 pulses 13653 pulses are input as reference pulses. The equation must be calculated at the host controller.
To move a workpiece 10 mm using reference units: The reference unit is 1 m. Therefore, To move the workpiece 10 mm (10000 m), 1 pulse = 1 m, so 10000/1=10000 pulses. Input 10000 pulses per 10 mm of workpiece movement.
8-50
(3) Related Parameters

Pn202 Electronic Gear Ratio (Numerator) Setting Range Setting Unit 1 to 65535 Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) Factory Setting 4
Position
Setting Validation After restart

Position
Pn203
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 1 to 65535 1 After restart If the deceleration ratio of the servomotor and the load shaft is given as n/m where m is the rotation of the servomotor and n is the rotation of the load shaft,
Electronic gear ratio: m Pn202 B No. of encoder pulses 4 = = n Pn203 A Travel distance per load shaft revolution (reference units)
* If the ratio is outside the setting range, reduce the fraction (both numerator and denominator) until you obtain integers within the range. Be careful not to change the electronic gear ratio (B/A). IMPORTANT Electronic gear ratio setting range: 0.01 Electronic gear ratio (B/A) 100 If the electronic gear ratio is outside this range, the SERVOPACK will not operate properly. In this case, modify the load configuration or reference unit.
(4) Procedure for Setting the Electronic Gear Ratio

Use the following procedure to set the electronic gear ratio.
Step 1 2 3 4 Operation Check machine specifications. Check the number of encoder pulses. Determine the reference unit used. Calculate the travel distance per load shaft revolution. Calculate the electronic gear ratio. Set parameters. Description Check the deceleration ratio, ball screw pitch, and pulley diameter. Check the number of encoder pulses for the servomotor used. Determine the reference unit from the host controller, considering the machine specifications and positioning accuracy. Calculate the number of reference units necessary to turn the load shaft one revolution based on the previously determined reference units. Use the electronic gear ratio equation to calculate the ratio (B/A). Set parameters using the calculated values.
5 6
8-51
8 Operation 8.6.2 Setting the Electronic Gear
(5) Electronic Gear Ratio Setting Examples

The following examples show electronic gear ratio settings for different load configurations.
Step Operation Ball Screw
Reference unit: 0.001 mm Load shaft 13-bit encoder Ball screw pitch: 6 mm
Load Configuration Disc Table

Reference unit: 0.1 Deceleration ratio: 3:1 Load shaft 13-bit encoder
Belt and Pulley

Reference Unit: 0.02 mm Load shaft Deceleration ratio 2:1
Pully diameter: 100 mm 16-bit encoder
Check machine specifications. Check the number of encoder pulses. Determine the reference unit used. Calculate the travel distance per load shaft revolution. Calculate the electronic gear ratio. Set parameters.
x Ball screw pitch: 6 mm x Deceleration ratio: 1/1 13-bit: 2048 P/R 1 Reference unit: 0.001 mm (1 m) 6 mm/0.001 mm=6000
Rotation angle per revolution: 360 Deceleration ratio: 3/1 13-bit: 2048 P/R 1 Reference unit: 0.01 360/0.1=3600
2 3 4
Pulley diameter: 100 mm (pulley circumference: 314 mm) x Deceleration ratio: 2/1 16-bit: 16384 P/R 1 Reference unit: 0.02 mm (20 m) 314 mm/0.02 mm=15700
5 6
B 2048 4 1 = A 6000 1
B 2048 4 = A 3600
3 1
2 B 16384 4 = 1 A 15700
Pn202 Pn203
8192 6000
Pn202 Pn203
24576 3600
Pn202 Pn203
131072 15700
Reduce the fraction (both numerator and denominator) since the calculated result will not be within the setting range. For example, reduce the numerator and denominator by four to obtain Pn202=32768, Pn203=3925 and complete the settings.
(6) Electronic Gear Ratio Equation

Servomotor n Reference pulse (mm/P) B A + Position Speed loop loop
Pitch = P (mm/rev) m
(mm/P): Reference unit P G (P/R): Encoder pulses P (mm/rev): Ball screw pitch m : Deceleration ratio n nP ( B ) =4P m G A 4P m G ( B )= nP A
(P/rev) P G
4P G P
m n
Set A and B with the following parameters. A Pn203 B Pn202
8-52
8.6.3 Position Reference

The servomotor positioning is controlled by inputting a pulse train reference. The pulse train output form from the host controller corresponds to the following: Line-driver Output +24V Open-collector output +12V Open-collector output +5V Open-collector output
Precautions for Open-collector Output When the open-collector output is used, input signal noise margin lowers. Change the parameter as follows: Parameter Pn200 n.1 Description Reference input filter for open-collector signal
IMPORTANT
(1) Input/Output Signal Timing Example

Servo ON Baseblock
CN1-11 t1 H t3 CN1-7 H PAO L H L t4 t5 ON t7 ON t6 H L ON Release t2
Sign + pulse train
t1 30 ms t2 6 ms (When parameter Pn506 is set to 0.) t3 40 ms
Encoder pulses
PBO /COIN CLR
t4, t5, t6 2 ms t7 20 s
Note: 1. The interval from the time the servo ON signal is turned ON until a reference pulse is input must be at least 40 ms, otherwise the reference pulse may not be received by the SERVOPACK. 2. The error counter clear signal must be ON for at least 20 s.
8-53
8 Operation 8.6.3 Position Reference
Table 8.1 Reference Pulse Input Signal Timing Reference Pulse Signal Form Sign and pulse train input (SIGN and PULS signal) Maximum reference frequency: 500 kpps (For open-collector output: 200 kpps) CW pulse and CCW pulse Maximum reference frequency: 500 kpps (For open-collector output: 200 kpps) Electrical Specifications
SIGN PULS
t1 t2 t3 t4 T Forward reference t5 t7
t6 Reverse reference
Remarks Sign (SIGN) H = Forward t3t7 0.1 ms reference t4t5t6 3 s L = Reverse 1.0 s reference (/T) 100 50% t1t2 0.1 ms t1t2 0.1 ms
t1 T
CCW CW
t2
Forward reference t1 t2 t3 Reverse reference
t3 3 s 1.0 s (/T) 100 50%
Two-phase pulse train with 90 phase differential (phase A and phase B) Maximum reference frequency 1 input pulse multiplier: 500 kpps 2 input pulse multiplier: 400 kpps 4 input pulse multiplier: 200 kpps
Phase A Phase B
T Forward reference Phase B leads phase A by 90 Reverse reference Phase B lags phase A by 90
t1t2 0.1 ms 1.0 s (/T) 100 = 50%
Switching of the input pulse multiplier mode is done with parameter Pn200.0 setting.
8-54
(2) Connection Example

(a) Connection Example for Line-driver Output
Applicable line driver: SN75174 manufactured by Texas Instruments Inc., or MC3487 or equivalent
Host controller Line driver SERVOPACK CN1
PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN CLR /CLR 7 8 11 12 15 14 150 150
Photocoupler
150
: Represents twisted-pair wires.
(b) Connection Example for Open-collector Output

Select the limit resistance R1 value so that the input current i will be within 7 to 15 mA.
Host controller Vcc R1 i PULS
/PULS
SERVOPACK CN1
7 8
Example Photocoupler
150
When Vcc is +24V: R1=2.2 k When Vcc is +12V: R1=1 k When Vcc is +5V: R1=180 Note: When the open-collector output is used, the signal logic is as follows:
R1
SIGN /SIGN
11 12 15 14 150 150
When Tr1 is ON
High level input or equivalent
When Tr1 is OFF Low level input or equivalent
R1
CLR /CLR
: Represents twisted-pair wires.
8-55
8 Operation 8.6.3 Position Reference
When the external power supply is used, the circuit will be isolated by a photocoupler. When the SERVOPACK internal power supply is used, the circuit will not be isolated.
Host controller CN1
PL1 PULS 3 1k 7 150 8 13 11 12 18 15 CLR /CLR 14 1
SERVOPACK
+12V
Photocoupler
Tr1
/PULS PL2
1.5 V max. at ON
SIGN /SIGN PL3
: Represents twisted-pair wires. When the open-collector output is used, input signal noise margin lowers. Set the parameter Pn200.3 to 1.
IMPORTANT
(3) Position Control Block Diagram

A block diagram for position control is shown below.
SERVOPACK (in position control)
Pn109 Pn202 Pn10A B Feed-forward filA ter time Pn203 constant
Differential
Feedforward
Pn107 Bias Pn108 Bias adding width + +
Reference pulse
Pn200.0
1 2 4
Pn204 Smoothing
Pn202
B A
Pn203
Pn102
Servomotor
Error - counter
Kp
4
Speed loop
Current loop
PG signal output
Pn201
PG
Dividing
Encoder
8-56
8.6.4 Smoothing
A filter can be applied in the SERVOPACK to a constant-frequency reference pulse.
(1) Selecting a Position Reference Filter

Parameter Pn207 Description
n.0 Acceleration/deceleration filter n.1 Average movement filter
* After resetting the parameter, turn OFF the power once and turn it ON again.
(2) Filter-related Parameters

Pn204 Position Reference Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant Setting Range Setting Unit 0 to 6400 0.01 ms (0 to 64.00 ms) Average Movement Time of Position Reference Setting Range 0 to 6400 (0 to 64.00 ms) Setting Unit 0.01 ms Factory Setting 0 (0.00 ms)
Position

Position
Pn208
Factory Setting 0 (0.00 ms)
IMPORTANT When the position reference acceleration/deceleration time constant (Pn204) is changed, a value with no reference pulse input and a position error of 0 will be enabled. To ensure that the setting value is correctly reflected, stop the reference pulse from the host controller and input the clear signal (/CLR), or turn the servo OFF to clear the error. This function provides smooth motor operating in the following cases. The function does not affect the travel distance (i.e., the number of pulses). When the host controller that outputs a reference cannot perform acceleration/deceleration processing. When the reference pulse frequency is too low. When the reference electronic gear ratio is too high (i.e., 10 or more). The difference between the position reference acceleration/deceleration time constant (Pn204) and the position reference movement averaging time (Pn208) is shown below. Acceleration/Deceleration Filter Average Movement Time Filter Pn207=n.0 Pn207=n.1
Before filter applied After filter applied
100%
100% 63.2%
Before filter applied After filter applied
t
Pn208 36.8% Pn208
Response waveform for stepwise input

Pn208 Before filter applied After filter applied
t
Pn204 Pn204
Response waveform for stepwise input

Pn208
t Response waveform for ramp reference input
8-57
8 Operation 8.6.5 Positioning Completed Output Signal
8.6.5 Positioning Completed Output Signal

This signal indicates that servomotor movement has been completed during position control. Use the signal as an interlock to confirm at the host controller that positioning has been completed.
Type Output Signal Name /COIN Connector Pin Number CN1-25, 26 (Factory setting) Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Positioning has been completed. OFF (high level) Positioning is not completed. This output signal can be allocated to an output terminal with parameter Pn50E. The factory setting is allocated to CN1-25, 26. Pn500 Positioning Completed Width
Position
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 250 1 Reference units 7 Immediately The positioning completed (/COIN) signal is output when the difference Reference (position error pulse) between the number of reference pulses output by Motor speed Speed the host controller and the travel distance of the servomotor is less than the value set in this parameter. Set the number of error pulses in reference units (the number of input Pn500 Error pulse pulses defined using the electronic gear.) (Un008) Too large a value at this parameter may output only a small error during low-speed operation that will cause the /COIN signal to be output con/COIN tinuously. (CN1-25) If a servo gain is set that keeps the position error small even when the positioning completed width is large, use Pn207 = n.1 to enable correct output timing for the COIN signal. The positioning completed width setting has no effect on final positioning accuracy. /COIN is a position control signal. When the factory setting is used and the output terminal allocation is not performed with the Pn50E, this signal is used for the speed coincidence output /V-CMP for speed control, and it is always OFF (high level) for torque control.
8-58
8.6.6 Positioning Near Signal

This signal indicates that the positioning of the servomotor is near to completion, and is generally used in combination with the positioning completed (/COIN) output signal. The host controller receives the positioning near signal prior to confirming the positioning-completed signal, and performs the following operating sequence after positioning has been completed to shorten the time required for operation.
Type Output Signal Name /NEAR Connector Pin Number Must be allocated Setting ON (low level) Meaning
The servomotor has reached a point near to positioning completed. OFF (high level) The servomotor has not reached a point near to positioning completed. The output terminal must be allocated with parameter Pn510 in order to use positioning near signal. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for details. Pn504 NEAR Signal Width Factory Setting 7
Reference Speed Pn504 Error pulse 0 /NEAR /COIN Pn500 Position
Setting Range Setting Unit 1 to 250 1 Reference units The positioning near (/NEAR) signal is output when the difference (error) between the number of reference pulses output by the host controller and the travel distance of the servomotor is less than the value set in Pn504. Set the number of error pulses in reference units (the number of input pulses defined using the electronic gear.) Normally, the setting should be larger than that for the positioning completed width (Pn500).

Motor speed
8-59
8 Operation 8.6.7 Reference Pulse Inhibit Function (INHIBIT)
8.6.7 Reference Pulse Inhibit Function (INHIBIT)

(1) Description
This function inhibits the SERVOPACK from counting input pulses during position control. The servomotor remains locked (clamped) while pulse are inhibited.
SERVOPACK Pn000.1 Pn000=n. Reference pulse Pn000=n. B 1 OFF ON + Error counter
/P-CON (/INHIBIT)
/P-CON (/INHIBIT) Feedback pulse
(2) Setting Parameters

Parameter Meaning Pn000 n.B Control mode selection: Position control (pulse train reference) Inhibit Inhibit (INHIBIT) switching condition x /P-CON (/INHIBIT) signal ON (low level)
/INHIBIT signal (/P-CON) Reference pulse t1 Input reference pulses are not counted during this period. t2 t1, t2 0.5 ms ON OFF ON
(3) Setting Input Signals

Type Input Signal Name /P-CON Connector Pin Number CN1-41 (Factory setting) Setting ON (low level) Meaning Turns the INHIBIT function ON. (Inhibits the SERVOPACK from counting reference pulses.) Turns the INHIBIT function OFF. (Counts reference pulses.) Turns the INHIBIT function ON. (Inhibits the SERVOPACK from counting reference pulses.) Turns the INHIBIT function OFF. (Counts reference pulses.)
OFF (high level) (Input) (/INHIBIT) Must be allocated CN1- ON (low level)
OFF (high level)
These input signals enable the inhibit function. Either the /P-CON or the /INHIBIT signal can be used to switch the inhibit signal. The input signal must be allocated in order to use the /INHIBIT signal. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-60
8.7 Operating Using Torque Control

The following parameters must be set for torque control operation with analog voltage reference.
Parameter Pn000 Pn400 Meaning Control mode selection: Torque control (analog voltage reference)
n.2
Torque Reference Input Gain
Speed
Position
Torque
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting 10 to 100 0.1V/Rated torque 30 (1.0 to 10.0 V/Rated torque) (3.0 V/Rated torque) This sets the analog voltage level for the torque reference (T-REF) that is Reference torque necessary to operate the servomotor at the rated torque.
Rated torque
EXAMPLE Pn400 = 30: The servomotor operates at the rated torque with 3-V input (factory setting). Pn400 = 1000: The servomotor operates at the rated torque with 10-V input. Pn400 = 200: The servomotor operates at the rated torque with 2-V input.
Reference voltage (V) This reference voltage is set.
8.7.2 Torque Reference Input

By applying a torque reference determined by the analog voltage reference to the SERVOPACK, the servomotor torque can be controlled in proportion with the input voltage.
Signal Connector Name Name Pin Number Input T-REF CN1-9 Torque Reference Input SG CN1-10 Signal Ground for Torque Reference Input Used during torque control (analog voltage reference). (Pn000.1 = 2, 6, 8, 9) The torque reference gain is set in Pn400. For setting details, refer to 8.7.1 Setting Parameters. Input Specifications Input range: 1 to 10VDC/rated torque Reference torque (%) Max. allowable input voltage: 12 VDC Factory setting Pn400 = 30: Rated torque at 3 V +3-V input: Rated torque in forward direction +9-V input: 300% rated torque in forward direction -0.3-V input: 10% rated torque in reverse direction The voltage input range can be changed with parameter Pn400.
- 12 -8 -4 0 34 - 100 - 200 - 300 8 12
Type
300 200 100
8
Input voltage (V)
Factory setting
Set the slope with Pn400.
Input Circuit Example Use twisted-pair wires as a countermeasure against noise. Variable resistor example: Model 25HP-10B manufactured by Sakae Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.
470 1/2 W min. +12 V 2 k
SERVOPACK CN1 9 10
T-REF SG
8-61
8 Operation 8.7.3 Adjusting the Reference Offset
INFO
Checking the Internal Torque Reference 1. Checking the internal torque reference with the panel operator: Use the Monitor Mode (Un-002). Refer to 7.4 Operation in Monitor Mode (Un). 2. Checking the internal torque reference with an analog monitor: The internal torque reference can also be checked with an analog monitor. Refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor.
8.7.3 Adjusting the Reference Offset

(1) Automatic Adjustment of the Torque Reference Offset
When using torque control, the servomotor may rotate slowly even when 0 V is specified as the analog reference voltage. This occurs when the host controller or external circuit has a slight offset (measured in mV) in the reference voltage. In this case, the reference offset can be adjusted automatically and manually using the panel operator or digital operator. The automatic adjustment of analog (speed, torque) reference offset (Fn009) automatically measures the offset and adjusts the reference voltage. The SERVOPACK performs the following automatic adjustment when the host controller or external circuit has an offset in the reference voltage.
Reference voltage Reference voltage Offset automatically adjusted in SERVOPACK. Offset Torque reference Automatic offset adjustment Torque reference
After completion of the automatic adjustment, the amount of offset is stored in the SERVOPACK. The amount of offset can be checked in the manual adjustment of torque reference offset (Fn00B). The automatic adjustment of analog reference offset (Fn009) cannot be used when a position loop has been formed with the host controller and the error pulse is changed to zero at the servomotor stop due to servolock. Use the torque reference offset manual adjustment (Fn00B).
IMPORTANT
The analog reference offset must be automatically adjusted with the servo OFF.
8-62
Use the following procedure for automatic adjustment of the torque reference offset.
0-V speed PACK reference or torque reference
Servo OFF SERVOServomotor
Panel Operator
Description Turn OFF the SERVOPACK, and input the 0-V reference voltage from the host controller or external circuit.
Host controller
Slow rotation (Servo ON)
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the LEFT/RIGHT or UP/DOWN Key, or UP or DOWN Key to select parameter Fn009. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. rEF_o will be displayed.
4
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DSPL SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The reference offset will be automatically adjusted. When completed, donE will blink for about one second. After donE is displayed, rEF_o will be displayed again.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
(2) Manual Adjustment of the Torque Reference Offset

Manual adjustment of the torque reference offset (Fn00B) is used in the following cases. If a position loop is formed with the host controller and the error is zeroed when servolock is stopped. To deliberately set the offset to some value. Use this mode to check the offset data that was set in the automatic adjustment mode of the torque reference offset. This mode operates in the same way as the automatic adjustment mode (Fn009), except that the amount of offset is directly input during the adjustment. The offset adjustment range and setting units are as follows:
Torque Reference Offset Adjustment Range Offset Adjustment Range: -128 to +127 (Torque reference: -1881.6 mV to +1866.9 mV) Offset Setting Unit Analog Input Voltage Offset Setting Unit Torque reference: 1 = 14.7 mV
8-63
8 Operation 8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control
Use the following procedure to manually adjust the torque reference offset.
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the LEFT/RIGHT or UP/DOWN Key or UP or DOWN Key to select parameter Fn00B. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display will be as shown at the left. The manual adjustment mode for the torque reference offset will be entered. Turn ON the servo ON (/S-ON) signal. The display will be as shown at the left. Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second to display the torque reference offset amount.
(DSPL/SET Key)
3
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
4 Servo ON 5
6 7
Press the UP or DOWN Key to adjust the amount of offset. Press the LEFT or RIGHT Key or DATA/SHIFT Key for less than one second to return to the display shown on the left.
8
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Press the DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the Fn00B display of the utility function mode.
8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control

During torque control, the servomotor is controlled to output the specified torque, which means that the servomotor speed is not controlled. Accordingly, when an excessive reference torque is set for the mechanical load torque, it will prevail over the mechanical load torque and the servomotor speed will greatly increase. This function serves to limit the servomotor speed during torque control to protect the machine.
With No Speed Limit
Motor speed Maximum speed Danger of damage due to excessive machine speed. Motor speed Safe operation with speed limit.
With Speed Limit
Speed limit
(1) Speed Limit Mode Selection (Torque Limit Option)

n.0 Uses the value set in Pn407 as the speed limit (internal speed limit function). n.1 Uses V-REF (CN1-5, 6) as an external speed limit input. Applies a speed limit using the input
voltage of V-REF and the setting in Pn300 (external speed limit function).
8-64
(2) Internal Speed Limit Function

Pn407 Speed Limit During Torque Control Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit
-1
Torque
min Sets the servomotor speed limit value during torque control. The setting in this parameter is enabled when Pn002 = n.0. The servomotors maximum speed will be used when the setting in this parameter exceeds the maximum speed of the servomotor used.
Factory Setting 10000
(3) External Speed Limit Function

Signal Connector Name Name Pin Number Input V-REF CN1-5 External Speed Limit Input SG CN1-6 Signal Ground Inputs an analog voltage reference as the servomotor speed limit value during torque control. The smaller value is enabled, the speed limit input from V-REF or the Pn407 (Speed Limit during Torque Control) when Pn002 = n.1. The setting in Pn300 determines the voltage level to be input as the limit value. Polarity has no effect. Pn300 Speed Reference Input Gain Setting Range 150 to 3000 (1.50 to 30.0 V/rated speed) Setting Unit 0.01 V/rated speed
Type
Factory Setting Setting Validation 600 Immediately (6.00 V/rated speed) Sets the voltage level for the speed that is to be externally limited during torque control. With Pn300 = 600 (factory setting) and 6 V input from V-REF (CN1-5, 6), the actual motor speed is limited to the rated speed of the servomotor used.
INFO
The Principle of Speed Limiting When the speed is outside of the allowable range, a torque that is proportional to the difference between the actual speed and the speed limit is used as negative feedback to bring the speed back within the speed limit range. Accordingly, there is a margin generated by the load conditions in the actual motor speed limit value.
(4) Signals Output during Servomotor Speed Limit

Type Output Signal Name /VLT Connector Pin Number Must be allocated CN1- Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Servomotor speed limit being applied. OFF (high level) Servomotor speed limit not being applied. This signal is output when the servomotor speed reaches the speed limit value set in Pn407 or set by the analog voltage reference. For use, this output signal must be allocated with parameter Pn50F. For details, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-65
8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed

Internally Set Speed Selection
This function allows speed control operation by externally selecting an input signal from among three servomotor speed settings made in advance with parameters in the SERVOPACK. The speed control operations within the three settings are valid. There is no need for an external speed or pulse generator.
SERVOPACK CN1 41 45 46 Internally set speed parameters SPEED1 Pn301 SPEED2 Pn302 SPEED3 Pn303 Speed reference
/P-CON (/SPD-D) Contact inputs /P-CL /N-CL (/SPD-A) (/SPD-B)
Servomotor M

Parameter Pn000
n.3
Meaning Control mode selection: Internally set speed control (contact reference)
Pn301
Internal Set Speed 1 Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit 1 min-1
Speed
Factory Setting 100

Speed
Pn302
Internal Set Speed 2 Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit 1 min

-1
Factory Setting 200

Speed
Pn303
Internal Set Speed 3 Setting Range 0 to 10000 Setting Unit 1 min

-1
Factory Setting 300
Note: The maximum speed of servomotor is used whenever a speed settings for the Pn301 to Pn303 exceed the maximum speed.
8-66
8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed
8.8.2 Input Signal Settings

The following input signals are used to switch the operating speed.
Signal Connector Pin Meaning Name Number Input /P-CON CN1-41 Switches the servomotor rotation direction. (/SPD-D) Must be allocated Input /P-CL CN1-45 Selects the internally set speed. (/SPD-A) Must be allocated Input /N-CL CN1-46 Selects the internally set speed. (/SPD-B) Must be allocated Input Signal Selection The following two types of operation can be performed using the internally set speeds: Operation with the /P-CON, /P-CL, and /N-CL input signals (pins allocated in factory setting) Operation with the /SPD-D, /SPD-A, and /SPD-B input signals /SPD-D, /SPD-A, and /SPD-B input signals must be allocated with parameter Pn50C. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. Type
8.8.3 Operating Using an Internally Set Speed

Use ON/OFF combinations of the following input signals to operate with the internally set speeds.
Input Signal /P-CON /P-CL (/SPD-D) (/SPD-A) OFF (high) OFF (high) OFF (high) ON (low) ON (low) /N-CL (/SPD-B) OFF (high) ON (low) ON (low) Motor Rotation Direction Forward Speed
Stop at 0 of the internally set speed Pn301: Internally Set Speed 1 (SPEED1) Pn302: Internally Set Speed 2 (SPEED2) Pn303: Internally Set Speed 3 (SPEED3) Stop at 0 of the internally set speed Pn301: Internally Set Speed 1 (SPEED1) Pn302: Internally Set Speed 2 (SPEED2) Pn303: Internally Set Speed 3 (SPEED3)
ON (low)
OFF (high) OFF (high) OFF (high) OFF (high) ON (low) ON (low) ON (low) ON (low) OFF (high)
Reverse
Note: Signal OFF = High level; Signal ON = Low level
IMPORTANT
Control Mode Switching When Pn000.1 = 4, 5, or 6, and either /P-CL (/SPD-A) or /N-CL (SPD-B) is OFF (high level), the control mode will switch. Example: When Pn000.1=5: Internally set speed selection Position control (pulse train) Input Signal /P-CL (/SPD-A) /N-CL (/SPD-B) OFF (high) OFF (high) OFF (high) ON (low) ON (low) ON (low) ON (low) OFF (high) Speed Pulse train reference input (position control) Pn301: Internally Set Speed 1 (SPEED1) Pn302: Internally Set Speed 2 (SPEED2) Pn303: Internally Set Speed 3 (SPEED3)
8-67
8 Operation 8.8.3 Operating Using an Internally Set Speed
Example of Operating with Internally Set Speed Selection

The shock that results when the speed is changed can be reduced by using the soft start function. For details on the soft start function, refer to 8.5.4 Soft Start. Example: Operation with an Internally Set Speed and Soft Start
Servomotor speed +SPEED3 +SPEED2
1st speed 2nd speed 3rd speed
Acceleration/deceleration are done for the soft start times set in Pn305 and Pn306.
+SPEED1 0 - SPEED1 - SPEED2 - SPEED3 Stop Stop

1st speed
Stop
2nd speed
3rd speed
/P-CL (/SPD-A) /N-CL (/SPD-B)
OFF OFF
OFF ON ON
ON ON ON
ON OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
/P-CON( /SPD-D)
IMPORTANT
When Pn000.1 = 5 (Internally set speed control Position control), the soft start function will operate only when selecting the internally set speed. The soft start function cannot be used with pulse reference input. When switching to pulse reference input during operation at either of the three speeds (1st speed to 3rd speed), the pulse reference will not be received by the SERVOPACK until after the positioning completed (/ COIN) signal is output. Always begin the output of the pulse reference from the host controller after the positioning completed (/COIN) signal is output from the SERVOPACK. Example: Operation with an Internally Set Speed and Soft Start Position Control (Pulse Train Reference)
Signal Timing in Position Control Motor speed 0 min -1 /COIN
Pulse reference /P-CL (/SPD-A) /N-CL (/SPD-B) Selected speed OFF ON 1st speed ON ON 2nd speed ON OFF 3rd speed
t1 OFF OFF Pulse reference t1 2 ms
t1 OFF ON 1st speed
Note: 1. The soft start function is used in the above figure. 2. The t1 value is not affected by whether the soft start function is used. A maximum delay of 2 ms occurs in loading /P-CL (/SPD-A) and /N-CL (/SPD-B).
8-68
8.9 Limiting Torque
8.9 Limiting Torque

The SERVOPACK provides the following four methods for limiting output torque to protect the machine.
Setting Level 1 2 3 4 Limiting Method Internal torque limit External torque limit Torque limiting by analog voltage reference External torque limit + Torque limiting by analog voltage reference Reference Section 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 8.9.4
8.9.1 Internal Torque Limit (Limiting Maximum Output Torque)

Maximum torque is always limited to the values set in the following parameters.
Pn402 Forward Torque Limit Setting Range 0 to 800 Reverse Torque Limit Setting Unit 1%
Factory Setting 800

Speed

Position Torque
Pn403
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 0 to 800 1% 800 Immediately The settings in these parameters are constantly enabled. The setting unit is a percentage of rated torque. If the torque limit is set higher than the maximum torque of the servomotor, the maximum torque of the servomotor is used (as is the case with the 800% factory setting). No Internal Torque Limit Internal Torque Limit (Maximum Torque Can Be Output)
Pn403
t
Pn402 Speed Maximum torque Speed Limiting torque
Too small a torque limit setting will result in insufficient torque during acceleration and deceleration.
8-69
8 Operation 8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals)
8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals)

This function allows the torque to be limited at specific times during machine operation, for example, during press stops and hold operations for robot workpieces. An input signal is used to enable the torque limits previously set in parameters.

Pn404 Forward External Torque Limit Setting Range 0 to 800 Pn405 Reverse External Torque Limit Setting Range 0 to 800 Setting Unit 1% Setting Unit 1%
Factory Setting 100

Speed

Position Torque
Factory Setting 100
Note: The setting unit is a percentage of rated torque (i.e., the rated torque is 100%).
(2) Input Signals

Type Input Signal Name /P-CL Connector Pin Number CN1-45 (Factory Setting) Setting ON (low level) Meaning Limit Value
Forward external torque limit The value set in Pn402 or ON Pn404 (whichever is smaller) OFF (high level) Forward external torque limit Pn402 OFF Input /N-CL CN1-46 ON (low level) Reverse external torque limit The value set in Pn403 or ON Pn405 (whichever is smaller) (Factory Setting) OFF (high level) Reverse external torque limit Pn403 OFF When using this function, make sure that there are no other signals allocated to the same terminals as /P-CL and /N-CL. When multiple signals are allocated to the same terminal, the signals are handled with OR logic, which affects the ON/OFF state of the other signals. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-70
8.9 Limiting Torque
(3) Changes in Output Torque during External Torque Limiting

Example: External torque limit (Pn402, Pn403) set to 800%
/P-CL (Forward External Torque Limit Input) High level Low level High level
Pn403 Torque Pn403 Torque
Pn404
/N-CL (Reverse External Torque Limit Input)
Speed Pn402 Pn402
Speed
Low level
Pn403 Torque Pn405 0
Pn403 Torque Pn405 0
Pn404 Speed Pn402 Pn402 Speed
Note: In this example, the servomotor rotation direction is Pn000 = n.0 (standard setting, CCW = forward).
8-71
8 Operation 8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference
8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference

Torque limiting by analog voltage reference limits torque by assigning a torque limit in an analog voltage to the T-REF terminals (CN1-9 and 10). This function can be used only during speed or position control, not during torque control. Refer to the following block diagram when the torque limit with an analog voltage reference is used for speed control.
SERVOPACK
Torque limit value
T-REF Torque reference input gain (Pn400) Speed loop gain (Pn100) Speed loop integral time constant (Pn101) Speed feedback +
Forward torque value (Pn402)
Speed refer+ V-REF ence Speed input reference gain (Pn300)
Torque reference
Reverse torque value (Pn403)
INFO
There is no polarity in the input voltage of the analog voltage reference for torque limiting. The absolute values of both + and - voltages are input, and a torque limit value corresponding to that absolute value is applied in the forward or reverse direction.

Parameter Pn002
n.1
Meaning Speed control option: Uses the T-REF terminal to be used as an external torque limit input.
When n.2 is set, the T-REF terminal is used for torque feed-forward input, but the functions cannot be used together.
(2) Input Signals

Signal Connector Name Name Pin Number Input T-REF CN1-9 Torque reference input SG CN1-10 Signal ground for torque reference input The torque limit input gain is set at parameter Pn400. Refer to 8.7.1 Setting Parameters. Input Specifications Input range: 1 VDC to 10 VDC/rated torque Maximum allowable input voltage: 12 VDC Type
8-72
8.9 Limiting Torque
8.9.4 Torque Limiting Using an External Torque Limit and Analog Voltage Reference
This function can be used to combine torque limiting by an external input signal and by analog voltage reference. Because the torque limit by analog voltage reference is input from T-REF (CN1-9, 10), this function cannot be used during torque control. Use /P-CL (CN1-45) or /N-CL (CN1-46) for torque limiting by external input signal. When /P-CL (or /N-CL) is ON, either the torque limit by analog voltage reference or the setting in Pn404 (or Pn405) will be applied as the torque limit, whichever is smaller.
SERVOPACK
/P-CL /N-CL
Torque limit value Torque reference T-REF input gain (Pn400) Speed refer+ V-REF ence input gain (Pn300)
Forward torque value (Pn402) Speed loop gain (Pn100) Pn404 ( /P-CL: ON ) Torque reference
Speed reference
+ +
Speed loop integral Reverse torque time Pn405 constant value (Pn403) ( /N-CL : ON) (Pn101) Speed feedback

Meaning Pn002 n.3 Speed control option: When /P-CL or /N-CL is enabled, the T-REF terminal is used as the external torque limit input. When n.2 is set, T-REF is used for torque feed-forward input, but the functions cannot be used together. Pn404 Forward External Torque Limit Setting Range 0 to 800 Reverse External Torque Limit Setting Range 0 to 800 Setting Unit 1% Setting Unit 1%
Parameter
Factory Setting 100 Factory Setting 100
Setting Validation Immediately Setting Validation Immediately
Pn405
* The setting unit is a percentage of rated torque (i.e., the rated torque is 100%).
8-73
8 Operation 8.9.5 Checking Output Torque Limiting during Operation
(2) Input Signals

Signal Connector Pin Name Name Number Input T-REF CN1-9 Torque reference input SG CN1-10 Signal ground for torque reference input The torque limit input gain is set in parameter Pn400. Refer to 8.7.1 Setting Parameters. Input Specifications Input range: 1 VDC to 10 VDC/rated torque Maximum allowable input voltage: 12 VDC Type
Type Input
Signal Name /P-CL
Connector Pin Number CN1-45 (Factory setting)
Setting ON (low level)
Meaning Forward external torque limit ON Forward external torque limit OFF Reverse external torque limit ON Reverse external torque limit OFF
Limit Value The analog voltage reference limit or the value set in Pn402 or Pn404 (whichever is smaller) Pn402 The analog voltage reference limit or the value set in Pn403 or Pn405 (whichever is smaller) Pn403
OFF (high level) Input /N-CL CN1-46 (Factory setting) ON (low level)
OFF (high level)
When using the torque limiting with the external torque limit and analog voltage reference, make sure that there are no other signals allocated to the same terminals as /P-CL and /N-CL. When multiple signals are allocated to the same terminal, the signals are handled with OR logic, which affects the ON/OFF state of the other signals. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.
8.9.5 Checking Output Torque Limiting during Operation

The following signal can be output to indicate that the servomotor output torque is being limited.
Type Output Signal Name /CLT Connector Pin Number Must be allocated Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Servomotor output torque is being limited. OFF (high level) Torque is not being limited. The output terminal must be allocated with parameter Pn50F to use this output signal. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for details.
8-74

The methods and conditions for switching SERVOPACK control modes are described below.

The following combinations of control modes can be selected according to the application at hand.
Parameter Pn000 Control Method Internally set speed control (contact reference) Speed control (analog voltage reference) Internally set speed control (contact reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Internally set speed control (contact reference) Torque control (analog voltage reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Speed control (analog voltage reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Torque control (analog voltage reference) Torque control (analog voltage reference) Speed control (analog voltage reference) Speed control (analog voltage reference) Zero clamp Position control (pulse train reference) Position control (inhibit)
n.4 n.5 n.6 n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B
8.10.2 Switching the Control Mode

(1) Switching Internally Set Speed Control (Pn000.1 = 4, 5, or 6)
With the sequence input signals in the factory setting (Pn50A = n.0), the control mode will switch when both /P-CL (/SPD-A) and /N-CL (/SPD-B) signals are OFF (high level).
Connector Setting Meaning Pin Number Input CN1-45 OFF (high level) Switches control mode. (Factory setting) (/SPD-A) Must be allocated Input /N-CL CN1-46 OFF (high level) (Factory setting) (/SPD-B) Must be allocated Input Signal Selection The following two types of control mode selection are available for switching from internally set speed control: Switching with the /P-CL and /N-CL input signals (pins allocated in factory setting) Switching with the /SPD-A and /SPD-B input signals When using /SPD-A and /SPD-B, they must be allocated with parameter Pn50C. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. Type Signal Name /P-CL
8-75
8 Operation 8.10.2 Switching the Control Mode
(2) Switching Other Than Internally Set Speed Control (Pn000.1 = 7, 8, 9, A, or B)

Use the following signals to switch control modes. The control modes switch as shown below for each of the signal states indicated. When changing the sequence input signal from the factory setting (Pn50A = n.1), allocate the /C-SEL to an input terminal and change modes with the /C-SEL signal. In this case, input a speed reference (analog voltage reference) for speed control, and a position reference (pulse train reference) for position control.
Pn000 Setting n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B Input /P-CON CN1-41 ON (low level) Speed Torque Speed Zero Inhibit clamp (Factory setting) OFF (high level) Position Position Torque Speed Position (Input) (/C-SEL) Must be allocated ON (low level) Speed Torque Speed Zero Inhibit clamp OFF (high level) Position Position Torque Speed Position The control mode can be switched with either /P-CON or /C-SEL. When using the /C-SEL signal, the input signal must be allocated. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. Type Signal Name Connector Pin Number Setting
8-76
8.11 Other Output Signals

The following output signals, which have no direct connection with the control modes, are used for machine protection.
8.11.1 Servo Alarm Output (ALM) and Alarm Code Output (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3)
(1) Servo Alarm Output (ALM)
This signal is output when an error is detected in the SERVOPACK.
Type Output Signal Name ALM Connector Pin Number CN1-31, 32 (Factory setting) Setting ON (low level) OFF (high level) Meaning Normal SERVOPACK condition SERVOPACK alarm condition
IMPORTANT Always form an external circuit so this alarm output turns OFF the main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK.
(2) Alarm Reset

Signal Connector Name Name Pin Number Input /ALM- CN1-44 Alarm Reset RST When a servo alarm (ALM) has occurred and the cause of the alarm has been eliminated, the alarm can be reset by turning this signal (/ALM-RST) from OFF (high level) to ON (low level). This signal can be allocated to other pin numbers with Pn50B. For details on the procedure, refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. The /ALM-RST signal cannot be constantly enabled by the allocation of an external input signal. Reset the alarm by changing the signal from high level to low level. The alarm can also be reset from the panel operator or digital operator. Refer to 7.1.2 Key Names and Functions for details. 1. Some encoder-related alarms cannot be reset with the /ALM-RST signal input. To reset these alarms, turn OFF the control power supply. 2. When an alarm occurs, always eliminate the cause before resetting the alarm. The methods for troubleshooting alarms are described in 11.1.3 Troubleshooting of Alarm and Warning. Type
IMPORTANT
(3) Alarm Code Output

Type Output Output Output Output Signal Name ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 SG Connector Pin Number CN1-37 CN1-38 CN1-39 CN1-1 Meaning Alarm code output Alarm code output Alarm code output Signal ground for alarm code output
These open-collector signals output alarm codes. The ON/OFF combination of these output signals indicates the type of alarm detected by the servomotor. Use these signals to display alarm codes at the host controller. Refer to 11.1.1 Alarm Display Table for details on alarm code output.
8-77
8 Operation 8.11.2 Warning Output (/WARN)
8.11.2 Warning Output (/WARN)

Type Output Signal Name /WARN Connector Pin Number Must be allocated Setting Meaning
ON (high level) Normal state OFF (low level) Warning state This output signal displays warnings before an overload (A.710) or regenerative overload (A.320) alarm is output. For use, the /WARN signal must be allocated with parameter Pn50F. For details, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
Related Parameters
The following parameter is used to select the alarm code output.
puts an alarm code when an alarm occurs. Refer to 8.11.1 Servo Alarm Output (ALM) and Alarm Code Output (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3) for alarm code descriptions. Refer to 11.1.2 Warning Display for the ON/OFF combinations of ALO1, ALO2, and ALO3 when a warning code is output.
n.0 Outputs alarm codes alone for alarm codes ALO1, ALO2, and ALO3. n.1 Outputs both alarm and warning codes for alarm codes ALO1, ALO2, and ALO3, and out-
8.11.3 Running Output Signal (/TGON)

Type Output Signal Name /TGON Connector Pin Number CN1-27, 28 (Factory setting) Setting ON (low level) Meaning
Servomotor is operating (Motor speed is above the setting in Pn502). OFF (high level) Servomotor is not operating (Motor speed is below the setting in Pn502). This signal is output to indicate that the servomotor is currently operating above the setting in parameter Pn502. The /TGON signal can be allocated to another output terminal with parameter Pn50E. For details, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation. IMPORTANT If the brake signal (/BK) and running output signal (/TGON) are allocated to the same output terminal, the /TGON signal will go to low level at the speed at which the movable part drops on the vertical axis, which means that the /BK signal will not go to high level. (This is because signals are output with OR logic when multiple signals are allocated to the same output terminal.). Always allocate /TGON and /BK signals to different terminals.
Related Parameter
Pn502 Rotation Detection Level Setting Range 1 to 10000 Setting Unit
Factory Setting Setting Validation 20 Immediately 1 min-1 Set the range in which the running output signal (/TGON) is output in this parameter. When the servomotor rotation speed is above the value set in the Pn502, it is judged to be servomotor rotating and the running output signal (/TGON) is output. The rotation detection signal can also be checked on the digital operator. For details, refer to 7.1.4 Status Display and 7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes.
8-78
8.11.4 Servo Ready (/S-RDY) Output

Type Output Signal Connector Pin Name Number /S-RDY CN1-29, 30 (Factory setting) Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Servo is ready. OFF (high level) Servo is not ready. This signal indicates that the SERVOPACK received the servo ON signal and completed all preparations. It is output when there are no servo alarms and the main circuit power supply is turned ON. An added condition with absolute encoder specifications is that when the SEN signal is at high level, absolute data was output to the host controller. The servo ready signal condition can also be checked on the digital operator. For details, refer to 7.1.4 Status Display and 7.4.1 List of Monitor Modes. The /S-RDY signal can be allocated to another output terminal with parameter Pn50E. For details, refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation.
8-79
9
Adjustments
9.1 Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2

9.1.1 Servo Gain Adjustment Methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2 9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
9.2 Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5

9.2.1 Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5 9.2.2 Online Autotuning Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-6 9.2.3 Selecting the Online Autotuning Execution Method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7 9.2.4 Machine Rigidity Setting for Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8 9.2.5 Method for Changing the Machine Rigidity Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9 9.2.6 Saving the Results of Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-10 9.2.7 Procedure for Saving the Results of Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-11
9.3 Manual Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12

9.3.1 Explanation of Servo Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.3.3 Position Loop Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.3.4 Speed Loop Gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.3.5 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12 9-13 9-13 9-14 9-14
9.4 Servo Gain Adjustment Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15

9.4.1 Feed-forward Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.2 Torque Feed-forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.3 Speed Feed-forward - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.4 Proportional Control Operation (Proportional Operation Reference) - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.6 Setting the Speed Bias - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.7 Speed Feedback Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.8 Speed Feedback Compensation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.9 Switching Gain Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.4.10 Torque Reference Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15 9-16 9-17 9-18 9-19 9-22 9-22 9-23 9-25 9-26
9.5 Analog Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28
9-1
9 Adjustments 9.1.1 Servo Gain Adjustment Methods
9.1 Autotuning
9.1.1 Servo Gain Adjustment Methods
The SERVOPACK has the servo gains to determine the servo response characteristics. The servo gains are set in the parameters. The parameters are designated for each function as shown in 9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions. The servo gains are factory-set to stable values, and responsiveness can be increased depending on the actual machine conditions. The following flowchart shows an overview procedure for adjusting the servo gains to reduce the positioning time for position control. Follow this flowchart to effectively adjust the servo gains. For functions in bold lines in the flowchart, select the adjustment method according to the clients intent using 9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions.
Start adjusting servo gain.
Adjust using (1) Autotuning Functions.
Results OK.
Results OK?
Results insufficient.
Adjust using (2) Positioning Time Reduction Functions.
Results OK.
Results OK?
Vibration resulted
Adjust using (3) Vibration Reduction Functions.
Results OK?
Results OK.
End servo gain adjustment.
If the desired responsiveness cannot be achieved adjusting according to the servo gain adjustment methods, consider the following possible causes. Autotuning does not suit the operating conditions. Adjust the servo gains manually. Refer to 9.3 Manual Tuning. The selection of settings for the positioning time reduction functions or vibration reduction functions are not appropriate. Each function may not be effective for all machines due to machine characteristics or operating conditions. Use other positioning time reduction function or vibration reduction function.
9-2
9.1 Autotuning
9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions

(1) Autotuning Functions
Autotuning calculates the load moment of inertia, which determines the servo responsiveness, and automatically adjusts parameters, such as the Speed Loop Gain Kv (Pn100), Speed Loop Integral Time Constant Ti (Pn101), Position Loop Gain Kp (Pn102), and Torque Reference Filter Time Constant Tf (Pn401). Refer to the following table to select the appropriate autotuning function for your desired purpose and adjust the servo gains.
Function Name and Related Parameters Description Guidelines for Selection Reference Section
Online Autotuning Pn110.0 Fn001 Fn007
This function automatically measures the machine characteristics and sets the required servo gains accordingly. This function allows beginners to adjust the servo gains Only the minimum number of parameters easily. must be set for autotuning using a normal The load moment of inertia is calculated during opera- operation reference. tion for a user reference, and the servo gains (Kv, Ti, Kp, and Tf) are set according to the Machine Rigidity Setting (Fn001).
9.2
(2) Positioning Time Reduction Functions

Function Name and Related Parameters Feed-forward Pn109 Pn10A Torque feed-forward Pn002 Pn400 Speed feed-forward Pn207 Pn300 Mode Switch (P/PI Switching) Pn10B Pn10C Pn10D Pn10E Pn10F Speed Feedback Compensation Pn110 Pn111 Gain Switching Pn100 Pn101 Pn102 Pn104 Pn105 Pn106 Description Feed-forward compensation for the position reference is added to the speed reference. Inputs torque feed-forward to the torque reference input terminal and adds to the internal torque reference at the speed control. Inputs speed feed-forward to the speed reference input terminal and adds to the internal speed reference at the position control. Switches from PI control to P control using the value of an internal servo variable in a parameter (torque, speed, acceleration, or position error) as a threshold value. Adjustment is easy. The system will be unstable if a large value is set, possibly resulting in overshooting or vibration. Features Valid Control Modes Position Reference Section 9.4.1
Speed
9.4.2
Position
9.4.3
The setting for automatic switching between PI and P control is easy.
Position Speed
9.4.5
Compensates the motor speed using an observer.
Adjustment is easy because the compensation can be set as a percentage. If the Position speed loop gain increases, the position Speed loop gain also increases, however sometimes the servo rigidity decreases.
9
9.4.8
Uses the external signals to change each parameter for speed loop gain (Kv), speed loop integral time constant (Ti), and position loop gain (Kp.)
Position Speed
9.4.9
9-3
9 Adjustments 9.1.2 List of Servo Adjustment Functions
(3) Vibration Reduction Functions

Function Name and Related Parameters Soft Start Pn305 Pn306 Acceleration/ Deceleration Filters Pn204 Pn207 Movement Average Filter Pn207 Pn208 Speed Feedback Filter Pn308 Speed Reference Filter Pn307 Torque Reference Filter Pn401 Notch Filter Pn409 Description Converts a stepwise speed reference to a constant acceleration or deceleration for the specified time interval. A 1st-order delay filter for the position reference input. Features A constant acceleration/deceleration is achieved for smoother operation. The operation time is increased for the specified time. Enables smooth operation. The reference time increases by the filter delay time even after the reference input has been completed. Enables smooth operation. The reference time increases by the filter delay time even after the reference input has been completed. The feedback speed is smoother. The response is delayed if a large value is set. Valid Control Modes Speed Reference Section 8.5.4
Position
8.6.4
A movement averaging filter for the position reference input. A standard 1st-order delay filter for the speed feedback.
Position
8.6.4
Position Speed Speed Position Speed Torque Position Speed Torque
9.4.7
The speed reference is smoother. A 1st-order delay filter for the speed referThe response is delayed if a large value is ence. set. These filters are effective in essentially A series of three filter time constants, 1stall frequency bands. order, 2nd-order, and 1st-order, can be set The response is delayed if a large value in order for the torque reference. (low frequency) is set. Mainly effective for vibration between Notch filters can be set for the torque ref- 500 and 2,000 Hz. erence. Instability will result if the setting is not correct.
8.5.5
9.4.10
9.4.10
9-4
9.2 Online Autotuning

9.2.1 Online Autotuning
Online autotuning calculates the load moment of inertia during operation of the SERVOPACK and sets parameters so that the servo gains consistent with the Machine Rigidity (Fn001) are achieved. Online autotuning may not be effective in the following cases. The load moment of inertia varies in less than 200 ms. The motor speed is lower than 100 min-1 or the acceleration reference is very even. Load rigidity is low and mechanical vibration occurs easily or friction is high. The speed reference is a stepwise reference. If the condition meets one of the above cases or the desired operation cannot be achieved by the online autotuning, calculate the load moment of inertia on the basis of the machine specifications or using the moment of inertia detection function of Yaskawas servodrive supporting tool SigmaWin200. Set the value in Pn103 and perform the adjustment manually. The following utility function is also available for the online autotuning. Fn007: Writes the load moment of inertia calculated by the online autotuning in Pn103 and uses as the default value for the next calculation.
9-5
9 Adjustments 9.2.2 Online Autotuning Procedure
9.2.2 Online Autotuning Procedure
WARNING
Do not perform extreme adjustment or setting changes causing unstable servo operation. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury and damages to the machine. Adjust the gains slowly while confirming motor operation.
Start Operate with factory setting. (Set Pn110.0 = 0.) Yes
Operation OK? No No Load moment of inertia varies? Yes
Continuous online autotuning. (Set Pn110.0 = 1.)
Operation OK? No
Yes
Ajust the machine rigidity setting. (Set at Fn001.) Yes
Operation OK? No
Adjust the friction compensation. (Set Pn110.2.) Yes
Operation OK?
No Do not perform online autotuning. (Set Pn110.0 = 2.)
Write the result of autotuning in the parameter. The result will be used as the default vaue for next autotuning. (Utility function Fn007)
End
9-6
9.2.3 Selecting the Online Autotuning Execution Method

There are three methods that can be used for online autotuning: At start of operation, constantly, and none. The selection method is described next.
Online Autotuning Switches Pn110 Setting Range Setting Unit
Speed Position
Factory Setting Setting Validation 0010 After restart Parameter Meaning n.0 Online autotuning is performed only after the first time power is turned ON. (Factory Setting) Pn110 n.1 Online autotuning (moment of inertia calculations) is performed continuously. n.2 Online autotuning is not performed. The factory setting is n.0. This setting is recommended for applications in which the load moment of inertia does not change much or if the load moment of inertia is not known. The inertia calculated at the beginning of operation is used continously. In this case, differences in machine status and operation references at the beginning of operation may cause minor differences in the calculation results of the load moment of inertia, causing differences in the servo responsiveness each time the power supply is turned ON. If this occurs, overwrite the moment of inertia ratio in Pn103 using the utility function Fn007 (Writing to EEPROM moment of inertia ratio data obtained from online autotuning), and set Pn110 to n.2 to disable online autotuning. The setting n.1 is used when the load moment of inertia varies constantly. This setting enables a consistent responsiveness even when the load moment of inertia changes. If the load moment of inertia changes in less than 200 ms, however, the autotuning accuracy will deteriorate, in which case Pn110.0 should be set to 0 or 2. The setting n.2 is used when online autotuning is not possible, when the load moment of inertia is known and the moment of inertia ratio is set in Pn103 to perform the adjustment manually, or any other time the online autotuning function is not going to be used.
9-7
9 Adjustments 9.2.4 Machine Rigidity Setting for Online Autotuning
9.2.4 Machine Rigidity Setting for Online Autotuning

There are ten machine rigidity settings for online autotuning. When the machine rigidity setting is selected, the servo gains (Speed Loop Gain, Speed Loop Integral Time Constant, Position Loop Gain, and Torque Reference Filter Time Constant) are determined automatically. The factory setting for the machine rigidity setting is 4. The speed loop is suitable for PI or I-P control. When parameter Pn10B.1 is 0, PI control will be used and when Pn10B.1 is 1, I-P control will be used. To validate the setting, however, the power supply must be turned OFF and then back ON. After having validated the setting, always set the machine rigidity setting. When setting the machine rigidity after having changed the position loop gain (Pn102), the value closest to the set position loop gain is displayed as the initial value of machine rigidity.
Speed Loop PI Control

Machine Rigidity Setting Fn001 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Position Loop Gain [s-1] Pn102 15 20 30 40 60 85 120 160 200 250 Speed Loop Gain [Hz] Pn100 15 20 30 40 60 85 120 160 200 250 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant [0.01 ms] Pn101 6000 4500 3000 2000 1500 1000 800 600 500 400 Torque Reference Filter Time Constant [0.01 ms] Pn401 250 200 130 100 70 50 30 20 15 10
If the machine rigidity setting is greater, the servo gain will increase and positioning time will decrease. If the setting is too large, however, vibration may result depending on the machine configuration. Set the machine rigidity starting at a low value and increasing it within the range where vibration does not occur.
9-8
9.2.5 Method for Changing the Machine Rigidity Setting

The machine rigidity setting is changed in utility function mode using parameter Fn001. The procedure is given below.
Step Display after Operation 1 Digital Operator
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the Up or Down Cursor Key to select Fn001. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER or DATA/SHIFT Key for one second or more. The display shown at the left will appear and the rigidity for online autotuning can be set.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT)
(More than 1 s.)
UP
DOWN
Press the Up or Down Cursor Key to select the machine rigidity setting.
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The rigidity setting will be changed and donE will blink on the display for about one second. After donE is displayed, the setting will be displayed again. Press the DATA/ENTER or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to return to the Fn001 display of the utility function mode.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT)
(More than 1 s.)
This completes changing the machine rigidity setting for online autotuning.
9-9
9 Adjustments 9.2.6 Saving the Results of Online Autotuning
9.2.6 Saving the Results of Online Autotuning
CAUTION
Always set the correct moment of inertia ratio when online autotuning is not used. If the moment of inertia ratio is set incorrectly, vibration may occur.
For online autotuning, the most recent load moment of inertia is calculated and the control parameters are adjusted to achieve response suitable for the machine rigidity setting. When online autotuning is performed, the Position Loop Gain (Pn102), Speed Loop Gain (Pn100), and Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn101) are saved. When the power supply to the SERVOPACK is turned OFF, however, the calculated load moment of inertia is lost and the factory setting is used as the default value to start autotuning the next time the power supply is turned ON. To use the calculated load moment of inertia as the default value the next time the power supply is turned ON, the utility function mode parameter Fn007 (Writing to EEPROM moment of inertia ratio data obtained from online autotuning) can be used to save the most recent value in parameter Pn103 (Moment of Inertia Ratio). The moment of inertia ratio is given as the moment of inertia ratio (%) of the rotor moment of inertia of the servomotor.
Moment of Inertia Ratio Pn103 Setting Range 0 to 10,000 (0 to 20,000) * Setting Unit 1%
Factory Setting 0
Moment of inertia ratio =
Motor axis conversion load moment of inertia (J L ) Roter moment of inertia (JM)
The factory setting for the moment of inertia ratio is 0% (no-load operation of motor without connecting a machine). * Used when the software version number is later than 32.
9-10
9.2.7 Procedure for Saving the Results of Online Autotuning

The following procedure is used to save the results of online autotuning.
Step Display after Operation 1 Digital Operator
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key to select the utility function mode. Press the Up or Down Cursor Key to select parameter Fn007. *The digit that can be set will blink. Press the DATA/ENTER or DATA/SHIFT Key for one second or more. The display at the left will appear for a moment of inertia ratio of 200%. Press the DSPL/SET or MODE/SET Key. The moment of inertia ratio will be saved. When completed, donE will blink for about one second. After donE is displayed, the moment of inertia ratio will be displayed again. Press the DATA/ENTER or DATA/SHIFT Key for one second or more to return to the Fn007 display of the utility function mode.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT)
(More than 1 s.)
DSPL
SET
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT)
(More than 1 s.)
This completes saving the default value for the moment of inertia ratio for online autotuning. The next time the power supply is turned ON, the value that was saved for the Moment of Inertia Ratio (Pn103) will be used to start online autotuning.
9-11
9 Adjustments 9.3.1 Explanation of Servo Gain
9.3 Manual Tuning

9.3.1 Explanation of Servo Gain
The block diagram for position control is as follows:
Position control loop
Speed Move Speed pattern reference
Speed control loop

+ Speed Kv - control section Ti Tf + Current - control
section
+ -
Error counter
Time
Speed reference Position loop Kp gain
Servomotor
Electric power converting
Speed loop Position loop SERVOPACK Host controller (provided by user)
Current loop
PG Encoder
Kp Position Loop Gain (Pn102 Kv Speed Loop Gain Pn100 Ti Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Pn101) Tf Torque Reference Filter Time Constant (Pn401)
To adjust the servo gain manually, understand the configuration and characteristics of the SERVOPACK and adjust the servo gain parameters one by one. If one parameter is changed, it is almost always necessary to adjust the other parameters. It will also be necessary to make preparations such as setting up a measuring instrument to monitor the output waveform from the analog monitor. The SERVOPACK has three feedback loops (i.e., position loop, speed loop, and current loop). The innermost loop must have the highest response and the middle loop must have higher response than the outermost. If this principle is not followed, it will result in vibration or responsiveness decreases. The SERVOPACK is designed to ensure that the current loop has good response performance. The user need to adjust only position loop gain and speed loop gain.
9-12
9.3 Manual Tuning
9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning

The SERVOPACK has the following parameters for the servo gains. Setting the servo gains in the parameters can adjust the servo responsiveness. Pn100: Speed loop gain (Kv) Pn101: Speed loop integral time constant (Ti) Pn102: Position loop gain (Kp) Pn401: Torque reference filter time constant (Tf)
For the position and speed control, the adjustment in the following procedure can increase the responsiveness. The positioning time in position control can be reduced.
Step 1 2 3 4 5 Explanation Set correctly the moment of inertia ratio (Pn103). The utility function Fn007 can be used after the online autotuning. Increase the speed loop gain (Pn100) to within the range so that the machine does not vibrate. At the same time, decrease the speed loop integral time constant (Pn101). Adjust the torque reference filter time constant (Pn401) so that no vibration occurs. Repeat the steps 1 and 2. Then reduce the value for 10 to 20%. For the position control, increase the position loop gain (Pn102) to within the range so that the machine does not vibrate.
Perform the manual tuning in the following cases. To increase the servo gains more than the values set by the online autotuning. To determine the servo gains and moment of inertia ratio by the user. Start the manual tuning from the factory setting or the values set by the online autotuning. Prepare measuring instruments such as memory recorder so that the signals can be observed from the analog monitor (CN5) such as Torque Reference and Motor Speed, and Position Error Monitor for the position control. (Refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor.) The servodrive supporting tool SigmaWin100/200 allows you to observe such signals. Prepare either of them.
9.3.3 Position Loop Gain

Position Loop Gain (Kp) Pn102
Position
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 1 to 2,000 1/s 40 Immediately The responsiveness of the position loop is determined by the position loop gain. The responsiveness increases and the positioning time decreases when the position loop gain is set to a higher value. In general, the position loop gain cannot be set higher than natural vibrating frequency of the mechanical system, so the mechanical system must be made more rigid to increase its natural vibrating frequency and allow the position loop gain to be set to a high value. If the position loop gain (Pn102) cannot be set high in the mechanical system, an overflow alarm may occur during high speed operation. In this case, increase the values in the following parameter to suppress detection of the overflow alarm. Overflow Level
Position
INFO
Pn505
Setting Range Setting Unit 1 to 32,767 256 reference units This parameters new setting must satisfy the following condition.
Factory Setting 1,024
Max. feed speed (reference units/s) 2.0 Pn505 Pn102
9-13
9 Adjustments 9.3.4 Speed Loop Gain
9.3.4 Speed Loop Gain

Speed Loop Gain (Kv) Pn100
Speed Position
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 1 to 2,000 1 Hz 40 Immediately This parameter determines the responsiveness of the speed loop. If the speed loops responsiveness is too low, it will delay the outer position loop and cause overshooting and vibration of the speed reference. The SERVOPACK will be most stable and responsive when the speed loop gain is set as high as possible within the range that does not cause vibration in the mechanical system. The value of speed loop gain is the same as the set value of Pn100 if the moment of inertia ratio in Pn103 has been set correctly.
Moment of Inertia Ratio Pn103 Setting Range 0 to 10,000 (0 to 20,000) * Setting Unit 1%
Speed
Position
Torque
Factory Setting 0 100(%)
Pn103setvalue=
Motor axis conversion load moment of inertia (JL) Servomotor rotor moment of inertia (JM)
The factory setting is Pn103=0. Before adjusting the servo, determine the moment of inertia ratio with the equation above and set parameter Pn103. * Used when the software version number is later than 32.
9.3.5 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant

Speed Loop Integral Time Constant (Ti) Pn101
Speed Position
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 15 to 51,200 2,000 0.01 ms Immediately (0.15 to 512.00 ms) (20.00 ms) The speed loop has an integral element so that the speed loop can respond to minute inputs. This integral element causes a delay in the SERVOPACK. If the time constant is set too long, overshooting will occur, which results in a longer positioning settling time or responsiveness decreases. The estimated set value for Pn101 depends on the speed loop control method with Pn10B.1, as shown below.
INFO
Selecting the Speed Loop Control Method (PI Control or I-P Control) Generally, I-P control is more effective in high-speed positioning or high-speed/precision manufacturing applications. The position loop gain is lower than it would be in PI control, so shorter positioning times and smaller arc radii can be achieved. On the other hand, PI control is generally used when switching to P control fairly often with a mode switch or other method.
9-14
9.4 Servo Gain Adjustment Functions

9.4.1 Feed-forward Reference
Feed-forward Pn109 Setting Range 0 to 100 Setting Unit 1% Factory Setting 0
Position

Position
Feed-forward Filter Time Constant Pn10A Setting Range 0 to 6,400 (0.00 to 64.00 ms) Setting Unit 0.01ms Factory Setting 0 (0.00 ms)
Differential

Pn109
Position loop gain Kp
Applies feed-forward compensation in position control inside the SERVOPACK. Use this parameter to shorten positioning time. Too high value may cause the machine to vibrate. For ordinary machines, set 80% or less in this parameter.
Pn10A + +
Position reference pulse
Encoder feedback pulse
9-15
9 Adjustments 9.4.2 Torque Feed-forward
9.4.2 Torque Feed-forward

Parameter Meaning Disabled Uses T-REF terminal for torque feed-forward input.
Pn002
n.0 n.2
Torque Reference Input Gain
Speed
Position
Torque
Pn400
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 10 to 100 30 (1.0 to 10.0V/Rated 0.1V/Rated torque Immediately (3 V/Rated torque) torque) The torque feed-forward function is valid only in speed control (analog reference). The torque feed-forward function shortens positioning time, differentiates a speed reference at the host controller to generate a torque feed-forward reference, and inputs the torque feed-forward reference together with the speed reference to the SERVOPACK. Too high a torque feed-forward value will result in overshooting or undershooting. To prevent such troubles, set the optimum value while observing the system responsiveness. Connect a speed reference signal line to V-REF (CN1-5 and -6) and a torque forward-feed reference to T-REF (CN1-9 and -10) from the host controller.
Host controller SERVOPACK T-REF (CN1-9) V-REF (CN1-5) + Pn300
+
Position reference
Differential Kp
KFF
Pn400 Pn100 + Integration (Pn101) Speed calculation Divider + + + Current loop
Servomotor
PG Encoder
Kp: Position loop gain KFF: Feed-forward gain
Torque feed-forward is set using the parameter Pn400. The factory setting is Pn400 = 30. If, for example, the torque feed-forward value is 3V, then, the torque is limited to
100% of the rated torque.

The torque feed-forward function cannot be used with torque limiting by analog voltage reference described in 8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference.
9-16
9.4.3 Speed Feed-forward

Parameter Meaning Disabled Uses V-REF terminal for speed feed-forward input.
Pn207
n.0 n.1
Speed
Position
Torque
Pn300
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 150 to 3,000 0.01 V/Rated 600 (1.50 to 30.00 V/Rated Immediately speed (6 V/Rated speed) speed) The speed feed-forward function uses analog voltages and is valid only in position control. The speed feed-forward function is used to shorten positioning time. The host controller differentiates the position reference to generate the feed-forward reference, and inputs the feed-forward reference together with the position reference to the SERVOPACK. Too high a speed feed-forward value will result in overshooting or undershooting. To prevent such troubles, set the optimum value while observing the system responsiveness. Connect a position reference signal line to PULS and SIGN (CN1-7, -8, -11, and -12) and a speed feed-forward reference signal line to V-REF (CN1-5 and -6) from the host controller.
Host controller Differential Position reference KFF SERVOPACK V-REF (CN1-5 and -6) Pn300 + Kp ( Pn102) PULS SIGN Servomotor Pn100 Integration (Pn101) Speed calculation + + Current loop M
+ -
PG Encoder
Kp: Position loop gain KFF: Feed-forward gain

Speed feed-forward value is set using the parameter Pn300. The factory setting is Pn300 = 600. If, for example, the speed feed-forward value is 6V, then the speed is limited to the rated speed.
9-17
9 Adjustments 9.4.4 Proportional Control Operation (Proportional Operation Reference)
9.4.4 Proportional Control Operation (Proportional Operation Reference)

If parameter Pn000.1 is set to 0 or 1 as shown below, the /P-CON input signal serves as switch to change between PI control and P control. PI control: Proportional/Integral control P control: Proportional control
Parameter Control Mode Speed Control Effective in speed control or position control. Input signal /P-CON (CN1-41) is used to select PI control or P control. CN1-41 is OFF PI control (H level). CN1-41 is ON (L level). P control
SERVOPACK CN1
n.0
Pn000
n.1
Position Control
P/PI Switching
/P-CON
41
When sending references from the host controller to the SERVOPACK, P control mode can be selected from the host controller for particular operating conditions. This mode switching method can be used to suppress overshooting and shorten the settling time. Refer to 9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching) for more details on inputting the /PCON signal and switching the control mode for particular operating conditions. If PI control mode is being used and the speed reference has a reference offset, the servomotor may rotate very slowly and fail to stop even if 0 is specified as the speed reference. In this case, use P control mode to stop the servomotor.
9-18
9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching)

Use the mode switch (P/PI switching) function in the following cases: To suppress overshooting during acceleration or deceleration (for speed control) To suppress undershooting during positioning and reduce the settling time (for position control)
Speed Overshoot Actual motor operation Reference
Time Undershoot
Settling time
The mode switch function automatically switches the speed control mode from PI control mode to P control1 mode based on a comparison between the servos internal value and a user-set detection level.
IMPORTANT
1. The mode switch function is used in very high-speed positioning when it is necessary to use the servodrive near the limits of its capabilities. The speed response waveform must be observed to adjust the mode switch. 2. For normal use, the speed loop gain and position loop gain set by autotuning provide sufficient speed/ position control. Even if overshooting or undershooting occur, they can be suppressed by setting the host controllers acceleration/deceleration time constant, the SERVOPACKs Soft Start Acceleration/ Deceleration Time (Pn305, Pn306), or Position Reference Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant (Pn204).
(1) Selecting the Mode Switch Setting

The SERVOPACK provides the following four mode switch settings (0 to 3). Select the appropriate mode switch setting with parameter Pn10B.0.
Parameter Containing Detection Point Setting Pn10C Pn10D Pn10E Pn10F
Parameter
Mode Switch Selection Use a torque reference level for detection point. (Factory Setting) Use a speed reference level for detection point. Use an acceleration level for detection point. Use a position error pulse for detection point. Do not use the mode switch function.
Setting Unit
n. 0 n. 1 n. 2 n. 3 n. 4
Percentage to the rated torque Servomotor speed: min-1 Servomotor acceleration: 10 min-1/s Reference unit
Pn10B
Select a condition to execute the mode switch (P/PI switching). (Setting is validated immediately.)
From PI control to P control PI control means proportional/integral control and P control means proportional control. In short, switching from PI control to P control reduces effective servo gain, making the SERVOPACK more stable.
TERMS
9-19
9 Adjustments 9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching)
Using the Torque Reference Level to Switch Modes (Factory Setting) With this setting, the speed loop is switched to P control when the value of torque reference input exceeds the torque set in parameter Speed Reference speed Pn10C. The factory default setting for the torque reference detection point is 200% of the rated torque (Pn10C = 200).
Motor speed
+Pn10C Torque reference 0 -Pn10C
Torque reference
PI P PI control
P PI control
Operating Example If the mode switch function is not being used and the SERVOPACK is always operated with PI control, the speed of the motor may overshoot or undershoot due to torque saturation during acceleration or deceleration. The mode switch function suppresses torque saturation and eliminates the overshooting or undershooting of the motor speed.
Without Mode Switching

Overshoot Motor speed Undershoot Time
With Mode Switching

Motor speed Time
Using the Speed Reference Level to Switch Modes With this setting, the speed loop is switched to P control when the value of speed reference input exceeds the speed set in parameter Pn10D.
Speed Pn10D
Speed reference
Motor speed Time PI control
PI
P control
Operating Example In this example, the mode switch is used to reduce the settling time. It is necessary to increase the speed loop gain to reduce the settling time. Using the mode switch suppresses overshooting and undershooting when speed loop gain is increased.

Speed reference Motor speed Long settling time Increase speed loop gain. Motor speed
With Mode Switching
Overshoot Motor speed Motor speed

Settling time
Undershoot Time
9-20
Using the Acceleration Level to Switch Modes With this setting, the speed loop is switched to P control when the motors acceleration rate exceeds the acceleration rate set in paramSpeed Reference speed eter Pn10E.
Motor speed
+Pn10E Acceleration 0 -Pn10E PI P
Motor acceleration
PI control P PI control
Operating Example If the mode switch function is not being used and the SERVOPACK is always operated with PI control, the speed of the motor may overshoot or undershoot due to torque saturation during acceleration or deceleration. The mode switch function suppresses torque saturation and eliminates the overshooting or undershooting of the motor speed.

Overshoot Motor speed Undershoot Time
With Mode Switching

Motor speed Time
Using the Error Pulse Level to Switch Modes This setting is effective with position control only. Speed Reference With this setting, the speed loop is switched to P control when the error pulse exceeds the value set in parameter Pn10F.
Motor speed Time
Position error pulse
Pn10F
PI
P control
PI control
Operating Example In this example, the mode switch is used to reduce the settling time. It is necessary to increase the speed loop gain to reduce the settling time. Using the mode switch suppresses overshooting and undershooting when speed loop gain is increased.

Speed reference Motor speed Long settling time Increase speed loop gain. Motor speed
With Mode Switching
Overshoot Motor speed Motor speed

Settling time
Undershoot Time
9-21
9 Adjustments 9.4.6 Setting the Speed Bias
9.4.6 Setting the Speed Bias

The settling time for positioning can be reduced by setting the following parameters to add bias in the speed reference block in the SERVOPACK.
Bias Pn107 Setting Range 0 to 450 Bias Width Addition Pn108 Setting Range 0 to 250 Setting Unit 1 Reference units Factory Setting 7
Speed reference Position
Setting Unit 1 min-1
Factory Setting 0

Position
To reduce the positioning time, set these parameters based on the machines characteristics. The Bias Width Addition (Pn108) specifies when the Bias (Pn107) is added and the width is expressed in error pulse units. The bias input will be added when the error pulse value exceeds the width set in Pn108.
Bias set Bias width addition (Pn108) Bias (Pn107) Bias width addition (Pn108) Pn108 No bias Bias (Pn107) Error pulse
9.4.7 Speed Feedback Filter

Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant Pn308 Setting Range 0 to 65,535 (0.00 to 655.35 ms) Setting Unit 0.01 ms
Speed Position
Sets the 1st-order filter for the speed loops speed feedback. Makes the motor speed smoother and reduces vibration. If the set value is too high, it will introduce a delay in the loop and cause poor responsiveness.
9-22
9.4.8 Speed Feedback Compensation

The speed feedback compensation can be used to reduce vibration and allow a higher speed loop gain to be set. In the end, the speed feedback compensation allows the positioning settling time to be reduced because the position loop gain can also be increased if the speed loop gain can be increased.
Online Autotuning Switches Pn110 Setting Range Setting Unit
Speed Position
Speed Feedback Compensation Pn111 Setting Range 1 to 500 Parameter Pn110 Setting Unit 1%
Speed
Position
Factory Setting 100 Function
n.0 n.1
Speed feedback compensation is used. Speed feedback compensation is not used. (Standard speed feedback)
IMPORTANT
When this function is used, it is assumed that the moment of inertia ratio set in Pn103 is correct. Verify that the moment of inertia ratio has been set correctly.
Speed reference
Error counter output
Position loop gain (Pn102)
Speed loop PI control (Pn100,Pn101)
Torque reference filter time constant (Pn401)
Torque reference
Speed feedback
Speed feedback compensation selection (Pn110.1)
Speed feedback compensation (Pn111)
Speed feedback compensation function
9-23
9 Adjustments 9.4.8 Speed Feedback Compensation
(1) Adjustment Procedure

The following procedure explains how to adjust when the speed loop gain cannot be increased due to vibrations in the mechanical system. When adding a speed feedback compensation, observe the position error and torque reference with the analog monitor while adjusting the servo gain. Refer to 9.5 Analog Monitor on monitoring the position error and torque reference. 1. Set parameter Pn110 to 0002 so that the following conditions are satisfied. To use the speed feedback compensation Not to use the online autotuning function 2. With PI control, gradually increase the Speed Loop Gain in Pn100 and reduce the Speed Loop Integral Time Constant Pn101, so that the setting the Position Loop Gain in Pn102 to the same value as that of the Speed Loop Gain in Pn100. Use the result from the following equation as an initial estimate when setting the Speed Loop Integral Time Constant in Pn101.
Speed loop integral time constant (Pn101)

Speed loop gain units: Hz
4000 Pn100
Check the units when setting the Speed Loop Integral Time Constant in Pn101. The value in Pn101 is set in units of 0.01 ms. Set the same value for the speed loop gain and position loop gain even though the speed loop gain units (Hz) are different form the position loop gain units (1/s). 3. Repeat step 2 to increase the speed loop gain while monitoring the settling time with the analog monitors position error and checking whether vibration occurs in the torque reference. If there is any vibrating noise or noticeable vibration, gradually increase the Torque Reference Filter Time Constant in Pn401. 4. Gradually increase only the position loop gain. When it has been increased about as far as possible, then decrease the Speed Feedback Compensation in Pn111 from 100% to 90%. Then repeat steps 2 and 3. 5. Decrease the speed feedback compensation to a value lower than 90%. Then repeat steps 2 through 4 to shorten the settling time. If the speed feedback compensation is too low, however, the response waveform will oscillate. 6. Find the parameter settings that yield the shortest settling time without causing vibration or instability in the position error or torque reference waveform being observed with the analog monitor. 7. The servo gain adjustment procedure is complete when the positioning time cannot be reduced any more.
IMPORTANT
The speed feedback compensation usually makes it possible to increase the speed loop gain and position loop gain. Once the speed loop gain and position loop gain have been increased, the machine may vibrate significantly and may even be damaged if the compensation value is changed significantly or Pn110.1 is set to 1 (i.e., speed feedback compensation disabled).
9-24
9.4.9 Switching Gain Settings

Gain switching by the external signal is possible with the SGDM SERVOPACK. For example, to use different gains while the servomotor is running or stopped, set two values in the gain settings 1 and 2 and switch the gains by the external signal.
(1) Gain Switching Input Signal

Setting Meaning OFF: H (high) Gain settings 1 Signal allocation level /G-SEL Input required ON: L (low) level Gain settings 2 To use the input signal, the input terminal must be allocated in the parameter Pn50D. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation. Type Signal Connector Pin No.
(2) Switchable Gain Combinations

Turning ON and OFF the gain switching signal /G-SEL switches the gains as follows.
Gain Switching Signal (/G-SEL) Speed loop gain Speed loop integral time constant Position loop gain OFF (H Level) Pn100 Pn101 Pn102 ON (L Level) Pn104 Pn105 Pn106

Parameter Function Enables the input signal allocation for the sequence.
Pn50A
n.1
Set to allocate the gain switching signal (/G-SEL) to an input terminal. Speed Loop Gain
Speed Position
Pn100
Setting Range 1 to 2,000 Setting Range 15 to 51,200 (0.15 to 512.00 ms) Position Loop Gain Setting Range 1 to 2,000 2nd Speed Loop Gain Setting Range 1 to 2,000 Setting Range 15 to 51,200 (0.15 to 512.00 ms) 2nd Position Loop Gain Setting Range 1 to 2,000
Setting Unit 1 Hz Setting Unit 0.01 ms
Factory Setting 40
Speed

Position
Speed Loop Integral Time Constant
Pn101
Factory Setting 2,000 (20.00 ms) Factory Setting 40

Speed

Position
Pn102
Setting Unit 1/s Setting Unit 1 Hz Setting Unit 0.01 ms

Position
Pn104
Factory Setting 40
Speed

Position
2nd Speed Loop Integral Time Constant
Pn105
Factory Setting 2,000 (20.00 ms) Factory Setting 40

Position
Pn106
Setting Unit 1/s
9-25
9 Adjustments 9.4.10 Torque Reference Filter
9.4.10 Torque Reference Filter

As shown in the following diagram, the torque reference filter contains torque reference filter time constant (Pn401) and notch filter frequency (Pn409) arrayed in series. The notch filter can be enabled and disabled using the parameters.
Torque function switches Pn408
Torque reference before filtering
Torque reference filter time constant Pn401
Notch filter frequency Pn409
Torque reference after filtering
1st-order delay filter
Notch filter
(1) Torque Reference Filter

If you suspect that machine vibration is being caused by the servodrive, try adjusting the filter time constant. This may stop the vibration. The lower the value, the better the speed control response will be, but there is a lower limit that depends on the machine conditions.
Torque Reference Filter Time Constant Pn401 Setting Range 0 to 65,535 (0.00 to 655.35 ms) Setting Unit 0.01 ms
(2) Notch Filter

Using the notch filter in accordance with the components of specific vibration frequency such as resonances of ball screw can eliminate the frequency components to stop the vibration.
Parameter Meaning Disables the notch filter. Enables the notch filter.
Pn408
n.0 n.1
Enables the notch filter to be used. (The setting is validated immediately.) For 200-V class 5 kW to 15 kW servomotors, the factory setting is n.1.
Set the machines vibration frequency in the parameter of a notch filter to be used.
Notch Filter Frequency Pn409
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting 50 to 2,000 Hz 1 Hz 2,000 For 200-V class 5 kW to 15 kW servomotors, the factory setting is 1500 Hz.
9-26
IMPORTANT
1. Sufficient precautions must be taken when setting the notch frequency. Do not set the notch filter frequency (Pn409) that is close to the speed loops response frequency. Set the frequency at least four times higher than the speed loops response frequency. Setting the notch filter frequency too close to the response frequency may cause vibration and damage the machine. The speed loop response frequency is the value of the Speed Loop Gain (Pn100) when the Moment of Inertia Ratio (Pn103) is set to the correct value. 2. Change the Notch Filter Frequency (Pn409) only when the servomotor is stopped. Vibration may occur if the notch filter frequency is changed when the servomotor is rotating.
9-27
9 Adjustments
9.5 Analog Monitor

Signals for analog voltage references can be monitored. To monitor analog signals, connect the analog monitor cable (JZSP-CA01 or DE9404559) to the connector CN5. The analog monitor signals can be selected by setting parameters Pn003.0 and Pn003.1.
CN5
SERVOPARK 200V
SGDMVer.
YASKAWA
POWER
MODE/SET
DATA/
BATTERY
Cable Type: JZSP-CA01 or DE9404559
CN5
Black Black White Red For 6.0 to 15.0 kW SERVOPACK
For 30W to 5.0 kW SERVOPACK
Pin Number 1 2 3, 4
Line Color Red White Black (2 lines)
Signal Name Analog monitor 2 Analog monitor 1 GND (0 V)
Monitoring Item with Factory Setting Motor speed: 1 V/1000 min-1 Torque reference: 1 V/100% rated torque
9-28
9.5 Analog Monitor
Related Parameters
The following signals can be monitored.
Pn003: Function Selections

Parameter Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor Signal Motor speed Speed reference Internal torque reference Position error Position error Reference pulse frequency (converted to min-1) Motor speed 4 Motor speed 8 Function Observation Gain 1 V / 100 min-1 1 V / 100 min-1 1 V / 100% rated torque 0.05 V / 1 reference unit Remarks Factory setting for Monitor 2 Factory setting for Monitor 1
Pn003
n. 0 n. 1 n. 2 n. 3 n. 4 n. 5 n. 6 n. 7 n. 8 n. 9 n. A n. B n. C n. D n. E n. F
n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 n.4 n.5 n.6 n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B n.C n.D n.E n.F
0.05 V / 100 reference units 1 V / 1000 min-1 1 V / 25 min-1 1 V / 12.5 min-1
Reserved. Do not set.
* When using speed control or torque control, the position error monitor signal is not specified.
INFO
The analog monitor output voltage is 8 V (maximum). The output will be limited to 8 V even if this value is exceeded in the above calculations.
9-29
10
Upgraded Versions
10.1 Upgraded Versions for SGDM SERVOPACK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2 10.2 Upgraded Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.2.1 Additional Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3 10.2.2 Improved Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.3 Additional Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4

10.3.1 SGMCS Direct-drive Motor Supporting Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4 10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 10.3.3 Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Switching Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10 10.3.4 Second Stage Notch Filter and Changeable Q Value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12 10.3.5 Automatic Gain Switching Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.4 Improved Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16

10.4.1 Moment of Inertia Ratio Setting Range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16 10.4.2 Adaptation to Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16 10.4.3 Serial Number and Manufactured Data Reading Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-18
10.5 Additional and Improved Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19

10.5.1 Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.5.2 Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.5.3 Input Signal Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.5.4 Output Signal Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.5.5 Utility Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10.5.6 Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-21 10-21 10-22
10
10-1
10 Upgraded Versions
10.1 Upgraded Versions for SGDM SERVOPACK

This chapter describes the additional and improved functions in the upgraded software versions 32 or later for SGDM-DA SERVOPACKs.
Version Numbers
Check the 5-digit version number indicated on the front side of the SERVOPACK. The lower two digits indicate the software version number. The software version number later than 32 means the upgraded products.
Software version number
10-2
10.2 Upgraded Functions
10.2 Upgraded Functions

This section describes additional and improved functions of upgraded versions.
10.2.1 Additional Functions

Functions SGMCS direct-drive motor supporting function Description Reference Section 10.3.2 10.4.2 10.3.2
Applicable to direct-drive motors. (Servomotor Model: SGMCS-) The upper limit of dividing output 16384 [P/R] (equivalent to 16-bit) Enhanced dividing output resolution is increased to 262144 [P/R] (equivalent to 20-bit). Reference pulse input multiplication range switching The reference pulse multiplication can be selected from 1 to 99. Use this function if the reference pulse frequency cannot be increased from the host controller. The setting cannot be changed during operation. Second stage notch filter is added so that two notch filters, first stage and second stage notch filters, can be set for two resonance generating points. The setting of parameter Q value that determines the sharpness of notching can be changed to suppress the influence on the control loop and interaction between two notch filters. The switching between Gain Setting 1 and Gain Setting 2 is automatically carried out according to the conditions of position reference and position error.
10.3.3
Second stage notch filter Changeable Q value
10.3.4
Automatic gain switching
10.3.5
10.2.2 Improved Functions

Functions Moment of inertia ratio setting range Adaptation to single-turn data absolute encoders Serial number and manufactured data of SERVOPACK or servomotor reading function Description The setting range 0 to 10,000 % of moment of inertia ratio (Pn103) is extended to 0 to 20,000 %. Adapted to single-turn data absolute encoders mounted on directdrive motors The serial number and manufactured data of SERVOPACK can be read with the engineering tool SigmaWin+ (Ver1.00). Reference Section 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3
10
10-3
10 Upgraded Versions 10.3.1 SGMCS Direct-drive Motor Supporting Function
10.3 Additional Functions

10.3.1 SGMCS Direct-drive Motor Supporting Function
(1) Applicable Motors
This function is applicable to the following SGMCS servomotors.
Servomotor Type SGMCS-C SGMCS-D SGMCS-B SGMCS-E SGMCS-M SGMCS-N Note: For direct-drive motors, indicates the motor rated torque. For other motors, indicates the motor capacity.
The direct-drive motor model can be confirmed by the auxiliary function Fn011 Motor models display on the digital operator or the panel operator.
Voltage and Motor Model Display
Fn011-F.
Servomotor Voltage Code 00 01 02 Voltage 100 VAC or 140 VDC 200 VAC or 280 VDC Reserved Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 32 33 34 35 37 38 SGMAH SGMPH SGMSH SGMGH- A 1500 min-1 SGMGH- B 1000 min-1 SGMDH SGMCSSGMCSSGMCSSGMCSSGMCSSGMCSC D B E M N Servomotor Model Model
Note: 32 to 38 are direct-drive motors.
10-4
(2) Model Designation

1st + 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 2nd digits digits digits digits digits digits
SGMCS 02 B 3 A 1 1
SGMCS Direct-drive Servomotor 1st and 2nd digits: Rated Torque (N m) 3rd digits: Motor Outer Diameter (mm)
7th digits: Brake Specification Code

1
B C D E M N Code Specification (135) (175) (230) (290) (280) (360) 02 04 05 07 08 10 14 16 17 25 35 45 80 1A 1E 2Z 2.0 4.0 5.0 7.0 8.0 10.0 14.0 16.0 17.0 25.0 35.0 45.0 80.0 110.0 150.0 200.0
Specification Without Brake
6th digits: Flange Specification
Code
1
Specification
C face
5th digits: Design Revision Order
Code
A B
Specification
45 to 200N m 2 to 35N m
4th digits: Encoder Specifications
Code
3 D
Specification
20-bit absolute (without multiturn data)
Remarks Standard Option
20-bit incremental
Note: A single-turn data absolute encoder is mounted on SGMCS servomotors as standard. For the details of single-turn data absolute encoders, refer to 5.2 Adaptation to Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder.
(3) Ratings and Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors

Ratings and Specifications Servomotor Model SGMCSRated Output Rated Torque Instantaneous Peak Torque Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current Rated Speed Max. Speed Rotor Moment of Inertia Outside Diameter Length Mass Protective Construction Vibration Resistance Output Form Number of Pulses per Rotation W Nm N m A A min-1 min-1 kgm2104
02B 42 2.00 6.00 1.8 5.1
05B 105 5.00 15.0 1.8 5.1 200 500
07B 147 7.00 21.0 1.4 4.1
04C 84 4.00 12.0 2.1 6.0 500
10C 209 10.0 30.0 2.0 5.80 200 400 140.0 175
14C 293 14.0 42.0 2.0 5.9 300 220.0
25.0
51.0 135
77.0
77.0
Construction
mm mm kg m/s2 P/R
10
120 14.2
51 5.0
80 6.2
120 8.6 IP42 49
59 7.2
80 10.2
Encoder
Serial data transmission 1,048,576 (20-bit)
10-5
Ratings and Specifications
Servomotor Model SGMCSRated Output Rated Torque Instantaneous Peak Torque Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current Rated Speed Max. Speed Rotor Moment of Inertia Outside Diameter Length Mass Protective Construction Vibration Resistance Output Form Number of Pulses per Revolution
W N m Nm A A min-1 min kgm2

4 -1 -
08D 168 8.0 24.0 2.0 5.9 200 500 285.0
17D 356 17.0 51.0 2.3 6.6 400 510.0 230
25D 393 25.0 75.0 2.7 7.90 150 250 750
16E 335 16.0 48.0 3.3 9.4 200 500 930 290
35E 550 35.0 105.0 3.5 10.0 150 250 1430
10
Construction
mm mm kg m/s2 P/R
64 14.0
100 22.0
150 29.7 IP42 49
76 26.0
100 34.0
Encoder
Serial data transmission 1,048,576 (20-bit)
Servomotor Model SGMCSRatings and Specifications Rated Output Rated Torque Instantaneous Peak Torque Rated Current Instantaneous Max. Current Rated Speed Max. Speed Rotor Moment of Inertia Outside Diameter Length Mass Protective Construction Vibration Resistance Output Form Number of Pulses per Rotation W Nm N m A A min-1 min-1 kgm 10
4 2 -
45M 707 45 135 5.80 17
80M 1260 80 240 9.74 28 300
SGMCS- 1AM 80N 1730 110 330 13.4 42 150 1260 80 240 9.35 28
1EN 2360 150 450 17.4 56 250
2ZN 3140 200 600 18.9 56
388
627 280
865
1360
2470 360
3060
Construction
mm mm kg m/s2 P/R
157.5 38
207.5 45
257.5 51 IP44 24.5
167.5 50
217.5 68
267.5 86
Encoder
Serial data transmission 1,048,576(20-bit)
10-6
(4) Speed Related Parameters When a Direct-drive Motor is Connected

As the maximum speed of SGMCS servomotor is approximately 1/10 of standard SGMH servomotor, the unit of parameter setting is changed to 1/10 of the standard. When a SGMCS servomotor is connected, the SERVOPACK changes the setting unit automatically as shown in the following table. Besides the parameter, the speed setting for the auxiliary function Fn003 Zero-point search mode is fixed to 6 [min-1] when a direct-drive servomotor is connected. The following table shows speed related parameters when a direct-drive motor is connected.
Pn301 Internal Set Speed 1 Setting Unit Direct-drive motors or others with a maximum speed of 500 min-1 or less. 0.1 min-1 Setting Unit Direct-drive motors or others with a maximum speed of 500 min-1 or less. 0.1 min-1 Setting Unit Direct-drive motors or others with a maximum speed of 500 min-1 or less. 0.1 min-1 Setting Unit Direct-drive motors or others with a maximum speed of 500 min-1 or less. 0.1 min-1
Speed
Setting Range
All other motors 1 min-1
Factory Setting 100 min-1

Speed
Setting Validation
0 to 10000 min-1 Pn302 Internal Set Speed 2
Immediately
Setting Range

Speed
Setting Validation
0 to 10000 min-1 Pn303 Internal Set Speed 3
Immediately
Setting Range

Speed
Setting Validation
0 to 10000 min-1 Pn304 JOG Speed
Immediately
Position Torque
Setting Range
Setting Validation
0 to 10000 min-1
Immediately
10
10-7
Also, the analog monitor output units are changed as shown in the shaded areas in the following table.
Parameter Monitor 1 Pn003 n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 n.4 n.5 n.6 n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B n.C n.D n.E n.F Monitor 2 n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 n.4 n.5 n.6 n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B n.C n.D n.E n.F Monitor Signal Motor speed Speed reference Internal torque reference Position error Position error Reference pulse frequency (Converted to min-1) Motor speed 4 Motor speed 8 Description Measurement Gain 1 V / 100 min-1 1 V / 100 min-1 1 V / 100% Rated Torque 0.05 V / 1 Reference Units 0.05 V / 100 Reference Units 1 V / 100 min-1 1 V / 25 min-1 1 V / 12.5 min-1 Monitor 1: Factory setting Remarks Monitor 2: Factory setting
Reserved (Do not use.)
* When using speed control or torque control, the position error monitor signal is variable.
INFO
The maximum output voltage of the analog monitor is 8V. If the input voltage is outside of this range, it will be output as 8V.
10-8
10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution

The upper limit of PG dividing pulse (Pn201) is 16384 [P/R] that is decided for 16-bit encoder. However, directdrive servomotors are equipped with 20-bit encoder as standard. Therefore, the parameter Pn212 is added to adapt the dividing pulse setting for 20-bit encoder. For the PG dividing pulse setting, either the existing Pn210 or the newly added Pn212 can be used. Select Pn201 or Pn212 by the switch for parameters. The factory setting is Pn201. Dividing pulse is set in the resolution 16-bit or less, use Pn201. Dividing pulse is set in the resolution 17-bit or more, use Pn212. For the setting method of dividing ratio for 17-bit or more resolution, refer to (2) Setting PG dividing ratio of 5digit or more on the next page.

Pn207 Parameter n.0 n.1 Description Uses the parameter Pn201 (For 16-bit or less) as the dividing ratio (Factory setting). Uses the parameter Pn212 (For 17-bit or more) as the dividing ratio.
Pn201
PG Dividing Ratio (For 16-bit or less) Setting Range 16 to 16384 Setting Unit 1 P/rev

Speed

Position Torque
Pn212
PG Dividing Ratio (For 17-bit or more)
Setting Range Setting Unit Factory Setting Setting Validation 16 to 1073741824 1 P/rev 2048 After restart The setting range of Pn212 differs depending on the encoder used. The upper limit of dividing output frequency is 1.4 Mpps because of the restrictions on the hardware. Therefore, setting a high number of pulses limits the motor speed. The following table shows the setting conditions when Pn212 is used.
Encoder Resolution (Bits) 13 16 17 20 Number of Encoder Pulses per Revolution (P/R) 2048 16384 32768 262144 Setting Range (P/R) 16 to 2048 16 to 16384 16 to 32768 16 to 262144 Pn212 needs not be used.
For settings higher than 16384 P/R, pulses must be set in the following increments.
PG Dividing Ratio Setting (P/R) 16 to 16384 16386 to 32768 32772 to 65536 65544 to 131072 131088 to 262144 Increments (P/R) 1-pulse 2-pulse 4-pulse 8-pulse 16-pulse Motor Speed Upper Limit (min-1) No limit (up to the motor maximum speed) 82 106/Set value
10
The setting error alarm A.09 (dividing ratio setting error) will occur if the setting is outside the allowable range or does not satisfy the setting conditions. The overspeed alarm A.51 will occur if the motor speed exceeds the upper limit. When setting the pulse dividing ratio using a digital operator or panel operator, the display of the number of pulses increments as shown in the above table and the upper limit will not increment above the resolution of mounted encoder. When Pn212 is set without connecting a servomotor to the SERVOPACK, the upper limit is automatically set to 230 (=1073741824: the maximum output value of the SERVOPACK) since the encoder resolution of the servomotor is unknown. Therefore, it is recommended to set Pn212 after connecting a servomotor.
10-9
10 Upgraded Versions 10.3.3 Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Switching Function
(2) Setting PG dividing ratio of 5-digit or more

The following table shows a procedure to set Pn212 by a digital operator or a panel operator.
Procedure 1 Display After Operation Hand-held digital operator
DSPL SET
Panel Operator
Description Press DSPL/SET Key to select the utility function mode.
(DSPL/SET Key)
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
Select the parameter Pn212. Press Left or Right Cursor Key to select the digit. The enabled digit blinks. Press Up or Down Cursor Key to change the value. Press DATA/ENTER Key to display the lower 5 digits of the current PG dividing ratio setting value. Press Left or Right Cursor Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second to select the digit. The enable digit blinks. Press Up or Down Cursor Key to change the value. Pressing Left or Right Cursor Key or DATA SHIFT Key when the left-end or right-end digit is blinking displays another 5 digits.
(Blinks)
DATA/ (DATA/SHIFT Key) (Press at least one second.)
(Blinks)
Press Left or Right Cursor Key or DATA/SHIFT Key to select the digit. The enabled digit blinks. Press Up or Down Cursor Key to change the value. Pressing Left or Right Cursor Key or DATA/SHIFT Key when the left-end or right-end digit is blinking displays another 5 digits. Repeat the steps 4 and 5 to change the data.
DATA ENTER
(DATA/ENTER Key)
DATA/ENTER Key once, or DATA/SHIFT Key for more than one second. The display returns to Pn212.
INFO
When the password setting (write prohibited setting) is enabled, the setting can be read only by pressing Left or Right Cursor Key.
10.3.3 Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Switching Function

If the /PSEL signal for switching the multiplication of the position reference pulse input turns ON or OFF, the multiplication factor can be switched from 1 to n (n = 1 to 99). And the status of this signal indicates whether the position multiplication is switched to 1 or n. Set Pn218.0 = 1 to enable this function, and set the multiplication in Pn217. To change the reference pulse multiplication, the position reference pulse must be set to 0. Otherwise, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
10-10

Parameters Pn218 n.0 n.1 Description Reference pulse input multiplication switching function: Disabled (Factory setting) Reference pulse input multiplication switching function: Enabled
Position
Pn217
Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Setting Range 1 to 99 Setting Unit 1 Factory Setting 1
(2) Timing Chart for Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Switching

Enable Reference pulse input switching Disable (/PSEL) Enable Reference pulse input switcing Disable (/PSELA) 4ms or less Internal processing 4ms or less
Xn
(n=Pn217)
(3) Input Signal Selection

Signal Name /PSEL Connector Pin Number Signal allocation not required Setting Meaning
ON (low level) Enabled when the /PSEL signal turns ON. OFF (high level) Disabled when the /PSEL signal turns OFF. The /PSEL signal is the input signal that switches the multiplication factor of the reference pulse input to the value set in Pn217. This signal must be allocated in parameter Pn513.0 as shown in the following table. Refer to 7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation for more information on how to allocate input signals. After setting Pn217, turn OFF the power supplies for the main circuit and the control and then turn ON again.
Parameter Description Pn513 n.0 Inputs from the SI0 (CN1-40) input terminal. n.1 Inputs from the SI1 (CN1-41) input terminal. n.2 Inputs from the SI2 (CN1-42) input terminal. n.3 Inputs from the SI3 (CN1-43) input terminal. n.4 Inputs from the SI4 (CN1-44) input terminal. n.5 Inputs from the SI5 (CN1-45) input terminal. n.6 Inputs from the SI6 (CN1-46) input terminal. n.7 Sets the signal ON. n.8 Sets the signal OFF. (Factory setting) n.9 Inputs the reverse signal from the SI0 (CN1-40) input terminal. n.A Inputs the reverse signal from the SI1 (CN1-41) input terminal. n.B Inputs the reverse signal from the SI2 (CN1-42) input terminal. n.C Inputs the reverse signal from the SI3 (CN1-43) input terminal. n.D Inputs the reverse signal from the SI4 (CN1-44) input terminal. n.E Inputs the reverse signal from the SI5 (CN1-45) input terminal. n.F Inputs the reverse signal from the SI6 (CN1-46) input terminal. Note: After changing the setting, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the new setting.
10
10-11
10 Upgraded Versions 10.3.4 Second Stage Notch Filter and Changeable Q Value
(4) Output Signal Selection

The /PSELA signal is the output signal that indicates if switching for reference pulse input multiplication is enabled by /PSEL signal or not.
Signal Name /PSELA Connector Pin Number Signal allocation not required Setting ON (low level) OFF (high level) Meaning Enabled when the /PSEL signal turns ON. Disabled when the /PSEL signal turns OFF.
The /PSELA signal cant be used with the factory setting. Allocate the /PSELA output signal.
Parameter Meaning Pn510 n.0 Disabled n.1 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-25, 26 output terminal. n.2 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-27, 28 output terminal n.3 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-29, 30 output terminal. For the factory settings, the pins CN1-25 to CN1-30 are allocated for other output signals. If multiple signals are allocated to the same output terminal, signals are output with OR logic. To enable only the /PSELA output signal, allocate the other signals to other output terminals or disable the other signals. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for the allocation of output signals. Note: After changing the setting, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the new setting.
10.3.4 Second Stage Notch Filter and Changeable Q Value

The second stage notch filter is added. The Q value that determines the sharpness of notch was fixed to 0.7, but the Q value can be changed so that more flexible setting is possible. The performances of first stage notch filter and newly added second stage notch filter are identical. The filtering is executed in the following order.
Use First Stage Notch Filter. YES NO
First Stage Notch Filter
Use Second Stage Notch Filter YES
NO
Added function
Second Stage Notch Filter
Torque Reference Filter (Low-pass filter)
Torque Limit
End
10-12
(1) Notch Filter Function

The notch filter function decreases the response to the set frequency, and effective when there are machine vibrations. Adjusting the parameter setting according to the machine vibration frequency reduces the machine vibration.
Torque reference waveform
Torque reference waveform
Notch filtering (fc = 1/t)
(2) Torque Reference Filtering and Frequency Characteristics

The torque reference filtering and frequency characteristics are shown in the following diagrams.
Before torque reference filtering
s2 + c2 c2 s s2 + Q
(c = 2fc)
c2
After torque reference filtering
Torque reference Frequency fc Frequency Characteristics When Q is set to 0.7.
Torque reference
Frequency fc Frequency Characteristics When Q is set to 2.0.
Note: The frequency characteristics shown above indicate that no response of the speed proportional gain can be obtained if the difference between the speed proportional gain and the vibration frequency is too small. Setting smaller Q value decreases the response in wider zone around the set frequency. Setting bigger Q value decreases the response in the limited zone at about the set frequency.

(a) Switch
Pn408 Parameter n.0 n.1 n.0 n.1 Meaning First notch filter disabled Use first notch filter. Second notch filter disabled Use second notch filter.
10
10-13
10 Upgraded Versions 10.3.5 Automatic Gain Switching Function
Pn409
First Stage Notch Filter Frequency Setting Range 50 to 2000 Setting Unit 1 Hz Setting Unit
Speed
Position
Torque

Speed

Position Torque
Pn40A
First Stage Notch Filter Q Value Setting Range 50 to 400 (0.50 to 4.00)
Factory Setting 70 (0.70)

Speed

Position Torque
0.01
Pn40B
Second Stage Notch Filter Frequency Setting Range 50 to 2000 Setting Unit 1 Hz Setting Unit 2000
Factory Setting
Pn40C
Second Stage Notch Filter Q Value Setting Range 50 to 400 (0.50 to 4.00)
Speed
Position
Torque
0.01
Factory Setting 70 (0.70)
10.3.5 Automatic Gain Switching Function

The automatic gain switching function switches the gain setting between the gain setting 1 and 2 according to the condition: Whether position reference is specified or not, or Position error level, or AND logic of the above two conditions The position reference of the automatic gain switching condition indicates the reference pulses from CN1. Note that the automatic gain switching function is disabled for the control modes other than position control. And, the real-time autotuning function is disabled while gain setting 2 is selected.
Gain Switching Gain Setting 1 Pn100: Speed loop gain Pn101: Speed loop integral time constant Pn102: Position loop gain Gain Setting 2 Pn104: Speed loop gain #2 Pn105_Speed loop integral time constant #2 Pn106_Position loop gain #2
The existing gain switching function by /G-SEL signal is also available. However, it cannot be used with the automatic gain switching function. Note that automatic gain switching function is enabled only in position control mode. In the control modes other than position control, gain setting 1 is used. When the automatic gain switching is enabled by setting 1 to 3 of Pn10B.2, the gain switching function by /GSEL signal is disabled.
10-14
The following flowchart shows the automatic gain switching.

Automatic gain switching enabled? Disabled (Pn10B.2 = 0)
Enabled (Pn10B.2 = 1 to 3) Automatic gain switching condition Position reference (Pn10B.2 = 1)
Position error (Pn10B.2 = 2)
Position reference and position error (Pn10.B = 3)
With or without position reference Without Gain switching timer count-up
With Position error
Position error Pn125
Position reference and Position error
With position reference or Position error Pn125

Without position reference and Position error < Pn125
Position error < Pn125 Gain switching timer 0 clear Gain switching timer count-up Gain switching timer 0 clear Gain switching timer count-up
Gain switching timer 0 clear
Timer > Pn124
NO
YES
Gain Setting 2
Gain Setting 1
End

Pn10B Parameter n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 Meaning Automatic gain switching disabled (Factory setting) Switches the gain according to the position reference condition only. Switches the gain according to the position error condition only. Switches the gain according to the position reference and position error condition only.
Position
Pn124
Automatic Gain Switching Timer Setting Range 1 to 10000 Setting Unit 1 ms Setting Unit 1 Reference units Factory Setting 100 Factory Setting 7
Setting Validation immediately

Position
Pn125
Automatic Gain Switching Width Setting Range 1 to 250
10
Setting Validation immediately
10-15
10 Upgraded Versions 10.4.1 Moment of Inertia Ratio Setting Range
10.4 Improved Functions

10.4.1 Moment of Inertia Ratio Setting Range
A load with moment of inertia ratio (Pn103) more than the existing maximum value 10,000% may be connected to a direct-drive motor. Accordingly, the upper limit of Pn103 is increased to 20,000%.
Pn103 Moment of Inertia Ratio Setting Range 0 to 10000 (0 to 20000) * Setting Unit 1%
Factory Setting 0
* Used when the software version number is later than 32.
10.4.2 Adaptation to Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder

A single-turn data absolute encoder is mounted to SGMCS direct-drive servomotor as standard. The machine configuration with a SGMCS servomotor does not require harmonic gear, etc. so that the servomotor can be connected directly to a load. Therefore, for its absolute value detecting system, the load-end absolute value can be obtained by measuring only the angle of motor shaft. In this case, the encoder multi-turn data is not required and no backup battery is required. (With a single-turn data absolute encoder, the multi-turn data is always set to 0.)
Single-turn data absolute encoder model: UTSB-B
Confirm the single-turn absolute encoder model in Motor Models Display (Fn011) on the digital operator or panel operator:
Encoder Model/Encoder Resolution Display
Fn011-E.
Encoder Model Code 00 01 02 Model
Incremental encoder Multiturn data absolute encoder Single-turn data absolute encoder
Encoder Resolution Code Specification 13 16 17 20

13 bits 16 bits 17 bits 20 bits
10-16
10.4 Improved Functions
(1) Specifications of Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder Model UTSB-B

Item Battery for absolute encoder Absolute encoder multi-turn reset function (Setup and encoder alarm reset) Fn013: Multiturn limit setting change when a multiturn limit disagreement alarm (A.CC) occurs Pn205: Multi-turn limit setting Specifications Not required (Because no multiturn data needs to be stored.) Set to NO_OP and disabled Set to NO_OP and disabled Can be set, but the setting of Pn205 does not have any effect. The alarm A.CC does not occur when the setting is changed. And the multi-turn data is always 0 regardless of the Pn205 setting. Same as for the multi-turn absolute encoder Pn002.2=0: Use the absolute encoder as an absolute encoder Pn002.2=1: Use the absolute encoder as an incremental encoder The transmission format is the same as that of multi-turn absolute data However, the data section is always set to 0 as follow. P+00000 [CR] The transmission format is the same as that of multi-turn absolute data However, the data section is always set to 0 as follow. P+00000, nnnnnnn [CR] Note: n represents the absolute value within one rotation. The output pulse frequency is not changed. Therefore, the initial incremental pulse output time increases according to the number of bits of the mounted encoder. As the maximum resolution of the existing specification is 16 bits, the output time is 25 ms. With 20-bit encoder, the output time is 386 ms. The equation to obtain the output time by the number of bits of encoder is given below. The output time obtained by the equation is the minimum required time.
Pn002.2: Absolute encoder usage
PAO serial data
PSO serial data
Initial incremental pulse output time
T=
2n 17062.51000
T: Minimum time required to output initial incremental pulses n: Number of encoder bits
Ex.) 16-bit encoder: T = 20-bit encoder: T =
65536 = 24.094 25ms 17062.51000 1048576 = 385.506 386ms 17062.51000
10
10-17
10 Upgraded Versions 10.4.3 Serial Number and Manufactured Data Reading Function
10.4.3 Serial Number and Manufactured Data Reading Function

The serial number and manufactured data of SERVOPACK and servomotor can be read with the SERVOPACK engineering tool SigmaWin+.
10-18
10.5 Additional and Improved Parameters

This section describes the parameters added or improved in the upgraded version products.
10.5.1 Parameters
Category Function Selection Parameters Parameter No. Pn004 Pn103 Pn10B Gain Related Parameters Pn124 Pn125 Pn207 Pn212 Pn217 Pn218 Speed Related Parameters Name Reserved (Do not change.) Moment of Inertia Ratio Gain-related Application Switches *1 Automatic Gain Switching Timer Automatic Gain Switching Width Position Control Function Switches *1 PG Dividing Ratio (For 17-bit or more)
*1 and 2
Setting Range 0000 to 1110 0 to 20000 0000 to 2314 1 to 10000 1 to 250 0000 to 1111 16 to 1073741824 1 to 99 0000 to 0001
Setting Unit % ms Reference Unit pulse
Factory Setting 0000 0 0000 100 7 0000 2048 1 0000
Remarks The settings on 2nd and 3rd digits are added. Upper limit is modified. The setting on 2nd digit is added. Newly added Newly added The setting on 2nd digit is added. Newly added Newly added Newly added
Position Related Parameters
Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Reference Pulse Multiplication Range Switching Function *1 Reserved (Do not change.) Torque Function Switches First Stage Notch Filter Q Value Second Stage Notch Filter Frequency Second Stage Notch Filter Q Value Output Signal Selections 3 *1 Input Signal Selections 5 *1 Position Error Level Between Motor and Load
Pn309 Pn408
0 to 500 0000 to 0101 50 to 400 50 to 2000 50 to 400 0000 to 0333 0000 to 00FF 0 to 32767
min-1
60 0000 70 2000 70 0000 0088 0
Newly added The setting on 2nd digit is added. Newly added Newly added Newly added The setting on 2nd digit is added. Newly added Lower limit is modified from 1 to 0. Factory Setting is modified from 10 to 0. Newly added Newly added Newly added
Torque Related Parameters
Pn40A Pn40B Pn40C Pn510 Pn513 Pn51A
0.01
Hz
0.01
Reference Unit 256 Reference Unit min-1 %
Sequence Related Parameters
10
Pn51B Pn51C Pn51E
Reserved (Do not change.) Reserved (Do not change.) Excessive Position Error Warning Level
1 to 32767 0 to 10000 0 to 100
100 450 0
10-19
10 Upgraded Versions 10.5.2 Switches
* 1. After changing these parameters, turn OFF the control power supply and then turn it ON again to enable the new settings. * 2. The upper limit differs depending on the resolution (number of bits) of the encoder connected to SERVOPACK. Upper Limit: (2 numbers of encoder bits) / 4 When no encoder is connected, the value in the above list is the upper limit. For further information on the restrictions, refer to 10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution. Note: The specifications shown in shaded column are the modified items.
10.5.2 Switches
Parameter Pn10B n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 n.0 n.1 n.0 n.1 n.0 n.1 Meaning Automatic gain switching disabled (Factory setting) Switches the gain according to the position reference condition only. Switches the gain according to the position error condition only. Switches the gain according to the position reference and position error condition only. Uses the parameter Pn201 (For 16-bit or less) as the dividing ratio (Factory setting). Uses the parameter Pn212 (For 17-bit or more) as the dividing ratio. Reference pulse input multiplication switching function: Disabled (Factory setting) Reference pulse input multiplication switching function: Enabled Second notch filter disabled. Uses second notch filter.
Pn207 Pn218 Pn408
10.5.3 Input Signal Selection

Parameter Pn513 n.0 n.1 n.2 n.3 n.4 n.5 n.6 n.7 n.8 n.9 n.A n.B n.C n.D n.E n.F Meaning ON when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Sets signal ON. Sets signal OFF. (Factory setting) ON when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
* After changing the setting, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the new setting.
10-20
10.5.4 Output Signal Selection

Parameter Pn510 Meaning n.0 Disabled (The /PSELA signal is not used. n.1 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-25, CN1-26 output terminal. n.2 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-27, CN1-28 output terminal. n.3 Outputs the /PSELA signal from the CN1-29, CN1-30 output terminal. For the factory settings, the pins CN1-25 to CN1-30 are allocated for other output signals. If multiple signals are allocated to the same output terminal, signals are output with OR logic. To enable only the /PSELA output signal, allocate the other signals to other output terminals or disable the other signals. Refer to 7.3.3 Output Circuit Signal Allocation for the allocation of output signals.
Note: After changing the setting, turn OFF the power and ON again to enable the new setting.
10.5.5 Utility Functions

Parameter No. Contents of Display : No modification in voltage designation
: Servomotor models
Servomotor model is added. F. Fn011 32: SGMCS-C 33: SGMCS-D 34: SGMCS-B 35: SGMCS-E 36: SGMCS-L 37: SGMCS-M 38: SGMCS-N : Encoder models 00: Incremental 01: Multiturn data absolute 02: Single-turn data absolute
Encoder model is added. E.
: No modification in encoder resolution

designation
Note: Refer to 10.3.1 (1) Applicable Motors and 10.4.2 Adaptation to Single-turn Data Absolute Encoder for details.
10
10-21
10 Upgraded Versions 10.5.6 Troubleshooting
10.5.6 Troubleshooting
In this section, explain the alarms and warnings that have been added and also the alarms and warnings whose conditions for detection have been modified.
(1) Alarm Display Table

Alarm Display A.09 Alarm Reset Servo Alarm ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 (ALM Output) Alarm Code Output
Alarm Name Dividing Ratio Setting Error
Meaning The setting of dividing ratio (Pn212) is not acceptable (out of fixed increments), or exceeds the value for the connected, encoder resolution. When a linear motor is connected: A value higher than the allowable maximum dividing ratio calculated on the base of the linear motor maximum speed was set in Pn281. The mounted serial encoder is not supported by -II series SERVOPACK. The current sensor is faulty, or the servomotor is disconnected. The power is not supplied to the servomotor through the SERVOPACK received the Servo ON command.
N/A
N/A H N/A Available Available
H H H
A.0A A.b3 A.F5 A.F6
Encoder Model Unmatched Current Detection Error Servomotor Disconnection Alarm
(2) Warning Display

Warning Display A.90 Warning Name Excessive Position Error Warning Meaning The position errors exceed the setting in Pn51E. Warning Code Output ALO1 ALO2 ALO3
H
(3) Troubleshooting for Alarm and Warning Displays

(a) Alarm List
Alarm Display A.09 Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON.
Alarm Name Dividing Ratio Setting Error
Cause The setting of dividing ratio (Pn212) is not acceptable (out of fixed increments), or exceeds the value for the connected encoder resolution. The SERVOPACK EEPROM and the related circuit are faulty. The connected serial encoder is not supported by SGDM SERVOPACK. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
Corrective Actions Correct the setting of Pn212, and turn OFF the control power and turn it ON again.
Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor with SGDM SERVOPACK supported model. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.0A
Encoder Model Unmatched
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON.
10-22
(Contd) Alarm Display A.b3 Situation at Alarm Alarm Name Occurrence Current Occurred when the Detection control power supError ply was turned ON. Occurred when the servo was ON. Occurred during normal operation. A.F5 A.F6 Servomotor Disconnection Alarm The power is not supplied to the servomotor though the SERVOPACK received the Servo ON command. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the servo was ON. Cause The current sensor is faulty. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK.
The current sensor is faulty. The servomotor is disconnected. The current sensor is faulty. The servomotor was disconnected. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The Servomotor was disconnect.
Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring.
(b) Warning List

Warning Display A.90 Warning Name Excessive Position Error Warning: Warning for the alarm A.d0 (In servo ON status, the position error pulses exceed the excessive position error warning level set in the parameter Pn51E.) Situation at Warning Occurrence Occurred at the servomotor highspeed rotation. The servomotor did not run with position reference input. Normal movement, but occurred with a long distance reference input. Cause The contact in the servomotor U, V, and W wirings is faulty. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The contact in the servomotor U, V, and W wirings is faulty. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The SERVOPACK gain adjustment is improper. The position reference pulse frequency is too high. Corrective Actions Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Increase the speed loop gain (Pn100) and position loop gain (Pn102). Adjust slowly the position reference pulse frequency. Apply the smoothing function (Pn204 or Pn205). Correct the electronic gear ratio (Pn202, Pn203). Set the parameter Pn51E to proper value. Reconsider and correct the load and servomotor capacity.
10
Setting of the position error pulse over flow warning level (Pn51E) is incorrect. The servomotor specifications do not meet the load conditions such as torque and moment of inertia.
10-23
11
Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting
11.1 Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2

11.1.1 Alarm Display Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2 11.1.2 Warning Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5 11.1.3 Troubleshooting of Alarm and Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6 11.1.4 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-17
11.2 Inspection and Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21

11.2.1 Servomotor Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21 11.2.2 SERVOPACK Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21 11.2.3 SERVOPACKs Parts Replacement Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-22
11
11-1
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.1.1 Alarm Display Table
11.1 Troubleshooting
11.1.1 Alarm Display Table
The relation between alarm displays and alarm code outputs is shown in Table 11.1. If an alarm occurs, the servomotor can be stopped by doing either of the following operations. DB STOP: Stops the servomotor immediately using the dynamic brake. ZERO-SPEED STOP: Stops the servomotor by setting the speed reference to 0.
Table 11.1 Alarm Displays and Outputs
Alarm Code Output Alarm Display Alarm Name Meaning Alarm Reset N/A ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 Servo Alarm (ALM) Output
A.02 A.03 A.04 A.05
Parameter Breakdown Main Circuit Encoder Error (Not detected for the SERVOPACKs with the capacity of 6.0 kW or more.) Parameter Setting Error Combination Error
EEPROM data of SERVOPACK is abnormal. Detection data for power circuit is abnormal. The parameter setting is outside the allowable setting range. SERVOPACK and servomotor capacities do not match each other. The setting of dividing ratio (Pn212) is not acceptable (out of fixed increments), or exceeds the value for the connected, encoder resolution. When a linear motor is connected: A value higher than the allowable maximum dividing ratio calculated on the base of the linear motor maximum speed was set in Pn281. The mounted serial encoder is not supported by -II series SERVOPACK. An overcurrent flowed through the IGBT. Heat sink of SERVOPACK was overheated. Regenerative transistor or regenerative resistor is faulty. Regenerative energy exceeds regenerative resistor capacity. The power supply to the main circuit does not match the parameter Pn001 setting. Main circuit DC voltage is excessively high. Main circuit DC voltage is excessively low. The motor speed is excessively high.
Available
N/A Available
H
N/A
A.09
Dividing Ratio Setting Error *1
N/A
A.0A A.10 A.30 A.32 A.33 A.40 A.41 A.51
Encoder Model Unmatched *1
N/A
Overcurrent or Heat Sink Overheated
N/A
Regeneration Error Detected Regenerative Overload Main Circuit Power Supply Wiring Error Overvoltage *2 Undervoltage *2 Overspeed
Available Available
Available
Available
H
Available Available
H H
L L
H H
11-2
Table 11.1 Alarm Displays and Outputs (Contd)

Alarm Code Output Alarm Display Alarm Name Meaning Alarm Reset ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 Servo Alarm (ALM) Output
A.71
Overload: High Load
A.72 A.73 A.74 A.7A A.81 A.82 A.83 A.84 A.85 A.86 A.b1 A.b2 A.b3 A.bF A.C1 A.C8 A.C9 A.CA A.Cb A.CC A.d0 A.F1
Overload: Low Load Dynamic Brake Overload (Not detected for the SERVOPACKs with the capacity of 30 W to 1.0 kW.) Overload of Surge Current Limit Resistor Heat Sink Overheated (Not detected for the SERVOPACKs with the capacity of 30 W to 1.0 kW.) Encoder Backup Error Encoder Checksum Error Absolute Encoder Battery Error Encoder Data Error Encoder Overspeed Encoder Overheated Reference Speed Input Read Error Reference Torque Input Read Error Current Detection Error *1 System Alarm Servo Overrun Detected Absolute Encoder Clear Error and Multiturn Limit Setting Error Encoder Communications Error Encoder Parameter Error Encoder Echoback Error Multiturn Limit Disagreement Position Error Pulse Overflow Power Line Open Phase
The motor was operating for several seconds to several tens of seconds under a torque largely exceeding ratings. The motor was operating continuously under a torque largely exceeding ratings. When the dynamic brake was applied, rotational energy exceeded the capacity of dynamic brake resistor. The main circuit power was frequently turned ON and OFF. The heat sink of SERVOPACK overheated. All the power supplies for the absolute encoder have failed and position data was cleared. The checksum results of encoder memory is abnormal. Backup battery voltage for the absolute encoder has dropped. Data in the encoder is abnormal. The encoder was rotating at high speed when the power was turned ON. The internal temperature of encoder is too high. The A/D converter for reference speed input is faulty. The A/D converter for reference torque input is faulty. The current sensor is faulty, or the servomotor is disconnected. A system error occurred in the SERVOPACK. The servomotor ran out of control. The multiturn for the absolute encoder was not properly cleared or set. Communications between SERVOPACK and encoder is not possible. Encoder parameters are faulty. Contents of communications with encoder is incorrect. Different multiturn limits have been set in the encoder and SERVOPACK. Position error pulse exceeded parameter (Pn505). One phase is not connected in the main power supply.
Available
Available
L
Available
Available
Available
N/A
N/A Available N/A N/A
H
N/A Available Available Available N/A Available N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Available Available
L H
L L
H H
H H
11
11-3
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.1.1 Alarm Display Table
Table 11.1 Alarm Displays and Outputs (Contd)

Alarm Code Output Alarm Display Alarm Name Meaning Alarm Reset ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 Servo Alarm (ALM) Output
A.F5 A.F6
Servomotor Disconnection Alarm *1
CPF00 Digital Operator CPF01 Transmission Error A.

Not an error
The power is not supplied to the servomotor through the SERVOPACK received the Servo ON command. Digital operator (JUSP-OP02A-2) fails to communicate with SERVOPACK (e.g., CPU error). Normal operation status
Available N/A N/A
Not decided H H H L
* 1. Occurred when only the software version number is later than 32. * 2. The alarm meaning differs depending on the SERVOPACK capacity. For the SERVOPACK with a capacity of 5.0 kW or lower: A.40: Overvoltage detection alarm A.41: Undervoltage detection alarm For the SERVOPACK with a capacity of 6.0 kW or higher: A.40: Alarm detecting excessively high/low voltage in the main circuit A.41: Not used
11-4
11.1.2 Warning Display

The relation between warning displays and warning code outputs is shown in table 11.2.
Table 11.2 Warning Displays and Outputs Warning Display Warning Name Excessive Position Error Warning * Overload Meaning The position errors exceed the setting in Pn51E. This warning occurs before the overload alarms (A.71 or A.72) occur. If the warning is ignored and operation continues, an overload alarm may occur. This warning occurs before the regenerative overload alarm (A.32) occurs. If the warning is ignored and operation continues, a regenerative overload alarm may occur. This warning occurs when the absolute encoder battery voltage is lowered. If the warning is ignored and operation continues, an overload alarm may occur. Warning Code Output ALO1 ALO2 ALO3 L L H H H H
A.90 A.91 A.92 A.93
Regenerative Overload Absolute Encoder Battery Voltage Lowered
* Occurred when only the software version number is later than 32. Note: Warning code is not output without setting Pn001 = n.1 (Outputs both Alarm Codes and Warning Codes.)
11
11-5
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.1.3 Troubleshooting of Alarm and Warning
11.1.3 Troubleshooting of Alarm and Warning

When an error occurs in servodrive, an alarm display such as A. and CPF or warning display such as A.9 appears on the panel operator. However, the display A.-- is not an alarm. Refer to the following sections to identify the cause of an alarm and the action to be taken. Contact your Yaskawa representative if the problem cannot be solved by the described corrective action.
(1) Alarm Display and Troubleshooting

Table 11.3 Alarm Display and Troubleshooting
Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Cause The control power supply ranged from 30 VAC to 60 VAC. Corrective Actions Correct the power supply, and set Fn005 to initialize the parameter. Set Fn005 to initialize the parameter and input the parameter again. Replace the SERVOPACK. (Recheck the parameter writing method.) Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.02
Parameter Breakdown (The EEPROM data storing the parameter is incorrect.)
The power supply was turned OFF while changing the parameter setting. The power supply was turned OFF while an alarm was being written. The number of times that parameters were written exceeded the limit. For example, the parameter was changed every scan through the host controller. The SERVOPACK EEPROM and the related circuit are faulty.
A.03
Main Circuit Encoder Error (Not detected for the SERVOPACK with the capacity of 6.0 kW or more) Parameter Setting Error (The parameter setting was out of the allowable setting range.) Combination Error (The SERVOPACK and servomotor capacities do not correspond.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON or during operation
The control power supply ranged from 30 VAC to 60 VAC. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
Correct the power supply. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.04
The incorrect parameter was being loaded. (The incorrect value was rejected as an error at the digital operator.) The SERVOPACK EEPROM and the related circuit are faulty. The SERVOPACK and servomotor capacities do not correspond to each other.
Set Fn005 to initialize the parameter.
Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.05
Servomotor capacity / SERVOPACK capacity 1/4
Select the proper combination of SERVOPACK and servomotor capacities.
or servomotor capacity / SERVOPACK capacity 4 The parameter that is written in the encoder is incorrect. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Replace the servomotor (encoder). Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the setting of Pn212, and turn OFF the control power and turn it ON again. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor with SGDM SERVOPACK supported model. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.09
Dividing Ratio Setting Error
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON.
The setting of dividing ratio (Pn212) is not acceptable (out of fixed increments), or exceeds the value for the connected encoder resolution. The SERVOPACK EEPROM and the related circuit are faulty. The connected serial encoder is not supported by SGDM SERVOPACK. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
A.0A
Encoder Model Unmatched
11-6
Table 11.3 Alarm Display and Troubleshooting (Contd)

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Cause The overload alarm has been reset by turning OFF the power too many times. The connection is faulty between the SERVOPACK board and the thermostat switch. The SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The connection between grounding and U, V, or W is incorrect. The grounding line has contact with other terminals. A short circuit occurred between the grounding and U, V, or W of the servomotor cable. A short circuit occurred between phases U, V, and W of the servomotor. The wiring of the regenerative resistor is incorrect. A short circuit occurred between the grounding and U, V, or W of the SERVOPACK. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON or when an overcurrent occurred while the servomotor was running. A SERVOPACK fault occurred (current feedback circuit, power transistor or board fault). A short circuit occurred between the grounding and U, V, W of the servomotor. A short circuit occurred between phases U, V, and W of the servomotor. The dynamic brake was activated too frequently, so a DB overload alarm occurred. The overload alarm has been reset by turning OFF the power too many times. The excessive change was given to the position/ speed reference. The overload or regenerative power exceeds the regenerative resistors capacity. The direction or the distance of the SERVOPACK to other devices is incorrect. Heat radiation of the panel or heat around the panel occurred. A SERVOPACK fan fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. An external regenerative resistor is not connected for a servomotor of 6.0 kW or more. Pn600 is set to a value other than 0 for a servomotor of 400 W or less, and an external regenerative resistor is not connected. Check for incorrect wiring or a disconnected wire in the regenerative resistor. A SERVOPACK fault occurred, such as regenerative transistor or a voltage sensor fault. The jumper between B2 and B3 is removed for a servomotor of 500 W or more, and 5.0 kW or less. Check for incorrect wiring and disconnection of the regenerative resistor. Occurred during normal operation. The regenerative resistor is disconnected, so the regenerative energy became excessive. A SERVOPACK fault, such as regenerative transistor and voltage sensor fault, occurred. Repair or replace the servomotor main circuit cable. Check and then correct the wiring. Check and then correct the wiring. Corrective Actions Change the method to reset the alarm.
A.10
Overcurrent (An overcurrent flowed through the IGBT) or Heat Sink Overheated
Replace the servomotor.
Replace the SERVOPACK, and reduce the DB operation frequency. Change the method to reset the alarm. Recheck the reference value. Reconsider the load and operation conditions. The ambient temperature for the SERVOPACK must be 55C or less. Replace the SERVOPACK.
Replace the SERVOPACK. Connect an external regenerative resistor. Connect an external regenerative resistor, or set Pn600 to 0 if an external regenerative resistor is not connected. Correct the wiring for the external regenerative resistor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the wiring. Correct the wiring for the external regenerative resistor. Replace the regenerative resistor or replace the SERVOPACK. Reconsider the load and operation conditions. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.30
Regeneration Error Detected (Detected when the power to the main circuit was turned ON.)
Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON.
11
11-7

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON. Occurred during normal operation (large increase of regenerative resistor temperature). Occurred during normal operation (small increase of regenerative resistor temperature). Occurred at servomotor deceleration. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK.
The power supply voltage is 270 V or more. The regenerative energy is excessive. The regenerating state continued. The setting of parameter Pn600 is smaller than the external regenerative resistors capacity. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The regenerative energy is excessive. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. In the DC power input mode, AC power is supplied through L1 and L2 or L1, L2, and L3. In the AC power input mode, DC power is supplied through 1 and terminals. Pn600 is set to 0 if the regenerative resistance is disconnected. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The AC power voltage is too high. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Check the AC power voltage (check if there is no excessive voltage change.)
Correct the input voltage.
A.32
Regenerative Overload (Detected when the power to the main circuit is turned ON.)
Select a proper regenerative resistance capacity, or reconsider the load and operation conditions.
Correct the set value of parameter Pn600. Replace the SERVOPACK. Select a proper regenerative resistance capacity, or reconsider the load and operation conditions. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.33
Main Circuit Wiring Error (Detected when the power to the main circuit is turned ON.)
For AC power input, Pn001.2=0. For DC power input, Pn001.2=1.
Set Pn600 to 0. Replace the SERVOPACK. The AC power voltage must be within the specified range. Replace the SERVOPACK. The AC power voltage must be within the specified range. Check the load moment of inertia and minus load specifications. Reconsider the load and operation conditions. Replace the SERVOPACK. Reconsider the load and operation conditions.
A.40
Overvoltage1 (Detected when the SERVOPACKs main circuit DC voltage is 420 V or more.) (Detected when the power to the main circuit is turned ON.)
Occurred during normal operation.
The motor speed is high and load moment of inertia is excessive, resulting in insufficient regenerative capacity. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The motor speed is high, and the load moment of inertia is excessive.
Occurred at servomotor deceleration.
11-8

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The AC power supply voltage is low. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON. The fuse of the SERVOPACK is blown out. The surge current limit resistor is disconnected, resulting in an abnormal power supply voltage or in an overload of the surge current limit resistor. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The AC power supply voltage was lowered, and large voltage drop occurred. Occurred during normal operation. A temporary power failure occurred. The servomotor main circuit cable is short-circuited. The servomotor is short-circuited. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The order of phases U, V, and W in the servomotor wiring is incorrect. Occurred when servo was ON. The encoder wiring is incorrect. Malfunction occurred due to noise interference in the encoder wiring. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The order of phases U, V, and W in the servomotor wiring is incorrect. Occurred when the servomotor started running or in a high-speed rotation. The encoder wiring is incorrect. Malfunction occurred due to noise interference in the encoder wiring. The position or speed reference input is too large. The setting of the reference input gain is incorrect. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The servomotor wiring is incorrect or the connection is faulty. The encoder wiring is incorrect or the connection is faulty. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The servomotor wiring is incorrect or the connection is faulty. Occurred when the servomotor did not run by the reference input. The encoder wiring is incorrect or the connection is faulty. The starting torque exceeds the maximum torque. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Occurred during normal operation. The actual torque exceeds the rated torque or the starting torque largely exceeds the rated torque. Temperature in the SERVOPACK panel is high. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK. The AC power supply voltage must be within the specified range. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Check the power supply voltage, and reduce the number of times that the main circuit is turned ON or OFF.) Replace the SERVOPACK. The AC power supply voltage must be within the specified range. Clear and reset the alarm, and restart the operation. Repair or replace the servomotor main circuit cable. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Take measures against noise for the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Take measures against noise for the encoder wiring. Reduce the reference value. Correct the reference input gain setting. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Reconsider the load and operation conditions, or reconsider the servomotor capacity. Replace the SERVOPACK. Reconsider the load and operation conditions, or reconsider the servomotor capacity. Reduce the in-panel temperature to 55 or less. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.41
Undervoltage1 (Detected when the SERVOPACKs main circuit DC voltage is 170 V or less.) (Detected when the power to the main circuit is turned ON.)
A.51
Overspeed (Detected when the feedback speed is the maximum motor speed 1.2 or more for the SGMGH servomotor, and 1.1 or more for the other servomotors.)
Occurred when the servo was ON.
A.71 A.72
A.71: High Load A.72: Low Load
11
11-9

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the servomotor was running and in a status other than servo OFF. Occurred when the servomotor was running in servo OFF status. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.73
Dynamic Brake Overload
A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
The rotating energy at a DB stop exceeds the DB resistance capacity. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
cReduce the motor speed, dReduce the load moment of inertia, or eReduce the number of times of the DB stop
operation. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.74
Overload of Surge Current Limit Resistor (Detected when the number of times that the main circuits power is turned ON or OFF more than 10 times/2 seconds.) Heat Sink Overheated (Detected when the heat sink temperature exceeds 100 C.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred during operations other than the turning ON/OFF of the main circuit. Occurred at the main circuit power supply ON/OFF operation. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON or while the servomotor was running. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. (Setting: Pn002.2=1)
The surge current limit resistor operation frequency at the main circuit power supply ON/OF operation exceeds the allowable range. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The overload alarm has been reset by turning OFF the power too many times. The load exceeds the rated load. The SERVOPACK ambient temperature exceeds 55C. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred when an absolute encoder is used with the setting for incremental encoder. Alarm occurred when the power to the absolute encoder was initially turned ON.
Reduce the number of times that main circuits power supply can be turned ON/OFF to 5 times/ min. or less. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Change the method to reset the alarm. Reconsider the load and operation conditions, or reconsider the servomotor capacity. The ambient temperature must be 55C or less. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.7A
A.81
Encoder Backup Error (Detected on the encoder side.) (Only when an absolute encoder is connected.)
Set up the encoder. First confirm the connection and set up the encoder. Replace the battery or take similar measures to supply power to the encoder, and set up the encoder. If the alarm cannot be reset by setting up the encoder again, replace the encoder. Replace the SERVOPACK. Set up the encoder. If this alarm occurs frequently, replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Set up the encoder. If this alarm occurs frequently, replace the servomotor.
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON using an absolute encoder. (Setting: Pn002.2=0)
The encoder cable had been disconnected once. The power from both the PG power supply (+5 V) and the battery power supply from the SERVOPACK is not being supplied. An absolute encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
A.82
Encoder Checksum Error (Detected on the encoder side.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON or during an operation. Occurred when the SEN signal turned ON.
A fault occurred in the encoder and was detected by encoder self-diagnosis. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. A fault occurred in the encoder and was detected by encoder self-diagnosis.
11-10

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence When the control power supply was turned ON. (Setting: Pn002.2=1) Cause Corrective Actions
A.83
Absolute Encoder Battery Error (Detected when the battery voltage is lower than the specified value 2 to 4 s after the control power supply is turned ON.) (Only when an absolute encoder is connected.)
When the absolute encoder was used as an incremental, a SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The battery connection is incorrect.
Reconnect the battery. Replace the battery, and then turn ON the power to the encoder.
When the control power supply was turned ON using an absolute encoder. (Setting: Pn002.2=0)
The battery voltage is lower than the specified value 2.7 V.
A.84
Encoder Data Error (Detected on the encoder side.)
A malfunction occurred in the encoder. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A malfunction occurred in the encoder due to external noise. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
Turn the encoder power supply OFF and then ON again. If this alarm occurs frequently, replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the wiring around the encoder by separating the encoder cable from the power line, or by checking the grounding and other wiring.) If this alarm occurs frequently, replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Turn ON the encoder power supply when the servomotor runs at a speed less than 200 min-1. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. The ambient temperature must be 40C or less. The servomotor load must be within the specified range. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Clear and reset the alarm and restart the operation. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Clear and reset the alarm and restart the operation. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring.
A.85
Encoder Overspeed (Detected when the encoder power supply was turned ON.) (Detected on the encoder side.) Encoder Overheated (Only when an absolute encoder is connected.) (Detected on the encoder side.)
When the encoder power supply turns ON and the SEN signal is ON when using an absolute encoder, the servomotor runs at 200 An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The ambient temperature around the servomotor is too high. min-1 or more.
Occurred during normal operation. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON.
A.86
The servomotor load is greater than the rated load. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
A.b1
Reference Speed Input Read Error (Detected when the Servo is ON.) Reference Torque Input Read Error (Detected when the servo is ON.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred during normal operation. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred during normal operation. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON.
A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A malfunction occurred in reading section of the speed reference input. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A malfunction occurred in the reading section of the torque reference input. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The current sensor is faulty. The current sensor is faulty. The servomotor is disconnected. The current sensor is faulty. The servomotor was disconnected.
A.b2
11
A.b3
Current Detection Error
Occurred when the servo was ON. Occurred during normal operation.
11-11

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A program is incorrect. Occurred during normal operation. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
A.bF
System Alarm (Program error) Software operation time exceeded Stack overflow Micro program error
A.C1
Servo Overrun Detected (Detected when the servo is ON.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the servo was ON or a reference was input. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when an encoder alarm was cleared and reset.
A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The order of phase U, V, and W in the servomotor wiring is incorrect. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The encoder wiring and the contact are incorrect. Noise interference occurred due to incorrect encoder cable specifications. Noise interference occurred because the wiring distance for the encoder cable is too long. The noise interference occurred on the signal line because the encoder cable is bent and the sheath is damaged. The encoder cable is bundled with a high-current line or near a high-current line. The FG electrical potential varies because of the influence from such machines on the servomotor side as welders. Noise interference occurred on the signal line from the encoder. Excessive vibration and shocks were applied to the encoder. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the encoder wiring. Use tinned annealed copper twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with a core of at least 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2). The wiring distance must be 20m (65.6 ft) max. Correct the encoder cable layout. Correct the encoder cable layout so that no surge is applied. Ground the machine separately from PG side FG. Take a measure against noise for the encoder wiring. Reduce the machine vibration or mount the servomotor securely. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.C8
Absolute Encoder Clear Error and Multiturn Limit Setting Error
A.C9
Encoder Communications Error
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON or during operation.
A.CA
Encoder Parameter Error
An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred.
11-12

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Cause The encoder wiring and contact are incorrect. Noise interference occurred due to incorrect encoder cable specifications. Noise interference occurred because the wiring distance for the encoder cable is too long. Noise interference occurred on the signal line, because the encoder cable is bent and the sheath is damaged. The encoder cable is bundled with a high-current line or near a high-current line. The FG electrical potential varies because of the influence from such machines on the servomotor side as welders. Noise interference occurred on the signal line from the encoder. Excessive vibration and shocks to the encoder was applied. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred during normal operation. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred at the servomotor high-speed rotation. The servomotor did not run with position reference input. The parameter settings for the SERVOPACK are incorrect. The multiturn limit value for the encoder is not set or was changed. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The overflow level (Pn505) is incorrect. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The contact in the servomotor U, V, and W wirings is faulty. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Wirings of the servomotor U, V, and W are incorrect. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The SERVOPACK gain adjustment is improper. Normal movement, but occurred with a long distance reference input. Corrective Actions Correct the encoder wiring. Use tinned annealed copper twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with a core of at least 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2). The wiring distance must be 20m (65.6 ft) max. Correct the encoder cable layout. Correct the encoder cable layout so that no surge is applied. Ground the machine separately from PG side FG. Take measures against noise for the encoder wiring. Reduce the machine vibration or mount the servomotor securely. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the setting of Pn205 (0 to 65535). Execute Fn013 at the occurrence of alarm. Replace the SERVOPACK. Make the value set in the Pn505 to other than 0. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Increase the speed loop gain (Pn100) and position loop gain (Pn102). Adjust slowly the position reference pulse frequency. Apply the smoothing function. Correct the electronic gear ratio. Setting of the overflow level (Pn505) is incorrect. The servomotor specifications do not meet the load conditions such as torque and moment of inertia. Set the parameter Pn505 to proper value. Reconsider and correct the load and servomotor capacity. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the power supply wiring. Balance the power supply by changing phases. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the power supply wiring. Balance the power supply. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.Cb
Encoder Echoback Error
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON or during operation.
A.CC
Multiturn Limit Disagreement
A.d0
Position Error Pulse Overflow (In servo ON status, the position error pulses exceed the overflow level set in the parameter Pn505.)
The position reference pulse frequency is too high.
A.F1
Power Line Open Phase (In the main power supply ON status, the voltage stays low for 1 second or more at one of the phases R, S, and T.) (Detected when the main circuit power supply turns ON.)
Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred when the main circuit power supply was turned ON.
A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The three-phase power supply wiring is incorrect. The three-phase power supply is unbalanced. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The contact in three-phase power supply wiring is faulty.
11
Occurred when the servomotor was running.
Three-phase power supply is unbalanced. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
11-13

Alarm Display Alarm Name Situation at Alarm Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Corrective Actions Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.F5 A.F6
Servomotor Disconnection Alarm The power is not supplied to the servomotor though the SERVOPACK received the Servo ON command. Digital Operator Transmission Error 1 2 Digital Opera-
Occurred when the servo was ON.
The Servomotor was disconnect.
Correct the servomotor wiring.
CPF00
CPF01 tor Transmis-
sion Error 2 3
Occurred when the power supply was turned ON with digital operator connected or when connecting digital operator with the power supply was turned ON.
The contact between the digital operator and the SERVOPACK is faulty. The external noise interference occurred to the digital operator or cable. (The digital operator cable is near noise source.) A digital operator fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
Insert securely the connector, or replace the cable. Do not lay the cable near noise source. Install digital operator far from noise source. Replace the digital operator. Replace the SERVOPACK.
* 1. The alarm meaning differs depending on the SERVOPACK capacity. For the SERVOPACK with a capacity of 5.0 kW or lower: A.40: Overvoltage detection alarm A.41: Undervoltage detection alarm For the SERVOPACK with a capacity of 6.0 kW or higher: A.40: Alarm detecting excessively high/low voltage in the main circuit A.41: Not used * 2. This alarm occurs when the communications is still disabled five seconds after digital operator power supply is ON, or when digital operator communications disabled status stays while an application module is connected. * 3. This alarm occurs when digital operator received data error occurs consecutively five times, or when the state that digital operator receives no data from SERVOPACK for one second or more occurs consecutively three times.
11-14
(2) Warning Display and Troubleshooting

Table 11.4 Warning Display and Troubleshooting
Warning Display Warning Name Situation at Warning Occurrence Occurred at the servomotor high-speed rotation. Cause The contact in the servomotor U, V, and W wirings is faulty. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The contact in the servomotor U, V, and W wirings is faulty. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. The SERVOPACK gain adjustment is improper. Corrective Actions Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Increase the speed loop gain (Pn100) and position loop gain (Pn102). Adjust slowly the position reference pulse frequency. Normal movement, but occurred with a long distance reference input. The position reference pulse frequency is too high.
Apply the smoothing function (Pn204 or Pn205). Correct the electronic gear ratio (Pn202, Pn203). Setting of the position error pulse over flow warning level (Pn51E) is incorrect. Set the parameter Pn51E to proper value.
A.90
Excessive Position Error Warning: Warning for the alarm A.d0 (In servo ON status, the position error pulses exceed the excessive position error warning level set in the parameter Pn51E.)
The servomotor did not run with position reference input.
The servomotor specifications do not meet the load conditions such as torque and moment of inertia. Wiring is incorrect and the contact in servomotor wiring is faulty. Wiring is incorrect and the contact in encoder wiring is faulty. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Servomotor wiring is incorrect and the contact is faulty. The servomotor did not run with a reference input. Encoder wiring is incorrect and the contact is faulty. The starting torque exceeds the maximum torque. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. The effective torque exceeds the rated torque. Occurred during normal operation. Temperature in the SERVOPACK panel is high. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON. Occurred during normal operation (Large increase of regenerative resistor temperature.) Occurred during normal operation (Small increase of regenerative resistor temperature). Occurred at servomotor deceleration. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Regenerative energy is excessive. Regenerative status continues. The setting of parameter Pn600 is smaller than the external regenerative resistor capacity. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
Reconsider and correct the load and servomotor capacity. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring. Reconsider the load and operation conditions. Or, check the servomotor capacity. Replace the SERVOPACK. Reconsider the load and operation conditions. Or, check the servomotor capacity. Reduce the in-panel temperature to 55C or less. Replace the SERVOPACK. Replace the SERVOPACK.
A.91
Overload: Warning for the alarms A71 and A72 In either of the following cases: 1. 20% of the overload detection level of A71 2. 20% of the overload detection level of A72.
Occurs when the servo was ON.
A.92
Regenerative Overload: Warning for the alarm A320
Check the regenerative resistor capacity, or reconsider the load and operation conditions. Correct the setting of parameter Pn600. Replace the SERVOPACK. Check the regenerative resistor capacity, or reconsider the load and operation conditions.
Regenerative energy is excessive.
11
11-15
Table 11.4 Warning Display and Troubleshooting (Contd)

Warning Display Warning Name Situation at Warning Occurrence Occurred when the control power supply was turned ON (Setting: Pn002.2=1). Occurred 4 seconds or more after the control power supply was turned ON (Setting: Pn002.2=0). When an absolute encoder was used. Cause A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. (The absolute encoder is used in the incremental encoder setting.) The battery connection is incorrect or faulty. The battery voltage is lower than the specified value 2.7 V. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Corrective Actions
A.93
Absolute Encoder Battery Warning (The battery voltage stays below the specified value 4 seconds after the control power supply was turned ON.) (Only when an absolute encoder is connected.)
Replace the SERVOPACK. Connect correctly the battery. Replace the battery, and turn OFF the encoder power supply and ON again. Replace the SERVOPACK.
11-16
11.1.4 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display

The troubleshooting for the malfunctions that causes no alarm display is listed below. Contact your Yaskawa representative if the problem cannot be solved by the described corrective actions.
Table 11.5 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display
Symptom Cause The control power supply is not ON. The main circuit power supply is not ON. Wrong wiring or disconnection of I/O signal connector CN1 Servomotor or encoder wiring disconnected. Overloaded Speed/position references not input Setting for Pn50A to Pn50D Input Signal Selection is incorrect. Encoder type differs from parameter setting. /S-ON input signal stays OFF. Inspection Check voltage between control power supply terminals. Check the voltage between power supply terminals. Check if the connector CN1 is properly inserted and connected. Check the wiring. Run under no load. Check reference input pins. Check settings of parameters Pn50A to Pn50D. Check incremental or absolute encoder. Check settings of parameters Pn50A.0 and Pn50A.1. Check parameter Pn001.1. Check the SEN signal input (when absolute encoder is used). Check the parameter setting for the reference pulse mode. Check V-REF and SG to confirm if the control method and the input are agreed. Check V-REF and SG to confirm if the control method and the input are agreed. Check Pn200.0 reference pulse form or sign + pulse signal. Check CLR or /CLR input pins (CN1-14 and -15). Check P-OT or N-OT input signal. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Check the servomotor wiring. Check the encoder wiring. Corrective Actions : Turn OFF the servo system before executing operations. Correct the control power circuit. Correct the power circuit. Correct the connector CN1 connection. Correct the wiring. Reduce load or replace with larger capacity servomotor. Input speed/position references correctly. Correct the settings for Pn50A to Pn50D Input Signal Selection. Set parameter Pn002.2 to the encoder type being used. Correct the parameter setting and turn ON /S-ON input signal. Set parameters to match the application. Turn SEN input signal ON. Correct setting of parameter Pn200.0. Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input. Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input. Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input. Turn CLR or /CLR input signal OFF. Turn P-OT or N-OT input signal ON. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the servomotor wiring. Correct the encoder wiring.
Servomotor Does Not Start
/P-CON input function setting is incorrect. SEN input is turned OFF. Reference pulse mode selection is incorrect. Speed control: Speed reference input is incorrect. Torque control: Torque reference input is incorrect. Position control: Reference pulse input is incorrect. The error clear counter (CLR) input is turned ON. The forward run prohibited (P-OT) or reverse run prohibited (N-OT) input signal is turned OFF. A SERVOPACK fault occurred.
Servomotor Moves Instantaneously, and then Stops Servomotor Suddenly Stops during Operation and will Not Restart Servomotor Speed Unstable
Servomotor wiring is incorrect. Encoder wiring is incorrect.
An alarm occurred while alarm reset signal (ALM-RST) was turned ON.
Check the alarm reset signal.
Remove the cause of alarm. Turn alarm reset signal (ALM-RST) from ON to OFF.
Wiring connection to servomotor is defective.
Check connection of power lead (phases U, V, and W) and encoder connectors.
Tighten any loose terminals or connectors.
11
11-17
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.1.4 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display
Table 11.5 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display (Contd)

Symptom Cause Speed control: Speed reference input is incorrect. Inspection Check V-REF and SG to confirm if the control method and the input are agreed. Check V-REF and SG to confirm if the control method and the input are agreed. The SERVOPACK offset is adjusted incorrectly. Check Pn200.0 reference pulse form or sign + pulse signal. A SERVOPACK board fault occurred. Check the setting of parameter Pn001.0. Check if excessive moment of inertia, motor overspeed, or DB frequently activated occurred. DB circuit parts are faulty. Check if there are any loosen mounting screws. Mounting not secured Check if there are misalignment of couplings. Check if there are unbalanced couplings. Defective bearings Vibration source on the driven machine Check for noise and vibration around the bearings. Any foreign matter, damages, or deformation on the machine movable section. The specifications of input signal wires must be: Twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with core 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2) min. and tinned annealed copper twisted wire. The wiring distance must be 3 m (9.84 ft) max. and the impedance a few hundreds ohm max. The specifications of encoder cable must be: Twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with core 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2) min. and tinned annealed copper twisted wire. The wiring distance must be 20 m(65.6 ft) max. Check if the encoder cable is not damaged or bent. Check if the encoder cable is bundled with high-current line or near the high-current line. Check if the machine is correctly grounded. Check if there is noise interference on the signal line from encoder. Vibration from the machine occurred or servomotor installation is incorrect. (Mounting surface accuracy, fixing, alignment, etc.) An encoder fault occurred. Shorten the encoder cable wiring distance to the specified value. Modify the encoder cable layout. Install a surge suppressor to the encoder cable. Shorten the wiring distance for input signal line to the specified value. Corrective Actions Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input correctly. Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input correctly. Adjust the SERVOPACK offset correctly. Correct the control mode selection parameter, or the input correctly. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the parameter setting. Replace the SERVOPACK, and reconsider the load. Replace the SERVOPACK. Tighten the mounting screws. Align the couplings. Balance the couplings. If any problems, contact your Yaskawa representative. Contact the machine manufacturer. : Turn OFF the servo system before executing operations.
Servomotor Rotates Without Reference Input
Torque control: Torque reference input is incorrect. Speed reference offset is error. Position control: Reference pulse input is incorrect. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Improper parameter setting
DB (dynamic brake) Does Not Operate
DB resistor disconnected DB drive circuit fault
Noise interference due to incorrect input signal wire specifications
Use the specified input signal wires.
Noise interference due to long distance of input signal line
Abnormal Noise from Servomotor
Noise interference due to incorrect encoder cable specifications
Use the specified encoder cable.
Noise interference due to long encoder cable wiring distance Noise due to damaged encoder cable Excessive noise to the encoder cable FG electrical potential varies by influence of such machines on the servomotor side as welders. SERVOPACK pulse counting error due to noise Excessive vibration and shock to the encoder Encoder fault
Ground the machine separately from PG side FG. Take measure against noise for the encoder wiring. Reduce vibration from the machine, or secure the servomotor installation. Replace the servomotor.
11-18

Symptom Cause Speed loop gain value (Pn100) too high. Position loop gain value (Pn102) too high Incorrect speed loop integral time constant (Pn101) setting When the autotuning is used: Incorrect machine rigidity setting When the autotuning is not used: Incorrect rotational moment of inertia ratio data Speed loop gain value (Pn100) too high Position loop gain value (Pn102) too high Incorrect speed loop integral time constant (Pn101) setting When the autotuning is used: Incorrect machine rigidity setting When the autotuning is not used: Incorrect rotational moment of inertia ratio data Inspection Factory setting: Kv=40.0 Hz Refer to 9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning. Factory setting: Kp=40.0/s Refer to 9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning. Factory setting: Ti=20.00 ms Refer to 9.3.2 Servo Gain Manual Tuning. Check the machine rigidity setting (Fn001). Check the rotational moment of inertia ratio data (Pn103). Factory setting: Kv=40.0 Hz Refer to the gain adjustment in Users Manual. Factory setting: Kp=40.0/s Refer to the gain adjustment in Users Manual. Factory setting: Ti=20.00 ms Refer to the gain adjustment in Users Manual. Check the machine rigidity setting (Fn001). Check the rotational moment of inertia ratio data (Pn103). The specifications of encoder cable must be: Twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with core 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2) min. and tinned annealed copper twisted wire. The wiring distance must be 20 m (65.6 ft) max. Noise interference occurred to the signal line because the encoder cable is bent or its sheath damaged. Check if the encoder cable is bundled with a high-current line or near high-current line. Check if the machine is correctly grounded. Check if the signal line from the encoder receives influence from noise interference. Vibration from machine occurred or servomotor mounting such as mounting surface precision, fixing, and alignment is incorrect. An encoder fault occurred. (no change in pulse count) Check the multiturn data from SERVOPACK. Check the error detection at the host controller. Host controller multiturn data reading error Check if the host controller executes data parity check. Check noise on the signal line between SERVOPACK and the host controller. The encoder cable distance must be within the specified range. Correct the encoder cable layout. Change the encoder cable layout so that no surge is applied. Ground the machine separately from PG side FG. Take measures against noise for encoder wiring. Reduce vibration from machine or mount securely the servomotor. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Correct the error detection section of host controller. Execute the multiturn data parity check. Noise influence at no parity check (as the above.) Corrective Actions : Turn OFF the servo system before executing operations. Reduce speed loop gain (Pn100) preset value. Reduce position loop gain (Pn102) preset value. Correct the speed loop integral time constant (Pn101) setting. Select a proper machine rigidity setting (Fn001). Correct the rotational moment of inertia ratio data (Pn103). Reduce the speed loop gain (Pn100) preset value.
Servomotor Vibrates at about 200 to 400 Hz
High Rotation Speed Overshoot on Starting and Stopping.
Reduce the position loop gain (Pn102) preset value. Correct the speed loop integral time constant (Pn101) setting. Select a proper machine rigidity setting (Fn001). Correct the rotational moment of inertia ratio data (Pn103). Use the mode switch setting function.
Noise interference due to improper encoder cable specifications
Use encoder cable with the specified specifications.
Noise interference because the encoder cable distance is too long.
Absolute Encoder Position Difference Error (The position saved in host controller when the power turned OFF is different from the position when the power turned ON.)
Noise interference due to damaged encoder cable Excessive noise to the encoder cable FG electrical potential varies by influence of such machines on the servomotor side as welder. SERVOPACK pulse counting error due to noise interference Excessive vibration and shock to the encoder Encoder fault SERVOPACK fault
11
11-19
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.1.4 Troubleshooting for Malfunction without Alarm Display

Symptom Cause Inspection Check if the voltage of input signal external power supply (+24 V) is correct. Check if the overtravel limit switch (SW) operates properly. Check if the overtravel limit switch (SW) is connected correctly. Check the fluctuation of the input signal external power supply (+24 V) voltage. The overtravel signal does not operate normally (P-OT or N-OT signal sometimes changes). Check if the overtravel limit switch (SW) activate correctly. Check if the overtravel limit switch wiring is correct. (check for damaged cables or loosen screws.) Check the P-OT signal selection (Pn50A.3). Check the N-OT signal selection (Pn50B.0). Check if coast to stop in servo OFF status is selected. Check if coast to stop in torque control mode is selected. The distance to the position of OT (overtravel) is too short considering the coasting distance. The encoder cable specifications must be: Twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with core 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2) min. and tinned annealed copper twisted wire. The wiring distance must be 20 m (65.6 ft) max. Check if the encoder cable is bent or its sheath is damaged. Check if the encoder cable is bundled with a high-current line or near high-current line. Check if the machine is correctly grounded. Check if the signal line from the encoder is influenced by noise. Machine vibration occurred or servomotor mounting such as mounting surface precision, fixing, alignment is incorrect. An encoder fault occurred. A SERVOPACK fault occurred. Check if a position error occurs at the coupling between machine and servomotor. The input signal cable specifications must be: Twisted-pair or twisted-pair shielded wire with core 0.12 mm2 (0.0002 in2) min. and tinned annealed copper twisted wire. The wiring distance must be 3 m (9.84 ft) max. and the impedance several hundreds ohm max. An encoder fault occurred. (pulse count does not change) Measure servomotor ambient temperature. Check visually. Run under no load. The input signal cable distance must be within the specified range. Replace the servomotor. Reduce ambient temperature to 40C (104 F) max. Clean dust and oil from servomotor surface. Reconsider load and operation conditions or replace with larger capacity servomotor. Corrective Actions : Turn OFF the servo system before executing operations. Connect to the external +24 V power supply. Correct the overtravel limit SW. Correct the overtravel limit SW wiring. Stabilize the external +24 V power supply voltage. Adjust the overtravel limit SW so that it operates correctly. Correct the overtravel limit SW wiring. Correct the setting of P-OT signal selection (Pn50A.3). Correct the setting of N-OT signal selection (Pn50B.0). Check Pn001.0 and Pn001.1. Check Pn001.0 and Pn001.1. Correct the OT position.
An overtravel signal is output (P-OT (CN1-42) or N-OT (CN1-43)) is at H.
Incorrect P-OT/N-OT signal selection
Overtravel (OT) (Movement over the zone specified by the host controller)
Incorrect servomotor stop method selection
Improper overtravel position setting
Noise interference due to improper encoder cable specifications Noise interference because the encoder cable distance is too long. Noise influence due to damaged encoder cable Excessive noise interference to encoder cable FG electrical potential varies by influence of such machines on the servomotor side as welders. SERVOPACK pulse count error due to noise Excessive vibration and shock to the encoder Encoder fault SERVOPACK fault Unsecured coupling between machine and servomotor
Use encoder cable with the specified specifications.
The encoder cable distance must be within the specified range. Correct the encoder cable layout. Change the encoder cable layout so that no surge is applied. Ground the machine separately from PG side FG. Take a measure against noise for the encoder wiring. Reduce the machine vibration or mount the servomotor securely. Replace the servomotor. Replace the SERVOPACK. Secure the coupling between the machine and servomotor.
Position error (without alarm)
Noise interference due to improper input signal cable specifications
Use input signal cable with the specified specifications.
Noise interference because the input signal cable distance is too long. Encoder fault (pulse count does not change) Ambient temperature too high
Servomotor Overheated
Servomotor surface dirty Overloaded
11-20
11.2 Inspection and Maintenance
11.2 Inspection and Maintenance

11.2.1 Servomotor Inspection
The AC servomotors are brushless. Simple, daily inspection is sufficient. The inspection and maintenance frequencies in Table 11.6 are only guidelines. Increase or decrease the frequency to suit the operating conditions and environment.
IMPORTANT
During inspection and maintenance, do not disassemble the servomotor. If disassembly of the servomotor is required, contact your Yaskawa representative. Table 11.6 Servomotor Inspections
Item Vibration and Noise Exterior Insulation Resistance Measurement Replacing Oil Seal Overhaul
Frequency Daily According to degree of contamination At least once a year At least once every 5,000 hours At least once every 20,000 hours or 5 years
Procedure Touch and listen. Clean with cloth or compressed air. Disconnect SERVOPACK and test insulation resistance at 500 V. Must exceed 10 M . Remove servomotor from machine and replace oil seal. Contact your Yaskawa representative.
Comments Levels higher than normal? Contact your Yaskawa representative if the insulation resistance is below 10 M . Applies only to servomotors with oil seals. The user should not disassemble and clean the servomotor.
* Measure across the servomotor FG and the phase-U, phase-V, or phase-W power line.
11.2.2 SERVOPACK Inspection

For inspection and maintenance of the SERVOPACK, follow the inspection procedures in Table 11.7 at least once every year. Other routine inspections are not required.
Table 11.7 SERVOPACK Inspections Item Clean Interior and Circuit Boards Loose Screws Defective Parts in Unit or on Circuit Boards At least once a year Frequency Procedure Check for dust, dirt, and oil on the surfaces. Check for loose terminal block and connector screws. Check for discoloration, damage, or discontinuities due to heating. Comments Clean with cloth or compressed air. Tighten any loose screws.
Contact your Yaskawa representative.
11
11-21
11 Inspection, Maintenance, and Troubleshooting 11.2.3 SERVOPACKs Parts Replacement Schedule
11.2.3 SERVOPACKs Parts Replacement Schedule

The following electric or electronic parts are subject to mechanical wear or deterioration over time. To avoid failure, replace these parts at the frequency indicated. The parameters of any SERVOPACKs overhauled by Yaskawa are reset to the factory settings before shipping. Be sure to confirm that the parameters are properly set before starting operation.
Table 11.8 Periodical Part Replacement Part Cooling Fan Smoothing Capacitor Relays Fuses Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitor on Circuit Board Standard Replacement Period 4 to 5 years 7 to 8 years 10 years 5 years Replacement Method Replace with new part. Test. Replace with new part if necessary. Test. Replace if necessary. Replace with new part. Test. Replace with new circuit board if necessary. Operating Conditions
Ambient Temperature: Annual average of 30C Load Factor: 80% max. Operation Rate: 20 hours/day max.
11-22
12
Appendix
12.1 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2

12.1.1 Selection Example for Speed Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2 12.1.2 Selection Example for Position Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4 12.1.3 Calculating the Required Capacity of Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-7
12.2 Connection to Host Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14

12.2.1 Example of Connection to MP920 4-axes Analog Module SVA-01 - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.2 Example of Connection to CP-9200SH Servo Controller Module SVA (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.3 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL120/130 Series Motion Module MC20 - 12.2.4 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL60/70 Series Positioning Module B2813 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.5 Example of Connection to OMRONs Motion Control Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.6 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.7 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC221 (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.8 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC112 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.9 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD72 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12.2.10 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD75 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23
12.3 List of Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-24

12.3.1 Utility Functions List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-24 12.3.2 List of Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-25 12.3.3 Monitor Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.4 Parameter Recording Table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-44
12
12-1
12 Appendix 12.1.1 Selection Example for Speed Control
12.1 Servomotor Capacity Selection Examples

12.1.1 Selection Example for Speed Control
Mechanical Specifications
Linear motion
1
Servomotor
Coupling Ball screw Load speed: V = 15 m/min Linear motion section mass: M = 500 kg Ball screw length: LB = 1.4 m
Ball screw diameter: DB = 0.04 m Ball screw lead: PB = 0.01 m Coupling mass: MC = 1 kg Coupling outer diameter: DC = 0.06 m
Feeding times: n = 40 times/min Feeding distance: = 0.275 m Feeding time: tm = 1.2 s max. Friction coefficient: = 0.2 Mechanical efficiency: = 0.9 (90%)
(1) Speed Diagram

15 Speed (m/min) a t V
60 60 t = n = 40 = 1.5 (s) where ta = td

td Time (s)
tc 1.2 t
ta = tm
60 V
= 1.2
60 0.275 = 0.1 (s) 15
tc = 1.2 0.1 2 = 1.0 (s)
(2) Rotation Speed

Load axis rotation speed
N = V = 15 = 1500 (min-1 ) PB 0.01
Motor shaft rotation speed with the direct coupling: Gear ratio 1/R = 1/1 Therefore,
NM = N R = 1500 1 = 1500 (min-1 )
(3) Load torque

TL = 9.8 M PB 9.8 0.2 500 0.01 = = 1.73 (N m) 2 1 0.9 2R
(4) Load Moment of Inertia

Linear motion section
JL1 = M
( 2P ) R
B
= 500
( 20.01 1)
= 12.7 10-4 (kg m2)
Ball screw
JB = LB D B4 = 7.87 10-3 1.4 (0.04)4 = 27.7 10-4 (kg m 2 ) 32 32
Coupling
JC = 1 MC DC2 = 1 1 (0.06)2 = 4.5 10-4 (kg m2) 8 8
12-2
Load moment of inertia at motor shaft

JL = J L1 + JB + J C = 44.9 10 -4 (kg m 2 )
(5) Load Moving Power

PO = 2NM TL 2 1500 1.73 = = 272 (W) 60 60
(6) Load Acceleration Power

Pa = (2 N ) 60
M 2
JL 2 = 1500 ta 60
44.9 10-4 = 1108 (W) 0.1
(7) Servomotor Provisional Selection

(a) Selecting Conditions
TL Motor rated torque Pa + Po = (1 to 2) Motor rated output NM Motor rated speed JL SERVOPACK allowable load moment of inertia The followings satisfy the conditions. SGMGH-09A2A servomotor SGDM-10ADA SERVOPACK
(b) Specifications of the Provisionally Selected Servomotor and SERVOPACK

Rated output: 850 (W) Rated motor speed: 1500 (min-1) Rated torque: 5.39 (Nm) Instantaneous peak torque: 13.8 (Nm) Servomotor moment of inertia: 13.9 10-4 (kgm2) SERVOPACK allowable load moment of inertia: 69.58 10-4 (kgm2)
(8) Verification on the Provisionally Selected Servomotor

Required starting torque
TP = 2N M (J M + J L ) 2 1500 (13.9 + 44.9) 10 4 + TL = + 1.73 60ta 60 0.1
11 (N m) < Instantaneous peak torque Satisfactory
Required braking torque

TS = 2N M (J M+ J L ) 2 1500 (13.9 + 44.9) 10 4 TL = 1.73 60td 60 0.1
7.5 (N m) < Instantaneous peak torque Satisfactory
Torque efficiency
T rms = P
2
ta + TL
tc + T S
td
(11) 0.1 + (1.73) 1.0 + (7.5) 0.1 1.5
3.72 (N m) < Rated torque Satisfactory
12
12-3
12 Appendix 12.1.2 Selection Example for Position Control
(9) Result
The provisionally selected servomotor and SERVOPACK are confirmed to be applicable. The torque diagram is shown below.
(N m) 11 Torque Speed
1.73 0 -7.5 0.1 1.0 1.5 0.1
12.1.2 Selection Example for Position Control

Mechanical Specifications
Linear motion
1
Servomotor
Coupling
Positioning times: n = 40 times/min Positioning distance: = 0.25 m Positioning time: tm = Less than 1.2 s Electrical stop accuracy: = 0.01 mm Friction coefficient: = 0.2 Mechanical efficiency: = 0.9 (90%)
Ball screw
Load speed: V = 15 m/min Linear motion section mass: M = 80 kg Ball screw length: LB = 0.8 m Ball screw diameter: DB = 0.016 m Ball screw lead: PB = 0.005 m Coupling mass: MC = 0.3 kg Coupling outer diameter: DC =0 .03 m
(1) Speed Diagram

15 Speed (m/min) ta V
Reference pulse Load speed
60 60 t = ----- = ----- = 1.5 ( s ) n 40 Where ta = td, ts = 0.1 (s)

Time (s)
td ts tc 1.2 t
ta = tm ts 60 = 1.2 0.1 60 0.25 = 0.1 (s) 15 V

tc = 1.2 0.1 0.1 2 = 0.9 ( s )
(2) Rotation Speed

Load axis rotation speed
N = V = 15 = 3000 (min-1 ) P 0.005 B
Motor shaft rotation speed with direct coupling: Gear ratio 1/R = 1/1 Therefore,
NM = N R = 3000 1 = 3000 (min -1)
(3) Load Torque

TL = 9.8 M PB 9.8 0.2 80 0.005 = = 0.139 (N m) 2 1 0.9 2R
12-4
(4) Load Moment of Inertia

Liner motion section
JL1 = M
( 2P ) R
B
= 80
( 20.005 1)
= 0.507 10-4 (kg m 2 )
Ball screw
JB = LB DB4 = 7.87 103 0.8 (0.016)4 = 0.405 10-4 (kg m2) 32 32
Coupling
JC = 1 MC DC4 = 1 0.3 (0.03)2 = 0.338 10-4 (kg m2) 8 8
Load moment of inertia at the motor shaft

JL = JL1 JB JC = 1.25 10-4 (kg m2)
(5) Load Moving Power

PO = 2NM TL 2 3000 0.139 = = 43.7 (W) 60 60
(6) Load Acceleration Power

Pa = (2 N ) 60
M 2
JL 2 = 3000 ta 60
1.25 10 -4 = 123.4 (W) 0.1
(7) Provisionally Servomotor Selection

(a) Selecting Conditions

TL Motor rated torque Pa + Po = (1 to 2) Motor rated output NM Motor rated speed JL SERVOPACK allowable load moment of inertia
The followings satisfy the conditions. SGMPH-02A312 servomotor SGDM-02AP SERVOPACK (for position control)
(b) Specifications of Servomotor and SERVOPACK

Rated output: 200 (W) Rated motor speed: 3000 (min-1) Rated torque: 0.637 (Nm) Instantaneous peak torque: 1.91 (Nm) Servomotor rotor moment of inertia: 0.209 10-4 (kgm2) SERVOPACK allowable load moment of inertia: 3.69 10-4 (kgm2) Number of encoder pulses: 2048 (P/R)
12
12-5
12 Appendix 12.1.2 Selection Example for Position Control
(8) Verification on Provisionally Selected Servomotor

Required starting torque
TP = 2N M (J M + J L ) 2 3000 (0.209 + 1.25) 104 + TL = + 0.139 60ta 60 0.1
Required braking torque

TS = 2N M (J M+ J L ) 2 3000 (0.209 + 1.25) 10 4 TL = 0.139 60ta 60 0.1
Effective torque
T rms = P
2
ta + TL
tc + T S
td
(0.597) 0.1 + (0.139) 0.9 + (0.319) 0.1 1.5
0.205 (N m) < Rated torque Satisfactory
The above confirms that the provisionally selected servomotor and SERVOPACK capacities are sufficient. In the next step, their performance in position control are checked.
B ) (9) PG Feedback Pulse Dividing Ratio: Setting of Electronic Gear Ratio ( A
As the electrical stop accuracy = 0.01mm, take the position detection unit = 0.01mm/pulse.
5 PB B B ( A ) = 0.01 ( A ) = 2048 4 B = 2048 4 k= A 500
(10) Reference Pulse Frequency

vs = 1000V 60 = 1000 15 = 25,000 (pps) 60 0.01
(11) Error Counter Pulses

Position loop gain Kp = 30 (1/S)
= vs = 25,000 = 833 (pulse) Kp 30
(12) Electrical Stop Accuracy

=
(SERVOPACK NM control range) NR
833 5000 3000 3000
0.17 < 1 (pulse) = 0.01 (pulse)
The above results confirm that the selected SERVOPACK and servomotor are applicable for the position control.
12-6
12.1.3 Calculating the Required Capacity of Regenerative Resistors

(1) Simple Calculation
When driving a servomotor with the horizontal axis, check the external regenerative resistor requirements using the calculation method shown below.
(a) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 400 W or Less

SERVOPACKs with capacities of 400 W or less do not have built-in regenerative resistors. The energy that can be charged with capacitors is shown in the following table. If the rotational energy in the servomotor exceeds these values, then connect an external regenerative resistor.
Voltage Applicable SERVOPACK Model SGDMA3BD, A3BDA A5BD to 02BD A5BDA to 02BDA A3AD to A5AD A3ADA to A5ADA 01AD to 04AD 01ADA to 04ADA Regenerative Energy that Can be Processed (joules) 7.8 15.7 18.5 Value when main circuit input voltage is 200 VAC 37.1 Remarks
100 V
Value when main circuit input voltage is 100 VAC
200 V
Calculate the rotational energy Es in the servomotor from the following equation: ES = J (NM)2/182 (joules) J = J M + JL JM: Servomotor rotor moment of inertia (kgm2) JL: Load converted to shaft moment of inertia (kgm2) NM: Rotation speed used by servomotor (min-1)
12
12-7
12 Appendix 12.1.3 Calculating the Required Capacity of Regenerative Resistors
(b) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 500 W to 5.0 kW

Servomotors with capacities of 500 W to 5.0 kW have built-in regenerative resistors. The allowable frequencies for just the servomotor in acceleration and deceleration operation, during the rotation speed cycle from 0 (min-1) to the maximum rotation speed to 0, are summarized in the following table. Convert the data into the values obtained with actual rotation speed and load moment of inertia to determine whether an external regenerative resistor is needed.
Voltage Series Capacity Symbol SGMGHAA SGMGHAB SGMSH SGMDH Allowable Frequencies in Regenerative Mode (times/min) 22 7 32 11 40 20 29 8 44 11 50 22
200 V
Load moment of inertia = 0 (servomotor only)

Speed reference
Maximum rotation speed Servomotor rotation speed

0 t
Regeneration mode Servomotor-generated torque

0 t
Maximum torque
Maximum torque T (Operating cycle)
Allowable frequency = 1/T (times/min)
Fig 12.1 Operating Conditions for Allowable Regenerative Frequency Calculation
Use the following equation to calculate the allowable frequency for regeneration mode operation.
Allowable frequency = Allowable frequency for Servomotor only (1 + n) Max. rotation speed Rotation speed
2
(times/min)
n = JL/JM JM: Servomotor rotor moment of inertia (kgm2) JL: Load converted to shaft moment of inertia (kgm2)
12-8
(c) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 6.0 kW or More

SERVOPACKs with capacities of 6.0 kW or more do not have built-in regenerative resistors. The following table shows the allowable regenerative frequencies when the JUSP-RA04 or JUSP-RA05 regenerative resistor is used together with an applicable SERVOPACK. The servomotor driven conditions and the conversion equation of the allowable regenerative frequencies to the rotation speed and load moment of inertia are the same as the (b) SERVOPACKs with Capacities of 500 W to 5.0 kW.
Voltage Series Capacity Symbol SGMGHAA SGMGHAB Allowable Frequencies in Regenerative Mode (times/min) 55 26 44 75 36 1A 36 1E 32
200 V
(2) Calculating the Regenerative Energy

This section shows the procedure for calculating the regenerative resistor capacity when acceleration and deceleration operation is as shown in the following diagram.
NM: Motor rotation speed
Rotation speed
0 tD
Motor torque
TL: Load torque 0

Regenerative torque
12
12-9
(a) Calculation Procedure

The procedure for calculating the regenerative capacity is as follows:
Step 1 2 3 Item Calculate the rotational energy of the servomotor. Calculate the energy consumed by load loss during the deceleration period. Calculate the energy lost from servomotor winding resistance. Calculate the SERVOPACK energy that can be absorbed. Calculate the energy consumed by the regenerative resistor. Calculate the required regenerative resistor capacity (W). utilized load ratio is 20%. 2. The units for the various symbols are as follows: ES to EK: Energy joules (J) TL: Load torque (Nm) WK: Regenerative resistor required capacity (W) tD: Deceleration stopping time (s) J: (= JM + JL)(kgm2) T: Servomotor repeat operation period (s) NM: Servomotor rotation speed (min-1) Symbol ES EL EM Equation ES = JNM2/182 EL = (/60) NMTLtD (Value calculated from (b) Servomotor Winding Resistance Loss diagrams) tD Calculate from (3) SERVOPACKs Absorbable Energy diagrams. EK = ES (EL+EM+EC) WK = EK/ (0.2 T)
4 5 6
EC EK WK
Note: 1. The 0.2 in the equation for calculating WK is the value for when the regenerative resistors
If the above calculation determines that the amount of regenerative power (Wk) processed by the built-in resistor is not exceeded, then an external regenerative resistor is not required. If the amount of regenerative power that can be processed by the built-in resistor is exceeded, then install an external regenerative resistor for the capacity obtained from the above calculation. If the energy consumed by load loss (in step 2 above) is unknown, then perform the calculation using EL = 0. When the operation period in regeneration mode is continuous, add the following items to the above calculation procedure in order to find the required capacity (W) for the regenerative resistor. Energy for continuous regeneration mode operation period: EG (joules) Energy consumed by regenerative resistor: EK = ES - (EL + EM + EC) + EG Required capacity of regenerative resistor: WK = EK/ (0.2 T) Here, EG = (2/60) NMGTGtG tG: Same operation period (s) as above TG: Servomotors generated torque (Nm) in continuous regeneration mode operation period NMG: Servomotor rotation speed (min-1) for same operation period as above
12-10
(b) Servomotor Winding Resistance Loss

The following diagrams show the relationship, for each servomotor, between the servomotors generated torque and the winding resistance loss. 100-V Servomotors
SGMAH Servomotors
200 180 160 Loss 120 (W) 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 100 Torque (%) 200 300 40 20 0 0 100 Torque (%) 200 300 140
A5B A3B
SGMPH Servomotors
Model: SGMAH01B 02B
160 140 120 Loss 100 (W) 80 60
Model: SGMPH-
02B 01B
200-V Servomotors
SGMAH Servomotors
300 250 Loss 200 (W) 150 100 50 0
A5A A3A
SGMPH Servomotors
Model: SGMAH-
300 250 Loss 200 (W) 150
Model: SGMPH15A 08A
04A 08A
01A,02A
04A 01A
100
02A
50 0
100 Torque (%)
200
300
100 Torque (%)
200
300
12
12-11
SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1)

2800 2600 2400 2200 2000 1800 1600 Loss 1400 (W) 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 Torque (%) 200 300
05A 09A 13A 20A 30A 44A 1AA 75A 55A 1EA A A A A A A A A A A
SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1)

2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 Loss 1000 (W) 800 600 400 200 0 0 100 Torque (%) 200
30A B 20A B 09A B 06A B 12A B 03A B Model: SGMGH55A B 40A B
Model: SGMGH-
300
SGMSH Servomotors
1400 1200 1000 Loss 800 (W) 600 400 200 0
15A 10A
SGMDH Servomotors
Model: SGMSH-
1400 1200 1000 Loss 800 (W) 600 400 200 0
Model: SGMDH-
50A 40A 30A 20A
40A 32A 22A
100 Torque (%)
200
300
100
200 Torque (%)
300
360
12-12
(3) SERVOPACKs Absorbable Energy

The following diagrams show the relationship between the SERVOPACKs input power supply voltage and its absorbable energy. 100-V SERVOPACKs
18 16 Absorbable Energy (J) 14 12 10
A3BD, A3BDA Model: SGDMA5BD to 02BD A5BDA to 02BDA
8 6 4 2 0 90 100 110 120 AC Input Power Supply Voltage (Vrms)
200-V SERVOPACKs
120 100 Absorbable Energy (J) 80 60 40 20 0
Model: SGDM30AD, 30ADA 20AD, 20ADA 01AD to 04AD 01ADA to 04ADA 05AD to 10AD 05ADA to 10ADA 15AD, 15ADA A3AD, A5ADA A5AD, A5ADA
700 600 Absorbable Energy (J) 500 400 300 200 100
Model: SGDM-
1EADA 1AADA 75ADA 60ADA 50ADA
180 200 220 240 AC Input Power Supply Voltage (Vrms)
260
180
200
220
240
260
AC Input Power Supply Voltage (Vrms)
12
12-13
12 Appendix 12.2.1 Example of Connection to MP920 4-axes Analog Module SVA-01
12.2 Connection to Host Controller

12.2.1 Example of Connection to MP920 4-axes Analog Module SVA-01
MP920 Series SVA-01 manufactured by Yaskawa CN1 to CN4 2 1 3 4 23 24 5 6 7 16 34 31 30 12 13 14 32 11 20 19 28 29 17 10 35 18 22 21 FG SVON ALMRST PCON OTR OTF DOSEN 0V SEN SG 0V 0V SVALM 0V SVRDY BRK BAT 0BAT SEN SG /S-RDY+ ALM+ ALM/S-RDY+ /TGON+ BAT(+) BAT(-) 4 10 30 31 32 29 27 21 22 /S-ON /ALM-RST /P-CON N-OT P-OT 40 44 41 43 42
CN2 PG
SGDM SERVOPACK NREF SG PA PAL PB PBL PC PCL SG +24V OUT
V-REF SG PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO SG
CN1 5 2 33 34 35 36 19 20 6
L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
Control power supply Main circuit power supply

Servomotor
+24V-IN 47
U V W
A(1) B (2) C(3) D (4)
12-14
12.2.2 Example of Connection to CP-9200SH Servo Controller Module SVA (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)
CP-9200SH SVA manufactured by Yaskawa CN 17 22 47 23 48 24 19 43 18 44 45 SGDM SERVOPACK CN1 +24V DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DI2 DI1 DI0 DI3 0 24 V +24V-IN /S-ON /P-CON N-OT P-OT /ALM-RST /TGON+ /TGON/V-CMP+ /V-CMP/S-RDY+ /S-RDYALM+ ALMBAT(+) BAT(-) SEN SG V-REF SG T-REF SG PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO SG Connector shell 47 40 41 43 42 44 27 28 25 26 29 30 31 32 21 22 4 2 5 6 9 10 33 34 35 36 19 20 1 L1C L2C L1 L2 L3

Servomotor
U V W
A(1) B (2) C(3) D (4)
CN2
PG
1 26 3 4 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 9
SENS SENSG IN-A 0V TLIMP TLIMPG PA PAL PB PBL PC PCL PG0V
12
12-15
12 Appendix 12.2.3 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL120/130 Series Motion Module MC20
12.2.3 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL120/130 Series Motion Module MC20

MEMOCON GL120/130 Series MC20 manufactured by Yaskawa
1
SGDM SERVOPACK
2
SV1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 19 13 14 11 12 15 16 17 FG (Connector frame)
CN1 PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO V-REF SG BAT(+) BAT(-) +24VIN /S-ON /P-CON SEN SG /ALM-RST ALM+ ALM 33 34 35 36 19 20 5 6 21 22 47 40 41 4 2 44 31 32 U V W L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
PA /PA PB /PB PC /PC VREF SG BAT BAT0 +24V SVON PCON SEN 0SEN ALM-RST ALM ALM0
Servomotor A (1) B (2) C (3) D (4) M
CN2
PG
* 1. Pin numbers are the same for SV2 to SV4. * 2. represents twisted-pair wires.
12-16
12.2.4 Example of Connection to MEMOCON GL60/70 Series Positioning Module B2813 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)
MEMOCON GL60/70 Series B2813 manufactured by Yaskawa CN2 1 33 1Ry
SERVO NORMAL DECELERATION LS
024V +24V
SGDM SERVOPACK L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
20 35 3 2 45 46 47
START STOP
+12V
CN2 24 23 22 21 38 5 6 CN1 16 17 18 19 14 15 1 2 3 20 CN2 36
PULSE /PULSE SIGN /SIGN CLR /CLR 0V
PULSE /PULSE SIGN /SIGN CLR /CLR SG
CN1 7 8 11 12 15 14 2
U V W
Servomotor A(1) B(2) M C(3) D(4) PG
Connector shell 3 PA /PA PB /PB PC /PC 0V 0V 0V FG

ERROR 2Ry
+5V
48 49 50 10 11 12
PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO SG
33 34 35 36 19 20
CN2
CN1 47 40 42 43 31 32
024V +24V +24VIN /S-ON P-OT 3Ry N-OT 4Ry ALM+ ALM 1Ry 1
0V
+12V
* 1. The ALM signal is output for approximately two seconds when the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. * 2. Set parameter Pn200.0 to 1. * 3. Connect the shield wire to the connector shell. * 4. represents twisted-pair wires.
12
12-17
12 Appendix 12.2.5 Example of Connection to OMRONs Motion Control Unit
12.2.5 Example of Connection to OMRONs Motion Control Unit

MC unit manufactured by OMRON C200H-MC221 (CS1W-MC221/MC421) (CV500-MC221/MC421) DRV connector 24V input 1 2 24V input ground X -axis alarm input 3 X-axis run reference output 4 X-axis alarm reset output 5 X-axis SEN signal ground 8 X-axis SEN signal output 9 X-axis feedback ground 10 X-axis phase-A input 11 X-axis phase-/A input 12 X-axis phase-B input 13 X-axis phase-/B input 14 X-axis phase-Z input 15 X-axis phase-/Z input 16 X-axis speed reference 17 Axis speed reference ground 18 24 V output 19 24 V output ground 20 I/O connector 24 V input 1 X-axis CW limit input 2 X-axis CCW limit input 4 X-axis immediate stop input 6 X-axis origin proximity input 10 24 V input ground 14 24 VDC 24 VDC CN1 ALM+ 31 /S-ON 40 /ALM-RST 44 SG 1 2 2 SEN 1 4 1 SG PAO 33 /PAO 34 /PBO 36 PBO 35 PCO 19 /PCO 20 5 V-REF SG 6 FG +24-IN ALMShell 47 32

Servomotor
U V W
A(1) B(2) C(3) D(4)
CN2
PG
Battery 1 BAT(+) 1 BAT(-) 1 2.8 to 4.5 VDC
21 22
* 1. Connect when an absolute encoder is used. When a battery is installed in the SERVOPACK, no battery is required for CN1 (between 21 and 22).
x Battery for CN1: ER6VC3 (3.6 V, 2000 mA) x Battery installed in the SERVOPACK: For 5 kW or less: JZSP-BA01 (3.6 V, 1000 mA)
For 6 kW or more: JZSP-BA01-1 (3.6 V, 1000 mA) * 2. represents twisted-pair wires.
Note: 1. Only signals applicable to OMRONs MC unit and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram. 2. The main circuit power supply is a three-phase 200 VAC SERVOPACK input in the example. The power supply and wiring must be in accordance with the power supply specifications of the SERVOPACK to be used. 3. Note that incorrect signal connection will cause damage to the MC unit and SERVOPACK. 4. Open the signal lines not to be used. 5. The above connection diagram shows only X-axis connection. When using another axes, make connection to the SERVOPACK in the same way. 6. The normally closed (N.C.) input terminals not to be used at the motion control unit I/O connector section must be short-circuited at the connector. 7. Make the setting so that the servo can be turned ON/OFF by the /S-ON signal.
12-18
12.2.6 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit

Position control unit CS1W-NC133 / 233 / 433 manufactured by OMRON
5V power supply for pulse output 5V GND for pulse output CW(+) output CW(-) output CCW(+) output CCW(-) output
I/O power supply

+24V + +24 V
0 24
A4 A3 A5 A6 A7 A8
5 VDC
4
SGDM SERVOPACK
2
Error counter reset output A11 Origin input signal A16 Origin input common A14 24 V power supply for output 24 V GND for output
A1 A2
CN1 PULS 7 /PULS 8 SIGN 11 /SIGN 12 CLR 15 /CLR 14 PCO 19 /PCO 20 COIN+ 25 /COIN- 26 +24V-IN /S-ON P-OT N-OT /ALM-RST 1 ALM+ ALM47 40 42 43 44 31 32
L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
Control power supply Main circuit power supply Servomotor
U V W
A(1) B(2) C(3) D(4)
1Ry
X-axis external interrupt input X-axis origin proximity input X-axis CCW limit input X-axis CW limit input X-axis immediate stop input
CN2
PG
A19 A21 A23 A22 A20
Connector shell 3
* 1. The ALM signal is output for about two seconds after the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop the main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. * 2. Set parameter Pn200.0 to 1. * 3. Connect the shield wire to the connector shell. * 4. represents twisted-pair wires.
Note: Only signals applicable to OMRONs MC unit (positioning unit) and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram.
12
12-19
12 Appendix 12.2.7 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC221 (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)
12.2.7 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC221 (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)
SGDM SERVOPACK Position control I/O power supply unit C500-NC221 +24V + manufactured by OMRON X-axis (Y-axis) EXT IN 8 9 +24V 2(12) 3(13) 4(14) 5(15) 6(16) 1 11 M/D 11 12 3(19) 9(25) 8(24) 7(23) 6(22) 5(21) 4(20) 16(14) 15(13) 1(17) +24V OUT-1X X-OUT X-AG X-A X-/A X-B X-/B X-C X-/C 0V /S-ON 40 V-REF(T-REF) 5(9) SG 6(10)
3 2
+24V 024V
L1C L2C L1 L2 L3 Servomotor U V W A(1) B (2) C(3) D (4)
CCWLX STPX ORGX EMGX
3Ry
ON when positioning is canceled. ON when proximity is detected. 1Ry 1 CN1 ALM+ 31 ALM - 32 +24VIN 47
4Ry CWLX DC GND DC GND
CN2
PG
42 P-OT 3Ry 43 N-OT 4Ry 024V
PAO /PAO PBO /PBO PCO /PCO SG
33 34 35 36 19 20 1
Connector 2 shell
* 1. The ALM signal is output for approximately two seconds when the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. * 2. Connect the I/O cables shield wire to the connector shell. * 3. represents twisted-pair wires.
Note: Only signals applicable to OMRONs C500-NC221 position control unit and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram.
12-20
12.2.8 Example of Connection to OMRONs Position Control Unit C500-NC112 (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)
012V
2
Position control unit C500-NC112 manufactured by OMRON
I/O power supply

+12V + -
1A +12V 1B 2A CW LIMIT 2B CCW LIMIT 3A EMERGENCY STOP 3B EXTERNAL INTERRUPT 4A ORIGIN

ORIGIN PROXIMITY 4B LOCAL READY
Servomotor
4Ry 3Ry
Encoder signal conversion unit
LRX-01/A2 10 PCO 19 12V 0V 8 7 1Ry 9 /PCO 20
U V W
A(1) B (2) C(3) D (4)
CN2
ALM+ 31 ALM - 32 PULSE /PULSE SIGN /SIGN CLR /CLR 7 8 11 12 15 14
PG
5A
5B 8A +5V 8B 9A PULSE OUTPUT 9B 10A 10B
1Ry +5 V
+24V
47 +24VIN 40 /S-ON +24V 42 P-OT 3Ry 43 N-OT 4Ry 012V
External power supply +24V
* 1. The ALM signal is output for approximately two seconds when the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. * 2. Set parameter Pn200.0 to 1. * 3. Manufactured by Yaskawa Controls Co., Ltd. Note: Only signals applicable to OMRONs C500-NC112 position control unit and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram.
12
12-21
12 Appendix 12.2.9 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD72 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)
12.2.9 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD72 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Speed Control Mode)
I/O power supply +24V + Positioning unit AD72 manufactured by Mitsubishi 2 CONT 1 2 3 SERVO 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENCO 4 5 7 8 10 11 3 6 9 PULSE A PULSE B PULSE C 0V 0V 0V
SGDM SERVOPACK
+24 V 0 24 V
STOP DOG
ON when positioning is canceled. ON when proximity is detected.
L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
CN1 47 40 31 32 5(9) 6(10) 35 36 33 34 19 20 1
Control power supply

Main circuit power supply
Servomotor U V W A(1) B (2) C(3) D (4) PG
+24V-IN /S-ON ALM+
SV-ON READY 1Ry
1Ry 1 ALMV-REF (T-REF) SG
Speed reference
CN2
PBO /PBO PAO /PAO PCO /PCO SG
CN1 42 43
P-OT N-OT 024 V
Connector 3 shell
* 1. The ALM signal is output for about two seconds after the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop the main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. * 2. Pin numbers are the same both for X-axis and Y-axis. * 3. Connect the connector wire to the connector shell. * 4. represents twisted-pair wires.
Note: Only signals applicable to Mitsubishis AD72 Positioning Unit and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram.
12-22
12.2.10 Example of Connection to MITSUBISHIs AD75 Positioning Unit (SERVOPACK in Position Control Mode)
Positioning unit AD75 manufactured by Mitsubishi I/O power supply +24V + +24 V 0 24V
L1C L2C L1 L2 L3
ON when positioning is canceled. ON when proximity is detected.
SGDM SERVOPACK
X-axis (Y-axis) 26 7 14 11 24 25 READY STOP DOG PGO 1Ry 1Ry
Control power supply Main circuit power supply Servomotor
CN1 19 20
PCO /PCO
U V W
A(1) B(2) C(3) D(4)
ALM+ ALM -
31 32 7 8 11 12 15 14
CN2
PG
3 21 4 22 5 23
PULSE SIGN CLEAR
PULS /PULS SIGN /SIGN CLR /CLR
CN1 47 40 42 43 +24V /S-ON P-OT N-OT
2.2K
0 24V
* The ALM signal is output for about two seconds when the power is turned ON. Take this into consideration when designing the power ON sequence. The ALM signal actuates the alarm detection relay 1Ry to stop the main circuit power supply to the SERVOPACK. Note: Only signals applicable to Mitsubishis AD75 Positioning Unit and Yaskawas SGDM SERVOPACK are shown in the diagram.
12
12-23
12 Appendix 12.3.1 Utility Functions List
12.3 List of Parameters

12.3.1 Utility Functions List
The following list shows the available utility functions.
Parameter No. Fn000 Fn001 Fn002 Fn003 Fn004 Fn005 Fn006 Fn007 Fn008 Fn009 Fn00A Fn00B Fn00C Fn00D Fn00E Fn00F Fn010 Fn011 Fn012 Fn013 Function Alarm traceback data display Rigidity setting during online autotuning JOG mode operation Zero-point search mode Fixed parameter (Do not change.) Parameter setting initialization Alarm traceback data clear Writing to EEPROM inertia ratio data obtained from online autotuning Absolute encoder multiturn reset and encoder alarm reset Automatic tuning of analog (speed, torque) reference offset Manual adjustment of speed reference offset Manual adjustment of torque reference offset Manual zero-adjustment of analog monitor output Manual gain-adjustment of analog monitor output Automatic offset-adjustment of motor current detection signal Manual offset-adjustment of motor current detection signal Password setting (protects parameters from being changed.) Motor models display Software version display Multiturn limit value setting change when a Multiturn Limit Disagreement alarm (A.CC) occurs Remarks { { { { { { { { { { { { { { { Reference Section 7.2.2 9.2.4 8.1.1 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 9.2.7 8.4.5 8.5.3 8.7.3 8.5.3 8.7.3 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10 8.4.8
Note: When the parameters marked with { in remarks column are set for Write Prohibited Setting (Fn010), the indication shown below appears and such parameters cannot be changed.
Blinks for one second
12-24
12.3.2 List of Parameters

(1) Parameter Display
Parameter settings are displayed as shown below.
Decimal display in five digit
(2) Definition of Display for Function Selection Parameters

Each digit of the function selection parameters has a meaning. For example, the rightmost digit of parameter Pn000 is expressed as Pn000.0.
IMPORTANT
1. Each digit of the function selection parameters is defined as shown below. The following explains the purpose of each digit of a parameter. Pn000.0 or n.: Indicates the value for the 1st digit of parameter Pn000. Pn000.1 or n.: Indicates the value for the 2nd digit of parameter Pn000. Pn000.2 or n.: Indicates the value for the 3rd digit of parameter Pn000. Pn000.3 or n.: Indicates the value for the 4th digit of parameter Pn000.
1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit Hexadecimal display
How to Display Parameters 2. After changing the parameters with After restart mentioned in Setting Validation column in the table on the following pages, turn OFF the main circuit and control power supplies and then turn them ON again to enable the new settings.
12
12-25
12 Appendix 12.3.2 List of Parameters
Parameter No. Pn000
Name Function Selection Basic Switches

4th 3rd 2nd 1st digit digit digit digit
Setting Range
Units
Reference Section
n.
Direction Selection (Refer to "8.3.2 Switching the Servomotor Rotation Direction.") 0 1 Sets CCW as forward direction. Sets CW as forward direction (Reverse Rotation Mode).
2 and 3 Reserved (Do not change.) Control Method Selection (Refer to "8.2 Control Mode Selection.") 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B Speed control (analog reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Torque control (analog reference) Internal set speed control (contact reference) Internal set speed control (contact reference) Internal set speed control (contact reference) Internal set speed control (contact reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Torque control (analog reference) Speed control (analog reference) Speed control (analog reference) Position control (pulse train reference) Torque control (analog reference)
Speed control (analog reference) Torque control (analog reference)
Speed control (analog reference) Zero clamp Position control (Inhibit)
Position control (pulse train reference)
Axis Address 0 to F Sets SERVOPACK axis address (Function supported by PC software SigmaWin 100/200).
Rotation Type/Linear Type Startup Selection (When the Encoder is not Connected) 0 1 Starts up as rotation type. Reserved (Do not change.)
12-26
Parameter No. Pn001
Name Function Selection Application Switches 1

Setting Range
Units
Reference Section
n.
Servo OFF or Alarm Stop Mode (Refer to "8.3.5 Selecting the Stopping Method After Servo OFF.") 0 1 2 Stops the motor by applying dynamic brake (DB). Stops the motor by applying dynamic brake (DB) and then releases DB. Makes the motor coast to a stop state without using the dynamic brake (DB).
Overtravel (OT) Stop Mode (Refer to "8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function.") 0 1 2 Same setting as Pn001.0 (Stops the motor by applying DB or by coasting). Sets the torque of Pn406 to the maximum value, decelerate the motor to a stop, and then sets it to servolock state. Sets the torque of Pn406 to the maximum value, decelerates the motor to a stop, and then sets it to coasting state.
AC/DC Power Input Selection (Refer to "6.1.3 Typical Main Circuit Wirning Examples.") Not applicable to DC power input: Input AC power supply through L1, L2 (, and L3) terminals. 0 1 Applicable to DC power input: Input DC power supply between + 1 and
Warning Code Output Selection (Refer to "11.1.2 Warning Display.") 0 1 ALO1, ALO2, and ALO3 output only alarm codes. ALO1, ALO2, and ALO3 output both alarm codes and warning codes. While warning codes are output, ALM signal output remains ON (normal state).
12
12-27
Parameter No. Pn002

Setting Range
Units
Reference Section
n.
Speed Control Option (T-REF Terminal Allocation) 0 1 N/A Uses T-REF as an external torque limit input. (Refer to "8.9.3 Torque Limiting Using an Analog Voltage Reference.") 2 Uses T-REF as a torque feed forward input. (Refer to "9.4.2 Torque Feed-forward.") 3 Uses T-REF as an external torque limit input when P-CL and N-CL are ON. (Refer to "8.9.4 Torque Limiting Using an External Torque Limit and Analog Voltage Reference.")
Torque Control Option (V-REF Terminal Allocation) (Refer to "8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control.") 0 1 N/A Uses V-REF as an external speed limit input.
Absolute Encoder Usage (Refer to "8.4.2 Selecting an Absolute Encoder.") 0 1 Uses absolute encoder as an absolute encoder. Uses absolute encoder as an incremental encoder.
Reserved (Do not change)
* The parameter Pn111 setting is enabled only when the parameter Pn110.1 is set to 0.
12-28
Parameter No. Pn003

Setting Range
Units
Reference Section
n.
Analog Monitor 1 Torque Reference Monitor (Refer to "9.5 Analog Monitor.") 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Motor speed: 1 V/100 min-1 Speed reference: 1 V/100 min-1 Internal torque reference: 1 V/100% Position error: 0.05 V/1 reference unit Position error: 0.05 V/100 reference units Reference pulse frequency (converted to min-1): 1 V/100 min-1 Motor speed 4: 1 V/250 min-1 Motor speed 8: 1 V/150 min-1
8 to F Reserved (Do not change)
Analog Monitor 2 Speed Reference Monitor (Refer to "9.5 Analog Monitor.") 0 to F Same as Analog Monitor 1 Torque Reference Monitor
Pn004 Pn005 Pn100 Pn101 Pn102 Pn103 Pn104 Pn105 Pn106 Pn107 Pn108 Pn109
Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Speed Loop Gain Speed Loop Integral Time Constant Position Loop Gain Moment of Inertia Ratio 2nd Speed Loop Gain 2nd Speed Loop Integral Time Constant 2nd Position Loop Gain Bias Bias Width Addition Feed-forward
0000 to 1110 1 to 2000 15 to 51200 1 to 2000 0 to 10000 (0 to 20000)* 1 to 2000 15 to 51200 1 to 2000 0 to 450 0 to 250 0 to 100
1 Hz 0.01 ms 1/s 1% 1 Hz 0.01 ms 1/s 1 min-1 1 reference unit 1%
0000 0000 40 2000 40 0 40 2000 40 0 7 0
Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.3 9.2.6 9.3.3 9.4.9 9.4.9 9.4.9 9.4.6 9.4.6 9.4.1
* Used when the software version number is later than 32.
12
12-29
Parameter No. Pn10A Pn10B
Name Feed-forward Filter Time Constant Gain-related Application Switches
Setting Range 0 to 6400 0000 to 2314
Units 0.01 ms
Factory Setting 0 0000
Setting Validation Immediately After restart/ Immediately
n.
Mode Switch Selection (Refer to "9.4.5 Using the Mode Switch (P/PI Switching).")
0 1 2 3 4
Uses internal torque reference as the condition (Level setting: Pn10C) Uses speed reference as the condition (Level setting: Pn10D) Uses acceleration as the condition (Level setting: Pn10E) Uses position error pulse as the condition (Level setting: Pn10F) No mode switch function available
Setting Validation Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Setting Validation After restart After restart After restart Setting Validation After restart After restart After restart After restart
Speed Loop Control Method (Refer to "9.3.5 Speed Loop Integral Time Constant.") 0 1 PI control IP control
2 and 3 Reserved (Do not change)
Automatic Gain Switching Condition Selection * (Refer to "10.3.5 Automatic Gain Switching Function.")
0 1 2 3
Automatic gain switching disabled (Factory setting) Switches the gain according to the position reference condition only. Switches the gain according to the position error condition only. Switches the gain according to the position reference and position error condition only.
Pn10C Pn10D Pn10E Pn10F
Mode Switch Torque Reference Mode Switch Speed Reference Mode Switch Acceleration Mode Switch Error Pulse
0 to 800 0 to 10000 0 to 3000 0 to 10000
1% 1 min-1 1 min-1/ s 1 reference unit
200 0 0 0
Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
9.4.5 9.4.5 9.4.5 9.4.5
* Used only when the software version number is higher than 32.
12-30
Parameter No. Pn110
Name Online Autotuning Switches
Setting Range
Units
Setting Validation After restart/ Immediately
Reference Section
n.
Online Autotuning Method (Refer to "9.2.3 Selecting the Online Autotuning Execution Method.")
0 1 2
Tunes only at the beginning of operation. Always tunes. Does not perform autotuning. Setting Validation Immediately
Speed Feedback Compensation Selection (Refer to "9.4.8 Speed Feedback Compensation.") 0 1 Applicable N/A
Friction Compensation Selection
Setting Validation
0 1 2
Friction compensation: Disabled Friction compensation: Small Friction compensation: Large Immediately
Pn111 Pn112 Pn113 Pn114 Pn115 Pn116 Pn117 Pn118 Pn119 Pn11A Pn11B Pn11C Pn11D Pn11E Pn11F Pn120 Pn121 Pn122 Pn123 Pn124 Pn125
Speed Feedback Compensation 1 Reserved (Do not change)
1 to 500
1%
100 100 1000 200 32 16 100 100 50 1000 50 70 100 100 0 0 50 0 0
Immediately
9.4.8
Automatic Gain Switching Timer *2 Automatic Gain Switching Width *2
1 to 10000 1 to 250
1 ms 1 reference unit
100 7
Immediately Immediately
10.3.5 10.3.5
* 1. The parameter Pn111 setting is enabled only when the parameter Pn110.1 is set to 0. * 2. Used only when the software version number is later than 32.
12
12-31
Parameter No. Pn200
Name Position Control References Selection Switches

4th digit 3rd digit 2nd digit 1st digit
Setting Range
Unit
n.
Reference Pulse Form 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sign + Pulse, positive logic CW + CCW, positive logic Phase A + Phase B ( 1), positive logic Phase A + Phase B ( 2), positive logic Phase A + Phase B ( 4), positive logic Sign + Pulse, negative logic CW + CCW, negative logic Phase A + Phase B ( 1), negative logic Phase A + Phase B ( 2), negative logic Phase A + Phase B ( 4), negative logic
Error Counter Clear Signal From 0 1 2 3 Clears error counter when the signal is at H level. Clears error counter at the rising edge of the signal. Clears error counter when the signal is at L level. Clears error counter at the falling edge of the signal.
Clear Operation 0 1 2 Clears error counter at the baseblock. Does not clear error counter (Possible to clear error counter only with CLR signal). Clears error counter when an alarm occurs.
Filter Selection 0 1 Reference input filter for line driver signals Reference input filter for open collector signals
Pn201 Pn202 Pn203 Pn204 Pn205 Pn206
PG Dividing Ratio (For 16-bit or less) Electronic Gear Ratio (Numerator) Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) Position Reference Accel/Decel Time Constant Multiturn Limit Setting * Reserved (Do not change)
16 to 16384 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 0 to 6400 0 to 65535
1 P/rev 0.01 ms 1 rev
16384 4 1 0 65535 16384
After restart After restart After restart Immediately After restart
8.5.7 8.6.2 8.6.2 8.6.4 8.4.7
* This setting must be changed only for special applications. Changing this limit inappropriately or unintentionally can be dangerous.
12-32
Parameter No. Pn207
Name Position Control Function Switches

Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
Position Reference Filter Selection (Refer to "8.6.4 Smoothing.") 0 1 Acceleration/deceleration filter Average movement filter
Position Control Option (Refer to "9.4.3 Speed Feed-forward.") N/A 0 1 Uses V-REF as a speed feed-forward input.
Dividing Output Range Selection *1 (Refer to "10.3.2 Improvement of Dividing Output Resolution.") Uses the parameter Pn201 (For 16-bit or less) as the dividing ratio (Factory setting). 0 1 Uses the parameter Pn212 (For 17-bit or more) as the dividing ratio.
Pn208 Pn212 Pn217 Pn218
Position Reference Movement Averaging Time PG Dividing Ratio (For 17-bit or more) * Reference Pulse Input Multiplication *1 Reference Pulse Multiplication Range Switching Function
0 to 6400 16 to 1073741824 1 to 99 0000 to 0001
0.01 ms 1 P/rev 1
0 2048 1 0000
After restart After restart After restart Immediately
8.6.4 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.3
n.
Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Range Switching Function 0 1 Disabled (Factory setting) Enabled
Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change)
Pn300
150 to 3000
0.01V / rated speed 1 min-1 (0.1min-1) *2 1 min-1 (0.1min-1) *2 1 min-1 (0.1min-1) *2
600
Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
Pn301 Pn302 Pn303
Internal Set Speed 1 Internal Set Speed 2 Internal Set Speed 3
0 to 10000 0 to 10000 0 to 10000
100 200 300
8.5.1 8.7.4 9.4.3 8.8.1 8.8.1 8.8.1
* 1. Used only when the software version number is later than 32. * 2. Used a unit of 0.1 min-1 unit for direct-drive servomotors or for servomotors whose maximum speed is 500 min-1 or less.
12
12-33
Parameter No. Pn304 Pn305 Pn306 Pn307 Pn308 Pn309 Pn400
Name JOG Speed Soft Start Acceleration Time Soft Start Deceleration Time Speed Reference Filter Time Constant Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant Reserved (Do not change) *1 Torque Reference Input Gain
Setting Range 0 to 10000 0 to 10000 0 to 10000 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 500 10 to 100
Unit 1 min-1 1 ms 1 ms 0.01 ms 0.01 ms 1 min-1 0.1 V/rated torque
Factory Setting 500 0 0 40 0 60 30 V
Setting Validation Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
Reference Section 8.1.1 8.5.4 8.5.4 8.5.5 9.4.7 8.7.1 8.9.3 8.9.4 9.4.2 9.4.10 8.9.1 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.4 8.9.2 8.9.4 8.3.3 8.7.4 9.4.10
Pn401 Pn402 Pn403 Pn404 Pn405 Pn406 Pn407 Pn408
Torque Reference Filter Time Constant Forward Torque Limit Reverse Torque Limit Forward External Torque Limit Reverse External Torque Limit Emergency Stop Torque Speed Limit during Torque Control Torque Function Switches
0 to 65535 0 to 800 0 to 800 0 to 800 0 to 800 0 to 800 0 to 10000 0000 to 0101
0.01 ms 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1 min-1
100 800 800 100 100 800 10000 0000
Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
n.
Notch Filter Selection 2 (Refer to "9.4.10 Torque Reference Filter.") 0 1 First notch filter disabled. Uses first notch filter.
Reserved (Do not change) Notch Filter Function 2 1 (Refer to "10.3.4 Second Stage Notch Filter and Changeable Q Value.") 0 1 Second notch filter disabled. Uses second notch filter.
Pn409
First Stage Notch Filter Frequency*3
50 to 2000
1 Hz
2000
Immediately
9.4.10
* 1. Used only when the software version number is later than 32. * 2. For 200-V class 5 kW to 15 kW servomotors, the factory setting is n.1. * 3. For 200-V class 5 kW to 15 kW servomotors, the factory setting is 1500 Hz.
12-34
Parameter No. Pn40A Pn40B Pn40C Pn500 Pn501 Pn502 Pn503 Pn504 Pn505 Pn506 Pn507 Pn508 Pn509
Name First Stage Notch Filter Q Value * Second Stage Notch Filter Frequency * Second Stage Notch Filter Q Value * Positioning Completed Width Zero Clamp Level Rotation Detection Level Speed Coincidence Signal Output Width NEAR Signal Width Overflow Level Brake Reference - Servo OFF Delay Time Brake Reference Output Speed Level Timing for Brake Reference Output during Motor Operation Momentary Hold time
Setting Range 50 to 400 (0.50 to 4.00) 50 to 2000 50 to 400 (0.50 to 4.00) 0 to 250 0 to 10000 1 to 10000 0 to 100 1 to 250 1 to 32767 0 to 50 0 to 10000 10 to 100 20 to 1000 ms
Unit 0.01 1 Hz 0.01 1 reference unit 1 min-1 1 min-1 1 min-1 1 reference unit 256 reference unit 10 ms 1 min-1 10 ms 1 ms
Factory Setting 70 (0.70) 2000 70 (0.70) 7 10 20 10 7 1024 0 100 50 20
Setting Validation Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
Reference Section 10.3.4 10.3.4 10.3.4 8.6.5 8.5.6 8.11.3 8.5.8 8.6.6 9.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.4 8.3.4 8.3.6
* Used only when the software version number is later than 32.
12
12-35
Parameter No. Pn50A
Name Input Signal Selections 1

Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
Input Signal Allocation Mode (Refer to "7.3.2 Input Circuit Signal Allocation.") 0 Uses the sequence input signal terminals with standard allocation. 1 Changes the sequence input signal allocation for each signal.
/S-ON Signal Mapping Signal Polarity: Normal; Servo ON when ON (L-level) Signal Polarity: Reverse; Servo ON when OFF (H-level) (Refer to "8.3.1 Setting the Servo ON Signal.") 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ON when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Sets signal ON. Sets signal OFF. OFF when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). OFF when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
/P-CON Signal Mapping (P control when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "9.4.4 Proportional Control Operation (Proportional Operation Reference).") 0 to F Same as /S-ON P-OT Signal Mapping (Overtravel when OFF (H-level)) (Refer to "8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function.") 0 Forward run allowed when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Forward run allowed when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Forward run prohibited. Forward run allowed. Forward run allowed when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). Forward run allowed when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
12-36
* When Pn50A.0 is set to 0 for the input signal standard allocation mode, the following modes are compatible: Pn50A.1 = 7, Pn50A.3 = 8, and Pn50B.0 = 8. Parameter No. Pn50B Name Input Signal Selections 2
Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
N-OT Signal Mapping (Overtravel when OFF (H-level)) (Refer to "8.3.3 Setting the Overtravel Limit Function.") 0 Reverse run allowed when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Reverse run allowed when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Reverse run prohibited. Reverse run allowed. Reverse run allowed when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). Reverse run allowed when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
/ALM-RST Signal Mapping (Alarm Reset when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.11.1 Servo Alarm Output (ALM) and Alarm Code Output (ALO1, ALO2, ALO3).") 0 to F Same as N-OT /P-CL Signal Mapping (Torque Limit when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals).") 0 to F Same as /S-OT, the setting of 2nd digit of Pn50A /N-CL Signal Mapping (Torque Limit when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.9.2 External Torque Limit (Output Torque Limiting by Input Signals).") 0 to F Same as /S-OT, the setting of 2nd digit of Pn50A
INFO
Input signal polarities Signal ON OFF Effective Level Low (L) level High (H) level Voltage level 0V 24 V Contact Close Open
12
12-37
Parameter No. Pn50C

Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
/SPD-D Signal Mapping (Refer to "8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed.") 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ON when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Sets signal ON. Sets signal OFF. ON when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
/SPD-A Signal Mapping (Refer to "8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed.") 0 to F Same as /SPD-D /SPD-B Signal Mapping (Refer to "8.8 Operating Using Speed Control with an Internally Set Speed.") 0 to F Same as /SPD-D /C-SEL Signal Mapping (Control mode change when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.10.2 Switching the Control Mode.") 0 F Same as /SPD-D
12-38
Parameter No. Pn50D

Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
/ZCLAMP Signal Mapping (Zero clamp when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.5.6 Using the Zero Clamp Function.") 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ON when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Sets signal ON. Sets signal OFF. ON when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
/INHIBIT Signal Mapping (Reference pulse inhibit when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "8.6.7 Reference Pulse Inhibit Function (INHIBIT).") 0 to F Same as /ZCLAMP /G-SEL Signal Mapping (Gain change when ON (L-level)) (Refer to "9.4.9 Switching Gain Settings.") 0 to F Same as /ZCLAMP Reserved (Do not change)
12
12-39
Parameter No. Pn50E
Name Output Signal Selections 1

Setting Range
Unit
Reference Section
n.
Positioning Completion Signal Mapping (/COIN) (Refer to "8.6.5 Positioning Completed Output Signal.") 0 1 2 3 Disabled (the above signal is not used.) Outputs the signal from CN1-25, 26 output terminal. Outputs the signal from CN1-27, 28 output terminal. Outputs the signal from CN1-29, 30 output terminal.
Speed Coincidence Detection Signal Mapping (/V-CMP) (Refer to "8.5.8 Speed Coincidence Output.") 0 to 3 Same as /COIN Rotation Detection Signal Mapping (/TGON) (Refer to "8.11.3 Running Output Signal (/TGON).") 0 to 3 Same as /COIN Servo Ready Signal Mapping (/S-RDY) (Refer to "8.11.4 Servo Ready (/S-RDY) Output.") 0 to 3 Same as /COIN
Pn50F
Output Signal Selections 2

0000
After restart
n.
Torque Limit Detection Signal Mapping (/CLT) (Refer to "8.9.5 Checking Output Torque Limiting during Operation.") 0 1 2 3 Disabled (the above signal is not used.) Outputs the signal from CN1-25, -26 output terminal. Outputs the signal from CN1-27, -28 output terminal. Outputs the signal from CN1-29, -30 output terminal.
Speed Limit Detection Signal Mapping (/VLT) (Refer to "8.7.4 Limiting Servomotor Speed during Torque Control.") 0 to 3 Same as /CLT Brake Interlock Signal Mapping (/BK) (Refer to "8.3.4 Setting for Holding Brakes.") 0 to 3 Same as /CLT Warning Signal Mapping (/WARN) (Refer to "8.11.2 Warning Output (/WARN).") 0 to 3 Same as /CLT
12-40
Parameter No. Pn510
Name Output Signal Selections 3

Setting Range 0000 to 0333
Unit
Reference Section
n.
Near Signal Mapping (/NEAR) (Refer to "8.6.6 Positioning Near Signal.") 0 1 2 3 Disabled (the above signal is not used.) Outputs the signal from CN1-25 or -26 terminals. Outputs the signal from CN1-27 or -28 terminals. Outputs the signal from CN1-29 or -30 terminals.
Reserved (Do not change) Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Change Output Signal Mapping (/PSELA)* (Refer to "10.3.3 Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Range Switching Function.") 0 to 3 Same as /NEAR Reserved (Do not change)
Pn511 Pn512
Reserved (Do not change) Output Signal Reversal Settings

8888 0000
Immediately After restart
7.3.3
n.
Output Signal Reversal for CN1-25 or -26 Terminals 0 1 Output signal is not reversed. Output signal is reversed.
* Used only when the software version number is later than 32.
12
12-41
Parameter No. Pn513
Name Input Signal Selections 5 *1

Setting Range 0000 to 00FF
Unit
n.
Reference Pulse Input Mulitiplication Change 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ON when CN1-40 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is ON (L-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is ON (L-level). Sets signal ON. Sets signal OFF. (Factory setting) ON when CN1-40 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-41 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-42 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-43 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-44 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-45 input signal is OFF (H-level). ON when CN1-46 input signal is OFF (H-level).
Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change)
Pn51A Pn51B Pn51C Pn51E Pn600 Pn601
Position Error Level Between Motor and Load *1 Reserved (Do not change) *1 Reserved (Do not change) *1 Excessive Position Error Warning Level *1 Regenerative Resistor Capacity 2 Reserved (Do not change)
0 to 32767 1 to 32767 0 to 10000 0 to 100 Depends on SERVOPACK Capacity 3 Depends on SERVOPACK Capacity 3
1 reference unit 256 reference units 1 min-1 1% 10 W
0 100 450 0 0W 0W
Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
10.5.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 6.5
* 1. Used only when the software version number is later than 32. * 2. Normally set to 0. When using an external regenerative resistor, set the allowable power loss (W) of the regenerative resistor. * 3. The upper limit is the maximum output capacity (W) of the SERVOPACK.
12-42
12.3.3 Monitor Modes

The following list shows monitor modes available.
Parameter No. Un000 Un001 Un002 Un003 Un004 Un005 Un006 Un007 Un008 Un009 Un00A Un00B Un00C Un00D Actual motor speed Input speed reference Internal torque reference (Value for rated torque) Rotation angle 1 (Number of pulses from the zero point:16-bit decimal code) Rotation angle 2 (Angle from the zero point (electrical angle)) Input signal monitor Output signal monitor Input reference pulse speed (displayed only in position control mode) Error counter value (amount of position error) (displayed only in position control mode) Accumulated load rate (Value for the rated torque as 100%: Displays effective torque in 10 s cycle.) Regenerative load rate (Value for the processable regenerative power as 100%: Displays regenerative power consumption in 10 s cycle.) Power consumed by DB resistance (Value for the processable power when dynamic brake is applied as 100%: Displays DB power consumption in 10 s cycle.) Input reference pulse counter (hexadecimal code) (displayed only in position control mode) Feedback pulse counter (hexadecimal code) Content of Display Unit min-1 min-1 % pulse deg min-1 reference unit % % % -
12
12-43
12 Appendix
12.4 Parameter Recording Table

Use the following table for recording parameters.
Note: Setting validation (immediately or after restart) for Pn10B and Pn110 differs depending on the digit. The digits validated after restart are underlined in Factory Setting column. Parameter No. Pn000 Pn001 Pn002 Pn003 Pn004 Pn005 Pn100 Pn101 Pn102 Pn103 Pn104 Pn105 Pn106 Pn107 Pn108 Pn109 Pn10A Pn10B Pn10C Pn10D Pn10E Pn10F Pn110 Pn111 Pn112 Pn113 Pn114 Pn115 Pn116 Pn117 Pn118 Pn119 Pn11A Pn11B Pn11C Pn11D Pn11E Pn11F Factory Setting 0000 0000 0000 0002 0000 0000 40 Hz 20.00 ms 40 /s 0% 40 Hz 20.00 ms 40 /s 0 min-1 7 reference units 0% 0.00 ms 0000 200% 0 min-1 0 min-1/s 0 reference units 0010 100% 100% 1000 200 32 16 100% 100% 50 /s 1000% 50 Hz 70 Hz 100% 100% 0 ms Name Function Selection Basic Switches Function Selection Application Switches 1 Function Selection Application Switches 2 Function Selection Application Switches 3 Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Speed Loop Gain Speed Loop Integral Time Constant Position Loop Gain Moment of Inertia Ratio 2nd Speed Loop Gain 2nd Loop Integral Time Constant 2nd Position Loop Gain Bias Bias Width Addition Feed-forward Feed-forward Filter Time Constant Gain-related Application Switches Mode Switch Torque Reference Mode Switch Speed Reference Mode Switch Acceleration Mode Switch Error Pulse Online Autotuning Switches Speed Feedback Compensation Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Setting Validation After restart After restart After restart After restart Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately After restart Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately After restart Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
12-44
12.4 Parameter Recording Table
Parameter No. Pn120 Pn121 Pn122 Pn123 Pn124 Pn125 Pn200 Pn201 Pn202 Pn203 Pn204 Pn205 Pn206 Pn207 Pn208 Pn212 Pn217 Pn218 Pn300 Pn301 Pn302 Pn303 Pn304 Pn305 Pn306 Pn307 Pn308 Pn309 Pn400 Pn401 Pn402 Pn403 Pn404 Pn405 Pn406 Pn407 Pn408 Pn409 Pn40A
Factory Setting 0 ms 50 Hz 0 Hz 0% 1 ms 1 reference unit 0000 16384 P/rev 4 1 0.00 ms 65535 rev 16384 P/rev 0000 0.00 ms 2048 P/rev 1 0000 6.00 V/ rated speed 100 min-1 200 min-1 300 min-1 500 min-1 0 ms 0 ms 0.40 ms 0.00 ms 60 min-1 3.0 V/ rated speed 1.00 ms 800% 800% 100% 100% 800% 10000 min-1 0000 2000 Hz 70 (0.70)
Name Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Automatic Gain Switching Timer Automatic Gain Switching Width Position Control References Selection Switches PG Dividing Ratio (For 16-bit or less) Electronic Gear Ratio (Numerator) Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) Position Reference Accel/Decel Time Constant Multiturn Limit Setting Reserved (Do not change) Position Control Function Switches Position Reference Movement Averaging Time PG Dividing Ratio (For 17-bit or more) Reference Pulse Input Multiplication Reference Pulse Multiplication Range Switching Function Speed Reference Input Gain Internal Set Speed 1 Internal Set Speed 2 Internal Set Speed 3 JOG Speed Soft Start Acceleration Time Soft Start Deceleration Time Speed Reference Filter Time Constant Speed Feedback Filter Time Constant Reserved (Do not change) Torque Reference Input Gain Torque Reference Filter Time Constant Forward Torque Limit Reverse Torque Limit Forward External Torque Limit Reverse External Torque Limit Emergency Stop Torque Speed Limit during Torque Control Torque Function Switches First Stage Notch Filter Frequency First Stage Notch Filter Q Value
Setting Validation Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately After restart After restart After restart After restart Immediately After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
12
12-45
12 Appendix
Parameter No. Pn40B Pn40C Pn500 Pn501 Pn502 Pn503 Pn504 Pn505 Pn506 Pn507 Pn508 Pn509 Pn50A Pn50B Pn50C Pn50D Pn50E Pn50F Pn510 Pn511 Pn512 Pn513 Pn51A Pn51B Pn51C Pn51E Pn600 Pn601
Factory Setting 2000 Hz 70 (0.70) 7 reference units 10 min-1 20 min-1 10 min-1 7 reference units 1024 reference units 10 ms 100 min-1 500 ms 20 ms 2100 6543 8888 8888 3211 0000 0000 8888 0000 0088 0 reference units 100 reference units 450 min-1 0% 0W 0W
Name Second Stage Notch Filter Frequency Second Stage Notch Filter Q Value Positioning Completed Width Zero Clamp Level Rotation Detection Level Speed Coincidence Signal Output Width NEAR Signal Width Overflow Level Brake Reference-Servo OFF Delay Time Brake Reference Output Speed Level Timing for Brake Reference Output during Motor Operation Momentary Hold Time Input Signal Selections 1 Input Signal Selections 2 Input Signal Selections 3 Input Signal Selections 4 Output Signal Selections 1 Output Signal Selections 2 Output Signal Selections 3 Reserved (Do not change) Output Signal Reversal Settings Input Signal Selections Position Error Level Between Motor and Load Reserved (Do not change) Reserved (Do not change) Excessive Position Error Warning Level Regenerative Resistor Capacity Reserved (Do not change)
Setting Validation Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart After restart Immediately After restart After restart Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately Immediately
12-46
Index
INDEX
A
absolute encoder battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31 absolute encoder reception sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-32 absolute encoder setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-30 absolute encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27 adaptation to single-turn data absolute encoder - - - - - - - - 10-3, 10-16 additional functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3 adjusting offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-40 alarm code output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77, 10-22, 11-2 alarm display and troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6 alarm display table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2 alarm reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77, 10-22, 11-2 alarm traceback data clear (Fn006) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12 alarm traceback data display (Fn000) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9 alignment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 allocating input signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24 allocating output signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26 allowable loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50 ALM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 ALM-RST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13, 7-3 ALO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 ambient/storage temperature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 analog monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28 analog monitor cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31 analog monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 analog voltage reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11 angular transmission error accuracy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 attaching the ferrite core - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23 automatic gain switching - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 10-3 automatic gain switching function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14 automatic gain switching timer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15, 10-19 automatic gain switching width - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15, 10-19 automatic offset-signal adjustment of motor current detection signal (Fn00E) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13 autotuning functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 average movement filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
SGMDH servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23 SGMGH servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23 SGMSH servomotors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23 cables for analog monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-59 cables for connecting personal computers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-57 calculating the required capacity of regenerative resistors - - - - - 12-7 CE marking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 checking products - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 clear signal form selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-49 CLR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 CLT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 CN1 terminal layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12 CN2 terminal layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8 coaxiality of output axis and mounting fauet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-51 COIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 connecting a reactor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-30 connecting external regenerative resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31 connecting regenerative resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31 connecting the digital operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2 connection cable for digital operator- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31 connection cable for personal computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31 connection to host controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-14 connector terminal block converter unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-60 connectors and cables for encoder signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48 connectors and cables for SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-52 continuous output current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 control method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 control mode selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17, 8-75 CSA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 current detection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-22
D
DATA/ENTER key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 DATA/SHIFT key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 DC reactors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-78 selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 digital operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31, 5-58 key names and functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 status display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6 direct-drive motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11 dividing ratio - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 model designation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13 disc table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-52 dividing ratio setting error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-22 DOWN key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 DSPL/SET key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 duct-ventilated type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 dynamic brake - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5
B
ball screw - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-52 base-mounted type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 BAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31 absolute encoder battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-66 belt and pulley- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-52 bias setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 BK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 brake power supply unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-61 brake power supply units selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-34 built-in open collector power supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
E
electronic gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 electronic gear ratio equation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-52 EMC installation conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22 encoder cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40 encoder cables and connectors SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-46 encoder Connector (CN2) terminal layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8 encoder model unmatched - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-22 encoder signal converter unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-81
C
cable selection SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18 SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27
Index-1
Index
encoder signal output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45 enhanced dividing output resolution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 10-3 excessive position error warning- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-22 excessive position error warning level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 extending encoder cables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-26 external regenerative resistor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-63 external torque limit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11, 8-70
F
feed forward compensation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 feed-forward reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15 first stage notch filter frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14 first stage notch filter Q value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14, 10-19 flexible cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53 wiring precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53 forward rotation prohibited - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-20 frequency characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 fuse capacity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-32
G
gain-related application switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 ground noise - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 grounding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19
H
handling batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29 handling oil and water- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48 hot start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12
magnetic contactors selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 main circuit cables and connectors SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6 main circuit wiring examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 manual adjustment of the torque reference offset - - - - - - - - - - - 8-63 manual offset-adjustment of motor current detection signal (Fn00F)7-14 manual tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12 mating concentricity of the flange - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48 max. allowable input motor speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 max. output current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 mechanical tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48 middle-capacity series SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45 mode switch (P/PI switching) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-19 MODE/SET key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 model designation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5 molded-case circuit breaker - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-68 molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-32 moment load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50 moment of inertia ratio - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 moment of inertia ratio setting range- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3, 10-16 monitor display feedback pulse counter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30 reference pulse counter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30 monitor mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27 motor models display (Fn011) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16 multiturn limit setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-36
I
I/O signal (CN1) names and functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 I/O signal cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30, 5-54 I/O signal connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9 impact acceleration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 impact occurrences - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 impact resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49, 3-52 improved functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16 improvement of dividing output resolution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 increase moment of inertia ratio range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12 input circuit signal allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22 input signal monitor display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28 input signal selections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 installation conditions of EMC directives - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22 instantaneous power loss settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-26 interface for reference input circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15 analog input circuit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15 position reference input circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-15 internal torque limit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69
N
names and functions of main circuit terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 N-CL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 NEAR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 noise data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 noise filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-69 noise filter for brake power supplies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20 noise filters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-20 selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 noise interference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18 north american safety standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 N-OT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 notch filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-26 number of pulses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
O
online autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5 machine rigidity setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8 saving the results - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-10 operating using position control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48 operating using speed control with an internally set speed - - - - - 8-66 operating using speed control with analog reference - - - - - - - - - 8-38 operating using torque control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61 operation in monitor mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-29 output circuit interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 line driver output circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 open-collector output circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17 photocoupler output circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17 output circuit signal allocation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25 output signal monitor display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-29 output signal selections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 overshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-19 overtravel stop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5
L
LEFT key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 limiting torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69 list of parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-24 list of utility function modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8 load moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 load regulation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 lost motion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53
M
machine rigidity setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8 magnetic contactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-74
Index-2
Index
P
panel operator key names and functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 status display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-6 PAO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 PAO serial data specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-33 parameter setting mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18 parameter settings initialization (Fn005) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11 parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19, 7-21 example of changing function selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21 password setting (protects parameters from being changed) (Fn010)7-15 PBO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 P-CL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 PCO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 P-CON- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 peripheral device selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30 perpendicularity between the flange face and output shaft - 3-48, 3-51 PG divider - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-46 PG dividing ratio (for 16-bit or less) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 PG dividing ratio (for 17-bit or more) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9, 10-19 PL1 to 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 polarity reversal- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11 position control block diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-56 position control by host controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16 position control function switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 position error level between motor and load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 position loop gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13 positioning completed output signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-58 positioning completed width setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 positioning near signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-59 positioning time reduction functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 P-OT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 product part names- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4 programming for the capacity selection on AC servomotor- - - - - 2-14 proportional control operation (proportional operation reference) 9-18 protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 protective specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 PSEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10 PSO- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 PULS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 pulse dividing ratio setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-46
reference pulse input multiplication switching function - - - - - - -10-10 reference pulse multiplication range switching function- - - - - - -10-19 reference unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-50 regenerative resistor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13, 5-63 regenerative resistor capacity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-33 regenerative resistor unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-65 regenerative resistors selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-34 replacing batteries - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-30 replacing oil seal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-21 RESET key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 reverse rotation prohibited - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-20 RIGHT key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 running output signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-78 run-out at the end of the shaft - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48
S
second stage notch filter and changeable Q value - - - - - - 1-11, 10-12 second stage notch filter Changeable Q value - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3 second stage notch filter frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-14, 10-19 second stage notch filter Q value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-14, 10-19 selecting a position reference filter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-57 selecting an absolute encoder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29 selecting the speed loop control method (PI Control or IP Control)9-14 selecting the stopping method after servo OFF- - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25 SEN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 SEN signal connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-28 sequence I/O signal monitor display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28 sequence input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 sequence input circuit interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-16 sequence output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 serial number and manufactured data of SERVOPACK or servomotor reading function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3 serial number and manufactured data reading function - - - - - - -10-18 servo alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-22 servo alarm (ALM) output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2 servo alarm output (ALM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77 servo gain adjustment methods- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2 explanation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12 servo ready output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-79 servo system configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7 servomotor support tool for the capacity selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14 winding resistance loss- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-11 servomotor disconnection alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-22 servomotor inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-21 servomotor main circuit wire size and connectors- - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8 servomotors capacity selection examples - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-2 direction of rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52 direction of servomotor rotation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49 inspection and maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-21 mechanical specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 model designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 nameplate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2 overhanging loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15 precautions on servomotor installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47 product part names - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4 winding resistance loss- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-11 wire size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
Q
Q value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12
R
rack-mounted type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 rated input motor speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 rated torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 reactors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-78 DC reactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-29 selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 reference pulse form - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 reference pulse inhibit function (INHIBIT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-60 reference pulse input multiplication - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11, 10-19 reference pulse input multiplication range switching - - - - - - - - - 10-3 reference pulse input multiplication switching - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
Index-3
Index
SERVOPACK upgraded versions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2 SERVOPACK inspection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-21 SERVOPACKs parts replacement schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-22 SERVOPACKs absorbable energy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-13 applicable servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16 cable types - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38 dimensional drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16 installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6 internal block diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8 load moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12 model designations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15 nameplate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 operating conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6 orientation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7 overload characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12 power losses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11 power supply capacities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11 product part names - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5 ratings and specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3 wire size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38 setting a reference pulse form- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48 setting for holding brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22 setting PG dividing ratio of 5-digit or more - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10 setting the electronic gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-50 setting the overtravel limit function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-20 setting the servo ON signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18 setting the speed bias - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22 SGMAH and SGMPH servomotor connectors for standard environments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9 SGMAH servomotors (3000 min-1) derating rate for servomotor fitted with oil seal - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5 dimensional drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-56 holding brake electrical specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6 holding brake moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5 output shafts with oil seals- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5 with low-backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8 with standard backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6 without gears- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4 SGMCS direct-drive motor supporting function - - - - - - - - 10-3, 10-4 SGMCS direct-drive motors ratings and Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5 SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9 all middle-capacity series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-166 all small-capacity series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-165 connectors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29 dimensional drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161, 3-162 dividing ratio- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9 mechanical specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50 middle-capacity series- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-29, 3-45 model designation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5 ratings and specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41, 10-5 small-capacity series- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-29, 3-41 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43, 3-46 SGMDH servomotors (2000 min-1) connectors conforming to IP67 and european safety standards5-28 connectors for standard environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18 dimensional drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-159
holding brake electrical specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40 main circuit connector pin arrangement- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28 servomotor main circuit connector pin arrangement - - - - - - 5-18 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40 with holding brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39 SGMGH servomotors (1000 min-1) connectors conforming to IP67 and european safety standards5-22 connectors for standard environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-15 dimensional drawings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-127 holding brake electrical specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28 holding brake moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27 main circuit connector pin arrangement- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16 servomotor main circuit connector pin arrangement - - - - - - 5-24 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27 with low-backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31 with standard backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29 without gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26 SGMGH servomotors (1500 min-1) connectors conforming to IP67 and european safety standards5-19 connectors for standard environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13 dimensional drawings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101 holding brake electrical specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-20 holding brake moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19 main circuit connector pin arrangement- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14 servomotor main circuit connector pin arrangement - - - - - - 5-21 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19 with low-backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-23 with standard backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21 without gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17 SGMGH, SGMSH, and SGMDH servomotor connector configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12 SGMPH servomotors (3000 min-1) derating rate for servomotor with oil seal- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12 dimensional drawings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86 holding brake electrical specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 holding brake moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12 output shafts with oil seals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12 with low-backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15 with standard backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13 without gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11 SGMSH servomotors (3000 min-1) connectors conforming to IP67 and european safety standards5-25 connectors for standard environments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17 dimensional drawings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-148 holding brake electrical specifications- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35 holding brake moment of inertia - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34 main circuit connector pin arrangement- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18 servomotor main circuit connector pin arrangement - - - - - - 5-27 torque-motor speed characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35 with low-backlash gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36 without gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33 shaft end specifications for SGMGH, SGMSH and SGMDH servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-167 shield box- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-24 SIGN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 single-turn data for absolute encoder- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12 small-capacity series SGMCS servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41 soft start - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43 soft start time setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 software version - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
Index-4
Index
software version display (Fn012) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17 S-ON - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 specifications and dimensional drawings of servomotor main circuit cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 cables for SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors with brakes - - - 5-3 cables for SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors without brakes- 5-3 flexible cables for SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors with brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5 flexible cables for SGMAH and SGMPH servomotors without brakes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4 specifications of built-in regenerative resistor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-32 specifications of single-turn data absolute encoder - - - - - - - - - 10-17 speed coincidence output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-47 speed control range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 speed feed forward- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11 speed feedback compensation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-23 speed limit during torque control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-65 speed loop gain - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14 speed loop integral time constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14 speed reference input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 speed regulation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 speed related parameters when a direct-drive motor is connected- 10-7 S-RDY- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14, 8-79 standard replacement period - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-22 starting time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 stopping time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-13 surge suppressor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-76 surge suppressor for brake power supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-77 surge suppressor for magnetic contactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-76 surge suppressors selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-33 SVON key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 switching gain settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-25 switching the servomotor rotation direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-19
UP key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3 upgraded versions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2 using more than one SERVOPACK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-25
V
variable resistor for speed and torque setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-80 V-CMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 VCT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 vibration class- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49, 3-52 vibration reduction functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4 vibration resistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49, 3-52 vibration/shock resistance- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 VLT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14 voltage regulation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 voltage resistance test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7 V-REF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13
W
WARN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14, 8-78 warning code output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5 warning display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5 warning display and troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-15 warning output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-78 wiring 400-V power supply voltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-28 absolute encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8 DC power supply input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6 incremental encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7 wiring encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7 wiring example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19 wiring for noise control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-19 wiring main circuit power supply connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 wiring precautions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18
T
temperature regulation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 terms gears - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 TGON - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-14, 8-78 through shaft section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48 thrust load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50 torque control tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4 torque function switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19 torque limiting using an analog voltage reference - - - - - - - - - - - 8-72 torque limiting using an external torque limit and analog voltage reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-73 torque reference filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-26 torsion rigidity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-53 T-REF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-13 trial operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4 trial operation for servomotor without load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6 troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2 alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6 malfunction without alarm display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-17
Z
zero clamp function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-43 zero-point search mode (Fn003) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
U
UL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UL standards- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - installation conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - undershooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10 1-10 6-24 9-19
Index-5
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. SIEPS80000015A July 2003 03-07 Date of printing Date of original publication C Printed in Japan
Date of Printing July 2003
Rev. No.
Section
Revised Content First edition Revised and combined the contents of the following manuals: -II Series SGMH/SGDM USERS MANUAL Servo Selection and Data Sheets (Manual No. SIE-S800-32.1) -II Series SGMH/SGDM USERS MANUAL Design and Maintenance (Manual No. SIE-S800-32.2)
Series SGM H/SGDM
USER'S MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan Phone 81-42-962-5696 Fax 81-42-962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A. Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
MOTOMAN INC. HEADQUARTERS

805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A. Phone 1-937-847-6200 Fax 1-937-847-6277
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTD.A.

Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude-Sao Paulo-SP, Brazil Phone 55-11-5071-2552 Fax 55-11-5581-8795 CEP: 04304-000
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH

Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
Motoman Robotics Europe AB

Box 504 S38525 Torsas, Sweden Phone 46-486-48800 Fax 46-486-41410
Motoman Robotec GmbH

Kammerfeldstrae 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany Phone 49-8166-90-100 Fax 49-8166-90-103
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

Kfpa Bldg #1201, 35-4 Youido-dong, Yeongdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-010, Korea Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1805, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 20000, China Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION

4F., No.49 Wu Kong 6 Rd, Wu-Ku Industrial Park, Taipei, Taiwan Phone 886-2-2298-3676 Fax 886-2-2298-3677
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (HK) COMPANY LIMITED

Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong Phone 852-2803-2385 Fax 852-2547-5773
BEIJING OFFICE
Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club, 21 Jianguomenwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China Phone 86-10-6532-1850 Fax 86-10-6532-1851
TAIPEI OFFICE
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONGJI M & E CO., LTD.

27 Hui He Road Shanghai China 200437 Phone 86-21-6553-6060 Fax 86-21-5588-1190
BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing P.R. China Post Code: 100083 Phone 86-10-6233-2782 Fax 86-10-6232-1536
SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.

7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic Technological Investment & Development Area, Beijing 100076, P.R. China Phone 86-10-6788-0551 Fax 86-10-6788-2878
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply. Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements. 2003 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. SIEPS80000015A

Printed in Japan August 2003 03-8 03-4 97-23059, 97-23060, 97-71094

Yaskawa Servo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa Servo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Yaskawa Servo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YASKAWA

Series SGM H/SGDM

MANUAL NO. SIEPS80000015A

About this Manual

Description of Technical Terms

Indication of Reverse Signals

Quick access to your required information

Indicates application examples.

Notes for Safe Operation

Storage and Transportation

Maintenance and Inspection

Note the following to ensure safe application.

1.2 Product Part Names - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4

1.3 Examples of Servo System Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-7

1.4 Applicable Standards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10

1.5 -II Series SGDM SERVOPACK Upgraded Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11

2.2 Selecting Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14

2.3 SERVOPACK Model Designations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15

2.4 -II Series SERVOPACKs and Applicable Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16

2.5 Selecting Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18

2.6 Selecting Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-30

3 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings

3.2 Ratings and Specifications of SGMPH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-11

3.3 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1500min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17

3.4 Ratings and Specifications of SGMGH (1000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26

3.5 Ratings and Specifications of SGMSH (3000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33

3.6 Ratings and Specifications of SGMDH (2000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-39

3.7 Ratings and Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41

3.9 Mechanical Specifications of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50

3.13 Dimensional Drawings of SGMPH Servomotors (3000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-86

3.15 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1500 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-101

3.16 Dimensional Drawings of SGMGH Servomotors (1000 min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-127

3.17 Dimensional Drawings of SGMSH Servomotors (3000min-1)- - - - - - - - - - - - 3-148

3.18 Dimensional Drawings of SGMDH Servomotors (2000min-1) - - - - - - - - - - - 3-159

3.19 Dimensional Drawings of SGMCS Servomotors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-161

4 SERVOPACK Specifications and Dimensional Drawings

4.8 Dimensional Drawings of Rack-mounted SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25

4.9 Dimensional Drawings of Duct-ventilated SERVOPACK Model - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-31

5 Specifications and Dimensional Drawings of Cables and Peripheral Devices

5.2 Servomotor Main Circuit Wire Size and Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8

5.3 SERVOPACK Main Circuit Wire Size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-38

5.4 Encoder Cables for CN2 Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40

5.5 Connectors and Cables for Encoder Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48

5.8 Peripheral Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-57

6.2 Wiring Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7

6.3 Examples of I/O Signal Connections- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-9

6.4 Others - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-18

6.5 Connecting Regenerative Resistors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31

7 Digital Operator/Panel Operator

7.2 Operation in Utility Function Mode (Fn) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8

7.3 Operation in Parameter Setting Mode (Pn)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18

7.4 Operation in Monitor Mode (Un) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27

8.4 Absolute Encoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27

8.5 Operating Using Speed Control with Analog Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-38

8.6 Operating Using Position Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-48

8.7 Operating Using Torque Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61

8.9 Limiting Torque- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-69

8.10 Control Mode Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-75

8.11 Other Output Signals- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-77

9.2 Online Autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5